iad

hea

sereentes

aes

“Te es

Bas 4 a

P+.

eyre~ e

atetee teres

rds O Mesa Ser

a thoatae

. Se* Ps

ceretws

‘et % ome :

at reas i *

aorer a -—~ Pz

z5t ; : “4 , - ; ; ; J ¥ waeren

sees se ss ’ : Spohn A : cf .

7 A -

erates

eis :

net

Gut

+ rt

as: ;

i262

rie fe Lasere9

£ Fo Pe,

eT Rew he

wien oes

* we se ?.

io Psa pe I

othe Res

ave

o4,

sf |

~a°S!

Pee...

‘ree

°@ —«-*

tetata

‘. :

“d-+

Wass

ats @

hes

ro)

Ber Sr)

™

bier

Sty ith

Fate

dns

Rete!

alata

Pet 34

S358

ae.

‘a=

jae a-e-8

rer)

tt!

’ Choe “— *. &

oot]

an,

See “1

Arde

‘*-

S-e * -4-

Per

tae)

“

sae

. *

ier Set

Witten

or see

he @

- &-e-

atu ee

os5e

ase

Sazeren ae

"«

was

4-4-4

«=

j-eee

bP)

cate:

eke deem Guo ad

‘ yy us ‘=

Ct ae Bat at ab

-@-«

Pte .

ante

ep ere

ere bra}

mes

Sena

~S.8 Gs

gel

“a

Py ime : ' e's! C6 See ar ees

oetere, oe ’ ; ees

WP s ;

be)

eo 4-478 ©

rt ea

“A”

)

4% &- 6 @ 8

+-Ge%=%

2 95829;

o-+ &

— o-oo

°.% ee @

4-a 4

» °-@ ¥*

9-9 * ee * o- 28

”

- tom th

-* RG m2

ae ee

* 9-8 9 4 4—-t%

a, Tie OO

A ee eet)

«4 a- ee

7h)

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

EDITED BY

THE SECRETARIES.

VOL. XXVII.

Nos. I. tro V.—1858.

BELLO Oar

“ft will flourish, if naturalists, chemists, antiquaries, philologers, and men of

science in different parts of Asia, wil! commit their observations to writing, and send

them to the Asiatic Society at Calcutta. It will languish if such communicaticns

shail be long intermitted; and it will die away, if they shall entirely cease.”—

' Sin WM. Jones.

As .%

A,° TR

SAC ;

Ove ;

df T \ Ba

cable BR:

PRINTED BY C. B. LEWIS, BAPTIST MISSION PRESS,

1859,

Abi a ; i pUReRo 4 Aus a) Pa) |

a) B te A | ae ie - ‘ : ahae :

Aral / or Kwa: JOE kinetic ate eg ate wir i.

oy 1 y ra qe 4 4 4 oe , = ad , 5s es 2 “em a tn

pes Stain at es

ia “Hin Mt

Mie ie i ceca fo

; a 7" :

nh et we a ~ pe | i i Were

= . F . . \ P ’

Wg + f ad - ‘a «ff ”

frre ee

# ‘toe AES

ibaa in

at +]

p Rah ye piu pone Ke lai ; havin Ma Tt

." "y) Yeees' ao - x iy

ny hy ‘Nae Aad .

eM a

CONTENTS.

Bhaskara’s Knowledge of the Differential Caleulus.—By Bapu

DewASrasrR, ks. eS ie ae parece :

Buddhism and Odinism, their atitude’ illustrated ae Berd ote

from Professor Holmboe’s srernote on les Traces de Bud-

dhisme en Norwége.—By Babu Rasenprarav MirTtTRA,..

Coins, Catalogue of the, in the Cabinet of the late Col. Stacey,

with the estimated prices attached.—By lH. Tomas, Esq.

Collections of, lost during the rebellion.—By Groner

H. Freezine, Esq. B.C. S. nm

Comparative Vocabulary of the eee Tribes of 1 Mahal. via le

eeror phe ahing Prilosec ie at ee ae as oe

firrata: ‘toy dels tr ee

Errata, to articles on, in “Le XXVI, Be wieres lata

Cyclone (account of a) in the Andaman Sea on ae 9th and

10th April, 1858.—By G. Von Liezie, M.D... i

Edicts (two) bestowing land, recorded on Plates of Copper.—

By Frirz-Epwarp Hatt, A. M. Esq. ......

Hypsometrical Measurements by means of the ora and

the Boiling-point Thermometer.— By James Buragss, Esq.

Indian Are of Meridian, (the great) and the Figure of the

EKarth.—By the Venerable Ancapracon Pratt, M. A.

Tnseriptions, Public, at Lahore. —By Henry Corr, Esq.

Karen Language—Notes on the.-—By the Rev. Francis Mason,

* At the end of the volume,

Page

213

251

169

393

| *

323

AW 4

337

201

308

129

1V Contents.

Page

Memoir (Twenty-fifth) on the Law of Storms in India, being

the Hon’ble Company’s Steamer Pluto’s Cyclone in the

Gulf of Martaban, 28rd and 24th, April, 1854.—By Hrnry

PiIppINneTON, Esqeuacn.'+ <- - By et a

Meteorological Cicer eee Bee caots of a, con oa

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Caleutta.—By Babu

Rapwanary Sickpar, for the month of July, 1857, .... — xlix.

In the months of August, September, October, November

aiid Dee. VSG Ti oe te vce selec om ae 'slae 2 ee RRO Te

Mole, Himalaya, Talpha Minch Dineen of a new species

of.—-By B: Hy, Hopeson, Msg. j- ck. +... 99'> 2 <oreeeeeeeneemE

Parasnath Hill—diseussion of some Meteorological Observations

made ion——By Dr..G. Von LTAnpid,, 3:2... <s pe eee 1

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

for the months of November, December, January

and February, 1857-58, doi oie hel Baie tae

— for the month of Marche 1858,. menae. ginit 126

——— -—— for the months of May, July a sien 1858, 261

for the months of September, October and Se

vember, 1858, BB ee Wise stieia Seka wscays Sapinw Sab cepa ah as Saee Le

Temperature of the ans of the Qosine Ragisiee of, from

the Hooghly to the Thames.—By A. Campzetn, Ksq.M.D. 170

Shells of India, Sand and fresh-water, Notes on the distri-

bution of some of the—Part. Il1—lIhy W. TuHeopanp,

Kisq. Jiutir. » 22 313

Vocabulary, cae eon “of ie Fiedlicis, Tribes of plas ae

B. H. Hopason, Esq.—Grammar of the Bahing 'Iribe,.. 893

Wilson’s Sanskrit Dictionary extended and improved by Dr.

Goldstiicker, A few remarks on the first Fasciculus of,

sy Pirz-Epwanp Hau, MM. &..4...65)-bexeece eee eed BOL

———-

eee

INDEX TO NAMES OF CONTRIBUTORS.

Bapu Deva Shastri, Professor of Mathematics and Astronomy

in the Government Sanskrit College, Benares—Bhaskara’s

Knowledge of the Differential Calculus, ...........0.. 213

Burgess, Jaines, Hsq., On Hypsometrical Measurements by

Contents.

means of the Barometer and the Wie ce Thermo-

NECETS aioe...) > « :

Campbell, A. Esq. M. an fi Tee ie of Ns Calbemnnee of

the Surface of the ee from the Hooghly to the Thames,

Cope, Henry, Esq. Public Inscriptions at Lahore,

Freeling, G. H. Esq. B. C. S., Coin Collections lost satis the

Rebellion,.

Hall, Fitz-E Se Bia. M. oa or tie Edicts Beane Tang

merorded. on plates of copper; vais. sw. ss o6 ws ee eve ee 3 es

A few pee on the oad i Misebliis

of Professor Wilson’s Sanskrit Dictionary, “as extended

and improved” by Dr. Goldstiicker, .. aia

Hodgson, B. H. Esq., Description of a new species ae aeieee

layan Mole, Talpha Macrura, . PA) RE Soi wae

Riad ar amines of the Broken

Tribes of Nepal.—Grammar of the Bahing Tribe, ......

Liebig, Dr. G. Von, Discussion of some Meteorological Ob-

servations made at Parasnath Hull,

Account of a Cyelone in the hilbicion

Sea, on the 9th and 10th April, 1858, 8

Mason, The Rev. Francis, D. D., Notes of di oe rine

guage, ee Uli gnats

Piddington, Henry, abd ‘3 cneaaes nt pia ere Courts.—

Twenty-fifth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India, being

the Hon’ble Company’s Steamer Pluto’s Cyclone in the

Gulf of Martaban, 23rd and 24th April, 1854,. ,

Pratt, the Venerable Archdeacon, M. A., The Great citi iro

of Meridian and the Figure of the Tash NE Ie cst Bae

Rajendralal Mittra, Babu, Buddhism and Odinism, their Simi-

litude; illustrated by extracts from Professor Holmboe’s

Memoir on the “Traces de Buddhisme en Norwege,”’ !

Theobald, W. Esq. Junr., Notes on the distribution of some of

the Jand and fresh-water shelis of India, Part II... .. 2...

Thomas, E. Esq., late of the B. C.S., Catalogue of the Coins

in the Cabinet of the late Col. Stacey, with the estimated

prices attached,

aD |

' eh) er a . ‘

; pen tf Barat bot

aad | r hing iat

ee Hee : oneal, Ph pata

halal i uf it

ay ¢ Fy 7

~~ i ri Wy ee

ut ar,

, RAL ‘

CO ea ee

wai Sir Ge Os oA ue ah Uy ieee

iA | pie

eh Ue

—y

. p meas

7 iF Se wel ie

£ —

bag oe

” a' { <*

we Meth Ky Oe UM sad

her ee mo upinget Ret) we 4

ee es, ba iA ied Rip itt a ys hohe

‘ . » : / n

? wef ; 52% hea igi» im Ad

JOURNAL

OF THE

Pel A LIC SOO LE TY.

APP PLAS DDL ISPS IIOP PPS SPS LIS ISIS SLI INI II IID PP

No. I. 1858.

LDAP PPD PIP DI LPS SLID I PDI IS SILI INI NS SANS API NI NI INA NII NENI NA NII

Discussion of some Meteorological Observations made on

Parisnath Hill, by Dr. G. von Lizzie.

The following discussion of a few Meteorological observations

made on the Parisnath Hill in 1856, 1 submit to the Society less

because they contain any new facts, than with a view of drawing

attention to the peculiar advantages offered in India for the investi-

gation of meteorological questions by the great regularity of all

atmospheric changes. A few days observations in this country

will suffice to trace laws, the exhibition of which would, in Europe,

require months and years of continued observation.

I would particularly wish to exhibit the use of conveniently situ-

ated stations, in different elevations, one above the other, as cal-

culated to study the changes affecting the whole of the atmospheric

strata between them.

Parisnath hill is situated nearly 200 miles to the North West of

Calcutta, close to the Trunk road. The hilly country begins about

120 miles from Calcutta, near Raneegunge, and the general level,

proceeding to the North West, is gradually raised. When the

trunk road reaches the base of Parisnath hill, its level is about 900

feet above that of Calcutta. The hills between Raneegunge and

Parisnath are not continuously connected with each other, they

form no chain, but partake more of the character of isolated eleva-

tions, leaving tracts of open and undulating country between

them.

No. XCII.—New Series, Vou. XXVII. B

2 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. (No. 1.

Travelling to the North West, the hill is on the right of the

Trunk road. Its crest runs from East and a few degrees South to

the West and a few degrees North. Its highest points are at both

ends, the first and higher one on the western, the second and lower

one on the eastern termination; the distance between them is about

a mile and a half. Midway and to the South of a straight line

drawn between them is a third summit lower than either of the others,

but differing very little from the second. This is a trigonometrical

station, and its height, as taken from the revised calculations of the

Records of the Calcutta longitudinal series is 4477.73 feet above the

sea, or 4459.62 feet above the level of Calcutta. These three sum-

mits are connected by a slightly undulating ridge, the crest of the

hill, on both sides of which the ground immediately begins to slope

downwards, leaving only a narrow strip of ground to walk upon.—

Immediately below the eastern or second summit, descending about

430 feet on the southern slope, stands, on a partly artificial base a

small Jain temple, in the open verandah of which most of the baro-

metrical observations were made. It is protected towards the North

by the side of the hill, which is very steep and towards the Hast by

a spur branching off from the summit above. Towards the South

and the South West the view is open, but towards the West it is

hemmed in by protruding masses thrown out from the centre of

the hill.

Observations. The observations were made on the Ist, 2nd, 3rd

and 4th of April, 1856. On the 4th I left the hill, and the last

two observations on that day were made in the travellers Bungalow

at Topchancee, a village near the foot of the hill.

On the hill during the first three days the sky was cloudless,

with the exception of a few occasional stratus-clouds in the South

West, and the atmosphere, in the middle of the day was hazy and

not very transparent. The wind on the summit was a breeze from

the North West. On the morning of the 4th, white clouds from the

South were travelling northward; about midday they became very

dense and formed a good protection against the sun.

In Caleutta, from the 1st to the 3rd, the sky was clear and the

wind from the South and South West. On the 4th, the southerly

breeze was stronger than on the preceding days, and during the

day the aspect of the sky was cloudy.

1858.] Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 3

It appears that from the 1st to the 3rd, the southerly wind,

which was at first only observed at Calcutta, had, gradually pro-

gressing, replaced the North Westerly breeze at Parisnath, the

change having been completed on the 4th.

The barometer used on the hill was a mountain barometer by

Adie, suspended in a tripod, which had been compared with the

standard barometer of the Calcutta Observatory ; before each read-

ing, the surface of the mercury in the cistern had to be adjusted to

the scale. All observations, with the exception of those on the

Summits, were taken in the open verandah of the temple. ‘The in-

strument, to avoid the sun, had to be carried from one part of the

verandah to the other, several times during the day.

The thermometers were centigrade; they had not been compared

with the standard of the observatory, but with another reliable

standard. The temperature of the air was measured in the shade

of a small tree on the North side of the temple, between it and the

hill side, a place, which was little accessible to the direct rays of

the sun, but where the air circulated freely.

A few observations with the wet bulb thermometer were made on

the 2nd and 3rd April.

The Calcutta observations have been obtained through the kind

permission of Major Thuillier from the Register of the Observatory,

where observations are taken every hour.

The following table gives the readings of the barometer and

thermometer on the hill, and those at the corresponding hours

at Calcutta. The barometrical readings of both places are correct-

ed for temperature and those of the hill also for the standard baro-

meter of the Observatory. The thermometrical readings are also

corrected.

bho

4 Meteorolagical Observations on Parisnath Hill. —[No. 1. |

L—Tuable of 4

aan eae ee en Se

Ist April. 2nd April.

ae ee eee Pe

Time.| Temple. cen Calcutta. Time.| Temple. Calcutta.

h. m.| Bar. |Ther.| Bar. |Ther.| Bar. |Ther. h. m.| Bar. |Ther.| Bar.

25.999*| 22.5*| 25.611) 21.4 |29.892*| 27.2*

26.009*| 22.6* 29.900 | 27.7

26.016 | 22.9 29.903* | 28.1*

26.032 | 23.1 29.913 |29.1 | 9

26.042 | 23.8 29. 915*|30.0*| ,, 15 | 25.992 | 23.9 29.880 | 30.1}

26.044 | 24.5 29,918 |30.9 |10

6 | 25,963 |21.6 29.850 | 25.7

25.980 | 21.9 29.875 | 26.0 22.3 25.7 |}

, 15 | 26.002 | 24.8 |29.877 | 31.8}

11 | 26.040 | 25.8 29.902 | 32.1 |

Noon | 26.021 | 27.2 29.880 | 34.0 |

1 | 26.006 | 28.1 99.842 | 34.5 ]

2 |25.973 | 29.1 29.806 | 35.6 :

3 |25.951 | 28.0 29 787 | 36.1 :

4 |25.928 |27.3* 99.772 | 36.1 | 4 |

oe he Ne 29.765*| 35.5*| ,, 55 |25.885 | 27.1 |29.716*| 35.6%

** 136 @#! 95.553/25.4 129.762 135.2 | 5 — |25.884*] 27.0*) 29.715 | 35.5)

». 25 [25.942 | 26.3 99.762*) 34.4% 1 :

6 |25.957 | 25.0 99 763 |33.1 16 (25.885 | 25.7 129.716 | 33.3

7 «124.8% 99.779 | 31.3

8 |25.964 | 246 29.796 | 30.0

Interpolation.— All observations in the table marked with a star, |

are interpolated. This was done graphically on paper, lithographed |

for the purpose. A horizontal and a vertical system of straight

lines, crossing each other, formed a network of accurately drawn

minute squares, each of one millimetre side. By means of this net-

work the barometric curve could be designed on any convenient

scale, and where the interval of time between two observed points

was not greater than one or two hours, a straight line, connecting

1858. | Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hull, 5

Observations.

3rd April. 4th April.

Highest

Summit Calcutta. Temple. Calcutta.

a ee ESS a

6 Bi oe me .. |25.894| 19.3 | 29.778 | 27.2

43 30 a a -- es =| 25.905] 20.8 | 29.786*| 27.3*

x " * .. | 25.909) 20.9 , 29.795 | 27.4

, 40 a, " as . Aw blebs 5 gt

8 25.944 | 22.6 29.816 | 28.7 | 25.998] 21.6 | 29.811 | 28.5

9 25.916 | 24.0 29.837 | 30.1 | 25.952/ 25.1 | 29.831 | 29.7

. 30 of ’ ss +

10 95.972*| 25.9% 29.849 | 31.7

» 10) 25.971 | 26.2 29.847*| 31.9%

ll 25.968*| 27.0* 29.836 | 33.2

Noon | 25.960*| 28.0*| 25.508) 25.5 | 29.816 | 33.9

l 25.935*| 29.0* 29.781 | 35.0 Top chancee. |

2 25.903 | 30.0 29.740 | 36.1 | 28.817] 35.0 | 29.733 | 34.1

3 25.872 | 29.8 29.712 | 36.3 |28.794| 34.6 [29.713 | 33.9

4 25.856 | 29.0 29.701 | 36.0

5» 40 My ae ‘=: ia

5 : 95.849 | 28.1 29.691 | 34.7

6 25.852 | 26.6 29.698 | 32.3

7 25.860*| 26.2* 29.705 | 31.0

8 25.872*) 25.7* 29.726 | 29.5

», 30 | 25.885 | 25.5% 29.740*| 29.1%

9 25.893 | 25.2 29.754 | 28.7

,», 30 | 25.903 | 25.2 29 .762*! 28.6%

10 25.907 | 25.3 29.770 | 28.5

————_——_—__..

them, gave the reading of the intermediate smaller divisions of time.

Where the interval was greater, a knowledge of the shape of the

curve at the particular time of the day was employed in drawing

the connecting piece of the curve. This method of interpolation

could only be followed with a sufficient approach to correctness,

where the curve did not deviate much from a straight line. The

only instance of the interpolation of a larger interval was that of

the hours 11, noon and 1 on the 3rd, and it will be seen further on,

6 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. [No. 1.

that the interpolated values could not have differed from the real

ones more than the unavoidable smaller errors of observation might

have amounted to.

The temperatures were interpolated in a similar manner.

The curves Fig. 1 and 2 in the plate graphically represent the

hourly changes of the barometer, the first at Calcutta where the

observations were complete for the 24 hours, and the second on

Parisnath hill.

In constructing the curve of the hill, the hours after 4 P. mM. on

the 1st have not been included. Their readings are indicated by

dots in the figure. The general regularity of all other parts of the

curve in themselves as well as with reference to the Calcutta curve,

and the absence of disturbing influences in the atmosphere at the

time, justify a conclusion that the observations of the hours in ques-

tion should not have formed an exception to that regularity.

Taking into consideration some other external circumstances, accom-

panying these observations, which could have contributed to make

them uncertain, and no data being available for correcting them,

they were rejected. Their evidence goes only so far with certainty

as to show the turning of the curve in the evening between 4 and 5

p.M. The observations of the 2nd April could also be used only

for general conclusions. The first, at 9h. 15 m. a. Mm. is evidently

erroneous, as will be seen further on, from the curve of real mean

temperatures.

The observations on Parisnath hill were made by Calcutta time.

The difference in Longitude between Calcutta and Parisnath is 2°

29' 23” which would correspond to between 9 and 10 minutes time.

This difference is so small that it would produce no sensible effect

upon the barometrical hours, and its influence may therefore be

neglected in comparing the observations at both places with each

other.

I shall now enter upon a closer examination of the observations

made on the Ist, 38rd and 4th April, omitting those of the 2nd and

also the barometric readings of the hours after 4 Pp. mM. on the Ist,

retaining however the temperatures of these hours.

Barometric Curves.—Vhe barometric readings for the full hours

are given in the following table:—

Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill.

1858.]

“ey No[Vg Log poyeod.ia4

-ul ATISva SVM pus TI] 943

UO pasddosqo udeq pey AMoy

sa 2 Ol “1 OL + Pe

-U1v}qo Surpvos oy} Aq poid

-n200 SABAK[e ST pig 94} UO

‘W°V Q] JO anoy ot} oz1s0d

-do sovjd otf} Soyqe} SUTMOT

SF re Oe, Eee lee

EE ee

628°E | 1€8'6S | G96'Sz

€88'¢€ | 11866 | 866'Sc

988°€ | ¢62'°66 | 606°96

P8s's | BL2°6% | F68'SZ

Hig | ewoey) opdmoay, -

‘Tudy tip

€98'¢ OLL°66 L06°SG

198'€ PSL°6S €68°SS

PS8's 962°63 | *GL8°SG

crs'¢ GOL66. | x098°9G

OF8'§S 869°66 698 °SS

GPh8'S 169 66 6F8'°SS

CPSs 10266 998°96

Or8'S | GIL'6S GL8°SS

Lgs's OFZ 66 | .€06'S6

OFr8'e 18266 |*9E6°SS

998 ¢ 91866 |*096°9G

898'¢ 9€8'6G |\*x896°96

9/8'E | xxZP8'6G 126°SG

9/8 ¢ LE8°66 196° 96

6L8'§ 918 66 DP6'SG

ee G831'66 ee

ve 12L°66 Ss

"HIq | ‘eyqnoeg | tojdmay,

yudy pg

rue

£68 66

€18°66

961 °66

6LL°66

€9L°66

G9L'6S

GLL'66

18166

908°66

GV8'66

08866

G06 66

816°66

&16'66

(06°66

G 18°63

08°66

THdy 4s|

"SIANSSIAT IVA JIWOMD hy wnoy]T — TI F19%L

a |

ON Fis oOreoao

UOONT

C by OO ©

[=a

‘eyqno[ey| ‘o[dumay, | ‘ourty,

The shape of the curve of one day is like that of the

The most striking feature of the barometrical curves is their great

regularity.

tead of hay

The pressure is falling without interruption at both stations on

ceptible, as if we had before us the means of a month ora year,

the 1st, 2nd and 8rd April.

ins

next, and the transition from hour to hour is as gradual and imper-

the observations of only a single day.

ing

The following are the mean pressures

Those

on each day at Calcutta and on the 1st and 8rd on the hill.

at Calcutta were taken from the hourly observations of the Observa-

tory, those on the hill were derived by the combination of hours’

8 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. [No. 1.

SL EY hg a Be EE ee givek. for eee

tolerably good approximation to the mean.*

Mean daily pressure. Ist. 2d. 3d. 4th.

Calcuttaj, .....c.i) vies oP Pee oaOe y 20.789 129.758» 4/29 Fae

Hall, sc SoePigataeen eos yee — 25.909 —

Difference, ...... 3.851 3.849

The rate of falling was about the same at both stations. This

diminution of the pressure was doubtless connected with the

change in the wind during the same period, the current from the

South or South-west displacing the North-westerly breeze.

It is seen from the table or the figures that the turning points of

both curves during the day fall within admissible small limits, upon

the same hours, and we may infer from the direction of the curve

on the hill, in such places, where it is interrupted, that the maxima

and minima during the night would have shown the same coinci-

dence, had they been observed. The curve of the hill differs in so

far from the Calcutta curve, as it is flatter, the extent of its daily

variation being smaller. In the figure, the parts of the curve

between the hours at which the observations had been interrupted,

have been filled up with dotted lines for no other purpose, than

better to define the position of such parts as had been observed. The

readings substituted for the unobserved hours and also the manner

in which they have been obtained, are given in the appendix.

The great regularity of the barometrical curves and the coinci-

dence of their turning points, promising an equal regularity in all

other atmospheric changes during the same period, has encouraged

me to make the attempt to complete such data as were wanting

in the small number of observations at my disposal, with a view of

obtaining a complete picture of the atmospheric processes on the 1st

and 3rd of April. Obliged as I have been in doing so, to have

recourse once or twice to more or less conjectural estimations, the

* The means derived by this combination are generally about 0.006 inches too

low. For the month of April, 1856, it differs — 0.004.

The means of the four days from the 1st to 4th April, derived by the combina-

tion for Calcutta, are

Mean daily pressure. Ist. 2nd. ord. 4th.

CGN Eg od sb ninsini dds sien ded deve 29.830 29.793 29.759 29.751

Difference, from real daily mean, 0.000 -+0.004 -+0.001 —0.008

hich

in W

100.

ts with

y liable to deviat

im.

ht have been equall

f~)

Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill.

s mi

Temperature.—The following table contains the hourly tempera-

result has proved that they did not exceed the |

direet observation

1858.]

"SAOY

It [owe | oa | roe | vse | eve | cs | 07g roe | 3 Ele=| Z's L‘0¢ FZ | PB JO

= Uva,

5, 6°96. |-2's Ges | 8°92 G96 | Sh | GSS |xxs'hS | OL

<{ 69% | GE 18% SSS e 6 8% "* © eG

a 916° |=8'¢ G66 | «LSS ele | ¥¢ 00S 9°73 | 8

= 8S o8k. EO l= Gog O'83 | $'9 e1¢ “| «8'be |Z

2 yee | Lg | Sse 996 | O66 | T'8 Les 0¢e | 9

a ete | 99 Lbs 1°82 60s | 9°8 | 6 GG= | S9'9G2 ice

‘ eze | od 098 | 066 LAGS <8'8 1'9¢ | #823 |

9 = oes | gg S98 | 866 O1Ge. | -21°8 Vo 2 | \B0'es= ire

£S eee ee ee eee tel oO ge | 00g eee | ¢9 9°g¢ 1'6G: (86

i SSoU Toy Par uoeo eta ozs | 09 OO: = 406G—| _ S1e= | =F 9 o'Pe 1'83. |-1

= OG: oO 2. oe dee0e 6.06 | 0G |" 1ges| ee eee (eit

88s | g'¢ Lie | 46°92 Lie | 9 | 608 GhS | OL

a 09 /69| 8s | 916 r9e: [19 L8G | 9% 93° | 14 41% | 9% | 8

= 196/99] F226 6°06 "s ie 19% Ger | Ah |= MSE Ee Ta FZ

& G8 |64| B12 | EOL 96S) = 2% i 0°96 “lenE1Z 963 | UF LGZ 916 | 9

r peed |

E |

eo Ade EE | ‘Il ‘T 6 a ae ea i I SAT RHEE ist cdt Q

o |

s ee

2 ‘[udy Wp Tudy pag qudy 4s |

oie

5 ‘saungouadmay, paweasqgQ— JIT 219°,

10 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. [No.1.

The maximum heat at both stations is a little higher on the 8rd

than on the lst ; the hours of the maximum are 2 P. m. on the hill

and 3 Pp. M. at Calcutta.

The mean temperature from all ohservations of the 24 hours at

Calcutta is for the lst 80°.1, and for the 8rd 30°.4. With these the

Viva. + Xa. + TV. p. +X. p.,

which gives very good means for many parts of India, closely agree ;

they are 30°.3 for the 1st, and 30°.5 for the 8rd April. In employing

this combination forthe hill, where the observations extend over

only a part of the 24 hours, the temperatures for 10 P. M. on the

1st and for6 a.m. on the 3rd, had to be estimated by analogy.

This is certainly a very imperfect method, but it may be admitted

values derived by the combination

in the present case, as the general state of the atmosphere was

the same on both days ; and the limits are so well defined, that the

error can hardly amount to more than about half a degree, which

divided by 4 becomes still more diminished. The estimated tem-

peratures are put down opposite these hours in the table. The

daily means derived in this manner for the hill are on the 1st 24°.4

and on the 8rd 25°.4.

The hour in the morning of which the temperature approaches

nearest to the mean of the whole day falls between 9 and 10 a. .

at Calcutta, and at 10 a. mw. on the hill.

The differences between the hourly temperatures at Calcutta and

the hill on the Ist and 8rd (Cols. III.) are smallest in the morning

and evening and increase towards 4 in the afternoon, when they

reach their maximum on both days: 8°.8 on the 1st and 7° on the

8rd. The variation during the night has not been observed. On both

these days the variation progresses with great regularity towards

the maximum, but on the 4th it begins less regular, owing, doubt-

Jess to the formation of clouds on that day.*

Column LV. in the table gives the hourly means, computed from

the observations at both stations ; their curve is represented in fig.

* T have reason to suspect that the temperature observed on the hill at 9 on

the 4th is too high. It was taken after the thermometer had been removed from

the sheltered spot described above, previous to its being packed up for leaving

the hill.

1858. | Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 11

3. Here, the maximum on the 3rd is also a little higher than on the

Ist; it occurs at 2 P. M. on the 1st; while on the 3rd the tempera-

ture at 3 is the same as at 2 P. M.

Taking the values obtained for the means of the whole day at

each station, 30°.1 and 24°.4 on the 1st, and 30°.4 and 25°.4 on the

3rd, the daily mean temperatures for the air between the stations

will be 279.8 for the 1st, and 27°.9 for the 3rd, showing a differ-

Vi. a. + X.a.+ IV. p. + X. p.

applied to the hourly means, will give very nearly the same results,

ence of 0°.6. The combination

viz., 27°.6 and 27°.9. The temperature at 93 a. M. approaches

nearest to the mean temperature of the 24 hours on both days.

The hourly means, derived from the observations at both stations

are supposed to represent the mean temperatures of the stratum of

air extending between the two stations, and they enter as such into

the calculation of the height. It is well known that they have not,

in reality, that signification, and to distinguish them from the real

mean temperatures, I shall speak of them, in the following pages, as

the mean temperatures of the stations.

Height.—The height of the temple and the summits was calculated

by Gauss’s formula, with the corrections for the decrease of gravity

by latitude and elevation. The results in English feet, are arranged

in the following table by the hours.

12 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. (No. 1.

| s ne

— s e .

2 Tans — 3 ae

Be PSS 8 3 gs

& r,

a | — 4 es ey he

GN Sy es

ei Ee FI ie

=| 2 <5

Slew flog : : = ‘oO

a [Se (“B'S s O10 see i o 2

SISH| Baoan lous © —5

= o & —a~ ato) SSE > a .

S al Be he A am = 2 o

oO Dp mm NS | A xp 2 tk) 2 Ss

3 — rp. = p= —ateie e) OMe!

6 A a) tm a=

3 elas | é SNe 7: ae

as) Ve oS ai, Pats ss ss 2 o

oe lo ig oO 5

oe ne ae Ge ae 5S

“SS ES Je a 10 =e Pas "on &

S eta | an oa OOD se aed

sl 22 ae

Wiklss fice = O'S a) :

eles bee ea! earl ive fe = oe

oe |2lo & BS as | oO : He =

iS) = a> N an! =

Sie oe | ae ee eS ocd = =

S$ lipa2)]leass] aac As ee

SS W — rt. = os oS

&S =

se o Dy ky P.O SH

eS ai A 1 Sm mw

= <q a

| 5 a4 Leoae

—

i D ~ tS SH OS

iN eH =

by o = *

% = = oe es ee ee

SS > =) e ROO .Ol1MDW0O HM TPOOIMOAA

'S 3 << 2 ATR IDA OHKH A ARO rH SH

& = | Ooo “OSS AHSSSoSaaeae

3 Lae) Sw ios DS i ES DS I ES iS i i

= ae)

= =

= = 1S CIRO OS SSN, Ss a

2 = AAARYTAMMIATO .4 iD...

= <4 (SEN MAU ey po OR eee oper Ae)” Aras A

'o) phi SEeacecoscese coe” S te

77) a a i LS i i oS BS a wt ~~

ro) =

| COMODO A GMAAMTOONRDAO

aie Sea

ES Z

The resulting height becomes greater as the day advances and

reaches its maximum at 3 and 4 p.M., about which time the difference

between the temperatures of the two stations is also greatest.

It decreases towards evening and is smallest about the time of the

lowest observed temperature at 6 a. mM. It is well known that

the cause of this variation lies in the difficulty of obtaining at all

hours the real value of the mean temperatures of the column or

stratum of air between the two stations.

A solid body and generally the solid surface of the ground, cools

and heats quicker than the air in contact with it. In other words,

it becomes hotter and colder in the same space of time, if exposed

to the same heating and cooling influences—the sun during the day

or a clear sky at night. This does not necessarily affect the mean

1858.] Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hull. 13

temperature for a period of 24 hours, which might be the same for

the air and the ground.

As the atmosphere receives the greater part of its heat not directly

from the rays of the sun, but indirectly, from the surface of the

ground, the change of the hourly temperatures of the air will follow

the extremes of the ground more closely when it is in immediate

contact with it, than when further removed from the surface.

The temperatures observed at each station as well as the hourly

means derived from both, will therefore show a greater daily and

hourly variation, than those of the column or stratum of air between

them would, if they could be observed. It is only in the means of

the whole of the 24 hours, where the extremes of hot and cold com-

pensate each other, that the mean temperatures of the stations can

be supposed to agree with the real mean temperatures of the air.

If we assume the mean temperature of the whole day, as taken

from the hourly observations at both stations to be the same, or

nearly the same, as that which would be obtained from the real

hourly mean temperatures of the whole mass of air between them, then

the curve of the hourly means of the stations will, in consequence

of its greater variation, rise higher above the line of the common

mean temperature during the day and sink deeper below it during

the night, than the curve of the real hourly mean temperatures.

These curves must cross each other twice during the 24 hours,

once in the morning, and once in the evening. At the moment of

crossing the temperature of both is the same, andif the tempera-

tures and the pressures be then observed, the resulting height must

be the true one.

To obtain from the results in the table the true height of the

temple, it will be necessary to find in the curve of the hourly mean

temperatures of the stations, the hours of which the temperature

will coincide with the real mean temperature of the column of air

between the stations.

It is at once apparent that this hour cannot be far distant from

the hour which will show the mean temperature of the 24 hours, in

the present case about 9} a. M.

The crossing will take place after 93, if the curve of real mean

temperatures should reach its daily mean, which I have assumed to

14 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. [No. 1.

be the same or nearly the same, as that of the stations, earlier than

the curve of the stations. If later it will take place before 92.

Considering (Fig. 8,) the rapid ascent of the mean temperature

of the stations from 6 a. M. to 2 P. M.—it rises in 8 hours to the

same height, from which it takes 16 hours to descend again—and the

necessarily retarded progress of the real mean temperature of the

stratum of air from its lowest point to its highest, it becomes extremely

improbable, that the latter, although its starting point at 6 a. M. isa

little above that of the former, should at 94, after only 3 hours, have

reached a higher point than the temperature of the stations.

If I therefore take 10 a. m. as the extreme limit in the direction

of the rising temperature, this will probably be a little higher than

would be strictly required. It now remains to find the limit on the

side of the lowest temperature. 6 a. m. being the hour of the

minimum of the day, is out of the question. The temperature at

7 A. M. having risen comparatively little above that at 6, is probably

too low, but to make up for the transgression on the other side, I

will fix upon 7 as the lower limit.* Among the results included

between the hours of 7 and 10, the true height must be found.

To be certain, I have taken the mean between the heights at 7, 8,

9 and 10 on the Ist, 38rd and 4th, a combination, in which the higher

and lower values would partly compensate each other. The observa-

tions were complete for these hours on the Ist April. On the 8rd,

the hour of 7 and on the 4th the hour of 10 had not been observed,

For each of these the mean of the values at the same hour on the

two other days was taken instead.

The resulting height is 4039.3 feet.

I have stated that the trigonometrical station, which is very little

lower than the second summit, directly above the temple, was

4459.62 feet above the level of Calcutta, by the Records of the

Longitudinal Series. The second summit is, by an observation

taken at 7 h.40 m. 4. M. on the 1st April, 429.4 feet higher than

the temple, a result, which is probably a little too low. This added

to the computed height of the temple, 4039.3 feet, would make the

* In Europe the best time for taking heights barometrically is between 8 and 9

A. M.

1858.| Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 15

second summit 4468.7 feet above Calcutta, or 9 feet higher than the

trigonometrical station. This can hardly differ much more than

about 10 feet from the real height.

Real Mean Temperatures.*—The real hourly mean temperatures

of the stratum of air between the two stations, are found, by intro-

ducing into the Barometrical formula the known value of the height

(H.) and the observed Barometrical pressure (b, b'). The shape of

the equation will be this—

t+t = mum | og He Eng {a zt }—2s

where t + t' stands for the sum of the temperatures of both stations.

H, ¢ and a are constant quantities for all hours. An error of 10 feet

in the height of the temple (4039.3 feet) would cause a difference of

about 0°.7 in the temperature of each hour, but it would not alter

the character of the curve or the magnitude of the variation. The

following table contains in the second column under each day, the

real mean temperatures as obtained by the formula :—

Table V.i—Real Mean Temperatures.

lst April. ord April. 4th April. 2nd April.

ae rg : c= rs S S| ss rs

BEE eS e Sy poh Ah ok bee Rab Sokal os

SM soiSs les Pes Se las WSs ses sas

Me | eee se) el ot al esl

S) S) 'S) Ss) © o)

YS a 23.2 (25.2

oo) 95.3]. be 24.1 (25.9

pegs? (259 F ..? )85.1 | 96.51 26.2") 25.0 1955

9) 26.1) 26.7} .. | 27.0} 264) .. | 27.4 |26,1) 27.0 l25.9%*

Meet 273 | .. | 28.8) 26.5%, 26.7 28.0 ;26.9**

fyeeso | 28.1). |} 30.1) 27.0 | 27.1

12} 30.1 | 28.1 | 28.5 | 30.9 | 27.7 | 27.6

Meso] || 29,2. | 32.1 | 28.1) |.

2} 32.3 | 29.4 Uae ae a Pe

3] 32.0 | 29.0 33.0 | 27.9 | 280

1S A a 32.5:| 974.1 27.6

5| 30.9] .. 31.3 | 27.5 | 27.4 31.2 |28.8

6| 29.0] .. B.A 7B oo9s's 29.5 |28.6

Bh, 28.04) a's cae) 26:0.) Addi, 2k |

2 ee oper | ae

es ee oe 26.9: 26.7 et PhO 1O | Ho on, P

Me ee! 26.9.) 267 |... ity a kei

* A, and H. Schlagintweit, Neue Untersuchungen, &e. &c. Leipzig 1854,

Page 409.

16 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. [No. 1.

The curve of the real hourly mean temperatures, Fig. 4, a. presents

on the Ist and 8rd April some slight inequalities, which must be

corrected, in order better to exhibit the real shape of the curve.

We know that the ascent from the minimum in the morning to the

maximum in the afternoon, must be gradual and continuous, unin-

terrupted by irregular and sudden deviations. The corrections will

have to be regulated by the turning points of the curve, which it is

therefore of importance to fix beforehand.

In a similar case* the maximum hour of the real mean tempera-

tures of the air between the stations has been found, in a greater

height, to fall after the maximum hour of the mean temperatures of

the stations.

In the present case the shape of the curves of both days distinctly

forbids us to look for the maximum after 2 p.m. On the Ist there

is a doubt between 1 and 2 P. m., but on the 8rd the hour of 2 P. mM.

decisively predominates. The hour of 2 p. m. also preponderates in

the hourly means of the stations, and, such being the case, theore-

tical reasons, as well as experience, speak strongly against the

occurrence of the real maximum of the air between the stations

before that hour. In the present instance the height of the stratum

of air is so small, that a near coincidence of the hour of its maxti-

mum temperature with that of the maximum temperatures of the

stations cannot be considered irregular, and we may safely admit

the hour of 2 p. M. as that of the maximum temperature in the curve

of the real hourly means. ,

The hour of the minimum, 7 a. M., which is clearly indicated as

such on the Ist and not contradicted on the 4th, was not altered,

as there are reasons, which will be mentioned further on, for consi-

dering a further slight decrease of the temperature of the air for a

short time after sunrise, as a not unusual occurrence. The corree-

tions were effected graphically, by adopting, wherever the continu-

ous line was broken, a mean course between the deviations on either

side, supposed to have been caused by the real mean temperatures

having been found too high or too low. They are put opposite the

respective hours in Col. III. of the table. On the 1st April only

the hours 12 and 1 required readjustment, all others having been

taken as correct.

* A, and H, Schlagintweit, K. 0.

1858.] Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 17

_ The mean temperatures of the 2nd have been inserted in the

table, merely to show the reason for rejecting the barometrical

observations of the hours of 9 h. 15 m. and 10 h. 15 m. a. M. made

on that day on the hill. The parallelism of the real mean tempera-

tures of these hours with those of the mean curve of the stations

clearly indicates that one of the two readings must have been erro-

neous. The number of observations on that day is not sufficient to

warrant an attempt at correcting them.

The curve of the 8rd April presents some difficulties, the tempera-

tures at 8 and 10 a. M. are equal and both higher than that at 9.

_ This arrangement could not by any means represent the true relation

between them,

There being no direct and certain indications to guide us in

selecting one of these temperatures as correct, which might then

serve asa starting point in altering the other. two, the following

considerations decided me at last in favour of the temperature

at 9.

It will be recollected from Table ILI. that the mean temperatures

of the air between the stations for the whole 24 hours, as derived

from the thermometric observations (Col. IV.), showed a difference of

only 0°.6. Assuming that the real daily mean temperatures of the air

on both days would differ rather less than more in the same or the op-

posite direction, from each other, and that, judging from observations

made by others, they would fall later than the hour at which the daily

means had been observed to fall in the curve of the mean tempera-

tures of the stations, which was 93 a. m., I have concluded that the

difference between the real hourly mean temperatures of both days

would be greater after that hour, in the hot part, than before it in

in the cold part of the day. Guided by this supposition it might be

expected that the real mean temperature of the hours 8, 9 and 10

on the 3rd, would differ comparatively little from those at the same

hours on the Ist.

This was made still more probable, from the small range of the

curves, which is less than half that of the curves of the stations.

The temperature at 9 on the 3rd 26°.4 (Table V. Col. II.) agreeing

nearest, within the probable limits, with the temperature of the same

hour on the 1st, 26°.7, I have taken it as the correct one.

18 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. [No. 1.

Next the hours 1, 2, 6, 8, 9, 10 were considered correct and the

remaining hours were altered as the table shows, (Col. III). Fig. 4

in the Plate represents the corrected curves.

On the 4th April no alterations were required.

Having adopted these corrections, I now proceed to point out the

distinguishing features of the curves of real hourly mean tempera-

tures, Table V. (Fig. 4).

In the first place they have a much smaller range than the tem-

peratures derived from tke observations (Col. I.) The range of the

latter, on the 1st is 8°.7, on the 3rd it is 9°.5, whereas the range of

the real means, between 7 and 2, is on the first only 4°.1, not quite

half of that of the temperatures of the stations. On the 3rd, the

barometer had not been observed at the hour of the minimum, but

judging from the small hourly variation, the daily range on that

day must have been still smaller than on the 1st.

It is not possible to arrive at a definite conclusion regarding the

absolute real daily mean temperatures on both days; the possible

error in the height and the error which might arise from different

degrees of moisture on both days would make it uncertain. The

relative values of the real daily mean temperatures as compared with

each other, are also difficult to ascertain. The smallness of the

number of observations hardly allows an estimate being formed from

them. An estimation or interpolation for some of the deficient

hours could not be made with the same reliance as in the instance

of the mean curve of the stations, and the fitness of the combination

of hours which had been employed before, would have been to say

the least, doubtful.

As far as a conjecture may be permitted from the average

hourly variation on the 8rd, the minimum temperature on that

day could not have been more than about half a degree higher than

that on the lst. But the maximum temperature of the 8rdis a

whole degree lower than that of the 1st, a difference of the same

magnitude, but in an opposite direction as that between the maxima

of the curve of the stations. If therefore the real daily mean tem-

peratures of both days were not the same, the probability is, that

the real mean temperature of the 24 hours on the 3rd was lower than

that on the 1st. The case is the reverse as regards the daily mean

1858.| Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hull. 19

temperature of the stations, which on the 8rd is higher than on

the 1st.*

The only consequence which could possibly be inferred from this

would be, that on successive days the course of the daily mean tem-

peratures of larger masses of air, removed from the ground, does not

always proceed parallel to the daily means of the stations; the

latter may be rising when the former are falling or remaining sta-

tionary, or the reverse.

In the present case, the small number of days and the omission

of taking the moisture into account does not allow us to consider

this result as an established fact; but the possibility of such an

* Such a result might have been predicted from the decrease in the barometri-

eal pressure from the Ist to the 3rd. The height obtained by the barometric

formula

H = C Log 7 (1 + 6 T)

(omitting the smaller corrections for gravity) depends mainly on the value of the

quantity Log 5 This value will increase, when the barometrical pressures

decrease, if the difference between the latter, (b—b’) remains the same. In such

a case, to obtain a constant value for the height, the mean temperatures should

decrease with the pressures. We are, on the contrary, accustomed to see the

temperatures at the stations rising, when the pressures are falling, and such is

also the case in the present instance. The barometer from the 1st to the 3rd is

falling and the hourly mean temperatures of the stations on the 8rd are higher

than on the Ist, but the barometrical differences (b—b’) being, on the whole, very

nearly the same on both days, it follows that we must find the real mean tem-

peratures on the 3rd lower than on the 1st. To give an instance to which extent

the temperature is dependent on the value of (b—b’) I will take the observation

at 2 Pp. M. on both days. The barometrical differences were on the

Ist. 3rd.

3.833 3.837

and the real mean temperatures were found to be

299.4 280.4,

showing a difference of one degree. To make the real mean temperature at 2 on

the 3rd equal to that on the 1st, or one degree higher than we found it, the baro-

metrical difference on the 8rd should have been 3.824, or 0.013 inches less than

it was. This would have required a barometrical pressure of 25.916 inches on

the hill instead of 25.903, a difference which is far too great as to haye been caused

by an error in the reading.

D 2

20 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. [No. 1.

occurrence may at least be admitted. Such an admission will be

sufficient to encourage further investigation into the subject.. i

An explanation of such a phenomenon would not only require a

favourable state of the atmosphere, and observations extending over

a greater number of days, but also accurate determinations of mois-

ture and the direct observation of the greater or smaller resistance

which the atmosphere offers to the passage of the sun’s heating rays.

It would besides have to take into account the changes in the speci-

fic gravity of the air with a rising and falling Barometer-

Particular care would have to be taken to guard the thermometers

against the influence of direct radiated and reflected heat from the

ground. No other climate is so well adapted as that of India to

bring to a satisfactory conclusion an examination into the conditions

of such a phenomenon, and stations in similar relative situations as

Parisnath hill and Calcutta may be found in many parts of the

country.

The course of the hourly mean temperatures of the stratum

of wir presents another difference from the means of the statious.

In India the minimum temperature is, as a general rule, observed

at 6 a.M., this being the first hour of observation after, or the

last hour before sunrise. In the present instance the minima

in the curves of the stations, for both days, fall upon6 a.m. It

is different with the curves of real mean temperatures of the

stratum of air. On the 1st, we find the minimum at 7,—on the 2nd

and 8rd the hours of 6 and 7 had not been observed,—but on the

4th the temperature at 7 bas not risen above that at6. It is

not surprising that the lowest temperature of the air, far re-

moved from the ground, should occur a short time after sunrise.

The air receives its temperature chiefly from the ground and some

time must be required to heat the latter, and also to communicate

this heat to the air in which, in the mean time the process of cool-

ing must go on. I have (at Baroda), only six feet from the ground,

in the shade of a house towards the North and protected from the

rays of the rising sun, frequently observed the temperature still

falling fora quarter and half an hour after sunrise, the decrease

between sunrise and the moment when the temperature commenced

to rise again amounting to 2 or 3 tenths of a degree Centigrade.

1858.] Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 21

This phenomenon will most likely be observed only under favorable

circumstances and in places where the ground remains in the shade

for some time after sunrise. Mr. Radanath Sikhdar in charge of

the observatory at Calcutta, where once or twice every month read-

ings of the thermometer are taken from ten to ten minutes before

and after sunrise,* has noticed the same circumstance. His kindness

has enabled me to give the following table, containing the observa-

tions made on the 22nd January, 7th and 28rd February and 21st

March, 1857. The state of the weather on those days was particu-

larly favourable, there having been no clouds or rain, which, in all

other months are apt to interfere with the regularity of the pheno-

menon. I give the readings in degrees Fahrenheit, the scale by

which they have been observed.

Minutes before|

1857 sunrise. Sunrise. Minutes after sunrise.

20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 ~=60

7th February,| 63.0 62.4 | 62.2 |-62.0 |62.0 62.3

23d February,| 70.0 69.5 | 69.4 | 69.3 |69.5 |69.8

21st March, | 74.8 74.6 | 74.6 | 74.8 |75.2

_— ee ———————_— —_-_, Eee) O—Oee ee OO LD >

64.95 | 64.92 |65.20

22d January, | 54.0 53.9 53.8 53.7 : 53.6 | 53.6 [53.7

Means, ... | |

65.35 | 65.27 65.20 | 65.02

Looking at the means, we find that the lowest temperature took

place forty minutes after sunrise and the difference between the tem-

perature at sunrise and the lowest temperature, is 0°.35 F. or

about 0°.2 C.

Correction of the Barometrical readings.—The alterations to which

it has been necessary to subject the curve of the real mean tempera-

tures, in order to reduce its smaller irregular deviations, involve an ex-

amination of the barometrical readings from which these temperatures

have been derived. From the formula for the calculation of the rea}

mean temperatures, given above, it is seen that the value of the tem-

* Since January 1857.

22 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. [No. 1.

perature solely depends on the quantity Log = all other terms of the

equation being constant quantities for all hours. An error in the

temperature would therefore indicate an error in one of the baro-

metrical readings, or in both. Having corrected the temperature, we

shall be enabled to find the magnitude of the error in the barometri-

ealreading at the one station, provided that of the other can be

relied on.

The error to which barometrical observations are liable,is composed

of two parts—the unavoidable error, which is attached to every read-

ing and depends on the imperfection of the instruments and of the

eye of the observer, and the incidental error, caused by unfavourable

external circumstances attending the observation, as for instance

shaking of the instrument, a bad light, unsteadiness of the eye from

muscular exertion, &c. In converting the readings of one instru-

ment into those of another with which it had been compared before-

hand, the unavoidable error is included in the small allowance which

must be made in adding the correction. In the present case this

allowance amounts to + 0.003 inches. The incidental error cannot

well be estimated. It must be more or less irregular and may be

greater or smaller than the unavoidable error; generally greater.

In cases like the present, wishing to correct the errors as far as

possible, we must be satisfied to assume the readings of one of the

stations as correct and alter those of the other, being guided in our

selection by the circumstances of the case. Such a proceeding can

not lead wrong so long as the corrections do not exceed the proba-

ble limits of the errors of observation. Should they appear to do

so, this would prove that in the first instance the correction of the

temperatures must have been erroneous. So we have in these

barometrical corrections a means of controlling to some extent the

alterations made in the curve of real mean temperatures. In our

case, the readings of the Barometer at Calcutta, the instrument

being a standard, fixed in its position and never removed from its

place, necessarily had been less exposed to incidental errors than

those of the mountain barometer, which was frequently changed

from one place to another and could not be suspended so as to avoid

oscillation.

1858.] Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 23

Taking therefore the observations at Calcutta as correct, the

readings on the hill had to be altered to suit the corrected tempera-

tures. It will be seen from the following table that these altera-

tions, reaching at the most 0.005 inches, keep within the limits of

admissible errors. This is in so far satisfactory, as it confirms the

adjustment of temperatures, showing that the common incidental

irregularities of the barometrical readings might have produced the

deviations,

VI.—Table of corrected Barometrical Readings on the Hill.

Original Read- |Corrected Read-

Date. Time. ; Error.

ing. ing.

1st April. Noon. 26.021 26.026 + 0.005

] 26.006 26.002 " — 0.004

3rd April. 8 25.944, 25.940 — 0,004

10* 25.971 25.974 + 0.003

11 25 968 25.969 + 0.001

Noon. 25.960 25,959 — 0.001

3 25.872 25.873 + 0.001

4 25.856 25.858 + 0.002

5 25.849 25.847 — ().002

| 25.860 25.856 — 0.004

Barometrical Difference.—There is another way of controlling the

curve of real hourly mean temperatures. It consists in comparing

the curve with the course of the hourly variation of the difference

between the barometrical pressures (b—b’), obtained by deducting

the pressure of the upper station from that of the lower one. If the

barometrical pressures at each station, as is generally assumed, repre-

sent the Mass of the atmospheric column which presses upon the

Mercury of the barometer, their difference must give the weight of

the column of air between the stations, measured by a column of

Mercury of an equal basis.

The weight of a fixed volume of air, being dependent on the

barometrical pressure and the temperature, changes in a direct pro-

portion as the former and, to a certain extent, inversely with the

latter. The variation in the weight of such a volume of air, when

* 10h. 10m.

24, Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. [ No. 1.

the temperature changes from t’ to t” and the pressure from b/ to b’,

is expressed by the following equation :

Bie Sm ea

So att”

Where S! and S” stand for the weight of the same volume of air

at the respective temperatures t’, t”

The constant a = 272.85 ; (i 0.003665 being the increase in

and under the pressure b’, b”’.

volume of a quantity of air measured at 0° C. for every degree Centi-

grade above zero.

This equation expresses at the same time the ratio of the variation

in the specific gravity of the air.

Applying this equation to the present case, we find that the

“

| Mie oh,

factor om? within a period of 24 hours, changes in narrower limits

than the factor aualio'

, which is dependent on the hourly variation

of the temperature during the day. The latter therefore will pre-

ponderate in determining the value of the equation, and we may

expect to find the hourly weight of the air between the two stations

following a similar course as the real hourly mean temperatures,

but in an inverse ratio, the smallest barometrical difference falling

upon 2 Pp. M., and the highest upon 7 a. M. The following table, in

Col. II., gives the hourly differences as found by deducting the pres-

sure at Parisnath from that at Calcutta. For the corrected hours

the differences obtained from the original readings on the hill have

been placed opposite, in Col. I.

1858.] Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 25

0.028 ii 3.883

> "MOTJVIAI E55 3 1

ooea g

= eS =

| “pewenyeg |S; anasd e

SS} aM aod

re)

Set) watiei avin =

r iD Ea re %

a “paaiasqg DOOD

Cn oD oD of

% : RRVSSAAZAAABHH

2 ae 2 SSoSsSesssssses

S Sl OS SScooeo So sSis.6c.S

pee EUs Jibs |e voir PoCoT Pe ris.

; 6

: | 4 TTHOOOSCHROANNONRMNMARS

S = *poyepnoled =) - -OSSRHRGONRRNRODD

Q |= > ARADAHY DH OHH HHH

Leh weieliie deel pole MacKorKoriaelarkorkorkorkorkacksrkoriae

“NY

38 OOMM-ONnANTOA?

= |.| ‘poweuoo |gl | REROOSOBe TAOS

Ss PER BSEAO. ) + s$RAAWHDWNMHNDNDHMDOHAH

8 CP G9 OF OD CF G9 CD GF 29 6 09 6D 3D OF OS

: AQ waco o1nmN 26

s SIMoy pool bye? genie) SSP SSI GIS ga

FQ |—]-409 jo [vuIsUg wiles nena. ni) 5, A) OD) Be, ney ae

| Gch weGelscuae 070 wD

ce LT CR al mee e209 Dc i ct ORS aa Sri eran el Oe er

ie GRRRADSSSBBD

hy |B] wonereg SSSSSSSSSSSii::::

SOOQosoooooo >

= : oOMmoecuartrowtwox

S ‘ : ANNASAMrNOOKR . ,

ad PoyeMIe [El BARARAWDKNMMDHO 22552:

El adeno oned od on od oD

=< SS —— ————

: . : » MASI HAHOMO

5 P2e}VI1109 = SS oe ch GN. nares os op ee ° e e ° ° e

“| pue paarosqg Se rd ee RS ee ee ad ae ae a

OF 69 69 33.6 09 99 09 09 OD OS

*srno0y peo ° e e e e e ES 2 e e ° e e

— e ’ ° e e e 5 M4 Z e

-100 jo [BULSIAG e e e e e on ine) es es e

: J

o CORODRHOSmTOANMTNOONRNAAS

| Ss li) iS

o—

| = ! a

Examining Col. II. we find, that on the Ist and 3rd April, the

barometrical differences decrease steadily from 7 a. m. till 2 P. mu,

and rise again after that hour.

The hour of the maximum weight on the Ist and 4th coincides

with that of the minimum temperature at 7 a. m. and the hour of

the minimum weight on the 1st and 8rd with the hour of the high-

est temperature 2 Pp. m. on those days. If the values of the dif-

ference, derived from the uncorrected barometrical readings on the

Hill, in Col. 1., are substituted for the corrected values opposite in

Col. I1., the general character of the series remains the same, but

they would produce slight irregularities at some hours which the cor-

26 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. [No.1.

rections have served to eliminate. Between the hours 8 and 9 a. m.

on the 8rd, only, have the corrections failed to restore the course

to that regularity, which prevails on the two other days, and the baro-

metrical pressure on the Hill at those hours appears still too high ;

but as any further alteration would only have been arbitrary, it was

not attempted.

The general conformity of the variation in the hourly weight with

the course indicated by the real mean temperatures having thus

been established, it remains to be proved, that the relation between

the hourly weights strictly corresponds to the course prescribed by

theory, with regard also to the barometrical pressure.

The shortest way to ascertain this, would be, to compute the

weight of the column of air for every hour, and to compare the va-

lues thus theoretically obtained, with the observed barometrical

differences.

Neglecting for the present the influence of the watery vapour

contained in the atmosphere, the weight of the column of air be-

tween the stations, measured by a column of mercury of an equal

basis at 0° C. would be expressed by the following formula:

fe OR WG

Pie eee B

where S stands for the weight.

H gives the height in English inches (Log H = 4.6854873) ;

p is the specific gravity of Mercury, that of the atmospheric air, at

o° C. and under the normal pressure being taken as unity. Taking

13.59593* as the specific gravity of Mercury, and 0.0012904457 as

* Regnault, in Poggendorft’s Annalen Vol. LXXIV. 1849.

+ The weight of 1 Litre atmospheric air in Latitude ¢ and the height a above

the sea level is

1—0.0025935 cos 2 ¢.

1. grm 292753 1 + 2a

From Regnault’s determination, Poggendorff’s Annalen Vol. XCVIII. page 178.

The latitude of Calcutta is 22° 33’, and that of Parisnath hill 23° 57’ 37”.

Taking the mean of both, 23° 15’ and neglecting the correction for the elevation

above the sea level, which is only 18 feet at Calcutta, the weight of 1 Litre air

at the latitude 23° 15’ will be 1. grm 290445 ; Log. = 0.1107395.

1858.| Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hull. 27

that of the air, in the latitude 23° 15’, both being compared with

water, we obtain the value of p = 10535.8 (Log p = 4.0226694.)

If the height of a column of air H = 1, then the height of a column

of Mercury of the same weight and of an equal basis is 4

a has the same value as in the last equation (Log. a =

2.4359260)

t stands for the real mean temperature of the air.

b stends for the mean barometrical pressure between the sta-

tions.

Bis the normal barometrical pressure at 0° C. B = 29 .9218.

If we put a =A, the equation becomes

a+t

and introducing the numerical values we find A = 41.95234 (Log.

A = 1.6227562).

The values for t were taken from the table of real mean tempera-

San A b

tures. The mean pressures (b) were found by taking the pressure at

the lower station as the first, and the pressure at the upper station

as the last term of a geometrical progression, and the height in feet

as the number of terms. The sum of all terms, divided by the

height in feet would approach the mean pressure sufficiently near

for our purpose.* ‘To obtain the sums, it was necessary first to

find the common ratio, r, of the progression of each separate hour.

In the Appendix I have given the Logarithms of the hourly values

of r as also the values of r —1, and the resulting mean pressures.

The final coincidence of the results of the calculation of S by

means of this formula, with the observed barometrical differences,

will depend on the correctness of the determination of H, t and b.

* T have, in calculating the mean barometrical pressures, neglected to reduce

the height of the barometer at the upper station to the gravity at the level of

Calcutta. The correction would alter the mean pressure so little (less than

0.001 inch) that it would form only an insignificant part of the error, which, as

I have ascertained, must be allowed in the value obtained by the method I

employed, amounting to about + 0.005 inches. The correction would have no

appreciable effect on the value of S,

E 2

28 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hili. [No. 1.

I will now assume the value found for each of these quantities

to be nearly correct and will consider the magnitude of the error

which would be caused by smaller deviations from the truth in each.

In doing this, an error in the height cannot be considered sepa-

rately as it would alter at the same time the values of tandb. A

variation in the height would change the value of the real mean tem-

perature in the same direction, but in a greater proportion.

The influence of this error upon the value of H or the

volume of the air, reduced to 0° C., would in the present case be

very slight. The alteration in A for + 10 feet would be + 0.1.

The value of the mean pressure cannot be obtained nearer than

within about + 0.005 inches. It would generally, the pressures

remaining unaltered, for a greater height become a little smaller and

for a smaller height greater and thus partly compensate the error in

the temperature, the difference only of both appearing in the final

result. In the present case, the effect of both, for a difference of +

10 feet would cause a variation in the value of S, amounting to

about = 0.002 inches or less. An error in the barometrical readings

at either station would tend to produce similar irregularities in the

computed hourly variations of the weight, as have been found in the

observed barometrical differences.

If my assumptions regarding the correctness of the values which

have been found for H., t and b are right, the foregoing considera-

tions would lead us to expect, that the computed barometrical dif-

ference would not differ from those observed by more than a few

thousandths of an inch.

This result will however be modified by the presence of moisture

in the air, which I have hitherto neglected, and which would alter

the specific gravity of the air and therefore the value of p.

The computed values of the barometrical differences are given in

Table VII. Column III. Corresponding as they do to the weight of

a column of dry air, they are much higher than the observed weights

in Column II. The deviations between the computed and observed

values of S show very little variation, ranging between 0.028 and

0.031 inches. In every other respect the computed values show

exactly the same course as those observed. We shall see how far

their deviation may be attributed to the moisture in the air.

1858.] Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 29

Moisture.—Observations of the moisture on the hill had been

made on the 2nd for the hours 9 h. 15 m., 10 h. 15 m., 5 and 6, and

on the 8rd for the hours 9, 10, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. The observations, and

the tensions of moisture, computed for the hill and for Calcutta by

August’s formula, are given in the following table. The column

headed with t gives the reading of the dry bulb, t — t’ the difference

between the dry and wet bulb. The last column contains, only for

the 3rd April, the means between the tensions at Calcutta and on

the hill.

Table VIIL.—Tension of Moisture.

Time. Temple. Calcutta.

Pee | me ie Mean

: __,| Tension. __,’| Tension. | Tension.

2nd April. cul ee Yh inehes. é Inches. | Inches.

Siloam A.M.) 23.3'|° 96 | -0.238 | 3017)" 4:3 | 0.856

mea, ., | 237° | 9.3)" O:264- "30.8" 5:3""| 0869

4h.55m. p.m.| 26.9; 10.5 | 0.311 | 35.6 |-10.8 | 0.609

6 oe | AO, 0.262.) SaS. i. 8.9 | 0.655

3rd April.

9 a.M. 24.2|°40:2. | 0.203: |» 30:4, |. 3.3 | 0.941 0.572

10h. 10 m 2a-28) olO-O,|) “0.242 Soo, 4.2 1 0.9721" 0.607

2 P.M SOI, Vatag, | O:283 | abt %.0 f OOTS | 0598

a 30.1 , 13:7.) 0.230: |, 36.31 (8.0 |. 0.909,.| 0.569

nde 30:0, Fao") 0.255, | amo? 6.6 1.020 | 0.637

ss 201 | 129° | 0209 a4 es" O'2 F T2OGR" 10.637

6 | 20.4" B91) O29. | 32.0 |) 3.8), 1,045 0.632

The regular course, which the tension of vapour during the dry

months follows at Calcutta, is this: the tension is at a minimum

between 5 and 7 a. M. or about sunrise, and attains a maximum at

9 or 10. It comesto a second minimum between 1 and 4 P.M. and

reaches a second maximum between 6 and 8 in the evening. About

this maximum the tension either oscillates for some hours or it

begins at once to decrease again till sunrise. Figs. 9 and 10.

A general coincidence with this course can be traced in the few

observations at Calcutta, on the 3rd, which are here recorded. The

figure 7 in the plate gives the curve more complete.

30 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill: [No. 1.

With the tensions obtained on the third I have computed the

values of S for air mixed with vapour, at the respective hours.

Adapting the formula for that purpose, and taking 0.622 as the

specific gravity of vapour, that of air of the same temperature and

pressure being unity, it becomes

S=A —. {bv—os7se}

a + t

where e stands for the mean tension of vapour between the two

stations. The values for e were obtained by taking the arithmeti-

cal means of the tensions observed at the corresponding hours on

the hill and at Calcutta. (Mean tension, Table VIII.)

An error of 0.04 or 0.05 inches in the value of e would produce a

difference of about 0.003 inches in the resulting weight; but in the

opposite direction to that of the error in the moisture.

Table IX. of barometrical differences for moist air on the 3rd.

Time. S. S. Deviation or

Observed. Calculated. error.

9 A. M. 3.876 3.873 — 0.003

10h. 10m. 3.37ea 3.869 — 0.004

2 3.837 3.836 — 0.001

3 3.839 3.838 — 0.001

4, 3 843 3.8388 — 0.005

5 3.844 3.840 — 0.004

6 3.846 3.842 — 0.004

Average, .. ue — 0.003

The computed values of S are now closely approaching the

observed values. The small differences stil] remaining are easily ac-

counted for by the probable errors in the height and in the tensions

of moisture. A series of experiments which I made for comparing

the indications of the wet bulb, at temperatures from 280 to 31°,

and with tensions from 0.3 to 0.8 inches, with those of Regnault’s

Dew point apparatus gave this result: the tensions obtained by

August’s formula were always higher than those derived from the

direct observation of the Dew point. The difference was on an

average 0.05 inches and varied from 0.006 to 0.08 inches. It

was smallest with lower tensions and increased as they became

greater. Regnault’s formula gave still greater differences.

1858.| Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hull. 31

Assuming that the mean tensions in table VIII. each being the

mean between a higher tension, at Calcutta, and a lower one on the

hill, were on an average about 0.04 inches too high, the negative

character of the error in the computed values of 8, and its quantity,

are at once explained.

The close correspondence, taking the moisture into account, of

the computed values of S with the observed barometrical differences,

allows a conclusion, that the quantities H., t and b, employed in

their calculation could not have differed materially from their true

values.*

It also assures us of the complete control we may, with good

observations and a favorable state of the atmosphere, exert over the

changes in the specific gravity of a stratum of air between two

stations, appropriately situated, and their causes. ‘The advantage of

such a control, if its general applicability be once fairly established,

as a means of testing and correcting meteorological observations of

all kinds, is obvious.

I am well aware that conclusions, drawn from so small a num-

ber of observations, as in the present instance at my disposal, and

results based upon quantities, which themselves require verification |

have no claim to generality before they have been repeatedly con-

firmed. It is possible, if the height of the temple had been determined

by better methods, than 1 could use, and if the determination of

moisture had been more accurate than the method employed will

* As it may be of interest to know the influence which an alteration in the

value of p would have upon the value of S, I give the results of table IX. as

obtained if the old values of the specific gravity of mercury (13.598) and of air

(0.0012991) are employed, which would make p = 10467.24.

Time. S. Ss. Deviation or

Observed. Calculated. error.

9 A. M. 3.876 3.899 0.023

10h. 10m. 3.873 3.894 0.021

2 3.837 3.861 0.024

3 3.839 3.063 0.024

A 3.843 3.863 0.020

5 3.844 3.865 0.021

6 3.846 3.867 0.021

Average, “ ne 0.022

32 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. [No. 1.

admit of, that the results obtained by calculation might not have

agreed quite so well, or quite in the same way, with the values

observed, as they apparently did: but in all such cases, a deviation

from expected results will teach us something new. My intention

in discussing these observations in the manner I have done, having

‘been less to establish a law from the conclusions arrived at, than

to direct the attention of meteorologists to the advantage of corre-

sponding observations between stations similarly situated as Paris-

nath hill and Caleutta, particularly in India, and to invite repetition ;

I shall be fully satisfied, if that object be gained.

In connexion with the latter part of the discussion, I beg permis-

sion to offer a few remarks regarding the action of the watery

vapour mixed with the atmosphere. .

I give in Fig. 6—8 the curves of the hourly tensions of moisture

on the 2nd (6), 3rd (7) and a part of the 4th (8) of April at

Calcutta, and in Fig. 18 a fragment of the same curve on the hill.

Fig. 9 is the curve of the mean hourly tensions for the whole month

of April, and Fig. 10 for the whole year at Calcutta; the Figs. 11

and 12 represent the curve for the month of April and the whole

year of 1850 at Bombay. The Fig. 6 a — 13 a, give the hourly baro-

inetrical pressures for the same dates, and 6 b — 13 b, the curves of

the so-called pressure of the dry air, that is, the curves which

remain after deducting the hourly tensions of vapour (6 — 13) from

the respective hourly barometric pressures (6 a — 18 a).

The tensions of Figs. 6, 7, 8,9 and 13 were calculated from the

observations, by August’s formula; those of Fig. 10 were computed

from the published monthly results of the Calcutta Observatory,

which are obtained by the so-called Greenwich constants; the in-

dividual values are on an average about 0.018 inches lower than

those obtained by August’s formula, but the general course of the

hourly variations remains the same. The tensions of Figs. 11 and

12 were taken from the Register of the Bombay Observatory, where

Apjohn’s formula is in use.*

* The readings of the barometer and tensions of moisture which served for the

construction of the curves are given in the Appendix, with the exception of those

of the monthly curves at Calcutta, which are published in the Society’s Journal,

and the curves of Bombay, which are also published.

1858.] Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 33

Examining the barometrical curves 6 a — 18 a, separately, it

will be seen, that the barometrical curves of the single days, 6 a, 7

a, 8 a, 13 a, show, within very small limits, the same turning

points, the same general proportions, and preserve the same regula-

rity in their gradual transition from one hour to the next, as the

curves of the mean hourly pressures of the whole month (9 a, 11 a)

and the whole year (10 a, 12 a). This uniform resemblance may

be shown for every day in the year.

Turning now to those curves which represent the so-called pres-

sure of the dry air (6 b — 18 b), we observe, that the regularity of

the barometrical curves is at once broken, the moment we deduct the

tension of moisture. The irregularity produced by this operation

is, as might be expected from the nature of the hourly variations

in the tensions of moisture, greater in the curve of a single day

(6 b, 7 b, 8b, 18 b,) than in that of a whole month (9 b, 11 b,)

and it is still partially apparent in the curves of a whole year

(10 b, 12 b.) The curves of dry pressure are not only dissimilar

to the barometrical curves, but differ also amongst themselves. A

correction of the possible error in the determination of the tensions

of moisture, particularly for single days, would not remove the

irregularity, as the error for all tensions is probably on the same

side and the magnitude of its variation comparatively insignificant.

The mean hourly tensions of moisture show locally a certain peri-

odic regularity, when the means of a larger number of days are taken.

But the magnitude as well as the course of their hourly changes varies

with the locality (9, 11) and with the seasons. Taking the curves of

single days, they will frequently be found to be entirely dissimilar

to the monthly and yearly means, and also unlike each other, and

often abrupt in their transitions Figs. 6, 7, 8,9, 10, 11, 12, 13.

This is not astonishing, if we remember how little is required to

effect sudden changes in the relative saturation of the watery

vapour in the atmosphere. I may add that the hourly variations

in the curve of tensions of single days are often much greater than

the whole of the daily variation in the barometrical curve.

Returning again to the barometrical curves, we find, that they

also slightly alter the magnitude of their daily variation with the

locality and with the seasons, but the uniform regularity in the

34 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. [No. 1.

course of their hourly changes remains always the same. The suc-

cession of the hourly increase and decrease is always gradual, and

never suddenly interrupted, as that of the moisture, and the turn-

ing points fall invariably upon nearly the same hours.

On comparing the regular course of the curve of the hourly baro-

metrical pressures of single days with that of the so-called pressure

of the dry atmosphere and considering that the change observed

in the latter is produced by deducting the tension of moisture from

the former, it would appear, that the daily course of the pressure of

the dry atmosphere was naturally irregular, and that the vapour

was always present in the exact quantity required to restore the

uniformity of the barometrical curve. In fact, it would seem as if

the supply of vapour was at all times and solely governed by the

greater or smaller irregularity of the curve of the so-called pressure

of the dry air.

Knowing the laws which regulate the supply of watery vapour,

and knowing also how many accidental circumstances may alter the

curve of its tension for single days, so as to make it entirely unlike

its monthly or yearly mean, and observing at the same time that

the curve of the hourly barometrical pressures never alters its shape

for one single day, such a conclusion would, to say the least, appear

very improbable.

Assuming, on the other hand, that the course of the pressure of

the dry atmosphere were regular and uniform in itself, we should,

from a knowledge of the frequently altered course of the moisture,

expect to find this regularity disturbed by the casual admixture

of more or less watery vapour. We see, however, that such is not

the case in reality, the barometrical curve being quite independent

of the changes in the tensions of moisture, and never irrecular.

The process of obtaining the so-called pressure of the dry atmo-

sphere by deducting the tension of vapour near the surface of the

ground from the barometrical column is based upon the supposition,

that the tension of vapour near the surface would, practically, not

differ much from the tension which would be produced by the

weight of the column of watery vapour, diffused through the whole

height of the atmosphere, if it were separated from the latter, and

sustained its own pressure. This would involve another assumption,

”

1858.| Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 35

namely, that an addition of watery vapour to the air would not

affect the equilibrium, or density of the latter, solely increasing the

local pressure upon the mercurial column of the barometer.

From the above considerations it would appear, that this view, if

allowed to approach the truth practically in the mean of a larger

number of days, is hardly admissible if applied to single cases.

I will subject it to a further test by deducing with its assistance

the weight of the dry air, at different hours, between Calcutta and

Parisnath hill, and comparing the values which will be thus obtained

with those derived by calculation.

The results obtained for S in the foregoing discussion, taking the

watery vapour into account, agreed well enough with the observed

barometrical differences, to justify a belief, that the quantities

employed in their calculation, although subject to a certain amount

of error, would not differ essentially from their true values.

Determining with the same quantities the individual weight of

each, the dry air and the watery vapour in the composition of the

barometrical difference, the sum of both will always be equal to the

value of S as obtained by calculation.

These weights are contained in the following Table.

Table XI— Weights of dry air and Watery Vapour.

Weight of | Weight of 8 S Deviation or

drd April. Dry Air. | Vapour. | Calculated.) Observed. Error.

9a. M. Sees — O0S0" == 3.873 3.876 — 0.003

10* 3.816 -- 0.053 = 3.869 3.873 — 0.004

2 P.M. 3./84 +. 0.052 .=. 3.836 3.837 — 0.001

3 3./89 + 0.049 = 3.838 3.839 — 0.001

4 3.783 -+- 0.055 = 3.838 3.843 — 0.005

5 3.785 --. 0.055 = 3.840 3.844 — 0.004

6 gio, -— 0.055 = 3.842 3.846 — 0.004

According to this table the weight of the dry air between the

stations, or the specific gravity of the air on the 38rd decreased

towards the time of the greatest heat and oscillated between the

hours 2 and 6 Pp. M. round a mean value, without having shown at

that time a decided inclination to rise. The weight of the watery

* 10h. 10m.

36 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. No. 1.

vapour also decreased from 10 a. mu. towards the time of the greatest

heat and remained stationary between 4 and 6 P.M., following on

the whole the course indicated by the mean tensions of moisture in

table VIII.

The weight of the dry air, if determined on the assumption upon

which the so-called pressure of the dry atmosphere is founded, will

show a different result. If the Mass of the dry atmosphere be re-

presented by the height of the barometrical column after deducting

the tension of vapour at Calcutta, the same must be true for the

hill, and the differences between the pressures of the dry air above

and below must be equal to the weight of the dry air between the

stations. These differences are given in the following table.

Deducting them from the observed barometrical differences, the

remaining quantities would represent the weight of the watery

vapour between the stations.

Table XII.— The supposed weights of dry air and vapour.

; Supposed Weight Weight of S.

— oa dry Air. Vapour. Observed.

9a. M. 3.138 + 0.738 = 3.876

i 3.143 + 0.730 = 3.873

2 P.M. 3.207 + 0.630 = 3.837

3 3.160 ae 0.679 = 3.839

4 3.078 ~ 0.765 = 3.843

5 2.988 ae 0.856 = 3.844

6 3.020 + 0.826 = 3.846

According to these values, leaving the vapour altogether out of

the question, the weight of the dry air between the stations, or the

specific gravity of the air, would have increased at an enormous rate

towards the time of the greatest heat, and diminished still more

rapidly towards evening, a result which would be contrary to all

scientific experience.

It is evident that the assumption upon which these results have

been obtained, cannot represent the true nature of the case.

In endeavouring to reconcile these apparent contradictions be-

tween theory and experience, it seemed to me that the difficulty

* 10h. 10m,

1858.] Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 37

of accounting for the absence of any visible effect of the great and

irrecular variations in the tension of vapour upon the daily barome-

trical curve might be obviated by applying the view which Bessel has

developed in his paper on barometrical measurement of heights*

with regard to the action of watery vapour. According to it, the

watery vapour, so long as it is not saturated for the existing tem-

perature, would in no way differ in its physical behaviour from a gas.

To explain more distinctly in what way the application of this

view would obviate the difficulties I mentioned, I will make use of

the following illustration.

Suppose Fig. 5,an upright hollow Cylinder, a, b, c, closed at the

bottom, to be filled witha gas g, which I wiil suppose to be not

acted upon by gravity. This gas shall be subject to a pressure,

which is represented in the figure by the moveable weight p, resting

on the gas, and closely fitting the cylinder like the piston of an air

pump. In a state of equilibrium between the elastic force of the gas,

and the weight it has to support, the gas fills the volume 2 V and

exerts an elastic pressure, equal to the weight p. IPf now, through

a stopcock B a quantity of another gas, 9’, of a different density be

introduced, which, under the pressure p would occupy the volume

VY, the weight p will be raised from b to c, and the space filled by

the two gases will now be 3 V. Each of the two gases will be dis-

tributed equally throughout the space 3 V,and both together will

exert the pressure p. |

By the increase of volume, to which each of the gases has been

subjected, their densities must have been diminished in proportion,

that of the first gas g, being now one-third, and that of the second

gas, g, two-thirds less than what it was before. The pressure

or elasticity of a gas, all other conditions remaining unchanged,

will vary in the same proportion as its density, and consequently

the elastic pressure of the first gas g, which was equal to p, will now

only be 3 p and that of the second gas, 9’, only 4 p, the sum of both

being equal to p, the weight they have to support.

If we now deduct the elastic pressure of the gas g’ from the sum

of the pressures of both gases, we shall not obtain the pressure

* Astronomische Nachrichten Nov. 356, 357. Taylor’s Scientific Memoirs,

Vol, II. 1841.

38 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. [No.1.

which the first gas, g, would have shown, if the other gas had never

been introduced, but a smaller one.

The space between the marks a and b, which was at first only

filled with the gas g contains now two gases, the quantity of the

first having been diminished and replaced by a corresponding volume

of the other. ‘T’o express the process in one word, it may be said,

that in the original space the second gas has displaced a part of the

first, the pressure remaining the same.

Returning again to the original figure, if instead of the gas g’, a

quantity of another gas, 2”, be introduced, which, occupying the

same volume, 2 V, as the gas g, exerts an elastic pressure, p, which

is smaller than p, then both gases, the volume remaining the same,

would exert the pressure p+ p’. But the weight they have to

support being smaller, they will raise it until the volume they

occupy will be to the original volume, 2 V, as p+ p’: p, when equili-

brium will again have been restored, the sum of their elastic pressures

not exceeding p. The individual pressure of each gas would again

be diminished in proportion with the alteration of its density.

Any circumscribed space in the lower part of the atmosphere, in

which the circulation of the watery vapour principally takes place

may be compared to the space filled by the first gas g, in the cylinder,

and the moveable weight would then represent the weight of that

height of the atmosphere which is pressing upon the circumscribing

surface and which is balanced by the elastic pressure of the air. The

third gas ¢”, of the same volume and smaller elastic pressure

would be the watery vapour, which during the day is continually be-

ing supplied wherever water is present on the surface of the ground,

or by currents of moist air.

The weight of the watery vapour itself must increase the weight

of the whole atmosphere, but the variation in this addition in weight

must be comparatively small, and may be neglected in applying the

illustration, the greater part of the absolute quantity of watery vapour

contained in the air being permanent and not subject to changes.

So long as the supply of watery vapour is equably and continu- '

ously kept up from a large surface, a state nearly approaching equi-

librium must soon be established between the stratum containing

the vapour and the remaining part of the atmosphere which presses

1858.] Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 39

upon it. The lower stratum will expand and the tensions or

elastic pressures of the air and the vapour in it will divide them-

selves, according to the proportion in which they are mixed, into

the pressure which they have to support, whether that pressure be

produced by the weight of dry air alone or of both air and vapour.

Deducting, in the lower stratum, the elastic pressure of one of its

constituents from the whole pressure, the remaining quantity will

not represent the Mass or weight of the entire column of the other

constituent, but solely its local tension or elastic pressure.

When the equilibrium is locally disturbed by the watery vapour

being supplied in irregular quantities, or withdrawn by condensation

or the up-current, the tendency to restore it between the disturbed

body of air and the surrounding masses must, owing to the elasticity

of the medium, immediately come into play, and thus small inequali-

ties between the elastic pressures of neighbouring masses of air,

being distributed almost instantaneously over larger bodies, will not

be felt upon the barometer.

In the locality where the disturbance takes place, consequently,

the diminution or increase of watery vapour will only alter the re-

spective proportions in which the elastic forces of both constituents

of the atmosphere share in supporting the whole pressure, without

sensibly altering the pressure itself.

In consequence of the expansion of a volume of dry air, depen-

dent on an admixture of watery vapour with it, the density of the

mass in the space which was originally occupied will be slightly dimi-

nished, as a part of the air is displaced and replaced by an equal

volume of watery vapour, which is specifically lighter than air. This

diminution will create in the moist air, independently of the endea-

vour to put its elastic pressure into equilibrium with that of the

surrounding body already alluded to, a tendency to interchange its

position with that of specifically heavier masses. Such an exchange

cannot be accomplished in a moment, and is probably effected very

slowly, if we remember that the transition between very dry and

very moist air, laterally and in a vertical direction, must be gradual.

The process must be particularly retarded, where large masses are

concerned, and will not interfere with the more instantaneous equali-

sation of the elastic pressures.

40 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. [No. 1.

If the view here developed be correct, this wili in no way oppose

the assumption that the mass of watery vapour contained in the at-

mosphere in a vertical direction is in most cases, on an average,

proportionate to the tension found near the surface of the ground.

According to the foregoing, the mode in which the watery vapour

chiefly affects the barometer must be two-fold: in the first place by

its tension or elasticity, and secondly by its weight. The tension

is found by the Hygrometer and its action has just been considered.

The weight can only be determined accurately after finding the

mean tension throughout the atmosphere, or within the limits ofa

space for which the weight is required. Directly a palpable effect

of the changes in the weight during the daily period can hardly be

observed, as its variation must be a very small part of the daily

barometrical variation. I will, however, not omit to notice a circum-

stance which may perhaps partly be traced to this cause.

In the regular daily course which the hygrometric state of the air

undergoes, the quantity of moisture is, as a general rule, found smal-

lest at sunrise, when the temperature of the day has reached its mini-

mum, and when the vapour contained in it is nearest to its point of

saturation. This minimum of moisture is caused by the condensa-

tion of a part in the shape of dew and fog. The quantity of dew de-

posited varies with the nature of the surface,—being greater, where

the ground is covered with vegetation than where it is bare, and

varying for different kinds of soil. I have seen it in the month of

February under a group of trees near Poonah, equal in its effects

to a slight shower of rain, coming down from the leaves. Its daily

quantity will be regulated besides, as well as that of the fog by the

mean degree of saturation, the mean temperature of the day (the

tension of saturated vapour at the mean temperature) and the

daily range of temperature. In tropical climates, not far from the

sea-coast, where the mean temperatures and the state of saturation

in the different months change comparatively little, the influence of

the daily range would probably the most prominent.

If a merely local diminution of the water suspended in the atmos- |

phere, confined to a small space, such as for instance is caused by a

shower of rain, is not always observed to effect a perceptible change

in the barometrical column, this is easily accounted for by the in. |

stantaneous restoration of the equilibrium which must take effect as_|

1858.| Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 4

the rain is falling. Widely spread and continuous falls of rain are

generally accompanied with a falling or rising of the barometer, de-

pending on other primary causes, which would screen from observa-

tion the similar or contrary effect of the rainfall. But avery slight

diminution of pressure by condensation extending simultaneously

over many degrees of longitude, and following the meridian as far as

the sun rises and sets once every 24 hours, is much more likely to be

felt, as it could not possibly be compensated for ina short space of

time. Its effect, if not great, must be constant, and will be found

in a smaller mean pressure during the night, than during the day.

The tropical regions, where the time of sunrise, about 6 in the

morning, varies throughout the year at furthest about an hour and

a half would be best adapted to show such a difference, if it is great

enough to cause a visible depression of the barometrical column. I

have before me, the observations made in 1849 and 1850 at the

Colaba Observatory in Bombay and those made at Calcutta

Observatory in 1856. At Bombay the mean barometric pressure

in the curve of the hourly means of every month will fall very

nearly upon 6 a, M.and at Calcutta between 5 and 6 a.m. In-

cluding for the mean of the day the readings from 6 a. M. to 5 P.M.

and for that of the night from 6 p.m. to 5 a. M. the pressure of

the day always shows a slight excess over that of the night, as may

be seen from the following table.

Table XI11.—Exeess of the barometric pressure during the day over

that during the night. In Inches.

Bombay. Jan. Feb. March. | April. May. , June.

1849 0.011 0.018 0.022 | 0.015 0.016 | 0.009

1850 0.012 | 0.016 U.019 | G.019 0.021 | 0.011

Mean. 0.011 | 0.017 0.020 | 0.017 0.018 0.010

Calcutta.

1856 0.021 0.029 0.029 | 0.029 0.017 | 0.005

Bombay. July. | August.; Sept. | Oct. | Nov. | Dec. | Year.

1849 0007 | 0.008 0.014 | 0.007 | 0.009 | 0.011 | 0.012

1850 0.008 | 0.013 0.009 | 0.v09 | 0.012 | 0.014} 0.013

Mean. 0.007 0.010 0.012 | 0.008 | 0.010 | 0.012] 0.012

Calcutta.

= 1856 0.003 1 0.006 0.015 | 9.015 | 0.009 | 0.017 | 0.015

42 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. [No. 1.

This excess cannot be ascribed to an excess of the tension of

moisture in the same direction. The mean tension of moisture of

the night is, during the cold months equal to or slightly greater than

that of the day.

In table XIV I have given the mean daily ranges of temperature

for the same years and months.

Table X1V.—Daily range of temperature in © C.

Bombay. Jan. Feb. March. | April. | May. | June.

1849 7.4 6.7 65 6.1 5.2 2:9

1850 7.4 Jah 6.5 5.7 5.3 4.)

Mean. 7.4 7.9 6.5 5.9 5.2 3.5

Calcutta.

1856 9.3 9.8 7.8 75 6.0 3.7

Bombay July. | August./ Sept. | Oct. | Nov. | Dec. | Year

1849 2.7 2.8 2.6 5.8) Mada (Sls, (aS

1850 2.8 3.5 4.0 o8 | 7.84 “fe. |. 00

Mean. 27 3.1 aie 5.8 V5 7.6 5.4

Calcutta.

1856 3.3 3.0 3.8 AA Pr OPORTO [G2

If their variation from month to month is not always proportion-

ate to the variation in the excess of pressure, they show at least,

that in those months for which the excess of the pressure of the day

is smallest, June, July and August, during the rains, the range of

temperature is also at a minimum, and increases, as the former, in

the cold and hot seasons.

Supposing that the excess of barometrical pressure during the day

be owing to the amount of daily precipitation by condensation, the

average daily quantity of the latter would in round numbers cor-

respond to about the following quantities of water ;

Bombay 1849, 0.160 Inches.

1850, 0.180 ,,

Caleuttal856, 0.200 ,,

1858.] Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 43

which appears excessive, even for tropical climates; Bombay being

situated on an Island, and Calcutta not far from the Sea, in a coun-

try largely intersected with canals and rivers, it is not impossible

that the excess of the barometric pressure during the day time may

partly be attributed to the difference between the quantities of eva-

poration during the day and during the night. Observations of the

hygrometer at the sea level alone would not decide the question, as

they are only of local importance. Here also simultaneous observa-

tions at some elevation above the sea level would be of great use in

determining the hourly mean quantities of water contained in the

atmosphere in a vertical direction.

It would be premature, at present to attempt a full explanation

of the phenomenon which may, besides, depend on other causes, and

is most likely connected with the regular daily variation of the height

of the barometrical column. Further observations in different parts

of the country would be required. A direct test of the share which

the amount of daily precipitation by condensation and the quantity

of evaporation have in producing the excess of barometrical pressure

during the day would be found in accurate estimates of the average

amount of dew and fog for every day in the year, and in determina-

tions of the quantities of evaporation during the day and during the

night.

[ No. l.

Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill.

44.

‘a oned [= +:

Opa f19TUeU SI} =

UL poyeodaazut W90q ve

savy aBjs Be YT oe

poy ssuipvel Ty) °°

"24 NITeVD Je poatasqo | *°

SSUIPBat [BOTIIWOL i

-Bq 94} MOI, pouty} ae

-qo sny} sonjea oq} 2

Suljonpop pus simoy | Zcg

asoyy 40¥ (4 — 4G) | 826

S2oUaIIHIpP ouIyoULOd | GEOG

-vq dy} Sutzyejodaaqyut | FEE

Aq paatsiap atom TIT | x1 28

ay} uo udyRy UV2q |,198

pey SUOTJVAIOSGO |ygGQg

ou yoyM 38 smoy |ycgg

ay) LO} souIpead dYF,'4()88

‘Tudy

*F06 +LC6

L406 *BE6

£68 *966

618 *606

098 *168

(acts: G88

6F8 PSs

998 *006

G8 +616

€06 ¥6S6

CL6 *916

096 +966 GG |

896 +600

6L6 F00'9G

196 C66

PPr6 +696

*/06 *966

*968 |x606

*648 *988

#198 «P88

*198 *¢68

*9L8 *606

*968 +916

*988°SG |xP06'SS | xS66°9S

qudy | qady |

pie puz

“TEE 2? Wy

"9G8T | Tady | -pudy

«696 162

¥996 G6L

x696 G08

+096 GUS

¥SE6 908

+616 908

*816 |G6Z

866 =| F8Z,

196 G8Z

€16°S3 062

900 162

160 c6L

OFO L6L

PFO 008

6&0 664

600°92 |P6Z

086 = j98d

€96°96 |8ZLZ

«HOLL

> Soy

“= wee?

to. OGL

ee F6Z

43 6640

‘udy

4ST Iva

Yo sinoy PpeIAtoesqo |-sayouy sug ul eingeiedm9y.10} ¢o

“un jo worepod.i9qUy |-y5 91100 ‘TIME 943 UO ssuIpead [vol

-JWOIVT PIjNBYSQNs pue PoAIesgQ|-[¥O 3B sINYsIOPY JO suotsua,

616

966

686

896

686

LL6

686

F86

£86

G86

£66

686

v86'0

SPOT

LEO'T

690°T

OZO'T

606

&16

[86°0

L00°L

E86

026

1F6

9&6

v16

698

678

PPS

868

066

EF6

6860 |c96'0

Udy

PIE

C86

PL6

6LL

&h9

699

¢¢9

609

ol9

P8g

61S

GGG

OLS

sae)

OFS

IF8

O18

OsZ

ocZ

18Z

LIs

SPs

698

898

1G6'0

‘Tudy

Pug

*"soyouy YSIpouy ur vyqno

“XIGNHdd V

008

G08

F6L

LLL

G¢/

6oL

LoL

961

Pcl

6LL

108

O€s

FES

CF8

1Z8

608

88/

89L

P9L

194

OL!

08Z

161 '6@ |S9L°66 |9SL°6 |€62°6%

“9S8T

19 X

T€8

L18

BLL

@GZ

CEL

BEL

I¢Z

Vals

OLL

Pcl

961

Gol

869

[69

104

raw

OFZ

18Z

918

9¢8

6F8

L&8

918

Ggl

1ZZ

6PL

662

Gol

Lel

GGL

CLL

182

BLL

POL

91Z

el,

8oZ

FPL

PLL

918

QF8

0L8

618

088

fel)

268

108

694

GLL

6LL

062

cIg

€Z8

€18

962

6LL

eg)

Zl,

ELL

908

GES

088

206

816

€16

006

cls

0S8

0€8

FI8

818

|G38

qudy | pudy | qudy | judy

UIP

pig

puz

ISI

“OIL

-odua3 IO} poqoar1o0d ‘sayouTy ystsuyy

Ul VIINI[VD 3B SSUIPvoy [eoLjowoirg

C6866

AADTOOMNDRAOTAAAM TINONDAST

‘TA

‘SINOP]

Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill.

1858.]

P8113

OLL°L6

TIGL LS

El Lb

921°1Z

OGL°LS

66113

OFL LZ

LOL LZ

L08°L&

08 LZ

CES'LS

968° 2

Ch3' 1S

668' 16

*solouy

*QINSSI1g UBIT

EPPS O¢6Pl

GFFS OC6PL

6EFE Of6Fl

LEFE CG6PI

COPS SI6VI

PEPE OL6FI

GEPSE OO6FT

LPS O88Fl

GEPS 9S8FT

CGPS OL8FI

GEFs OO6FT

6EPE Of6rl

SPFE OS6FI

LVS C96PT

6PFE0000'0 — . ¢/6P[0000°0 —

I—i "I B07

qudy pag

PPB Lz

GIs Le

FOS LS

064° L6

€62°16

918 LG

GES LG

198° 26

"u00ON 168° 16

Il G66 LG

OL 966° 23

6 166 'L3

8 G16'23

Z F88°23

9 698 LZ

aN wd Or ONO

*saouy

‘QINSSIIg ULI]

‘OUUL,

——_—_

OSES O86PI 6

Lops OTST 8

19FE Ogosl L

19FE0000°0 — | 0€0910000°0 — |" *v9

[Udy [WP

CEE OL8FI F

GIFS CBF L ¢

OLPS GUsPI S

€1bs CISFI I

IGE OS8FL ‘UOON

CZFE OL8FL IT

PEPE OLGPL Or

GEFE PEP 6

STE 066FT 8

6SFE OGOST L

GSFE0000'0 — | 000¢T0000'0 — |"K"¥ 9

I—d "1 SOT *“OUlLY,

qudy 4s]

‘SOLNSSINT ILUgaUoLg una ayy fo uoYnnaInO ay2 us pahojdma sanjv4

‘XIGNUddV *

46 Buddhism and Odinism. [No. 1.

Buddhism and Odinism,—their similitude ; illustrated by Extracts

Jrom Professor Holmboe’s Memoir on the “ Traces de Buddhisme

en Norvége.’—By Babu Rksenpravht Mirra.

The obscurity in which the early history of India is enveloped,

has led the antiquary to hope that some light may be cast upon

it by the acquisition of monumental evidence. In that hope he

has laboured with assiduous care on inscriptions, coins, ancient

buildings and sepulchral mounds. He has met with relics which

keep alive his hope, and induce further investigation, and he has

clung to the expectation of one day finding enough to fill up the

gap which has been left in the annals of the country by the poverty

of its historic muse. Experience has taught him not to anticipate

great results from any particular research, for the unremitting labour

of days and months often brings him nothing better than a rude

mouldering urn, or a simple heap of ashes ; but he knows that little

as such results are, they still add that little to our scanty stock of

knowledge, and will in time accumulate, and be the means of elucid-

ating much in connexion with the manners and customs of the

ancient inhabitants of this land and their relation to other nations

of antiquity.

The gleaniugs which have thus been brought together during

the last fifty years in connexion with the history of Buddhism, are

already considerable. The era of Sakya Sifha has been established

on the most authentic testimony, and his biography is now nearly

as well known as of any other individual who lived two thousand

five hundred years ago. Vihdras, chaityas and pillars point out

the city of his birth, the places where he sojourned, the spot where

he died, and the monuments that were erected on his mortal re-

mains. The history of the religion he taught is being daily more

and more developed, and the darkness which hung over the course

that religion took in its spread over the different regions of Asia

is well nigh dispelled. )

Sir William Jones was the first who was struck by the similitude

of the words Buddha and Odin, and others noticed the coincidence

of their use in designating the fourth day of the week; but fifty

years ago there was nothing but vague suspicion that in its onward

1858. | Buddhism and Odinism. 47

course, Buddhism had travelled across the bounds of Asia and gone

on beyond the furthest limits of the European continent to the

freezing isle of Iceland, or that Odinism was nothing more than a

modification of the religion taught by the renowned prophet of

Magadha. The fact, however, has now emerged from the region

of crude conjectural speculation, and though not yet established

as a positive antiquarian discovery, has an array of evidence in

its favour, which will direct the course of subsequent inquiry and

lead to a definite consequence. Professor Westergaard and others

have shewn that the old Icelandic language bears a strong re-

semblance and, most probably, owes its origin to the Sanskrita, and

the work, of which we propose to make this paper a brief summary,

points out the relics which still exist both in Iceland and Scandina-

via of the former predominance in those places of a religion akin to

Buddhism.

It is much to be regretted that our enquiry into this subject has

to be conducted under serious disadvantages. History in Scandina-

via, until after the eleventh century, was as sterile as in India, and

the reader of Pagan literature knows even less of the doctrines and

usages of the Paganism which existed among the Northmen, than

does the Puranic, with reference to the Hinduism of the middle ages.

Of the doctrines and institutions of the religion of Odin we have

little that can be used for historical purposes. They are vague

and mystified, and evidently never formed the subject of the records

(Eddas) which have been handed down tous. Nor are we more

fortunate in the material remains of Odinism. The North is even

more poor than the East in relics of temples, statues, emblems,

images and symbols. The little, however, that are still available

both of legends and antiquities, bear so strong a resemblance to

Buddhist relics in India, that it would be bold indeed to declare

that their similitude is the result of an accidental coincidence.

Buddhism is characterised as eminently spiritual and free from

idolatry, so was the religion of the Germanic race from whom

Odinism was taken into Norway. Tacitus says* that the Germans

held that God is the Ruler over all; every other thing is subject

to and obedient to him, (“regnator omvium Deus, cetera subjecta

* Chapter 35.

48 Buddhism and Odinism. [No. 1.

atque parentia,’’) ; and again in another place ;* “ They do not think

that they can confine God within walls, nor liken him to any form of

the human face, as the greatness of the celestial bodies.”’ Herodotus

says, “the Getes (ancient Norwegians) were theists and held the

tenets of the soul’s immortality ;”’+ and the Buddhists hold that these

doctrines are intimately connected with their religion. The esoterics

of Buddhism inculcate a trinity of Gods as supreme Arbitors of the

universe; and Odinism doth the same. The Buddhists have their

Buddha, Dharma and Sangha, and their counterparts appear among

the Scandinavians as Odin, Thorand Frigga. Adam of Bremen, who

lived about the middle of the 11th century, in describing the princi-

pal temple of Odin, says, “ This nation has a most noble temple

which is called Upsala, situated not far from Sictona or Birka. In this

temple are statues of three gods entirely made of gold. The people

worship them. Of them Thor the most powerful, occupies the floor

in the centre, Woden and Fricco have places on the sides.’ This

position of the Odinie Trinity is unmistakeably the same as that which

the Buddhist trinity occupy to this day on the covers of Tibetan

Manuscripts or on the Sanchi gateway. Nor are they different in

their attributes. According to Grimm and other German writers,

Odin, Woden and Goden were names of the Supreme divine power

among the Germanic race, and Thor and Frygga were impersona-

tions of Divine attributes. With the Buddhists, Buddha is Primitive

Intelligence, and Dharma and Sangha its attributes.

Very little is known of the literature of Odinism, and of that

little we have but an imperfect knowledge. From the Edda of

Semund or that portion of it which is still extant, it would seem

that the religious books of Odinism were divisible into three parts ;

the first or “ Voluspa” referred to the creation and destruction of

the earth, the doings of the gods and the futurity of the soul. The

* Chapter 9.

*Ceterum nec cohibere parietibus Deos, neque in ullam humani oris speciem

assimilare ex magnitudine celestium arbitrantur.”

+ Tod’s Rajasthan I. 63.

t “ Nobilissimum illa gens templum habet quod Upsala dicitur, non longe posi-

tum a Sictona civitate vel Birka. In hoe templo, quod totum ex auro paratum

est, statuas trium deorum veneratur populus, ita ut potentissimus eorum Thor in

medio solum habeat triclinium, hinc et inde locum possident Woden et Fricco.”

1858.] Buddhism and Odinism. 49,

second or “ Havamal’’ included the moral precepts; and the third

was devoted to the magic powers of Odin. With the Buddhists, the

division of their books is equally threefold: they too have their

Sutra, Vinaya and Dharma, or fundamental principles, morals and

metaphysics; and if we make a sufficient allowance for the altered

physical condition and social states of the two races, the difference

will be but slight. .

Laing, in his translation of the Heimiskringla, after a careful ex-

amination of geneological data, deduces the date of Odin to be

about the end of the third century before Christ. That would be

nearly three centuries after the death of Buddha. But if we bear in

mind that the Buddhist colonists to the West must have progressed.

but slowly, and many of them started from India even in the

middle of the third century before Christ, in the reign of Asoka,

and that in their translation from their Indian or Scythic homes to

the banks of the Baltic, their religion suffered considerably in its

purity, we will be at no loss to find the cause for the anachronism in

question. To the same cause may be attributed the confusion that

may be noticed in the name of Buddha. Gautama is his name elect,

and this name is curiously enough reproduced in Norway as that

of his son. This may be an accident. But the fact of the name

being well known in two such distant places, is of itself a matter

worthy of notice, and offers strong temptation to the enquiry, is

Tuisto a Norwegian reproduction of the Buddhist Tusita ?

In the Buddhist mythology, the greatest opponent to goodness

is an immortal named Méra. He plays the same part as an adviser

of evil that Satan does according to the Christian theologians.

Hor years he tried to mislead S’Akya Siftha from his resolve to attain

Buddhahood, and invariably stood in the way of all who attempted

to excel in knowledge or religion. In his career of mischief he, has

travelled to Scandinavia, and without even much altering his name

“ still rides the modern Saxon in his sleep (nightmare) as he did the

Yugling king Vanland.”* He commanded a prominent position in

the Odinic mythology, and was known exactly by the same appella-

tion (Mara) and for the same disposition which has given him an

infamous notoriety among the Buddhists.

* Laing’s Sea Kings of Norway I. 92.

50 Buddhism and Odinism. [No. 1.

Col. Tod has noticed a number of curious analogies between the

customs, habits, manners and belief of the Rajputs and the ancestors

of the Northern Scythians; and these go a great way to shew that

they could not have existed, unless we admit a community of origin.

The worship of the sword, the reverence for the horse, the sacrifice:

of that animal as a religious obligation, were alike common both in

India and Scandinavia. In Iceland, where the horse is not indi-

genous, there existed the same reverence for the sacrifice of that

animal as it did among the Asiatic Seythians, and the early Chris-

tian fathers had to issue strict injunctions to restrain the people

from indulging in that unchristian ritual.

The Indo-Scythians were an equestrian race, and unlike most other

nations, used the horse both for the saddle and ia the war-chariot.

The charioteers were always the flower of their armies, and the heroes

of the Mahabharat and the Ramayana and even of the Vedas always

appear in their chariots. Such was also the case with the Getes ;

they too centred their chief strength in the cliariot. These analogies

are, no doubt much more ancient than Buddhism, but the Hindus

and the Scythians, by becoming Buddhists changed their code of

theological belief, not their customs and their knowledge, and there-

fore they may be fairly taken, ad valorem, as proofs of a community

of origin of the different races among whom they are found.

“In the last rites for the dead,” ‘says od, “ comparison will

yield proofs of original similarity. The funeral ceremonies ofScandina-

via have distinguished the national eras; and the ‘age of fire’ and

the ‘age of hills,’* designated the periods when the warrior was

committed to mother-earth or consumed on the pyre. Odin (Boodha)

introduced the latter custom and the raising of tumuli over the ashes

when the body was burned ; as also the practice of the wife burning

with her deceased lord. These manners were carried from Saca-

dwipa or Saca Scythia ‘where the Gete,’ says Herodotus ‘ was

consumed on the pyre or burned alive with her lord.’”’+ It is not

necessary to enquire whence the Buddhists obtained their practice

of burning the dead and raising tumuli on their ashes; suffice it to

say, that they have it from an early age, long before it was introduced

* Mallet’s Northern Antiquities, chap. XIT.

+ Rajasthan T. p. 73.

1858. | Buddhism and Odinism. 51

into Seardinavia, and therefore it must follow that either the Bud-

dhists gave the practice directly to the people of the North, or both

must have received it from one common source, the plateau of

central Asia—that officina gentium whence in the darkness of

time far beyond the limits of history, peopies and races have come

forth to take possession of the earth.

That the former is the case appears probable from the fact of the

practice in question having been carried to the North along with

the religion of the Buddhists.

Monumental remains of the Odinists, Be eheed in Scandinavia or

elsewhere, may be described as consisting principally of megaliths

and mounds. ‘The former include a variety of structures from a

single erect block of stone implanted on the road-side to the most

complicated and cyclopean structures, such as the Stonehenge.

They are found universally distributed from India to Scandinavia,

and mark the progress of the Buddhists in their migrations to the

North.

_ The monoliths of India such as the Sati stones and lats are

reproduced in Western Europe in the “ standing stones,” so abun-

dant in the Channel Islands, and so peculiar to the Druidical priests.

The ortholiths and parallelliths or single and double rows of standing-

stones, are equally common in both places, and alike devoted to

ceremonial purposes. ‘The next are the cycloliths or circles of

erect distinct stones. They sometimes enclosed open spaces, where

most probably the Druids performed their ceremonials, and some-

times surrounded cromlechs or temples. In Southern India, these

are still abundant, and their full development gave rise to the

colonnaded enclosures which surround the topes of central India.

In the large tope of Sanchi, they are rough-hewn blocks surmounted

by top stones.

Dolmens, cistvaens, cromlechs and peristaliths are not without

their counterparts in India—and they were evidently devoted to the

same purpose. Dr. Wise, late Secretary to the General Committee

of Public Instruction, in an excellent paper on the subject published

in the Transactions of the Royal Society of Edinburgh,* has collect-

ed a large number of instances in which “the general identity, in

* Vol. XXI. pt. II, p. 255.

H 2

52 Buddhism and Odinism. [No. 1.

idea and design,” of the Celtic structures of Kurope and the Bud-

dhist relics of India, are most curiously illustrated, and from their

study, the learned author was led to the inference “that races of

Asiatics proceeded westward at different ages and established them-

selyes along the shores of the Baltic and the Mediterranean seas,

and part of the Atlantic ocean ; along which they have left character-

istic monuments which resemble those of their original country.”’*

The next source of evidence of the identity of the Buddhists and

the Odinists are their tumuli or mounds, which, in their most

primitive form, were cairns or burrows—small heaps of earth marking

the spots where were deposited the dead or their ashes; and in

their full development appeared as the Topes of India and the

haugs or tumuli of North Western Europe. In idea and design,

they bear even a greater similitude to each other, than do the

megaliths. They are generally, though not invariably, sepulchral,

and are always intended to record the memory or the acts of saints,

or men distinguished for their superior knowledge of religion.

Professor Holmboe’s object in the memoir under notice is to prove

this similitude. With that view he has examined the topes with

reference to their size, their design, their grandeur, their symbolism,

their interior arrangements, and their accessories, and his work

attests the zeal, industry and success with which he has achieved

his purpose.

The first section of the work is devoted to the examination of the

Topes as the memorials of saints or their actions. He says “ accord-

ing to the legends of the Buddhists, they had, several centuries before

the commencement of our era, adopted the custom of raising large

monuments for preserving the relics of Buddha and of his principal

disciples; and sometimes for perpetuating the memory of some of

his actions on the spots where they had happened.

‘“‘ These edifices are generally of colossal proportions, and are con-

structed of stones or bricks on a basement which is sometimes

formed of a regular quadrangular wall ; and at other times of blocks

of rough stones thrown together without any order. These are

called in Sanskrit stupa, which strictly signifies “a heap,”’ “a mound,”

* Vide passim the Madras Journal of Literature and Science, Vols. XIII. and

XIV, pp. 47 and 77 et seq. respectively, and Cunningham’s Bhilsa Topes.

1858. ] Buddhism and Odinism. 53

or “a tumulus.”” This word has been altered and abridged, so that

the people of Hindustan and Afghauistan now eall these monuments

topes : in Afghanistan they are also called burj or “towers.” In

Ceylon they are called tupa; but more frequently dagoba, a word

altered from the Sanskrit dhatugopa, that is the receptacle of preci-

ous relics. In Tibet they bear the name of chostin or ehhodtin,

“The following legend contains a description of the Stupa and

may be taken as its beau idéal.

‘At that time, in the presence of Bhagavat, (Buddha) in the

middle of the assembly which was facing him, from the South, there

arose a stupa of seven precious substances ;* it was five hundred

yojanas in height, and of a proportionate circumference. It wag

raised high in the air, and seemed as if suspended from the skies ;

it was handsome and pleasing to the sight, ornamented with five

thousand balconies, and strewed over with flowers, embellished with

many thousands of doors, with thousands of standards and flags, and

surrounded with thousands of garlands made of precious stones .

having a belt made of cotton cloths and little bells, aud the whole

was redolent to a great distance with the perfume of the sandal and

of the leaves of the tamala. The line of umbrellas with which the

edifice was surmounted reached the habitations of the gods.’+

“To this legend, which describes the idéal, we will add what Mr.

Cunningham says of the real tope.

“The tope”’ says he, ‘is a solid hemispherical building, varying

in grandeur from the great chaitya of Sanchi, which has a diameter

of 106 feet, to the smallest at Bhojpur, the diameter of which ig only

six feet. The most ancient topes were simple hemispheres, as the

great chaitya of Sanchi, which dates probably six centuries before

the era of Jesus Christ. This was continued to the period of

the Bhilsa topes which date from the end of the third century of

ourera. In these, the hemisphere ig raised some feet (from the

ground) on a plinth, by the addition of a cylindrical portion. The

topes of the third class are found in Afghanistan, and are not older

than the commencement of the Christian era. In them, the hemis-

* i.e. of gold, silver, lapis lazuli, emerald, rock crystal, red pearls (coral ?) and

diamonds,

t Lotus de la bonne loi, p. 145,

54 Buddhism and Odinism., PNesk.

phere is considerably raised on a plinth. The last class, of which the

Sarnath tope near Benares is a magnificent specimen, has a hemis-

phere raised to a height as great as the diameter of the tope.”’

* % * * * * x

“Tn the topes dedicated to the celestial Buddha nothing was

deposited; but the divine spirit, which is light, was supposed to

dwell in the interior, and this was proclaimed outside by a pair of

eyes, placed opposite to each of the four sides, either at the base

or the summit of the building. Thus in the great chaitya in the

neighbourhood of Kathmandu in Nepal, which is dedicated to

Sambhu or Svayambhunatha, the eyes are placed on the sides near the

crown of the edifice ; such is also the case in numerous chodtens (m-

chhod r-ten) of Tibet, which are dedicated to the celestial Buddha,

and distinguished from the Dung-tens (g-Dungr-Ten) which are

erected to the honour of mortal Buddhas. The first name signifies

an offering to the divinity, the last a receptacle for bones (g-Dung),

that is to say a building containing the bones or relics of some one

of the mortal Buddhas. In that case the eyes occupy a place

near the base.

“These monuments were not used exclusively for the preservation

of the remains and the memory of saints, but were sometimes used

for those of kings, as M. Burnouf inform us. ‘ According to the

traditions of the Buddhists of the South,’ says he, ‘the relics of

Buddhas were not the only objects which were entitled to preserva-

tion in these large edifices (the stupas). I find on the subject a

positive injunction in Tupa vamsa pali: ‘a venerable tathagata, who

"is perfectly and completely a Buddha, has a right toa stupa;a

Pratchtcheka Buddha hasa right to a stupa; an auditor of a tathagata

has a right to a stupa; a chakkavatti Raja has a right to a stupa.’

“ As the legends of India attribute to Buddha, the origin of the

stupas or topes, so does traditions of Norway attribute the origin

of their haugs (or large artificial mounds) to Odin. The author of

the History of the kings of Norway, Snorro Sturlason thus expresses

himself on this subject :

“ Odin established the same law in his land that bad been in

force in Asaland. Thus he established by law that all dead men

should be burned, and their property laid with them upon the pile,

1858. | Buddhism and Odinism. 55

and the ashes be cast into the sea or buried in the earth. Thus, said

he, every one will come to Valhalla with the riches he had with him

upon the pile; and he would also enjoy whatever he himself had

buried in the earth. For men of consequence a mound should be

raised to their memory, and for all other warriors who had been

distinguished for manhood, a standing stone; which custom remain-

ed long after Odin’s time.’*

“Thus we have not only express statement that remains of the

brave should be disposed in haugs, but history informs us that

such was most frequently the case. Again, as the topes were the

objects of veneration and adoration, so were the haugs in Scandinavia.

There may be found traces of this respect even in later days in

Norway, for there was a custom fora long time not to allow any

body to fell trees or disturb the herbage in the neighbourhood of

these edifices.

“The author of the work entitled the Lalita Vistara,t biographer

of Gautama Buddha, says, that on bis death, men of eight different

countries disputed for his corpse, and the quarrel was not appeased

until the body was divided among the combatants, of whom each

raised a stupa on the portion he had got.

“ Snorro relates an analogous occurrence in the History of Haitden

Swarte (or the black) king of a part of Norway. Here are his words:

“The people thought so much of him, that when his death was

known, and his body was floated to Ringerige to bury it there, the

people of most consequence from Raumarige, Westfold, and Hede-

mark, came to meet it. All desired to take the body with them to

bury it in their own district, and they thought that those who got

it would have good crops to expect. At last it was agreed to divide

the body into four parts. The head was laid in a mound at Stein

in Ringerige, and each of the others took his part home and laid it in

a mound ; and these have since been called ‘ Halfdan’s mounds.’ ’’+

The Saga tradition, it will be perceived runs on all fours with the

* Apud Laing, vol. I. p. 228.

+ The Lalita Vistara does not advert to this cireumstance. M.Csoma de

Kérés noticed it in the Dulva. Sce his Essay on the Life of Sakya Siiha ;

Asiatic Researches, vol. XX. p. 315 et seq.

{ Apud Laing, vol. I. p. 269.

56 Buddhism and Odinism. [ No. 1.

description of the disposal of the remains of Buddha, as given in the

Tibetan books, and although relating to circumstances which occurred

at a very distant place, still affords an instance of a coincidence

which cannot be altogether valueless in examining the relation of

the two systems of religion.

“In the manner of treating the remains of the dead, the analogy

is borne not only in burying the body and erecting topes thereon,

but we find that in Scandinavia, the ashes of men of little importance

were deposited in urns and buried under earth or thrown into the

water, just as the Buddhists of Ceylon put the ashes of their dead

into urns and deposite them under the earth, or as the Buddhists

of Nepal, who throw the ashes of their dead into water” (p. 8.)

The second section of the work is devoted to shew the identity

of the form of the haugs of Norway with the topes of India; and

then follow in the next section a few hypotheses as to the

symbolism of the tope; the most probable of which appear to be

that they represent a bubble floating on the sea as emblematic of

the vanity of the human body.

In the fourth section the author conveys an idea of the im-

mense masses of materials that are brought together to give to these

monuments an imposing appearance, by describing the size of some

of the largest topes and haugs.

He says, “the Valdershaug at Valderde, an island near the

coast of Sdndm6r, a district in the diocese of Bergen, is nearly four

hundred feet in cireumference, and from 14 to 16 feet in perpendi-

cular height. It appears to have been twice as high before.

“The Aushaug in the parish of Ulfsteen, diocese of Bergen, has a

circumference of 450 feet, and a height of 32 feet. A haug at

Vigerée in the same diocese, has a circumference of 330 feet and a

height of 24 feet. In the parish of Urland of the same diocese,

there are several haugs, some of which are more than 400 feet in

circumference. In the parish of Glopen of the same diocese, there

is a haug having a circumference of more than 5380 feet and a per-

pendicular height of 24 feet. In the parish of Yttre Holmedal of

the same diocese, there are two haugs, one of which is 340 feet in

circumference and 32 feet in height, and the other 400 feet in cir-

cumference and 16 to 18 feet in height.

1858. ] Buddhism and Odinism. 57

“ Tt should be remarked that the dimensions above given, have not

been measured by instruments, but that the circumference was

ascertained by a man walking round the ruins, and the height by a

comparison with the height of man.

“We shall now measure a few of the most considerable topes in

Asia. The Manikyala tope, between Attock and Lahore, is 310 to

320 feet in circumference, and, even to our days, has a height of

80 feet; it was considerably higher before.

“The Amardvati tope, near the river Krishna, in the Guntoor

Sircar, has acircumference of 500 feet, and a height, at present, of

16 feet only.

“The Bhilsa tope, in the neighbourhood of Sanchi, 8. W. of Bun-

dlekund, is 554 feet in circumference, and 120 feet in height. It

was higher before.

“The Abhayagtrt Dagoba, in Ceylon, at present has a height of 220

feet ; but tradition says that at one time it had a height of 408 feet.

“The Jaitavana Dagoba, also in Ceylon, had, it is said, a height of

360 feet, and still contains a number of bricks which would, accord-

ing to the calculation of Major Forbes, suffice for a wall six feet high,

two feet broad, and 97 English miles in length (nearly 380 leagues

French.)

“ The topes of Afghanistan are rarely more than 150 feet in cir-

cumference, and their height is ordinarily 30 to 40 feet.

“The Mahdstupa, also called Sonndvali, which Raja Duchtagamamt

had erected near the ancient capital of Ceylon, is placed on a square

terrace 180 feet on each side, and paved all over with flags of

granite. The stupa itself is 120 feet in diameter and 189 feet in

height.”

Compared with Indian topes the haugs noticed by M. Holmboe

appear to be wanting much in height. But they are not always

quite so low. Professor Verelius, in his notes ou the Harvrar Saga,

adverts to 669 tumuli, of which three, near Gamle Upsala, are said to

be three hundred and fifty paces in circumference, and the ascent

to them on any side takes about seventy-five steps, which would

give them a perpendicular height of more than ninety feet.

With reference to the construction of these monuments, M,

Holmboe observes that while the Indian edifices are all built with

58 Buddhism and Odinism. [No. 1.

cement, those of Norway and Finmark shew no signs of any cement

having been used in their construction.

In the interior of the tope as well as of the haug there is a quad-

rangular chamber formed of flags of stone, and placed generally on a

level with the ground surrounding the monument, sometimes on a

level with the upper surface of the basement, and sometimes higher

up, but never below the level of the surrounding land.

As appendages to the topes and the haugs may be enumerated flags

on the summit, pilasters on the sides, pillars around, pavements and

ditches surrounding the tumuli, tanks and tombs in their vicinity,

and cells of the officiating priests.

Flags were common to the monuments both of India and Norway ;

but of the other accessories, Norwegian monuments seem to have

had less than those of India. Tanks and wells are invariably found in

the neighbourhood of topes, because supplies of water were absolute

necessities for ceremonial purposes among the Indian Buddhists ;

but in a country like Norway, where ablutions could not be generally

enforced, they must necessarily be few. They are, however, not

altogether wanting. At Vigerde, near the coast of Séndmor in the

diocese of Bergen, there is a large haug, having in its neighbourhood

a rectangular excavation, 54 feet long, 40 feet broad, and 6 feet deep,

the sides being regular and sloping. It is singular in appearance and

attracts the attention of all who visit the locality. To account for

its origin, it has been said that it was excavated to afford the neces-

sary material for the erection of the haug; while others suppose it

to be the foundation of a house; but both these hypotheses seem

to be inconsistent with its regular shape and sloping sides, and

we must therefore take it to be the remains of a tank. Similar

excavations exist in the neighbourhood of haugs in the dis-

tricts of Indre-Holmedal, Yttre-Holmedal, Sielde and Tysnaes.*

M. Strom} supposes that there existed at one time a subterranean

* “Tt is curious, that in the United States of America may be found artificial

mounds, consisting of many layers of different materials and formed in the shape

of cupolas, often having a tank in its vicinity (Transact. American Ethnological

Society, Vol. III. p. 157). These mounds suggest the idea of a population pro-

ceeding from the Norwegians, who discovered America in the year 1000 of our

era.” Holmboe, p. 23. + Séndmors Beskrivelse II. p. 41.

1858. ] Buddhism and Odinism. 59

passage from the excavation at Gamle Upsala to the haug in its

neighbourhood: traces of such passages have been found under

mounds and barrows in the north of Eugland; and Indian antiqua-

rians have suspected their existence under the topes of Ceylon and

Central India. Mr. Masson notices them in the neighbourhood of

Afghan topes.

Pilasters are not necessary adjuncts to topes: they occur on the

eylindrical shafts of the topes of the second class, such as those of

Afghanistan,and may be compared with a peculiar construction on the

Kongshaug at Augvaldsnes in the island of Karmoe. M. Holmboe

describes it thus: “The sides of the haug are ornamented with a

series of small cells or chambers open in the front, of which the

intermediate spaces, at some distance, present the appearance of

pilasters.’’*

Collonaded verandas round the central hemisphere are unknown

in Norway. In India, they are noticable only in the most finished

topes, such as those of Anuradhapur of Ceylon, and of Bhilsa and

Afghanistan. Ranges of pillars of brick or stone, and wooden pali-

sades are not uncommon around topes. They enclosed spaces which

used, most probably, to be occupied by the congregation on days of

public worship. In some topes two and even three ranges of pali-

sades have been found.t They do not seem to have been very

frequent around haugs, but around the boutreehaugt (mound of the

bou tree) there may be seen a range of stone shafts set up vertically

which bear the closest analogy to the palisades in question.

Around the great temple of Gamle Upsala, a wooden palisade is

supposed to have existed, and we read in Scaldic poetry of a golden

ring, or chain, or serpent, surrounding the temple of Odin which, it

would be no great stretch of imagination, to reckon as the counter-

* Holmboe, p. 18.

+ A fence similar to this has been noticed by Dr. Wise around a Hindu

temple at Calna, belonging to the R4j4 of Burdwan. In a neighbouring temple

I was struck by the appearance of a stone figure which was represented to me as

that of Vishnu, but which bore the closest similitude to the Buddhist figures

excavated by the late Major M. Kittoe from the ruins of Buddha Gaya.

t Urda 11, p. 325. Ihave no means of ascertaining the Norwegian meaning

of the word bow, but its use in connexion with a haug suggests the idea of its

sinilitude with the Buddhist “bo” being more than accidental.

60 Buddhism and Odinism. [ No. 1.

part of the Indian palisades. In Burmah the fences of the kiungs

are made of the tails of dragons and monsters whose heads orna-

ment the sides of the gateway.

Small tombs in the neighbourhood of topes and haugs owe their

origin to an idea of sanctity attached to these monuments, and the

desire, so common in mankind, to place the remains of their relatives

in or about places reputed to be holy. In Afghanistan these tombs

differ from the topes in not having the cylindrical shaft which joins

the hemisphere of the tope with the basement, and their contents be-

ing purely sepulchral in their character, consisting chiefly of bones,

ashes and charcoal, and having none of the precious articles notica-

ble in the topes. “ They are placed generally, to the north, the south

or the west of the tope, but never to the east.’ ‘ In Scandinavia, it

is not possible to distinguish, by their form, the tombs from the more

sacred monuments, but from the groups of these mounds, it is to be

supposed that the most sacred monuments are the largest ; and when

they are opened their contents in every instance are different.’ *

The interior arrangement of the topes and haugs has been

already observed to be generally the same, but in the topes of

Darounta, in Afghanistan, Mr. Masson observed that “ the whole

mass of the structure is divided into four parts, by passages inter-

secting each other at right angles: the passages extend the entire

depth of the building, and have a breadth of five or six feef or more.

Inferior tumuli do not always exhibit this peculiarity of construction,

which may nevertheless be deemed genuine, and possibly prescribed,

being found in the more ancient monuments.’’+ A similar con-

struction is noticed in the mound raised over the remains of Frey king

of Sweden, which had a door and three openings forming a cross.

We shall now notice the relic contents of the topes and haugs.

M. Holmboe says, “the articles deposited in these monuments are very

much alike.’ In the recesses of the topes occur finely powdered

earth, sand, charcoal and ashes, preserved in vases of terra cotta,

stone, gold, silver, copper or iron: In one instance a wooden vase has

been found. Around the vases, and sometimes within them, occur

ornaments of gold, silver and copper, precious stones, various resins,

sinall bells, gold foil, glass and crystal cylinders, and bottles con-

* Holmboe, p. 23. ¢ Ariana Antiqua, p. 923. * Holmboe, p. 24.

1858. ] Buddhism and Odinism. 61

taining a brown acrid fluid, and fragments of leaves and of bark

written over with the Indo-Bactrian characters. The contents of

haugs include finely powdered earth, brownish sand, ocherous

earth, and vases or urns of stone, iron, copper and wood, but

rarely of glass, gold* or silver; containing gold coins, fragments

of bones, ashes, ornaments, and of gold, silver or bronze. Various

resinous and fatty matters, ingots and foils of gold, pearls, frag-

ments of wood and bark, once a bit of birch wood, once a glass

vase containing a brown rancid fluid, and at another time a glass

phial containing traces ofa fluid, have also been observed among the

contents of haugs. Among the articles most common in topes are

earthen lamps, which seem to have formed one of the principal

offerings with the Buddhists to the manes of their ancestors.

They have never been met with in the haugs, where their place is

supplied by fragments of swords and spears. ‘“ This difference is

owing,

whom the haugs were erected.’ The coins found in the haugs are

no doubt, to the bellicose propensity of the people among

inferior in execution to those found in the topes, but they bear a

strong resemblance to the mintage of Azes and of his successors,

which have been found in abundance in the topes of Afghanistan.

Buddhist coins have generally a mystic cross (swastika) im-

printed on them. The emblem is held in high veneration, and the

Hindus have adopted it “to give to their coins, inscriptions and

ceremonials a sign of benediction and happy augury,” although

they have no distinct conception of the manner in which it is to

produce the beneficial results they seek. In the Bracteates found

in Scandinavia, whether within haugs or elsewhere, we find this

mystic symbol reproduced in all its entirety ; and ancient sepul-

chral stones found in the cemetery at Gjerde in the parish of Etune,

diocese of Bergen, and at Suéde in the parish of Skeftuna, pro-

vince of Upland, shew it with but slight variation. M. Mionnet

notices this cross as a monogram of ancient Gaul, where it must have

travelled with the religion of Odin before the advent of Jesus Christ.

It is uncertain if the phallic worship had ever been transported to

Scandinavia, but some sacred stones found in haugs admit of a very

close comparison with the dinga of India; and the jarkanasteen has

* Many gold vases are said to have been found in Denmark.

62 Buddhism and Odinism. [No. 1.

been supposed to be an imitation of the Vaishnavite saligram.

After adverting to these, M. Holmboe dwells at some length on the

peculiar veneration with which the Buddhists and the Odinists hold

the adoration of trees. The Bo tree of India is the prototype

of the birch of Scandinavia, and we find them both as unfailing

attendants of topes and haugs and equally the objects of almost

divine veneration.

In the neighbourhood of topes may-be noticed a large number of

cells or caves which formed the dwellings of the officiating priests, who

from their vicinity, in the palmy days of Buddhism in India, chanted

forth their adoration to Primeval Intelligence Adi Buddha. Their coun-

terparts are not quite so abundant in Scandinavia. Dwelling-houses

there were generally built of wood and othereasily perishable materials,

which cannot be expected to leave traces behind them after the decay

of centuries. We nevertheless find there remains of houses and caves,

whose situation indicates that they must have been attached to

some sacred monument. The cells around the Oushaug has been

already adverted to. From them a road six feet broad and a hun-

dred feet long, leads to two houses which most likely were at one

time the domiciles of priests. A number of caverns have been noticed

by Bishop Newmann in the diocese of Bergen,—a place which seems

to have been at one time the head quarters of Odinism in Norway.

*« Dragons or imaginary serpents having limbs of different ani-

mals and even of man, play a prominent part in the mythology

and the ornamental arts of the ancient Scandinavians. ‘They may

be seen on their Bracteates of gold and on divers ornaments of

gold and silver. Hven after the introduction of the Christian reli-

gion, sculptors transported figures of dragons on their household

goods and on a large number of sepulchral stones ; and the walls and

the doors of our ancient churches had no commoner ornament than

interlaced dragons.

“The serpent does not occupy a remarkable place among the

animals of Scandinavia; it becomes difficult, therefore, to explain

how it came to enjoy that high position on their monuments,

unless we suppose it to have been borrowed from some country

where it attracts a large share of attention, as is the case in

* Holmboe, p. 58.

1858. | Buddhism and Odinism. 63

India, which abounds in serpents, the most dangerous on account

of their poison, their size, and their force. As a consequence of

this abundance, the ancient legends of India are full of narrations

about dragons endowed with extraordinary qualities. (According

to those legends) they speak, they reason, they are their princes

and princesses, they perform miracles, they unite with men in

marriages, &c. &c. ‘The Biographer of Hiouen Thsang makes men-

tion of tanks peopled with dragons in the neighbourhood of topes ;

and these dragons are so pious that having metamorphosed themselves

into men, they respectfully cireumambulate the topes or stupas. The

same biographer iniorms us that the Buddhists figured dragons on

their sculptures; he mentions for example a convent at Pataliputra

which had pavilions with pillars ornamented with dragons.* Among

the ruins of other Buddhist towns we often find sculptures repre-

senting serpents and lizards.t In the cell of a dagoba, opened in

1820, near Columbo in Ceylon, there were found, among other ordi-

nary articles, clay images of serpents called the cobra di capello.t

The same taste for sculptures in wood representing interlaced

figures which was in vogue in Norway during the middle ages, may

now be seen in the Buddhist kingdom of Nepal; and we thus find

at Kathmandu, the capital, near the approach of a bridge a gateway

having over it a kind of coat of arms supported by two serpents.’’§

M. Holmboe devotes the seventeenth section of his work to the

examination of a class of long narrow mounds peculiar to Tibet and

Scandinavia. Dr. Thomson, in his travels in the Himalaya, noticed

one of these near Leh, in the province of Ladak, which was nearly

half a mile in length. “ It consists,” he says, “of two parallel

walls, twelve or fifteen feet apart, and nearly six feet high, the

intervals between which are filled up with stones and rubbish, and

the whole covered with a sloping roof. * * * On the roof are

laid large slabs of slate every one of which is covered with Tibetan

letters, and more rarely with a rude design of a temple.’’|| The height

* Hiouen Thsang, 128—51.

+ Sirr I. p. 332. Ritter, die Stupa’s, p. 210. Forbes I. p. 415—16.

{ 7d. 90—91.

§ Egerton I. p. 189—190,

| Thomson’s Himalaya and Tibet, p. 183.

64 Buddhism and Odinism. [No. 1.

and the breadth of these constructions are generally very much alike,

but the length varies from a few feet to near half a mile. The charac-

ters represent the mystic formula Om mani padme hum repeated a

number of times, and the construction itself is called after the

second word of the formula a Mant. In Scandinavia these con-

structions have undergone but little change. In their height and

breadth they are alike, and in length they vary just as much as

the Tibetan Manis. ‘Their roofs have suffered much from decay,

and, in many instances, are altogether gone; and they have no

inscriptions.

In the eighteenth section M. Holmboe passes on from relies to

historical testimony to “ prove the birth of Odinism in the bosom of

Buddhism.” He avails himself of the opinion started by Snorro

that on the fall of Mithridates, Odin and his followers proceeded

northwards from Asia to escape the Roman yoke, and that on reach-

ing Scandinavia they supplanted the Celts who had before them taken

the country from the Mongols—a race whom we now recognize

in the Laplander, the Sameeid and the Esquimaux. He says,*—

“The father of Norwegian history Snorro Sturlason, after having

pointed out Tanaqvisl (Tanais on the Don) as the frontier between

Europe and Asia, continues in these words :—

“¢The country east of the Tanaqvisl was called Asaland (the

country of Ases) or Asaheim (the home or native land of Ases), and

the chief city in that land was called Asgard (the city of Ases).

In that city was a chief called Odin, and it wasa great place for

sacrifice. +

‘‘ A little after he says; ‘There goes a great mountain barrier

from North-east to South-west, which divides the great Svithiod from

other kingdoms. South of this mountain ridge it is not far to Turk-

land, where Odin had great possessions. f The great mountain

barrier mentioned is the Caucasus, for he has said before that

Svithiod was situated to the North of the Black Sea; and by the

country of the Turks he alludes evidently to the country which at

present bears the name of Turkistan, for he says subsequently that

Odin, quitting his native home with his companions, proceeded on

towards the West and arrived in Gardarike (Russia).

* Holmboe, p. 63, et seq. + Ynglinga Saga, Chap. II. ft Id. Chap. V.

1858. | Buddhism and Odinism. 65

“ Having thus demonstrated that Snorro places the birth-place

of the Ases in Turkistan, we see that Chinese, Greek and Latin

writers speak of a people or of a race of Ases in the same regions.

A Chinese author mentions that, in the second century before Jesus

Christ, there arrived at Lo-Jang, capital of China, a Saman* of the

race of Ases, who lived on the banks of the river Oxus, and who had

translated the holy book which he had brought with him, and which

led to the conversion of a Jarge portion of mankind to Buddhism.}

Strabot says that, among the people who, issuing forth from beyond

the banks of the Jaxartes, invaded Bactria and snatched the posses-

sions of Alexander’s successors, the most distinguished were called

the (Aci) Asioi. 'Trogus Pompeius makes mention of the same cir-

cumstance in these words ‘Sarance et Asiani Bactra occupavere,’

and in another place, he calls “reges Tocharorum Asiauni,’’§ expres-

sions which led M. Lassen to start the opinion that the Asii or

Asiani were not the same people, but tribes of a distinguished

race, from whom the kings of Tochares deduce their origin.|| This

hypothesis acquires some appearance of truth, if we suppose that

it is the same name which we read on the coins with the legend

BASIAEOQS BASIAEQN METPAAOY AZOY. A great number of

these coins were discovered in the topes; and they have been

found elsewhere, particularly to the North and Hast of Peshawur, in

much larger quantities than any other variety. It is worthy of

remark that the coins of Azes present a greater number of types

than those of any other sovereign whose coins have been found

in the topes; a reason which led Mr. Wilson to suppose that they

are not to be attributed to one single king, but to Azes and several

of his successors who flourished in the first century before Christ

and laterally. The hypothesis of M. Lassen is supported by Jor-

nandes, who says, Gothi proceres suos anses, 1. e. semideos voca-

* “Saman or rather Cramana, “ ascetics who have subdued their senses,” is

a term which designates the Buddhist clergy.”

+ Zeitschrift f. d. k. de Morgenl. III. p. 121—123.

t Strabo I. XI. 8, 2, (p. 511).

§ Trog. Pomp. XLI. XLII.

|| Indische Alterthumskunde, II. p. 360.

§ Ariana Antiqua, p. 320, et seq.

66 Buddhism and Odinism. [ No. 1.

vere.’ Now the word ans of the Gothic language is identical with

the ds of the ancient language of Norway.*

“Téis probably the same dynasty of which the Chinese annals

make mention when they say that in the first century after Christ

the prince of Kuei-Chuang, conquered all the country of the Amszus

around Kabul, Kandahar and Kophen.} The same annals speak, in

another place, of a people or a dynasty of Amsz in Soghdiana, in the

first century before Christ.t

“JT hope I have now produced satisfactory arguments to prove

that the Asaland of Snorro is identical with the country of the

Azes, of which we have spoken above. We shall now demonstrate

that Buddhism had extended into those countries in less than

two centuries before Christ, and continued to be professed for

several centuries after that period.

“The first powerful sovereign who embraced Buddhism was the

king of India, Asoka, who reigned in the third century before Christ ;

and to record that event he erected pillars and large blocks of

stone with inscriptions mentioning the adoption of that religion.

One of these blocks has been discovered in Kabulistan. This

monarch sent envoys to the Greek kings of Syria and Heypt, to

obtain their permission to preach Buddhism in their dominions.

“The Chinese annals record that in the second century before

our era, their general Hukiuping, when carrying on a war against the

Hiunegnus, met at the king of Hin-thia, to the West of the mountains

of Yarkand, a gilt statue to which offerings were made ;§ and the

commentators of the Chinese historian Pan-ku declare that that statue

was of Buddha.|| I have already shewn from those annals that in

* When the vowel a receives the long accent (4), in the Norwegian language,

it is pronounced as aw or ao, and often corresponds with the syllable én in the

cognate languages; for example Sanskrit hansa ; German, gans ; Norwegian, gas

*‘ goose.’ The Norwegian asand the Gothic, aus, are undoubtedly derived from

the Sanskrit, ansu, a “ray,” “light,” “splendour,” and consequently ansi or ast

means splendid, a very convenient epithet for a distinguished family.

+ Foe Koue Ki, p. 83.

{ A. Remusat, Now. Melanges, t. I. p. 175.

§ Lassen’s Indische Alterth. II. p. 54,

\| Journal des Savants, 1854, p, 280.

1858. | Buddhism and Odinisin. 67

the second century before Jesus Christ, a Buddhist priest arrived

from the banks of the Oxus to China, and converted a large number

of men.

“About the end of the fourth century, the Chinese pilgrim

Fa-Hian proceeded towards the West, in company of some of his

countrymen to search, in the words of his historian, for the precepts

of the Law, that is to say, to learn the precepts of Buddha in the

countries where he had preached them for the first time. In the

course of his travels he arrived at the town of Khoten, and found

that the religion of Buddha was professed there with great zeal ;

there were a large number of spacious and magnificent convents,

some of which contained thousands of the clergy; they possessed

precious images of Buddha, which they used to take about during

their numerous processions, in which even their kings took a part.*

After leaving Khoten he pursued his travels towards the West, and

traversed the countries which we have seen to have been inhabited

by the Azes, and met a number of his co-religionists.

“ Another Buddhist pilgrim of China, Hiouen Thsang by name,

undertook a peregrination in the seventh century with the same

object as Fa Hian, that is to say, to study the doctrine of Buddha

in the countries where he had preached it himself. He passed

through the whole of Higher Asia as far as Bamian, among the

mountains to the North of Kabulhistan, and found that place to be

a thriving centre of Buddhism.

“One may form some idea of the flourishing state of Buddhism in

these places when he is told that the kings of Lassa in Tibet, in the

seventh century, sent to the valley of Kabul for architects to erect

Buddhist temples. We see now that Buddhism flourished in those

countries before the period when Odin forsook his native land to

establish himself among the ancestors of the Scandinavians, and the

topes attest that the profession of Buddhism was continued for

several centuries.

“The true situation of Asgard will no doubt remain unknown

* Foe Koue Ki and U Histoire de la Ville de Khoten, traduit du Chinois par

A. Remusat, Paris 1820.

7 Sanang Seetsen, Geschichte der Ost Mongolen von I Schmidt, St. Peters-

burgh 1829; Abschan IL. Z%belisehe Geschichte, p. 41.

K 2

68 Buddhism and Odinism. [No. 1.

until the epoch of Odin’s emigration is thoroughly ascertained. It

appears to me that the name Asgard is identical with Asagarta of the

Bisdutoiin (Bagistana) inscription, which in the enumeration of the

provinces which belonged to the monarchy of Darius is named im-

mediately above Parthia. M. Lassen thinks that we should search for

Asagarta to the West of Parthia. If, on the contrary it be situated to

the East of that country, the situation will accord better with the

countries which we have found as those of Azes. Asgard is perhaps

an oriental name slichtly altered to confirm to the rules of the Nor-

wegian language. The words gard, quer, kart, kert are met with in

most Arian languages, with the same signification which gérd has in

the Norwegian, for instance in Persian Darabguerd means the town

of Darius.” .

Allusion has already been made to the similitude of the words

Buddha and Odin. M. Holmboe says that “the arguments both

for and against the identity of the two words are too weak to lead

to a conviction.” He adds, however, that “it is to be presumed

that the most illustrious of the missionaries who proceeded to the

North must have borne the name of Buddha or at least some

epithet derived from the Sanskrit root budh “ Intelligence,” “ know-

ledge,’ for example bodhan,* or bodhant, participle present of the

verb; and from that the Scandinavians may have formed their Odin

and the Germans their Wodan. The transition of the letter d to v still

occurs in the Sanskrit itself, and in the Hindustani and Bengali which

are derived from it, the difference is entirely lost. The omission of

the first letter in the name of Odin is conformable to the rules of the

ancient language of Norway, in which v is often elided before the labial

vowelsoandw. The German appellation Wodan accords more with the

nominative masculine of the present participle bodhan, and this ac-

cordance becomes the more striking when it is considered that in a

glossary on the work of Jonas de Bobbio, this word is written Vuo-

tant ;¥ thus answering for the oblique cases of the participle present

* The form Bodhin enters at least in the name of the sacred tree, which is

sometimes called Bodkin Wahanoa. Ritter, die Stupa’s p. 161, Forbes p. 213.

+ Gimm Deutsch. Mythologie 2te Ausg, p. 120,

Several conjectures have been proposed about the derivation of the name Oden

or Wodan: for example from the Gothic Wods or Norwegian Odr, “ enraged,” or,

1858. | Buddhism and Odinism. 69

of bodhant. The hypothesis about the identity of the name of Odin

with Buddha or with some word derived from that root, is likewise

proved by the name of Wednesday, which, in Scandinavia bears the

name of Onsdag, a contraction for Odins-dag “the day of Odin,” as

in Sanskrit Buddhavdra “the day of Buddha,” and in Hindustani,

budh-bar.

“Tt may perhaps be objected to this identification that, in the

annals of Norway, Odin is represented as a warrior and not as a

preacher, and that the warlike life of the worshippers of Odin little

accords with the mild and pacific doctrines of the Buddhists. But

we find from the fragments of swords in religious places that such

an alliance in the beginning of Buddhism was not very astonishing ;

and, on the other side, it must be remembered that the Buddhic

religion has its esoterics very different from its exoterics, and that

according to the Chinese annals, the people of the North accepted

only the last, i. e., the morality and mythology, as they were the

most conformable to their nomadic habits and warlike propensities.*

The circumstance, lastly, that not only Odin himself but several

other Azeses’ having been elevated to the rank of gods, justifies the

supposition 1 make that they enjoyed a religious veneration during

their existence. Odin was probably, as Buddha, placed at first

among the inferior gods, and subsequently among the superior gods,

until at last he was recognized as their chief. That which evidently

proves that a long time passed before Odin attained the supreme

rank is the fact, remarked by Adam of Bremen, that in the temple

of Upsala the image of Thor occupied the place of honor in the

centre between Odin and Fey.’+

as suggested by Grimm, from the Old German Watan or Norwegian Vada “ go

and walk,”

* Hoe Koue Ki p.12. The biographer of Hiouen Thsang likewise speaks frequent-

ly of warlike Buddhists ; thus at page 278, after mentioning that the people of

Khoten profess a great respect for the law of Buddha, he adds: “The king is brave,

prudent, warlike, and full of respect and affection for virtuous men.” Again at

page 382, it is said of the king of Ho-tan (Khoten): “The king is very warlike,

and bears a profound respect for the law of Buddha.”

+ Grimm, Deutsch Mythologie 2te Augs. 146.

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ASTATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

For NovemsBer, 1857.

DR LLL

The monthly general meeting for November was held on the 4th

instant.

The Hon’ble Sir J. Colvile, Kt., President, in the chair.

The proceedings of the October meeting were read and confirmed.

A presentation was received from the Royal Observatory, Green-

wich, of a copy of “Tables de la Science, construites d’ apuis le

Principe Newtonien de la Gravitation Universelles,” by P. H.

Hassen.

The appointment of Captain C. H. Dickens and Mr. Cowell as

members of the Council, in the room of Dr. Spilsbury and Arch-

deacon Pratt; was confirmed. |

The election of Mons. Robert Schlagintweit as a corresponding

member of the Society, was again postponed, under rule 6 of the

Society’s Bye-laws.

A note from Captain Haughton, withdrawing from the Society,

was recorded.

Communications were received.—l. From Mr. H. Piddington, a

paper on the spontaneous combustion of Coal.

2.—From Mr. B. H. Hodgson, C. S., a description of a new

species of Himalayan Mole—Talpa microwra.

3.—From the same gentleman, a series of Vocabularies, &c., as

named in the following extract from his letter, dated 9th October

last.

“TJ am sending you by post through the Bengal Secretary, A. R.

Young, Esq., four big letters, containing two series of Vocabularies,

each in two parts, being, lst those of the broken tribes of the

1858.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. ql

Central Himalaya, and 2nd, the dialects of the Great Kiranti

language, and further, an ample and careful dissection of one of the

former class of languages. These willin a few days be followed by

a similar dissection of one of the above dialects of the Kiranti

tongue. All these tongues are of high interest, as I think will be

sufficiently apparent from the grammatical analysis of one of each

group, viz., the Vaya tongue of the former, and the Baking of- the

latter class, and I think Miller and Caldwell will be now satisfied

that they were very premature in asserting that there is nothing

Dravidian in the Himalayan tongues.

“ The Vocabularies were prepared long ago, and ought to have

been sent, but when I got into the work of grammar analysing, I

of course saw faults in the first crude work, and those I purposed to

correct ere the Vocabularies were printed, but life is short, science

long, and I must be content to leave the Vocabularies as they are,

while I go on with my complete examination of such few of the

whole of these tongues as seem to me most important in themselves

and most likely to illustrate the class they belong to; I wish I

could have had a little more time both for vocabulary and for com-

plete analysis.”

4.—From Lieut.-Col. R. Strachey, Secretary to Government,

Central Provinces, the following account of the old Fort of Bilheree

near Jubbulpore, by Capt. D. C. Vanrenen, Arty.

A description of the old Hort of Bilheree, situated about 56 miles

NV. N. West of Jubbulpore, which was destroyed in the month of

August, 1857, by Captain Vanrenen of the Artillery, by order of

Major Erskine, Commissioner, Saugor Division.

The old Fort of Bilheree, which was built by Luchmun Singh

Pudhae Chutree in A, D. 1489, consisted of a square redoubt with

a side of 234 feet and circular projecting towers at each corner»

their diameter being 14 feet, and octangular bastions, one on each

side of the principle gateway. A high wall to the north, of irregu-

lar outline, with corner towers, which following the line of an im-

passable swamp, was connected to the main work by acurtain wall,

at the north west corner. It was bounded on the North and East

72 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1.

by an unfordable tank and swamp, and save a small clear space in

front of the principal gateway, it was further protected both on the

West and South by a deep ditch, its average depth being 12 feet

and breadth nearly 30 feet.

The walls of the square redoubt, were about 40 feet high,

and 43 feet thick, the bastions being 10 feet higher, and the

whole was carefully loopholed for musketry fire. The fire through

these loopholes was obtained from the roof of a line of buildings,

or verandah, open at the rear. ‘This banquet was of great solidity,

being supported on cut stone pillars. Single stone slabs spanned

these pillars, which were faced with lime cement.

The northern wall, facing the jheel, was about 25 feet high, with

a thickness of 3 feet; immediately in rear and adjoining it was

another wall 5 feet thick, and of a height sufficient to give a mus-

ketry fire over the outer wall. The curtain wall connecting this

with the square redoubt, was 18 feet high and 5 feet thick,

All the works were of immense strength being of stone and lime

cement, and when I visited them, they were found to be in excellent

preservation.

Part of the works, consisting of a curtain wall outside of the

western ditch, as also the detached buildings within the redoubt

and northern wall, had been subsequently built by the Mahrattas,

these being less breached and injured.

Besides the principal gateway (opening out to the south) there

were two others leading into the main body of the redoubt, one to

the North, and one to the West. There was also an entrance

way in the North West curtain wall.

The interior arrangements were very complete. The open colon-

nade, with a few interior apartments, would have afforded ample

cover for a large body of men, with space for their supplies. Water

was obtained from a pucka well within the works, with an additional

supply from the eastern tank, by means of a flight of stone steps

leading down to it.

Bilheree Fort boasted of an Aamkhass, or Audience Hall, which

with some interior apartments, occupied a space of 78 feet by

51 feet. This was a fine hall of elegantly shaped stone pillars,

supporting a roof also of stone slabs and lime cement.

1858. ] Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. 73

Situated in nearly the centre of the redoubt was the Ranee’s or

Queen’s apartment, a two-storied building 78 feet by 68 feet. This

and the Aamkhass were of the most solid construction.

A place of worship was provided (contained within a rectangular

enclosure) in front of the Aamkhass.

From the above it will be gleaned that a few resolute men,

supplied with provisions, could have held these fortifications for a

considerable period, and against large numbers.

The walls would have successfully resisted the action of field

guns. ‘They were very scientifically loopholed, and with great

care.

The key to the position was evidently by the principal gateway.

Without guns of some calibre the place was unassailable from

the north and east, and (unless the attacking party first occupied

the town of Bilheree, which is within range of musketry fire)

it was unassailable from the West; bearing this in mind, whilst I

have endeavoured to render the whole of the works untenable, and

uninhabitable, the work of destruction is more complete on the

southern and south western face than elsewhere, the walls of

which have been nearly levelled, and the deep ditch, as far as the

first causeway, filled up, towards Jubbulpore.

(Signed,) D.C. Vanrenen,

Capt. Artillery and Revenue Survey.

The 30th October, 1857.

Statistics in reference to the old Fort of Bitheree, translated from

papers in the possession of Munpuan Ram, Ha-Kanoongoe

of Bitheree.

The Fort of Bilheree was built in the year A. D. 1489 by

Luchmun Singh Pudhar Chutree, who held a Jagheer from the

Nagode Rajah, consisting of 300 villages, which now constitute

Pergunnah Bilheree.

Luchmun Singh, his son and grandson continued in _ posses-

sion of the Jagheer for 70 years, or until 1559, when it was taken

by stratagem by a Gond Rajah named Mugroo Dooj; who had

married the granddaughter of Luchmun Singh. ‘The Gonds held

74 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1.

this Jagheer under the Mundlah Chieftain for 115 years; when on

failing to pay the taxes levied on them by the Mundlah Rajah, the

whole Jagheer was taken from them by the Mundlah Rajah, and by

him made over to Juswunt Rao Mahratta, in the year A. D. 1674.

Juswunt Rao, assisted by 300 Sowars, held the government under

the Mundlah Rajah, and on his death was succeeded by his son

Moonga Rao, who reigned 78 years.

The Mundlah Rajah at that time, A. D. 1742, was at war with

the Nagpore Rajah, and, suspecting Moonga Rao of treachery,

caused him to be put to death and the Jagheer to be transferred to

his favorites Nawab Ajeet Khan and Ahmud Khan, who had it on

the same terms as Juswunt Rao. On their deathsin A. D. 1767

the Jagheer lapsed to the Mundlah Rajah, who managed it on his

own account, and derived a yearly revenue of 20,000 Rupees.

The Mundlah Rajah was in his turn ousted by the Sagur Rajah,

Bulwant Rao Pundit, in the year A. D. 1779 who again was deprived

of the Sovereignty by Raghojee of Nagpore, from whom we took the

country in the year A. D. 1816.

(Signed) D.C. Vanrrnen, Capt. Artillery,

Jubbulpore, Revenue Surveyor’s Office, the 38rd October, 1857.

5th.—Babu Rajendralal Mitra read the following note on a stone

bull found at Buddha Gaya and bearing a Sanscrit inscription, dated

781 of the Samvat era.

eel

Note on a Stone Kigure of a Bull from Buddha Gayd.

I am indebted to Mr. Grote for an opportunity of examining an

interesting figure of a bull couchant with a Sanskrita inscription on

its back, bearing date 781 of the Samvat, corresponding with 725 of

the Christian era. It is an alto-relievo, and measures about 12

inches in height, the length being from the croup to the root of the

neck 16 inches ; the head is mutilated. Around the back is a string

of bells, and the neck is bedecked with a variety of beaded orna-

ments. The figure is said to have been brought from Buddha Gaya,

but had this information been wanting, the material (basalt) and

the style of sculpture would have left little doubt as to the place of

FACSIMILE OF AN INSCRIPTION ON THE FICURE OF A BULL FOUND AT BUDDHA CAYA.

ow pitas ris Weel 2 Sipe

es eee

eZGrawe ux Ph) ee wise ve ks canta’? 2b

OG ie a0) AG ee VOY 4parg gee

of bells, and ee neck is Bedsokedl with a variety of beaded orn:

ments. The figure is said to have been brought from Buddha Gay:

but had this information been wanting, the material (basalt) an

the style of sculpture would have left little doubt as to the place «

1858.] . Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 75

its origin. The inscription is in the well-known Kutila characters,

and records that the bull was consecrated by Sri Suphandi Bhat-

taraka son of Bhimakaullé, for the purpose of securing progeny.

The language is simple, but owing to mutilations, two or three

words are not legible. The second figure of the date is indistinct,

and the word Samvat has the final consonant wanting, which is

owing perhaps to an accidental omission on the part of the engraver,

or more probably to a fondness for abbreviation, as I have noticed a

similar omission in two or three other inscriptions. In the present

day the word is generally written without the last two consonants

and their intermediate vowel.

The subject of the inscription offers little for comment. The

practice of dedicating bulls either alive or in effigy to secure progeny

is a matter of no interest to the antiquarian, while the individual

who consecrated the bull is not an historical personage ; but the

circumstance of the Kutila character being used in an inscription

of the 8th century, affords an important subject for the considera-

tion of the indian Archeologist.

The absence of dates in many of the inscriptions found in India

led the late Mr. James Prinsep to devise a system of paleographic

chronology in which the style of the writing was taken as an index

to the age of the document in which it was found. The system was

matured after a careful examination of alarge number of ancient in-

scriptions and coins, and recorded ina table (ante vol. VII. p. 276,

plate xiii.) in which different centuries have each a particular set of

characters assigned to it. According to this table the Kutila characters

are placed against the9th century. It is evident, however, that Mr.

Prinsep intended his table to be merely tentative, and open to consi-

derable corrections and modifications; for it is difficult to believe

that he would take each particular set of characters to belong to one

particular century and no more, or that the same character should

be common over all the Sanskritic Cis-Vindhyan regions for a given

period. Nothing is more common than a single style of writing

spreading over two or three centuries, or predominating in certain

regions, while it is dying out in others. The history of the English

and the German characters affords a singular instance in point.

Mr. Prinsep was fully aware of this, and has accordingly assigned

i 2

76 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [iNet

a range of three centuries to his No. I, or Lat characters, and of

four centuries to No. LV. of the Guzerat plates.

Later chronologists have, however, missed the spirit of his table,

and have used it in such a manner as to lead to serious mistakes.

A distinguished antiquarian has lately taken so narrow a view

of the table in question, as to argue an inscription* to be of

the 10th century simply because it happened to be in a character

very near the Kutila, without making any allowance for the range

which that character must have had, the locality where the document

was found, or the date which it bore. This, in our humble opinion,

is a very unphilosophical mode of drawing conclusions. The inscrip-

tion now submitted, compared with such inscriptions of this type

as have been already published, will shew that the Kutila characters

were current over a large tract, for upwards of four centuries.

The era of the document is Samvat, but whether of the sovereign

of Oujjein or of Balhabi or of the Pal Rajas of Bengal, does not

appear. It may, however, be very reasonably taken to be that of

Vicramaditya, considering that the Balhabi Samvat did not extend

much beyond Rajputana, and the Pala Samvat would bring down the

inscription toa period when the Kutila had been entirely superseded

by the modern Deva Nagari.

The following is a transcript of the inscription.

U yay ort amigas e WNW WAIX xX XUa fuawH Val gaa Tew.

feuzica H(?) a(2) WHAT x XK HaWASAaT IaTIce ofats-

afa U

R. M.

* T have now in hand a paper on the era of Bhoja, in which the claims of this

inscription will be discussed in detail,

ee , ;

“ , ‘ a }

' “aes aren fear ;

, E , " ” \ 7 *

7 ms ‘ a

Bia ARNE.

‘ ty i

: me, ; i

‘ nl ag . + ‘ —

‘ , a’

mY ie 4 yy q

‘ad y ‘ eh ornare r

> tal z '

ar wri non r ine 0) GE pail Ov ogw't

acd burt 15 Series

15 3 \

i . . 5

Fumie) &4 ’ ary * :

Yea | are ‘ : *

ae * PF, el | Le :

ia) bit F > 2 i *

2 fe 1 ‘ ¢

as af y =e a ? > :

® _ SS at J '

e ar 1 ye f 4

m= ab a rs <q “ *

ERRATA.

ee)

Page 76 line 23 for Sara afe read aura afz

oo 24 for SAT read Bar

1858. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

“I

For December, 1857.

The Monthly General Meeting for December, was held on the

2nd instant.

Major H. L. Thuillier, senior member present, in the Chair.

The proceedings of the November meeting were read and confirmed.

Presentations were received—

1st.—From the Royal Academy of Sciences at Berlin, the latest

publications of the Academy.

29nd.—From the Bombay Government a copy of the Magnetical

and Meteorological Observations.

3rd.—From Raja Shib Chunder Deva, Bahadur, a copy of his trea-

tise on Infant Treatment in Bengali.

The election of Mons. R. Schlagintweit as a corresponding mem-

ber of the Society was once more postponed under rule 6 of the

Society’s bye-laws.

Babu Kaliprasanné Sing, was proposed for ballot at the next

meeting by Babu Rajendralal Mittra, and seconded by Mr. Grote.

Communications were received—

1st.—From Babu Radha Nauth Sikdar, an abstract of the Mete-

orological Observations made in the office of the Surveyor General

during July last.

Qnd.—From Dr. G. von Liebig a paper entitled “ Discussions

of some Meteorological Observations made on Parasnath Hill.”

38rd.—F rom Mr. Grote a letter, of which the following is an

extract, referring to the Tertiary fossils in the neighbourhood

of Kohat, presented to the Government Geological Museum by

Dr. Garnett.

« An interesting letter was read by Professor Oldham at our June

meeting of 1856, in which Lieut. Garnett of the Engineers de-

scribed the country near Kohat, where Lieut. Trotter’s fossils had

been found. Lieut. Garnett asked for information about the speci-

meus which bad been sent down to the Society, and apparently also

78 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1.

to Professor Oldham. I have now a letter from Dr. Falconer, in

which he tells me for communication to the Society that among the

fossils sent to Mr. Oldham he has identified —

1st.—A species of Dinotherium, probably new.

2nd.—A species of a genus closely allied to Zapir, new to the

Indian Fossil Fauna.

3rd.—Amphicyon, a species of a large carnivorous form, as heavy

as the Polar bear. The genus occurs in the European Miocenes

along with Dinotherium.

The specimens which Dr. Falconer has seen, are, he says, very

imperfect. It might be worth while to consider at the next meet-

ing, whether it would not be well for us to send home our specimens,

should they be better than Mr. Oldham’s, and get them described

and returned to us.”’.

Resolved, that Mr. Grote’s suggestions be referred to the Council,

with power to do what they thought best in the matter.

Babu Rajendralal Mitra read a paper on the traces of Buddhism in

Norway in which he represented that the Odinic relics in N. W.

Europe bear a strong similitude to the materia! remains of Bud-

dhism in India, and that that similitude is attributable to a community

of idea and design. The subject was illustrated by several drawings

prepared by the boys of the Government Wards’ Institution.

On the motion of the Chairman, the thanks of the meeting were

accorded to the Babu for his able and interesting paper.

The Librarian and the Zoological Curator submitted their usual

monthly reports.

LIBRARY.

The Library received the following accessions during November last.

Presentation.

Abhandlungen der Koniglichen Akademie der Wissenschaften zu

Berlin, 1855, Berlin, Royal 4to.—By THR PRuss1an ACADEMY OF

SCIENCES.

Ditto ditto, Erster Supplement—Band, 1854, folio.— By

THE SAME.

Monatsbericht der ditto ditto, from July, 1855 to October, 1856, 8vo.

—By THE Same.

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. 79

The Transactions of the Linnean Society of London, Vol. XXII. Part

I.—By THE LINNEAN SOCIETY.

Journal of the proceedings of the ditto, Vol. I. No. 3.— By tHE SAME.

Address of Thomas Bell, Esq. President, read at the Anniversary of

the Linnean Society on Saturday, May 24th, 1856, pamphlet.—By THE

SAME,

List of the Linnean Society of London, 1856, pamphlet.—By THE SAME.

Report (33rd Annual) of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain

and Ireland.—By tue Sociszry.

The Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society, Vol. XIII. Part I.

No. 49.—By THE Socizty.

Transactions of the Geological Society of London, Second Series,

Vol. VII. Part 4th, 1856.—By Tue SoctEty.

The Journal of the Royal Geographical Society, Vol. X XVII. 1856,

8vo.—By THE SociEty.

The Journal of the Statistical Society of London, Vol. XX. Part III.

—By THE SoOcIgETY.

List of Fellows of the Statistical Society of London up to 30th June

1857.—By THE Society.

Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesselschaft, Vol. XI.

Heft. 1 to 3.—By THE GERMAN ORIENTAL SOCIETY.

The Geological Papers on Western India, 8vo. with an Atlas.—By THE

BENGAL GOVERNMENT.

The Oriental Christian Spectator for October, 1857.—By THE EnpiTor.

The Calcutta Christian Observer for November, 1857.—By THE Ep1Tor.

The Oriental Baptist for ditto.—By tae Epiror.

Magnetical and Meteorological Observations made at the Hon’ble East

India Company’s Observatory, Royal 4to. Bombay, 1856.—By tHE

BomBay GOVERNMENT.

The Vividhartha Safigraha, No. 42.—By Ba’su Ra’sENDRaALA’L Mitra.

La Poésie Philosophique et Religieuse chez les Persans d’apres le

Mantic Uttair ou le Langage des Oiseaux de Farid-Uddin Attar, par M.

Garcin de Tassy, Paris, pamphlet.—By M. Garcin pz Tassy.

Note sur les Ruba’iyat de "Omar Khaiyam, par M. Garcin de Tassy,

pamphiet.—BY THE SAME.

Exchanged.

Atheneum for August, 1857.

The London, Edinburgh and Dublin Philosophical Magazine and

Journal of Science for September, 1857, No. 92.

Annalen der Chemie und Pharmacie for July, 1857.

SO Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. PNer 1

Purchased.

Grimm’s (Dr. Jacob) Deutsche Grammatik, Vols. I. to IV. 8vo.

Gottingen, 1822.

—————— Geschichte der Deutschen Sprache, Band I, Zweite

auflage, 8vo. Liepzig, 1853.

—__— und Wilhelm Grimm, Deutsches Worterbuch, Band I.

and parts 1 to 4 of Band II. 4to. Liepziy, 1854.

-———— Deutsche Mythologie, Band I, Dritte Ausgabe, 8vo.

Gottingen, 1854.

Mémoirs sur les contrées occidentales, traduits du Sanserit en Chinois,

en l’an 648, Par Hiouen-Thsang, et du Chinois en Francais par M.

St. Julien, Tome I. Royal 8vo. Paris, 1857.

Ramayana (XTaTaW) Poema Sanscrito di Valmici traduzione Italiana

con note per Gaspare Gorresio, Paris, Vol. IX. Royal 8vo. 1856.

Mémoires de |’Académie Impériale des Sciences de Saint-Petersbourg,

Six Series, Tome VII. lst and 2nd Livraison.

Rig-Veda oder die heiligen Lieder der Brahmanen. Herausgegeben

-von Max Miller, Zwiete Lieferung 4to. Liepzig 1857, pamphlet.

Analectes sur Histoire et la Littérature des Arabes D’Espagne, par

Al-makkari. Publiés par M. R. Dozy, G. Dugat, L. Krehl et W. Wright,

Tome I. Seconde Partie, 4to. Leyde, 1856.

Catalogue of Lepidoptera in the collection of the British Museum,

Part I. Papilionide. London, Royal 4to. 1852.

Catalogue of Shield Reptiles in ditto, Part I. Testudinata (Tortoises), by

J. E. Gray, 1855.

Bowring’s (Sir John,) Kingdom and People of Siam; with a Narrative

of the Mission to that country in 1855, 2 Vols. Svo. London, 1857.

List of the Specimens in the Collection of the British Museum, 12mo.

London, 1852.

Literary Gazette, Nos. 2117 to 2121.

Journal des Savants for August, 1857.

The Annals and Magazine of Natural History, No. 117.

Revue et Magasin de Zoologie, No. 7, 1857.

Revue des Deux Mondes, 15th August and lst Sept. 1857.

Comptes Rendus, Nos. 5 to 8, August, 1857.

_ Govurpas Bysack,

Librarian and Asst. Secy.

lst December, 1857.

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 81

Report for December Meeting, 1857.

The only donations which I have at present to report upon are as

follows—

1. Babu Rajendra Mallika. The carcass of a fine Bara Sing’ha buck

(Cervus Dvuvaucetet), the skin of which has been since mounted; and

ditto of the common large Squirrel (Scturus ELPHINSTONEI), prepared

as a skeleton.

2. C. B. Chalmers, Esq. 44th B. N. I. A fine skin of the Mmnura

SUPERBA, or ‘ Lyre-bird’ of N. S. Wales; since mounted.

3. J. Sweeny, Esq. An example of PytHon mMoturus, 13% ft. long ;

obtained in the neighbourhood, but not improbably escaped from con-

finement.

4. From myself, the carcasses of two Chitas (FELIs suBaTA), both skins

and one skeleton set up ;* of a Sia-gosh (F. caRacaL); Bear (Ursus LaBia-

tus); and large MoniTor prac@mna, the skeleton of which has been set up.

Also a number of fishes, procured at the Sandheads: and, by purchase, an

enormous skull of Ursus IsABELLINUS, and one of U. TIBETANUS.

In a native shop where the latter were obtained, I found a

large bag of Feline tusks or canine-teeth, comprising (at the lowest

computation) those of about 250 Tigers and 150 Leopards. I have selected

a fine series illustrative of the growth of the teeth, and of the magnitude

attained by them.

I have also purchased, alive, but it has since died and been transferred

to the museum, a very rare Parrakeet, the PaLmorRNIS ERYTHROGENYS,

nobis (nec Lesson, nec Fraser), v. P. nicobaricus, Gould, and P. barbatus

apud Pucheran (Rev. Zool, &c. 1856, p. 209). P. erythrogenys of Lesson

was pre-applied, but is merely a synonym of the common P. Loneicaupa

(v. malaccensis, and the young—P. viridimystaz, nobis, J. A. 8S. XXV,

446); for which reason Mr. Gould’s name nicobaricus, bestowed under

the impression that erythrogenys of Lesson was a particular species, can-

not be accepted. P. erythrogenys of Fraser, again, is not only subsequent

to ERYTHROGENYS, nobis, but bears the prior synonym of Luczani,

J. Verreaux; and this bird appears to me to be the original BarBarus of

Gmelin,—abitat unknown, but probably from Cambodia or Cochin-

* The following mounted skeletons of Frxis were exhibited at the Meeting.

F. tz0 (N. Africa) ; F. trraris (enormous); F. parpus; F. supata; FY, cara-

CAL; F. CELIDOGASTER (v. viverrina) ; F. BENGALENSIS ; F. cHaus; and Indian

F, DOMESTICA.

82 Proceedings of the Asiatic Socvety. [ No. }.

China (and to the same little explored region most probably appertains

the P. persianus, Fraser). The specimen of P. ERYTHROGENYS now

exhibited was imported from Singapore, but was doubtless originally

obtained from the Nicobar Islands by Malayan traders, no other

habitat being at present known for this fine species. The specimen

was a female, and is the only example of that sex whieh I have yet

seen; those formerly supposed to be females being evidently young

males. The female differs from the male in having a conspicuously

smaller bill, of a blackish colour, whereas the upper mandible of the male

is coral-red ; though perhaps old females may have the upper mandible

red as in the male, as commonly in P. Javanicus, (Osbeck, v. Osbeckit,

Latham, v. mystaceus, Shaw, &c.,—ponticerianus, Gmelin, being a mis-

nomer),—and always, I think, in P. Ltonercaupa; the head, nape, and

upper-parts, are also much more uniformly green; and the red of the

cheeks is less intense. This handsome species is figured in the 9th part

of Mr. Gould’s splendid ‘ Birds of Asia,’ together with P. canicEPs, nobis,

and P. BARBATUS, (Gmelin, v. Luciani, J. Verreaux). We have now

both male and female of P. ERyTHROGENYs, mounted from fresh specimens

in good plumage that had died in eaptivity.*

December 2nd, 1857. EK. Buytu.

* T subjoin a synopsis of the species of this genus with their synonyms, ac-

cording to latest information.

1. P. Auexanpri; Psittacus Alexandri, L.: Ps. eupatria, L., et Psittaca

ginginiana, Brisson,—the female; Psittacus guinneensis, Scopoli (nec guineensis,

Gmelin) ; Ps. Sonneratii, Gmelin; Pal. nipalensis, Hodgson. Figured in Kd-

wards’s Birds, pl. 292. Inhabits the hilly regions of all India proper, from the

sub-Himalayas to Ceylon inclusive; with those of Asam, Sylhet, Arakan, and

the Tenasserim provinces,—except southward, as in Tavoy and Mergui. The

ordinary Parrakeet of the Punjab generally. The very young are brought in con-

siderable numbers to Calcutta, the earliest towards the close of February; and

many old birds also, chiefly from the Midnapur jungles, as I am assured: and

according to Buchanan Hamilton (MSS.), flocks visit the neighbourhood of

Calcutta when the crop of rice is ripe. These doubtless come from the hilly coun- ©

try westward of the delta; and, I suspect, return to their distant roosting-places

in the hills towards sunset (for the birds of this genus are apt to roam thus over

a vast extent of territory). Though figured by Sonnerat from the Philippines,

it is probably only known there in a captive state.

2. P. Torquatus; Psittaca torquata, Brisson (Psittacus torquatus, Gmelin,

in part): Psittacus steptrophorus, Desmarest ; Ps. cubicularis (?), Hasselquist ;

Ps. docilis (?), Vieillot; Pal. Layardi, Blyth (var.) : lutino variety.—‘ Sulphur

Parrakeet,’ Shaw. Inhabits the plains of all India, in great abundance ; also Cey-

lon, but is rarer eastward of the Bay of Bengal, though found (sparingly ?) as

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 83

far southward as Province Wellesley. In Africa found from Abyssinia to Sene-

gal, where stated by the late H. H. Strickland to be “ identical with specimens

from India.” Col. Chesney also notices this species in Syria, as abounding in

the spring (Journal of Euphrates Expedition, I, 443, 537). But Swainson states

that Senegal specimens are smaller, with closed wing “ not quite 6 in.” In In-

dia the ordinary length of wing is 63 in., and in fine old males 7 in. The late

Prince of Canino would separate “ the race of Senegal” by the name P. Docttuis,

(Vieillot). Comptes Rendus, March 1857.

3. P. BrTorquatusS ; Psittacus bitorguatus, Kuhl: Ps. bicollaris, Vieillot ;

Pal. borbonicus, C. L. Bonap. Inhabits Mauritius and Bourbon.

4. P. cotuMBOIDES, Vigors: P. melanorhynchos, Sykes (nec Wagler), the fe-

male or young. Figured in Madr. Jowrn. XI, 209, and in Jerdon’s ‘ Illustra.

tions of Indian Ornithology,’ pl. XVIII. Inhabits the Nilgiris and Malabar

ghats.

5. P. Cattmrapm, Layard: P. Gironieri, Verreaux; P. viridicollis, Cassin.

Peculiar to the mountain region of Ceylon ; being the only speeies met with at

Newera Elia.

6. P. scoHisticers, Hodgson: Conurus himalayanus, Tiesson. Common in

the middle and lower region of the Himalaya, extending eastward to the Kas’hya

hills, where also common; but never seen in the plains. Westward, the late

Dr. Griffith observed it in flocks at Pushut. Captive specimens are not unfre-

quently brought to Dacca, but seldom to Calcutta.

7. P. CYANOCEPHALUS; Psittacus eyanocephalus, L. (the female): Psittaca

bengalensis, Brisson; Psittacus signatus, Scopoli; Ps. erythrocephalus, Gmelin;

Ps. gingimanus, Latham , Ps. rhodocephalus, Shaw: lutino var.—Ps. narcissus,

Latham (with coloured figure): Ps. flavitorquis, Shaw, Ps. annulatus, Kuhl,

and Pal. flavicollaris, Franklin,—the female. Figured in Edwards’s Birds, pl.

233. Inhabits the upland jungle districts of all India proper, with Ceylon,

Asam, Arakan, and the Tenasserim provinces; replacing in the lower hills, for

the most part, the P. rorguatus of the plains. When the rice is ripening,

flocks visit the neighbourhood of Calcutta; but probably return to their hill

roosting-places by sunset, however great the distance. Though figured by Son-

nerat from the Philippines, it is probable that captive specimens only are there

known ; and the same with China. Immense numbers are taken from Calcutta

in the shipping.

The rest of the genus have a broad black moustachial mark, and constitute the

Belocercus of the Prince of Canino.

8. P. canicurs, nobis. Figured in Gould’s ‘Birds of Asia. A male

obtained in the Nicobars, and a female in Province Wellesley ; the only examples

as yet known. .

9. P.savanicus; Psittacus javanicus, Osbeck: Ps. bimaculatus, Sparrman ;

Ps. pondicerianus et Ps. borneus, Gmelin; Ps. Osbecku, Latham ; Ps. mystaceus,

Shaw ; Pal. melanorhynchos, Wagler (nec Sykes), et P. nigrirostris, Hodgson,—

the female; P. modestus, Fraser,—the young. Figured in Swainson’s Zool, ll,

2nd series, pl. 16. The most common species of the Indo-Chinese countries

generally ; but not seen wild on the western side of the Bay of Bengal (though

pondicerianus is one of its synonyms) ; neither, according to Dr. 8S. Miiller, does

M 2

84 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1.

it inhabit Borneo (though borneus is another synonym); though common in

Java. It also abounds in Sylhet, Asam, and Nepal; and inhabits the Rajmahl

hills, resorting in great flocks to the neighbouring plains when the crops are

ripening. Buchanan Hamilton observed them “in the woods near Gorruckpore.”’

Vast numbers are obtained by the Calcutta bird-dealers, even when very young ;

which are brought from Tipperah and Chittagong, as I am assured. Javanese

specimens are undistinguishable from Indian.

10. P. DERBIANUS, Fraser. Hab. ?

11. P. BaRBATUS; Psittacus barbatus, Gmelin: Pal. Luciani, J. Verreaux ;

P. erythrogenys, Fraser; P. Frasert, Moore. Figured in Gould’s ‘Birds of

Asia.’ Hab. oe

12. P. ERYTHROGENYS, nobis: P. nicobaricus, Gould; P. barbatus apud

Pucheran. Figured in Gould’s ‘ Birds of Asia.’ Peculiar to the Nicobar islands

where an abundant species.

13. P. Loneicaupa; Psittacus longicauda, Boddaert: Ps. malaccensis,

Gmelin (nec Brisson, nec Latham) ; Ps. erubescens, Shaw; Ps. ginginianus, var,

C. Latham ; Ps. barbatulatus, Bechstien ; Pal. erythrogenys, Lesson (nec Blyth,

nec Fraser) ; P. viridimystax, Beilyth, —the young. Figured by Levaillant, pl. 72.

Inhabits Sumatra, Borneo, and the southern portion of the Malayan peninsula,

—being the only Patzornis there met with, and having the same range of dis-

tribution as PsITTINUS MALACCENSIS and LoRIcULUS GALGULUS; these three

being the only known Parrots that inhabit that range of territory! and in Java

there are only Pau. JavANICUS and LoRICULUS VERNALIS, both of which are also

common in the Burmese countries.

I add the synonyms of

14. PsITTINUS MALACCENSIS ; Psittacus malaccensis, Latham (nec Brisson,

nec Gmelin): Ps. incertus, Shaw; Agapornis azureus, (Temminck), Bonap.,

passim; Psittacula reticulata, Lesson. Figured in Swainson’s Zool. Iil., 1st

series, pl. 154. Barely separable from PaLmornis, but has a short even tail.

Has the same range of distribution as Pau. LonGIcavpa and LoricuLus

GALGULUS.

1858. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. . 85

For January, 1858.

At the Annual General Meeting of the Society, held on the 6th

January 1858.

Hon’ble Sir James Colvile, Kt., President, in the Chair.

The Secretary read the following

| ReEPoRT FOR 1857.

The Council regret that, in submitting their annual report for

1857, they cannot congratulate the Society upon the state of its

affairs. The troubles into which the country has been plunged

have to serious extent interfered with the Society’s progress and

prosperity.

The rolls exhibit a sudden decrease of 22 ordinary members

Sees Pee Peng. resident in India, the total at

130 124 6

1851 present being 109, whereas it

1852 139 122 17 9 IAD OE

1853 146 123 23 was 131 at the same period o

ide oa aoe rs last year. The elections cone

1856 167 131 36 the year have been only 6, while

1857 147 109 38

the loss amounts to not less

than 26, of which 14 have been caused by retirement, and 12 by

death. The Society now includes 147 members, of whom 38 are

absent in Europe.

Mr. John Nietner, of Colombo, Ceylon, has been elected a cor-

responding member during the period under review.

Obituary.—The members lost to the Society by death, are Dr.

Spilsbury, Vice-President, and Dr. Walker, Sir Henry Lawrence,

K. C. B., Sir Robert Barlow, Bart., Hon’ble J. R. Colvin, Captain

¥. Hayes, Hon’ble Major R. B. P. Byng, and Messrs. Bushby,

Heatly, Ommanney, Cunliffe and D. Grant, most of whom had, when

resident in Calcutta, taken as members either of the Council, or

the Committee of papers an active part in the management of the

Society’s affairs.

To the zealous and disinterested labours of Dr. Spilsbury, ex-

tending over a period of 20 years, the Society is indebted for some

of the rarest specimens which adorn its Geological Museum, and

many of the valuable contributions which enrich the pages of its

Journal. The Society has, more than once, publicly recorded its

86 ! Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. (Nord

high sense of the important services rendered to it by this zealous

and distinguished member, and recently testified its gratitude by

subscribing for the portrait which now graces its Meeting room.

Dr. Walker, whose zealous and disinterested devotion to science

is well known, was a sincere and cordial friend to, and promoter

of the objects of the Society.

Captain Hayes was a well known Persian and Arabic Scholar,

and for some time acted as Secretary to the Society. His services

in that capacity were acknowledged by a vote of thanks passed

in May 1851. |

Such losses as the above, and as that of Sir Henry Lawrence

aud Hon’ble Mr. John Colvin, who also took an earnest interest in

the Society’s welfare, are not to be immediately or easily repaired.

By the death of the Baron Von Hammer Purgstall the cause of

Oriental Literature has lost one of its brightest ornaments, and

most ardent advocates, and the Society its oldest and not least

distinguished honorary member. He devoted a long life of 82 years

to the study of the Arabic, Persian and Turkish languages, and

the success with which he prosecuted his researches is attested by

the numerous works which he has left behind him. The Society is

especially indebted to him for a valuable paper on the navigation of

the Arabs, published in the Journal.

Finances.—The steady improvement which the finances of the

Society were gradually making, has received a severe check by the

recent disturbances. ‘The collections during the last year have been

less than what was anticipated, while the statement of outstanding

assets continues to be nearly the same as at the close of 1856.

The total receipts during the last year as shewn in the statement

No. 1, have been Rs. 19,828-12-8, exclusive of the subscriptions

(Rs. 2,676) for the purchase of the Stacey Coin collection, which

have been deposited on a separate account in the Bank of Bengal.

The receipts include an item of Rs. 765-5-4, being a part of the

loan recovered from the Oriental Publication Fund.

The disbursements amount to Rs. 24,001-2-1, inclusive of a sum

of Rs. 4,000, which have been invested in Government Securities,

The cash balance in hand is Rs. 2,3830-9-3, which added to the

remaining loan Rs. 1,734-10-8, due from the Oriental Publication

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 87

Fund, will amount to Rs. 4,065-3-11, a sum adequate to meet

any contingent expences that may be necessary for the purpose of a

thorough repair to the building.

The total of the outstanding sums due to the Society is Rs.

8,463-2-6. The amount written off to profit and loss since the last

report is Rs. 1,810-5-3, being mostly subscriptions due from deceased

members. ‘The Council apprehend that several items of a similar

nature will have to be removed in the same way.

The estimate of the probable income and expenditure of the

current year is given below. The expenses of the Zoological Mu-

Seum have increased by Rs. 45 per month.

Income.

Contributions, ........ SER ST AEN Seen, an, ee oO OO

Government Grant at 300, UO MMe etee et cee aot ro GUO Or O

ECM MUR Ort. cass loccnend vericocetiosee. 2200 0." O

MMMM DIRT OTM e. ocd. hush, cede e tesic tots tele eats LWO0" OO

PE Rneer eM te eM ods eae eo OO

NCO ee ee ee ee ccc kn bel sec sas 25 0 O

13,900 0 0O

PMN RMEALC) Or. oo. ope heee nabier loess teetossertesee, LOL 6 4

Hapenditure.

Meese MUSOU, oss e cts ce le occs ess sorcerers, AGF40 OF O

ea teases) 7, about 25 We PLT es 900 0 O

Library.

Peramishiment, oo ee eee a. . 9386 0 0

Fimrewase of Books) 0.0006). 600" 0” 0

eer terrees: Cee A aa OL C8 BROR O°"E

Comme cenmenes; ore!) 2 le8 BABA) 200" 010

2,086 0 0

Matibnelmortt, General iii oe. Lee ee 865° O80

soutndly he... Bie desea LY eG. sO. O

Miscellaneous, inichindii, build’: ppdits, dete A UERSOO" *§ OF /O

en Ch as OIA IO LOD, BNE. AUld. LARS 149 0 0

16,136 0 O

————

Reeth ly avOrae Ose oft i. WR. Uwe L844 SO

88 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Nost.

Reduction of Subscription of Mofussil Members.—In December

1856, Mr. Oldham made a proposition, to the effect that Rule 8 of

the Society’s Code should be modified so far as related to tne

subscriptions of non-resident members. That Ordinary Members

should be divided into two classes, ‘‘ Resident and Non-Resi-

dent,’ and that the latter, 7. ¢., the members who reside per-

manently at a greater distance than 12 miles from Calcutta or who

may only occasionally visit it for periods shorter than three months,

should pay the same admission fee, but a reduced subscription of 32

Rs. per annum.

The Council to whom the question was referred under Rule 45,

reported, after mature consideration, that the financial position of

the Society was not such as to permit them to recommend the pro-

posed change, and, on its being referred to the Society at large,

very few of the Non-resident Members voted in its favor. The

motion was finally dropped at the Special Meeting held in July last,

in consequence of a sufficient number of members not being present

to constitute a Special Meeting as provided in Rule 45.

Library.—The Library has received an addition of 150 volumes,

among which are some important MS. works, purchased at the

sale of the late Aga Kurbalai Mahomed’s Library. Several Sanserit

MSS. have been re-copied, and supplies of the leading Scientific

periodicals have been regularly received. All the valuable books are

now preserved in glazed cases, and every care is taken to keep them

in proper order.

The Librarian has prepared a Supplement to the printed Catalogue,

which includes all the works received from the time the Catalogue

was sent to the press to the last day of December. ‘This supple-

ment will be available to members as soon as it is printed.

Coin Cabinet, Stacy’s Collection—In November 1856, the mag-

nificent collection of gems and coins belonging to the late Colonel

Stacy was offered to the Society for sale at 5,000 Rs. a sum which

was subsequently reduced to 4,000 Rs. The Council anxious to

secure to the Society this valuable collection, opened a subscrip-

tion among the members, with a view to raise such a sum as would

defray the whole or a large part of the amount necessary for the

purpose. Ina short time the sum of Rs. 2938 was subscribed, of

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 89

which Ry. 2,726 have already been realized. The Society has

sanctioned an expenditure of Rs. 1,200, towards the purchase, which

has been delayed only in consequence of the disturbed state of the

country.

Some improvement has been eifected in the arrangement of the

Society’s Coin Cabinet by Mr. Freeling; and it is hoped that on

the receipt of the Stacy collection, the whole Cabinet will be syste-

matically arranged, and rendered easily accessible to the public.

Museum of Economic Geology.—On the removal of the Govern-

ment Museum of Economic Geology from the custody of the Society

in 1856, the Government of India invited the Society to permit

their own collections to be also transferred to the charge of the

Superintendent of the Geological Survey in India, under such restric-

tions as the Society might chose to impose. The Council was divided

in opinion on this question, and the proposition having been referred

to the Society at large, was negatived at the last annual meeting.

Museum.—The Museum continues to be an object of interest

From Jan. to Dec. 1857 being 309 and attraction to the public. That

days open, exclusive of Sundays and ... : :

other Christian holidays. itis generally appreciated is shown

Native Females. European Females. by the figures quoted in the mar-

Males. Males. : ; ;

38,480 2,090 2,597 811 gin. During the year under review

there were 43,928 Visitors, which,

exclusive of Sundays and other

Christian holidays, give an average of 142 persons per diem.

Several glazed cases have been provided for the preservation and

display of Zoological specimens, and the hands of the Curator in

that Department have been strengthened by an increase of his

establishment.

Dr. Falconer’s important Catalogue of Tertiary fossils in the

Society’s collections, is in the Press, and will shortly appear.

Proposed Imperial Museum.—A careful inquiry into the condition

Total 43,928

of the Museum, its growing importance, and the scanty accommoda-

tion available in the Society’s building, together with the inadequacy

of the funds at their disposal, impressed the Council with the

necessity of appealing to Government for aid. After mature deli-

berations they resolved that the most satisfactory mode of dealing

with this important question would be to petition the Government

90 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 1.

to institute a great Imperial Museum in Calcutta, to which the whole

of the Society’s collections might be transferred under certain

restrictions. The Society approved the suggestion, and authorized the

Council to open negotiations with the Government on the subject.

But before any communication could be made the disturbances

broke out in the North-Western Provinces, and the subject has since

remained in abeyance.

A Committee of Meteorology and Physical Science has been re-

constituted, consisting of the following Members:—

The Venerable J. H. Pratt.

Major H. L. Thuillier.

Dr. G. von Liebig.

Lt.-Colonel R. Strachey.

H. Piddington, Esq.

Baboo Radha Nauth Sikdar.

Journal.—The necessity of the times and the absorbing interest

excited by the revolt, have operated prejudicially on the publication

of the Journal. Comparatively few papers having been received,

only 4 Nos. have been issued; the fifth is now in the press.

Officers.—The Librarian and Assistant Secretary, Baboo Gourdas

Bysack has been assiduous in carrying on the duties of his office, and

the Council have great pleasure in recording their entire satisfac-

tion with the way in which he has performed them.

Oriental Fund.—The reasons which led to the suspension of the pub-

lication of the Bibliotheca Indica, were explained in the last annual

report. The Council are glad to state that a considerable reduction

in the liabilities of the Oriental Fund has been effected during the

year, and they hope that before long the Fund will be in a position to

enable the Editors to complete the unfinished works, and to com-

mence a new Series under better auspices.

With the exception of the supplement to the Itqan, and the

concluding Fasciculus of the S’ankhya Pravachana Bhashya (No.

141), no portion of the Bibliotheca Indica has appeared during the

past year.

The report was adopted.

The Meeting then proceeded to ballot for the Council and officers

for the ensuing year.

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. 91

Major Thuillier and Dr. Eatwell were appointed scrutineers,

and at the close of the ballot, the Chairman announced the follow-

ing result:

Hon’ble Sir J. W. Colvile, Kt., President.

Babu Ramgopal Ghose,

A. Grote, Esq. Vice Presidents.

Lieut.-Col. R. Strachey,

T. Oldham, Esq.,

C. Beadon, Hsq.,

Dr. T. Thomson,

Dr. T. Boycott,

Captain C. B. Young,

E. A. Samuells, Esq.,

Captain Dickens,

Captain Lees,

Babu Ramaprasad Roy,

W. S. Atkinson, Esq.,

E. B. Cowell, Esq., \ Joint Secretaries.

92 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. I.

STATEMENT

Abstract of the Cash Accounts

RECEIPTS.

CoNTRIBUTIONS. 1856. 1857.

Received from Members, -- 8,096 0 O 7,068 0 3 0

ADMiIssIon FEE.

Received from new Members, .. 448 O O 256 0 0

JOURNAL.

Sale proceeds of, and Subscription

to the Journal of the Asiatic

Society, 768 10 O 1,822 14 0O

Ditto received fom ‘the Bank an

Bengal on old account, : 108 12 5

L93t-10 .5

LIBRARY.

Sale proceeds of Books, oe W662 91-199 1,225 4 0

Museum or Zoouoey.

Received from the General Trea-

sury, at 300 Rs. per month, .. 3,600 O 3,600 0 0

SECRETARY’S OFFICE, .. Ss

Discount on Postage Stamps, re ve Ld 6

Refund of Postage, .. is - 710 0

— 95, 6

VESTED FunpD, we ee nicole. a

Interest on Company’s Paper from

the Bank of Bengal,.. 7 oN ESO VO RO

Discount on ditto, ete 10 O O

Interest on 2,500 Rs. nivaneel. an the O. P.

Fund, from Jan. to 3lst Dec. 1857, at 4 per

ecnt,, ‘ as aie 100 0 O

— 240 0 O

GENERAL ESTABLISHMENT.

Savings,.. ae on 2. 2.7509 74.9.9

Deposit Account, eewet Ord 1 26)

Hon’ble R. B. Byng, .. as ba 64 0 0

Lt. H. Raverty, A ee ih 90 0 0

F. E. Hall, Esq. ee ee ee 43 5 0

Lt. Terrot, ee 200: 0

Rev. Isidor Lowenthall, ae ee 13. 0 0 |

—— 291 5 0

Carried over, .. 14,626 2

1858. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

No. 1.

of the Asiatic Society for 1857.

DISBURSEMENTS.

CONTRIBUTIONS. 1856.

Refund of contributions to A.

Christison, Esq. or oe ee oe

JOURNAL. °.. on nejele 128

Freight... att ns Zoe YO

Printing Charges, .. ee 2,086 8 O

Lithographing, He 259 0 0

Commission on ene bf Books, .. BIS nl Gee

Purchase of Postage Stamps, .. ac Q)'.O

Petty Charges, Ae Ae ll 7 6

LIBRARY, =f ve OL On Lowe

Salary of the Librarian, 12 months,

at 70 per month, .. 840 0 0

Establishment ditto, at 8 per month, ; 96 0 0

Purchase of Books, per Messrs.

Williams and Norgate, .. Rs. 4392 8 0 4569 & 9

Ditto ditto, Calcutta, se (648° 9 Sore

Printing 200 Catalogues of Books

and Maps in the Library, tre 680 12 0

Bock Binding, Se ee . 470 12 0O

Stationery, ‘Wives oe 114 0

Postage, Vee ies 23 11 O

Purchase of Silver Coins, 4 0 0

Commission on sale of Books, 584.0

Printing receipts and circulars, 20 0 0

Cleaning Charges, .. 45 GO 2207,.0

| Charges, oe oe 32 14 9

MusevoM or Zooutoey, .. 4,133 13 0

Salary of the Curator at 250 per

month, 12 months, 3,000 0 O

House rent at 40 per month, 12

months, HA me 480 0 O

Establishment, ae ee Slovtas 3

Contingent charges, oe 149 15 6

Extra Taxidermist’s Salary, .. 45 10 9

Printing 250 Copies of bills for .

Government Allowance, we 5 0 0

SECRETARY’s Orricz, .. 1,720 15 10

General Establishment, 7e2 2.0 20

Secretary’s Office Establishment, 670 0 O

Copying Charges, .. ee GOO

LLP PLP LL LP PLL LILI OLOIPPIFLLPPGPY Vw

1857.

32 0 0

21450" 9

6,804 8 6

4,496 9 6

Carried over, 1458 O 013,783 3 9

94 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

RECEIPTS.

Brought forward,

Stacy Coin CouLeEcrTIon,

Received subcriptions for the pur-

chase of the Collection,

Messrs. WILLIAMS AND

NORGATE,

Received from ian Radhacant

Deva, .. oe 20 3

»» Sale proceeds of a copy of Bopp’ S

Comparative Grammar, oe 25 0 0

,», for sundry Books purchased, . sardo02 8 0

BuILpDING.

Received from the Municipal Commissioner’s office, remission

of the Lighting charges for the Ist and 2nd quarters of

1857, ee

ORIENTAL PUBLICATION FUND.

Received by transfer from Messrs. Williams and Norgate’s

account, Sale proceeds of Bib. Indica,

G. H. PLowpen, Esa.

Refund of Postage,

DapoBa PuNDURANG, Esa.

Received on account current of Freight, oe ee

BALANCE oF 1856,

Bank of Bengal, is a6 6,574 14 10

Cash in hand, me ae 89 15 3

Inefficient Balance, ate

Carried over,

[ No. 1.

.. 14,626 2 8

2,676 0 0

4,419 8 3

1 0 0

765 5 4

0 4 0

2° 38 0

6,664 14 1

470 0 8

29,639 10 7

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 95

DISBURSEMENTS.

Brought forward, 1458 0 013,783 3 9

Postage, be ela 1 Oss gat

Stationery, Ae Lf) ores

Purchase of Postage Stamps, ie 58 8 O,

Printing Charges, .. 69°, 9 °3

Engraving a plate for contribution

bills, .. ae Ay 10 0-0

Petty Charges, es oe 45 6 9

1,739 O 9

Vestep Funp.

Purchase of Government Securi-

ties, .. 0 0 0 4,000 0 O

Commission paid to the Bank of

Bengal for investing in Com-

pany’s Paper 4,000 Rs. @ 4 per

Cent., 00 0 10 0 0

Paid Commission for the Collec-

tion of imterest on Company’s

Paper, 0 5 3

Do, Interest on Company’ s Paper, 24/3)

Ditto for renewing company’s

papers, we ve 9 8

—— tis 99

Deposit Account,

e. ©. fall, Esq., .. 75. Ff 0

How’ble Sir J. W. Colvile, Kt.,. syate 12 Ow

W. Theobald, Esq.,. ee 10) (3. 0

Hon’ble R. B. Byng, 56 48 0 0

W.S. Blanford, Esq. $i 10 0 O

— 15515 0

Stacy Coin CoLLEecrTIon.

Paid to the Secretary by a cheque

to be kept on a separate acct. 2,726 0 0

Messrs. WILLIAMS AND NoRGATE,

Paid H. ern Esq. as _ per

their order, a8 730 0 O

Purchase of Books on their Ac-

count, oe Li O50

Freight on Do. Do. ll 4 0

Amount paid for purchase of books

from 1853 to 1857 by transfer of

the sale proceeds of the Society’s

publications in their hands, .. 2,102, 7% 4

— 2,970 11 4

BuILpDING,

Assessment, nC 280 0 0

Ditto for Lighting Gas, os 63 0 0

Sundry Repairs, .. -_ 56 11 6

Paving the floor with Stones, .. 495 7 O

S90 2). 6

26,291 10 1

96 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1.

RECEIPTS.

Memo.

Balance at the close of 1856,

Amount credited in 1857,

Deduct debited in ditto,

Balance at the close of 1857,

The Asiatic Socicty’s Room,

The 3lst December, 1857.

Brought forward, 29,639 10 7

toe? eeu

29,639 10 7

or Drpostts.

ee ee . 362 13

oa eo ee 22) 5

E. ER:

GourRDAS BYSACK,

Asst. Secy.

1858. ] Procéedings of the Asiatic Society.

DISBURSEMENTS.

Brought forward,

G. H. PLowpeEn, Esa.

Postage stamps paid on his ac-

count, ais ee

Dapova PANDURANG, Esa.

Postage stamps pad on his ac-

count, .. oe

Be cesncce, Bens wae. 0!

Advertising Meetings, we 49 3 0

Meeting Charges, .. ale 146 8 O

Printing balloting papers, &c. .. 20 0 0

New Mats for the Rooms, és 88 3 0

Repairing a Clock, es a. 0. 0

Gardener’s wages, .. es 1412 9

Petty Charges, .. = 106 4 3

BALANCE.

Bank of Bengal, _ .. ae 2,321 11 3

Cash in hand, ae me 8 14 0

Inefficient Balance, .. =

29,639 10 7

26,29) 10:1

432 15 OU

2350. 9) oo

581 15 3

———

W.S. ATKINSON,

Secretary.

98 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 1.

STATEMENT

Abstract of the Oriental

aes ee

RN RN NINE SIRI RE PPD DIADRAD DDL RAPALA ALIA

o_o

RECEIPTS.

1856. 1857.

BALANCE OF 1856, Bank of Bengal, 283 13 6

Cash in hand, A 114 0O

————._ 285 11 6

Inefficient Balance, .. 46 2,092 14 8

2,378 10 2

SALE OF ORIENTAL PUBLICA-

TIONS, .. of -» Lovo 120)

Received by sale of Bib. Indica, .. 1,066 1° 4

Ditto by subscription to Do., .. 91 10° 0

-——_—_———. 1,157 ll 4

GOVERNMENT ALLOWANCE, .. 6,000 0 O

Received from General Treasury at

500 per month, .. ea 6,000 O O

VESTED FUND, .- «2 209. 7 6

Interest on Company’s Paper from

Government Agent, ote 140 0 O

Ditto on Ditto from Bank of

Bengal, ae ee 70 0 O

—~-- ~~ BY 0 -D

CustTopDy oF ORIENTAL WorKS

Fine, 2-0 0

ee ~~

Carried over, 9,748 5 6

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 99

No. 2.

Fund for the year 1857.

PPL LDL LIL OL LLP LLLP LILI IIL PISS ILI PPI II IIL PID LPI ISI

DISBURSEMENTS.

1856. 1857.

SALE OF ORIENTAL PuBLiIcATIons, 79 ll 9

Freight, =e ee 187-0 ©

Commission, nS ee 30 1356

ne 53 13 6

Purcuaset oF Booxs & MSS.

From Messrs. Mackenzie, Lyall

and Co. and others, ae 334 6 0

Vestep Funp.

Commission paid to the Bank of

Bengal for collecting Interest

on Company’s Paper, 0 8 6

Interest paid to the Asiatic So-

ciety on the Loan of Rs. 2,500, 100 0 0

—— 100 8 6

CustTopy oF ORIENTAL Works, 705 1 6

Salary of Librarian at 30 per

month, 12 ms., .. 360 0 0

Establishment at 12 per month

ditto,.. ee Be 144 0 0

Book binding, Re mie 1290.0

Books cleaning, .. ae 20 0 0

Copying Charges, .. as 4 0 0

Extra Duftry, ee ne 12 8 0

Petty Charges, ae ae 2 8% 0

Printing Charges, .. 5 0. 0

Commission on Purchase of Bogie > Oo Oo

Stationery, es Ae 1 0 0

— 683 0 0

AsIATIc SOCIETY.

Amount due to the O. P. Fund

on account of the sale of Bib.

Indica as per Accounts Current

of Messrs. Williams & Norgate,

£76-10-8, ae a 765 5 4

Copyine or MSS., .. 18 9 3

Copying charges, .. of 80 3 9

VASAVADATTA, nai BES! 6, 0

Printing Charges, .. ne 224 0 0

UPANISHADS.

Printing Charges, .. oe 448 0 0

MARKANDEYA PurANnA,.. 465 0 O

Printing Charges, .. ne 232 § 0

Editing Charges, .. Ay 60 0 0

ma 8 0

Carried over, 2,981 13 1

Oo 2

100 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1.

Brought forward, 9,748 5 6

9,748 5 6

E. E.

The Asiatic Society’s Rooms, Gourpas Bysack,

The 31st Dec. 1857. Asst. Secy.

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 101

Tapz KERAL.

Printing Charges, .. me

SANHITA OF THE BLACK

YasuR VEDA.

Printing Charges, .. 58

Wagqipy, .. a

Printing Charges, .. we

BrinapD ARANYA UPANISHADS,

Printing Charges, .. ee

BALANCE.

Bank of Bengal, .. oe

Cash in hand, a Ay

Inefficient Balance, .. we

Brought forward, 2,981 13 1

96 0 0

904 0 O

3 =O

232 12.0

0 0

spe. OG

9 9

4 9

— 3,088 13 9

2,112 14 8

5,201 12 5

9,748 5 6

OAT FF I LL

W. S. ATKINSON,

Secretary,

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1.

102

: "i099 “4ssp ‘Jogy ‘uaquasag’ #1 aYL—

“hgara0g ougwisyy “hidpa492 ‘IOVSAG SVGNN04 ‘swooay $.fjav0g oNwspy eyT,

‘NOSNIMLY “SAA : TO

9 ¢ eors 8 §€ 928'8

r4 — ae

0 8 G9 @) g 6 eco5utseoeoeoeso ee ee 86 JO ayBG ‘O31

; 0 8 998 Of 2LGe be uondiuasqng ‘[vumor

‘ 0 0 686 O FP 66¢ seseseeesetsyoog Jo avg ‘ArBIquy

€ g CVG E a 0 96 0 0 96 eeeceoeoetoeveeveseae *90.] UOISSIMUIp VY

9 6 OFl’Z 8 Il COZ‘ eevee seeveeeee? ***smoryn 11} UO

6) 8 699 0 0 0 exaeese BE Ce BH Fe Ce ee BE ESE ‘Wooy § l a acne @)

pig oy} doy saseo poze[yy MIN ;

110 066 0 0 0 s+ ‘oquSIO NT PUB SUIVITITAL “SHSSOTA § ; :

0 Dre relelereineie) oie ese one eleneiere welelese sa6 iG 3 > , Se i ee

ee ico ay tom rome | 2 PT 8 8 OS : puny

ee ae uoHBOTTGNA [VON oy oF We’

ieee pe: OLY sy ‘Avlprey “ML 0 0 00s 0 0 00g veeeeereevoees Crgdeg sfuvdutog

‘SLIAd e@ GI 18g Cone KO Pre til ee ee ee ear

0 Il SFI 0 0 0 Seresessrevresectoere ‘sysodaqy 10730 2 0 r1 8 e CL 68 ceeeoecererscoooes SNUB UL YSb)

0 8 646 O 8 16¢é ore Savy STATON “Mf US 919 UO ; e 1) Tes Ol FL Grou Se eee ‘eousg jo yuRg

"181 ‘9981 ‘SLISOdAA "/¢81 ‘9981 ‘HSVO

SOU OUT

‘¢ ‘ON LNAUWNALVLS

‘$7988

1858. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 103

LIST OF ORDINARY MEMBERS

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

ON THE 3lsT DECEMBER, 1857.

The * distinguishes non-subscribing Members.

Abbott, Lieut.-Col. J. Bengal Artillery, Ishapur.

*Allen, C. Esq. B. C. 8., Europe.

*Anderson, Lieut.-Col. W. Bengal Artillery, England.

Atkinson, W. S. Esquire, Calcutta.

Avdall, J. Esquire, Calcutta.

*Baker, Lt.-Col. W. E. Bengal Engineers, Europe.

Batten, J. H. Esquire, B. ©. 8., North West Provinces.

Beadon, C. Esquire, B. C. S., Calcutta.

Beaufort, F. L. Esquire, B. C. 8., Calcutta.

Beckwith, J. Esquire, Calcutta.

*Benson, Lt.-Col. R., England.

Birch, Col. R. J. H. C. B., Calcutta.

Bivar, Capt. H. 8. 18th Regt. B. N. I., Northern Cachar.

Blagrave, Capt. T. C. 26th Regt. B. N. I. Trans-Sutledge Provinces.

Blanford, H. F. Esq. Government Geological Survey.

Blundell, EK. A. Esquire, Singapore.

*Bogle, Lt.-Col. Sir A. Kt., England.

Boycott, Dr. T. Bombay M. S.; Calcutta.

*Brodie, Capt. T. 5th Regt. B. N. I., Europe.

Burgess, Lt. F. J. 17th Regt. B. N. 1., Nowgong.

Busheerooddeen Sultan Mahamed, Saheb, Calcutta.

Campbell, Dr. A. B. M.8., Darjiling.

104 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [| No. 1.

Chapman, C. Esq. B. C. 8., Bhagulpore.

Chapman, R. B. Esq., B. C. S., Calcutta.

Colvile, Hon’ble Sir J. W. Kt., Calcutta.

Colvin, B. J. Esquire, B. C. 8., Calcutta.

*Colvin, J. H. B. Hsq., B. C. 8., Europe.

Cowell, E. B. Esq., Calcutta.

Crozier, W. Dr., B. M. S., Calcutta.

*Cust, R. N. Esq., B. C. S., Europe.

Dalton, Capt. E. 8S. 9th Regt. B. N. I., Chota Nagpur.

*De Bourbel, Lt. R. Bengal Engrs., Europe.

Dickens, Capt. C. H., Calcutta.

Drummond, Hon’ble #., B. C. 8., Calcutta.

Eatwell, Dr. W. C. B., Calcutta.

*Edgworth, M. P. Esq. B. C. 8., Europe.

Elliott, Hon’ble W., M. C.S.

Ellis, Major R. R. 23rd Regt. B. N. I., Bundlekund.

Elphinstone, Lieut. N. W. 4th Reet. B. N. 1, Goorgariah.

Erskine, Major W. C. Commr. of Saugur, Nurbudda Territories,

Jubulpur.

*Falconer, Dr. H., F. R.S., B. M.8., Europe.

Fayrer, Dr. J., B. M.S. !

*Freeling, G. H. Hsq., B. C. 8., Europe. Since returned.

Fytche, Major A. 70th Regt. B. N. 1., Bassein.

*Gladstone, W. Hsq., Europe.

Govinchunder Sen, Babu, Calcutta.

Grapel, W. Esq., Calcutta.

Gray, J. J. Hsq., Maldah.

Grote, A. Esquire, B. C. 8., Calcutta.

*Gubbins, C. Esq., B. C. S., Europe.

Hall, F. E. Esq. M. A., Saugur.

Halsey, W.S. Esq., B. C.8., Gurruckpore.

*Hamilton, R. Esq., China.

Hamilton, Sir R. N. E. Bart., B. C. 8., Indore.

Hannyngton, Lieut.-Col. J. C. 24th Regt. B. N. I., Berhampore.

Hearsay, Major Genl. J. B., K. C. B. 10th Light Cavalry, Barrack-

pore.

Herschel, W. J. Esq. B. C.S., Jungipore.

1858.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 105

*Hichens, Lieut. W. Bengal Engineers, Europe.

Hodgson, B. H. Esq. B. C. 8., Darjiling. Since gone to Europe.

Hossein Ally Mohamed, His Highness Ex-Ameer of Scinde, Calcutta.

Ishureepershad, Rajah, Benares.

*Jackson, L. 8. Eyq., Europe.

*Jackson, W. B. Esq. B. C. 8., Europe.

Jadava Krishna Sinha, Babu, Calcutta.

James, Capt. H. C. 32nd Regt. B. N. L., Darjiling.

Jenkins, Lieut.-Col. F., Assam.

Jerdon, T. C. Esq. M. M.S.

* Johnstone, J. Hsq., Europe.

Joygopaul Bysack, Babu, Calcutta.

Kabeeroodeen Ahmed Shah, Bahadoor, Sassaram.

Kay, Rev. W., D.D., Bishop’s College.

*Laidlay, J. W. Esq., Kurope.

Layard, Capt. F. P. 19th Reet. B. N. 1, Berhampore.

Lees, Captain, W. N., 42nd Regt. B. N. I., Calcutta.

Liebig, Dr. G. Von, B. M. S8., Calcutta.

Loch, G. Esq. B. C. 8., Calcutta.

*Loch, T. C. Esq. B. C. S., Europe.

Loftie, Lieut.-Col. M. EH.

Low, Major Genl. Hon’ble J., Calcutta.

*Lushington, F. A. Esq. B. C. 8., Europe.

Maclagan, Capt. R., N. W. Provinces.

Macleod, D. I’. Esq. B. C. 8., Lahore.

Macrae, Dr. A. C., B. M.8., Calcutta.

Manickjee Rustomjee, Esq., Calcutta.

*Marshman, J. C. Hsq., Europe.

* Middleton, J. Esq., Kurope.

Medlicott, J. G. Esq., Calcutta.

*Mills, A. J. M. Esq. B. C. S., Europe.

Money, D. J. Esq. B. C. S., Calcutta.

Money, J. W. B. Esq. B. C.8., Calcutta.

Morris, G. G. Esq. B. C. S., Rungpur.

Morton, D. T. Esq., M. D., Moulmein.

*Muir, J. Eysq., Europe.

Muir, W. Esq. B.C. 8., Allahabad.

106 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. le

*Nicholls, Capt. W. T. 24th Regt. M. N. I., Europe.

Nogendranath Tagore, Babu, Calcutta.

Oldham, Prof. T., F. R. S., Calcutta.

O’Shaughnessy, Sir. W. B., Bombay.

*Ouseley, Major W. R., Europe.

*Phayre, Major A., Europe. Since returned.

Prasunnonath Roy, Rajé, Bahadur, Degaputti, Rajshaye.

Pratt, the Venerable Archdeacon, J. H., Calcutta.

Pratapchandra Sinha, Raja, Calcutta.

*Prinsep, C. R. Esq., Europe.

Prasannacumar Tagore, Babu, Calcutta.

Radhanath Sikdar, Babu, Calcutta.

Rajendra Dutt, Babu, Calcutta.

Rajendralal Mittra, Babu, Calcutta.

Ramanath Bannorjee, Babu, Calcutta.

Ramanath Tagore, Babu, Calcutta.

Ramaprasad Roy, Babu, Calcutta.

Ramchandra Sifha, Raja, Calcutta.

Ramgopal Ghose, Babu, Calcutta.

Riddell, H. P. Esq. B. C. 8., Calcutta. Since gone to Europe.

Roberts, A. Esq. B. C. S., Jubbulpore.

Roer, Dr. Ee Cuttack.

Rogers, Capt. T. E., Caleutta.

Row, Dr. J. B. M. S., Calcutta.

*Royle, Dr. J., F. R.S., Europe. Since dead.

*Russell, R. H. Esq., Europe.

Samuells, EH. A. Esq., B. C. 8., Patna.

Saxton, Capt. G. H. 38th M. N. I., Cuttack.

*Schiller, F. Esq., Europe.

Seton-Karr, W. Esq., Tirhoot.

Sherwill, Capt. W. 8S. 66th Regt. B. N. I. Dum-Dum.

*Smith, Col. J. T., Europe.

Smith, Rev. W. O., Calcutta.

Spankie, R. Esq. B. C.S. Saharunpore.

*Sprenger, Dr. A., Europe.

Stephen, Major J. G. 8th N. I., Raneegunge.

Strachey, Lt.-Col. R., Bengal Engineers, Calcutta.

1858.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. | 107

*Strachey, J. E. Esq. B. C. S., Europe.

*Strong, F. P. Esq. B. M.S., Europe.

Satyasharana Ghosal, Raja, Calcutta.

*Thomas, EH. Esq., B. C. S., Europe.

Thomson, Dr. T., M. D., F. BR. 8., Botanical Gardens.

Thornhill, C. B. Esq. B. C. S., Nynee Tal.

Thuillier, Major H. L., Artillery, Calcutta.

Thurnburn, Capt. F. A. V. 14th Regt. B. N. I., Oude.

Trevor, C. B. Esq. B. C. S., Calcutta.

Ward, J. J. Hsq. B.C. S., Cuttack.

Watson, J. Esq., B. C. 8., Berhampur.

Waugh, Col. A. S., Bengal Engrs., Derra Dhoon.

Wilson, The Right Rev. D., Lord Bishop, Calcutta. Since dead.

Woodrow, H. Esq., Calcutta.

Young, Capt. C. B. Bengal Engrs., Calcutta.

Yule, Major H. Bengal Engrs. Calcutta.

ELECTED IN 1857.

H. F. Blanford, Esq., Calcutta.

H. B. Cowell, Esq., Calcutta.

Joygopaul Bysack, Babu, Calcutta.

Dr. W. C. B. Eatwell, Calcutta.

Raja Prasunonauth Raya, Bahadur, Degaputti, Rajshayee.

Dr. W. Crozier, B. M. 8., Calcutta.

Loss oF MEMBERS DURING THE YEAB 1857.

Withdrawn.

Dr. A. Christison, Gwalior.

Lieut. R. Stewart, Cachar.

Dr. W. Martin, Calcutta.

Rev. K. M. Banerjee, Calcutta.

J. W. Sherer, Esq., Allighur.

P. W. LeGeyt, Esq., Calcutta.

J. Willis, Esq., Calcutta.

D. G. Nicholson, Esq., Moulmein.

J. F. Curtis, Esq., Calcutta.

A. R. Young, Esq., Calcutta.

108 3 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

W. G. Young, Esq., Calcutta.

Dr. F. J. Mouat, Calcutta.

Lieut. H. 8. Forbes, Artillery, Benares.

Major J. C. Haughton, Moulmein.

By Death.

G. A. Bushby, Esq., Gwalior.

S. G. T. Heatley, Esq., Delhi.

M. ©. Ommanney, Esq., B. C. B., Lucknow.

D. Grant, Esq. B. C.S., Futteghur.

Capt. I’. C. C. Hayes, 66th Reet. B. N. I., Lucknow.

Dr. G. G. Spilsbury, Calcutta.

Dr. H. Walker, Europe.

Col. Sir H. Lawrence, Oude.

Barlow, Sir R., Bart, B. C. 8., Europe.

Hon’ble J. BR. Colvin, Agra.

Captain R. B. P. Byng, 62nd Reet. B. N. L.,

C. W. Cunliffe, B. C. 8. Lucknow.

Honorary Member.

Baron Von Hammer-Purgstall, Aulic Counsellor, Vienna.

List oF Honorary MEMBERS.

M. Garcin de Tassy, Membre de I’ Instit, Paris.

Sir John Phillippart, London.

Count De Noe, Paris.

Prof. Francis Bopp, Memb. de |’ Academie de Berlin.

Sir J. F. W. Herschel, F. R. 8. London.

Col. W. H. Sykes, F. BR. 8S. Do.

General Count Ventura, Europe.

Prof. Lea, Philladelphia.

Prof. H. H. Wilson, F. R. 8., London.

Prof. C. Lassen, Bonn.

Sir G. T. Staunton, Bart., F. R.S., London.

M. Reinaud, Memb. de l’ Instit, Prof. de ? Arabe, Paris.

Dr. Ewald, Gottingen.

His Highness Hekekyan Bey, Egypt.

[No. I.

1858. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 109

Right Hon’ble Sir Edward Ryan, Kt., London.

Prof. Jules Mohl, Memb. de l’ Instit, Paris.

Col. W. Munro, 39 Regt.

His Highness the Nawab Nazim of Bengal, Murshedabad.

Dr. J. D. Hooker, R. N., F. R. 8. London.

Prof. Henry, Princeton, United States.

Lt.-Col. Sir H. C. Rawlinson, K. C. B., London.

Lt.-Col. Sir Proby T. Cautley, K. C. B., London.

Raja Radhakanta Deva Bahadur, Calcutta.

CoRRESPONDING MEMBERS.

Kremer, Mons. A. Von, Alexandria.

Porter, Rev. J., Damascus.

Schlagintweit, Mons. H.

Schlagintweit, Mons. A.

Smith, Dr. E., Beyrout.

Tailor, J. Esq. Bussorah.

Wilson, Dr., Bombay. °*

Nietner, J. Esq., Colombo, Ceylon.

Associate MEMBERS.

Blyth, HK. Esq., Calcutta.

Karamt, Ali Syud, Matawalli, Hooghly.

Long, Rev. J., Calcutta.

MacGowan, Rev. J., Ningpo.

Piddington, H., Esq., Calcutta.

Stephenson, J. Esq. Europe.

LLL LLDLOLLLLLOPLLOIIIOIOOeewmwwnwnr

110 Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. [No. 1.

For Frspruary, 1858.

At a monthly General Meeting of the Asiatic Society held on the

3rd instant.

Major H. L. Thuillier, Senior Member present, in the chair.

The proceedings of the December meeting were read and con-

firmed.

Presentations were received—

1.—From the Government of Madras, copies of Selections from

the records of the Government.

The Secretary stated that these publications had been sent, in

compliance with a request made by the Council, who were glad to

announce that the Government of Madras have ordered that the

Society should be supplied with all the Selections that may here-

after be published.

2. From Mr. C. Joseph, a copy of his new map of the country,

from Calcutta to Lahore, shewing the course of the rail, and the

Grand Trunk Road. ;

3. From the Principal of the Grant Medical College Bombay

a copy of the Report of the Grant Medical College, for the Session

. 1856-57.

4.—From the Secretary to the Government of the Central Pro-

vinces, a plan of the Village and Fort of Bilbere.

5.—From Captain Hill, Bankshall, through Mr. Piddington, a

Dayak Coin from Tringam, Coast of Borneo.

Recorded a note from B. H. Hodgson, Esq., C. S. announe-

ing his departure for England, and another from Mr. C. Gubbins,

C. S. announcing that being about to retire from the Service, he

wished his name to be removed from the list of paying members.

The Council submitted a report announcing, that they had ap-

pointed the following Sub-Committees.

FINANCE.

Dr. T. Boycott.

Captain C. H. Dickens.

1858.]

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

PHILOLOGY.

A. Grote, Esq.

EK. A. Samuells, Esq.

Rev. J. Long.

F. E. Hall, Esq.

EK. B. Cowell, Esq.

Dr. E. Roér.

Captain W. N. Lees.

Baboo Rajendralal Mittra.

LIBRARY.

E. A. Samuells, Esq.

W. Grapel, Esq.

Baboo Ramapersad Roy.

Lieut.-Col. R. Strachey.

Baboo Rajendralal Mittra. .

Captain W. N. Lees.

Captain C. H. Dickens.

Naturan History.

HK. A Samuells, Esq.

T. Oldham, Esq.

Dr. T. Thomas.

Dr. T. Boycott.

Captain C. B. Young.

Lieut.-Colonel R. Strachey.

H. F. Blanford, Esq.

MeEtTEoROLOGY AND PrysicaL SCIENCE.

The Venerable J. H. Pratt.

Major H. OL. Thuillier.

Dr. Von Liebig. |

Lieut.-Colonel R. Strachey.

H. Piddington, Esq.

Baboo Rada Nauth Sikdar.

1il

The election of Monsieur R. Schlagintweit as a corresponding

member of the Society was deferred under rule 6 of the bye-laws.

Baboo Kaliprosono Sing, duly proposed and seconded, at the

December meeting, was declared elected.

Communications were received.

112 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1.

1.—From Baboo Rada Nauth Sikdar, forwarding abstraets of the

Meteorological Register kept at the office of the Surveyor General,

Calcutta, for August and September last.

2.—From Dr. Campbell, Darjiling, through Major Thuillier, copy

of a Register of the Temperature of the Ocean, with the chart of

the voyage of the “ Agamemnon” shewing the daily position of the

ship at noon, from the Sandheads of the Hooghly, to the river

Thames.

3.—From Mr. Oldham, a notice of the recent additions to our

knowledge of the Cretaceous Rocks of India.

The paper was read by the Secretary and the thanks of the

meeting were accorded to the Author.

Some Terracotta sculptured slabs which Captain Yule had received

from Ava, were at his request exhibited to the meeting, and excited

considerable interest.

The librarian submitted his monthly reports for December and

January last.

The following is Mr. Oldham’s paper.

On some additions to the knowledge of the Cretaceous rocks of India.

By Tuomas Orpuam, LL. D., F. B.S. WR. LA, &. GS. ff e.,

Superintendent of the Geological Survey of India.

At the meeting of the Society for the month of May 1857, Mr.

Henry Blanford and myself were present, with the intention of

laying before the Society, a brief notice of a very important dis-

covery bearing on the Geology of India which had not long pre-

viously been made. This was the fact of the occurrence of rocks

of the Cretaceous epoch in the western portion of the Nerbudda

district. And the specimens illustrative of the intended com-

munication were laid on the table. The attention of the meeting

on that occasion, having been fully occupied by other matters of

interest, and importance, which came before it, time did not allow

of this geological communication being brought forward, and as both

Mr. Blanford and myself shortly afterwards left Calcutta, the sub-

ject was not again brought before the Society. I am, however

desirous of recalling these facts, from the circumstance that the

same discovery has subsequently been brought forward elsewhere»

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 113

and I desire to place on record the facts of the case, more fully than

has hitherto been done, that the friend whose zeal first led to the

discovery may be rewarded by obtaining full merit for his intelli-

gent research.

All those who have given any attention to the study of Indian

geology, are aware that previously to last year, rocks of the cre-

taceous epoch, were only known to occur, in the South of the Indian

Peninsula, forming a band, the limits of which were supposed to be

near Trichinopoly on the South, and near Pondicherry on the North,

The true relations of this band of cretaceous rocks, have never been

fully investigated, but a very beautifully preserved, and numerous

suite of fossils had been collected from them by Messrs. Kay and

Brooke Cunliffe, of the Madras Civil Service, which were presented

to the Geological Society of London. The description of these

fossils was undertaken by the late Professor Edward Forbes, and a

most valuable and instructive memoir, fully illustrated with excel-

lent plates, was published in the 3rd part of the 7th vol. of the

Geological Transactions, London.

After giving a detailed description of the species found, Professor

Forbes entered on a discussion of the inferences to be drawn from

the Fauna thus represented. It must be borne in mind that pre-

viousiy to this publication, the occurrence of any rocks, representa-

tives of the cretaceous epoch in India, had often been denied, and

that there was no fixed geological horizon to which such a new

discovery could be referred. The physical relations of the rocks

containing the fossils to any other recognised groups were unknown,

and if was only from a discussion of the organic remains contained

in them, that any just inference as to their geological age could be

attained.

Professor Forbes entered fully into this discussion, and from a

careful analysis of all the evidence arrived at the conclusion, that

all the beds from which fossils had been obtained were parts or mem-

bers of one and the same series, and that that series was equivalent

to the cretaceous series of Kurope ; the deposits at Trichinopoly and

Verdachellum, being probably equivalent to the upper greensand

aud gault divisions of that series; the deposit near Pondicherry,

being equivalent to the Neocomien, or lower greeusand.

114 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1.

During a brief visit to Madras in the autumn of 1856, I was

indebted to the kindness of Mr. Brooke Cunliffe, one of the original

labourers at these deposits, for a valuable collection of these fossils

chiefly from the Utatur locality. This collection at once proved

the correctness of the closing words of Professor Forbes’ valuable

paper that “Verdachellum and Trichinopoly will doubtless yield

many more species than have yet been brought to Europe,” for in

it were many beautiful and well marked forms previously undescrib-

ed. But it also showed conclusively, that a still further and more

careful research was requisite, before it could be supposed that any-

thing like fair data had been obtained, for arriving at trustworthy

conclusions as to the true character of the Fauna of this period in

Southern India. The relative abundance of species, and even of

genera seemed in many respects very different from that which the

original collection gave, and it appeared probable that much of this

difference in different localities was the result of a difference in

depth of the sea at the time of deposit, and not of difference in

time—a result not in accordance with the conclusions arrived at by

Professor Forbes.

Among the small collection presented by Brooke Cunliffe, Esq.

not less than 93 species were distinguished. Of this large number

ouly 38 were known to Professor Forbes from the original collec-

tion; leaving an addition to the Fauna known up to that time

from these rocks of 60 species. Without exception these

60 species all tended to confirm the opinion of Forbes, that

these rocks were of cretaceous age. A summary is given below

of these additions generically, reserving the details of specific

description until it is possible to prepare illustrations of the fossils.

But a group or two may be referred to, in illustration of our remarks;

Thus, taking the several well marked sections of the great genus

Ammonites, amoug the large addition to the known catalogue of

species, which Mr. Cunliffe’s collection has given, we have none of

the Fimbriati, an oolitic and cretaceous section; none of the

Flexuosi, also a lower cretaceous section; none of the Dentati,

also lower cretaceous ; none of the Armati, an upper oolitie section ;

none of the Lavigati; while on the other hand of the Cristati,

a section essentially cretaceous, we find one ; of the Clypeiformi,

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 115

also a cretaceous section, one: of the Heterophylli five, and all of

the cretaceous subdivision of this section; of the Lvgati, a group

essentially cretaceous, not less than ten.

Of Nautilus, a genus having a larger development in the upper,

than in the lower beds of the cretaceous, we have three allied to other

cretaceous forms; of Belemnitella, confined to the upper portion of

the cretaceous group, one. And other instances might be given.

These will however suffice to shew, that a vast addition to the cre-

taceous Fauna of India still remains to be worked out.

I would add that Mr. H. F. Blanford, with others, is at present

engaged in making out the relation of these rocks, and I confidently

anticipate, that much light will be thrown upon the subject, by the

careful examination of the Officers of the Geological Survey in that

district.

Abstract of fossils from Utatur near Trichinopoly.

Species previ- Species

ously known, unknown.

Zoophyta.

Turbinolia,

Lichinodermata

BSGIGGUISEE ac sratecessrondee secs sede. sas) 2

Nucleolites, EOP CRC Te OCR T PEEL ihae 1

VOIASKED (Sue roscoe rare tates oes tess ae ody 1

Crustacea.

EN eis leer col ana tophinc: Welaaie shades (4 0 1

Mollusca. (Acephala.)

BES CATING, 5 icc seiuiade veltaes ite cn cide anne cenanes 0 3

LG /CIC pit eg RRA Re BPAY ORE TRE REE RET ET PEP LL 0

BD abrea ue teat heat ie he naacs ot 0 A,

Gry phea, 2 1

Perma? (bu. peattoni ina. wld odienbalon arvatecdt . stud] O 2

LTE ICC ABUSE Po Goode Serer aes Se OOS ae Be 8 ti

Reernnculusyeiaa. cst. smitiddbens evans! O 1

Millett. No riellew. adh. "in cxissch oes tics nian, oy 0h 1

PRION; \Secssbletinss «. 5 1 if

SUPMOCMMOUSS cag bly. cnswasinite vena ewe 1

eens ihas ho. a xentie/yaia sh eidabiddasiirse anddeng’yc 2

No. 1.

Species previ Species

116 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

ously known.

(Gasteropoda),

INAGIGR, ies. anc ie 1

DOCU Sik chs seis ieee aces as 1

Pleurotomaria, ......... 1

Voluta, 2

Phasianella, 0

SULOUDDIS ys ces’ a teas 1

TR ORWIAPOU: inc. tia saaacieaunnn aula ened oie aalle

(Cephalopoda)

PARENT OB yi As cies 5nd, cishisisbepesaitin doers Miewcineese Toate

PUM COCETER, 4.00 sie sinn- maltorigin > sicir'nn a 0

MRAIMUNGE Ss 5 5.5 04 cuss coisumateice leas vats 5

PEPE MUS ah 00 5 sae bara cal b tet ne cata en mesak amee/ok Laan

Ammonites,

RO RISEN: 1 Bab vou. venaitemamcne deine 0

Leevigati, ae

Chy Peniormnty (oo, 21.050 48eien- semelei geen

PLS te RG PIN is cis ioseh -aawe etna wl

Tn aut ae ccceind ttinrea en tet oS Sea

SIN UTA cc casiy oo Magee onic sae « es ow ainees is sien a

Belemnites, )

Helemmibellag \.. dees ccneweispiweusnwedeeorecaiicceane

Annelida.

SSCEDUNAS gle civenenitemresicsgie sme om oth ase 0

Pisces.

GUAT AS 915 otha rtes ven snie vs alemsiad adam tucelns ooh

DG | NCAR HEME ie 10s SSRGE Been ae 7, oe OR eR

AGMA gD obidc 2 ona tease notes nubaa toda seein 0

unknown.

Oo OF et Oo S&- &. ©

- » = ©

The above list refers solely to the collection of fossils presented

to the Geological Museum by Brooke Cunliffe, Esq.

Nerpuppa Disrricr.—During the season of 1855-56, while

engaged in the examination of the valley of the Nerbudda, I had

the pleasure of meeting Captain R. H. Keatinge, Assistant Political

Agent for Mewar, at Poonassa. Among other things our conversa-

tion turned upon the coralline limestone, of which the ancient town

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 117

of Mandoo had been built. I took the opportunity of pointing

out the extreme interest attaching to this limestone in a geological

point of view, and the utter ignorance under which we

rested as to its age or relations. It had been very ingeniously,

and correctly inferred by Dr. Carter, in his carefully com-

piled “Summary of the Geology of India,” that this limestone

used at Mandoo had been derived from near Baug or Bagh, which

inference I pointed out to Captain Keatinge in Dr. Carter’s paper,

telling him at the same time my own impression that it would prove

to be, not oolitic, as provisionally supposed by Dr. Carter, but of the

nummulitic age. I strongly urged Captain Keatinge to visit the

locality indicated, and to collect any fossils that might be found,

feeling confident, that it would yield a rich harvest of many forms

other than corals. I felt sure that it was only requisite to point

out to this enlightened officer, the interest of the enquiry, to secure

his zealous co-operation. Nor was I disappointed. In a letter

dated Nov. 4th, 1856, after stating that he had been prevented

from getting out much sooner, as he had intended, he says: “I

started West, without, however, the least idea of where I was going

to. I got out 20 miles to Kala Bowli all well. I mounted at 2 to 1

Pp. M., to goto Cheera Khan, which name sounded well. It was

distant 8, 10, 5, 14 coss, as you pleased. arly in the afternoon I

got it down to 3 coss, but alas I rode until after dark, and it was

still 8 coss, and is 8 coss now I believe, at least I never get any

nearer, * * * J talked to the Bheels about black stone, until I sue-

ceeded in making them say that I should find white, which consoled

me much. * * * * From the information I got I started the next

morning inaS. W. direction for Deola, on the Maan river. After

going a coss I saw the limestone in the bed of a nullah, and in a

coss more I was in the midst of it. Where I was (near Deola) the

limestone lay in a valley about a mile broad. N. and 8S. the coun-

try was all hilly, the top of the hills covered with trap ; and the bed

of the Maan trap. I could make nothing of the general geological

arrangement. In the valley the lmestone was horizontal, on the

hill sides it always seemed to slope down hill, but it may have been

merely that the slabs had fallen one over the other. But the fact

is, I had only two days to work in, and occupied them in collecting

fossils.

118 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Nove

“ Higher up at Surbaperce on the Maan, I thought I traced the

following succession, (ascending) a light green stone metamorphic

or volcanic; a soft sandstone, very fine grained and white ; compact

limestone, bluish white ; and then the coral limestone, the latter only

containing corals. The compact fine limestone, is found at inter-

vals all over the jungle, and has been very largely used for lime in

the Mandoo days; the old kilns are without number. Now as to

the fossils, 1 found them wherever an edge of stone lay over a con-

venient mud bed to retain them; and oh! the spear grass! ! &. &e.

The Hehinida (Micraster coranguinum*) were in great plenty (the

Bheels call them Paunchia from their five marks) and what I

suppose to be Pecten 5-costatus. Plagiostoma spinosum and Tere-

bratula octoplicata were numerous, the latter the most numerous and

in best preservation. There are a good many other things too

you will find in the box I have to day posted for you. There are

pieces of a large finely marked Hehinus (Cidaris) aud I have a half

one of the same sort of which I send youa sketch. I have kept it

to show the natives what I want on some future occasion. There is

also a rude impression on a stone I have got, of a very large shell,

say six inches long.t

“TI have kept half the fossils to shew Mr. Blackwell, but you will

find some nice small ones wrapped separately in paper.”

On receipt of these fossils, they were at once looked to, and it

was found that although some of these specific distinctions were

not correct, they entirely supported the conclusions of Captain

Keatinge; and that here to the West of Mhow and Indore, ina

country where such was before altogether unknown, there existed

extensive beds of the cretaceous series. The importance of this fact,

in its bearing on all reasonings as to the physical geography of the

country at former periods, will be obvious to every one who has

considered such questions, and its influence on the question of the

still doubtful age of the rocks in the adjoining district was also

great. Hagerly therefore I congratulated Captain Keatinge on his

valuable discovery, and urged a further exploration of the field. And

I had the pleasure of hearing the result in the beginning of the

* This is a Brissus. + It is so. { Inoceramus ?

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 119

year. (March 1857.) Captain Keatinge had, in company with Mr.

Blackwell, Mineral viewer to the Bombay Government, revisited the

Baug district in the month of January, and has favored me with an

extract from his journal, which being brief, and full of interest, I

give entire.

Extracts from Captain Keatinge’s Journal.

14th January, 1857.— From Mundlaisir marched 15 miles to Khul,

where the Bombay and Agra road crosses the Nerbudda.

15th.—Passed by Dhurmpooree, and on to folie, a small village

in the jungle.

16¢h.—Munawer a town on the river Maan, west of the town is

a small temple in a field, some of the pieces of limestone of which

it is composed are a mass of shells.

17¢h.—To Dherree a large village on the Ourie river. All about

Dherree the country is composed of a Breccia of trap, with some

limestone and sandstone pieces amongst it, some of them are a little

rolled but the most are angular. From Mundlaisir to Dherree, all

the country is of trap with no jungle, except a small babool scrub

and uninteresting.

18¢h.—To Baug, the Breccia continuing most of the way. Some

three or four miles from Baug, sandstone is seen in the bed of a

nullah, but the high land about is all trap. About two miles out of

Baug, the sandstone commences, it is of a light pink colour easily

broken up, and the plain is covered with silicious sand from it ; in

the bed of the stream, we found pieces of black shale which on

exposure to strong heat, bubble up into a slag, and on being left in

a wood fire for some hours, turn light grey ; we could trace no vege-

table impressions in them.

19¢h.—To see the iron ore, first proceeded east of the town

some four miles, and came to the last works which were earried on

some 16 or 20 years ago. The ore lies in the body of a small hill, and

has been most extensively quarried, it is a light yellow ore like that

of Nandia, near Burwah, and of Nancoot, but in far greater masses

than any I have seen at those places, and has been most extensively

worked. ‘The deepest mine we went into measured 48 feet from

top to bottom, and was about double that width. Quite close to the

ore 1s a large hill of limestone, but so hard aud deep blue that I was

120 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1.

certain it was a trap, or metamorphic stone; on burning, however,

it turned out a beautiful lime. Near the town are numbers of small

pits and burrows, but no large mines like those to the east.

20¢h.—In the morning went to see the caves, the figures in them

very fine and imposing, as seen by torch-light, and the situation

very lovely ; the Baugun river seems to have no single fall, but a

continued rapid descent; the cliff in which the caves are situated

consists of a mass of sandstones of all colours, sloping up to the N.

E. at a slight angle, and topped with a very hard and white friable

limestone, in which we found some shell impressions. About five

miles from Baug to the east of the Noonsee Road, is a quarry of

white sandstone, an even bedded and soft stone, which is still carried

a long distance for building purposes, it seems to be near the

bottom of the mass of sandstone. In the evening rode out towards

Cheeklee and Rajpoor, some 5 or 6 miles.

21st.—This morning to the village of Augeur, N. E. of Baug, where

iron has been very largely worked. Ore in great abundance, also

the hard grey limestone. All about Baug EH. and west is a bed of

shales, which seem to be nearly vertical, dipping to the 8. or S. W.

at a very steep angle, the ore seems generally to be in them.

22nd.—Rode out along the road to Cheeklee, west of Baug to the

village of Mogra, about ten miles distant. At about 6 miles, found

trap covering sandstone, up to that, the country having shewn nearly

alternately sandstones and limestones. In the afternoon leaving

Mogra, we went nearly north to the village of Kharrwa, and from

that KE. to Baug seeing limestones and sandstones all the way,

except one hill capped with trap.

23rd.—Left Baug by the same road as entered it from Dherree

but struck off to the N. E. from the secoud village; soon got into

the trap again, with sandstones under it. About half way to Bul-

warrie in the Ourie Nulla, near the village of Khojakoa, found a

considerable thickness of sandstones, dipping to the North and

thickly covered with trap. Near Bulwarrie saw some curious meta-

morphie rocks, looking rather like granite; at Bulwarrie itself all

seemed trap.

24th.—Marched to Kutchkonda. Up to half way all seemed

trap, but after that we got into the coral limestones, and continued

1858. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 121

through them to Kutchkonda. A good deal of stone has been quar-

ried in a superficial way at this place both to the north and east,

the quarried stone lies just under trap. In the evening rode East

some four miles, to see a fallin the River Maan ; the fall is near the

village of Neemkhera, and is caused by a barrier of trap, the height

from 18 to 20 feet, according to the place it is taken from. A con-

siderable quantity of water was going over it in four streams.

Between the fall and Kutchkonda, the river exposes a considerable

thickness of crystalline limestones and shales in thin beds, dipping

considerably to the N. E. and at Kutchkonda is a gritty shale, used

by the barbers of all Nimar as a honestone.

25th.—Via Cheerakhan, (meaning “ cut-stone quarry’’) to Deora.

The former is evidently the place from whence cut-stone went to

Mandoo, and is so remembered traditionally. There are two small

mosques in the Mandoo style, built by the workmen of the olden

days. The quarries lie on the top of low hills, and have been

quarried along the top in a layer of about four or five feet, no where

apparently deeper. The rock is here not covered with trap. The

amount of stone that has been quarried is very large. From

Cheerakhan to Deora, the country is all limestone. A mile or two

out of Deora, passed what appeared to be a fossil trunk of a tree

lying on the road; and about half a mile out, a bed of thin shales

dipping to the north. ‘The thick limestone seems nearly horizontal.

At Deora found that the people had collected a good many fossils.

26th.—In the morning for several hours fossil hunting; found

some new ones, and saw a bank that appeared tc contain more, aud

in which many were found in the evening. The fossil bed is com-

posed of a clay, usually yellow, with some red and white veins in it,

and with about a foot of compact limestone over it, the bed is

intersected by astream, and shows best near the village of Odeypoor :

near it is also a bed of very friable limestone, looking exactly like

that over the caves at Baug, but containing Echini and some small

shells.

27th.—In the morning marched east, some six miles to the.

Village of Putlowed, a deserted site on high ground near a small

stream. ‘he bed of the stream was all trap, but a number of echini

were distributed in the gravel of its bed, showing that it must pass

122 Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. [No. 1.

through a fossil deposit. From thence to Baccaneer south six

miles, and so into Mundlaiser.”’

From these details it will be evident that to Captain Keatinge

alone is due the merit of having first distinguished these fossils as

cretaceous, and to him also belongs the merit of having most zea-

lously and under considerable difficulties, collected a very tolerable

series of them.

I have taken this opportunity of recording the facts above given,

more especially because in the ]ast number of the Journal of the

Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society, there is a notice re-

garding some fossils from the same locality, in which the discovery

of these most interesting fossils, and their identification as creta-

ceous, 1s not fully assigned to Captain Keatinge. And I desire to

reclaim for that most active and enlightened officer, the fullest

award of credit which his exertions deserve. Ido this the more

anxiously also, because unexpected circumstances had prevented our

doing so at the earliest opportunity, as intended, so long since as

May last, the last of the fossils having only reached me a few days

previously.

I shall not here discuss the conclusions arrived at by Dr. Carter

in the notice referred to,* that these beds are truly neocomien,

because I think we have not got any sufficient data to reason upon,

I feel confident that the hasty reference of any group of rocks, to

some acknowledged Kuropean subdivision based upon the occurrence

of 3 or 4 ill-preserved and ill-identified fossils is both unphilosophical

and injurious. The evidence here is abundantly good to say that

these rocks represent the cretaceous era, but altogether insufficient

to enable one to refer them to any subdivision of that great series.

Reserving, as before, the detailed specific description of these

fossils, a generic summary is here given of the number, &c.

Summary of Fossils collected at Baug by Captain Keatinge.

Coralivies’ “Aor S species vo. ge ee) SP eClem

Eehinddertiata.‘Cidavis;. iene oases Ji Oa. 2

Mchinugy| i@epecies)iiset..n wendin lt soe

Buissud, 0. eae ae 8b in Sod QIOR ee

* Journal Bombay Asiatic Society, No. XX. July 1857, page 621.

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 123

SO YEAS OLA) phi itjat a sind wy «inna pladlele lam oreuisnunyhe

Maliusea, Acephala, Pholadomya,, .....4 sees seeds) ob

Deru ero)s oe lc ce Men bficeialte Sunjel edema ee eat fuel

Oran ve eee lcs fe ue we ee ee savage. ae

. altum. Sow; hillanum, or very closely allied

and two others.

RO Aer ee Oe ears oi.cie is) sale iaie, <x sie ee. ee 0 Ue

DO OUAs yr ce erated the citeieiel ears ele osvidenane os, a1

BU RRS iy seeusery Se anal nop Sisrieca dS xyald 27'a/2 sasian | ye

typicus, Forbes.

Becteni (JanitayMy sas esdessieiais oe

ew)

P. (5. costatus common.)

Bhawan Se eee ae

TG erase le ee Lee cee see sp oe. os

CREMP AUINE te oe ce a sise. aoc cic oe hele oe

Gasteropoda. Rhynconella, ...,.........

INC ctence ates oho at ete ia%e' tha kas ies oc blcsislbes

AUPE IG CL asada shee guia, msaielS olga Sy aapbiw,s

Certs UIBEA nse dondia Pe deatanjerepey2Y ove ioe iaie cess Sie

PELBIU OILY he) are usiaiarchn wield lapse idk ansid.acace eres) old

CV GUE 3. cM: seca el wralettnt stata aa tero Palade

Cephalopoda.

Ammonites of the Rhotomagensis Section, 2

I had hoped to have procured during the past summer an

extended series of fossils from this locality, and with a view of hav-

ing it thoroughly examined, Mr. Wm. Theobald, Junr. was deputed

to remain in that district, after his field work of last season had

been concluded in the Nerbudda Valley. But the very disturbed

state of all the country in that neighbourhood has rendered it

impossible to carry out these views. Mr. Theobald, after considerable

risk has escaped unhurt, but the examination of the Bagh country,

must be deferred to a more favourable opportunity.

I would merely add that a brief notice of the discovery of the

fossils, was communicated to the Madras Literary Society, on Feb-

ruary 12th, 1857, and published in their Journal No. 2, New Series,

aud also that I took the opportunity of a brief communication on

some points of Indian Geology, made to the British Association for

R 2

124 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1.

Advancement of Science, at their meeting in Dublin during the past

year, to place on record, the claims of Captain Keatinge as the first

who had made out these fossils.*

LIBRARY.

The following additions have been made to the Library during the

months of December 1857 and January, 1858.

Presented.

Selections from the Records of the Government of Madras the follow-

ing Nos.—By tHe GoveErNnMENT or Mapnas.

1854.

. Report on the Navigation of the Godavery.

. Ditto on the Proposed abolition of the Madras Mint.

. Ditto on the Paumban Channel.

. Proposed plan for the Revenue Assessment of Kurnool, 1843.

e556.

4. Major Maitlaard’s School for the instruction of the Artificers and

Pupils at the Gun Carriage Manufactory.

7. Ditto on the Civil Dispensaries, 1853.

12. Reduction on the Revenue Assessment in North Arcot.

14. Report on the Medical Topography of the South Western Poli-

tical Districts.

17. Ditto on Public Instruction in the Madras Presidency for

1854-55.

19. Ditto on Ports and Harbours of the Northern Circars,

20. Ditto on Vaccination in Madras, 1854.

21. Ditto on Civil Dispensaries, 1854.

22. Papers relating to the Revision of Land Revenue Assessment

in South Arcot.

93. Reports on the Fibres of Southern India.

24. Ditto on the Disturbances in Purla Kimedy, Vizagapatam and

Goomsoor in 1832-36, 2 Vols.

26. Papers relating to the establishment of Village Vernacular

Schools in the Sub-Division of Rajamundry.

27. Report relating to the Budget of 1854-55,

28. Ditto ditto of Public Works, for 1855-56.

29. Replies to the collective Memorandum on Public Works in the

Madras Presidency.

No.

CO Pw

* An abstract of this communication was republished in the Edinburgh

New Phil. Journal, No. 12, New Series, page 320.

1858. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 125

30. Report on District Roads, for 1854.

31. Papers relating to the commutation rates of the Madras Presi-

dency.

32. Report of a Committee on a plan for cleansing the drains of

Black Town. |

32a or 33 Ditto of Agricultural Exhibitions in the Provinces in 1856,

33. Report on Vaccination for 1855.

34, Ditto on Civil Dispensaries for 1855. 2 Copies.

37. Correspondence on the scale of Passenger Fares and Goods

Tariff for the Madras Railway, Parts I. and II. in one Vol.

38. Papers relating to the Budget of Public Works for 1856-57.

41. Report on Grants-in-aid of Schools unconnected with Government

42. Ditto on Vaccination for 1856.

43. Correspondence on the scale of Passenger Fares and Goods,

Tariff for the Madras’ Railway, Vol. II.

A Map of the Country from Calcutta to Lahore shewing the route of

the Rail and the Grand Trunk Road.—By C. Josrru, Hsa.

Report of the Grant Medical College for the session 1856-57.—By THE

PRINCIPAL OF THE COLLEGE.

- Selections from the Records of the Government of India, No. XXIV.

Report on the Guicowar’s Hospital.—Notices on Karen Nee.—Jubbulpore

School of Industry—Statement of Criminals disposed of by the Thugzee

Department—and Survey of the Andamans.—By THE GOVERNMENT OF

Inpra.

Nabaé Prabundhi Sara, or Moral and Entertaining Essays in Bengali,

for the use of Colleges and Schools in Bengal, by Mohendranath Roy,

12mo. Calcutta.—By THe AUTHOR.

Selections from the Bengali Poets, Part II. 12mo. compiled by ditto.—

By THE SaME.

Half-yearly Report of the Committee to the Bengal Chamber of Com-

merce, Calcutta, 3lst October, 1857.—By Ttuz CHAMBER OF COMMERCE.

The Journal of the Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society, No.

XX. July, 1857.—By rue Bompay Astatic Society,

Journal Asiatique, Nos. 36, 37, and 38, 1857.—By THE Roya AsIatTIc

SOCIETY OF Paris.

Gelehrte Anzeigen, Nos. 38 and 39.—By tur Royat AcaDEMY OF

ScIENCE aT MUNICH.

Abhandlungen, der Historischen classe, Band VII. Abth. 2.—By THE

SAME.

der Mathematisch-Physikalischen classe, Band VII,

Abth, 2.—By Tux Same,

126 Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. [No. 1.

fiir die kunde des Morgentandes, Von Dr. F. Windesch-

mann, 1 Band, No. 1, Liepzig, pamphlet.—By THE SAME.

Pflagraf Rupert der Cavalier, Munich, pamphlet.—By Tuk Same.

Die Classischen studien und ihre Gegner, Munich, pamphlet.—By THE

SaME. .

Ueber das Klima von Munchen, pamphlet.—By tur Same.

Transactions of the Royal Society of Edinburgh, Vol. XV.—By THE

SociEry.

Address delivered at the Anniversary Meeting of the Geological So-

ciety of London, on the 20th February, 1857. By the President, Col.

Portlock.—By THE AUTHOR.

The Calcutta Review, No. 63,—By tHe Proprietors.

The Oriental Christian Spectator for Nov. and Dec. 1857.—By THE

EpirTors.

The Caleutta Christian Observer for December, 1857 and January,

1858.—By true Epitors.

The Oriental Baptist for ditto ditto.—By tur Epitor.

The Mutinies, the Government, and the People by a Hindu, pamphlet.

—By THE AUTHOR.

The Quarterly Journal of the Geologieal Society, No. 52, November,

1857.—By THE Society.

Caleutta Monthly Review, Vol. I. No. .—By rue Epiror.

Discours on Hindoostan, by Garcin de Tassy.—By tor AuTHOR.

Meteorological Tables of Hobert Town for October and November, 1857.

—By THE OBSERVATORY IN Hosert Town.

Vividhartha Sufigraha, Nos. 43 and 44.—By Basu RasenpRaLab

Mirter.

Exchanged.

The Athenzum for September and October, 1857.

The London, Edinburgh and Dublin Philosophical Magazine, Nos. 93

and 94 for October and November, 1857.

Annalen der Chemie und Pharmacie for August and September, 1857.

Purchased.

R. Jehuda Ben Koreisch Tiharetensis Africani ad synagogam judeorum

civitatis Fez Epistola de studii Targum utilitate at de lingua, &e. J. J. L.

Barges, Paris, 1857, pamphlet.

Le Bouddha et le Bouddhisme par C. Scheebel, Paris, 1857, pamphlet.

Max Muller’s Rig-Veda, Part 111. 4to. Liepzig.

American Journal of Science and Arts, Nos. 71 and 72, Vol. XXIV.

1858. ] Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. 127

Annaire des Deux Mondes, VIT. 1856-1857.

Annals and Magazine of Natural History for Oct. and Nov. 1857.

Annales des Sciences Naturelles, No. 6, Tong VI. and No. 1, Tome VII.

Edinburgh Review, No. 216 for October, 1857.

Literary Gazette, Nos. 2122 to 2130.

Journal des Savants, Sept. 1857.

Comptes Rendus, Nos. 9 to 15, 1857.

Revue des deux Mondes, 15th September, Ist and 15th October and

Ist November, 1857.

Revue et Magasin de Zoologie, Nos. 8 and 9, 1857.

Natural History Review, No. 4, October, 1837.

Quarterly Review, No. 204, October, 1857.

Gourpa’s Bysack.

Feb, 1858, Librarian and Asst. Secy.

ai “u Ay

BRAN KA

Sieded

Kae

Pt ie Pa be!

ile. aa Hien int 5

aah

a ey. Cneyaheane

aaa spear 4

AP weet y ~

boo 5 itt " at

Nea itis pore PS Re a a

iT bd r 7 rd moe |

} \ 7 a a Aah } dit Ya NG he ss i) we yee 2 : rh. cee mt ter SM, =

q . ‘ial ei 2 ie ee hati at 5 wh E

“i, (ae my Kents 4°

‘ DEED \ ate Wen: aah hid b, yh .

fen) “a ‘i ‘ee

; | F aA Al git) a i a an ih * ‘ i

‘ \ a CoH. oy,

¥ f ' v,

fh i s i y i ri L ¢ t ®

OO oF aU ene) ule f

! ews - g ie A a | ee,

: ; a, eh

Bade + ye 2

A :

vars 2

« a ee % *

i » i

: i u > ee ss we

ql é \ yy ’ i:

7 ’ « 1 f ‘

‘ : ‘a oe — : >

1 4 - " _

= i :

‘ i 4 = ey ays he

j 4 ie

7 ‘ i a

; © et yy * f fy f fl

’ ; f

) F i}

r L »

. ? i

Sis i.

7 4 a 7] ed a

, r ae * ey. _ 2

)

fe iF A ‘|

. a F ae oe “e 4

‘ .

a | ie! my v i ;

Veal : Kai % nh ah ia any :

i et i “ i a % 4 ‘

a ¢

r ; z is f

j Ny A TN a

\ i

. “4 \ j 4

, = P ‘

7 m ree OH ey r

pee itiness ne ok Pepin rf

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY.

NAPS NIN NII INI PII PLDI ILD IIL LILI INE IPI INI OO

No." hy 1858;

LPL LP IPP PFS LLL LPI I PIL PIP IIS PIS IL III L LILI ISI IDL

Notes of the Karen Language—By Francis Mason.

THe Karens.

Karen is a Burmese word applying to the mountaineers of Peeu and

Southern Burmah. It has been derived from ayen, foundation, and

ka a form of particle; thus signifying aboriginal ; and I find some

of the Bghai tribes call themselves kayay, and this may be the

origin of the Burmese word. It is, however, manifest that the

Karens are not the aboriginal inhabitants of the countries where

they now dwell.

In my early travels, the Karens pointed out to me the precise

spots where they took refuge in the days of Alompra, and where

they had come down and avenged themselves on their enemies ; but

when I asked them, “ Who built this city ?’’—as we stood together

on the forest-clad battlements of a dilapidated fortification,—they

replied, “ These cities of our jungles were in ruins when we came

here. This country is not our own. We came from the north,

where we were independent of the Burmese, the Siamese and the

Talings, who now rule over us. ‘There we had a city and country of

our own near Ava, called Toungoo. Allthe Karens of Siam, Burmah

and Pegu came originally from that region.” When I asked for

the time of their dispersion, they were silent. The fact was clearly

before them, but the retrospect was too obscure to determine the

distance. Yet they saw far beyond Toungoo. On the edge of the

misty horizon was “The river of running sand,” which their an-

No. XCILII.—New Serins, Vou. XXVIT. S

130 Notes of the Karen Language. [No. 2.

cestors had crossed before coming. That was a fearful, trackless

region, where the sands rolled before the winds like the waves of the

sea. They were led through it by a clieftain who had more than

human power to guide them; and Sau Quala, when he first related

the tradition, remarked that the whole story seemed to him like

Moses guiding the children of Israel across the Red Sea and through

the desert.

To what this river, or waters, of running sand referred, was quite

an enigma to me for several years, till I met with the Journal of

the Chinese Buddhist pilgrim Fa Hian, who ‘came from China to

India in the early part of the fifth century of the Christian era.

He thus designates the great desert between China and Tibet. The

governor of the “ Town of Sands,” he says, furnished his party with

“the necessary means of crossing the River of Sand.” “ ‘There are

evil spirits in this River of Sand,’ he continues, “and such scorch-

ing winds, that whoso encountereth them dies, and none escape.

Neither birds are seen in the air, nor quadrupeds on the ground.

On every side, as far as the eye can reach, if you seek for the proper

place to cross, there is no other mark to distinguish it than the

skeletons of those who have perished there; these alone seem to

indicate the route.’’ Karen tradition says that the chieftain who led

the party stretched out the staff in his hand as they crossed, from

time to time, and stones rolled up ina path before them, to show |

the course they ought to take.

This emigration occurred about the time the Shans first settled

in Labong and Zimmay ; because the tradition represents the chief-

tain to have come over first with au exploring party, and that they

selected the region around Labong and Zimmay for their future

home; but when he returned with his nation, he found it occupied

by the Shans.

The oldest of these cities 1s Labong, and, according to Dr. Richard-

son, Shan history states that that city was built A. D. 574; so this

emigration of the Karens may have occurred some centuries after

the commencement of the Christian era. Their traditions point

unequivocally to an ancient connection with China; for Tie or Tien

is spoken of as a god inferior to Jehovah; and offering to the manes

of their ancestors is as common among the Karens as it is among

the Chinese.

1858. | Notes of the Karen Language. 131

No further historical event has been found in their traditions till

they impinge on Scriptural history at the dispersion of nations. The

dispersion they represent to have arisen from want of love to each

other and lack of faith in God, while the difference of language they

attribute to the effect of the dispersion. Beyond this they have a

tradition of the deluge, and then an account of the creation and fall

of man coinciding so minutely with the statements of the Bible,—

even preserving the names of Adam and Eve,—that they must have

been derived from the written record since the days of Moses.

Where, for example, do we find in the traditions of heathen nations

that never saw the Bible, biblical facts so accurately stated as in the

following stanzas P

“ Anciently, God commanded, but Satan appeared bringing de-

struction.

Formerly, God commanded, but Satan appeared deceiving unto

death.

The woman H-u and the man Tha-nai pleased not the eye of the

dragon,

The persons of E-u and Tha-nai pleased not the mind of the dra-

gon,

The dragon looked en them,—the dragon beguiled the woman

and Tha-nai.

How is this said to have happened ?

The great dragon succeeded in deceiving—deceiving unto death.

How do they say it was done?

A yellow fruit took the great dragon, and gave to the children of

God;

A white fruit took the great dragon, and gave to the daughter

aud son of God.

They transgressed the commands of God, and God turned his

face from them.

They transgressed the commands of God, and God turned away

from them.

They kept not all the words of God—were deceived, deceived

unto sickness ;

They kept not all the law of God—were deceived, deceived uuto

death.”

S 2

132 Notes of the Karen Language. [ No. 2.

The absence, in all their traditions, of any allusion to any thing

peculiarly Christian, proves that they never had the New Testament

among them; and that, if derived from a written source, those

traditions must have come from the Old Testament alone. The

Karens themselves say they were obtained from their ancient books

of skin, which are praised as teaching morals, in contrast with the

palm-leaf books, that treat of things to make men wonder. A poe-

tical fragment before me, that has never been published, says:

“ The palm-leaf book that is written in circles,

The book of palm-leaf that in circles is written,

The elders drew out the lines in long coils ;

They became great winding paths ;

The letters of the palm-leaf books

Teach ancient wonders ;

The pages of the palm-leaf books

Show wonders of antiquity.

God sent us the book of skin ;

It is at the feet of the king of Hades ;

God sent us the book that has neither father nor mother,

Enabling every one to instruct himself.

The book of one-sided letters, the letters ten,

Is at the feet of the king of Hades;

The book of one-sided letters, of letters many,

All men ‘could not read.”

it has been recently ascertained that there have been Jews in

China from time immemorial; and five years ago the missionaries

there obtained from a few Jewish families at Khai fung-fu several

copies of the Pentateuch, the only part of the Bible they seem to

possess. The manuscripts are described as “ beautifully written -

without points, or marks for divisions, on white sheep skins, cut

square and sewed together, about twenty yards long, and rolled on

sticks.’”? Had these Jews, or their proselytes, been thrown among

Buddhist nations, lost their Pentateuch, and seen no more books of

skin, but only palm-leaf books, what more natural than to sing dirges

like the above over its removal to Hades ?

Many of the Karens are quite tenacious in the belief that they

formerly had books of their own. In the September (1855) num-

1858.] Notes of the Karen Language. 133

ber of the Morning Star, is an article from the pen of a native as-

sistant on this subject. He says,—“ Brethren, I wish to speak to

you plainly concerning one thing. It is not true that the Karen

nation had no books. The elders of past ages said, one generation

to another,—‘ Children and grandchildren, the Karens had _ books,

perfect like other nations.’> But they did not take care of their

books, and therefore lost them. When they lost their books, they

lost their knowledge of God; and when they lost their knowledge

of God, they could no longer live in peace with each other. The

younger brother became an enemy, the elder brother a foe. The

more they lived in hostility, the more degraded they became ;

the more degraded they became, the shorter the period of life ;

the shorter the period of life, the more they did evil;

the more they did evil, the more severe were the judgments

of God, afflicting them the more with sickness and death.

But the elders left one promise. They said,—‘ Though the Karen

nation has deteriorated and increased in wickedness, yet love and

compassion will come to them again; when love and compassion

come to them again, if they observe and do, they will fraternize

again into populous communities; when they fraternize again into

populous communities, they will love each other and improve phy-

sically and morally.’ Again, the elders said: ‘Children and grand-

children, if you are enticed towards that which is black, follow not;

if you are enticed towards that which is red, follow not. They are

not the words and commands of your God. Before the word of

your God returns to you, many will come, saying they are your

God; but they are not your God. ‘Look towards the ocean. The

great bird shall ascend and spread forth its white wings. That is

the white foreigners bringing you the words of your great eternal

God.’ The elders added: ‘If you observe the words of your great

God, which the white foreigners bring to you, you shall become

acquainted with the righteousness of your God, and be able to dis-

eriminate between right and wrong; and when you are able to

discriminate between right and wrong, you will dwell together

again in prosperous communities as in the olden time; but if you

neglect to observe, then will you remain in the same degraded state

you are now in.’

134 Notes of the Karen Language. [ No. 2.

“The words of the elders have been fulfilled in every particular.

All things have happened as they said. The Karens do not love

each other, so they live apart in small communities. One sets him-

self above another, and no one will submit to the will of his neigh-

bour; so they live in the forests, like the pheasant and jungle fowl,

one in one place and another in another place. The white foreign

teachers have come with our books, according to the words of the

elders, that we may live in cities and villages again, and rise.”

Karen is appled to several distinct tribes united by the common

bond of having one language, though spoken in widely differing dialects.

The Sgaus are the most numerous tribe, and occupy the widest

extent of country. They are found from Mergui in Lat. 12° N.

to Prome and Toungoo in nearly Lat. 19° N. On the east, they

have wandered over the water-shed that separates the Meinam from

the Salwen, and on the west, a few have passed into Arracan. The

Burmese denominate them sometimes “ Burman Karens,’’ but they

call themselves Seau until passing the Southern boundary of Toungoo

where they assume the name of Mau ne pgha, and on crossing Meet

nan creek, that term is dropped for Paku. The Pwos call them

Shan, but do not confound them with the tribes denominated Shans

by the English. These they call Thaing. The Sgau may be dis-

tinguished by his tunic, which is white with a few red horizontal

parallel stripes near the bottom. With afew rare exceptions none

of the Sgaus are Buddhists.

The Pwos are found scattered in the same regions as the Szaus

to a short distance above Sitang. ‘They are a more muscular tribe

than the Sgaus, and have almost universally adopted Buddhism.

Tradition says they emigrated South from the Paku hills, and

this tradition is confirmed by the fact that the Paku dialect is much

nearer the Pwo than the ordinary Sgau. The Burmese eall them

Talaing Karens, the Sgaus Pwo, but their own distinctive name is

Sho. Pwo, however, their Sgau name, has been introduced into

English by the missionaries, Their tunics are distinguished from

the Sgau by being handsomely embroidered near the bottom.

The Pwos are much less numerous than the Sgaus.

On crossing Thouk-ye-khat, or Draw-drink-water creek, an

eastern tributary of the Sitang, which comes in about six miles

1858. | Notes of the Karen Language. 135

south of Toungoo, the country is found to be inhabited by Bghais.

Their limits on the north are not exactly known, but they are

bounded on the east by the banks of the Salwen. They are much

greater savages than the other Karen tribes, and are robbers and

kidnappers by profession, None are Buddhists, but all are wor-

shippers of Indra and stones. There are stones in every house, to

which in connection with Indra, buffaloes, hogs or fowls are sacri-

ficed, and blood poured on them with prayers. Bghai is the name

given them by the Sgaus or Pakus. They have no distinctive

name for themselves, each clan calling itself by the name that

designates man, precisely like DJN in Hebrew, which signifies

both man in general, and Adam, the man. The Karens consider

themselves as ¢he men, for all the tribes have the habit of charac-

terising themselves in the same way. They consist, however, of two

or three sub-tribes, one of which, the most civilised, is distinguished

by wearing tunics or frocks, while all the rest wear short pants

scarcely reaching half down the thigh. ‘The tunic wearers have had

different names given them by the Burmans in different localities.

Some are called Liek-by ga gie, or “ great butterflies,” and others

Liek-by ga gnay, or “ little butterflies.’’ The pant wearers are divided

by the Burmese into the Yaing or wild Karens who inhabit the moun-

tains on the east and north, and the red Karens who dwell farther

east in the valley of the Salwen. They seem to me, however, to be

essentially the same people. The “wild Karens”’ have red radiat-

ing lines wrought in their white pants near the bottom, as the rays

of the rising sun are sometimes represented ; and the red Karens are

said to have their pants all red, or the red lines parallel; but all the

red Karens I have met wore the Shan blue pants; and some of

those had the radiating lines tattooed on their backs which they

exhibited as their coat of arms with considerable pride ; and indeed

with one or two wild beasts from their forests, for supporters, it

might be worked into a very respectable escutcheon.

The Sgaus, Pwos, and Bghais are the principal Karen tribes, but

there are two or three smaller ones. The Mopghas occupy the

secondary range of hills between Thouk-ya-khat and Kannie, red

bank, creeks, whose mouths are about eleven miles apart, the latter

falling into the Sitang five miles north of Toungoo. There are not

136 Notes of the Karen Language. [No. 2.

more than ten or twelve villages left of the whole tribe. They

have some indistinct traditions of having been much larger former-

ly, but were reduced by wars. They skirt the Behais on the west,

and their dress cannot be distinguished from the tunic-wearers ;

nor have they any distinctive mark except their dialect. A few of

the villages call themselves Mopgha, while others know no name

for themselves but the word for man. The Burmans have different

names for them, some being Zau bya gie or “ great Bees,” and others

Tau bya gnay or “ little Bees.”

There is a small tribe that the Burmese call Tounggthus, from

toung south or mountain, and thu person, signifying either south-

erners or mountaineers. They call themselves Pa-aw ; in some sec-

tions they are known only as pediars, but in province Amherst and

Pegu a few are settled in villages. The natives inform me that

large numbers are settled on the north-west boundary of the Red

Karens. They do not consider themselves Karens, but their lan-

guage is nearly allied to that of the Pwo Karens, like them they are

Buddhists, and they are a muscular tribe like the Pwos ; but in dress

they cannot be distinguished from the Shans. They claim 'Thatung,

the old Talaing capital, as one of their ancient cities, and Bugda-

gautha, who first brought the Buddhist scriptures from Ceylon, as

their countryman, but on no good grounds.

Quala, when among the red Karens, met with a tribe from the

north who were called Zaru, nearly the Karen pronunciation of

Tarouk, the Burmese name for the Chinese. They shave the head

leaving a tuft of hair on each temple. Besides their numerals, he

noted down about twenty words, nearly all of which indicate a

common origin with Karen. ‘They are reported numerous north of

the Red Karen country.

Tue Karen Lanevuaae.

The Karen language is distinguished from the Tai, the Talaing

and the Burmese, the other independant tongues of farther India

by possessing the Arabi¢e sounds of ¢ ghain, rd ain, and ¢ kha, and

by being nearly destitute of the initial gutteral imperfectly repre-

sented by ng, found in the other languages. It is remarkable,

however, that these Arabic sounds are most common in Pwo and

Seau. In Behai they are found in very few words, especially the

first.

1858. ] Notes of the Karen Language. 137

The Karen is remarkable for using words in pairs, in the signifi-

eation of one of the two. Thus naw or nang, grass, takes for its

couplet mie or meing wild [things] hence.

(1) Klauw (weed, | nau, &lau mie, weed the grass.

(2) Klauw nau mie, , ‘5

(3) Klau nau, 9 i

where the three forms have by usage the same signification,

though literally they read,—

(1) Weed the grass, weed the wild [things. }

C:) aes », the wild (things. |

(3); »

The couplet of pho child, is lie grand-child, and a story com-

mences: “There was a man and his wife in former times, and they

had no pho no lie,’ where pho alone would give the same significa-

tion.

An old man, before the fall, is represented as walking through

the forest with his daughter behind him, whom he warns not to

pluck the leaves from the trees. He says, “ If you pluck the leaves

and throw them down, they will become kaseu, they will become

kalo; and when kasew kalo come into existence, travelling will be-

come very wearisome.” Here kasew is the significant word for

mountain and alo is the couplet.

Again he says, “If you throw down the leaves, they will become

paumu, they will become paulay,” where paulay, signifying sea or

ocean, is the significant term. |

The paired word is often chosen from some resemblance or associ-

ation with the significant term, as :

Ta-u, takhve, cloud, darkness, for éa-w cloud.

Takhie, tana, darkness, night, » takhie darkness.

Die, nya, frog, fish ; » nya fish.

Taphie, tanya, skin, flesh » tanya flesh.

Htwie, hto, dog, hog », htwie dog.

Hto, hsau, hog, fowl », Ato hog.

Thama, payo, crocodile, dragon ,, thama crocodile.

Hteu, shie [Bghai] bird, fowl 5, shite fowl.

Me, htie boiled rice, water ,, me boiled rice.

Thwie, htie blood, water » thwie blood.

138 Notes of the Karen Language. [No. 2.

Khlie, tha seed, fruit » tha frutt.

Me-oo, phahsa fire, ashes ,». me-oo fire.

May, haw sand, earth » may sand.

Khoolau, bleulau, dig, immerse ,, hoolaw dig.

Miemau, plauthau, dream, be in a

reverie 5 miemau dream.

Ay, kwie love, covet » ay love.

Sometimes the couplet is a foreign word signifying the same

thing, as

Klau, nwa, the bos genus, where nwa is Burman.

Htie, noung, water » noung is the Siam nam.

Heuphlong, heukhaung man ,, khaung ,, ,, khon.

Ta-u, tamyau, monkey » myauis Burman.

Mauhtau, para, pagoda 5 para 55

Apo, ahau, to speak ine, os

Occasionally the secondary word appears to have been chosen for

euphony, as

Phomu, phomeu, daughter, where mew has no signification.

Lie, lay, book SE 2) Me Zz

Tamu, tala happiness att, nba ios

Sometimes a couplet regarded as destitute of signification, proves,

as our knowledge of the language extends, to be a significant word,

thus :

Htsoo the couplet of hsa to be sick, was regarded as of no signifi-

cation until the Bghai was acquired, where it signifies fever. So

la the couplet of ta-kapau, or hseuphang light, is probably the Behai

lie. »

This feature of the language suggests a probable etymology for

many words; thus le way word, where way the non-significant term

is probably of common origin with the Sanserit aq

The dialects exhibit some singular irregularities in the use of the

personal pronouns. At Tavoy, sé or sew is the first personal pro-

noun, singular number in Sgau and is in much more common

use than ya or yeu, which is also used; but in Bghai it is the third

personal pronoun, singular and plural, he, she, it, they ; and is used

exclusively in some Sections, but a few villages near the Pakus

use wa.

1858. | Notes of the Karen Language. 139

In Sgau and Bghai zay is the second personal pronoun singular,

thou, thee; but in Mopgha it is the plural number of the same per-

son, you.

In Pwo, thie is a particle marking the plural number of the second

and third persons when affixed to the singular; but in Bghai it is

an independant pronoun, the second person plural, you.

In Mopgha, the first personal pronoun singular ya, on being

used as a possessive is changed to e7, pronounced precisely like the

English I.

Objective forms for the third person, aw, ew, and sad are peculiar

to Karen as compared with the languages of other tribes.

The following table exhibits the pronouns in all their forms, in

the various dialects.

CaseAbsolute. Nominative Objective Poss. Pron.

L as to me. ZL; me my.

Sgau Yé,or yay Ya, yeuseu Yaoryay $Asnominative.

Pwo Yeu, or yawe Ya,or yeu Yeu js Ht!

Bghai Yay Ya Yay Y H

Mopgha Za Za La Ei

Toungthu Khwa

Thou as

to thee Thou Thee Thy

Sgau Na, ornay Na,ornen Na As nominative

Pwo Neu, or nawe Na, orneu Neu es

Behai Nay Na Nay ps n

Mopgha Na Na Na z

Toungthu Na Na Na

As regards He, she,it, Him, her, it, His, her, tts,

Se. they them their.

Sgau Away A, or way Au IS,

Pwo Awe A, or we Eu A.

Bghai So, or wa Say A, or Sa.

Mopgha O, or wo

Toungthu Wa

140

Sgau

Pwo

Behai

Mopghai

Toungthu

Sgau

Pwo

Bghai

Mopgha

Toungthu Nathie

Notes of the Karen Language.

Case Absolute.

We, as re-

gards us. We

Pa way Pa, or peu

Pa we Pa, or Peu

Kay Ka

You, as re- You

gards you.

Thu way Thu

Nathie Nathie

Thie Thie

Nay Nay

Nathie

Peha

Peu

Kay

Wau

You

Thu

Nathie

Thie

Nay

Nathie

[No. 2.

Nominative Oljective Us. Poss. Pron.

Our.

As, Nomin.

Oo, or Ei.

Your.

As, Nomin,

The third person plural is the same as the singular.

DIALECTS.

The Sgan and Behai have no final consonants, but Pwo, Mopgha,

and Toungthu have them.

Seau and Pwo. The most marked characteristic of Pwo is a

final nasal xg where the roots in Sgau, and most of the other dia-

lects have final vowels; as

Sgau,

Te To form, create, Pwo,

Nie Margin s

Hse A tunic uh

EH To bite fs

Htau To ascend x

Lau 5, descend We

Miemau » dream bs

Ghau An image ih

Phau To cook i.

Khlau To heat ‘

So Power +

Kho Land i

Thu The liver i

Loo To follow

Tang.

Naing

Hsaing.

Ang.

Hitanq.

Lang.

Miemang,.

Ghang.

Phang.

Khlang.

Saung.

Khaung.

Thung.

Laung,

1858.] _

Notes of the Karen Language.

141

Pwo often takes an aspirate where Sgau has a smooth mute, as

Sgau

Pla

A middle or flat mute

mute in Pwo, as.

Sgau,

To break

To be hot

peau

5) CAITY

»» receive

The spine

To dismiss

Pwo

Kha.

iho.

Khuk.

F{so.

Htong.

Philo.

Phila.

in Sgau, often becomes a rough or smooth

Die The cucumber, Pwo, Htie.

Ble To be smooth _,, Phle.

Bghie To rest 5 Pwie.

Dway The grasshop- Hiway.

per ¥

De A branch , Htang.

Occasionally it is the reverse, as :

Tau To strike Pwo Do.

Altie To see f, Da.

A. formative smooth mute in Sgau is often wanting in Pwo, as :

Kana To listen Pwo Na.

Kale The kidneys: | 4, Le

Kaman » Spleen i, Mang.

Kamu Dust , Mu.

Kateu End ‘ Htu.

Kapie Mud i Phie.

Mukanau A maiden aI Munang.

Sakho The mango _,, Kho

Thapeu A chatty # Phung.

Thadie The gall blad- Die

der

The Sgau ny is not found in Pwo, Y usually supplying its

place ; as

Sgau,

Nya

Nyau

Kanyau

Thakanyau

Before

To be easy

To refuse

Mercy

Pwo

Ya.

Yau.

Kayang.

Kangtha.

14:2 Notes of the Karen Language.

[ No.2.

The letter in Sgau often becomes gh in Pwo, as:

Sgaus- Ha To walk Pwo, Gha.

5 Ha Evening : Gha.

55 Han To weep , Ghang.

Hu » Steal 3 Ghu.

He » hate is Ghain.

Behai. While Behai coincides with Sgau in all its words ending

in vowels it differs from it, as well as the Pwo, in introducing a

large number of new words, as:

Bghai Die

- Hooklaypoo

a Khauklay

a Awayway

9 Way

2) Nay

99 So

Tapheu

- TPwie

Datheu

Peu

s Tayyautayya

Mahtau

Lookheu

Klie

Kiekay

Khawway

Khauwayma

a Lie

” Kway

a Khoo

2, Khau

Khyie

45 Wie

Weu

3 Wephlau

Year Sgau

Field ;

Door i

Margin -

Another MN

An insect 3

Self 5

A slave ia

Fish 5

A net 4,

A basket 3

Boiled rice _,,

A large fish net ,,

An image :

A pagoda ‘

A grave 4

Soldier iy

Evil 53

Sin >

Hell ,

Light is

To pour i

To be bold __,,

To be wide _,,

To appoint __,,

fly ‘9

» bark me

» throw away,,

Nie.

Khu.

Pray.

Nie.

Agha.

Kha.

Tha.

Sa.

Taghautaphar

Kho.

Thwakho.

Thu.

Hu.

Tadayba.

Lara.

Kapau.

Gha.

Doo.

Lay.

Thepa.

Yoo.

Mau.

Kwiete.

1858. | Notes of the Karen Language. 143

Bghai We To wither Sgau Khe.

3 Suba » wash, a Thesau.

- Sa vinlook a Kwa.

55 Kumiesa » think 5 Hsokamo.

5 Seu aye be cobly) (3, Khu.

e Sway 2 egy us Khe.

f Chu 3 -POLSPIFE jp 55 Kapeu.

mn Shieshay pi dear a Phive.

a Oosha » bathe - In.

v Shie » meet s Phagheu.

¥ Shuy » be warm ,, Khlau.

if Shaumeta ,, forget 6 Thapienau.

4 Zay » heal E Bla.

5 Dye 6 laugh a Nie.

de Paplau » ride a Do.

id Taie et VESEY Lon x5 U7,

a) Ata is eek i Khe.

x Na » be straight ,, Lo.

a Htie ,, throw a net,, Hu.

" Hieu », eee heavy), .. Kheu.

al Pa od) Gimnen Lis ,,2 Khau.

e Hto py eaHOINE, Lh. Phghoo.

i Deubayyaba ,, reverence ,, Yooyau.

x Na , ave capacity,, Prau.

" Pgha jp tound pi Thoo.

Pr Shauie » watch J Kho

7 Hau 55 t BOPEON Gswiss, Doo

u Khoo » be fierce ,, Doo.

i Botha White v Wa.

¥ Aychayna Well be Kasaudau.

mn Shotabla Around js Watarie.

” Na Causative par- Meu.

ticle *

by Ba Affix of perfect

tense H Lie | Pwo youk

There are many other words in common use differing as much as

the above.

144 Notes of the Karen Language. [No. 2.

It is remarkable that ywwd, the name for the god who created

the heavens and the earth and all things, is known to a part of the

Bghais only ; and those use it with a prefixed ¢a, and always with

the adjective dew great affixed, making it tayuwadeu. The pant

wearing Bghais on the north tell me they use Khwekhwa dew for

the same being; and a couple of young men who recently visited

the Bghais near our north east frontier, report Tew mau as used for

yuwda. Quala says that the greatest difficulty he found in address-

ing the Bghais in his journey to the Red Karens was his inability

to discover the name they gave to yuwa. The name for Satan is

subject to like variations. In Sgau itis Mukaulie, in Pwo, Mukau-

laing, and the name I have adopted in Bghai, as being best known

to those who will read the books, is Htoo way khay, but there are

several other names, as MModielie the same word by which they

designate the gecko, and Mopraymu. Adam whom the Sgaus call

Thanay, some of the Bghais call Ayrabay ; and the Sgau ie-w for

Five they change to Mora.

The Bghai is remarkable for hissing dentals. The people speak

with their teeth closed when pronouncing many words, and but

slightly apart when uttering others. Hs, very common in Sgau and

Pwo, has no place in the dialect, being changed to sh. The Bghai

has several consonant sounds as g,7, z, and a peculiar hissing d

that cannot be adequately represented by English letters, which are

not found in the southern dialects.

The Sgau gh often becomes wa in Bghai, as:

Behai Wie To enumerate ,, Ghie.

=i Woo A serpent a Ghu.

“4 Awoo Use force A Ghoo hsoo.

La We Gash, cut!” ’,, Ghay.

a We Concerning ,, Ghe.

Bs We Ratan és Che.

MA We Good . Che.

* Way To rise a Geay.

At Wau Cold Mw Gho.

* These words, though alike here, are distinguished by intonation im the printed

Karen.

1858. ]

Notes of the Karen Language.

145

While the Pwo adds to the aspirates in Sgau, the Bohai some-

times takes a flat mute where there is an aspirate in Sgau, as:

Behai

Kookeu

Kauthoo

Kau

Head,

Behind

Secret

Future

Sgau,

Kho.

Khie.

Khoothoo.

Khay.

The Pwo prefix ang to some active verbs, and which has ordinari-

ly no representative in Sgau, becomes @ in Bghai, as:

Bghai

oP)

The Sgau vowel aw often becomes @ in Behai, as:

Bghai

Bghai,

A shay To sell

A she To beat in a mor-

tar

A woo ,, take by force

A thateu ,», send

A hoo », Steal

A lo ,, borrow

A pha », cook

La To descend

Ata ,, ascend

Kha Foot or leg

Da To chop

Da To be shallow

Na Area

Lapgha Fall in ruins

Lasha To be different ,,

Kha Only

The Sgau vowel @ is often ay in Behai, as:

Khay To step

Pay Side

Say To be weak

Bay To hit

Nay Night

Ay Many

Play A cubit

May To make

* Distinguished by intonation.

Pwo,

Seau,

Sgau

Anghsa.

Anghsoo.

Angghook.

Angmeung.

Anquwoo.

Anglaung.

Angphaung.

Lan.

Htau.

Khau.

Dau.

Nau. ft

Laupghau.

Lauhsau.

Khau.

Kha.

146 Notes of the Karen Language. [ No. 2.

The vowel ew is a favorite in Bohai. It takes the place of seve-

ral Sgau vowels, as :

Bghai Theu A tree Sgau The.

me Meu The sun . Mu.

> Meu The eye i May.

nf Seu A. corpse i So.

5 Hteu High - Htau.

The most remarkable distinction is found in the numerals. The

names for the first five are almost identical with the Seau, but:

Six is theu tho literally Three-two.

Seven _,, 7 45 00 s Three-two-one.

Hight ,, lwie tho - Four-two.

Nine is jit “ Four-two-one.

The language of the Mikirs in Arracan, has something similar ;

there

Seven is thor-chie literally Six one

Hight ,, nu-kep 45 Two ten 1. e. 10O—2

Nine ,, chi-kep ‘5 One ten i.e. 10—1

There is nothing parallel in any of the languages or dialects

spoken around.

There are a multitude of sub-dialects in the Bghai, every village

boasting of possessing some peculiarity in its language. In one

the letter ¢ha is unknown, ta being always used in its place;.

and in one day’s walk I have found the common word for speak to

be changed from apo in the morning, to hze at noon, and then

back towards the Sgau to katau at eve.

Mopgha. The Mopgha introduces several new letters into

Karen, some of which, if not all, are found in Shan.

It has a peculiarly strong f, uttered with a forcible emission of the

breath; as

Mopgha Feu A child, or son, Pwo Pho.

i Feu To fly us Youk.

ms Fu A bird 8 Hto.

ms Fo Head Kho.

1858. | Notes of the Karen Language. 147

It has both an initial and final v passing into fin one of the sub-

dialects ; as:

Mopgha Vu To offer Pwo Boung.

i Veu » make an end 3 Louk.

2 Vedz ,, guide yy Thoung.

There is a final dz in Mopgha, not found in the other dialects, as ;

Mopgha Pudz ‘To instruct Pwo Thoung.

4 Hsiedz ,, seize “ Phie.

i Lapodz, the spider Fe Khan.

Several words which are formed of m followed by a vowel in the

other dialects, have the same consonant preceded by a vowel in

Mopgha, as:

Mopgha Pwo Soau Behai

Am Mo Mo Meu Mother.

Him Meing Mie Mie Name.

Um Muk Mu Mau Happy.

Lem Mung LThamu Thamo Live.

When these words are preceded by another word with an inherent

vowel, the inherent vowel is dropped and the consonant is united

with the vowel of the root, as:

Za my, and am mother, become Him my mother.

Na thy, 29 7? 7) 73 Nam thy 29

Na thy, ,, wmpo musket ,, Numpo thy musket.

When the first word is followed by a distinct vowel, the initial

vowel of the second word is dropped; as:

Kay our,and am mother, become Kavm our mother.

Nai your, ,, mn 93 ei Naim your ,,

Words with a final v are subject to the same rules, as:

Latu acity av in, become Latuv, inthe city.

Panay buffalo ,, .

45 - Panaw ina buffalo.

The Mopgha has a peculiar hissing sibilant which seems to

take the place of As in the other dialects ; ¢h is wanting, being chang-

ed to ¢; and z takes the place of y. Altogether it is the most pecu-

liar of the Karen dialects, and yet is spoken by not more than two

thousand people, who speak it in two or more well marked sab-

dialects.

148 Notes of the Karen Language. [ No, 2.

Toungthu. The Toungthu, or Pa-au dialect has av not found

in Sgau or Pwo, but with this exception, it is nearly related to the

Pwo with an occasional deviation towards the Behai. No attention

however has been given to the dialect, beyond the collection of a

small vocabulary of words that I made half a dozen years ago, and

which was published, with some typographical errors, by Mr. Hodg-

son in the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, No. 1, 1853,

under the name of Toungthoo and credited to Dr. Moreton. It

will be found corrected in my vocabulary of the dialects at the

close of this paper.

Taru. All known of this dialect is the few words collected by

Quala, and given below, except the numerals which will be found

in the vocabulary. The numerals show the nearest affinity to the

Pwo, and are most remote from the Behai.

Tarn Moo, Heaven Sgau Mookho.

3 HLaloo, Earth Hf , Haukhoo.

4 Pamo Woman,female,, Pomu.

" Pakho Man, male __se,, Pokhwa.

me Takho Child - Phothakhwa.

f | Dieta Salt Bghai Le-ta.

i Kle A road Sgau Klay.

La Leaf * La.

Ta Fruit Behai Ta.

7 Poola Betel leaf Pwo Phula.

Me Bghai Thapoolay.

Mamoote Arecanut _,, Mamoota.

i Gnwa The mouth Pwo No.

Lakan The nose Bghai Naykhede.

:; Say Boiled rice Sgau Me.

4s Zoo A house Bghai Ite*

- Te To return Pwo Taing.

5 Hswa »» come Bghai Sway to run.

3 Phoo Good

”?

We-bay.

* In some of the Bghai sub-dialects the 4 is pronounced as if passing into z.

1858. | Notes of the Karen Language. 149

THE VOCABULARY.

The following vocabulary contains the words which have been

selected by Indian philologists to develope the affinities and differ-

ences of languages. In the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Ben-

gal, and in the Journal of the Indian Archipelago, Hodgson, Logan

and others have published the same words in all the known lan-

guages from Australia to Siberia, and from the Yellow Sea to the

Black. With these the Karen may now be compared in all its

known dialects. The couplets have been added occasionally, but to

have inserted them in every instance would have subserved no use-

- ful purpose.

150 Notes of the Karen Language. [No. 2.

English Sgau Pwo Bohai

Air Kalie Lie Kalie.

», coup. Thanghau Lang Warythra.

And Dau Day Lay.

Ant Teu Htung Teu.

Animal Taphotakha Hseuphohseukha Taypheutay way.

Arrow Pla Phla Play.

Bad Ku Hung Kiekay.

»» COUP, Thau Thaung Meulay.

Beautiful Akhieala Akhieala Apeubayaghawe.

Bee Kanay Ne Kane.

Believe Na Nay Nay.

», coup. Soo Soo Zoo.

Belly Heupheu Ghoophong Kaphoo.

» coup. Heukho Thaphong Thaphoo.

Bird Hto Hto Htubapheu.

5 coup. Lie Lie Htubashay.

Bitter Kha Kha Khay.

Black Thoo Theung Lay, or thieche.

Blood Thwie Thwie Thwie.

Boat ° \.Khilie Khlie Khlie.

> Coup: Hto Htaung Kapay.

Bone Khie Khwie Khwie.

Book Lie Liek Sai.

Bow

Boy Phothakhwa Phothakhwa Pheuthaykheu.

Brass Tobau Htoungbang Kreba.

Bring Has no independant root,but is made from two signify-

ing literally come-carry.

Broad Lay Lay Khau.

Buffalo Pana Pana Panay.

Burn There are several specific words for this generic one.

By. Ins. Leu Leu Lay.

1858. | Notes of the Karen Language. 151

Mopgha Toungthu

Lalie Talie

Lay La

Hten Htung

Tafeutakha

Pla Pla

En Kay

Akheaghaughe tara

Lane

Nam

Num

Pan

Teubo Awa

Teuba

Kha Kha

Tuk Phren

Sweit Thwe

Hlick Phre

HRteu

Khie Hsot

Sa Sa

Feuta

Teugwa Toung

Lay

Lana Pana

Remarks

Siam, Lon.

Koreng, Tinghuu.

Bur. lay Talaing la.

Koome, pala Shan, pen.

Compare Greek ka x ta,

Timbu, dz.

Bur. kha Shan khou.

Shan lau.

Tibetan thak.

Bur. hlay.

This couplet signifies by itself

a raft.

Shan sot Chin. kuh, a kweh.

Bur. sa, Talaing, letk. Chin.

shoo.

Bow differs from boat in the in-

tonation only.

Brass and copper are made from

the same generic root with

the adjective yellow and

red affixed.

Which one could be compared legitimately with the other

vocabularies is impossible to conjecture.

Lay

152

English

Call

5 coup.

Cat

Cheek

Child

Chin

Cloud

Cold

Come

Country

Copper

Cow

Crooked

Crow

Dark

Daughter

Day

5, coup.

Deaf

Notes of the Karen Language.

Syau

Thamieyau

Photha

Kha

Taeu

Gho

Kau

Toghau

Klau, or po

Sauwakha

Khie

Phomu

Nie

Thau

Nataeu

Deer (samber) Takhau

Demon

», coup.

Die

Dig

Dog

Tana

Tawie

Thie

Khoo

Htwie

Pwo

Meinyau

Nopahtie

Photha

Kha

Hseueung

Ghaung

Ghay

Khang

Htoungwau

Khlau

Kaing

Kila

Khie

Phomu

Nie

Thoung

Naeung

Hseukhau

Hseuna

Hseupho

Thie

Khung

Htwie

[ No.

Bahai

Yeu.

Mieyankau.

Bau.

Piesaypeu.

Khay.

Tayeu.

Wau.

Le, or ge.

Ka.

Krieba.

Peu.

Ke.

Sowa.

Khie.

Pheumu,

Nie.

Thay.

Naykootaeu.

Kheu.

Taynay.

Tay kaphoo.

Thie.

Khoo.

Htwie.

1858.]

Crooked kay

Crow

Notes of the Karen Language. 153

Mopgha Toungthu Remarks

Zeu Tom Chin. yerteh.

Miezau Nyoo Chin. mau.

Feu

Kha Sans. fafa chive.

Taeu The ta, hseu, tay prefixed to this

and many other roots is the

same formative particle.

Ghau Khwa Shan. kat. |

Hay Lon Chin. lay and kwoh. The Behai

has no distinct word for

come, but uses le go, or ge

return, for it.

Kho

Kriebo Htoung

Peu Phou Comp. klaw with at; pew with

bos. Tibetan ba.

Nea keu

Sagwa Zanka

Khie

Feu meu

Ne Ya Bur. ne Bur. yeé, embraces both

the night and day.

This couplet designates the Bur.

To yet.

Nalaeu

Hseu

Tana

Tapoo

Tei The Chin. se.

Khau Sans. Gq.

Htwie itwie Mru. takwie.

154

English

Drink

Duck

Kar

+5 COUP.

Earth

Kast

Kat

Hee

Elephant

Kye

End, consume

Enter

Fat

Father

Flat

Fever

Few

Fight

Fire

Fish

Finish

Form, make

Flower

Fly

Foot

Forest

Frog

From

Give

Notes of the Karen Language.

Htode

Haukho

Muhtau

Die

Kahsau

May

Leu

Bau

“Pa

Beba

Nyagho

Scha

Meoo

Nya

‘Wie

Phau

Khau

Pegalakla

Leu

Pwo

Htohta

Noug

Ghangkho

Muhtaung

Ang

Die

Kahsaung

Louk

Baung

Pha

Papay

Hsooghouk

Sha

Meeung

Ghoung

Taing

Phan

Yoo

Khang

Meinglakla

Leu

[No. 2.

Bahar.

Au.

Oopayde.

Naykoo.

Naykau.

Lakheu.

Muhta.

Die

Kasha

Meuladoo.

Leu.

Nu.

Ban.

Pa, or ta.

Bieba.

Shwie, or shoo.

Shie.

Du.

Me.

Tapeu.

Wa.

Bau.

Phau.

Wie.

Kha.

Sapoklay.

Earth

Fly

Give

Notes of the Karen Language. 155

Mopgha. Toungthu. - Remarks.

Oo Awa

Haupay

Na Na Singpho na.

Hau feu, Hamtan

Meuhto Lit. swn-ascend.

Au Am The Segau eat and drink, are dis-

tinguished by inonation.

Dei Die Mru. due.

Lahso Hsan Shan. tsang. Chin. szang.

May May Shan. matta, Chin. moh.

Veu

iieum

Bay Bay

Pa Pha

Bayba Sampya

Shwie

Sha

Meouk Me Botia. me.

Za. Hta Shan. pa Chin, yu.

Wa Chin. wan.

Bu Chin. tuon.

Foo Heu Limb. phu.

Fu Chin. fez.

Khau Khan Tibetan. kang. Foot and leg are

made from the same root.

Khuklavu

Dei

Leu

He Pha Shan. pan. Bur, pay.

Le Lway Sunawar. law.

156

English,

Girl

Goat

God

Gold

Good.

Guide

Great

Hair

Hand

Happy

Hard

Head

Hear

Heart

Heaven

Hell

Here

High

Hog

Horn

Horse

Hot:

House

Hunger

Husband

Tron

Ivory

tail

King

> coup.

Notes of the Karen Language.

Sgau

Pothapomu

Maytaylay

Yuwa

Htoo

Ghe

Sgheu

Khothoo

Kho

Nahoo

Tha

Mookhoo

Lara

Phayie

Htau

Hto

Neu

Kathe

Hie

Tathawie

Leupoo

Hta

Kahsaumay

Mathie

caupa

Saulo

Pwo

Phothamu

Yuwa

Htaung

Ghe

Thoung

Khothoo

Naung

Kho

Nagheung

Tha

Mookhoo

Lara

Htaungyo

Htau

Hto

Nong

Kathe

Kho

Ghaing

Hseuthawie

Leupeung

Hta

Kahsaungmay

Mathie

Sakhwa

Salong

[ No. 2.

Bahav

Piesaypheupheu-

mu.

Paykolay.

Tayuwa.

Htway.

We.

Thay.

Deu.

Kheuloo.

Su.

Mau.

Ma or ko.

Kookeu.

Shaunay.

That

Maukheu.

KChauwayma.

Dauyeu.

Hteu.

Htau.

Neu.

Thie.

Keu.

He.

Taythawie.

Wa.

Leupoo.

Htala.

Kashathro.

Maythie.

Shaparga.

Shadeu.

1858. ]

Great

Heart

House

Kall

Notes of the Karen Language. 157

Mopgha Toungthu

Feumeu

Piekoolay Bay Shan. pa.

Layuwa

Teu Khan Chin. kin, and kum.

Ghe Heu

Vudz

Deu, and vu Tan Chin. ta. Tai di.

Feuhtook Taloo

Sook Su Chin. syw. Hand and arm are

made from the same root,

Ma Ma Bur. ma.

Feu, or kho Katu Bur. khoung. Shan ho.

Nahoo Heun

Maufeu ‘

Lara Lara Sans 4.

Phayie

Hto Hto

Htook Htau Chin. tehee.

Nau Nung

Lagho Tha Botia ta. Aka. ghura.

Ko Kheu

Heik Lam Shan. hien.

‘Tawaime Hookho

_ Leupo Poo The Jew precedes the noun, while

poo is affixed.

Htala Pathie

Lahsome Literally, elephant-tooth.

Mateik Mathie Literally make-death.

Sobaro Bur. shenbuyen.

158

English.

Kiss

Laugh

Law, (moral)

coup.

» civil

coup.

Lead

Leaf

Leg

Little

Live

Lift up

Light

Lightning

Lord

Loom

Long

» distant

», in time

Man

PCOU).

Medicine

Milk

Moon

Morning

Mother

Mountain

5, coup.

Mouth

Musquito

Name

,, coup.

Notes of the Karen Language.

Sgau

Neumoo

Nie

Tatho

Tathau

Kwau

Beu

Pgha

Hsie

Moo

Sauhtau

Kapau

Lauwaadie |

Kasa

Hta

Htau

Yie

Pehaknyau

Pghathapleu

Kethie

Nuhtie

Mughau

Kaseu

Kalo

Htakho

Paso

Mie

Tha

Pwo

Neungmeung

Nie

Hseuthaung

Hseuthang

Khaung

Htwe

Sha

Meung

Hsahtang

Phang

Langwaadie

Kahsa

Hta

Htau

Yaing

Yie

Heuphlong

Heukhong

Thie

Mhte

Mughau

Kholaung

Htounglo

Paso

Meing

Tha

[ No. 2.

Bghar

Numau.

Dje.

Tadauoo.

Shauoo.

Beu.

Kwa.

Pa.

Lay.

Shie.

Thamo.

Sahta.

Lie.

Lawanadie.

Biesay

Hta.

Djie.

Pieya.

Pieyeu.

Thaukhwie.

Nuhtie.

Lay.

Muhau.

Meu.

Khaumu.

Hhaulau.

Lamau.

Paso.

Mie.

Thay.

1858.]

Moon

Mouth

Notes of the Karen Language. 159

Mopgha

Neumuk

Ne Nga

Tato

Tatau

Beu

Sheu

Pgha Soon

La La

Hseik

Moo, and liem

Sotau

Talapo

Lauwaadie

Lasa

Hta

Htoo

Tzes

Zezau, or plau Lau*

Hya

Hiala

Hto

Kathie Lateik

Nuhteik

La La

Meuwoo

Am Meu

Laseu Koung

Lalau

Htafeu Proung

Laseu Takhia

Em, or meik Meing

Toungthu

Remarks

Literally smell-happy.

Murmi nya.

See foot. Chin. kiah.

Literally carry-ascending.

Bur. len. Shan len.

Lit. the thunder flaps his wings.

Chin. yuen.

Distinguished in intonation.

Bur. Joo, Shan khoungq.

Literally breast-water.

Shan leu.

Shan amya.

Chin. khou, and hau.

Simanes khamta.

Bhotia and Chin. ming.

* Read Peido, zezau, or Plau,

Oil

Notes of the Karen Language.

Sgau

Thau

Tameba

Moohtoo

Kalieso

Mukapa

Hsakahsau

Nade

Tho

Old (of things) Laulie

» (of persons) Pgha

Paper

Plantain

», wild

Poison

Rain

Rat

Raw

Red

Rice (paddy)

» (cleaned)

» (boiled)

Return

Ripe

River

Run

Road

>) COUP.

Sakho

Thakwie

Tahaysu

Thiekasay

Ghau

Boo

Lo, klo

Sie

Klay

Kapoo

Pwo

Kho

Thang

Gha

May-e,or mway-e Tamenau, or nau.

Muhtang

Liekhie

Moopa

Shakahsang

Tho

Lauglie

Sha

Sakhou

Thakwie »

Hseuhseung

Theinghse

Wau

Boo

Woo, or ghoo

Htaing

Meing

Saingtalaing

Pungtha

]

Pungthung

[ No. 2.

Bahar

Gau.

Thay.

Nay.

Hay.

or tamepato.

Moohtiehta.

Kalieakhiesau.

Mookapay.

Shaykasha.

Naykhede.

Theu.

Liela.

Pghay.

Saykoo.

Ya.

Waylesu.

Yu.

Thietheu.

Liekau.

Boo.

Hoo.

Sway.

Klaypootha,

1858. ] Notes of the Karen Language. 161

Mopgha Toungthu Remarks.

Khau

Tauk

Ha Ha:

Me-e or me-

khay Tamwateu

Meuhtook

Lalieso Literally wind-top.

Meupa ,, sun-side applied also to south.

», elephant-star i. e. urga major.

Nade

A A

Nayteu Namau

Leik

Peha

Sokeu Bur. sekkoo.

Plantain lakwie Gna Shan. huwa.

Khayhaysu

Siateu Tathiet

Wook Tanya Shan. lez.

Rice Beu

Return Ga

Meik Hm a Bur. hie.

Sie Lau Chin. fsou.

Peuta Klaytan

162

English

Round

Salt (noun)

»» (verb)

Sand

Sea

Separate

Shame

Ship

Short

Sick

Side

Silent

Silk

Silver

Sister

Sit down

Skin

Sleep

Slow

Small

Smell

Snake

Soft

Son

Soul

Sound

Sour

Spirit

South

Speak

Say

Stand up

Star

Notes of the Karen Language.

Sgau

Phleuthaleu

Tetha

Hau

May

Paulay

Pha

Mayhsgha

Kabau

Phu

Hsa

Kapa

Behau

Thato

Daupuwaymu

Hsenau

Phie

Mie

Kayaukayau

Hsie

Neu

Ghu

Kapooloo

Phokhwa

Tha

Thau

Hsei

Kala

Kaliehtie

Maylaka

Kato, and po

Sie, and tay

Hseuhteu

Hsa

Pwo

Talookoo

Htiela

Ghang

Panglay

Pha

Memay

Kabang

Pie

Hsa

Ghupha

Langmang

Hto

[No. 2.

Bgha

Phlieu to hie.

Tethay, or ieta.

Hay.

Thame.

Palay.

Pha.

Meuthawa.

Thaypau.

Pheu.

Shay.

Kapay.

Sau.

Thaie.

Ho.

Htungphuwemu Thaypuwaymu.

Hsenang

Phie

Mie

Kyaukyau

Neung

Ghoo

Phook

Phokhwa

Tha

Thau

Hsaing

Liehtie

Hsanrung

Khlaing

Lau

Hseunhtung

Sha

Shana.

Phe.

Shaumie.

Khaykhay.

Shie.

Nu.

Woo.

Kapeutaloo,

Pheukheu.

Tha.

Thay.

She.

Kalay,

Kalieakhahtie,

Apo, & hie, & yie.

Dau.

Shauhteu,

Shay.

1858. ]

Mopgha

Htophlau

Deikta

Hau

Pole

Maykya

Thay bo

Pheu

Hsa

Lapa

Lapfu&lahteu

Notes of the Karen Language.

Toungthu

Tunglung

Tatha

Neging

Seu, & theik Rou

Htauphau-

waymu

Sit down Hsaunau

Sour

Pahie

Meik

Khaykhay

Hseik

Neu

Ghuk

Bok

Feuhwa

Lalouk

Shie

Lale

Tay

Sheuhteu

Hsa

Unglau

Phro

Ping

Hru

Hsya

Ungdau

Unghtung

Hsa

163

Remarks.

Bur. lung.

Bur. penlay.

Chin. peen.

Bur. thembau. Tal. kabang.

Chin. Syao.

Hindi sid Tal.

STAUN.

Chin. pz.

Chin. Syao.

Literally the heart.

Shan. hésoz.

Chin. ling.

Literally foot of the wind.

a constellation of the cross.

Shan. sat, lat.

Chin. sing.

164

English

Straight

Strike

Stone

Sugar

Sun

Sweet

Swift

Sword

Tell

Tail

Take, seize

COND.

>» Away

That

This

Thunder

Tiger

Tin

Tobacco

To-morrow

Tongue

Tooth

Tree

Ugly

Understand

Unto

Wake

Walk

Wash

Water

5) COUp.

Notes of the Karen Language.

Sgau Pwo Bghu

Lo Loung Na.

Tau Do Peu

Leu Long Leu.

Tethahseu Htielahseung §lethayshie.

Mu Mu Mu.

Hseu Hseung Shie.

Khle Khhang Pgha.

Na Na Dashe.

Sieba Lauba Daubay.

May Me Kame.

Hiene Phoungpie Piene.

Piekha Piese.

Keso Tainghso Gesa.

Ane Aynau Anu.

Aie Ayyo Ayeu.

Lauthau Lanthay Lathay.

Khe, and botha-o Khe Khe,& taypoolie.

Pgha Sha Pabotha.

Hsoo Leu Seu.

Kathie & nya thoo Kathie, & yathoo Kathie.

Khayghau Kayghai Kaumoohau.

Ple Phle Fle:

Mai May Theumay.

The Theing Theu.

Aghaueu Aghaugeung Akheu aghaukie-

kay.

Napeu Nathe Naykoonu.

Tu, and hsoo Htung, leu Ta, tu, seu.

Phuthenau Nangatha Phuthenay.

Ha Gha, & saing Hay.

Thesau Thieyahseing Suba.

Htie Htie Htie, and shu.

No Noung

1858. | Notes of the Karen Language. 165

Mopgha Toungthu Remarks.

Lo Son

Peu Tway Shan. pautihn Chin. ta.

Louk _ Lung Lepcha, long Limbn, lung.

Deiktahseu Literally sweet salt.

Meu Mu

Hseu Neu

Hle

Lazau

Poba Thouthau

May

Take Siez Khon

,», away Gaso Literally return-carry.

Leuba, leune Tahsu

Aie Yo

Thunder Laupau

Tapaleik Ka Bur. kya.

Pgha Rek

Leu Eu

Lateik

Khoumoogho

Ple

Swahteik Tagua Bur. thwa.

Akheaghauta-

ghe

Anam Thena

Tu, leu Chin. faz.

Phusenau ‘Ting

Ha Lay Bur. lay.

Sesay

Htcik Htie Chins. shui.

Kha Siam. nam.

166

English

Wax

West

Which P

What ?

Why ?

Who?

White

Wife

Wind

With

Woman

Word

Yellow

Yes

Young

Year

Yam

Notes of the Karen Language.

Sgau

Kho

Munu

Phaylayghalay

Memunulay

Bamanulay

Matataghalay

Kalie

Leu, and dau

Pomu

Takato

Kalu

Bau

Eu, or me

Thasa

Nie

Nway

Pwo

Kho

Munu

Htounglaghalay

Mayhseunaulay

Bahseunaulay

Paulaghalay

Lie

Leu, & day

Heumu

Hseukhlaing

Loo

Bang

Hu, or may

Thabang

Neing

Nway

[No. 2.

Baha.

Khau,

Munn.

Daulaypghaylay.

Memanau

And metraymay.

Baymanau,

and baytrayna.

Pgha nauta pghay

nau.

Botha.

May.

Kalie.

Lay.

Peumu.

Tayapo.

Le.

Ba.

Eu, or me.

Thasay.

De.

Nway.

1858.]

Notes of the Karen Language. 167

Mopgha

Khoo

Meune

Toungthu Remarks.

Lit. sun-enter.

Playlay plau-

lay

Hsamaynay

Memanaylay Hsomaynay

Baymalay

Plelaghalay

Gwa

Lalie

Lay

Feumeu

Laluk

Ku, or me

Tasa

Nie, and de

N way

Pamaynay Chin, mut.

Bwa

Chin. myu

Nwa

168 Notes of the Karen Language. [No. 2.

NUMERALS.

English Sgau Pwo Bahai Red Karen

One Ta La Ta Ta

Two Khie Nie Kie Ne

Three Theu Thung Theu, or teu Theu

Four Lwie Lie Hwie Lwie

Five Yay Yay Yay Nya

Six Khu Khoo Theutho Theutho

Seven Nwie Nwe Theuthota Theuthota

Hight Kho Kho Lwietho Lwietho

Nine Khwie Khwie Lwiethota § Lwiethota

Ten Tahsie Lahsie Tashie Tashe

Eleven Tahsieta Lahsiela Tashieta Tasheta

Twenty Khiehsie Niehsie Kieshie Neshe

Hundred Takaya Laya Takayay Tayay

Thousand Takahto Lahtaung Takahtau Tarie

Taru Mopgha Toungthu Remarks

Mau La Ta Tal. mu-a

Neu Schheu Nie Shan. htsowng

Ago Teu Thung Tibet. sam

Lwie Lwie Leet Limbu. lish

Gnay Lay Gnat Bur. gna

Hso Khu Thu

Nway Um Nwot Limbu. nush

Hsoo Kho That Lepcha kakeu

Kwie Khwie Koot Shan. kowt

Hseu Lashie 'Tasie Chin. shi. The first

Tasieta root is one.

Schheushie Niesie

Aya Laza Talyea

Alie Lahto

Remark. In this paper 00 represents the English sound.

ay Pe ”

é », the Continental ,,

eu ”

The long and short vowels are not distinguished, nor are the in-

tonations which distinguish words in Karen that have the same

vowel. For the general comparison of languages, it has not been

deemed necessary to distinguish them, and to do so would involve

the use of many diacritical marks which would confuse the. manu-

script.

1858. ] Coin Collections lost during the rebellion. 169

Coin Collections lost during the rebellion.— By

Grorce H. Frreine, Esq., B. C. 8.

It is in consequence of the great stress laid by all who have

written on Indian Numismatics including Wilson, Cunningham and

Thomas, on the locality in which the coins of any race or dynasty

are found, that I am induced to notice the dispersion of my own col-

lection at Allahabad during the late troubles there.

In mary cases, and particularly as regards the later Bactrian or

Indo Greek reigns, the principal or only means we have of deter-

mining the area over which the sovereigns by whom they were

struck held sway are the coins themselves and the places of dis-

covering them, and the fact of many of one series being procured

far away from their usual seat may lead into error those who found

theories on and areue from such a basis.

The collection in question was, as noticed by Mr. Thomas in his

paper on Gupta coins published in the Journal in 1856, chiefly

made at Hamirpore in Bundlecund, and was naturally in great

measure formed of specimens obtained in the Doab, the appearance

of which at Allahabad or in its neighbourhood would excite no sur-

prize, and call for no remark. Butit had been enriched by many

contributions from the westward, particularly Muttra, and the pur-

chase of a small collection made at Peshawur and another belonging

to the late General Palmer had added a large quantity of those

usually termed Bactrian, and Indo-Scythic, the latter especially

being very numerous and finely preserved, many too with the origi-

nal rust on them, which of itself might be sufficient to lead a pur-

chaser to believe they had lately been dug up in the vicinity.

There were likewise many of the rarer species of those commonly

called the Bull-and-horseman, denominated by Mr. Thomas the

“coins of the kings of Cabul,’’ and chiefly procurable in the Punjab,

or even further north. Sassanian and Cashmere coins with many

others from the same direction were included in the loss.

I would also notice at the same time that a second cabinet has

been dispersed during the mutinies, that of Lady Sale; it was in

the possession of Mrs. Holmes, who with her husband was murdered

by the Irregulars at Segoulie; they then plundered her property,

among which were the coins in question. Never having been

fortunate enough to see the collection myself, I cannot give any

specification of its contents which, however, were, I believe, rather

rare and choice than numerous; all, save a few copper pieces, have

now disappeared.

170 The Temperature of the Surface of the Ocean. [No. 2.

A. Register of the Temperature of the Surface of the Ocean from the

Hooghly to the Thames.—By A. Camppett, Esq., M. D.

To Major HW. L. Tuvrni1Er,—.Deputy Surveyor General, Caleutta.

Srr,—On leaving India for England in February 1856 I received

through your prompt and kind assistance two Thermometers from

Government to enable me to keep a register of the temperatures of

the ocean for M. Hermann Schlagintweit, and the Asiatic Society.

I kept the register faithfully all through the voyage from the

Sandheads of the Hooghly till we entered the Thames, a copy of this

* Shewing the daily position of the

StapuataNeon age of the dgamemnon* was for-

warded with the annexed letter

to Colonel Sykes, the: Chairman of the Honorable the Court of

Directors, and I have the pleasure to forward a duplicate of it for

the information of the Asiatic Society. :

For the delay in doing so, the Society will, I hope, excuse me.

The period that has elapsed since I rejoined my station in the end

of May last, has not been favourable to thinking of such matters.

I am, yours very truly,

A, CaMpPBELL, M. D.

Darjeeling, January 21st, 1858.

To Colonel SyKxes, Chairman, §c., Hast India House, London.

Si1r,—Previous to my departure from India I was requested by

H. Hermann Schlagintweit to keep a register of the temperature of

the surface of the ocean on the voyage round the Cape of Good

Hope, as such a register was a great desideratum to him in connec-

tion with his other Meteorological researches in the East.

2. Having been furnished with Instruments for the purpose by

the Government of India, I made the required observations, which

are herewith forwarded, and have now to request that you will do me

the favor to take charge of them for Mr. Schlagintweit.

I have the honor, &c.,

(Signed) A. Campxpeit, M. D.

Memoranda on the Register.

1. Register commenced on the day after we left the Pilot, 21st

February, 1856.

2. On the 2nd of March at the time of both observations the

temperature of the sea was 2° higher than that of the air, viz. 82°

and 84°, This being the first time I had observed this result. I

1858. } The Temperature of the Surface of the Ocean. LL

made double observations, i. e. I registered the air and sea from

both Thermometers alternately. The result was the same.

3. On the 29th at 3 Pp. Mm. the air and sea were 86°. At 6 P.M.

a squall came on with heavy rain, which lasted, the rain, for 6 hours.

This cooled the air from 86° to 82° but the temperature of the Sea

fell 2° only in the same time.

4. On the 3rd at 3p. m. the air was 85° the sea 86°. We

had a squall and a shower ofarain at 8 P.M. ;0n the 4th at 9.30.4. M.

the air had fallen to 83° the sea to 84° only.

5. Since we approached the equator i. e. since we passed 5°

North, I have observed that the mercury does not fall more than

2 degrees from the evaporation of the moisture on the instrument.

North of 12° it used to fall 6 degrees.

6. For the first 7 days the observations were taken on the main

deck at the Poop-ladder in the shade, since then they have been

taken in a starboard Poop Cabin aft the Cuddy with open port

and jilmills; and I think that the situation is preferable from

equability of shade to the deck, or any other part of the ship for

registering the temperature of the air.

7. Inthe Indian ocean we found the South East trade blowing

in the 8th degree of S. Latitude, and we left it in 27°.

8. To the West of the Cape we found the South Hast trade in

31° and left it in 1° South.

9. Found the North East trade in 6° North and carried it to

25°. Found the sea weed in Latitude 19°, Longitude 39° West

and lost it in Latitude 31°.

10. On the 21st of March Latitude 24° 38’ Longitude 54° -42/

the morning was calm, Thermometer in air at 95 a. mM. 80°, sea

79°. At 2 Pp. mM. we had a squall from the South West which

reduced the temperature of the air to 76° at 3 Pp. M., but the tem-

perature of the sea was 80°. It had risen 1 degree before the

squall, I presume, and had not diminished by 3 p. m.

11. On the 25th March in Latitude 29° 51’ Longitude 40° 17!

we had the wind from the North, a land wind from the Island of

Madagascar. The Thermometer in air at 9} a. M. stood at 79°; the

temperature of the sea was 753. At3p.M. the temperature of

the air was 82° (sea 80°) or 7° higher than on the preceding day

when the temperature of the air at the same hour with the wind

from the South East was 75° only. On the 26th the wind was acain

from the South, the air fell to 77°, but the sea had not cooled with

equal rapidity, and stood at 79°. A. CAMPBELL.

[No. 2.

The Temperature of the Surface of the Ocean.

172

‘sof OTT ‘071q] —‘S €e-09 | Trel | es 18

{ cB we OT

‘Aromoys pus duep ‘soy ggrt ung] “7 Aq "S| 61-89 | FEST | $28 18 €8 Ge a me

*AIOMOYS pue Apnoyjo ‘soi geg ‘oyIp OF11G) “AS i eld, FS-9L ZQ rare) e EQ al 6<

‘sop QEZ UNY *O31P OIG) “A'S | GI-FL | FOF | _€8 €8 €8 ee Siar eo

‘dump are ‘sopim pf- uy *oyp O3Ip OIG] “AS | L-BL | B-ZL | FES €8 £8 eS ic =

‘sap TQ ‘Apeoys pula opway, -ozoe1q youy-g WUT] “Ag | € -ZB | ZI-OL | £8 £8 8 Ge Big ae

"poousmMWOD puLM opeay “GY “SG “W'V O] ¥tomoys Avvoy yi W'S | 6GFS | SI-8 98 | §¢8 G8 on =p =*

"SO[IU [g ‘o[qeao1eusip puv osojo “wWyeD) “AX | OF-G8 | PEL 18 G8 18 ie woe ="

"sopra Gg “0#9T] “ALN | a-e8 | 8 -L 18 | %¢3 eral eG IBS mK

"Sop 9G “WILD! “AM 'N | LPP8 | Te-9 C8 C8 Go? Sree =e St

‘sop gf “4uysru ysvy pends ‘owt ays] AoA) “AA | OPES | OLE 98 | $F F8 cS ao

‘OMG "gg sezdeIq INST] “MN | 6F°CR | 1B-h 18 c8 93 GB oie 2

‘saTIW 9g “AUP TU Sezoarq INST] “AA “N of8 | LIS ¢8 F8 c3 3. aye

"SOTIUL Gf *9Z90.1q

jouy-g ue pus [enbs v pry om uoyM Wa BIT OIG) “MM | ET-E8 | OFT 98 Pe- > see ey Gig. se"

‘SoTIUT EG ‘Sazao1q FYST pue swpeO| “AM | OT-S8 | LE ‘Ss F8 P8 Z8 eo. 2G ee

"SoTIW FCT

*So[IW GQZ ‘uel Jo sdoip moj W ‘oza0Aq oUT " GG-ER Ore G8 8 c8 C8 a

‘Soplat QP] ‘uoou Ty dmep pue we] "|S “A } O98 | LI-9 FS €8 FS is "ee =

‘sop QgT ‘dmep pue Apnofg *0941p 0931) "A "N “A| 69-98 | FES gg €8 #8 ca Se =

‘SOTIUL 1G] UNY ‘ezeIq OU) “WT “N ofBuc| oo “11> |c8 18 F8 ee a

‘OMIP 901 "azaaiq SVT] “AN | 16-28 | SS-El | G8 | 18 P8 cs iss

‘OUP BL UN -oytp ONT) “AN | 9G-Z8 | LIST | 18 | 64 8 | 64 |FG

‘sop QJ unY ‘ozaerq aUTY] “AN | 06-88 | 9I-ZI | 08 62 ie) Gee 36 ="

‘SoU Qg UNY ‘Joy pur mpeo| “N | ¢e-gs | ESL | _I8 08 Z8 je. ae

"SoTIW Gg UOOU TI UNY *9z991q BSI] “AM N | 9E-88 | PR6T | FLL LL us | F9L N16 ‘Aqad

‘WOON

@ apn} |'UOON 38 |W ‘d |W Vv 86 Wd GN WV F ‘9eR

"229 029 ‘LOYIVOM 9} UO SyIeMIyy “pula Fao ae 20g . oe “UY : ie | oe x

‘TIITaNVO “y ‘UG AT@—9GSl we punjpbugy 07 vyQnI]nQ wouf abnhoa soy

uo Insp wojdnp ,(uouwouvbp ,, dryg ayp panog uo ydoy unaog ay) fo aonfing ay, fo ainjosoduay ay} fo wogsihay

178

The Temperature of the Surface of the Ocean.

1858.]

‘ssedumo0o oy} Jo syutod yIpP-E

pur Z IO saaiSop QE ‘AVA OUSLY ‘Inopo Aysy eB

Surzg10a {bus B[Mopemiue jo [[ny vos ayy, ‘smoNy

-v} OG Ssutpunos posoddns ‘uses 03 posuvyo vas

SoCs

"EZ 1

apeiy' oT c

HoLaquyy

‘S

*SO[ LU C67

‘adox]

poox)

Joodeg

77 =O

“aS

ay} JO MOOD “yuURq sUT[NSseT uUQ ‘sapim Zzguny L| “MON

pur "y

‘SOTIU QZZ ‘aylooy edeg YQ ‘oza01q SuOMS| “BN

‘SOIL QO] GZ UNY ‘9zaa1q YSo1g

“OTT “ONIP 04519

"EG | ‘aZaaIq qo]

"66 ‘ezo01q SUOS

SOT FLT “Wye. V

*So]TI OG

*SoTIM GCL ‘TL ‘ON “epuvioweyy 909 °093Ip 0331G

‘so IU

TZI “OUIU4Y Ol] pur Jopunyy ‘ures ‘qenbg ‘IZIIIQ YS]

"SoTL PZ] 9Z901q aS ‘Aepung 1ojsvq

Sap gey ‘Ue ,)

“FSL

‘epuBlomeyy, 99g *OUIUIOUL Wyo & Jayyv uooU ye {fenbs

*So]IM QET und £099Ip ond

‘sou Qe] ‘Apnoya 0931q

“SOLU GZT 69Z901q JUST

‘TOYYVoM JuBsvatd AAoA

pue 9z901q qysty ‘sopIUl SOT ‘SONSUpOY jo purysy oe} HO

“A'S

23M 'N

AL ON

‘S

‘M'S'S

"MS

"YJLO AT

aH 'S

‘§

“MS

€ 6

L1-S1

ect

Esl

PV-0G

GP-EG

PS-LE

Gl-G&

qq-cg

I -8&

LI-OF

6 “GP

OG PP

OL-SP

9¢-LP

EL-0G

9 -eg

Gh-FG

L Lg

0G°S6

61-0&

8SE"TS

PGES

CG-1G

€ 9°06

me 6t

Oo reid

oe oe

“O91 ut yeorqaoa Eng ‘saTIm™ gcg ‘apery Ysa

Weeroe | Gent | OL i mae ae 2 ae | eee

Seen

“UOON

yv opn} /UOONT IV] Wad CF] Vv S6/ Nd WV FG! “QCST

D2) ‘029 “IOY}JVAM OY} UO SyAVMIY *‘PUIAA -Suoy jepnjyeq| -vag “gag 1y ary DUC

C a igi

S ‘Sot ZEZ OWIP O11) “AE 'N | OS-9E | F -FL 9) c/ ie e, ie fs

. ‘soi J¢z 0331p Apvojs) “TN | OTP | 1ST Neh pe 8/ ie ease

"SOIL GEZ “Av. ‘opedy YSo] “| 'N | SI-1s | OS's g/ Ss 6L os |t Avy

‘sol Z/[ ‘ezae1q Ysorgq] “EN | 69-26 | SE-9 08 6L 08 6S ae

‘opely “YN potoyug ‘sop pyT uny c-urey! “TN | age | Lag 6/ 18 6L is 6c“

"So]IM GQ "FYSTU syy SuLAMp UrIeA pus syfenbg) “|g | gees | TI-F ge~ | Be ZB 08 ane

‘Ayjenbs puv swyeg ‘satu yg uny; “MS | 9E°SS | 8 -S £8 €8 ER €8 ae

‘Ss "UBD | Eee | 8Z Z8 cB 08 [seh — *

G “Soy 6C] uny *1093X9 DUIVS oq}

S 0} [900 04 out, 4071 peg IIICM oyy qnq ‘WW ‘d c 48 oLl8

e OF [JF aw yy yorym Aq urea pur syeubg -ouos spray) “| ZI-1S |‘N SP | &8 €8 18 Gg: Sig 5

S "salut cg, una ‘Aurey = ‘opeay Apvoysug| — “W SI-06 | °S GP 18 08 18 GA sila: == %

S ‘GIG SHoMOYS YIM Joyjvam AT[wubs| “Tg | 0 -6L | FES 18 18 ras get len:

% "SOT QOG ‘opviy YSong] “|G | ST-9L | LE ZS ras e 28 ae

S ‘soft /JT WOIsuaasy Jo purjs] eyy YO “Aeao} “A'S | EG-El | wErZ 08 18 08 -1G. .\Per SS

5 ‘sop Jet Apoyo] “a's | PR-IL | 28-6 61 61 6L gre We: St

wm "sop eg] unyY] “A'S | SFG 85-11 SZ $11 sl oe lene =

2 *So[IW SG] UNY |

= ‘Avpioysok -W ‘Ad GE YB BUIPFT “WG Yor] ‘ozooiq ourg] “A's | EI-L GEFI LL LL LL we ee ot

% “mosvas UI SuIejuryd

3 ‘Adamoys pus Spuojg ‘vuspyT 3S HO! “A'S | FH| 9¢-S] CL cL c) oe cn

Ss ‘soy QOT Apnolo| “A'S | 16% aril fd cl oF) fs on (rr

= "soy Ji}] “A'S | 98-3 13°61 FL Fl bl Gh cL ipy. *

~ ‘SOP FOT UNY] =" Gel LE-0 el e) 1Z | 5 Pia

Ee "sollt JET] “A'S | 9ET 1G-4o | fel él bL cet ==

"6ST OVP OFNIG] “A'S | OBE P1-FZ uP, OL TZ ier oe

*saylu G8 fazao1q 3ysIT MIVA} “W'S | 8 -g GE-SZ 1Z 02 iZ meg

"soft G/T UNY] “T's | L1-9 OF-9 Sl 89 02 69 is udy

174

‘face of the Ocean.

The Temperature of the Sui

1858.]

"OCT “YIFG fo

“Wd J 38 pue

“SOAR, YB polOyouR pus UoCU Ie faddayg jo 98ST eo" HO, °°" * oa as Dae ec ZG 10 9¢ lez

“soptu Q/Z UNY “IOTAA JO OST PYF HO) “A'S ee 0 70g Tg eg cco eG GS

‘OWIP ZZZ_ OVWTP OFT ‘S OF-L 9G°8P Pg Tg 9g gg GG

"0771p 94S 0931 =—-0331 | CM 'S EG-G1L GF-/8 GG ¢¢ 8g LS 1G

‘op GZq OWIP OFFI “M G "Sh oo SP GG GG 8g 8g 0G

‘0791p J1Z 9991P 03FIT) “MA 'S 89°CS 6G-FP lg

op JOS] OTP 0371 'S €E-LG T-EP 6¢

“SOTIUL GGT 92001q oe “MS SP-is OP-IF 09

"Sof JOT °9Z001q ST) “MS 9€-SE ZL -O0F 9

"soTIU JQ “AOJVM OY} JOOYV OF OUTY

you pry yng “UOTvA oo peg pus 4s] ou} neoaed 099

0} Av Ot} 4B DANJVAIIAT9Y OY} Posiwal pura Jo aout ouT] “MA ‘S cP- le 82-6E Z9

‘OJP OFT “ouresopoyy| =“ 13-6E | €h-SE £9 a9 C9 Co = lit

‘OTIpVeL I “OIG ~"th CP-8E ge-9e ¥9 69 r9 FEO =. IGT

"SoIU PIT ‘ezaeqq ysody AWA) “HN | 6-26 | LG-FE cg cy 99 99 [aL

‘sopitd JQ ‘auOS pods vog ‘O}IP OFF1G) 'S T -9E I -€¢ 89 89 1Z ae

‘omip O91) “A'S | She IP-1E OL TZ SoZ eZ iol

‘Sa]IU QZ] *pooa Bos SsorT *9zZ001q IOI'T| “HS | L9-9E | Sa-0€ CL el Gl a

"som 661 ‘“UleY) 'S Gass: | USES ed A tL rl «8

-quepUNGR Poo BOG ‘Soft gF] ‘oezoarq yysvy) “|S | 6G0V | C69 TL PZ a ies Z

‘SoTL QOT ‘epeay yovjs] “AN | O “1h | I cS cL c Choc OY = 19

‘sal geg “juvpunqe poom vog 0791p OIG! “AN | FEOP | FEls 9L 9 LL | zi ig

176 Description of a new species of Himalayan Mole. | No. 2.

Description of a new species of Himalayan Mole,

Talpa Macrura.—By B. H. Hopesoy, Esq.

In preparing a set of skins and sculls for despatch to Europe I

find a marked species of Mole which has not been I think described,

and which differs from the ordinary Himalayan one by being a third

smaller yet having a tail five times as long. The following is its

summary description.

Tip of snout to base of tail, 4 inches. Head 14 inches. Tail and

hair, 14 inches, tail only, 12, inches, palma and nails, # inch, planta

and nails, 3 inch.

Its colour is deep slaty blue, with canescent gloss, iridescent

when wet.

The tail is cylindric and pretty well covered with soft hair which

extends a little beyond its tip. As I called the other Micrura,

so I name this one Macrura.

Moles are very abundant in the Himalaya, the deep bed of black

vegetable mould, every where prevailing (so long as its protecting

cover of forest and brush-wood is not cleared off), affording a plenti-

ful supply of those earth-worms which constitute the Mole’s chief

food.

The abundance of Moles therefore gives a distinct clue to the

surface character of this gigantic system of mountains, or rather to

the Indian slope of it, and most especially to the central or normal

region.

1858. | A Twenty-Fifth Memoir on the Law of Storms. Vn

A Twenty-Fifth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India, being the

HH. Company’s Steamer Pluto's Cyclone in the Gulf of Martaban

23rd and 24th April, 1854.—By Henry Prppineron, President

of Marine Courts.

This Cyclone is on many accounts a very remarkable one anda

sreat addition to our knowledge of that yet uncertain part of our

science, the tracks of Cyclones in narrow confined seas; and the

vicinity of an active volcano to one part of what appears to have

been its singularly curved track, and its intense violence and limited

extent make it one of great scientific as well as of mere utilitarian

interest. I give first the abridged documents relating toit beginning

from the South as usual, and then a table of them and a detail of

the conclusions upon which the track is laid down.

Abridged Log of the Ship Anatoon Aprcar, Capt. Connirw, from

Singapore bound to Calcutta. Reduced to Civil Time.

The Aratoon Apcar was at Noon on the 28th April, 1854, in

Lat. 7° 23’ N.; Long. 97° 44° Hast with the island of Pulo Rajah

bearing EH. N. H. 35 miles. Daylight gloomy with lightning. Noon

fine and light airs Northerly. ». m. to midnight standing to the

N. W. b. N. with light variable airs to 8 Pp. m. when steady S. W.

breeze. At sunset a heavy swell from the Southward.* Midnight

fresh breeze S. West, passing clouds and heavy pufts.

By Noon 22nd April.—The ship had run up to Lat. 10° 53’ N.;

Long. 95° 59’ East with winds of variable force from calms to

stormy breezes and squalls, variable and Southerly throughout.

Her Barometer had risen from 29.90 at 11 Pp. m. on the 21st, to

30.00 at Noon of the 22nd. The sea is marked throughout as “a

high cross sea,” “a terrific sea,’’ and “a most turbulent sea keeping

the decks awash,”’ and at 8.P. m. on the 21st, though a calm, it-is

marked as “a turbulent sea breaking in all directions,’’ and a protest

is entered in the log of the 22nd and 23rd on account of it. By

midnight 22nd and 28rd Barometer had fallen to 29.70. Gale “ very

fresh” and a high sea spoon drift and sea passing like a sheet of

* T note in italics this singular swell as it occurs on successive days, and shall

refer to it in the Summary.

178 A Pwenty- Fifth Memoir on the Law of Storms. [| No. 2:

water over the vessel. During these two days ship running up to

the N. W. b. W. and N. W. 1N. from 2 to 8 knots. The wind is

marked at 1 Pp. M. on the 23rd as “Southerly.”

On the 23rd April.—a4 a. M. cruel weather. 7 a. M. wind marked

S. W. sea making a clean breach over the vessel and described as

awful; the ship was now under storm sail. Barometer at 29.60 at

6 a. u.; Noon no position given; Lat. by Acct. 12° 47’ N.; Long.

94° 29’ Kast; Pp. M. wind becoming more Westerly, and by 8 P. m.

moderating to light breezes; at 10, wind 8S. W. a 2-knot breeze

only, and at 11 the Barometer is marked at 29.80. At Noon 24th,

Lat. 14° 6’ North; Long. Chr. 94° 33’ East.

Abridged Log of the H. C. Steamer Puuro, Capt. 8S. G. Boon,

Commander, from Moulmein to Rangoon. Civil Time.

The Pluto left Moulmein on the 21st April, 1854, having on

board a detachment of European Artillery with officers and fol-

lowers, in all one hundred and fifty-five persons with their baggage

designed for the relief of the garrison of Bassein. The weather is

described as thick and gloomy, increasing at midnight with light

rain at times and a cross swell from the S. Eastward. Wind vary-

ing from 8, East to West. The Barometer at Noon was at 30.00 ;

Aneroid 29.77; Sympiesometer 30.00. At midnight Bar. 30.00;

Aneroid 29.78; Sympiesometer 30.35; Ther. 81°. This kind of

weather it is remarked in Capt. Boon’s report is usual at this period

of the year.

22nd April.—a. M. a long Southerly swell; at 4, fresh breezes

S. E. and threatening weather; Bar. at 5. a. u. 29.87; Aneroid

29.40; Symp. 30.25; Ther. 81°. Daylight, weather as before, vessel

labouring much, steering to the 8S. W. + S. with a heavy Southerly

swell. At 8, more moderate. At Noon, moderate but gloomy ;

Bar. 30.1; Symp. 30.10; Ther. 81°. Lat. Obs. 15° 30’ N.; Long.

96° 9/* Hast. vp. m. light breezes Southerly and cloudy with a 8.

Westerly swell. 3 2, mM. saw Point Baragua from the mast head

bearing W. N. W.+ distant about twenty miles. Soundings at 2

* 95” 9’ in the log which would have placed the vessel to the Westward of

the points.

+ W.S. W. in the log and official reports but W. N. W. is no doubt meant

1858. ] A Twenty-fifth Memoir on the Law of Storms. 179

p.M.14fs.andat4 p.m. l1lfs. At4p. um. Bar. 30.00;Symp. 30.10;

._ Ther. 843°. A strong Northerly current ; at 4p. mu. wind marked

S. Hast, swell increasing from the S. West. Sunset gloomy and

threatening, made all possible preparations for bad weather, vessel

steering out to the 8.8. W. At 8, increasing breezes from 8. East,

dark gloomy weather with passing showers and lightning; Bar.

29.90; Symp. 80.00; 9 p.m. Bar. 29.80; Ther. 84°; Symp. 29.905

wind marked 8. Hast at 9 p.m. very appearance of a gale in the

Gulf to the S. West of the vessel; altered course to S. East with a

view of clearing its track ; sea increasing to midnight, when blowing

a gale from 8. East with passing light rain and sheet lightning, Bar.

29.60 ; Ther. 88°; Symp. 29.70; Aneroid 29.60.

23rd Aprila. M. heavy S. East gale, Artillerymen pumping, as

the Engine could not keep the bilge-pumps going fast enough;

4.4.M. Bar. 29.40; Ther. 843°; Symp. 29.60. Sea increased and now

mountainous and confused, horizon at times no where visible from

the height of the waves; 5 a. M., ship unmanageable and in danger

of foundering; threw all the deck baggage overboard; 6.30 a. M.

ship more buoyant.

At 7 a.m. a lull of 15 minutes; securing masts, funnel, &c. for a

shift of wind, Bar. 29.09; Ther. 84°; Symp. 29.20; Aneroid 29.10.

Observed the Bar. rise and fall linch.* Much sheet lightning ; saw

sea birds about tlie ship and noticed the water effervescing alongside.¥

At 7h. 15’ wind shifted to the N. W., blowing with indescribable

force ; boats, bulwark and paddle-box blown away. lashed the

helm a lee as the men could not stand the violence of the wind

and spray. All hands lying flat on the deck holding on to the

bolts, &c. under the lee of the weather bulwarks; impossible to

move along the deck without crawling on all fours. Bar. oscillat-

ing very much and finally settling at 28.40. Obliged to desert the

pumps from the fearful violence of the wind. Ship buried in the

sea. Foremast invisible from the funnel from the sheets of spray.

as W. 8S. W. would place the vessel in 4 fathoms water to the North of the

Krishna shoal. I subsequently learned that these were clerical errors.

* From 29.09 to 30.09 and falling again instantly as specially noted in Capt.

Boon’s official report,

+ The italics are mine throughout this log.

180 A Twensy- Fifth Memoir on the Law of Storms. [No. 2.

All who were exposed felt it exceedingly cold during the height of the

hurricane and experienced a most painful sensation about the face

particularly in the eyes. Could not throw the guns overboard; sea

one mass of foam and spray; 11, Bar. rising, wind abating and

shifting to the westward, 2 feet 9 in. of water in the hold when we

could sound the well. Noon Bar. 29.9;* Ther. 84°; Symp. 29.40.

Weather moderating fast; P. Mm. wind and sea moderating; Bar.

29.40 ; Symp. 30.00; Ther. 83°. Finding that the vessel was much

damaged and leaky and that it was useless to take on the troops

without their baggage and accoutrements put back to Moulmein,

and by midnight the weather was perfectly fine.

At Noon on the 24th.—ULat. 15° 12’ N.; Long. 96° 52’ East

shewing a set of sixty miles to the South during the hurricane. In

his official report, Capt. Boon states that he considers the centre to

have passed up between the Rangoon and Sitang Rivers.

I forwarded a set of queries to Capt. Boon regarding this Cyclone,

to which he and his Chief and second officers have been good enough

to give me the replies noted below.

Queries forwarded to Capt. Boon with his replies and those of his

Chief Officer Mr. Harton and Second Officer Mr. Gauus.

THe Sxy Cuiovups, &c.

Qurry No. 1.—What was the appearance of the sky during the

Cyclone and specially during the lull. Was there any clear space in

the zenith ?

Carr. Boon.—The sky was dark and lowering with very little

scud, I particularly observed that there was no clear space in the

zenith during the lull, but there was an apparent break in the

weather, so much so, that those on board who were unacquainted

with the law of storms, prognosticated fair weather, and were much

surprised when I informed them that the Pluto was in the centre

of the Cyclone ; it was certainly deceiving, but as I am a thorough

believer in the law of storms I made preparations for a shift of wind

and bad weather. |

Cuter Orrrcer.—The sky during the Cyclone was overcast with

dense clouds. The night was particularly dark, no stars visible.

No clear space in the zenith.

* So in the MSS. probably 29.09 is meant.

1858. | A Twenty-Fifth Memoir on the Law of Storms. 181

Sreconp OFrricer.—Gloomy with dark overhanging clouds, there

was no clear space in the zenith.

No. 2.—Was there any remarkable light or darkness? Was the

sea luminous. If any light whence was it derived ?

Carr. Boon.—There was no remarkable light and the sea was not

particularly luminous. The night, previous to the lull, was very

dark, I may say the darkest night J ever experienced.

CuieF Orricer.—The night was particularly dark. Daylight

was a long time breaking. No remarkable light; sea not more

luminous than usual when breaking.

Seconp Orricer.—No particular light or darkness farther than

I have generally seen in bad weather. No luminous light observed.

No. 3.—Was there any remarkable lightning during the lull.

Describe all the kinds of lightning carefully.

Carr. Boon.—F lashes of distant sheet lightning at intervals, but

no thunder; the lightning was very faint and had the appearance

of being a long way off; it came from all quarters of the compass.

CuieFr Orricer.—During the lull very faint long flashes of light-

ning (reflected light?) No thunder heard.

SeconD Orricer.—Faint flashes at intervals.

Tuer SEA.

No. 4.—When was the effervescence spoken of in the log first

noticed ?

Carr. Boon.—During the lull, and Jasted until the wind came

from the N. W.; the sea was very confused, rising very high and

falling apparently with no progressive motion; the Pluto laboured

less in the centre than she did in any other part of the Cyclone.

CHIEF aND SEconD OFFIcERS.—During the lull.

No. 5.—How long did it last ?

Cart. Boon.—About a quarter of an hour.

CuizF OrricEer.—Noticed during the lull.

Srconp Orricer.—About half an hour.

No. 6.— What was it ike ? Did it amount to frothing ?

Carr. Boon.—It was like boiling water; it amounted to frothing ;

it had a white appearance but gave no sensible light.

Curmr Orricer.—The rising and falling of water in a boiling

182 A Twenty-iifth Memoir on the Law of Storms. [No. 2.

cauldron. Bubbles rising to the surface as seen in a pond when

stones reach the bottom.

SEconD OFricer.—At the meeting of two confused tides.

No. 7.—Did it give out any light ?

Cart. Boon.—No sensible light; perhaps if it had occurred at

night, light would have been observed.

CurEer OFFiceR.—No light.

SrconD Orricer.—Did not observe any.

No. 8.—Was there any smell or other sensation from it ?

Capt. Boon.—No smell or other sensation, excepting we all felt

it very cold.

CHIEF AnD Second Orricers.—No.

No. 9.—Any noise of a peculiar kind such as a hissing or rumbling ?

Carr. Booy.—No noise accompanied it, there was no hissing.

CHIEF ayD Seconp Orricers.—None.

No. 10.—Dizd the water feel warm or cold? Was it remarkably

luminous ?

Carr. Boon.—I felt very cold and was of course wet through,

and my opinion is, that it was the sea water that made us feel cold

and not the wind, for it was only when the sea began to make a

breach over us that we felt it cold.

Curer Orricer.—Did not try it. Had it (the lull) been during

the night we might have seen it luminous. :

Seconp Orricer.—Felt very cold. Did not observe it luminous.

PERSONAL SENSATIONS.

No. 11.—Describe as particularly as you can the sensation about

the face spoken of ?

Capt. Booy.—The sensation about the face was similar to that

experienced in a severe hail storm, when walking against the wind,

the eyes were inflamed by the spray, which was very dense, so much

so, that at intervals I could see no one. I afterwards felt as if I

had been stung by nettles over the face and hands.

Cuter Orricer.—Stand facing a hail storm of severity and you

have a good description.

Seconp Orricer.—Sharp and cutting, such as experienced with

cold bleak winds in high latitudes.

No. 12.—Also the cold mentioned ? Its temperature uf noticed ?

1858. ] A Twenty- Fifth Memoir on the Law of Storms. 183

Carr. Booy.—The cold was very severe, as cold as I have felt it

in England, the temperature was not noted on deck, those who were

battened down below, felt it very hot: the Ther. stood at 80° in

the cabin, the Doctor registered the Bar. &e. &ct during the height

of the Cyclone.

Cuter Orricer.—The cold was severe and made my teeth chatter.

Thermometer not on deck.

Seconp Orricer.—No.

No. 13.— Was there any feeling of oppression or. exhaustion of

other sensations differing from what mere Jatique would have produced,

as for instance that of excitement ?

Capt. Boon anp Cuter Orricer.—No.

SEcoND Orricer.—Cold very intense.

No. 14.— Were any persons on board affected after the Cyclone

had ceased, more or differently, from what fatigue aloné would

account for ?

Capt. Boon.—No one was particularly affected to my knowledge,

sores broke out about the legs and feet of the 1st and 2nd officers

and Ist Engineer. I was much exhausted, and considerably reduced,

butfthat I attribute to exposure as I was on deck full forty-eight

consecutive hours without sleep or food, and of course very anxious ;

1 also felt much excited for some two or three days after I arrived

in port.

Cuter Orricer.—The soles of my feet cracked and smarted with

the salt water, felt the eyes very sore from the salt spray.

SeconD Orricer.—A few persons complained of sores on the

feet and legs, also painful sensations over the face and eyes, and

mostly all of fatigue.

No. 15.—<Add any other notes, force of the wind, Se.

Cart. Boon any Cuter Orricer.—lorce of the wind was 12.

Srconp Orricer.—Indescribable.

No. 16.—When the shift of wind to the N. W. came on, were there

any screaming or roaring noises with it ¢

Capt. Boon.—When the N. W. wind came on, it was accom-

panied by a fearful roaring noise, the heaviest thunder could not

have been heard. I can only compare the wind to a metallic sub-

stance pressing against the vessel; in fact I thought at one time

184 A. Twenty-Fifth Memoir on the Law of Storms. [No. 2.

the sides of the Pluto would be blown in, she heeled right over her

broadside and remained in that. position for four long hours, the

roaring of the wind was similar to a powerful steamer blowing off

steam. If I had not been prepared for the shift to the N. W.,

funnel and masts must have gone; I think if we had not had wire

rigging, the masts must have gone and perhaps the vessel.

The Barometer stood high when we left Moulmein river, but the

weather looked dirty, but not more so than you would expect in

the S. W. monsoon, even when I sighted the land about Barazie

there was nothing extraordinary in the weather. -

They had the wind at Moulmein, first at S. E. and then S. W.

it was hardest there at S. W. I found that the trees blown down

there fell to the N. EK. I forgot to mention that the Master Atten-

dant of Moulmein on the very day of the hurricane went out to

sea in the Jrusty Schooner; so little did he expect a hurricane !

If I had gone to the EH. N. E. when I discovered the track of the

storm was N. E. how should I have had the wind? Would it not

have veered to the South and 8S. W. and West? I should not have

been far from the centre, and, if the wind veered to the Westward,

I should have had a dead lee shore, shoal water, and an unmanage-

able ship; I think the wind would have more power over the hull

of the Pluto than the current, as I have often noticed as well as

others who are accustomed to the small iron vessels, that when

lying in a tide-way they will remain wind-rode, while other and

larger vessels are riding with the tide. There was only one way I

fancy of avoiding the hurricane, and that was jammed up by the land.

Cuter OFrricer.—Saw it coming from the N. W. and heard it

blow with indescribable violence. |

SeconD Orricer.—Heard it approaching with great noise, but no

screaming.

Abridged Log of the H. C. Light Vessel Tavoy, Mr.S. W. Hazra-

woop, Commanding Officer. Off Elephant Point.

21st April. At 10 a. Mm. severe squall from the S. East, during

the day fresh breezes EH. S. E. to S. East with heavy rain as noted.

At 6 Pp. M. weather “looks threatening” and at 10 P. M. “a nasty

: 2 ”?

sea 18 getting up.

1858. | A. Twenty-Fifth Memoir on the Law of Storms. 185

22nd April.—Wind marked E. S. E. till 2 Pp. uw. when N. East.

Strong breezes and hazy weather with severe squalls oecasionally.

At 10 p. mu. weather is noted as “clearing up for an hour, but soon

looked as black as before.” Preparing for bad weather.

23rd April.—About 7h. 80m. a. M. commenced blowing very hard

from the E. 8. Eastward and very shortly blew a perfect hurricane

till about 1h. 30m. Pp. M. when the wind veered rapidly to N. N. W.

and blew harder than before. It was not more than five minutes in

veering or shifting from E. 8. E. to N. East, North and N. N. W.

The sea became frightful, tumbling and tossing about in a most dans

gerous and remarkable manner. TZavoy made very bad weather, lost

boats, &c. and crew utterly paralysed through fear. At 4, wind

West and moderating. At midnight fine.

Memorandum.—No barometrical observations are unfortunately

given with this log.

Abridged Report fram Capt. H. Lewis, Master Attendant, Rangoon.

Srr,—I have the honor to report to you the occurrence of a

severe Cyclone on this coast; and am only sorry that I am unable

to give you a clear or minute detail of the changes of wind or

Barometer, as my presence was required nearly the whole time on

the river and its banks. I have examined the Log Books of the

several vessels that were within its influence, but from only two of

them (the Hannah Kerr and Laidmans) have I been able to obtain

any information on the subject, and this but very slight ; no barome-

trical notices have been made by the Hannah Kerr.

At Rangoon, on Friday and Saturday the 21st and 22nd of April.

—We had threatening weather, cloudy with slight rain and occa-

sional strong gusts of wind from the Eastward. Barometer fell

yo and Sympiesometer during the afternoon of Saturday oscillated

considerably,* the tide was much higher than usual for the age of

the moon.

Sunday, 23rd.—Commenced with heavy rain, wind blowing in

gusts from Hast to S. E, Barometer falling rapidly ; about 11 a. m.

wind N. K.; 1 p. uw. North; about 2 p.m. shifted with great violence

to N. W. Barometer at this time 29.42 and Sympiesometer 29.47,

* The italics are mine. H. P.

186 A Twenty-Fifth Memoir on the Law of Storms. [No. 2.

the river rose 6 feet, and had it been at the height of the springs

the whole of Rangoon would have been flooded.

The Hannah Kerr from Glasgow with 700 tons of coal, in Lat.

N. 15° 10’ Long. H. 94° 42’ at 8 ep. um. hada strong gale from

the Hast.

Sunday.—4 a. M. a severe hurricane from 8S. E. veered round to

N. W.; close-reefed topsail blown away; very high sea running.

Noon moderating.

The Latdmans from Rangoon, homeward bound, had to eut away

main and mizen masts to save the vessel. Enclosed is a printed

extract from her Log book.

This vessel saw the spars and deck planks of a vessel, supposed

to be about 500 tons; yards, masts and studding sail boom-ends

painted white.

The Shawool Hammed from the Nicobars was totally dismasted —

about twenty miles to the Southward of Ballagore Point.

Several other vessels have arrived since, more or less damaged, but

I fear we have not yet heard the worst. Several native kuttoos

and junks were wrecked close to the mouth of the river, and one

schooner, the Wave, went down at her anchors in the river.

The heaviest of the hurricane was felt to the Eastward of this

between Rangoon and Moulmein, and as yet we have no news from

that quarter.

Extracts of the LatpMans’ Log.

“ Saturday, April 22nd, Nautical Time.—P. M. commencing with

light variable airs, 5 P.M. set main top gallant sail, 6 P. mM. single

reefed the topsaiis, middle part hard squalls and heavy rain attended

with thunder and vivid lightning and a heavy swell from the

Southwestward. Ship labouring heavily and making more water

than usual, 10 a.m. Wore ship to the S. Hastward, set the spanker

and main spencer.”’

Here it is evident that they had the first token of the gale, and

the following day, as appears by the Log Book, was the one on which

the accident occurred and which compelled her to bear up and re-

turn to this port.

“ Sunday, April 23rd.—P. M. commencing with strong winds and

squally, veering from East to South witha heavy sea from the South-

1858. ] A Twenty-Fifth Memoir on the Law of Storms. 187

ward. Ship leaking very much. Pumps closely attended to. Ba-

rometer 29.60 2 p. um. Wind increasing, in jib and mainsail and

2nd reef of the topsails. Barometer 29.50. At4 Pp. um. wind 8S. E.

wore ship to the 8S. Westward. Wind and sea increasing. Ship

leaking much more. Pumps closely attended to. Observed the

water coloured. Barometer 23.50; and at 6. p.m. 29.20. The

gale and sea increasing. In all, but the close-reefed topsails —

and foretopmast staysail. Heavy seas breaking on board and

could not stand properly to the pumps. Midnight, strong gales,

and terrific squalls with a heavy sea running, ship labouring and

straining very much, carried on the close-reefed tonsails to get the

Prepris channel open. Barometer 29.10. At4a.m. it blew with

fury—the foretopmast staysail blew away ; split the foretopsail and

main spencer; ship lying over very much, with a dead body of

water on deck. Found we could not keep the pumps clear; water

gaining on us very fast. Barometer 29.00. At 6.30 a. mu. it blew

a hurricane, ship laying down on her beam ends. Ali hands per-

fectly stupified and could not hear me speak to perform my orders,

and it was impossible for them to stand at the pumps. The dead

water was lying on deck over the hatches. The Master went below

to see the Barometer, when he heard the water running in at the

stern and all the cabins afloat. The carpenter was called for, and

knocked ail the panellings away. He then stopped a very great.

leak on the starboard quarter; my attention was next drawn on

deck, the ship was laying over so that I had great trouble in getting

up the cabin stairs and when I did get on deck, I found the wind

had veered to the Westward. Barometer 28.90. Lost the foresail

in trying to wear ship. Got a studding sail into the forerigging,

but found it of no use. It then came on to blow more awfully than

before, the ship laying on her beam-ends, and we saw plainly the

ship settling down fast. The main and mizen mast were cut away

and the ship righted at once and then hauled to the S. S. E.

Sounded the pumps and found five feet water in the hold. Set all

hands to the pumps.”—Rangoon Chronicle, April 29th.

Extracts from the Rangoon Newspapers.

RanGoon.

Rangoon was on Sunday last visited by a hurricane, or as tlie

232

188 A Twenty-Hifth Memoir on the Law of Storms. [No. 2.

scientific world will now have it, a Cyclone, of a most violent

description.

On Sunday evening the near approach of bad weather was pretty

clearly foretold, by the rapid fall of the Barometer. From this

time the wind, which was from the S. E., began to increase, accom-

panied with heavy rain. The storm reached its maximum violence at

about 2.30 Pp. m. on Sunday, when the Barometer fell to 29.42 and

Sympiesometer to 29.48, but from daylight in the morning had con-

tinued to blow in alarming and destructive gusts, and had veered

completely round from its original point, to the North and West-

ward. Much serious damage has been done in the town attended,

we regret to say, with loss of life.

We have only however authentic information of the death of one

old man (a milkman) upon whom a beam of his house fell. Many

of the pucka buildings which the owners have been so anxious to

get completed before the rains, and upon which large sums have

been expended—the expenditure being more than doubled by the

enhanced price of labour and materials—have fallen down, or are

otherwise materially injured, owing chiefly to their not having had

time to set, before exposure, first to such a deluge of rain which

loosened their foundations, and then to gusts of wind acting on their

walls. It has been a severe test for such brick buildings as have

escaped.

On the river also much damage has been the consequence. The

schooner Wave foundered, with loss of three lives, the Flora nearly

sharing the same fate. All the ships drifted more or less; and

hundreds of boats were swamped and lost. The Engineers’ Depart-

ment and Timber Merchants have suffered severely by the breaking

up and dispersion of their rafts: as also we believe the Dockyard.

We cannot learn from the oldest inhabitants, that Rangoon has

witnessed such a storm before. We trust that its violence did not

extend to the gulf of Martaban, or we may anticipate bad news from

the shipping outside; and the Zenasserim will have had a severe

taste of it.—Rangoan Chronicle, April 26th.

A Rangoon paper of the 3rd of May containsa further report of

the mischief done by the late Cyclone, which we have extracted.

“The Zenobia is off ina few hours, so just a line by her, The

1858. ] A. Twenty-Fifth Memoir on the Law of Storms. 189

Fire Queen is two days behind her time from Maulmain. She has

most likely been detained to look for wrecked ships and boats at the

mouth of the Sitang river. Itis feared that a terrible disaster has

happened in the Sitang river. A fleet of thirty-five boats left Maulmain

on the 19th ultimo, having on board the Head Quarters 36th M. N.L.,

and a third of a Company of European Artillery, for Sitang and Shew-

geen. They were caught,it seems, in the terrific gale of the 23rd, when

about thirty miles below Sitang, one boat’s company have reached

Pegu, and reported taat the bore came mountains high, and caused

the whole of the rest of the fleet to disappear. Whether all have

swamped, or whether they were driven down the river and out to

sea by the gale, which blew from the North, is at present unknown.

Elephants with provisions have been sent from Pegu to look for

people along the bank of the river. The very worst fears are enter-

tained, but as natives often greatly exaggerate, it is quite possible

some of the boats may have been driven ashore on the bank of the

Sitang river. The Fire Queen must bring in the news to-day.

“P. M., 3rd May.—Since writing a few hours ago, the Fire

Queen from Maulmain has come in, bringing a few particulars

of the accident on the Sitang river. Lieut.-Colonel Johnstone, who

was proceeding to join his Regiment at Tounghoo, being in a good

boat, weathered the bore and the wind, and got safe into Sitang,

where, however, he was robbed of all he possessed by the Burmese.

He saw, it is said, ten boats with men in them go down, what has

become of the other twenty-five boats is not known.

A private letter from Captain G. C. Haueuton, Magistrate at

Maulmein gives the following account of the weather at that station.

On Sunday morning, 23rd.—We had wet windy weather and

cloudy ; wind J think N. Kast ; by Noon it was very high at Hast. By

2 Pp. M. it was 8. Hast and gradually shifted to S. W.; much raip

from Noon. By 4 p. m. it was blowing a hurricane at 8S. W. and

continued to about 7.30, gradually veering Westerly. After 8 P M.

it was high at W. N. W. and the wind gradually veered and fell till

daylight when we had a moderate breeze at S. East. The oldest

trees were rooted up, but all things considered, wonderfully little

damage was done to the houses. I thought my house would have

190 A Twenty-Fifth Memoir on the Law of Storms. [No. 2.

been blown away and had to shore up all the doors and windows 8.

West to prevent them being blown in.

The track of the Puuvo’s Cyclone.

The foregoing comprises all that I have been able to collect in

the way of documents I now proceed to say on what grounds I have

laid down the track of this Cyclone.

We find that unfortunately the wind is only marked once at 11

p. M. of the 21st (civil time), throughout the Aratoon Apcar’s log

of the 22nd, which is kept in Nautical time, but that throughout the

21st she had unsteady winds varying as to force from calm at sun-

set to strong breezes at 8 Pp. M.; then moderate again with gloomy

threatening weather at midnight, and at 4 4. M. on the 22nd fresh

breezes; but during the whole of the 21st, she had the sea even

during the calm at sunset very turbulent and breaking in all direc-

tions. We may then fairly suppose that she was with this sea in

some part of the wake of the Cyclone, and her falling barometer

from Noon of the 22nd would seem to indicate that her N.

Westerly course was bringing her within the true Cyclone eircle.

We have only at 1 Pp. mu. on the 22nd the wind marked “ Souther-

ly” and at 7 a. M. on the 23rd it is marked as 8. W., so that as it

was blowing a hard gale from midnight we may fairly say that at

midnight 22nd—238rd she had run into the Cyclone on its 8. Haster-

ly quadrant, and from thence if we take the wind to have been veer-

ing gradually that it may have been about S. W. b. S with her at

that time, or perhaps even 8. 8. W., either of which estimates would

place the centre of a Cyclone to the E. N. EK. of her, or somewhere

about Barren Island, and vague as tliis is, I have so marked it for

midnight in the Chart for the sake of reference, for, as will be pre-

sently seen, the distance is so great that it 1s impossible to consider

this gale and the Pluto's Cyclone as the same circular storm.

On the 23rd from midnight up to Noon we find that the Aratoon

Apcar had the weather very severe and the sea 1s desgribed as awful.

After Noon in this day it appears to have moderated rapidly, but

the wind is again most carelessly marked as “ Westerly,’ and we

cannot hence pronounce with any degree of certainty that her gale

was a Cyclone at all or a mere setting in of the S. W. monsoon.

For it will be seen by the Charts that from the centre, which we

1858.] A Twenty-Fifth Memoir on the Law of Storms. 191

have approximately estimated about Barren Island, for the sup-

posed Oyclone of the Aratoon Apear at midnight 22nd—238rd of

May, to the spot where the centre certainly passed over the Pluto

at 7 a. M. on the 28rd is a distance of 222 miles, so that if suppose

the Cyclone to be the same storm, it must have travelled at the rate

of nearly 32 miles an hour, a far higher rate of travelling than we

have yet ascertained for the storms of the Bay of Bengal except in

one instance.

The log of the Latdmans unfortunately affords us no assistance, as

no positions are given, but from what is said she appears to have

been dismasted very near to the centre, and not far to the S.

Westward of the Pluto.

It seems therefore safer to suppose that the Pluto’s Cyclone was

an independent storm, and that that of the Aratoon Apcar was also

possibly or probably a Cyclone, which either broke up or ran on ahead

of the vessel passing out, as in the case of the Erin’s Cyclone,

‘Pwenty-second Memoir Journ. Asiatic Society of Bengal Vol. XXIII.

’ by the Cocos passage. I have thus marked only a single circle for it,

at midnight 22nd— 28rd to remind the mariner of the great probabi-

lity of the Southern, S. Western and South Eastern gales of the

open part of the Audaman Sea being quadrants of Cyclones of which

the track lies over or near to the two Voleanoes.

We have then only to deal with the Pluio’s Cyclone which evi-

dently,—and this constitutes its great interest,—came up from the

South West, and was travelling to the N. East. It appears to

have given as usual its first indications by the increasing swell from

the 8S. West after Noon; by midnight it was a gale from the S.

East; but we have no data from which to estimate the distance of

the centre at this time, and can thus only mark for it also a circle

with a track of an undefined extent in the directions which we

fortunately know it to have taken, the centre of the circle being, as

nearly as can be estimated, the Pluto’s position at 7 a. M. when the

calm centre passed her.

We next find that at the Tavoy light vessel, which is anchored

off Elephant point in’ Lat. 16° 19’ N.; Long. 96° 25’ East at the

entrance of Rangoon River, it commenced blowing very hard from

the E.S. East at 7.30 a. um. on the 23rd, about the time the Pluto

192 A Twenty-Hifth Memoir on the Law of Storms. [No. 2.

had the centre passing her, and that it was veering (or shifting says

the log) so rapidly at 1.80 p. mu. to N. N. W. from E. 8. E. that it

was not more than five minutes in doing so. Hence there is no

doubt that the centre passed close to the Eastward of her, and

doubtless, as estimated in the reports from thence, somewhere be-

tween Rangoon and the Sitang river-mouths, about 45 miles to the

East of her. If we say that the centre bore due Hast 20 miles

from the Zavoy’s position at 1 Pp. M. we shall then have, from its

estimated place with the Pluto at 7 a. M. to this spot at 1 P.M, a

distance of about 70 miles for its progress in six hours, or 114 miles

per hour for its rate of travelling, which is not an unusual one, and

one founded on fairly estimated data is, I think, far preferable to

the forced conclusion of supposing the Aratoon Apear’s Cyclone to

have travelied at the rate of thirty-two miles per hour ?

We have thus the remarkable tact of a small but severe Cyclone

forming, or descending perhaps, about Narcondam, since it dismast-

ed the Laidmans probably at some distance W. 8. West of the spot

where its centre passed. over the Pluto and travelling up to the °

IV. Hast and our Chart, on which I have placed for comparison the

former tracks of the Briton and Runnimede’s and of the Hrin’s

Cyclones, will shew that, in confined Volcanic seas like this, the

tracks are apparently subject to no general rule, at least to none that

we can at present venture to predicate.

Other Phenomena.

There was in this Cyclone the usual absence of thunder and the

faint lightning described seems to have been more the glaring of

strong electrical action than true lightning.

The frothing of the sea during the passage of the centre is by

far the most remarkable phenomenon in this Cyclone, and 1 have

endeavoured to elicit, as will be seen in the queries, all possible in-

formation regarding it, and Captain Boon and his officers all agree

together in comparing the motion of the sea to the seething of a

cauldron. I think this has been noticed before? but I cannot now

find the reference, and on one occasion in the 8. Hast part of the

China Sea between the shoals and the coasts of Borneo, in the month

of October after several days of gloomy rainy weather, perhaps from

a Cyclone in the Northern part of the sea, I myself observed it to

ee -

1858. ] A Twenty-Fifth Memoir on the Law of Storms. 193

occur, but in this instance it was more like the bubbling of gas in a

spring, than the frothing described by Capt. Boon and his officers.

The Management of the Pluto.

The sailors will not fail to remark, and indeed it excited much

attention amongst Nautical men in Calcutta at the time, that this

seems to be at first sight the case of an encumbered Steamer, which

might certainly, one would think, have got out of the way of the

centre, allowing herself to be caught in it to the imminent risk of

the vessel and the lives of all on board ; but as will be seen by the

following letter addressed to the Superintendant of Marine, Capt.

Boon did all that his vessel would allow him to do, in the very

dificult position in which he was placed.

Captain 'T. E. Rogers, Superintendant Marine.

Srr,—In reply to your demi-official communication with copies of

H. C. Str. Pluto’s log and Captain Boon’s letter I have the honor

te say. :

1. That it is very certain that our knowledge of the tracks of

the Cyclones in the Andaman Sea is very uncertain, and that, as

quoted by Captain Boon, the only track given in the Horn Book,

which is laid down from the (then) only recorded storm, is one from

the EH. 8. E. to the W. N. W. My new Memoir, the 22nd of the

series, just sent to you; shews a new track for them, namely from

the S. b. HE. S. and 8. S. E. to the N. N. W. and N. W.b. N.

between the two volcanos of Narcandam and Barren Island, and out

by the Preparis passage. This memoir however Captain Boon could

not have seen. The present Cyclone gives us another and is pro-

bably an instance of a re-curving track.

2. Captain Boon very rightly steams for an offing and correctly

judges at 9 p. M. that the centre of the Cyclone bears 8S. W. of

him, and this is confirmed by the swell from 8. W., but he is neces-

sarily still uncertain as to its track, and, as any one would have

done, still steams out for an offing, and so far obtains one that he

deepens off the bauk to no ground with twenty fathoms, if I read

his log correctly ?

5. At midnight, however, there was no doubt of the track of the

Cyclone to the N, Eastward since the wind was steady at S. E. and

Barometer falling fast, and the steamer had not more than held her

194 A Twenty-Fifth Memoir on the Law of Storms. ‘!No. 2.

own as to position and the question now became what was best to

be done ?

4. The ship’s érwe position at this time has first to be considered,

and, taking into account—

a. The Northerly set shewn by the bearings and soundings since

point Baragui was sighted.

b. The heave of the S. Westerly sea.

ce. The storm current setting him to the N. West.

d. The storm wave setting him to the N. East.

e. The inset of the flood tide to the Sitang and other mouths of

the Delta whenever it made—taking all these considerations into

account, then, I think Captain Boon could not have estimated him-

self as having done more than held his own as to latitude, though

he had deepened his water by a few miles of Hastering carrying

him off the bank. So that, at most, point Baragui was still bear-

ing W. N. W. or W. b. N, of him. The extreme of the flat more

Southerly of course.

5. Theoretically, and as a scientific landsman might suppose,

it is true that now (at midnight) with the S. HE. hurricane Captain

Boon might have wore round and bringing the 8. EH. gale on his

port quarter have dashed past to the Northward of the Cyclone

centre, trusting to bring the wind, as he no doubt would quickly

have done, to E. 8S. F., East, and E. N. E., and N. East, and thus

enabling him to clear the flat by steaming close round the centre on

its N. Western quadrant.

6. But there were many dangers in doing this, such as—

a. Would the vessel steer well enough in a quartering gale with

her encumbered decks and the confused sea of a Cyclone P I should

doubt it of any paddle-wheel steamer, especially of the old build,

unless with the wind nearly right aft, and, in any case, with the

frightful seas of a Cyclone, when so near the centre there is con-

stantly an imminent risk of broaching to.

b. She could not start with the gale at S. Hast on any thing

nearer the wind than a W.S. W. course and I doubt if she would

have done that? With the influences of which we have spoken in

para. 4, a West course made good would be the utmost that any

sailor would calculate upon with the wind at S, Hast at such a time,

1858. | A Twenty-Fifth Memoir on the Law of Storms. 195

d. There was also more danger than an utter want of sea room,

for, short of making aS. W. course at least, which for the first hour

or two was out of the question, a single hour’s run must have carried

the Pluto into say nine or at most ten fathoms water.

7. And in a Cyclone, this shoaling of the water, it should be

held in mind, is a fearful danger. The deep water sea is, we know,

terrific, but in small soundings it becomes exactly a surf from all

quarters, in which nothing can live. I was assured by eye-witnesses

in 1812, when the wreck of H. M.’s Frigate Dover was yet lying on

the beach at Madras, that the surf in the great Cyclone of 1809

broke in nine fathoms water ; and you yourself, Sir, know well what

the sea is at the entrance to Bombay Harbour, if the shore is too

closely borrowed on in the 8S. W. Monsoon. If the Pluto then had

even cleared the shoal off the point, I think that in any thing less

than twelve fathoms, she must have been swamped. It is impossi-

ble for the most sanguine to suppose that she could have passed it

at that distance ; and to Captain Boon’s resolutely steaming out for

the deep water, whether it was done in the contemplation of this

peculiar danger or not, 1 think we owe the preservation of the

vessel. When the track was ascertained, Captain Boon could not

get to the EH. N. EH. to be a little out of the way of the centre, for

his engines were already powerless.

8. The case then altogether appears to be one of those unfor-

tunate ones in which for want of sea-room nothing can be done to

avoid the centre; but the advantage which the law of stormss ill

gives us is that the sailor knows what is coming, and, as Captain

Boon has most creditably done in this case, takes his precautions

accordingly, so far as he can.

I am Sir,

Your’s very obediently.

i: P.

Oaleutta, May 13th, 1854.

PROCEEDINGS

Or THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL, -

For Marcu, 1858.

RAED PLL LDS SLL LISS IID IL DIDI III I IID INI II SII IID DDD

The Monthly General Meeting for March was held on the 3rd

instant.

Hon’ble Sir James Colvile, Kut., President, in the chair.

The proceedings of the last Meeting were read and confirmed.

Presentations were received :—

1. From the Imperial Geological Institute of Austria in Vienna,

a complete series of the publications of the Institute, comprising

twenty volumes beautifully illustrated.

2. From the Ven’ble Archdeacon Pratt, some valuable Astrono-

mical works.

Letters from J.J. Gray, Esq., R. Cust, Esq., and Dr. Campbell,

announcing their wish to withdraw from the Society, were recorded.

Mr. Gray stated, that he had written to announce his intention

in Noy. last. His letter, however, had not been received.

Mons. R. Schlagintweit was balloted for as a corresponding mem-

ber of the Society, and declared elected.

The Council submitted the following report :—

The Council beg to recommend that Bryan Houghton Hodgson,

Esq., and Dr. H. Faleoner be elected Honorary Members of the

Society.

Mr. Hodgson has been for twenty-five years a member of the So-

ciety, and has been a constant contributor to the Transactions and

Journals. His papers published by the Society amount to the large

number of 118, embracing the most varied subjects in Philology,

Archeology, Geography, Ethnology, and Natural History.

He has at the same time contributed largely to other scientific

bodies, and his reputation is widely spread amongst the cultivators

1858. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 197

of learning and science, not only in Indiaand England, but through-

out the civilised world. |

He is a corresponding member of the French Institute, and an

Honorary member of many of the other Literary and Scientific So-

cieties of Europe, and has had the honor of being appointed a Che-

valier of the Legion of Honor of France, in special acknowledgment

of his valuable researches into the Hisioty and Philosophy of Bud-

dhism.

Dr, Falconer has also long been a member of the Society. He was

for many years Superintendent of the Botanic Gardens of Saharun-

pore and Calcutta, and is one of the most distinguished naturalists

of India, conspicuous as a botanist, and still more so for his labours

in paleontology, which have obtained for him the highest honors

the Royal Society of London can bestow. Dr. Falconer was one of

our most active members, and the Society has recently been under

especial obligations to him for arranging and describing their valua-

ble collection of fossil vertebrata, the catalogue of whichis now in

course of publication.

Communications were received—

1. From Mr. Freeling, a note on his collection of coins lost dur-

ing the rebellion.

2. From Mr. Chapman, Under-Secretary to the Government of

India, forwarding the following memo. shewing the measurements

of the native of the Andamans who was recently brought to

Calcutta :—

Name —-John Andaman.

Sea— Male.

Age—About 25 years.

Native Country—Andaman Islands.

Caste—None.

MEASUREMENTS.

Feet. Inches.

1. Total height,.. Pua Cre dua)! oF

. Width of the eens eek nie paisa,’ 4. 1

3. Vertex to the beginning of the hairs of the

forehead ii. sd Be cam ae an cus hace s 4

Wetton nO TOO HOPOIE eel eet cet es 7

CBS

198 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 2.

5. Vertex under the brows, .........sc0.e.ceeceeses 9%

6. Vertex to the mouth, ........... eR ‘ee

7. Vertex under the chin (the fede N23 QR 1 by 4

8. Circumference round the frontal sinusses, ... 1 8&

92: Meetex| to the cclavicule,. 207. 260.. Pio. 28k SCR 24

10. Diameter of the head by the ampldh, | 25, Me oe

11. Antero-posterior diameter of the head,...... 13

12. Interior distance of the, CVeS,...0......0r0+s5 1g

13. Exterior distance of the eyes,.............0000 As

iy “Length of the: mouth yal! 6. CONN AeA 28

PS dicneth. of the edti0.208. 22 BGA a 25

iG. dhenetlotthechand, 106, VR &. SO 65

hy. Shienwth of the: foot, Win. OA Peis 9

18. Breadth of the hand,............... 3

19. Breadth of the foot,.. 3&

20. From the ground to “a middle of the watale 1 43.

21. Diameter by the acromion apophysis,.......... 1 13

22. Length of the arm from the acromion

process,.. Je wees

23. From the snictiil bs the eaobbbinibiphe 2d. a 65

24, Circumference round the calves,...........: 102

25. Circumference round the knee,............... 1 0

26. Distance of the malar bones,.............00+6 5

27. Breadthvet themeset.w.. MOREA BER. 12

(Signed) F. J. Movat,

President, Andaman Committee.

Dr. Thomson gave an account of his visit to the Glaciers of Kin-

chinjunga in Sikkim, in October last.

The thanks of the meeting were accorded to Dr. Thomson for his

interesting account.

The Librarian submitted his usual monthly report.

1858.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 199

LIBRARY.

The Library has received the following accessions during the month of

February, 1858.

Presented.

Naturwissenschaftliche Abhandlungen Gesammelt und Durch Subs-

cription Herausgegeben von Wilhelm Hardinger, Vols. I. to IV. royal

4to. Wien, 1847.—By tur IMPERIAL GEoLoGicaL INSTITUTE OF AUSTRIA

InN VIENNA.

Abhandlungen der K. K. Geologischen Reichsaaustalt, vols. I. to III.

Wien, 1852, royal, 4to.— By THE SAME.

Jahrbuch der Kaiserlich-Ko6niglichen Ditto, vols. I. to III. royal 8vo.

Wien, 1855.—By THE SAME.

Berichte tiber die Mittheilungen von Freunden der Naturwissens-

chaften in Wien, vols. I. to VII. 8vo.—By THE saME.

Selections from the Records of the Madras Government, No. XLIV.

Report of the Railway Department, 1857, 4to.—By THE Mapras Go-

VERNMENT.

Damoiseau’s (M. Le Baron de) Tables de la Lune formées par la Seule

Théoree de l’Attraction, Paris, 1828, folio.—By tor VENERABLE ARCH-

DEACON Pratt.

Delambre, (M.) Burg (M.) Tables du Soleil et de la Lune, Paris, 1806,

4to.—ByY THE SAME.

Bouvard’s (M. A.) Tables de Jupiter, de Saturne et D’Uranus, Paris,

1821, 4to.—By THE SAME.

Lindenaw’s (Bernhard de) Tables Nouvelles De VWénus, Marseilles,

1811, 4to.—By THE SAME.

— Tables of Mercury, 2 copies, Gotha, 1813, folio—By THE

SAME.

Tables of Venus Eisenberg, 1821, folio—By THE samr.

Selections from the Records of the Government of Bengal, No. XX XVII,

2 copies, on Colonization, Commerce, Physical Geography, &c. &c. of the

Himalaya Mountains and Nepal, By Brian Houghton Hodgson, Esq.

B. C. 8.—By tHe GovERNMENT OF BENGAL.

Discours de M Garcin de Tassy, Paris, 1857, pamphlet.—BY THE

AUTHOR.

Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesellschaft, Band XI.

Heft 4. Lvepzig, 1857.—By tHe German Oripnrau Society.

Journal of the Statistical Society of London, vol. XX. Part IV. Decem-

ber, 1857.—By THE Society.

List of Fellows of Ditto.—By THe samr.

General Report of the Director of Public Instruction in Lower Pro-

vinces for 1850-57.—By THE Drrecron.

Notices of the Meeting of the Members of the Royal Institute of

Great Britain, pamphlet, Part VIL—By ran Lystirution.

200 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 2.

The Vividharta Sungraha, No. 45.—By Banoo Rasenpraua’L Mitra.

A (Map) Plan of the country bordering the Great Trunk Road between

Benares and Delhi.—By Masor H. L. THuinuier.

The Oriental Baptist for February, 1858.—By tue Epiror.

The Christian Spectator for December, 1857.—By tHe Epitor.

The Calcutta Christian Observer for Feb. 1858.—By THE Eprrors.

The Indian Annals of Medical Science for January, 1858.—By THE

EDIToR.

The Madras Journal, No. 43.—By tur Epiror.

Exchanged.

The Atheneum for November, 1857.

Annalen der Chemie und Pharmacie, October, 1857, Band LIV.

Heft. I.

Purchased.

Literary Gazette, Nos. 2131 to 2134.

Journal des Savants, October, 1857.

Comptes Rendus, Nos. 18 to 22, 19th October to 30th November, 1857.

Revue des Deux Mondes, 15th November and lst December, 1857.

et Magasin De Zoology, No. 10.

The Annals and Magazine of Natural History, No. 120.

Annales des Sciences Naturelles, Tome VII. No. 2

The Useful Plants of India, Part I, Trevandrum, 1956, aneuten

American Journal of Science and Art for November, 1857, No. 72.

Livingstone’s Mission to Africa, 8vo.

British Workman, Nos. 34, 35 and 36.

As. Soc. Rooms, Gourbas ByYsack,.

The 5th March, 1858. Librarian and Asst. Secy.

JOURNAL

OF THE

mT ATTC SOCIETY.

PRP IISA NINE PRPS NININININENIN INS RINI SLI I INL LI INT IIS IND IIIS RI OS I

No. II. 1858.

PLDI IV

PPDLDLSLIS

The Great Indian Arc of Meridian, and the Figure of the Earth.—

By the Venerable Archdeacon Prarr, M. A.

To the Editor of the Asiatie Journal.

Srr,—It is not many days since I had the opportunity of seeing

for the first time the Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society for

January 9, 1857, which contain a paper with the following title,

* An Examination of the Figure of the Indian Meridian as deduced by

Archdeacon Pratt from the two Northern Indian Arcs; with a

Proposition for testing that form by Astronomical Observations. By

Lieut. J. F. Tennant, Bengal Engineers, F. R. A. 8. and First

Assistant in the G. T. Survey of India:” and also a continuation

of that paper read before the Astronomical Society in June of last

year by the same author. The calculation here referred to by Mr.

Tennant was made by me while at the Cape of Good Hope in 1854,

and is published in the Philosophical Transactions of the Royal

Society for the following year. As the calculations and results of

that paper have in some respects not been understood by Mr.

Tennant, and as the subject is one which appertains to this country,

and interests some of your readers, 1 hope you may not find it

inconvenient to insert this letter in your Journal.

Preliminary Remarks on the Figure of the Earth.

2.—It will be necessary to preface what I have to say with a few

| remarks regarding the Figure of the Harth. After it was known

No. XCIV.—New Serizs, Vou, XX VII. SF ij

202 The Great Indian Are of Meridian, [ No. 3.

that the earth is of a globular form, Newton was the first who

demonstrated that it is not a perfect sphere. From theoretical

considerations, and also from the discovery that a pendulum moves

slower at the equator than in higher latitudes, he arrived at the

conclusion that its form is that of an oblate spheroid. Modern

science has confirmed this, and in several ways determined the

depression of the pole to a considerable degree of minuteness; and

this is looked upon as well established, because the amount of

depression, though determined in ways quite independent of each

other, is very nearly the same in all. (1). Upon the hypothesis

that the earth was once fluid, and by assuming a (very probable)

law of density of its mass, the depression has been found to be

1-300th part of the radius at the equator.. (2). By pendulum-

experiments made inmany parts of the earth, the determination is

1-288th part. (8.) From the effect of the protuberant parts of

the earth’s mass on the motion of the Moon in latitude and longi-

tude, Laplace made the depression very slightly less than 1-300th.

(4.) By the measurement of ares of the meridian in different parts

of the world and the latitudes of their extremities, and comparing

ares in high latitudes with arcs in low latitudes (which has always

been considered necessary to eliminate certain errors of observation),

the depression has been found to be slightly less than 1-300th of

the equatorial radius. These are so nearly alike that the question

has been considered settled, that the earth’s figure is an oblate ©

spheroid, and that its ellipticity is 1-300th. To be sure we see

mountains and valleys, and table-lands and oceans, and every kind

of surface. But these have been compared for insignificance to

the unevennesses on the coat of an orange, and are indeed still

more trifling in comparison.

3.—But both Physieal and Practical Geology have brought new

ideas to light. Though the earth no doubt was onee fluid, it must

be countless ages since it was so. The erust, if the mass be not

solid to the centre, is of great thickness, as the only real caleu-

lations on the subject-—those by Mr. Hopkins of Cambridge—show.

It is discovered that the earth does not, though solid, preserve an in-

variable form. Lt is a well established fact that in some parts its

surface is at present undergoing slow depression, while other parts

1858. ] and the Figure of the Harth. 208

are rising, and that this alternate action has been going on for ages.

The huge mass appears like a gigantic monster heaving its ribs and

then drawing them in again, but with a deliberation which can be

measured only by something like astronomical or rather geological

periods, and through spaces, though minute, yet sufficiently sensible

to destroy the symmetry of its form.

4.—It is therefore perfectly gratuitous to assume as has generally

been done, that the form of the earth is now an exact spheroid.

And when we look back to the methods which have been used with

such success to determine the degree of oblateness, it will be

observed that they all of them regard the earth as a whole, and

take no account of its separate parts. Indeed, as I have already

intimated, it has long been an acknowledged fact, that the 4th

method fails when arcs near each other, and therefore appertaining

to any one portion of the earth’s surface alone, are compared ; and,

I believe myself, chiefly for this reason, that the earth’s form is not

an exact spheroid. The spheroid (of depression 1-300th) which

has been determined by these four methods is, therefore, the average

spheroid ; or the spheroid which more nearly represents the earth’s

irregular form than any other spheroid; some parts being slightly

above it, and some slightly below it, owing to the irregularities

which have arisen since the earth ceased to be a fluid mass. We

ean no longer assume that the arcs of meridian are all equal ellipses,

or are ellipses at all, or that the ares of longitude are circular.

Remarks on Mr. Tennant’s Papers.

5.—To ascertain the actual form of the different parts of the

surface, each part must undergo a separate examination; as the

form, though nearly spheroidal, is not exactly so and follows no

known law. When we wish to measure the curvature of a curve

not differing much from a circle, it is convenient to compare it with

the ellipse which most nearly approaches it in form, as the ellipse

is the next simplest curve to the circle. Any arc of meridian drawn

upon the surface of the earth departs but little from a circle, and

may therefore be thus compared. In this comparison, for conve-

nience’ sake, the ellipse is so chosen as to have its centre in the

centre of the earth and one of its axes coincident with the earth’s

2D 2

204: The Great Indian Are of Meridian, [ No. 3.

axis. he sole quantities, therefore, to be determined are the

semi-major axis, and the ellipticity or compression. In the Problem

of the Figure of the Earth, the ellipse is a convenient curve of

comparison for this further reason, that it was the ewact form of

each meridian when the earth was fluid, or sufficiently fluid to

control the external figure.

One of the results of my paper in the Philosophical Transactions

of 1855 is the comparison of the curvature of the great are in

India, 800 miles long, lying between Kaliana (latitude 29° 30’ 48”)

and Damargida (latitude 18° 3’ 15"); and I find that it coincides

most nearly with an ellipse of which the compression is 1-426th ;

and not 1-800th, the compression of the average meridian—that is,

if no cause can be discovered counteracting the attraction of the

Himalaya mountains.

6.—Mr. Tennant’s object, as announced in the heading of his

first paper,* is to fesé this result. But how does he test it? He

there proceeds, not to examine my arc, and test it by some other

* IT am indebted to Mr. Tennant for having detected a numerical error in p. 98

of my paper.

For a = —0.0059737—0.0051426 wu -+- 0.0016881 v.

Read a = —00019203 + 0.0059576 u —0.0014564 v. This will change the

value of a (1 + a) in the next line but one.

In the last page I have also detected an error. The formula for the height of

the middle point of a small elliptic arc above its chord is correct as there given.

But I should not have left it in terms of A, the amplitude, but of s, the length of

the arc; as A is not the same, whereas s is, in the three cases to which the formula

is applied. This change will make the height above the chord

= — {1 + « e + cos 2n) == 20 (1 +1.512 ¢) miles, the same as

before excepting the sign of e.

The result of this is, that my arc is flatter by 157 feet in the sagitta and the

arc when mountain attraction is neglected is more curved by 281 feet, than the

mean curvature.

These corrections have no effect upon the results of my paper. It is possible

that there may be other numerical errors, for when the paper was written I was

away from all means of employing a computer, as is usual in such cases, to

verify the long numerical calculations, not one-tenth of which appears in what is

printed. I feel convinced, however, that there is no material error: for I used

every precaution I could, and applied every test. ‘The errors mentioned above

1858. | and the Figure of the Earth. 205

method; but to compare it with other arcs, and to see whether they

are curved so as to belong to one and the same spheroid with mine.

One arc he compares it with, runs westward from Kulianpur to

Kurachi; the other is a prolongation of the great are southward

from Damargida to Punne (latitude 8° 932”). The only question,

therefore, which he can solve is, whether his arcs and mine belong

or not to one spheroid; not, whether my calculation is right or not.

In fact, his process goes wholly upon the gratuitous hypothesis,

that all ares wherever measured belong to one and the same spheroid ;

that is, that every meridian is an ellipse, and all meridians the same

eilipse, and that every are of longitude is circular. It ig a notice-

able coincidence, and by no means unfavorable to my calculation,

that he finds that the curvature of the are from Damargida to

Punnee (the prolongation of my arc) coincides more nearly with

my ellipse than with the average one. Further on, in his first paper,

Mr, Tennant applies a third test, viz. the comparison of the com-

puted and observed azimuth of Kalianpur and Kurachi. But the

same objection applies to this also. In fact Mr. Tennant’s calcu-

lations do not affect my arc; and simply because he has not

examined that are, nor gone through my calculations.

7. There are other indications that Mr. Tennant has mistaken

the subject. For example (art. 13) “the attraction is so enormous,

if Mr. Pratt’s values hold good, near the mountains .......... But

I particularly specify, and the whole line of reasoning shows, that

my calculation does not apply to such places (see p. 66, note, of my

paper): and in the continuation of the note in the next three pages

I point out a method for such” places in and near the mountains:

so that the wish expressed by Mr. Tennant in par. 17 was met in

occur at the close, and not in any important place, at least important for my

results, but in a kind of corollary.

With reference to paragraph 3 of Mr. Tennant’s second paper, I would here

observe, that, in the application of the above formula, the three arcs are brought

to chords in the same line and the sagittze compared, merely as a piece of geometry,

without any reference to the manner in which they lie and cut each other in the

Problem of the Figure of the Earth. The object is simply to compare the degrees

of bending between the two extremities, in the three cases, as indeed I state in the

paper; and the result is given above.

206 The Great Indian Arc of Meridian, [No. 3

the paper before hin—“ If an estimate of the attraction at Benog

[in the mountains] could be made ...... ... ” Then io Mr. Tennant’s

second paper there are other expressions which show the same bias.

He says “He [Mr. Pratt] has failed in satisfying the geodesical

data of the great Longitudinal Series.” But I did not make the

attempt. Mr. Tennant must mean that on applying my results to

the great longitudinal series, he failed to show that they tally, on

the supposition that the earth’s figure is a perfect spheroid. This

is what I should have expected: and quite confirms my general

view. He says further on, “It [the ellipticity I deduce for the great

are of 800 miles long] is useless for geodesical purposes.” Of

course it is, if the geodesical operations are carried on with an

assumed, and most probably wrong, ellipticity. If the mean

ellipticity be not the right one, then not ¢hat ellipticity, but some

other, ought to be used in computing the latitudes of places

in the neighbourhood of the arc, otherwise the geodesical oper-

ations of the Great Survey will be “useless”? for the purpose of

attaining to that accuracy which the survey is expected to attain.

I need not quote other passages. I have read through both Mr.

Tennant’s papers and his interesting calculations with great care.

They cannot disprove the results of my paper for the reason I have

mentioned. ‘The only way will be to point out where my calcu-

lations are wrong, or to show that some other cause is in operation

which nullifies the mountain attraction. One other expression only

I will notice, as it convinces me, that Mr. Tennant will never clear

up the discrepancies while he takes his present view. He speaks of

my “hypothetical attractions.”’ Now the only hypotheses my cal-

culation of the attraction goes upon are, (1) that the Himalaya

Mountains exist, and (2) that each particle of them attracts accord-

ing to the law of universal gravitation. The amount of this attrac-

tion is a matter of calculation; and to determine this was the

primary object of my paper in the Philosophical Transactions. The

calculation is there printed, and has been before the public for three

years. It is impossible to ignore either the existence or the attrac-

tion of this enormous mass. It is possible to show that some other

cause exists, to counteract this disturbing cause. It 1s also possible

to show that the amount I have deduced is wrong; because I may

1858. | and the Figure of the Earth. 207

have made mistakes in the arithmetic, or the data regarding the

heights of the different parts of the mass may be wrong. But

there is the calculation, open to inspection, examination, and correc-

tion. I can only say, that when I arrived at my result (in 1854)

I was very much disappointed that it did not tally with the Great

Survey: and I tried every method (see articles 44 to 46 of my

paper) to make it do so: but could not succeed. And even now,

if no counteracting cause can be discovered to nullify the effect of

attraction, I should be very glad, for the sake of saving trouble to

the Survey operations, if the amount I arrive at could be shown to

be wrong. But it must be, not by the application of tests based

upon gratuitous assumptions, nor by any ulterior difficulties which

the large amount of attraction may appear to lead to; but by an

examination of the calculation itself, showing that the data of

heights are so much out, or the arithmetical operations so far

erroneous, as materially to affect the result.

8. One of Mr. Tennant’s calculations in his second paper serves

to show the necessity of calculating and allowing for mountain

attraction. The diagram in the next page will illustrate this.

A B Cis the actual are of the meridian running through the three

stations Kuliana, Kuhanpur, and Damargida. da, Bb, Ce are the

normals to this arc at those three places, and therefore the direc-

tions in which the plumb-line would hang were there no disturbing

cause. A disturbing cause exists in the enormous mass H of the

Himalayan mountains which attracts the bob of the plumb-line so

as to make it hang in the lines a’A, 6’B, eC making the angles of

deflexion aAa’, 6Bb’, cCc’. These angles are smaller the further re-

moved the station is from H. ‘The spirit-level, the levelling of the

astronomical instruments—every thing regulated by gravity —is

affected by this disturbing cause. And the cause, owing to the

enormous mass of attracting matter, has its influence, unlike other

local and minor disturbing causes, along the whole line of the are

though in a diminishing degree. ‘This the calculation shows.

If we were to proceed from C and move northwards, laying down

a horizontal line by means of a spirit-level (as in laying down a

base-line), we should find ourselves gradually rising above the arc

CBA; we should be obliged to stilt up the spirit-level, till over B

208 The Great Indian Are of Meridian, [ No. 3.

puabemee eile

ate =

Remarks.

ABC is the actual are of

the meridian.

A is Kuliana in lat. 29°

30’ 48”.

B is Kulianpur in lat. 24°

oa.

Cis Damargida in lat. 18°

3 15”,

HZ is the mass of the Him-

alayas. :

Aa, Bb, Ce are normals to

the are ABC, or the lines in

which the plumb-line would

hang if the Himalayas did

not attract.

Aa, Bb’, Cc’ are the actual

plumb-lines, inclined to the

above, owing to attraction.

In my paper in the Philo-

sophical Transactions of 1855,

the following are the results

of attraction

1 aA = 27" 853, 26 B0=

11”.968 ZcCc'=6".909.

Cnm is the eurve drawn

from Damargida which cuts

all the actual plumb-lines at

the stations on the are at

right angles.

1858. ] and the Figure of the Earth. 209

it had attained the height Bn = 99 feet, and over A the height

Am = 271 feet—these being the heights found by Mr. Tennant on

using my formula of attraction. Cnm (and not CBA) is the curve

along which the spirit-level would move, as this is the curve which

cuts all the plumb-lines at right angles. In ordinary cases the

curve which cuts the plumb-lines at all stationson the meridian at

right angles is the curve of the arc. This would be the case in this

instance also, were it not for H. If H did not exist, Cum would

coincide with CBA. Now if mountain-attraction is not taken

account of, it is the same as supposing that H does not exist: in

which case while the calculation of the Great Survey is being made

in reality (because H does exist) for Cam, the calculators imagine

they are making it for CBA. They come to some station, B sup-

pose, on the are itself, having well calculated the distance from C ;

they apply the spirit-level, find that Bd’ is the vertical, and think

that CB is the are they have calculated in fathoms, whereas it is

On’, that are along the upper curve which comes to the same plumb-

line. ‘This arc is shorter than CB by nn’; and therefore by that

quantity is B placed in the map too much north, in consequence of

neglecting mountain-attraction. And this is an error wholly inde-

pendent of the particular curvature of the meridian and therefore

it affords an additional argument to show the necessity of calculat-

ing and allowing for deflexion.

9. Mr. Tennant’s next calculation shows that the effect of even

much smaller masses than the Himalayas may be of importance

and may disturb the local form of the curve cutting the plumb-lines

at right angles, which, as I have said, is the curve to which the

Great Survey calculations refer. The derangements of the curve

may be only local in this case; but if any one or more of the

stations used for finding the astronomical amplitude be situated in

these localities, the effect may be of serious importance. The effect

of these comparatively small masses 1 have also shown in a paper

on the English Are printed in the Philosophical Transactions for

1856. ‘This only aggravates the uncertainty caused by attraction,

and increases the doubtfulness of results arrived at without a

complete knowledge of the disturbing causes—at least as far as

those results are supposed to have an extreme accuracy.

)

“az 8

210 The Great Indian Are of Meridian, [No. 3.

On the present position of the question of Himalayan Mountain-

Attraction, as affecting the Great Trigonometrical Survey.

10. I will conclude this letter with some remarks on this subject.

The average form of the earth has been already determined with

so much precision, that the Great Trigonometrical Survey cannot be

expected to improve it. The only new information it can commu-

nicate on this subject is, the extent to which the different parts of

the Indian continent depart from this average spheroid. This is a

matter of no peculiar interest in itself. Unless as a record for

comparison in future ages it might be found of use; just as, at

present, it would be a matter of interest to know the exact changes

of level the surface has gone through in ages past, as these might

serve to verify and to fix the chronology of those elevations and

sub-mergings of extensive portions of the surface, the evidences of

which geologists see in the fossil remains. This, however, is labour-

ing for generations who may never exist.

The real importance of knowing the exact form of Indian arcs is

seen in the effect which an erroneous determination of the curv-

ature may have upon that accuracy in the Mapping of the Country

which the Great Survey is supposed to ensure.

11. In calculating this curvature, it is absolutely necessary to

determine and allow for the effect of mountain-attraction upon the

plumb-line in all places where the latitude is observed astronomi-

cally. Without this, the curvature cannot be ascertained. I pro-

pose now to show this.

If the determinations in the Great Trigonometrical Survey are

correct, they must satisfy this test, that the computed amplitude

of every are must be precisely equal to the observed amplitude.

Colonel Everest’s work published in 1847 shows that this test is

not satisfied, for the great arc, Kaliana (29° 30’ 48”) to Kalian-

pur (24° 7° 11”). His calculations show a discrepancy of 57.236

in the upper portion. In this comparison there are Two sources

of error which it is necessary to examine—one, in the com-

putation of the amplitude; the other, in the astronomical odserva-

tion of the amplitude. For computing the amplitude of an elliptic

arc, it is necessary to know (1) the length of the are, (2) the lati-

1858. | and the Bigure of the Earth. 2UE

tude of the middle point of the are, and (8) the dimensions of the

ellipse of which it is part. The first of these is determined with

great accuracy by the survey, and is altogether unaffected by local .

or mountain-attraction (see pp. 54, 55 of my paper).* The second,

which is not required to any great nicety, is readily found. The

third is altogether asswmed—and here is the first source of error.

It has been assumed in the Great Trigonometrical Survey that the

great are belongs to an ellipse of which the curvature is that of

the average spheroid of the earth. This is not only very far from

being certain, but is most probably not the case, as I have shown

in my preliminary remarks. Then in the determination of the

ainplitude by observation, all the elaborate instrumental observa-

tions and calculations of the latitudes of the three stations at the

extremities and the middle of the arc in question (viz. at Kuliana,

Damargida, and Kulianpur near the middle) described by Colonel

Everest in his volume are thoroughly to be depended upon. But

the instruments are fixed by the plumb-line; and therefore any

error in this line caused by local or mountain-attraction vitiates the

results. Here, then, is the second source of error. Were there

only one source of error, the error might be determined by compar-

ing the computed and observed amplitudes. But as this gives

only one equation of condition and there are ¢wo sources of error—

and this must be the case for each are, so that no comparison of

ares will help us—we must determine one, at least, of the errors

* This may appear to be at variance with paragraph 8 above. But the cases

are different. ‘The fact is, that the correction there pointed out is after all practi-

cally made during the process of the survey; and in this way. Since B cannot

be seen from C, being more than 400 miles off, intermediate stations are chosen

for making observations and connecting B and C by a chain of triangles; and

these intermediate stations are down upon the are CB, and not on the are Cn.

Of course if the spirit-level were actually used all along, and the stilting process,

which would then be necessary, were carried on, this would not be the case. But

this course is xo¢ adopted in the survey ; but, to make all the intermediate observa-

_tions, they come down to the arc CB, and begin their curve like Cn, as it were,

Over again at each station; so that the height is not allowed to accumulate to Bn,

and therefore the projected part of this line is not a correction which must be

applied to the length of the arc, as this correction is practically made by the

surveyors piece-meal, by making their observations from CB and not from Cn, as

they do not adopt stilts,

212 The Great Indian Arc of Meridian, [ No. 3.

in some other manner, and then determine the other by the com-

parison of the amplitudes. I can conceive of no means of finding

-the curvature of the are by any independent method: but the

other error, the effect of attraction, can be determined by direct

calculation, though at first sight a hopeless and in the end a very

laborious operation in the case of such a huge and irregular mass

as the Himalaya mountains, and not practicable without some such

expedient as that which I have called the “Law of Dissection” in

the paper in the Philosophical Transactions.

12. The main results of the calculation of attraction in that

paper are as follows :-—

Deflexion of plumb-line in meridian at Kaliana = 27".853.

Ditto at Kalianpur = 11.968.

Ditto at Damargida = 6”.909.

By means of the property of a curve I find the law of meridional

_deflexion for all stations on this double are (but for no other places)

to be

114.712

L—1 + 3.520

Zand LZ being the latitude, in degrees and parts of a degree, of

the proposed station and of Kaliana, the north extremity of the

are. It is the application of these corrections to the astronomical

Meridional Deflexion =

observations, and then the comparison of this corrected astronomical

amplitude with the computed amplitude (as described towards the

close of para. 11) which brings out the corrected ellipticity 74, for

this arc, instead of =34.<-

13. Mr. Airy in a paper in the Philosophical Transactions for

1855, (p. 101,) states that he was at first very much surprised at the

large amount of the deflexion thus discovered. And he goes on to

suggest aremedy. But he does not call in question the correctness

of my result. He throws out the idea, that there is another cause

in operation which counteracts the effect of tle attraction; viz. a

deficiency of attracting matter immediately beneath the mountain

mass. ‘Three objections were started to this hypothesis in the

postscript to my second paper (on the English Arc), p. 51 of the

Transactions for 1856. They are more fully discussed in the Philo-

sophical Magazine for November 1855. No answer has been given

1858. | and the Figure of the Earth. 213

to these objections; and several competent judges have pronounced

the hypothesis to be untenable: I therefore regard it as abandoned.

It is in this direction, however, I fully believe, that a counteract-

ing cause is to be found, if there be any, to modify the large disturb-

ing effect of the Himalaya Mountains. I have recently been con-

sidering this subject again, and purpose communicating a paper to

the Royal Society on the subject shortly, if my hopes are verified

by further examination. This cannot, however, diminish the import-

ance of ascertaining the true amount of deflexion from mountain-

attraction, as every disturbing cause should be fully examined

and estimated.

14, The present position of the problem of Himalayan attrac-

tion is this. The data which I assume in the six tables in pages 78

to 83 of the Philosophical Transactions for 1855 should be examined,

to see whether the values of # are tolerably correct representatives

of the average heights of the masses standing on the several “ com-

partments” to which they appertain. This the gentlemen of the

survey can best do. I have written to Colonel Waugh, the Surveyor

General, (who first called my attention to this subject) for corrections

of these heights ; but, having received no corrections, I conclude the

data are rightly assumed.

I am, your obedient servant,

Calcutta, July 6th, 1858. J. H. Prart,

Bhaskards knowledge of the Differential Caleulus.— By Baru Duva

Suastri, Professor of Mathematics and Astronomy in the Govern-

ment Sanskrit College, Benares.

To the Hditor of the Asiatic Society’s Journal.

Sir,—It appears to be generally believed that the principle of

the Differential Calculus was unknown to the ancient Hindu

mathematicians. Allow me to correct this impression by the fol-

lowing statement regarding what Bhaskarachaérya has written on

the subject.

214 Bhiskard’s knowledge of the Differential Calculus. [No. 3.

Bhaskaracharya says that “the difference between the longitudes

of a planet found at any time on a certain day and at the same

time on the following day is called its rough motion during that

interval of time; and that its Ztkdlika motion is its exact motion.’

The Zatkélika or instantaneous motion of a planet is the motion

which it would have in a day, had its velocity at any given instant

of time remained uniform. ‘This is clear from the meaning of the

term Zétkalika and it is plain enough to those who are acquainted

with the principles of the Differential Calculus that this Zatkalika

motion can be no other than the differential of the longitude of a

planet. This Zutkdlika motion is determined by Bhaskaracharya

in the following manner.

“ Suppose, v, « == the mean longitudes of a planet on two succes-

sive days ;

y, y’ = the mean anomalies ;

wu, w =the true longitudes and

a—=eccentricity or the sine of the greatest equa-

tion of the orbit.

Then, #’—a — the mean motion of the planet, y’—y = the motion

of the mean anomaly and w’—w =the true motion of the planet.”

Now according to Bhaskardécharya, the equation of the orbit on the

a. sin ¥

first day = , and

Rad

asin 7

that on the next day = ;

Rad

a. sin y

i a See Sete AS awe bo G2).

Rad

a. Sin ¥

and w= a + :

Rad

a@ (sin y’ — sin ¥)

Ww —u=ae—a“#rt ——— ...... (2).

Rad

Now, in order to know the instantaneous value of w/—w, it is

necessary first to know the instantaneous value of the Bhogya-

khanda or the difference between two suceessive sines given In

Lables of sines. Thus, suppose the sines of the ares 0, d, 24, 34,

&c. are given in the Jables of sines, then

1858.| Bhdaskard’s knowledge of the Differential Calculus. 215

sin A—sin 0, sin 24—sin 4, sin 34—sin 24, &c. are the Bhogya-

khandas.

“These are not equal to each other but gradually decrease, and

consequently while the increase of the are is uniform, the increment

of the sine varies’’— on account of the deflection of the are. Hence

the difference between any two successive sines is not the Tétkdlika

Bhogya-khanda ; but if the arc instead of being deflected be increased

in the direction of the tangent then the increase which would take

place in the sine is the Tuthalika Bhogya-khanda i. e. the instan-

taneous motion of the sine. ss

Thus, in the accompanying a

diagram, suppose the are Df

= A, then, sin Af—sin AD=

tg — DE= itm, the Bhogya-

khanda of the sine DH; but

this is not the Tatkdiika Bho-

gya-khanda of that sine. If the

are AD instead of being de-

flected towards f, be increased

in the direction of the tangent,

so that DF — Df=— A; then

FG — DE= Fn, which would be the Téthkdlika Bhogya-khanda of

the sine DH i.e. the instantaneous motion of that sine.”

Bhaskardchaérya has determined that “the Téthkalika Bhogya-

khanda varies as the cosine of are, i. e. when arc=0, its cosine

equals the radius, and 4 = the Téthalika Bhogya-khanda. And, as

the are increases, the cosine and the Bhogya-khanda decrease. Hence,

if y be any given are, the Zutkdlika Bhogya khanda answering to

it will be found by the following proportion.

As, R (or the cosine of an arc = 0.)

: The TWéthélika Bhogya-khanda (= A.)

Gc gG 1 A

: Cosine y.

: Tithélika Bhogya-khanda of sin y.

A. Cos y.

'. Litkdlika Bhogya-khanda = ————.”

The reason of the above proportion can be easily understood

from the two similar triangles DCH and D Fn in the above diagram,

216 Bhdskard’ s knowledge of the Differential Calculus. No.3.

“ After having thus determined the Zéthdlika Bhogya-khdnda, the

instantaneous value of sin y’—sin y is found by the following pro-

portion.

A. cos y cos y X (y¥ — y)

—_— >; : y! ao __—_—

As A:

(= the instantaneous

value of sin y’ —sin y.)

By substituting the instantaneous value of sin y’—sin y in the

equation (2), the instantaneous value of w’ —w, the true motion of

the planet will be found : that is,

a cosy yi —y

R i,

This is the instantaneous motion of the planet.”’

(3)

BS aS es

This is the way in which Bhaskardcharya determined the instan-

taneous motion of the sun and the moon.

Equation (8) is just the differential of equation (1). As,

a. Sin y

dy) =d @ + ——_);

a@ cosy

or du==d «+ —. . dy ;

which is similar to equation (3).

Now, the term Zétkdlika applied by Bhaskaracharya to the velo-

city ofa planet, and his method of determining it, correspond exactly

to the differential of the longitude of a planet and the way for

finding it. Hence it is plain that Bhaskaracharya was fully acquaint-

ed with the principle of the Differential Calculus. The subject,

however, was only incidentally and briefly treated of by him; and

his followers, not comprehending it fully, have hitherto neglected

it entirely.

J have the honor to be,

Your obedient servant,

Baru Deva SHASTRI,

4th May, 1858.

1858. ] Of two Hidicts bestowing Land. 217

Of two Kdicis bestowing Land, recorded on plates of copper.—By

Firz-Epwarp Hau, M. A.

The inscriptions here edited in the original Sanskrit, with trans-

lations and comments, add little te our previous knowledge of In-

dian history. ‘The first, however, ascertains a regnal year of one of

the kings of Kanoj; and it is now settled, beyond reasonable doubt,

that Madanapala Deva was administering this principality in A. D.

1097. The patent which supplies this date is the oldest monument

of the kind, emanating from the dynasty of its donor, that has yet

been discovered.

The names of the sovereigns in question, and one or more of the

years during which the last four of them are known to have borne

rule, shall, first of all, be enumerated, on the authority of grants

similar to those which are to follow.

1. Yas‘ovigraha.*

2. Mahichandra.

* Colebrooke calls this prince, S’ripala; but on insufficient authority. Sce

Miscell. Essays, Vol. IT., pp. 286 and 294.

A crude note on this point will be found in this Journal, for 1841, p. 98. Nei-

ther had Dr. Mill nor had any one else pretended—unless it was Colebrooke, and

he only by his silence—the identity, other than ordinal, of S’ripala and Yas’ovi-

graha.

The writer of the note referred to was, further, unaware of Capt. Fell’s re-

marks on Colebrooke, and likewise of Colebrooke’s acknowledgment that he had

confounded Vijayachandra with Jayachandra. Mr. Torrens also mistakes in name

ing the work, and the volume of it, from which he gives an extract.

In the Khaira inscription, which has been partially deciphered, first by Cole-

brooke, and afterwards by Mr. James Prinsep, occurs the name of King Yas’o-

pala, See Miscell. Essays, Vol. II., pp. 277 and 278 ; and this Journal for 1836,

p- 731. Capt. Fell asks: ‘‘ Is he the same with Yas’ovigraha?’ As. Res., Vol.

XV., p. 453. To Prof, Wilson it “ seems not improbable” that he was. Ibid.,

Vol. XV., p. 462. Dr. Mill thinks that the Vigraha of the Shekhavati inscription

is, very likely, the Yas’ovigraha of the Kanoj dynasty. Journal of the As. Soc.

of Bengal, for 1835, pp. 369 and 392. These opinions, though they have not been

proved erroneous, still await substantiation.

Another Vigraha has come to light since Dr. Mill wrote as above cited. His

time, which was not long prior to 1042, might assist an hypothesis that he was

218 Of two Edicts bestowing Land. [No. 3

Chandra Deva.* A. D.

Madanapala Deva. 1097.+

Govindachandra Deva. 1120 and 1125.§ A. D.

Vijayachandra Deva. 1163.||

Jayachandra Deva. 1177, 1179,4 and 1186. *

With Jayachandra, who died about 1193, his dynasty closes; at

least so far as concerns Kanoj. But this prince, it should appear,

TOMB ow

left an heir, whose son, S‘ivaji, only seventeen years after the death

of his grandsire, attracts attention as the first Raja of Jodhpur.t

The father of S’ivaji, the only link required to connect him with

Jayachandra, was S’wetaraya ; if dependence may be placed on the

pedigreet of the chiefs of Marwad, here appended.

one with Yas’ovigraha. But it appears asif he died childless; and mention is

wanting that he adopted an heir. Journal of the As. Soc. of Bengal, for 1841,

pp. 668 seq.

If the Vigraha of the inscriptions at Old Delhi is the same with the Visala

whom they record, his era was as late as 1163; and he was contemporary with

Vijayachandra of Kanoj.

* Prof. Wilson, on the latest occasion of his recapitulating the rulers of the

family in discussion, inadvertently reduces them from seven to six, besides con-

verting Mahichandra into Mahipala. The individual omitted is Chandra Deva, the

first person in his line, of any recognised importance. It was he that conquered

Kanoj; and we have yet to learn that his ancestors, Yas’ovigraha and Mahichan-

dra, were persons of regal rank. See Ariana Antiqua, p. 435.

t+ See the first of the ensuing inscriptions.

~ See the As, Res., Vol. XV., p. 447.

§ See the latter of the inscriptions in this paper.

|| See Colebrooke’s Miscell. Essays, Vol. II., p. 286.

The Tarachandi inscription, which is dated in the Samvat year corresponding to

A. D. 1172, refers to Vijayachandra by name and title. It is not clear, however,

from this memorial, whether he, or his son, was reigning at that time. Most pro-

bably it was the son: and it is positive that it was he, if we may credit the Mar-

wad chronicles; as they place the death ef Vijayachandra in 1168. See Cole-

brooke’s Miscell, Essays, Vol. II., pp. 289, 295, and 296. Also Journal of the

As. Soc. of Bengal, for 1834, pp. 341 and 342.

4] For the first two dates see the As. Res., Vol. XV., pp. 446, 447, 450 and

460.

* See Journal of the As. Soc. of Bengal, for 1841, pp. 98, 100 and 103.

¢ In A. D, 1210. Useful Tables, Part the Second, p. 111; after Col. Tod.

t In eleven Sanskrit couplets ; for a copy of which, as of his own composing ,

1858. | Of two EHdiets bestowing Land. 219

S’weta-raya.

1. S/ivaji* Rava, or S‘ivaji R.; father of

2. A’sthana Rava, father of

3. Dhiddaji, father of

4. Raya-pala, father of

5. Jalana,f father of

6. Tidoji.

7. Chhadoji Rava,t father of

8. Salashana, or Salakshana ; father of

9: Viramji, or Viraji; father of

10. Chiidoji.

11. Rida Malla,§ father of

12. Jodoji,|| or Yoddhaji; father of

13. Stijoji Rava, father of

14. Vaghoji,{] or Vyaghraji.

15. Gangoji Rava, or Gangeya R.; father of

16. Mala Deva.*

I am indebted to a Brahman who gave himself out to be the family-priest of the

present Raja of Jodhpur. This man I saw at Ajmere, about a year ago. The

verses, at their conclusion, claim, for their author, one Dayarama.

* Described as Aacaga sta: | If S’ivaji was grandson of Vijayachandra,

and son of S’wetaraya, the word sula must be understood as implying paternity.

8’weta-raya little resembles a gentile appellative.

S‘ivaji is the reading of the original. J have annexed the more classical form ;

and so of many of the names in this catalogue. Relationship, where intimated in

the Sanskrit, is also specified in the English,

+ Mr. Prinsep interposes ‘*‘ Kanhul’’ between Rayapala and Jalana.

~ ‘* Chado”’ comes first, according to Mr. Prinsep; and then ‘‘ Thedo.’’ The

Original might be taken as designing these two names for one and the same person :

AISI AAGAl HA: RISACIAI_A! |

§ The same sort of doubt as that expressed in the last note, here offers, The

Sanskrit is :

FSI TATA Gla Cisaeia wy |

|| The founder of Jodhpur: staquaaTca: | The Baghela-vans’a-charita

has Yodhapura.

4] This name is omitted by Mr. Prinsep.

* Manavati,—daughter of Malla-raya, son of M4la Deva,—married Virabha-

dra, prince royal of Boghelkhand, in the Samvat year 1616, or A. D. 1559. See

2@2

220

17.

rS,

19.

20.

21.

22.

25.

24.

25.

26.

Of two Edicts bestowing Land. [ No. 3,

Udai Sinha; or Udaya S.; father of

S’ira Sinha, father of

Gaja Sinha, father of

Jaswanta, or Yas‘aswat, father of

Ajita Sinha,* father of

Bagat Sinha, or Bakht} S.; father of

Vijaya Sinha, father of

Gumana Sinha,t or Guman §.; father of

Mana Sinha, father of

Tagat Sinha, or Takht S.; now ruling.

The more ancient of the two inscriptions under notice was exa-

mined, by me, at Benares. It is, I believe, the property of Major

R. R. W. Ellis. Of its history I know nothing. A copy is sub-

joined.

water |

ARUAWS FRIUSTSMAT: |

dia: gia a fa: Haase a et

sreteviagqtadasataamraarsg tea Wag |

aang favartes yfcarat arat aafaae TaSTE: IRI

THA aa Ag aR araataay fase |

qasMlcaQuicare quite aw: st

aL AAA aaactan: Hates aAwTsy

fasereadiearafafac: Siwee at eT: |

Sareea cyawwafaaw sss

saaituyetucraaea Stfaaaarsfae | 8 |

the Baghela-vans'a-charita, by Kankana, son of A’s‘aditya; 17th chapter, 8’,

62 and 63.

* Called ‘ a renowned exterminator in the utter destruction of Muhammadans :’

qaarey AeaTtae fawice: |

}~ Before Bakht Sinha’s name, Mr, Prinsep inserts two princes, Abhaya Sinha

and Rama Sinha, whom our genealogist.omits. The first, at least, as being a par-

ricide, brought no credit to his family. Bakht Sinha is spoken of as “ captor of

the chief of the Kachchhapas :’ HQT SISA: |

+t Mr. Prinsep has Bhima Sinha.

1858. | Of two Edicts bestowing Land. 221

aufa afin aras-

wiataatfa ufcuraaastanrg |

sarmqwatan eeat fest

dasteal aaat RaTWTaifa: iv |

qVissHat Azauts ata Fadty-

astafafa saa faais as: |

aeufusaaatre tae: qatta:

pated atses: caw ufca | q |

qaissmie fasasawaang qylaasaaa-

Alaa fRTHATTANC aA Saws

qsttafatiaargutrmararenziten:

Ty: Gaauiles BMA Ries fasitaraa: | © 4

aya Bawcamanddfaquem: weaugicaaeiearaify-

TIsaUcaaCyLaale ae fasasisasinaga tyra.

Be AUSF AULA Ngy LBA SILI ALIA LA ALULAAS-

qcajaacauraes fas qacarmuaaaas aaqt-

afaattaadt faferarauetquaaraty w ctacreitaacrs-

atayefeardteceattantaaweaifcaraue faataag-

afataataufcaganteqeamaaaceEran qartaateye-

aia aarauata stazatienta = |

fafeaae vaat awarufefsfeanra: aaa: See

qMiax: quyqaaaqaqtenttacvewgfaaracqay ea: auat-

a ataaqurae tase: aetarrdreaerernc tua.

aaleudaae ave aifa aqua catarat arafea ater.

WAHATIVTTT AT uga: Wag wus amet 3 aa

alqiwayt fasifaaraaas agTat eat Blarsifuca-

alvgeaa = fafuaa_ aac aq aa Taatueaaiayfaat

fafacucomengreuqudfaaguenaratantanaaie-

< aay fayqrsiqageay gst faura ayCUTA a

sfaat efaust sat arnfaaraas UMass aat-

fraairata faafaaicutacrafauacta Selawifed at.

222 Of two Edicts bestowing Land. [No. 3.

qutgafatrra araustaareatfarar arawsitatr

HAS ATAT WIATFATATTIACAITTATFAT TATA BE-

ata aaa wadiaa veu zfa aranseife: fueerant-

aaranad fasatatigraaat ataaga fase get AAT

ward laa rare fecemeferraereTarar eases

<1aq |

waft ASA BTA: |

uta i staweita aa uta saseta

St a1 TRA TAT faaa “eatarfarat Qu

WE AAA SA ACTAILATLAT: |

yfacie faxtfa wadag TORT | R |

aatata alfaa: afer

BAT AIT Alaa Clay |

Ln ie

AAA Sa AHR TSUt

STS AIT UTAATAT Wats! tt 3h

asfaagar wat cafe anette: |

Te TA ART yaa” wy aat Waa || 8h

qaqwaa Wart YACGAAF AA _|

SUL araatata ATATTH AA ETTA | YI

wut yeeut at Gl CLA TAA |

a fasrat afayar fueta ae asia i ¢ i

ate aterwerte aa aata fac |

GSU WEAR GT AAT Aa TAT! Oy

ate cata wet qlee

alatta waryancaeiia |

faarearasfaatta atta

A ATA STH, TALIZSTA | < |

ataatqaaiadg qquifanaa

aataatsayer faaaaarar: |

TMA SAasTeaaT ATT

;

1858. ] Of two Edicts bestowing Land. 293

Ys AST UCAS WCAAATT | € |

Siaacacaa fuecrayaraea: |

maag faraitsd atfia: SaaRat ee |

fufad acfmasqesiaeeaa | feaaa | aye aErsT |

HACTAUTIT ATT |

TRANSLATION.

Well be it!

1. May yours, to your prosperity, be that transport which was

S’ri’s,* when, in the course of dalliance, her hands wandered over

their support, the neck of Vaikuntha, whose desire was as yet un-

sated.

2. The lines of monarchsf sprung from the solar racet having

attained the celestial abode, there was born owe Yas’ovigraha, by

name; munificent, and manifestly comparable with the sun for ple-

nitude of effulgence.

3. His son was Mahichandra; whose illimitable fame, resem-

bling the lustre of the moon, was spread, by him, beyond the sea.

4, His son was the auspicious king Chandra Deva,§ whose do-

%* S’ri, or Lakshmi, personifié. aoundance, or prosperity, is the wife of Vish-

nu, here called Vaikuntha.

+ The equivocal import of the word rajan and its synonymes, which denote any

member of the military class, as well as ‘ king,’ bas, doubtless, often stood in

good stead to successful Kshatriya adventurers, when commemorating their ances-

try, in making it appear as if actual royalty had subsisted in their families as a

long-standing heritage. That Yas’ovigraha and Mahichandra were nothing more

than ordinary subjects, is by no means improbable, as has been intimated above.

+ The word for ‘ sun,’ embodied in the expression here rendered ‘solar race,’

is, in the original, represented epithetically by a compound signifying ‘ the not

cold-rayed.’

The solar race comprises the first grand division of the martial class.

The translation of Jayachandra’s grant, contained in this Journal for 1841, p.

101, &c., is crowded with errors of the grossest ignorance or heedlessness. The

general character of the thing may be inferred from its distortion of the stanza to

which this note is appended. It runs as follows:—‘* The Rajas who were descend-

ed from the lunar line having departed for heaven, one, named Yas’ovigraha, by

his natural spirits was as the sun himself.”

§ Colebrooke and Capt, Fell write S’richandra Deva. But it seems preferable

to regard the syllable s’r2 as an honorary prefix. See Miscell. Essays, Vol. II.,

p. 286; and As. Res., Vol. XV., p. 449.

224 Of two Hdicts bestowing Land. [ No. 3.

minant passion was polity; discomfiter of the bands of his foes ;

dissipating the gloom produced by the hostile presence of haughty

valorous warriors; and through whose most august grandeur was

assuaged every hardship of the denizens of the unrivalled realm of

Gadhipura* the famous, which he had acquired by the might of his

arm :

5. Who, having repaired, as a protector to the religious re-

sorts at Kas‘i,t Kus‘ika,t North Kos’ala,§ and Indrasthana,|| in

bestowing, time after time, his weight in. gold{ on the twice-

* Gadhipura is the same as Kanyakubja, as will be seen hereafter.

+ Kas‘i generally intends the city of Benares ; but it also designated the neigh-

bouring country. There is ground to believe that, at one time, while this name

was more particularly applied to the capital, Varanasi was employed, perhaps ex-

clusively, to distinguish the province. See this Journal, for 1848, Part I., p. 71.

But a custom, the reverse of this, seems to have obtained, at a certain period.

See the Kalpa-druma-kalika, by Lakshmi Vallabha, ad jfinem. This work is a

commentary on the Kalpa-sutra of the Jainas.

The word varanasi, said to occur in the Atharva-veda, is explained in the Jé-

bala Upanishad, to be the same with the sushwmna, or coronal artery ; and varana

and as? are named in defiance of grammar, as its constituents. The first of these

is there asserted to be a synonyme of pingala ; the second, of ida; two tubular

vessels, according to the reveries of the Yoga,

In the Kas’t-khanda, which rejects this derivation, it is insisted that the Athar-

va-veda means Benares; its Sanskrit form being analysed into the names of the

two streams which skirt the city near its eastern and western extremities.

~ Of Kus‘ika it has been stated that it signifies the river MKaus’aki—recie,

Kaus'iki. See As. Res., Vol. XV., p. 454. But this is very questionable. A

place near some sacred stream is probably here meant, rather than the stream itself.

§ North Kos/ala is supposed to be the old denomination for the vicinity of

Ayodhya. See the Translation of the Vishnu-purdna, p. 190, foot-note 79 ; and

Lassen’s Indische Alterthumskunde, Vol. I., pp. 128 and 129.

|| Indrasthana, it is obvious to surmise, is another name for Indraprastha, or

ancient Delhi.

@ According to the Matsya-purdna, he who gives away his weight in gold will

abide in the heaven of Indra during the periods of all the Manus. Afterwards he

reaches the city of Vishnu; and, when his hoard of merit is exhausted, he is born

a universal monarch on earth. The Agni-purdna adds that, in his renewed human

condition he will be free from all disease.

Fitting objects to be given away in quantities equal to one’s weight are, any of

the metals, precious stones, several sorts of grain, various fruits, betel, saccharine

1858.] Of the Kdicts bestowing Land. 225

born,* indented the earth, with his scales, on hundreds of occa-

sions.

6. His son, Madanapala, the crest-jewel of princes, the orna-

menty of his family,t now bears sway ; at whose consecration, by

the water that glittered as it was powred§ from the sacred vessels,

the dust of sin of the world, contracted from the iron age, was

wholly washed away :

7. At the time of whose going forth to conquest, as the orb of

the earth yielded beneath even the light pressure of the foot-falls of

his careering elephants, impassioned, and high as lofty mountains,

the serpent S’esha, gorgeous with the clotted gore that trickled from

his palate, cloven by his head-gem|| which had been driven into wt, as

it were, in consequence of being crushed, hid his face for a mo-

ment in his bosom.

substances, honey, milk, curds, clarified butter, oil, salt, and sandal-wood. Par-

ticular benefits are promised to each species of such donation. The recipients of

the presents are Brahmans: but they must subsequently perform expiation.

Minute instructions are laid down for preparing the balance, and the consecrated

ground on which it is set up. A lucky day must be chosen for the ceremony. ‘The

donor is poised against his gift for as long a time as it requires to milk a cow;

contemplating Lakshmi the while. Numerous gods and sages, together with the

manes, are hallowed on the occasion. “The deity presiding over the scales is Vasu-

ki.

The above is selected from the Ddéna-chandrikd, by Divakara Bhatta, surnamed

Kale ; son of Mahadeva Bhatta, son of Rames’a Bhatta.

The practice of bestowing one’s weight in various substances is now and then

observed, to this day. But, when metals are selected as the gift, they are rarely

other than of the baser sort.

* Anciently, persons of the first three classes; but, for many ages past, under-

stood in the restricted acceptation of Brahmans. The regeneration is effected by

investiture with the sacred cord.

+ Literally, ‘ the moon.’

{ In the Sanskrit, gotra. A note on this word is given below.

§ Aspersion with water and other liquids plays a conspicuous part in the instal-

lation of a Hindu king.

|| In the Indian mythology, S’esha supports the centre of the earth on one of

his thousand heads.

Hindu superstition assigns a precious stone to the head of every member of the

serpent tribe.

“| The original is vas’dt ‘by force.’ As, however, the verb pesh means ‘ to

226 Of two Edicts bestowing Land. (No. 3.

The same :—whose feet are justly revered by the entire brother-

hood of potentates: son and successor* of the auspicious Chandra

Deva, supreme sovereign, great king, chief ruler, lord paramount,

emperor ;f who gained, with his own arm, the primacy of happy

crush,’ ‘ to grind,’ and not simply ‘ to press down,’ the conjectural reading bhayat

‘ for fear’ would yield a better sense: ‘ in the apprehension of being,’ &c.

* Padanudhydta. Professor Wilson—Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society,

Vol. II., p. 393—errs in supposing that this formula may connect the names of

contemporary rulers, sovereign and subordinate, to imply the inferiority of the

latter. In the following volume of the same Journal, at p. 579, he remarks, on

this expression, that it ‘‘ is nothing more than a paraphrastic phrase for ‘ succes-

sor. It means, literally, ‘ meditating upon his—the father’s—feet ;’ denoting

either the disposition of the son to imitate the paternal example, or to refer, with

reverence, to the memory of his sire.’’ Colebrooke, long before,—Transactions of

the Royal Asiatic Society, Vol. I., p. 236: or Miscell. Essays, Vol. II., p. 308,—

had, however, written as follows: ‘* Paddnudhydta, an ordinary periphrasis for

son and successor : literally, ‘ whfose feet are meditated, i.e. revered, by ....’”

In some cases,—as in this Journal for 1839, p. 491,—the same words are used, by

a chieftain, of his favourite divinity.

For this locution, péddnta-khydta has sometimes been substituted, in decipher-

ments of inscriptions. See our Journal for 1848, Part L., p. 71; and for 1851,

p. 676. This epithet would signify, if anything, ‘ whose toes are notorious.’

In this Journal for 1855, p. 487, the Sanskrit may be found of a short inscrip-

tion which I translated from a version taken by an archeologist of established

repute, Mr. Edward Thomas, from an obscure copy of what I now know to bea

very rough original. In the second line, as printed, is the phrase paddnudhyd-

tasya ; which is, of course, the correct reading for Major Cunningham’s utterly

meaningless pddanaddtasya. See Bhilsa Topes, p.151. ,

But I here mention this record chiefly with a view to express the opinion that it

requires further examination before we can be positive about its contents. Four

independent transcripts which I have lately had taken of it, have only served to

increase bewilderment ; with the exception of determining that qyyTeEarTE stands

in place of WTaWara.

+ Parama-bhattdraka, mahd-rdja, adhi-rdja, parames'wara, parama-méhes'-

wara: and, if regard be had to their etymology, these appellations are not classed

by subordination ; for, to all appearance, the first and the last are indicative of

co-ordinate eminence. The precise sense of parama-mdhes’wara is ‘ supreme

great lord.’ In all cases, however, where bhatfaraka, qualified, or unqualified, is

met with in a list of this description, it stands at the head. Colebrooke says that

it “ answers to the title of majesty.” Miscell. Essays, Vol. II., p. 303.

The Aitareya-bhrdmana, in its concluding pentad, has a curious classification of

1858. ] Of two Edicts bestowing Land. 227

the various species of earthly rulers imagined to have derived their styles from the

attributes invoked on Indra, at his consecration as king of the gods. The ensuing

extract will suffice for the present purpose :

a taa avimiaufata om vada we Sarat

aan earai Safest waarmee) Tas His] erie BcTe

qrtasgy’ oe areata fraser awa way Pie*zaisa-

far tai Sa Vals HIBTATG ISA: TaNTE TANT iy

8th panchika, 3rd adhydya, ad finem.

“ Thus consecrated by that great inauguration, Indra subdued all conquerable

earths, and won all worlds. He obtained over all the gods, supremacy, transcend-

ent rank, and pre-eminence. Conquering, in this world Jelow, equitable domina-

tion (sémrdjya), happiness (bhaujya), sole dominion (swérdjya), separate autho-

rity (vairdjya), attainment of the supreme abode (pdrameshthya), sovereignty

(rajya), mighty power (méhérdjya), and superior rule (ddhipatya) ; becoming a

self-existent being and independent ruler (swardl), exempt from early dissolution ;

and reaching all Ais wishes in that celestial world; he became immortal: he be-

came immortal.” Miscell. Essays, Vol. I., p. 39.

This translation is Colebrooke’s ; with several terms of the original interpolated,

and here and there a new word marked, as being surplus to the rigid letter of the

text. i

The various denomination of chiefs—included under the sway of Indra, the

Ekaral, or‘ peerless lord’—intimated by the technicalities in this passage, are

called, in the context, Samral, Bhoja, Swardl, Viral, Parameshthin, and Réjé ;

of which the first, third, and fourth are known,.in more modern language, and

with a notable change of character, as Samrat, Swardt, and Virdt. See the Trans~

lation of the Vishnu-purdna, p. 93 and its 3rd foot note.

Of the possessors of mdhardjya and ddhipatya no special powers, entitled Maha-

rdja and Adhipati, are appropriated to certain quarters; as the Samrdi princes,

for instance, are allotted to the North.

al extensive scope of jurisdiction is assigned to the Rdjas :

saaaet warat waarai afrerai fafa araraisaary ear: ufsy-

aa qehiacatroatreaat q eaaag asvattas BStavcreayyea |

aaa yatai waar sfrerai fete a as FCISIaaL Css:

saa caqiag astufeaa csaaaaffeararawza |

Aitareya-braéhmana, ubi supra.

*t Next, the divine Sddhyas and A’piyas consecrated him, Indra, in this middle,

central, and present region, with the same prayers from the Rik and Yajush, and

with the same holy words as before mentioned, in thirty-one days, for local domi-

nion (rdjya). Therefore the several kings of the Kurus and Panchilas, as well

as of the Vas‘as and Us‘inaras, in this middle, central, and present region, are con-

* The Vaidik L.

s) 3

a iil

228 Of two Edicts bestowing Land. [No. 3.

Kanyakubja :*—the fortunate Madanapéla Deva, supreme sove-

reign, great king, chief ruler, lord paramount, emperor ; victorious ;

commands, acquaints, and enjoins the inhabitants of the village of

Ahuam, in the cantont of Vanesar-Maua;t and all his people;

and likewise sojourners from abroad ; as also kings, queens, princes

consort,§ dmperial counsellors, chaplains royal, warders of the gate,

commanders of troops, stewards, justiciaries,|| physicians, diviners,

secrated to sovereignty (rdjya) ; and people entitle those consecrated princes,

Raja.”

This, too, is Colebrooke’s translation, with a few changes, and such supplemen-

tation as is needed to make it intelligible in a detached quotation. Miscell. Es-

says, Vol. I., pp. 38, 39.

For the origin and exact signification of most of the expressions of dignity,

found in our inscription, it may be that recourse must be had to records of the

heroic or of the Pauranika period.

* The spelling of this name is observable; and it is the same in both these

grants. Very little dependence can be placed, here, or in other instances, on the

transcription of Jayachandra’s grant in this Journal for 1841, pp. 98, &c.: else

it might be cited for the more common, but anomalous form, Kanyakubja; which

is, regularly, an adjective. Kanyakubja is found still oftener ; and the Dwiridpa-

kos’a has a fourth variety, Kanyakubja.

+ Patiald, in the Sanskrit. That this word corresponds to ‘ canton,’ mahal,

or pargana, will appear from another inscription, which I am preparing for publi-

cation.

{ That is, I suppose, Vanesar near Maua; there being some second Vanesar,

with which the present might be confounded. This mode of coupling the names

of localities is still of very frequent occurrence in India, where, also as in other

countries, a tract of territory is frequently denominated from its principal town.

Or Maua may be an affix, an old word whose sense is lost; unless it be the

same as mahia, from the Sanskrit madhu, or madhuka, the bassia latifolia.

Mau and mahu terminate many names of places, besides being found alone.

Possibly they and mawa are one vocable, under various forms. May it have meant

‘ village 2’

§ Yuvardja, or “ designated successor and associate in the empire.” Cole-

brooke’s Miscell. Essays, Vol. II., p. 286. ‘* Young king, or Cesar.” Select

Specimen of the Theatre of the Hindus, Vol. I., p. 280: 2nded. “ Prince re-

gent, or Cesar.” Ariana Antiqua, p. 265. ‘* Vice-regent.’”? Dr. Stevenson’s

Kalpa-sitra, p. 60. But the last definition is untenable. The yuva-rdja is not

succedaneous, but a coadjutor. 3

|| Akshapatalika ; he who has cognizance of the patala ‘litigation’ of aks#a

‘ judicial cases.’ Or does patala mean ‘ filing 2

1858. | Of two Hdicts bestowing Land. 229

officers of gynecia, envoys, and persons who are proprietors of ele-

phants, of horses, of towns, of mines,* and of herds of kine.

Be it known to you: whereas: after ablution in the Ganges, at

the landing of the divine and blessed Trilochana, at Vardénasi;t on

Monday, the third day of the light semi-lunation, in the month of

Mégha, the sun having entered its northern path,§ in the year

eleven hundred and fifty-four; or, expressed in numerals, on Mon-

day, the 3rd day of the bright fortnight|| in Mdgha, in 1154 of the

Samvat era, at Varanasi: the village designated above; with its

water and soil, with its iron-mines and salt-pits, with and includ-

* A’kara-sthana ; literally, ‘ the site of a mine.’

+ Some of these terms have, as yet, no place in our dictionaries ; and several

of them are, most probably, peculiar to the Sanskrit of the age in which the

dynasty flourished to which the present patent appertains. For most of them, or

of their synonymes, see the As. Res., Vol. XV., pp. 21 and 45; Transactions of

the Royal Asiatic Society, Vol. I., pp. 174 and 175 ; and this Journal, for 1839,

p. 486. A number of them, ill-explained, occur in the same Journal, for 1841,

p. 103.

{ The quay of Trilochana, ‘ the Three-eyed,’ or S‘iva, still maintain its repu-

tation for sanctity, at Varanas{, or Benares.

§ BUCY; corrected from Yuttaaya of the copper plate; most of the

minor errors of which I have rectified without directing attention to them. Among

these is the constant substitution of the dental sibilant for the palatal, One or

two omissions of uniting concurrent vowels, disallowed by a severe conformity to

the requirements of grammar, have been retained for sake of clearness.

|| Instead of wre, we often, and perhaps oftener, find ate; as in the text.

The U’shma-viveka has both forms. Though no other sober etymology of the

word can readily be suggested, yet Dr. Mill’s derivation of it, by abbreviation from

wearatea should, therefore, be regarded with distrust. See Journal of the

As. Soc. of Bengal, for 1835, p. 397. The Pandits look upon it as a word adopt-

ed into the Sanskrit from the vernacular languages, The S’abda-kalpa-druma,

which has gfe, is silent concerning its origin, and would restrict its use to ‘ the

western country:’ yfqaaw Ifaaq: p- 6195. The corresponding term, afz,

is omitted by the S’abda-kalpa-druma ; and for a reason which not unfrequently

has weight with this Encyclopedia. It is not in the Dictionary of Prof. Wilson.

Modern grammarians, fancifully enough, refer ate to @ or bid and @]@q or

zatta, as importing the fortnight in which one ‘ appropriately presents’ offerings

to the gods, In like manner they would derive ate from qaala, after aphae-

resis, as denoting the half-month during’ which a Hindu ‘devotes oblations’ to his

ancestral manes.

230 Of two Ediets bestowing Land. [No. 3,

ing* its groves of madhikas} and mango-trees, its orchards, tim-

ber,§ grass, and pasture,|| with its holes and saline wastes, with

everything above and below, its four abuttals being ascertained, as

far as its borders: which had been granted by patent, in perpe-

tuity,{—by the illustrious king and chief ruler,* the fortunate Chandra

* The tautology, in the original, of sa and paryanta ‘ with and including’ seems

to be a speciality of legal documents.

+ The madhika is a sort of bassia, from the blossoms of which a spirituous

beverage, called méddhwi, is extracted by distillation. By the laws of the Mana-

vas—XJ., 95—the drinking of this liquor is forbidden to Brahmans.

{~ The Sanskrit scholar will observe that it would have been permissible, if not

even preferable, to connect the word rendered ‘ groves’ with mudhikas, and that

translated ‘ orchards’ with ‘ mango-trees ;’ especially if the last are coarsely de-

scribed by the substantive vana. On the interpretation thus suggested, the writer

will have affected the verbal collocation technically known, in the writings of the

Sanskrit grammarians and rhetoricians, as yathd-sankhya, or ‘* construction by

the correspondent order of terms,” a figure of speech exemplified in this cou-

plet : ;

*¢ Heec domus odit, amat, punit, conservat, honorat,

Nequitiam, pacem, crimina, jura, probos.”

Verses distinguished by the style of regimen here illustrated, are said to have

been once called, by the French, “ rapportez.’”’ See Notes and Queries, Vol. VII.,

p- 167.

§ Vitapa ; trees in request for their wood, in distinction from those valued on

account of their fruit or flowers. So say the native vocabularies.

|| Trina-yiti-gochara, These words, for ‘ grass and pasture,’ are met with in

an inscription translated by Colebruoke. He misreads them, however, trina-dya-

tiyochara. Miscell. Essays, Vol. I1., p. 310. Trina-ydti, corrupted to trinay-

uthi, has been taken for the name of a place, in this Journal for 1841, p. 103.

4 The original, dpadmasadmano hihikantam ydvat s’dsanikritya, is, a hundred

to one, corrupt. Unable, however, to heal it by any convincing emendation, and

content with a make-shift rendering, I avail myself of the fallacious ingenuity of

a native scholar, to extract sense from it as it stands; more especially as the

copper-plate pretty distinctly bears the phrase Aiéhikdntam, in which lies all the

difficulty. The ending—Adlam was expected, whatever went before. |

Divers pandits have assured me that AdAidika is a name of the dog, derived from

the animal’s cry, huhu ; but no instance of the employment of this word has been

produced. In one of the standard Sanskrit works on omens, that of Vasanta-

raja, the nearest word to huhu is hohad; and this is explained as being imitative

of the scream of the jackal.

Assuming Avi to be as the pandits assert by ‘the adjective of 4a, from the

1858] Of two Hdicts bestowing Land. 231

Deva; he having satisfied,f in due form, the divinities of the Ve-

das,t the saints, deceased mortals, malignant spirits, and hes own

group of progenitors; paying homage to the sun,§ of brilliance

potent in penetrating the regions of darkness; worshipping him, on

whose brow is a segment of the moon;|| adoring Vasudeva,{ the

preserver of the triple universe; offering to fire* an oblation of

abundant rice, milk, and sugar ;¥ in order to enhance the merit and

celebrity of his mother, of his father, and of himself; having taken

verb kai, we get Auhuka ‘ that which utters the sound Auhu. Huhiukdnta may,

then, stand for ‘ dog-killer ;’ a possible equivalent of s’wa-pach ‘ dog-cooker,’

the name of a tribe of pariahs.

Consonantly to these premises, the English of the clause is as follows: ‘ Ap-

prizing all rational beings, from Brahma to the outcast.’ Brahma is called ‘ the

lotus-tenemented,’ with allusion to the medium through which he originated from

Narayana.

Th purport which, on the exposition here set forth, has been attached to the

verb s’ds, is, to be sure, countenanced by the dictionaries. Yet there is no ques-

tion that, in a land-grant, the odds are overwhelmingly against the use of s’ds

otherwise than to express ‘ by patent ;’ above all, in such a form as s‘adsantkritya ;

and considering that the present instrument contains no declaration, if it be not

this, to show by what species of document the land was alienated.

The point thus discussed will be definitively cleared up, should another of

Madanapala’s grants or re-grants happen to be discovered. The formula in dispute

would, doubtless, turn out to be one of duration. It was exchanged for another,

by Madanapala’s immediate successor, Govindachandra, See the next inscription.

* Rajddhirdja, ‘king and chief ruler.’ Colebrooke represents these epithets

by “ conspicuous monarch.” Miscell. Essays, Vol. II., p. 258.

7 By drink-offerings.

{ Or gods propounded in the litanies of the Vedas.

§ Ushna-rochisha ; literally, ‘of warm lustre.’ Compare the third note above.

|| The divinity thus characterised is S’iva. ‘ Moon’ is here expressed by an

epithet: ‘ the regent of deciduous vegetation.’

§| Vishnu incarnate as Krishna.

* Here, and in many other inscriptions, in similar circumstances, the accusative

is inaccurately put for the locative. We should read etaw fa, not fay Si.

So Colebrooke—Miscell. Essays, Vol. I1., p. 306—has sdited fecusad for

fecutafa.

+ The composition formed of these three ingredients, is called, in the Sanskrit,

payasa,

| a Of two Edicts bestowing Land. [No. 3.

water in his palm, purified by znxcurving it into the form of a cow’s

ear, and by kus’a grass ;* to the Brahman, the auspicious Vamana

Swami S’arman; son of the Brahman, the auspicious Vardha Swa-

min, and grandson of the Brahman, Deva Swamin; sprung from the

stock of Kus‘ika, and from three branches,+ those of Vis/wamitra,

Audala, and Devarata; and of the Chhandoga division of the Ve-

das :¢ has, by us, cognizant of this transaction, and with intent to

* Of the correctness of this rendering I am not quite positive. Gokarna sig -

nifies, primarily, ‘a cow’s ear;’ and, secondarily, ‘ the length of a cow’s ear, or

a long span, and ‘an auspicious inflexure of the hand into the form of a cow’s

]

ear. For the last, and least usual acceptation, an authority occurs in the follow-

ing couplet, which is adduced anonymously in the A'chéra-mayikha :

Vey afew ve Ge draws |

famisateay g Wud TUS BCA

To continue ; while 4us’a-Jatd perhaps intends ‘ sacrificial grass’ simply,’it may

mean ‘ the grass called _/us’a and that known by the name of /atd.’ But the latter

is not, to my knowledge, made ‘use of for religious purposes: neither, by any

forthcoming warrant, is /us’a comprehended under the class of latd, or ‘ creep-

ers ;’ nor is Jatd a generic term for ‘ grass,’ though it does import grass of a cer-

tain species, the panicum dactylon.

f ‘Stock’ and ‘branch’ but vaguely answer to the original words, gotra and

pravara; of which Colebrooke says that the first expresses ‘‘ descent from an

ancient sage—rishi—, whence the family name is derived ;’’ and that the second

indicates ‘‘ lineage traced to more of the ancient sages.” The same venerable au-

thority adds that °* the distinction between gotra and pravara is not very clear.”

Miscell. Essays, Vol. II., p. 305. See also, Digest of Hindu Law, &c., Vol.

IIL., p. 327, foot-note: 8vo. ed.

Prof. Wilson, in his Glossary of Indian Terms, affords no additional aid what-

ever towards defining these expressions. Nay; he does not even lead one to infer

that any the slightest difficulty was ever experienced in discriminating them.

The most that is known as to the difference between them is, that the gotra is

primitive, and that the pravara is somehow derivative from it.

Sir H. M. Elliot justly observes that “ it has become the custom to call all

subdivisions of tribes, gotes, or gotras.’” Supplement to the Glossary of Indian

Terms, Vol. I., p. 35).

In all cases where the family antecedents of a Brahman are unknown, he is pre-

sumed to belong to the gotra of Kuas’yapa, and the White Yajur-veda is adjudged

to him for his portion of scripture.

t This is the Sdma-veda,

1858. | Of two Edicts bestowing Land. 233

publish our father’s deed of gift, been assigned anew; we record-

ing the grant on a plate of copper, accompanied by a seal* engraven

with our name.f

Bearing ¢hés in mind, and observant of owr injunctions, you will

pay all dues, as they fall to be discharged ; namely, share of pro-

duce,t imposts, money-rent, and the rest.

The annexed stanzas§ are here appropriate :

* This seal has, for legend, the words =\weaqqteea: ‘The auspicious

Madanapala Deva.’ The addition deva ‘ divine’ is generally affixed to the name of

a Hindu king, to mark his rank.

The figure of a conch is incised, by way of device, beneath the name in question,

which is surmounted by a sketch of Garuda.

+ Portentous as is the length of this period, it is surpassed in the original.

Considering, however, that we are dealing with a formal deed of transfer, it is

neither unusually protracted nor unusually involved. It will be perceived that,

with a view to greater perspicuity, I have transposed, in my translation, several

elauses of the Sanskrit.

The date of the ceremonial washing at Benares I should be disposed, but for the

word sndtwd, to refer to Madanapa4la’s father rather than to Madanapala himself.

But, if it was the former that bathed at that time, the instrumental case of the

past participle, or snudtena, would have been used, to agree with chandradevena.

On the construction accepted, the year of the primitive grant is wanting ; a default

which might be argued as leaving, in ordinary circumstances, an opening to endless

contestation retrospective from the time of its renewal.

The original document, at the issuing of the present edict, was, it should seem,

lost, and not even a certificate of its date producible. But the author of the re-grant

being the king, his bare admission that the grantor was his royal sire, would be

sufficient to preclude all action at law bearing on the title of the village propound-

ed in the patent.

In the recital of the forms attending the primary grant, it will be remarked that

no mention is made of bathing on the part of Chandra Deva. The specification

of this important observance must, for completeness, be resumed from the notice,

higher up the sentence, of its performance by Madanapala; in whose case it is,

perhaps, just to conclude that no other rite over and above ablution was impera-

tive. But, to ascertain whether completeness of detail has here been sacrificed to

brevity of expression, requires investigation which must be remitted to another

opportunity.

t aaa, or, as elsewhere, WAIT ; «rent in kind :’ in contrast to fecay

* gold,’ ‘rent in cash,’ See Colebrooke’s Miscell. Essays, Vol. IL, pp. 306 and

312.

§ Almost all inscriptions recording charters of land are embellished with some

234 Of two Edicts bestowing Land. [No. 3.

1. Hethat receives land, and he that bestows land, both, as

performing acts of merit, assuredly go to elysium.*

of the nine stanzas here collected, or similar ones; little uniformity being ob-

served, however, in their arrangement. Most of them, if not all, are, somewhere

or other, attributed to Vyasa or the Munis. The probability is, that they are de-

rived from the Mahabharata and the Purénas. One or two may be taken from

the Raémdyana. A few have been traced to their sources, mediate or immediate ;

as will subsequently appear. Their various readings are numerous; but it has not

been thought necessary to adduce, in more than one or two instances, such as are

immaterial. The rest are dwelt on at length.

* This couplet, attributed to a Muni, or Sage, will be found translated in Cole-

brooke’s Digest of Hindu Law, &c., Vol. II., pp. 166, 167: 8vo,ed, In the

original I have corrected yfaiegita to yfawist(a ; and I have changed

faaat to faaa, the preferable and more frequent reading. These verses are

very often met with. They occur, with minute variations, in all three of the law-

works about to be named,

In express contradiction to the maxim which they deliver, a metrical precept,

quoted in the Prayas'chitta-maytkha and Prayas’chitta-muktdévali, and there

wrongly imputed to the code of the Manavas, pronounces, in substance, that the

acceptor of land falls into a place of torment :

ety ufaay mag aelears waa |

sfagre_sfawerdt wahrafa ereaa |

This bold enunciation is, however, in good part glossed away by refinements and

exceptions. The Hindu Rhadamanthus is wonderfully tolerant of sophistry.

In the first place, the acceptance of land without a spiritual fee is ruled, by the

Déanachandrikd, to be no delinquency whatever. This act is, accordingly, not

viewed as objectionable, unless an attempt is made to sanctify it by religious rites.

See the last note, p. 224.

When ritual observances are connected with it, a new character at once attaches

to the deed. It now becomes sinful, and demands satisfaction. One treatise pre-

scribes, as the appropriate expiation, the penance of Prajapati and the bestowal

in charity of one-sixth of the gift; the donee retaining the remainder. Another

treatise is more unrelenting in its exactions ; requiring three performances of the

ardent penance, three ablutions daily for four months, and alms as before; the

residue of the donation likewise remaining with its receiver.

The penance of Prajapati is thus described: “ When a twice-born man _ per-

forms the common penance, or that of Prajapati, he must for three days eat only

in the morning ; for three days, only in the evening ; for three days, food unasked

but presented to him; and for three days more, nothing.” Laws of the Mana-

yas, XI., 212. But compare Yajvavalkya, III., 320.

Of the ardent penance we have the following account: “A Brahman, perform-

a ee

1858. ] Of two Edicts bestowing Land. 235

2. A econch,* a throne, an umbrella, the best of horses, and the

choicest of elephants; these royal insignia, Purandara,f are the

requital of giving away land.

3. Again and again does the fortunate Rama conjure all these

and future lords of earth. This bridge of virtue, the granting of

land, is common to all princes, and to be cared for, by your majes-

ties, in successive ages.

ing the ardent penance, must swallow nothing but hot water, hot milk, hot cla-

rified butter, and hot steam, each of them for three days successively ; performing

an ablution, and mortifying all his members.”’ Laws of the Manavas, XI., 215.

Yajvavalkya—III., 318—makes it to consist in drinking hot milk, hot clarified

butter, and hot water, each for a day; with fasting for one night. Paras‘ara lays

down the quantity of milk, butter, and water.

Land received in free gift it is wrong to dispose of by sale; but the selling of it

is expiated by a solemn sacrifice—yajna. Again, the man who, though able to

vindicate his rights, tamely relinquishes his land, when usurped byanother, with-

out recourse to litigation—apatala, goes to some hideous hell, there to remain for

one and twenty cycles. If he foregoes all endeavour to obtain justice, he should

destroy himself; and, by this destruction, he escapes the infernal regions. See a

note above, on Akshapatalika, at p. 228.

The Prdayas'chitta-mayikha is by Nilakantha Bhatta, son of S’ankara; and the

Préyas'chitta-muktdvali, is by Divakara Bhatta, son of Mahadeva Bhatta, of the

gotra of Bharadwaja. The Ddna-chandrikad has been spoken of in a previous note.

* The bare possession of a dakshindvarta, or conch with its whorls turning to

the right, is esteemed, by the Hindus, as securing, without fail, good fortune to

its owner. Its employment for religious ends is also thought to be productive of

extraordinary results. Some verses on this topic, purporting to be taken from a

chapter of the Vardha-purdna, will be found in the S’abda-kalpa-druma, p.

5106. These couplets inculcate, for example, that whoever sprinkles himself, in

prescribed form, with water from such a shell, at a river running towards the

East, is absolved from all past sin. So sacred is a shell of this description, that

one may neither drink out of it, nor strike with it a fish or a swine.

¥ Purandara is a name of Indra.

_ = The second distich of this couplet has been strangely translated, as follows,

in the Journal of the Bombay Brauch of the Royal Asiatic Society, January,

1852, p. 110: “To preserve what has been granted, a common duty incumbent

on all kings, is like a bridge for their safety, over an ocean of sins.’ Yet this is

as close as the English versions of Indian inscriptions are generally,

Dr. Mill thinks that he finds the reading daira for Tata, ina citation of

this verse, given on the Shekhavati tablet. Journal of the As. Soc. of Bengal, for

1835, pp. 384 and 400.

ae De

236 Of two Edicts bestowing Land. [No.3

4. By many kings, such as Sagara and others, the earth has

been possessed. His, ever, whose is the soil, is és produce.

5. He that wrongfully resumes a single gold coin, a cow, or

even one finger’s breadth of glebe, incurs perdition till the con-

summation of all things.*

6. He that unjustly confiscates land, whether given by himself,

or given by others, transformed to a worm, grovels, with his ances-

tors, in ordure.}

* Another form of this couplet, but without affecting the sense, has been no-

ticed in inscriptions :

fecuaa Weal wa waa ETA

Ela ACHAT a GI UATaAIG |

A redundancy is observable in the fourth quarter of this stanza.

+ A couplet almost identical with this, as to its first half, but combining, in a

manner, for its remainder, the second distich of the stanza in the text, and the first

distich of the stanza there succeeding it, occurs in the Garuda-purdna. Witha

slight variation, it is not uncommon in inscriptions. It here follows, with a part

of its context :

cui wteui a Bt Ste y TEATTa |

ufe auezarie fasrai ataza ata |

YRC FSSA Ga ay WUata Ca, I

YACTTLAT qT day wqag Ca I

aaa sare ua SUqIVaH ATs |

aea TySTT Seal Syn dalases II

aeqermyutta fi fay | ataa aT |

nae fay wag a: vata acfaute |

Sagalaaqiha AMSVCUG F |

FaraHgAal aia sryutanay F |

Preta-kalpa, 30th adhydya, s‘l. 15-19.

‘He that usurps land, bestowed by himself, or bestowed by another, is born,

for sixty thousand years a worm in ordure.

‘ What merit does he acquire who grants away even a finger’s breadth of land!

And what guilt does he incur who, without just cause, appropriates even a finger’s

breadth of land!

‘ The estate of a Brahman, possessed through avarice, burns the seizer of it to

the seventh generation. Like theft, it indeed burns him while the moon and the

stars endure.

1858. | Of two dicts bestowing Land. 237

7. Sixty thousand years does the donor of land abide in the

regions of the blessed; and just as many does he dwell in hell,

who practices disseizin, or acquiesces in 7¢.*

‘ A man may digest iron-filings, powdered stone, and poison. -But what man,

in the three worlds, shall digest the property of a Brahman?

‘ By the destruction of consecrated wealth, by the inequitable seizure of a Brah-

man’s fortune, and by disrespect to Brahmans, whole families suffer degradation.’

In some inscriptions, the latter half of the first couplet above cited runs thus :

5 LS

aati WaaTaY eaetia Saas |

‘contracts demerit egual to that of the slayer of a hundred thousand kine.’

In other inscriptions, the first distich of this stanza is materially altered, as

below; and the second distich is quite different from anything yet given:

eu Waal A Yare Ca aug |

ael avheai 4S Cara FasATVAa |

‘ Diligently do thou guard, O king, land bestowed by thyself or by others.

More meritorious, most eminent of princes, is the protection of /and than is the

giving of it.’

The Bhdgavata-purdna confines its denunciations to the sacrilegious :

wea Wea at weld SMe ya: |

fg aweweifa fagrat araa ate:

10th skandha, latter section, 64th adhydaya, 39th s’l.

‘He who wrongfully confiscates the wealth of a Brahman, bestowed by him”

self,’ &c.

This couplet, with insignificant verbal deviations, is quoted by Jagannatha Tar-

kapanchanana Bhattacharya, in the Vivdda-bhangaérnava, through the Dipa-kalika,

See Colebrooke’s Digest of Hindu Law, &c., Vol. II., pp. 165, 166; 8vo. ed.

Once more, from the Bhdgavata-pur ana:

a erent atau ete ECT |

efi oe saa frena ayraraeaa aa Il

llth skandha, 27th adhydya, 64th s’J.

‘ He who disseizes the gods or Brahmans of property conferred by himself or by

others, is born, during ten thousand times ten thousand years, a feeder on dung.’

* This couplet, but read a little otherwise, is cited, as from the A’dipurdna,

by Jagannatha Tarkapanchanana Bhattacharya. See the last note; and Cole-

brooke’s Digest, &c., Vol. II., p. 163; Svo. ed.

The word qa, in the text, would well be exchanged for qtq,

According to Yajnavalkya—III., 230,—the forcible usurpation of land is nearly

tantamount, as a crime, to theft of gold. Compare the Laws of the Manavas

XI., 58.

238 Of two Edicts bestowing Land. [No. 3.

8. The donations—a source of merit, riches, and distinction—

once bestowed, here on earth, by kings, rank with the reliques of

sacrifices and with vomitings. What respectable person, forsooth,

would take them again P*

The stealing of gold, agreeably to an anonymous text adduced in the Prayas’-

chittoddyota, is counted among offences in the Beet degree :

re Sct auras aa aera: !

aus F aeaaT gaat aaqt qa Il

HRa fe TSA SA

Equal explicitness on this article is wanting in the Laws of the Manavas, IX,

235, and XI., 55; and in Yajnavalkya, III., 227.

In expiation of the purloining of gold, the Mifdkshard, a commentary on Y4j-

navalkya, prescribes one observance of the ardent penance, a fast of three days’

continuance, and eight thousand burnt offerings of clarified butter, with repetitions

of the gdyatri. It is added that the seizure of land is atoned by mortifications of

half this severity.

The Prdyas'chitia-maytikha would visit with a much lighter animadversion, the

delinquency thus absolved.

Bhatta Dinakara is author of the Prayas’chittoddyota. Wis father was Rama-

krishna Bhatta, son of Narayana Bhatta, son of Rames’wara Bhatta.

My reason for calling the classical ‘ Laws of Menu’ by the more correct title of

‘ Laws of the Manavas’ will be seen by reference to an interesting letter of Prof.

Max Miiller, in Mr. Morley’s Digest of Indian Cases, Vol. I., Introduction, pp.

CXcvl. seq.

* Of this couplet we owe the following version to Colebrooke: “ The gifts

which have been granted by former princes,—producing virtue, wealth, and fame,

—are unsullied reflections. What honest man would resume them >” Miscell. Es-

says, Vol. II., p. 313. For faar@atataarta, Colebrooke prints faaraafa

afaatta ; his facsimile giving, however, vdnti: and vdnti may, by a strain, be

taken, here, to import the same as vdnta, Vdnti occurs in this Journal for 1838)

p. 738. But either reading is fatal to this great scholar’s construction. This cou-

plet, worded as in the present inscription, but ill-rendered into English, will be

found in our Journal for 1839, pp. 299, 303; and for 1841, pp. 101, 104. For

the like reading, and a correct interpretation, see this Journal for 1839, pp- 487,

494. Compare, further, the As. Res., Vol. I, p. 365, 8vo. ed.; and Vol. XV.,

p. 452.

An obvious objection to Colebrooke’s Jection,—which seems to be a tacit alter-

ation of his original,—resides in the awkward, and perhaps impurely formed word

nirmdlyavat, to signify scarcely more than what is expressed by nirmala; and in

the unnatural air imparted to the whole stanza, as the result of taking pratimdni,

1858. | Of two Edicts bestowing Land. 239

9. Inconstant as the rack is this vawnted kingship. Sweet for

but the passing moment are the delights of things of sense. ike

for the plural of the substantive pratimdna. Another proof that the view which I

here adopt is correct, is afforded by the fact that, in other inscriptions, the words

nirbhukta-mdlya stand in the place of nirmdlya-vanta. See this Journal for 1838,

pp. 914, 973. Nirbhukta-mdlya, ‘ discarded flowers,’ or flowers once flung on an

idol, and not to be re-employed in the same manner.

Professor Wilson, in his Sanskrit Dictionary, neglects to distinguish, with re-

spect to their derivation, between the terms nirmdlya ‘ pure,’ ‘ purity’ and nirmd-

lya ‘ the remains of an offering.’ As to the latter, its second factor, which is mda-

lya ‘flowers,’ has nothing to do with mala ‘impurity.’ When our nirmdlya is

taken in its ordinary comprehensive acceptation, the element md/ya is to be under-

stood illustratively, as sub-indicating or connoting all articles of food, &c., while

literally denoting blossoms; all which are alike rendered, by oblation, unfit to be

used again for a like purpose.

The reliques of oblations to S’iva form a fertile theme of disquisition in Hindu

law-books. The subjoined injunctions and distinctions have been collected from

the Nirnaya-sindhu, which treats of this subject in the first section of its third

book.

According to the Siddhdnta-s'ekhara, as there quoted, edibles, water, betel,

powdered sandal-wood, and flowers, which have been devoted to S’iva, become the

perquisites of Chanda or Chandes’a. To sell them, or other things so offered, or

to give them away, or to take any of them for food, whether voluntarily or invo-

luntarily, is reputed a grave offence, and requires the reparation of grievous pe-

nances. The Smrityartha-sdra pronounces that whoever perseveres in eating any

article thus offered, is degraded from his class; and that great, though inferior,

guilt is incurred by partaking in diet of the sacrificial leavings of any deity what-

ever, in times exempt from distress. A reservation is made, however, by the Bha-

vishya-purdna, on behalf of all votaries of S’iva, and all who have received his

initiatory incantation, as concerns objects presented to the twelve Jyotirlingas,

phalli from the river Bana near Jubulpore, such as are spontaneous, or ideal, or

set up by gods or divine sages, or composed of ammonite, the moon-stone, or any

metal, Chanda has here no claim, The phalli meant to be excepted are those of

stone, erected by common mortals, and such as are fashioned of plastic mud, tur-

meric, clarified butter, &c.

The Traivikrami cites the Skanda-purdya as further imputing great sanctity to

images of S‘iva in the human form, The eating, by a proper person, of offerings

consecrated to such idols, avails to expunge even the crime of Brahmanicide. An

improper person, on the credit of this Purana, is one unbathed. Other authorities

consider as out of the pale, all who do not wear the thread of regeneration; and

S‘ridatta would deny the privilege to all save initiated followers of S‘iva, The

240 Of two Edicts bestowing Land. [No. 3.

a dew-drop on the point of a spear of grass is the vital breath of

human kind. Ah! virtue is one’s sole.companion on the journey

S‘iva-purdna is still more comprehensive in its enumeration of those who are dis-

qualified for partaking of the sacred food. The Kds’t-khanda eulogizes the prac-

tice of wetting the head with water with which the priapic emblem of S’iva has

been sprinkled. The merit of so doing is alleged to be equal to that of bathing in

the Ganges ; and he who thrice drinks water that drips from the linga, is cleansed

from all the three classes of sin,—the corporeal, verbal, and mental.

The Tithi-tattwa, Hemdédri, and Paris'ishta assert that food, leaves, flowers,

fruit, and water, offered to S’iva, acquire purity only when he is represented by

the ammonite, in the worship of the panchdyatana, or ‘ receptacle of five deities,

or types.’

The deities represented, or symbolized in the panchdyatana are S‘iva, Vishnu,

Sarya, Ganes’a, and Durga. Four of the images, or types are arranged around the

fifth, the most highly considered of all; and this varies accordingly as the wor-

shipper is a S’aiva, a Vaishnava, a Sawra, a Ganapatya, or a S’akta.

In the Nirnaya-sindhu, Bopadeva and the Paddrthddars’a and vouched for the

disposition of these idols, or symbols. In the A’chdrdrka a memorial verse is,

more commodiously recited, to suggest their succession :

WA QIVACFAVAUCFaAT- |

AMAURY Fy qa T

S’am stands for S’ankara, or S‘iva; Nd, for Nardyana. or Vishnu; Sd, for

Surya; Ga, for Ganes’a; and Bha, for Bhagavati, or Durgdé. The first named

divinity of each group comes in the centre. The rest, in the order here shown, are

placed about him, at the interquarters, beginning with the N. E.

Sometimes these images are seen collected in temples. They are then of liberal

dimensions ; and only one of the five objects, the obscene emblem of S‘iva, has

other than an animal form, more or less distorted. Most Hindus have a private

set of the five types, on a small scale. These they carry in a metallic vessel, hemis-

pherical in shape, about an inch and a half in diameter, provided with a cover, and

having a stiff paper bottom to preserve these reverend remembrancers from falling

into horizontal confusion. The vessel is now and then constructed in the simili-

tude of alotus, The symbolical substitutes of S‘iva, Vishnu, Sirya, Ganes’a, and

Durga, are, in order as enumerated, a phallus of stone from the Bana, an ammo-

nite from the Gandaki, a piece of the crystal called seéryakdnta, some leaves of the

red-blossomed oleander, and a lump of pyritic iron-ore.

The Nirnaya-sindhu or Nirnaya-kamalékara has, for its author, Kamalakara

Bhatta, son of Ramakrishna Bhatta and Uma, and younger brother of Divakara

Bhatta, It was composed in the Samvat year 1661, or A. D. 1718. The A’chd-

rarka is by S’ankara Bhatta, son of Nilakantha Bhatta, son of S’ankara Bhatta.

1858. } Of two Edicts bestowing Land. 241

to the other world.*

10. This ratification of patent, promulgating his father’s dona-

tion, the auspicious Madava Deva procured to be executed, with his

proper seal thereto attached.

Hngrossed by the respectablet and thrifty Sahadeva, scrivener.t

Prosperity be here! May favourable fortune and great felicity

attend !

Ezuecuted by the illustrious Madanapala Deva.

Of the inscription given below, a negative facsimile in litho-

graph will be found in the Journal of the Archeological Society of

Delhi, for September, 1852. To test this facsimile I have been as-

sisted by a careful transcript of the original, for which I am in-

debted to the late Mr. F. Taylor, Principal of the Delhi College.

In the Journal above mentioned is a professed translation of the

inscription under consideration. Its inaccuracies, as to facts of

* Colebrooke’s version of this stanzais as follows: ‘‘ This sovereignty of the

earth totters with the stormy blast; the enjoyment of a realm is sweet but for an

instant ; the breath of man is like a drop of water on the tip of a blade of grass ;

virtue is the greatest friend in the journey of the other world.’’ Miscell. Essays,

Vol. II., p. 309; also p. 304.

But vdtdbhra is certainly a cloud borne by the wind, or tossed by the storm ;

rack, in a word. Again; where I have written ‘ kingship,’ Colebrooke puts ‘ sove-

reignty of the earth,” instead of ‘ sovereignty of earth.” The word vishaya, which

I have translated ‘ things of sense,’ may mean ‘‘ realm :” but to render it so in this

place produces at least an approach to tantology which I cannot believe is designed

in the original.

T The original term, Sat, Colebrooke twice renders by “venerable.” Miscell.

Essays, Vol. IJ., pp. 305 and 314. Inthe present instance I suspect that it de-

notes some office.

t In Sanskrit, AUS, which I take to be related to karana “ the usage or

practice of the writer-caste,”’ according to Professor Wilson. It therefore signifies

a Kayastha or hereditary scribe. An allowable form, in the same sense, is kara-

nin, which makes karant in the nominative. Can it be from this that the word

*cranie’ is corrupted? See Sir H. M. Elliot’s Supplemental Glossary, pp. 196,

197.

I have not neglected to observe the words @fway and aAcWfe in this Journal

for 1837, p, 783, and for 1838, p. 46, respectively.

242 Of two Kdicts bestowing Land. [No. 3.

minor importance, are numerous ; but it seems unnecessary to make

them the subject of detail. The remarks, by the Secretary of the

Society, while correcting* some of Mr. Prinsep’s statements} touch-

ing the dynasty in discussion, were obviously made without re-

course to that gentleman’s reference,f{ and in ignorance of what

had been written, by Professor Wilson,§ regarding the later kings

of Kano}.

wate |

AFCA FISAWUL SISA: |

awar: qeaeai a faa: Hass Te |

wqnenaatauaragiaaararge fed wag |

aang farariaa ufcarar ara anifaoe KqeTEIR|

aaa sae awa Rayalalas fase |

AASMITARITAATS Buried GU 13 i

aaa Aaa AARC haa: TAPS TAWA

faaareancattafac: Sas eat =: |

aarercacyaryafaaeay sass

slaatuuatyceaaa etfaaaarfsaa |) 2 |

atuifa atfirqirarmcarea sy -

wiataaifa afcarazarsfars |

samaqwatay cca feaat

aaf¥yat aqadt Wana: | wt

qaSsasat acagrea zfa fadiw-

asiatafesad farraas: |

aarstaanaatrafad: Tarte:

yatfad aficaaes Ufa ie |

* Journal of the Archeolog. Society of Delhi, for September, 1852, p, 3.

There is a mistake, however, in quoting the year 1075, instead of 1072.

+ Useful Tables, Part the Second, p. 110. The carelessness here exhibited is

a rare thing to meet with in this laborious and most convenient compendium.

¢ Journal of the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal, for 1834, p. 341.

§ As. Res., Vol. XY., pp. 460 seqq,

1858. | Of two Edicts bestowing Land. 243

FCTSSATT fasauaMaad qyTaaTsaaa-

aa faTAAaAUNCH AS AS |

qsttafatraargataaeaen gies:

Te: wastes quae ale fastaraa: | 9}

qaieataa fastaaaisafa-

TATACSAILISAS ALA |

araeIRIgAy VAST Wat GH

tifseuy xfa wey KasqTETH |< |

qaqa CaWata-

faeg fea aatay afm: |

agte saacaaqau-

gfaHer <4 Vy aS WHT ec :

asa Bawcaandefaaaem: ywausicaasicmrfa-

CIAUCA ALLA S ae ass Usa QRS aT as T-

Be qUS Ta WALA ATMA Sle TH LIA UL A ALU aAT-

SAC HACAUT AS AUST AAT ALA eH BILISTIA CTS UT-

Hacucaale aerautaasafaacufacra sarfuufafatay-

faaifanicaswafasiagitiaaagia faadt watta0a-

waaamisaaatatan fafersareraqnaafy w <t-

aeagac sa fary Cifeasat eea ara taa ra fe ara T-

zfaafuuatataara: ufcazanfcqcagaaac gaat Aat-

fuatfcuwatarataafa stuzatfenta a

au fafcaae vaat qaufctafeana: waags: aal-

STAIMAC: TARE: BAAae: aayaaaateafacr.

engqtaaracua a: areas qeraia faa s: wala: Z-

Wiaisacunadgae areata amy aeyt frutaga:

BR CCOCe Sec ics ean Binitasty? agrat rat fafu-

at aacaafaaqayafucamiaafaat fafacucaqiza-

“Waraquet SeORIDICICLiGE Scr kcrs aayqey fay-

| qasiqaaeaa qat faura sqcuraea elaar Ufa Bat

“atataatearay qaanifs ea satetradiguararya-

2k 2

4h Of two Hdicts bestowing Land. No. 3.

casieaya TaATTAaraAt Traartycaraw farses oai-

TrAAT TATA SHC AST IUY ATA sielesitater wast.

ATA Aaa, WaiAT ISA Aa aat Saarayrwaaw-

actus faacquacRyz frag cara teases ztquta |

waft Wst ATA: |

uta 2 stawetta aa ufa waseta l

Sar at Gata faad waatfHat | Vt

LE WAlGa BA ACU ACATLAT: |

afacirag fastfa mata YUE | R |

aaqata aifaa: uifeaara.

Hat WaT aad Cray: |

aaa waeqeurai

ATS RA UTAATAT wats |Z |

qasfaagat wat cisifea: ewertefar: |

aq ay aa yfawy ay acl WTA 8 |

Waa MMAR T YHCAIAAFAA |

SUA ACHATHI fa SATIHAaFETAA | YI

ASMA ATSUSHI F |

eet nas S

mat atteveiaa ufawat a aufa ie |

fafed a¢ atanga sqsifaaedata |

TRANSLATION.*

% * % * % % x a

8. From him was born Govindachandra, as the moon was pro-

* The first seven stanzas of the present inscription are a mere repetition of the

opening of the former grant, if a few verbal discrepancies be left out of account.

It may be that, in the fourth stanza, we should read qc for q@{x; ‘ resolute’

in place of ‘ valiant.” In Jayachandra’s grant, at p. 98 of this Journal for 1841,

the word is @tc, Capt. Fell, from his version of another of Jayachandra’s pa-

tents,—in the fifteenth volume of the Asiatic Researches, p. 447,—seems to have

had the same word befc‘e him. The Sanskrit of that patent has never been

printed,

1858. ] Of two Hdicts bestowing Land. 245

duced from the main ;* a king by whom, with his far-reaching creep-

ers of arms,f elephant-like upstart governmentst were seized and

coerced ; and who was a fountain of eloquence copiously distilling

the essence of rhetorical nectar :

In the sixth stanza, afetar: wea ‘ the accumulated dust,’ &c. is substituted

for afata: Waw ‘ all the dust,’ or ‘ the dust, wholly,’ &c. Capt. Fell is too

general to suggest what expression was here employed in his original just alluded

to. The other grant of Jayachandra’s has qav@.

The same stanza, in this inscription, as in the last, in extolling Madanapala,

exhibits fasqaq ‘ bears sway,’ a present tense; though an indication of past time

is here indispensable. It should seem that, notwithstanding the exigency of a new

reign, the later poetical conveyancers entertained by the kings of Kanoj, were

either unwilling or unable to mend the verses of their predecessor under Madana-

pala. Capt. Fell puts ‘*‘ was a victorious prince ;’’ but without comment. ‘‘ Was

glorious” is the rendering given elsewhere ; and likewise unaccompanied by any

remark. Journal of the As. Soc. of Bengal, for 1841, p. 101.

* The more popular origina of the moon is from the ocean of milk, at the time

it was churned by the immortals and the demons. Mahabharata, A’di-parvan, s‘l.

1145.

According to other accounts, the moon was son of Atri. ‘‘ The Vayu says the

essence of Soma—somatwa—issued from the eyes of Atri, and impregnated the

ten quarters. The Bhdgavata says merely that Soma was born from the eyes of

Atri.’ Translation of the Vishnu-purdna, p. 392, foot-note.

The history of the moon, prior to its extraction from the milky sea, in a legend

which has a very Pauranika air, but which I have not been able to authenticate, is

thus told by Capt. Fell: ‘‘ A ray of glory from the eye of the holy saint Atri was

so effulgent, that the Eastern quarter could not endure it. It was, accordingly,

thrown into the ocean, where it became the moon.’’ As. Res. Vol. XV., p. 455.

In the Purusha-stikta of the Rig-veda, the derivation of the moon is stated still

differently. See Colebrooke’s Miscell. Kssays, Vol. I., p. 168.

+ Long arms, or ‘ arms reaching to the knees,’ are reputed, among the Hindus,

a token of high lineage. The arm is, further, frequently compared, by them, toa

vine, or to a staff.

{ Capt. Fell ineptly explains the compound here translated ‘ upstart govern-

ments,’ —or nava-rashtra,—as intending ‘‘ Navarashtra, a country in the South of

India; mentioned in the chapter of the Mahdbhdraia, detailing Sahadeva’s con-

quests.” As. Res., Vol. XV., p. 455.

But a king would, most assuredly, be much more likely to boast of successful

subjugation, than of being endowed with bone and muscle sufficient to overmaster

a wild beast, however powerful.

245 Of two Hdicts bestowing Land. [No. 3.

9. Whose embattled elephants in no wise succeeded in finding,

in three of the quarters, celestial elephants equal to the conflict;

whereupon, as it were rivals of the mate of Abhramu, they wended

to the region of Vajrin.*

The same :—whose feet are highly revered by the universal fra-

ternity of potentates: son and successor of the auspicious Mada-

napdla Deva, supreme sovereign, great king, chief ruler, lord para-

mount, emperor: who was son and successor of the auspicious

Chandra Deva, supreme sovereign, great king, chief ruler, lord para-

mount, emperor; who gained, with his own arm, the primacy of

happy Kanyakubja:—the fortunate Govindachandra Deva,f su-

preme sovereign, great king, chief ruler, lord paramount, emperor ;

* The Hindu mythology places an elephant, to uphold the globe, at each of its

quarters and interquarters. Of these eight supporters, Airavata is esteemed the

most redoubtable, and the chief of his kind. A female companion is attached to

each of them ; that of Airavata being Abhramu. Vajrin is an appellation of Indra ;

from vajra, the name of his weapon: and his region is the East, the station of

Airavata.

Prof. Wilson, in his Dictionary, erroneously places Airavata in the North, the

locality of Sarvabhauma. In this mistake he is followed by Mr. Thomson, in his

translation of the Bhagavad-gitd, p. 125.

The original of this exordium, from which Capt. FeJl translated, was, beyond

question, everywhere substantially, and almost everywhere literally, identical with

the Sanskrit as printed in this paper. His version throughout is not, however,

entirely trustworthy ; as an examination of the mode in which he renders the last

two stanzas might authorize one to infer, a general scrutiny apart,

‘* As the moon was produced from the ocean, so from Madanapala was descend-

ed Govindachandra. He was a prince of such vast strength that, by the grasp of

his mighty arm, he was able to restrain an elephant of the kingdom of Navarash-

tra. He possessed cows giving streams of the richest milk.

‘* His herds of elephants could never meet with equals for combat in three re-

gions—the North, South, and West. They, therefore, rovedto the quarter sacred

to Indra—the East ;—seeking for Aitavata. They were like warriors seeking for

their adversaries.” As. Res., Vol. XV., p. 448.

ft The seal attached to the plate of copper containing this inscription, bears,

according to the lithograph in the Journal of the Archeological Society of Delhi,

the words Alwaitaaqeea : But this must be a mistake for wae tar-

qeqeq: ‘ The auspicious Govindachandra Deva.’ Above the name is a figure of

Garuda; and below it is a conch,

1858. | Of two Edicts bestowing Land. 247

suzerain of the three classes of Governors styled masters of cavalry,

masters of elephants, and masters of infantry ;* a Vachaspatift for

inquisition into various sciences ; victorious; charges, acquaints,

and enjoins the inhabitants of the village of A’godali,t in the can-

ton§ of Haladoya; and all his subjects; and likewise sojourners

from abroad ; as also kings, queens, princes consort, imperial coun-

* As'wapati, gajapati, and narapati. The import of these phrases, as here em-

ployed, is undetermined. A cognate term, chhatrapati ‘ master of umbrellas,’

may be named as sometimes associated with them. The first three expressions

might be taken to denote, severally, the possession of a component part of an

army; were it not for the omission of chariots, which are necessary, as a fourth

element, to make up a complete martial host. But the word rathapati ‘ master of

chariots’ is never found, instead of chhatrapati, connected as above; and, if so

found, in order to stand as a synonyme of it, chhatra must bear a sense at present

unrecognised.

The epithet gajapati is known to have been affixed, from a certain age, to the

names of the rulers of Orissa; the title of narapati—an ordinary equivalent of

* king’—is said to have been specially borne, at one time, by the sovereigns of

Telingana and Karnata ; and the designation chhatrapati was affected by the Pesh-

was. The appropriation of as’wapati may admit of doubt.

It seems not impossible that, by these distinctions, so many feudatories, or

classes of feudatories, of a paramount power were once discriminated. On this

point, howeter, authentic history is, at best, only suggestive. As for the rest, it

had already become the custom of Indian governors, early in the middle ages, to

arrogate the lordship of three of these orders of royalets,—if they may so be con-

sidered. Among the Kanoj kings, Govindachandra was, apparently, the first who

laid claim to this sort of pre-eminence. That a similar superiority was not assert-

ed with respect to the chhatrapatis, is a circumstance worthy of note. Can it be

that the Chhatrapati 7djd, or rdjds, whoever they were, enjoyed sufficient power

to deter such a pretension? As. Res., Vol. [X., p. 123; and Vol. XV., p. 254.

Journal of the As. Soc. of Bengal, for 1838, p. 49; for 1839, p. 485 ; and for

1841, p. 103. Mackenzie Collection, Vol. II., pp. ccxxxv., ccxxxvi., and

ccxxxviii.; where the mere names, of like aspect, of Ganapati, Venkatapati, and

Setupati will also be seen. Useful Tables, Part the Second, p.119. Preface to

the Praudha-pratdpa-mdrtanda, a law work. Preface to the Siddhanta-chan-

drikd, the earliest commentary on the S’dstra-dipika of the Mimansa.

+ Or Bribaspati; preceptor of the gods,

{ There is, possibly, on the copper-plate, a stroke of punctuation after the word

preceding this name, and a mark of suspense under its final consonant. In that

case, we must read ‘ Godalf,’

§ In the original, patia/ld. Sce a note on the preceding inscription.

248 Of two Kdicts bestowing Land. [ No, 3.

sellors, chaplains royal, warders of the gate, generalissimos, trea-

surers, justiciaries, physicians, diviners, custodians of the female

apartment, envoys, and persons holding the proprietorship of ele-

phants, of horses, of towns, of mines, and of herds of black cattle.

Be it known to you accordingly as is here written: that the

aforesaid village, with its water and soil, with its iron-mines and

salt-pits, with its fisheries,* with its holes and saline wastes, with

_and including its groves of madhikas and mango trees, its orchards,

timber, grass, and pasturage, with everything above and below, its

four abuttals being adjusted, as far as its borders: on the sixth day

of the dark semi-lunation, in the month of Mdgha, in the year

eleven hundred and eighty-two; or, expressed in numerals, on Fri-

day, the 6th day of the moon’s wane, in Mdgha, Samvat 1182: was

by us granted,t by patent, for as long as the moon and sun shall

endure :—having bathed in the Ganges, at S'ris‘a-pratishthana ;f

having satisfied, in due form, the divinities of the Vedas, the saints,

deceased mortals, malignant spirits, and our own group of progeni-

tors; paying homage to the sun, of brilliance potent in penetrating

the regions of darkness ; worshipping him on whose brow is a seg-

ment of the moon; adoring Vasudeva, the protector of the triple

world; offering to fire an oblation of abundant rice, milk, and

sugar ; and in order to promote the desert and renown of our mo-

ther, of our father, and of ourself; taking water in our palm puri-

fied by bending it into the shape of a cow’s ear, and by kus’a grass:

-—to the fortunate Chhichhé S’arman and Vachhata S‘arman, sons

* This appurtenance of landed property is an addition to the particularities of

the former grant. Its recital may be taken to mark an advance in the refinements

of conveyancing.

+ Several unquestionable blunders of the lithographer, or of the engraver, I have

silently corrected, in transcribing the original: for instance, in the Sanskrit of this

word, Farat, for yaewt; and above, Hcy for Pca, ATT for ar, wafta-

waz for afar, and a general misuse of the sibilants. This inscription, like the

former, also has elaw si, aH, &c.; which have already been the subject of

remark,

+ Q’ris’a, or ‘the lord of 9’rs,’ is Vishnu. If S’ris‘a-pratishthana be not the

name of a town, it may, perhaps, indicate the celebrated temple of Bindu-madhava

at Benares, on the bank of the Ganges.

1858. | Of two Edicts bestowing Land. 249

of the venerable* and auspicious A’lhana,} grandsons of the vene-

rable Uttama, and descended from the stock of Gautama and the

three lines of Gautama, A’ngirasa, and Autathya.

Giving heed to this endowment, and observant of owr commands,

you will discharge all dues, as they fall to be liquidated ; fo wit,

share of produce, tribute, quadrivial tolls, Muhammadan amerce-

ments,t and the like.

Bearing on this topic are these couplets :§

* * * * * *

x * * * * % *

6. Not by the digging of a thousand reservoirs, nor even by a

hundred hippocausts, nor by the gift of ten millions of kine, does

the resumer of land make expiation. ||

* The original word is thakkura; and so of the ‘ venerable,’ qualifying the name

of Uttama. See a note at p. 241, supra.

+ In the abstract translation of this inscription, above referred to, this name is

strangely metamorphosed into “Alhad Pathuck Ras, a Brahmin of Singolee.”

A’godali will account for ‘‘ Singolee.”

{ The latter two classes of impositions are not specified in the previous inscrip-

tion. From the first of them it may possibly be infer:ible that the impoverish-

ment of the imperial coffers had recently given rise to anew species of fiscal

exaction ; and, from the other, that the encroachments of the Northern invaders

were gaining head, and that their domination was beginning to be recognised.

§ Of the six stanzas with which this instrument terminates, the first five are,

with the exception of various readings, identical with the first five at the end of the

former inscription. In the second distich at the conclusion of the present grant,

we have, but without change of import, qxq]-yI qacaqTcutT: in place of qxTy-

ataixut:. Inthe fifth distich, again, we here find a transposition ; equally

immaterial: araat <auaa y for qawsa want.

| In one place where this couplet occurs, the reading is HBQUW GMYUQWAAT

‘by a thousand repetitions of the edjapeya sacrifice 7 at which seventeen victims

were immolated ; and a@f_q ‘ obtains emancipation’ for wufla ‘ performs atone-

ment.’ See Journal of the As. Soc. of Bengal, for 1841, p. 100.

Elsewheye, the word afyq, in the first measure of this couplet, is omitted.

Journal of the As, Soc. of Bengal, for 1839, p. 493.

The immolation of a horse was once accounted “the king of sacrifices,” and

equal to effuce all sin, See the laws of the Manavas, XI., 261; and Colebrooke’s

Miscell. Essays, Vol. I, p. 238,

250 Of two Edicts bestowing Land. [ No. 3.

This grant on copper was indited by the respectable and thrifty

Jis'warvipa.

INDEX TO THE Metres IN tHese INscrIPrions.

Stanza. First Inscription, before the prose.

1,3. Anushtubh.

2. ILndravajra.

4,7. S‘drdulavikridita.

5, 6.

; Vasantatilakd.

After the prose.

1, 2,4—7,10. <Anushtubh.

3. S’dlint.

8. Indravajra.

9. Vasantatilaké.

Second Inscription, before the prose.

1—7. As in the first inscription.

8. Vasantatilaka.

9. Dratavilambita.

After the prose.

1—5. As in the first inscription.

6. Anushtubh.

Fort-Saugor, July 9, 1857.

The proper time for entering on the performance of tliis sacred rite was, accord-

ing to Mahidhara, the eighth day of the moon’s increase in Phdlguna ; and, in the

fabulous days of longevity and leisure, it was piously prolonged to twenty-seven

years. Weber’s White Yajur-veda, pp. 692 and 772.

That the sacrifice of a horse was not, originally, allegorical, is now placed beyond

doubt. The animal was cooked,‘and some of it was eaten. Prof. Wilson thinks

that part of the flesh was boiled, and part of it roasted. More probably, however,

after the preparation of a broth, the meat was transferred from the caldrons to the

spits. Inthe present day, Hindus who use animal food invariably deal with it

after this manner, See the English Translation of the Rig-veda, Vol. II., p. 117,

foot-note.

From the Mahabharata it appears thut, at a later period than the Vaidika, it

was held sufficient to inhale the fumes of the seething gelatin of the victim. The

whole was afterwards burnt. <As'wamedha-parvan, s'\. 2644-2648.

1858. | Catalogue of the Coins. 251

Catalogue of the Coins in the Cabinet of the late Col. Sracy, with

the estimated prices attached.*—By H. Tuomas, Esg., late of the

BCS.

GREEK COINS.

Gold. Silver. Copper. Rs. As. P.

— tt, — Drachma AtExanper the Great, ......... 5 0 0

— 1 — MHemidrachma—Seleucus Nicator,......... )

Obv. Head with Lion’s-skin as in Alexan- |

der’s Coins. Rev. Jove seated, In- +12 0 0

scription BASIAEQS SEAEYKOY. Mo- |

nogram HB .... ms

— 1 — Tetradrachma of Antiocuvs Magnus—

Wt. 252 grains—Obverse a very per-

fect head, in high relief. Reverse, Apollo

sitting on the cortina, Inscription

BASIAEOS [AN] TIOXOY.. + 50 0 O

— 1 — Protemy—with Eagle reverse—Wt. 211

OTAUSS c\.0 Mi meeeoee LO: OO

— 2 — Ditto less perfect, ‘at 6 ‘each, . ehh aoe 120 0

a .4, 2 Copper Coins, at 1 each (2 silver casts) 2 O O

Bactrian Corns.

HuTHyDEMUs.

— § — Four Tetradrachms as in “ Ariana An-

tiqua,’ plate I. figs. 6,7 and 8—one

ditto as No. 11, at 8 Rs. a Ds: 40 0 QO

— — 5 Ohne very perfect irs Ald: pl. &

fig. 13, 1é 0-.0

One ditto very “good “6—three bad at 2 12 0 0

DEMETRIUS.

— 3 — Two Oboliasin A. A. pl. I. figs.4& 5,

one very perfect, at 12 and 5, ......... Ty .0) -0

One with Kawsia as in A. A. home pl.

vi Ng eS Se Aes ae Ld OO

APoLLODOTUS.

— 1 — A.A. pl. IV. fig. 15, coin imperfect, ... 8-0--0

—- 2 — A.A. a IV. fig. ‘i in very good order,

at 6, Sate ete Re ee LZ! QO

mks 7 Zip OF. 0

* This Catalogue was received through Mr, Grote after the subscription had

been set on foot by the Society for the purchase of this collection in its integrity.

It is published with the valuation of each piece as fixed by Mr. Thomas when tie

Trustees of the British Museum ware negotiating for the purchase of the Cabinet,

it is believed that Mofussil collectors will be glad to have such particulars,

—Eps

2L 2

Catalogue of the Coins. [No. 3.

. Silver. Copper. Rs. As. P

iW cae Brought forward,.. NE ky ca

— 8 A.A.pl. IV. fic. 16, in bad order, fie

— 6 Four of the type given under No. 17, pl. 0 0

1V. A. A. and two of a maa ht varied

device, at 1 each,.

EUCRATIDES.

1 — A Drachma, not in A. A., Cunningham,

pl. V. fie, 2, in very good order,........ 20 00

10 — Oboli, A.A. pl. III. fig. 5, imperfect, at a >! -O..O

4 — Ditto, A. A. ditto fig. 6, ditto, at 1-8, 6 0 0

— 1 Coinas A. A. ditto fie. 9, Pr perfect... Ss . 00

— 6 Copper damaged, at 8 as.,. ; eee ae, Oe

HELIOCLES.

1 — MHemidrachma, No. 8, supp. pl. A. A.... 50 0 O

— 1 Cunningham, Boa II. fic. 9 . Rare but im-

perfect, .. ; siechateps Peoria! ape aielal SR ce OT

ANtIMAcHUS.

6 — Six very perfect Silver ee A.A. II.

15, 8G Veter St ates ee ees DOD

Auyyras.

— 1 Invery good order. Original engraved

JA. S)B Mel. Vv. pl, AGemies 1, cee rt ig 0 ©

‘Dype ms imdige 14, pl. Tl Al Alle. coca

ANTIALCIDAS.

1 — OneS. Coin. Fig. 12, pl. Il. A. A. very

perfect and rare, .... 12.0 "0

8 — Hemidrachma’s as No. id, “pl. isa

very perfect, at 7, ..... 21 0 0

3 — Ditto as No. 3, pl. VIL. “Cunningham,

(not in A. A.) two specimens imper-

fect, one in very good order, at 6, ...... 18 O°”

— 1 Copper, as fig. 13, LH II. A. A. in nie

preservation, 1 aphee 3.0 0

VoNnoneEs.

— 2 Cunningham, pl. VII. fig.5. Rare, but

in badverder:'at 1-4, . a weiushdn Hk Maes 8 0

— 1 Vonones and Azas, unpublished type.

Obv. Hercules with Club. Rev. Pan-

ther as in A. A. VII. 8, but in the

reverse direction, in fair order, ...... .. 16 0 0

ARCHEBIUS.

— 1 Circular Coin, Victory and Owl,imperfect, 10 0 0

(1 Silver Forgery.)

— 1 Square Spalygis, A. A. VIII. fig. 13, in

OO ORUGIN MEE ate ell, sae Bee 0 0

(1 Silver Forgery do.)

46 31 469 8 0

1858. ] Catalogue of the Coins. 253

Gold. Silver. Copper. Rs. As. P.

a Ar 31 Brewahe forwards c.......ie: cusses 20a 08), 0

— — 8 Hermeus, imperfect, at 8 as.,.. Birr Pir

— — 4 Kadaphes, AA ay an fair order,

at Leas ones : 0 0

— — 26 Kadphises, bad, ‘at 1: anna,. ME tdegh td Eker HO

ABDAGASES.

— — 1 In fair order—rare,.. hone |, at AeA

— 1 — Small Silver Coin Gondophares, . Le O2e BORO

— — 14 Copper Coins of ditto, at 2 as., ............ 112 9

— — 6. Ditto of dynasty of ditto, BA Reyes uy ee O- 12 +30

MENANDER.

— 41 — A,A.IV.1.—Very perfect coins with ied

varieties of mint-marks, ............-...6+ |

— 13 — Bare-headed obverse, ......... Foo. 0. 6

— 21 — MHelmed head obverse, all in first ‘rate |

condition, (75 coins, at 12 as. each),.. >

— 1 — Helmed head, with Owl ROUCLSO. heaven 10,0; 0

— — 8 Copper Coins, at 8 as. on five Silver

Boraeries ii .ke's. 5 tesisms eee ia Ol, .O

Moas, &e.

— 2— Elephant head, type A. A. pl. VIII. fig.

11, worn ? ee OS ae de ne 0 0

Lr 8... Avas ,—one Cunningham, Ki 6; one

new type, obv. Horseman. Rev. Minerva

Promachus; at.Grand) 12, 000...000..00.. 18) 0, 0

— 2 — Small Coins Azas, at 1 RK. "each, HRS A ah Be Orin

— — 57 Fifty-seven Copper Coins, some good

types tarionderiai as.) 2.0.1.0 La. 4 @

= 29) Pakores, imperfect, at) 2as., ....:........ 8 10 0.

— — 33 Small Eucratides, at 1 anna.,........ 2b ©

— — 10 Pakores style of obverse, with | reverses,

Fire Altars, each 2, ... 1-4 0

— — 2 Old Indo-Bactrian type, A. A. XV. figs.

AG aaa T jab ED ASD eto wes Ee 8-0

— — 29 Nameless King, Mey, Be EX 11, 12, &e. at

PAUL io detas wines bee eedeteteee kee) de Le O

ARSACIDAN.

— 24 — Various Kings, at 1-8, ................0... 86 0° 0

— — 8 Ditto Ditto, “at 10 aS., 4 iy ota cen, OF-O

— — 13 Small Copper Coins, various reverses, at

: 14 anna. ; SOLA Skater) Ser eG

— — 27 Ditto, less perfect, at 1 anna., bandits LO

| — — 6 Small Eucratides, at 1 an.,. Oi 6,0

| — — 36 Kadphises, at 1 an.,.. opm Br. Si-O

_ — — 656 Kanerkis, at 13 an., various reverses, ee

fee « — «84. Ooérkis, Hlephant, 2 7 an, PLO O

| +, 153 487 653 15 6

254 Catalogue of the Coins. [ No. 3.

Gold. Silver. Copper. Rs. As. P.

» 153 487 Brovusht forwards. oo... sesesaras 653 15 6

— — 58 Ditto, seated figure, + an.,................. 118 0

— — 211. Miscellaneous Coins, at 1 an.; 2.......... 18 8-0

SASSANIANS.

— 21 — Pure Sassanians, various kings, at 1 R.,

— 3 — Khisriis, at ditto, Ss ie ae 30 0 0

—e oe a nea, Sassanians, at ditto, and broken Dits,

— — 74 Sassanians, damaged, ple BER ta gett abe DO

—- — 387 Indo-Sassanians of later date (some silver), 6 0 0

Vardnas and Inpo-Sassanran lower

types.

— 8 — Good selected specimens, ..........0.....+5

— 29 — Small Fire Altar Reverses,......... er. GO

— 184 — Miscellaneous mixed specimens ; 171 at

2 as., clabaregsei

woos. LDF 728 5 6

—— Hivnpvu Corns. ——

Kabul Kings. Brahmans.

— 1 — Khedava, V. R. See Jour. Roy. As. Soc.,

Vol TX. pha » fie.o, Ge 0d)

— 7% 3 Syalapati’s, at 12 as. ‘See Ariana Anti-

gua, 21 oe Reutiti G.. deestisneeel cco f< 80

— — 6 4 Vanka Devas, 2 Samantas, Hlephant

type. See A. A. figs. 11 and 12, pl.

ALX.., at Drags wise, vee 4/3 0

— 47 — Samanta Déva’s, at 8 as. each. A. A,

ALK, file &e., «ele 2a... 860

— — 384 Rude (Horseman and Hindi Reverse)

J. A.S. Bengal, Vol. LV. ap 86, fig.

TU ab Zins. uke. 4. 4 0

— — 4 Selected Coing, one unpublished, i in all 4- 1, 412-3

— — 10* Madanpalas, at 6 as. Ariana Antiqua,

XIX. 23, saint 312 0

— — 18* Chahera devas, at 3 as., rk Ae Keats (&e., 2 Oe

— — 4* Anungapalas, at 8 as. mA, Wg Del Xe 1 aC. ae O ate

— — 8 Malaya Vermas at 8 ass; ds ALS. Bengal,

Vol. IV. pl. 36, fig. 17, 2 L.. 8a

—) — 10 Gobindag. ©. at 15.85... ..:.miccid. dekh renee 015 O

— — 16 Kutlugh Khang, at 2 as., AgA. SLX SSe 2 0

— 33 Silver Coins of these types, at 4: as.,.. 8 4 0

—_ — 57 Billon ditto, at 3 as., wahiehGs Ms 11 8

— — 157 Copper Coins, at 3 an., - Sidhe site ead

— — 2* Madanpalas, at 6 AE oa sais, wrist taphs 012 0

88. 319 87 11 6

18538.]

Catalogue of the Coins.

Gold. Silver. Copper.

,» 88. 319

—_—_ oo

— -—,

— — 38

— — 10

— — 447

— — 46

— — 59

ak aaa

— — 2

a ey

ee OF

ae 28

qe 3} oe

| a

epee; ok

igen eee

Be a

[eee ks

2h ||,

eee pe. | ws

er 4,

— — 18

15 — —

eye 4

[Aas ae

° aS

| a

. i

i a

Beet 109

46 182.1094

Brough forward,

sli Anungapala,..

4* | Prithvi Raja, at 6, : as. +) ACK R 13.

3 Someswaras, at 1B. each. A. A. XLX.

28, Jour. R. A. 8. Vol. IX. pl. fig. 16,

Selected Kangra Coins, at 4 as. each,

10 Selected Specimens, at 12 as., .........

Coins of the Kangra Dynasty (unarrang-

ed), at 1 an.,

Comprising nine varieties of Coins of the

Datta and Mittra families, at 8 as,

Coins Miscellaneous, Mittra’s, &e. at 8 as.

Silver Ayodhya, at 8 Rs. each, ............

Copper dibtuabeo each rs ec ehgn wee

Copper Miscellaneous, at 6 as., ....

Coins Yandheya, :

Coins Behat se } AMG ay, dcassqueh,

Skanda Gupta, at 20 Rs., ...

Samudra very perfect, 60 Rs.,

Ditto, at 18 Rs. each,..

5 Chandra Guptas, at 19 each, 6 Kacha,

a 20. pee:

Kumara Giiptas, at 19 ‘each, .

Ditto, cast, 6 Rs., wee

Saurashtran and ‘Giipta Coins, at 12 ¢ aS.,

Gupta Coins with Peacock Reverse, at

12 as. J.A.8. Bengal, Vol. IV. pas

49, fig. 10, 11, SOURIS :

Copper, at 4 Bes ase os :

Debased Gold (Blectrum) | “Coins, “Prata-

paditya, at 4 Rs.,.

Copper ditto, at 2 as.,

15 Gold Kanouj Coins, at 8 RBs. each, .

2 Silverat1 RR,

Copper, at. 2 agsis).3..

Indo-Seythie Baréna at 19 Bs., xt ee

Kanérkis, one very perfect 35 Rs. ., the

other 18, aren »

Ooérki, 18 Rs. , (three Forgeries : a 180),...

Later Gold Coins, at 10 Res i

Silver Hyrkodes, one very perfect, 14 Rs. 4,

6 at 12 as. each, 4-8,

Cast Coins, at 1 an. each, Limes

Small Coins of the ‘Type depicted i in fic.

33, pl. XX XIX. Vol. IV. Jour. A.

Bengal, (in number 3,479 !)

eee fF cee ret ese eae sess es see eoes

eo oe |

wai

255

Rs. As. P.

o7 Ih’ "6

ee! QO

oe “GO

O12 eo

i eee

27 ta 0

Ze 0770

DAS Nallet gel O)

15.70 70

LO, 8070

J. 2) 0

i? .0.,..0

20°09

GO”. O60

90 O O

iy. 0.0

To 20" ,.O

6 0 O

2°42 0

12-0 0

5 aa ee

8 0 O

2. 4. O

180 0 O

25 0 O

0 4 O

95 0 0

538 0 O

137 0 -O

30 O O

rs $ 0

613 0

GoeOs" 0

vey L726

256 Catalogue of the Coins. [ No. 8.

Gold. Silver. Copper. ; Rs. As. P.

46 132.1094 Brought forward jias..wiles oonienence.egs 980 1 6

— 373 30 373 Silver punch- marked Coins. J. A. 8.

B. Vol. IV. pl. 35, figs. 25, 26, &e. The

average weight of these coins is about

D0 Sr b OBS. CACM, vc. ..0n eee. Oo | O

30 Copper, at 1 an., 114 0

18\— = 18 Small Gold Cains of Nipal—total

weight 12 grains, ... a 3 0 0

— 11 — 11 Silver Coins, at 1 R. each, sjnaes ee, AOL. MO

— 3 — 35. Assam Coins, Bb Diy io cidi nie cognate aD

— 8 — 38 Ditto, at 1-8, .... 4 8 O

— 30 1 30Silver and 1 Copper, ‘at 10 as. s. each,. 19.6.0

— 6, —— Tipperah.Coing; at.2-8, 2.2... 6. couse, OO

— 2 — Kuch Behar, at GILEO, sca hiastaciog onimecutgh eaeemrenL Os.

— $8 — Kuchar, at 14 RSE... onan eiamanad acre AO

aA = olkars, ab 2-8) 0... cre ttern ote: poe. (OL -O

—- 2 — Arrakan, at 14 as., Lule mtinctiS cyscad tite teae ie A

—-10 — Ten Local Rupees, at 1- 2, delenda ne eae 11 4 O

— — 5 Ceylon Coins, at 10 as.,...... ee 2 a0

3 — — Gold Coins (and two small pieces of

Old) nan. eae os acts Rn ae hes ae. Oe IO

— 2 — Tipput Sahebs, ...... woe (Os 0

8 — — 8 Gold Hins, weight 55 or. “each,.. wesyeg tee Oe)

— — 41 410, Kashmir Coins, at 3 as. each, . ected 711 0

— — 40 40 Ujain Coins, at 10 as. each, ing og 41 0

— — 11 6 Satrap and 5 Aviano Pali Coins, at

8 as., See oe Hake ie so

— — 46 Inferior ditto, at 2 as. Syit deae cure Se weer ee cee 512 0

70.586.1268 | 1303 7 6

—_———_——. MonamMMepan Corns. a

Thé Kuaties.

L.. egy “Dated AGH 157, 5 ok. cee ad eh cides onsh ies neg ety ne

1 — — Small Coin, without date, landing gata Seale wsite AAO OE ouee

— 1 — Struck at Hap Iefllicawh aelea gene

— 3 — Ditto at 4,<4) A. H. 151 and 191,

— 2 — Ditto Medinat ul Salim. A. H. 155 iG

LS CA Se pista fied, pee, Oh, oe

— 1 — Mint illegible, dated A. H. ‘158, sateen cen

— 1 — Struck at oblws,% A. H. 169. pipe as

— 1 — Ditto Bokhara. A. H. 194, ........

9 Coins, at 5 Rs. 4]

— 1 — Unique, minted at 5e%,| Mishdpir. A.

H. 211. On the Odverse is the name

&atb on fev. io ydlbs| ee Se decide ae ee

2 10 0 80 0 OFF

1858.]

Gold. Silver. Copper

ar ae

pee

epee) 5

— — 22

— — 13*

—- — 19

— — 135

oe AM

La a

a a

aan

= ¢ —

| a

_ i

— > __

me 7) |

me 18 2.

8 111 194

Catalogue of the Coins.

SAMANIS.

Nasr bin Ahmad—Nishaptr. A. H. 824,

Mahmid of Ghazni—Herét. A. H. 4:12,

iGO iE RESIN CRA trite len! |

MIscEeLLANnous SILver Corns.

Coins of sye=” Whe yS (y2J15° Samarkand ?

dated A. H. 761? at 10 en) ee

Herat Coins, dated A. H. 751, at 1-8, ..,

tl-Khan Bokhara SIDE ch cee MOR ae Ps Yara a

Shah-Rédkhis, at 9 CEE eens) Oey

A Ghazni Coin of Ble buy Sos? P AH.

LAbusdid : 1 Khakdn sU; US A. H. 749 -

1 Abdullah A. H. BE ets pie MY

Two more of a similar class, 2 Rs. One

Seljak Kéi Khusri bin Kéi Kobad,

3 ES heh BE, Mi Ne ie kw a a

Miscellaneous Silver Coins, at 8 as.,.....,

Guazni Corns.

Manstir bin Noh Samani, struck at He-

rat, A. H. 860 and BOL TAN)

Subuktaging, at EHS 1b! JP

Ismail, V. R. Pap salts ciehenthaien Lana UML AeE A | Os

Mahmid, Herdt and Ghazni, at 14, .,....

Seif ud dowlat, V. RB. 5: one Unique

BVO tOy wer HHL Wil ii oles Es.

at 6 as.,

257

Rs. As. P

80 O 0O

12 O O

20* Of 0

038 12 QO

tS 2-0

3 0 Q

t 8.0

5 10 O

a 0.0

6 0.0

5 0 0

2 0 0

24 0 0

a 0.0

G 0.0

28. 0..0

EF! -0:..6

* 0.0

612 0

333 11 0

hed

258 Catalogue of the Coins. [No. 3.

Gold. Silver. Copper. Rear As. Pi

8 111 194 Brought forward, ctefpedml LO

2 — — Masaud’s 1 Ghazni, A. H. 423 ‘at 12. a

seconanat VL h.024 2, 2G 0.

— 3 — Balkh Coins, at D2 a8. 7 aes 2 4 O

1 — — Gold Coin, dated A. H. B23 ives wae ae O AO

— 2 — Modtids, at 1-8, tidehs ethers alenek dae ee ae

—i) ay pal brahim’ sat U2.as. 4 io Clee es ee, OF OO

—j 2 —., Behram Shah, ab.1-8,. 0.250. ccsegceeattecuenes t Oe 20

— 1 — Khusrd Shah, seg we 2 O30

— — 19 Copper Coins, at 2 as. each, yA (ee |)

1 — — Ala-ud-din Maeunad bin "Pakash, . ake 8 0 0

— 2 — One large and one small Silver Coin, at

3 Rs. and 1-8 Pach, scaeunertectaces ame 4 8 O

— — 22 Copper Coins, at 5 as., .............-00. O14 O

ParHan Kines oF DELHI.

1 — — ‘Tughlak Shah, A. H. 721, (wt. 168 er.) 24 0 0

1 — — Muhummad bin Tughlak, A. H. 727, 20- 0: 0

1 — — Ditto. New Type, Déogir, A. H. 727,

(200 gr.) . 50 0 0

— § — Nasir-ud-din Mahmiid, ‘at 2. ee O) -ONG

— 4 — Balban’s, at 3,. to Ea Oe

mace) A a OZ SIAO a SEE ky Rik oe US ORR a aaa meee, bk

—- 5 — Kaikobads, at 4, See ee! ONE

— 1 — Tughlak Shah, Bi 5 0 O

Oi 4. Kimerd unique, but in bad preservation, 50 0 O

— 17 — Ala-ud-din Mohammed Shah, at 1-8each, 25 8 0

— 15 — Shir Shahs, at 1-8, 22. 87

aa LS Sega Shahs. One at 5 Rs., ‘the rest ab ed 8, 24 8 0O

Patrudn’s (Copper.)

— — 64* Muhummad bin Sam, at 23 a is On

— — 82* Altemsh, at ditto, SO) iii tink

— — 28* Masaud Shah, at 2 as., Oe es Sela yr

—! 2. “GI1*Mabiniyat' ds ‘asl Gee eo

— —. 44 Balbarmarat’2: as.) % oan adeendnde beac eet OO

—— i —= LOR Kan Ke padiiat 22s) ioe, ok. ee

aS) 22 ARE Moroz. deme ia: 2ycise eet Boe. cbt eee 6 0 0

ath 2 WOOP AlAsndedim, tab, 1 ait dye. scenes 4 hae eee

— — 87* Umbarak Shah, at 3’ as., 6 5.4

— — 44* Tughlak Shah, at 3 as., vissvddecsenn. 9 >. 4

MvunumMMAD BIN J'UGHLAK. |

— 5 — Debased Silver Coins, at 2 Rs. dated 727,

(729) FEO. Fh Chi wt 10

at) 2. 2 jkare Doulutghad Coins, rat 2. 8. 5

— — 5 Varieties of Nos. 104 and 1051 Pathan

Kings, Delhi,” 5

i o—-—'2 Unpublished varieties, ‘at 4, 8

15 194 715 766 1

1858.]

Catalogue of the Coins.

Gold. Silver. Copper.

15 194 715 Brought, forward,,....cc00 «01.5505

— 1

— 42

— 8

— 15

— 33

4 Three Hasht-Ganis, at 2 Rs., one Do-

Gani, at 5, ia

55 Selected Coins (many Silver), ‘at 4g BB in

23 Ordinary Bronze (forced currency), at 2 as.

1* Billon Coin, dated 726, A. H. a

31* Ferdz Shah, large Coins, at 6 as.,.........

BL. Ditto, small ditto,ati 2 as. jio6steccc.. +.

11* Bahlol Lodi, at 5 as., .......

38 Sekandar bin Bahldl, at 2 as.,

37 Shir and Islam Shéhs, at 2 as,

Moexuun Corns.

— Akber, at 18 Rs.,. Ps eras

_ Jebdngir (Libra, Pisces, Taurus) four at

20, one at 18, es aR ent. Cone

oe Shéh Jehan,

— Aurunegzéb, ta NP BOS CAC yi jaaiainab ¥ sia bi

— Shah Alum,

eae pirat Old. COLA) do wsiiculieke vena sildce vos

Moguvt Sinver Corns.

au ODE? S,.AbyL-2, 444.25.

— Jehangir’s, 2 Leo, at 4, 2 Capricornus at

259

Kev As... P.

766 11 6

| ae ae

fel? 0

214 O

O 4 O

1110 O

6 6 O

Ser ayn 8

4, 1.270

4 10 O

2 Ose) OO

0 O

68 O O

4 0 O

Be Gt O

8, one Gemini, 10, B4 0

a Ditto i in the name of Nir Jehan Béoum,

at 7,.. Luge (2k @

-= Ordinary Coins of Jehangir, at 1- nal eee i

== Shah dehans, at ditto; ....... a. wan

— Aurungzéb’s, at ditto, Ses ted Seas cles et LOR, Ale O

— Ferodkshir’s, at ditto,.. ee

— Muhummed Shah, at do., 106 at 1- 2, He)

— Mordd Buksh, .

— 6 Shab Alem, 12 Md. “Akber 2nd, « at ma ‘t

— Bengal Sultans, at 2-8, NE TVHRL ;

43 Akber’s, &e., A 1 an. each, Phe aeRO

MiscELLANEOUS Mowasmtepan,

30 9 GuHaznavis, at 5 as.; 14 curious and

rare Coins, at 4 as. 6 ditto at 6,......

278 Mixed Coins, at 1 an.,

Tue SGFI Race, in Persia.

— Ismatn Suri very perfect, ...............+0

— Silver Coins various, at 14 as., ........

— Silver Persran Coins, Nadiris, &c. at 1- 2,

S-Oomaenid. Wajar, atrlod, oo. scceccses cesses

— Small Coins, at 7 Miia kes ddan v5 Ada cive

— Miscellaneous Silver Coins, at 9 as.,......

31 523 1317

-—-ONno

SNS) (ST

1.2)

—

[op

—

Oe COOK DO © On

Se o-oo SS >)

1556 14 6

2m 2

260 ._ Catatogue of the Coins. [No. 8.

Gold. Silver. Copper. Rs. As. P.

31 523 1317 Brougherorward ow bys ices ae 15386 14 6

— 18 — 7 large‘and 11 small Fusteh Ali Hem

at 1B. and 6.ag., <..s.. i, 2. 8

— 80 — Kasvzi Rupees, at 1B BBs La ee Pee OA

— — 158* Billon Coins of JauNPoRE wie: (diree

Kings) at 2 as., ... 19 12 O

— 6 60 Malwa Coins, six Silver, at 12 no ‘and

about 60 Billon, at lan., say 4 Rs.,. S> BAr®

31 627 1535 1651 4 6

MisceLLaNzovs Corns.

— 1 — An Oude Silver piece, we. 72 tolahs, ... 12 0 O

— 16 — A paper of Miscellaneous Si:ver Coins,

A, at 6 as.,. Coe pte MAT 6 0 0O

— —' 43° ‘Copper ditto A, ‘at 3 Lan, gate NYE AN 010 9

— 4 0O Silver Coins, B, at 2 Rs. each, ie RS OL -@

— — 19 Copper ditto, B, ab Qiass, VE oaeme me ond

— 3 — Silver Coins, ie at 2 Rs., sae 6 0 0

Some Chinese Cash and other “Copper

Coins, C, 0 0

About a seer r (2 Ibs.) ‘of worn 1 Copper

Comms, 2b 1-4 per Seer, 5.200000. sdemmass 1 4 0

— — 236 A bag containing 236 modern Local

pysa, at 7,. 311 0

— — 12 Twelve selected Coins, at 3 as. wand | a | bag

containing six seers, seven chittaks of

Copper Coins, at 1-4 per seer, ......... 9 4 9

— 182 -— Miscellaneous Rupees, at 1, ............... 132 0 O

— 110 — Smaller Silver Coins, at 3 as., Nat Vile de itor (20 ORR

— 11 — Small 8. Coins (in ‘another " packet), at

3 oe REPRE ate By Ue (ode 2 Lie

— — 4 Sassannat Coins of rare type, at 8as.,... 2 0 0

About half a seer of Copper Coins, at 1-4, 010 0O

— — 538 Roman second bronze Coins, among them

some rare types of Agrippa, Plotina, 68 4 0

Faustina the Elder and Faustina the

Younger, ‘at T4eneh; 8)... oenenete

— -— 17 Lower Empire Coins, at 6 as., ............ 6 6 0

277 384 277 3 6

Summary.

Gold. Silver. Copper. Rs. As. Pie.

Greek, &c......... age! oon NOT: 728605 0-6

CATA, os <a. 70 586 1,268 1,303 7 6

Mohammedan, 31 627 1,585 1651 4 6

Miscellaneous, . 277 304 277 38 6

Total Coins,... 101 1,842 4,884 3,960 5 O ‘Total Ks.

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

For May, 1858.

The monthly General Meeting for May was held on the 5th In-

stant.

The Hon’ble Sir James Colvile, Kt., President, in the Chair.

The proceedings of the March Meeting were read and confirm-

ed, no meeting having been held in April, in consequence of there

not being a sufficient number of members present to form a quo-

rum.

Presentations were received—

1. From the Hon’ble the Court of Directors, through the Go-

vernment of Bengal, two* sets of Photographic drawings of the an-

cient buildings at Bejapore.

2. From the Maharajah of Burdwan, a collection of stuffed

birds and animals, as described by Mr. Blyth in his list, and a block

of fossil wood (the last has not yet arrived).

8. From the Government of Bengal through Mr. Under-Secre-

tary Buckland, the 3rd volume of the Reg Veda Sanhita, edited by

Dr. Max Miller, and recently published under the patronage of the

East India Company.

4. From Roy Lokenauth Bose, Bahadur, Principal Sudder

Ameen, 24-Pergunnahs, a copy of his Bengali treatise on the Hindu

Religion.

5. From Colonel Abbott a small Indo-Greek sculpture with the

following note :—

* The Jummah Musjeed and Ibrahim Roza.

262 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 38.

‘‘T have the pleasure to present to the Society a piece of Indo-

Greek sculpture, representing a man seated on the earth, the left

hand supported on the left knee. The only garments are a pair

of short drawers and a species of Hessian boot. The features are

nobly developed. It has evidently formed part of the freize of a

cornice which has rested upon the head.

“To denote the weight thus supported, the neck is far buried

in the bust, and the muscles are swollen in volume. Jt must have

been executed before the Greek taste carried by the Macedonians

to Ariana had been greatly impaired by the barbarism around.

‘“‘T purchased it when in charge of the Hazara of a native, who

had found it in an old Fort of the Yoosufzye at the foot of the

Mountains.” .

6. From the same gentleman a copy of Pantographia. The

following note accompanied the Book :

“J have the pleasure to send for deposit in the Library of the

Asiatic Society, if approved by the Committee, a volume* which

I purchased of a man sent by me into Bokhara and the neighbour-

ing districts to collect coins previous to quitting the Punjaub.

‘Tt is a valuable, I believe, rare, work. But my object in plac-

ing it with the Society is to enable any person properly authorized

to claim it. It has evidently belonged to the enterprising and

sagacious traveller, William Moorcroft.

“Tt was purchased, so far as I remember, at Cabul. But I

could learn from the purchaser no particulars of interest connected

with it.

“Should the Volume be not claimed by any authorised person,

I make over my interest in it to the Asiatic Society.”

7. From R. Cust, Esq., C. S, copies of his Liyes of Rama, and

of Alexander the Great, pamphlets.

8. From Captain R. Maclagan, Principal Roorkee Thomason

College, three copies of Dr. Jameison’s Report on the Botanical

Gardens of the N. W. P.

9. From a gentleman (name unknown) the first 15 volumes of

the Irish Academy ‘Transactions.

* The Pantographia, By Fry.

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 263

10. From Dr. A. Weber, a copy of the White Yajur Veda, part

ELf.

11. From the Imperial Academy of Sciences and Belles-Lettres

at Dijon, through Mr. Oldham, the Memoirs of the Academy, Volumes

1 to 5, Second series, with an Atlas.

12. From Dr. Falconer through Mr. Oldham, a pamphlet on

the description of two species of the fossil Mammalian Genus Pla-

giaulax from Purbeck.

13. From the Geological Society of Dublin through Mr. Old-

ham, a series of its publications.

A note from Mohamed Hossein Ally Khan, Ex-Ameer of Scinde,

conveying his wish to withdraw from the Society, was recorded.

The election of Mr. B. H. Hodgson and Dr. Falconer, as Honorary

members of the Society was postponed under rule 6 of the Society’s

code.

Mr. Sutherland was named for ballot at the next meeting, pro-

posed by Rev. Dr. Kay, and seconded by G. H. Freeling, Esq., C. S.

Communications were received—

From Baboo Radanauth Sikdar, an Abstract of the Meteorologi-

eal Observations taken at the Surveyor General’s Office during the

months of October to January last.

2. From Mr. Cope a paper on Inscriptions on the public build-

ings of Lahore.

The Librarian and Zoological Curator submitted their usual re-

ports for the months of March and April last.

Colonel R. Strachey exhibited a model of the exceedingly in-

genious apparatus, designed by Mr. Stokes, Locomotive Superin-

tendent of the E. I. Railway Company, by which the motive power

of Locomotive Engines is ‘made applicable to drive paddle-wheels

of steamers. Several river-steamers have been built under Mr.

Stokes’ superintendence, and fitted with locomotive engines on this

system, and have been found to answer excellently in practice.

Colonel Strachey entered into some explanations as to the mecha-

nical principles involved in this apparatus, illustrating his remarks

by a model and some diagrams.

264 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [| No. 3.

LIBRARY.

The Library received the following accessions during the months of

March and April last.

Presented.

Rig-Veda-Sanhita together with the Commentary of Sayancharya,

edited by Max Miller, Vol. III. 4to. London, 1856.—By tHE Hon’sie

THE Court oF DirecTors, THROUGH THE GOVERNMENT OF BENGAL.

Selections from the Public Correspondence of the Punjaub Adminis-

tration, Lahore, Vol. III. No. 4, 4 copies—By tox PunsauB GovERN-

MENT.

Ditto from the Records of the Bombay Government, No. XLVI. New

Series.—Annual Progress Reports of the Executive Engineers in the

southern, central and northern Provinces of the Bombay Presidency in

1856-57.—By THE GOVERNMENT oF INDIA, Pustic Works Depart-

MENT.

Tables de la Lune, par P. A. Hensen, London, 1857, Royal 4to.—By

THE Lorps CoMMIssIONERS OF THE ADMIRALTY.

The Jumma Musjeed at Beejapore, being a Photographic drawing of the

Ibrahim Royal.—By tHe Hon’sie THE Court or Directors.

Report of the Results of the Administration of the Salt Department

during 1856-57, folio.—By THE GOVERNMENT OF BENGAL.

Die Germanen und die Romer in ihren Bechselverhur, pamphlet.—By

THE PRussIAN ACADEMY OF SCIENCES AT MUNICH.

The Almanac and Companion for the North Western Provinces and

the Punjaub for 1858.—By Mr. W. H. Carey.

Journal Asiatique, Nos. 39 and 40.—By tHE Roya Asiatic SociETy

oF Paris.

A Catalogue of the Bibliotheca Orientalis Sprengeriana.—By Dr.

SPRENGER.

The Oriental Christian Spectator for January and February, 1858.—

By THE Epiror.

The Oriental Baptist for March and April, 1858.—By tHe Epitor.

The Calcutta Christian Observer for March and April, 1858.—By THE

Eipitors.

Abhundlungen der Akademie Historischen Classe, Vol. VI.—By THE

AcADEMY.

der, Philosophe Classe, Vol. VI.—By THE SAME.

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. 265

Bouverd Tables Astronomiques.—By THE VENERABLE ARCHDEACON

PRATT.

Vividharta Sangraha, Nos. 48 and 46.—By Basu Rasenpratat Mir-

TRA.

Recueil des Actes de L’Académie Imperiale des Sciences, Belles-lettres

et arts de Bourdeaux, 3 Trimestre, Bourdeaux.—By THE ACADEMY.

Report of the Director of Public Instruction in the Lower Provinces

for the half year ending October 1857, Calcutta.—By tue Director oF

Pusuic Instruction.

Life of Alexander the Great, known in the Hast as Sikundar, Agra,

1854, pamphlet.—By R. Cust, Esq.

Rama the son of Dasaratha, King of Ajodya, Agra, 1854.—By THE

SAME.

Transactions of the Linnean Society, Vol. 22, Part 2.—By tue Sociery.

Journal of the Proceedings of the Linnean Society, Vol. I. No. 4, and

Vol. II., Nos. 5 and 6.—By THE samME.

List of the Linnean Society. —By THE sAME.

Address of the President T. Bell, Esq. to the Society.—By THE SAME.

Mémoires de Académie des Sciences, Arts et Belles-lettres de Dijon.

Tome I. to V. Second series, 8vo., with an Atlas of Plates, 4to..—By THE

ACADEMY. |

Description of two species of the fossil Mammalian Genus Plagialax

from Purbeck.—By Dr. H. Falconer, pamphlet.—By THr AuTHOR.

Journal of the Geological Society of Dublin, Vol. Il. Parts 2 and 3,

Vols. III. to VI. 8vo.—By THE Acaprmy.

Address at the 3rd and 5th Anniversaries, pamphlets.—BY THE SAME.

Journal of the Statistical Society of London, Vol. XXI. Part I.

Selections from the Records of the Madras Government, No. XLVI.

Report on Civil Dispensaries for 1856.—By THe Mapras GOVERNMENT.

Magnetical Observations made at the Hon’ble East India Company’s

Magnetical Observatory at Madras, 4to.—By THE saMz.

Speech of Col. Sykes in the House of Commons on February 18, 1858,

on the proposed India Bill, pamphlet.—By tHe AvTHOR.

Report on the Revenue Administration of the Lower Provinces for the

year 1855-56, pamphiet.—By tar GovERNMENT OF BENGAL.

Report on the Botanical Gardens of the Government, N. W. Provinces,

by Dr. W. Jameson, Roorkie, 3 copies, 1855, 4to.—By tae GovERNMENT

or THE N. W. Provinces.

Pantographia containing accurate copies of all the known alphabets in

the world ; together with an English explanation of the peculiar force or

266 Proceedings of the Asiatic Sociely. [ No. 38.

power of each letter, to which are added specimens of well authenticated

oral languages forming a comprehensive digest of Phonology. By E.

Fry, 1799, 8vo.—By Cou. ABBorr.

Report (35th) Annual of the Parental Academy or Doveton College, pam-

phlet, 1858.—By THE Secretary To THE DovEeTon COLLEGE.

A Treatise on the Mysteries of Hindu Religion in Vernacular, by Babu

Lokenauth Bose, pamphlet.—By THE AUTHOR.

Exchanged.

Atheneum for December and January, 1858.

The London, Edinburgh and Dublin Philosophical Magazine and Journal

of Science, Nos. 97 and 98.

Annaler der Chemie und Pharmacie, November, 1888.

Purchased.

American Journal of Science and Arts, Vol. XX V. No. 73.

Literary Gazette, Nos. 2135 to 2139.

Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Vol. 1, Nos. 1 and 2, 3rd

series, supplementary No. for December, 1857.

Annales des Sciences Naturelles, Tome VII. Nos. 3 and 4.

Description de L’Assique Septentrionale par Abon-obeid-eb-Rekri, 1857,

8yo.

Comptes Rendus, Nos. 23 to 26, December 1857, Nos. 1 to 5, January

to Ist February.

Tables Ditto, Tome XLIV. 1857.

Edinburgh Review for January, 1858, No. 217.

Journal des Savants for November, December, 1857, and January, 1858,

Die Orientalischen Miinzen des Akademie Miinzenbenets in Kongs-

berg on H. H. F. Neplman, Liepzig, 1858.

Revue des Deux Mondes, January and February, Ist and 15th, and

Ist March, 1858.

——— et Magasin De Zoology, Nos. 11 and 12, March 1857.

The Natural History Review, Vol. V. No. I. January 1858.

The Quarterly Review, No. 205, January 1858.

Atharva Veda Sanhita yon Roth und Whitning, Erste Abth.

Gourpass Bysa’cxk,

Librarian and Asstt. Secy.

The Asiatic Society’s Rooms,

Ist April, 1858,

1858. ] Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. 267

Kteport of Curator, Zoological Department, for May, 1858.

1. Dr. G. von Liebeg, having kindly permitted a native collector in

the pay of the Society to accompany him, in his recent visit to the new

penal settlement at Port Blair, on the eastern coast of the southern island

of Great Andaman, I have now much pleasure in reporting on the spe-

cimens that were obtained by him and by Dr. Liebeg himself, under cir-

cumstances of considerable difficulty.

In the class of mammalia, there are only a human bone and some skulls

of the undescribed wild Hog of the Andamans.

The bone is the left femur of probably an adolescent female. Length

147 in., by 22 in. in circumference at middle of trunk; the epiphyses

imperfectly anchylosed. Itis charred throughout; having been found

among the smouldering remains of a recently fired village.

On the same occasion were found the following bones of the wild Hog,

1. Skull of an adult boar, wanting the tusks and lower jaw. 2. Lower

jaw of a rather larger boar, with the series of teeth complete. 3. Skull

of an adult sow, with teeth in lower jaw complete, and the upper series

wanting only some of the incisors. 4, 5. Skulls of adolescent sows. 6, 7,

Heads wanting lower jaw, of adult sows. 8. Lower jaw of adolescent

sow. 9. That of a younger individual. All of these skulls are daubed

over with regular stripes of red ochre, and had been hung up as trophies

in the huts of the natives.

Sus ANDAMANENSIS, nobis, 2. s. Seemingly akin to the S. parurnsis

of New Guinea, and to Mr. Hodgson’s Pigmy Hog of the Nepal sal-forest,

which he terms PorcuLa sALVANIA. The entire length of the skull of an

adult male, from occiput to tip of the upper jaw, is only 104 in.: breadth

at zygomata 4% in.: palate to tip of intermaxillaries, 6 in.: series of

molars six (properly seven, the first having been displaced by the growth

of the tusks, which are shewn by the shape of their sockets to have been

large and abruptly curved outward and upward) ; longitudinal diameter of

the tusk-sockets 2 in.: series of six grinders 34 in.: from tusk-socket to

tip of intermaxillaries, 1f in.: breadth of occiput above, where nar-

rowest, 1 in.; and of bony palate, lin. The lower jaw of a rather larger

male measures 8% in. to tip of incisors; and height to summit of coronoid

process, 32 in.: the tusks project 1$ in., as in the Indian boar, and

are proportionately robust and keen-edged: series of six grinders 32 in.,

thence to the tusk 1 in., and midway, a little nearer the tusk, is situate a

small premolar: the hindmost grinder is longer, in its antero-posterior

diameter, than the penultimate by only one-half; and in the upper series

2N 2

268 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 3.

the hindmost is scarcely larger than the penultimate. This lower jaw is

that of a fully grown boar, whose hindmost molars had long been brought

into wear: in the other the hindmost molars are fully developed, but are

not abraded.

Of the sow, there are three skulls of fully adults, with the hindmost

molars worn; but one only has the lower jaw: in this, the upper plane

of the occiput, where narrowest, is only 4 in.; being in the two others

13 in.: the series of grinders is seven above and below; the tusks small,

asin S.inpicus. In other respects they resemble the boar skull, except

in being smaller: length, from occiput to tip of intermaxillaries, 93 in.;

and greatest width, at the zygomata, 4 in.

From the size of the skull of the adult boar, it may be estimated that

this animal would not exceed 15 in. in height, if indeed it is even so

high at the shoulder. The skull is much less elongated anterior to the

orbit than in ordinary Swine, that portion occupying somewhat less than

three-fifths of the entire length. Profile a little concave anterior to the

eyes, the forehead bulging into a convexity.

It is probable that the same species inhabits the Cocos islets, lying

north of the Great Andaman, and also the group of the Nicobars to the

south; though on the Great Coco it would appear that Hogs have only

been recently introduced by the Burmans, and may therefore be of a

domestic race derived from the continent. I have long had reason to

suspect thatthe Hogs of at least the Andaman islands would prove to be

of a peculiar species, and therefore calied Dr. Liebeg’s attention particu-

larly to the subject. The Rev. J. Barbe describes the Nicobar Pigs as

being apparently derived from the Chinese, and says nothing of their

being of a diminutive size :* moreover they appear to be domesticated ;

but so, I believe, are afew of the Sus papuEnsis in N. Guinea. Pro-

ceeding to the south and east, according to Dr. 8. Miller, the Sus vir-

TATUS inhabits Sumatra, with Java and Banka; 8S. verrucosus also inha-

bits Java; S. BaRBATUs, Borneo; S. CELEBENSIS, besides the Babarussa

(which is also in Buru and Ternate), Celebes ; 8S. TIMoriensis, Timor and

Rotti; and S. parurnsis, New Guinea: a goodly series of wild swine,

to which we now add the 8. ANDAMANENSsIS, which needs comparison most

with S. PAPUENSIS.

The wild Hogs of the mainland of Asia have not yet been properly

determined. They are found at all habitable elevations, and in all climates.

* J, A, §. XV, 352. In Mr. H. Busch’s ‘ Journal of a Cruise amongst the

Nicobar Islands,’ it is remarked that, in Teressa, “the jungle abounds with wild

Pigs, which afford the islanders both sport and provisions.”

ee =

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 269

Those of Siberia and Tartary (in the most extended sense of the latter

appellation) are probably identical with S. scropHa of Europe; perhaps

also those of Persia and Afghanistan :* but there would seem to be more

than one race in India, to judge from the skulls ; and while the ordinary

Indian wild Hog is also that of Ceylon, our museum contains a skull

from that island which considerably resembles the skull of S. BarBatus,

(as figured by Dr. S. Miiller); this is the 8S. zpYLonensts, nobis, J. A. S.

XX, 173. The ordinary wild Hog of India is designated S. inpicus by

Gray (being also 8. cristarus, Wagler); but the distinctions from S.

SCROPHA mentioned by Dr. Gray are not very satisfactory ;/ and he also

indicates a S. aFFINIS from the Nilgiris.t The countries eastward are

likely to yield some peculiar species, even to the south of China: but the

only peculiar Hog as yet properly determined from the whole mainland

of Asia is Mr. Hodgson’s tiny PorcULA SALVANIA.

Of birds, twelve species were obtained, one of which is a beautiful new

Shama.

KITTACINCLA ALBIVENTRIS, nobis, 2. s. Differs from K. MAacRouRA,

(L.) in its colouring, and in form of tail, the four middle feathers of

which extend little beyond the next pair, and the medial pair but 3,in.

(instead of commonly 2 in., as in the other). Abdominal region, vent,

tibial plumes, and inside of the wing anteriorly, pure white, like the upper

tail-coverts in both species ; the hindmost portion of the flanks, and the

lower tail-coverts, only, being deep ferruginous: four pairs of outer tail-

feathers more deeply tipped with white than in K. mMacroura: in other

respects resembling that species; being a true Shdéma, as distinguished

from a Dhyal (Copsycuus). Length of wing 33 in., and of tail4¢ in. A

third species of this genus, as distinguished from the nearly aflined Afri-

can genus CERCOTRICHAS, exists in the K. LuzoniENsIs (Copsychus luzo-

niensis, Kittlitz), of the Philippines.

The other species of birds from the Andamans are—

Halcyon COROMANDELIANUS, (Scopoli).

H. smyrnensis, (L.)

Corvus cuLMINATUS, Sykes.

STURNIA ERYTHROPYGIA, nobis. The only specimen has the upper and

lower tail-coverts, with the rump and tips of the tail-feathers dull white,

instead of deep ferruginous; but there is a faintly perceptible shade of

* Since writing the above, I have been assured of the existence of three most

distinct species of wild Hog on the plains of Mesopotamia.

+ Vide Proc. Zool. Soc. 1852, p. 130.

{ List of the Osteological specimens in the Collection of the British Museum.

270 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [| No. 3.

_ the latter, which I doubt not is fully developed in other Andaman exam-

ples. Heretofore only known from the Nicobars.

TEPHRODORNIS GRIsoLA, nobis. This species we have also from Cal-

eutta, Arakan, Pinang, and Java; so that it has probably been named by

the late Professor Temminck.

GEOCICHLA INNOTATA, nobis. Discovered in the Nicobars, and sub-

sequently obtained in Province Wellesley. “e

Copsycuvs sauxaris, (L.) Undistinguishable from Bengal specimens.

ARTAMUS LEUCORHYNCHOS, (L.) Badly so named; for the bill is of a

fine blue.*

Epottus ——? The Malayan species of Bhim-rdj, with rudimentary

frontal crest.

Pycnonotus socosus, (L.) The Burmese and Pinang variety, with

shorter and deeper-coloured crimson ear-tufts than in the Indian race.

CARPOPHAGA SYLVATICA, Tickell (C. enea of India, auctorum, and of

‘ Sumatra apud Raffles). Two fine specimens, quite similar to the con-

tinental race on either side,—+. e. differing from the marked peculiar race

of the Nicobars,—C. INSULARIS, nobis.}

In the class of reptiles, a species of Varanus was procured, but cir-

cumstances did not permit of its preservation.

In that of fishes, the most remarkable is a curious new genus of the

Blenny group, with broad expanded pectorals, thrown out as in the

Loches of the genus HomatoptTera (apud Bleeker, Balitora, Gray, Pla-

tycara, McClelland) :—

ANDAMIA, nobis, x. g. Form elongated, with large expanded pectorals

and caudal, and a long serrated anal which is also permanently expanded ;

the ventrals short, even with the pectorals, and consisting each of an

outer simple ray and an inner divided ray, which are separated nearly to

the base. Head depressed, with rather small eyes, placed vertically, and

distantly apart; the mouth opening downward, and furnished with a :

remarkable labial apparatus : in front it is covered by a thin overflapping

upper lip, which is connected laterally by a plicature with a fold or flap

of membrane underneath, at a short distance from the mouth behind it:

minute marginal teeth in both jaws, which are perceptible to the touch

as a slight asperity. Dorsal fin extending the whole length of the back,

* The alleged new Indian species of Arramus, described by Dr. Nicholson in

the Proc. Zool. Soc. 1851, p. 195, by the name A. eucullatus, seems to be no

other than CaAMPEPHAGA syke«sI, Strickland !

+ The CHatcopHaps of the Nicobars appears to be On. avausta of the late

Prince of Canino.

1858, | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 271

becoming higher on its posterior half; its spinous and soft rays not easily

distinguishable, and the second and third rays are a little elongated in

the males (at least of the species described, which also has a small pal-

mated appendage over each eye).

A. EXPANSA, nobis, 2. s.

D. 36.—V. 26.—P. 14.—C. 11.

Colour dark plumbeous above, with slight pale mottled transverse bands

on the sides: the gill-covers studded with minute dusky specks: dorsal

fin dusky ; the ventral surface and anal fin whitish, with a dark spot on

each ray of the latter: membrane of the tail colourless, with conspicuous

black rays; the caudal rays extending beyond the membrane: the tail

having a rounded form, and being almost continuous below with the anal

fin. In a young individual, the dorsal fin is pale, with the exception of

the first two rays, which are black. In adults the pectorals and posterior

half of the dorsal are marked (more or less distinctly) like the caudal,

black rays on colourless membrane: ventrals pale. Length 33 in.

SALARIAS OLIVACEUs, nobis, m.s. One of the crested species of this

genus, having also a small appendage over each eye.

D. 12-19.—V. 22.—P. 13.—C, 12.

General colour dark olive-green, paler below, and also on the hinder

half of the body, where inclining to dull reddish: afew obscure dark

spots along the back, at base of the dorsal fin, not visible in all specimens,

and some minute black specks also towards the tail. Length 33 in.

PERIOPTHALMUs FUSCATUS, nobis, x. s. Pectorals rather large: ven-

trals deeply divided: anterior dorsal moderately high, with no elongated

filaments: caudal pointed, and as if obliquely truncated below.

D. 12-13.—V. 11.—P. 11.—C. 17.

Colour dusky leaden-brown above, obscurely mottled; the lower-parts

pale: the two dorsal and the caudal fins speckled with black; the pec-

‘torals less distinctly so; and the ventrals and anal spotless: on the gill-

covers are a few white specks; and the sides of the body are obscurely

marked with numerous small black spots. Length 34 in.*

GOBIUS BREVICEPS, nobis, z.s. A small nude-headed Goby, with the

eyes placed remarkably forward, imparting somewhat of a feline aspect

to the visage. Fins ordinary, or presenting no peculiar character.

D, 6.—1-9.—A. 1-8.

Colour a pale red-brown, with a row of large blackish spots along the

* We have a small Pertopraatmus from Mergui, which, in its colouring, ap-

proximates the P. argentinrygatus, C, and V., but has merely a slight infus-

cation of the first dorsal. D, 9-13,—V.12, If distinct, P, scINTILLANS, nobis.

262 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 3.

side from pectoral to caudal, tending rarely to form a continuous band,

above which the back is irregularly freckled with dusky specks of different

sizes: the two dorsal and the caudal fins are also minutely speckled with

dusky ; the other fins and the lower-parts pale and spotless. The largest

of several specimens measures 1% in.

G. CORYPHENULA, Valenciennes. This curiously formed species ap-

pears to be very common both at the Andamans and Nicobars, frequent-

ing the coral-reefs.

APOGON QUINQUEVITTaTuS, nobis, x. s. About 1 in. in length, with

four vertical black bands, a fifth at base of tail, and the occipital region

also of this colour. Form compressed ; the mouth small; scales also

small, numbering about 24 to end of lateral line, which terminates at the

posterior base of the second dorsal fin, and 3 rows above and 10 below

the lateral line, downward from the first dorsal. Eye large, occupying

two-fifths of the vertical height of the head.

Di 13-210.-A08-9:— Pe sbi) ae

Pectorals reaching beyond the second lateral band; the posterior dor-

sal and the anal fins projecting similarly as far as the base of the tail-fin.

MICROPHIS TENUIS, nobis, n. s. A very slender Syngnathous fish, with

16 body and 36 caudal rings, and dorsal fin upon the first 7 caudal rings:

D, 24°—FP. 162—C. 9?

Snout half the length of the head, and scarcely more compressed than

the neck ; body slightly heptangular, the two dorsal angles alone strong-

ly marked; tail quadrangular, and nearly twice as long as the head and

body. Dorsal aspect unmottled brown; the other facets of the body

(between the angles) marked, more or less distinctly, each with a white

band, the continuity of which is broken at the rings: on the tail similar

markings are but slightly indicated: no silvery appearance at the gill-

covers. Described from two female specimens, the longer of which mea-

sures nearly 4 in.

Of Mollusca, 22 marine species were procured; but all of them are

well known kinds, common in the Bay, and which need not therefore be

enumerated.

Among the Crustacea are five specimens of a magnificent land-Crab,

which sufficiently agrees with the description of CaRDISOMA CARNIFEX:

(Herbst.), by Milne Edwards; but which are nevertheless probably dis-

tinct and new, as no land-Crabs approaching them in size seem to be

known on the peninsula of India. There are two marked varieties (one

of them probably the result of former mutilation of a claw), each attain-

ing to above 3 in. across the carapace. In one of these varieties the claws

of the male are excessively unequal, and the huge nippers of the great

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 273

claw (which in three specimens sent is on the dexter side) are armed at

the middle (typically) each with an enormous tooth. In the other variety

the claws are unequal in the male (the left being rather the larger in the spe-

cimen sent), and quite equal in the female,—in both sexes much exceed-

ing in size the small claw of the male of the other variety. There is also

amarked difference in the colouring of the claws; those of the second

variety being weaker in hue,—whence not improbably the whole difference

may depend on the latter having cast and renewed the organ. In Geta-

stmus and other Crabs with very unequal claws, the big one is as often on

the right side as on the left. From the size and seeming abundance of

this fine land-Crab, it is probably much eaten by the Andamaners.

A fresh-water species sent is the female of a new genus akin to Varu-

NA, remarkable for the small size and nearly round form of the last arti-

culation to the tail, which is placed within a notch of the penultimate

articulation, that accordingly half surrounds it, and is the largest of

the series.

Other species of Crabs sent area new ZozyYMus (since received also

from Ceylon), ErrpHia TUBERCULATA, nobis, 2. s. (common on the Bur-

mese coasts), TRAPEZA FERRUGINEA (? Latr.), PILUMNUS VESPERTILIO,

GRAPSUS STRIGOSUS, GR. MESSOR, SESARMA TETRAGONA, CHENOBITA RU-

Gosa, C. ——, a Pagurus, and GonoDAcTYLUS CHIRAGRA of the SQuiL-

LA group.

A species of Scorpion and ScoLOPENDRA MORSITANS are also sent; and

of Radiata a species of ComatTu.a, two of OpHiocoma, one of EcHinus,

a HonotHuria, and a Sizinx (?). Several interesting forms likewise of

Annelides.

2. E. F. Kelaart, Esq., M. D., Trincomali. To this gentleman we are

indebted for a very interesting series of marine Crabs, amounting to 1d

species, with specimens of OpHiocoma, OpHiurs, Uraster, ASTERINA,

&e. Also a Fitaria from the ovaries of the Pearl Oyster.

3. Ihave next to announce the presentation of a large collection of

stuffed specimens, from his highness the Maharaja of Burdwan. This

collection contains numerous duplicates, and some very acceptable spe-

ciimens—especially one or more undescribed species of mammalia, so far as

I have been able to discover.

Of Quadrumana, adult male and female of the Mandrill (Parro mat-

MON), and a young male of the Drill (P. LeucopHxus),—well set up: a

Monkey, also, which I take to be the Inuus assamMENsis (v. pelops) ; and

other species with which we have long been well supplied. Two kinds of

Lemur are sent; one the L. ALBIFRONS, Geoffroy; and the other is pro-

bably —

274 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 38.

L. FLAVIVENTER, Lesson (Rev. Zool. &c., 1851, p. 24). In this case,

however, the remarkable colouring of the face is unnoticed by its de-

scriber. The face and between the eyes are black ; but the broad bilobate

band above the eyes of L. NIGRIFRONS, is in the present species grizzled

with fulvous-white, vaguely divided by blackish along the middle, and the

latter continued as a more distinct black line from the vertex to the occi-

put; the periphery also of the greyish frontal band is dusky-black. Fur

more dense and frizzled than in L. nicriFrons, especially upon the

head: of a nearly uniform dull grizzled fulvous-brown on the upper-parts,

limbs, and tail; palest en the limbs, but darker towards the anterior

hands, and the digits light fulvescent: below dull fulvescent-white,

purer white on the chin and throat, and passing to deeper fulvous towards

the tail, and likewise on the fore-limbs towards the palms; some pale

colour also on the cheeks, and the fur upon the ears; and the moustachial

bristles black. Size rather exceeding that of L. nicrirrons and L. Aust-

FRONS.*

A species of Parapoxurus would seem to be P. Lanicer, Hodgson ;

but with the woolly fur much shorter (as produced in confinement), only

% in. long upon the body, and Lemurine or Bat-like in character, close

and frizzled: but the relative proportions of the tail and body do not

agree, this having the tail about equalling in length the head and body;

whereas in P. LaniGEeR it is described to be ‘ barely more than a third

of the entire dimensions.” The prevailing colour of the fur is a maronne-

brown, grizzled with hoary tips; darker on the head, occiput, cheeks |

and ears; and a narrow median white line along the nose: paws also

darker, especially those of the hind-feet, and the terminal third or more

of the tail: lower-parts whitish, passing up the sides of the neck so as

almost to form a collar: the whiskers long and black: ears naked within,

and nearly so for the terminal half externally: no dark lines along the

back; but a vague appearance of a broadish fulvous streak along the

middle of the back. Length about 32in., of which the tail is half (or

very nearly so): head 4 in.; and hind-feet from heel, 22 in.

Here may likewise be noticed—

P. teucotis, nobis (Horsfield’s Catalogue). Length about 3 ft., of

* We have now the following species of this genus :

1. L. macaco, L.: the Ruffed Lemur.

.caTtTa, L. The Ring-tailed Lemur.

.niaEeR, L. The Black Lemur.

. ALBIFRONS, Geoffroy. The White-fronted Lemur.

. NIGRIFRONS, Geoffroy. The Black-fronted Lemur, with skeleton.

a ne w pb

Se har

. FLAVIVENTER (?), Lesson. The Grey-fronted Lemur,

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 275

which the tail is half. Fur dense and woolly at base, but with long

straight hairs intermixed: the prevailing colour pale dull yellowish or

fulvous-brown, with three blackish dorsal streaks; below paler, more or

less albescent: a white streak on the nose to between the eyes; and the

ears black at base, with the terminal half flesh-coloured and scantily

furnished with white hairs: crown more or less dusky, grizzled with

whitish ; and the paws and terminal half (or nearly so) of the tail black-

ish. Whiskers long and black. Inhabits the Burmese countries (Arakan,

Tenasserim, &c.); and is said to be found likewise in Sylhet.

P. ruBiDvs, nobis, x. s. A large species, of a prevailing deep maronne

colour, with black paws and terminal third of tail; the nape also black-

ish : no dorsal stripes or spots: a whitish band across forehead, extend-

ing broadly in front of the ears; and a duller white streak upon the nose,

passing to pale ruddy on the forehead: ears black externally: whiskers

conspicuously white: lower parts paler ; but the fore-part and sides of the

neck blackish, with a pale lateral streak continued downward from the

white in front of the ears. Fur rather coarse, obscurely grizzled, with

dusky-grey woolly pile at base. Entire length about 44 in., of which the

tail is 18 in.: hind-foot from heel 33 in. A broad pure white tail-tip in

the specimen, which was purchased already stuffed; the individual having

its nape much abraded from being tied up when alive. Hab. oF

Among the mammalia sent by the Maharaja of Burdwan, are a stuffed

Tiger, 8 Leopards, and 9 Bears, an albino Jackal,f 2 Ratels, ARcronyx

COLLARIS, numerous TrRaGuvut (or ‘ Mouse Deer’), with various others un-

necessary to particularise, and 5 species of Kangaroo, three of which are

new to our museum, viz. HETEROPUS PENICILLATUS, BETTONGIA PENI-

* Of this genus we have now 8 species, counting MUSANGA and fypus as one, and

excluding the DERBIANUS as not properly appertaining to it.

1. P. RUBIDUS, nobis, ut supra, Hab. 4

2. P. Grayi, Bennett: P. nipalensis, Hodgson. Hab. Himalaya, and moun-

tains of Arakan, One specimen from the latter locality has the entire tail ful-

yous-white.

3. P. LANIGER (?), Hodgson, wt supra. Hab. Himalaya?

4, P, LEUCoMYsTax, Gray : Amblyodon awratus, Jourdain. Hab. Malayan

peninsula, &c.

5. P. zEyLonicus, (Schreber). Hab. Ceylon.

6. P. LEUCOTIS, nobis, ut supra. Hab. Burmese countries.

7. P. TRIVIRGATUS, Reinwardt. Has. Malayan peninsula, &e.

8. P.musanea, (Marsden): P. typus, F. Cuv. Hab. India, Burma, and

Malay countries,

+ We have specimens of the Jackal in the museum,—pure white, coal-black,

and bright rufous,

202

276 Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. [ No. 3.

CILLATA, and a large species of LacorcHEsTEs, which cannot be identified

with any one of the four described by Mr. Waterhouse.

L. GyMNOTIS, nobis, n.s. Most nearly akin to L. CoNSPICILLATUS,

Gould ; but much larger, a stuffed female measuring about 23 ft. from

nose to base of tail, and the tail 16 in.: the skin may be distended ; but

the following admeasurements can be better depended on: ears externally

# in. (more when fresh); palm to tip of middle claw 14 in., the claw

%in.; tarse to tip of longest claw 5? in., the claw 1 in.; from muzzle

to base of ear 43 in. Muzzle as in L. CONSPICILLATUS: ears naked within.

Prevailing hue rufous-brown, grizzled with dull white; each hair white

towards the end, with a black tip: limbs more rufescent: under-parts

dull rufescent-white throughout : from the mouth proceeds a dark choco-

late-brown line or ill-defined band, contrasting with the white of the

throat; and a similar vague band passes from the nostril to the eye,

which latter is surrounded with dark hairs: chin also dark: the hairs of

the tail are excessively abraded in the specimen, save chiefly a median

line underneath ; and they seem naturally to be very short, and scanty

above and laterally : there is an exceedingly slight indication upon the

haunches of the pale band of L. conspicittatus. Hab. Pe

Of the specimens of Tracuuus (or ‘ Mouse Deer’) under examination,

four (if not five) species are distinguishable,—in addition to the MEMINNA

INDICA.

1. TRAGULUS KANCHIL, (Raffles); of which Moschus fulviventer, Gray,

is acommon variety. This is by far the most abundant species, and its

range of distribution extends northward into the Tenasserim provinces.

Fourteen specimens are before me, besides an albino. It is constantly dis-

* The Society’s museum now contains the following species of Macropopipm.

1, MAacROPUS GIGANTEUS, (Zimmerman). Young male, and skeleton of the

same; with skull of an older individual.

2. LAGORCHESTES GYMNOTIS, nobis, ut swpra.

3. HALMATURUS RUFICOLLIS, (Desmarest). Adult male and female, skeleton

of latter, and skull of a younger specimen.

4, H. Bennertit, Waterhouse. Adult male and female, with skeletons, and

skull of a younger individual.

5. H. vaLaBatus, (Lesson and Garnot). Stuffed male, and skull.

6. H. perpranus, Gray. Stuffed male and female.

7. H, BinuaRpieRI, (Desmarest). Skeleton, with skin of head and neck.

8. HETEROPUS PENICILLATUS, (Gray), ut supra. Stuffed female.

9. BETTONGIA PENICILLATA, Gray, ut supra. Male.

10. B. ounrcunvs, Ogilby. Skull only. |

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 208

tinguished from all the rest by the median dark line between the fore-legs :

neck rufous, with a median dark nape-band strongly defined. A rufous

hue commonly pervades the entire lower-parts, with the exception of the

white on either side of the pectoral line; and this white with its medial

dark streak. extends more or less backward, in proportion as another

white streak is continued forward on each side of the belly from behind.

2. Tr. Ppetanpoc (?); Moschus pelandoc(?), Ham. Smith: Zr. affi-

mis (?), Gray. This species accords better than any other with Buffon’s

figure of le Chevrotain de Java. Itissmaller than the Kanchil, with a

conspicuously shorter head and larger eye: also smaller accessory or

succentorial hoofs. The head and neck are very differently coloured ; and

the hue of the body is more uniformly rufous and much less nigrescent

than in the Kanchil, each hair, however, being black-tipped. Head of

adult male from base of ear to muzzle 33 in.; from eye to muzzle

12 in.: the corresponding dimensions in an adult male Kanchil being

Zin. and 24. in.: from hock to point of succentorial hoof 3% in.

in the present species, 33 in. in the Kanchil. Head rufous, with

a strongly marked dark patch on centre of forehead, contrasting much

with the broad rufous superciliary mark; but the black of the forehead

faintly continued as a nape-streak, whereas in the Kanchil the contrast of

the same colours is transferred to the nape. In our present species, the

throat is white, continued into three stripes down the front of the neck,

which alike terminate in a pale fulvescent cross-band: the rest of the

under-parts white, with merely a fulvous tinge on centre of belly: back

and sides of the neck, with the two dark bands in front which alternate

with the three white ones, of a peculiar and similar grizzled colouring,

contrasting much with the rufous of the body; the former being con-

stantly rufous, and the latter more or less nigrescent, in the Kanchil:

tail bright rufous above, white below and at the tip: limbs also bright

rufous. Tusk protruding about 2; in. in the specimen described.

3. TR. savanicus, (Pallas). An adult male and female which I refer

to this species, as described by Dr. J. E. Gray in the Proc. Zool. Soc. for

1836, p. 64, are remarkable (more especially the female) for the blackish

hue of the whole neck, and of the two dark streaks alternating with the

three white ones in front of it. General colour rufous, the black tips to

the hairs shewing much; the breast, and towards the hind-legs, white,

Separated by fulvous which occupies the medial region of the belly, ex-

tending quite across it. From hock to point of succentorial hoof 4 in.

4, TR. Javanicus, var. Stanueyvanus; Moschus Stanleyanus, Gray,

P. Z. S, 1836, p. 65. I take this to be merely a variety of the last, having

278 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 3.

the neck, and the marks in front of it, bright chesnut-rufous. The gener-

al colouring also is less nigrescent ; and one female has a strongly defined

dark line from eye to nose, and another along middle of nose, separated

by a contrasting pale space. A male and two females are before me. ,

5. TR. Fuscatus, nobis, x. s.: Meminna malaccensis (?), Gray, Brit.

Mus. Catal. Larger than Tr. savanicus; an adult female measuring,

from hock to point of succentorial hoof, 44 in. General hue whitish, with

prevailing dusky tips to the fur: beneath wholly white: neck of the

same hue as the body, but with a dark nape-streak commencing from the

forehead, and the usual white markings in front, alternating with the two

dark ones, which are broad and nigrescent. Perhapsa third variety of the

JAVANICUS; but. if so, a very distinet one. Hab.

The second species, however, which I have doubtfully assigned to Tr.

PELANDOG, is most assuredly no variety of the Kanchil; and I do not

in the least hesitate to regard it as a well characterized species.

The birds comprise numerous Lories, Cockatoos, and other Parrots ;

of which the following are new to the Society’s museum. HoLorHus

PHILIPPINARAM, (Gm.), Lortus cyanaucHEN, Muller,* and CHa.cop-

SITTA NovVE GuINEE: also 2 Emeus, 3 Swans, 3. Sérds Cranes, a couple

of white Crows, a white (or rather duwtino) ‘ Hurrial’ or fruit-Pigeon

(OSMOTRERON BICINCTA), sundry Gallinacee, and others which need not

be particularized: the only novelty being two specimens (old and young,

in very bad condition.) of the PHaps HISTRIONICA, (Gould). The fol-

lowing Australian species are, however, worthy of notice, as having evi-

* Syn. L. superbus, Fraser; but the L. tory, (L., v. tricolor, Stephens,)

is subject to so much variation, that I have great doubt if the present bird is

more than an occasional variety of it. The principal difference is, that this is

blue under the wing (brighter than in L. DomicrLLus), whereas L. Lory is usu-

ally red under the wing: there is also an unusual amount of red up the back,

and the blue of the hind-part of the neck is particularly brilliant ; but the latter

varies much in brightness in different specimens of L. Lory, as do also the

relative proportions of the blue and red both above and below,—some -having

nearly the whole under-parts blackish-blue, passing to vivid prussian-blue pos-

teriorly, and others being crimson as far back as the thighs, with various inter-

mediate phases. This particular specimen of cyANAucHEN has lost many of its

upper nape-feathers, so that it cannot be ascertained whether the usual red occi-

pital band had been present ; but I observe that some of the black feathers of

the hindmost part of the cap are partly red at base. I repeat my doubt that it

is more than an occasional variety of L. tory.

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 279

dently been set up from cage specimens brought alive to this country—

PritinoRHYNCHUsS Cooxt and ENtomyzZa CyANoTIs.*

The reptiles are CRocoDILUS PALUSTRIS and GAVIALIS GANGETICUS.

While describing new or little known birds, I may here bring to notice

a Pheasant, of remarkable beauty, four living specimens of which (all

males) have recently been obtained by Babu Rajendra Mallika for his

* The following, if not the Eos rrcrnzata or HE. semimarvata, Bonap., de-

scriptions of which I have not seen, would appear to be a new species of Lory.

Hos Fusoata, nobis, v. s. (?) Structure typical. Length of closed wing 6 in.

Prevalent colour brown-black, the ramp-feathers marginal with dull-white, those

of the nape with ruddy-brown, and of the breast with bluish-grey : a dull orange

band across the crown, from eye to eye, perhaps typically crimson, a crimson

band crossing the upper and another crossing the lower part of the breast ; the

abdominal and tibial feathers also crimson, and the flanks and lower tail-coverts

dull purple-black : tertiaries ruddy-brown, perhaps brighter in fine specimens :

a large ruddy-yellow spot on the inner web of each primary, as seen from above

in the spread wing ; and the unspread tail dull ruddy-brown above, with a shade

of blue at tip, all but its middle feathers having the inner web crimson to near

the tip: under surface of the wings chiefly yellowish-red. Has.

TRICHOGLOSSUS OCHREOCEPHALUS, nobis, .s. Size and structure of Tr.

CHLOROLEPIDOTUS, (Kuhl). Upper-parts uniformly vivid green; the lower yel-

lowish, passing on the belly and flanks to pure yellow with green tips: crown,

ear-coverts, and cheeks, ochreous-yellow, streaked: a broad pure yellow band on

the under-surface.of the wing, on the inner webs of the primaries and second-

aries. Length of closed wing 5in. Has. ?

The following is perhaps but a cage variety of Tr. nmmMaTopus, (L.) ; unless

that the tail is more developed, attaining to 5 in. and upwards. The red of the

breast and beneath the wing in H#MATODUS is replaced by glowing yellow,

faintly tinged with red towards the centres of most of the feathers: a slight ad-

mixture of red also on the axillaries and on the under-surface of the wing: pec-

toral feathers without dark margins, or with obscure traces of green terminal

edges, chiefly towards the flanks: abdominal patch green, with very slight ad-

mixture of blue: the blue of the forehead and cheeks dull and little extended ;

and the occiput green, above the greenish-yellow nape-band: no yellow at base

of inter-scapularies, abruptly defined, as red in HmMATOvUS. Perhaps a distinct

species,—the Tr. Forstreni, Bonap.? The next is certainly distinct.

TR. IMMARGINATUS, nobis, x. s. Smaller than mmMatopus, the feet conspi-

cuously so. Length of wing 5 in., and of tail 4 in. Crimson of the breast and

beneath the wing much brighter than in Tr. HmMaToDUS, and little or no trace

of dark terminal margins: nape-feathers with fuscous tips, below which a few

feathers are red at base, but shewing less than in HaMATODUS; great abdominal

280 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. | No. 3.

aviaries. JZabitat unknown.* It appears to constitute a second species

of the genus DiarpiGautus of the late Prince of Canino; but still is

closely akin to GALLoPHAsis, Hodgson, and NycrHemeERvs, Swainson.

D. FASCIOLATUS, nobis, x. s. Size of a Jungle-fowl; and the tail well

arched, as in typical GaLLus: papillose crimson skin of the cheeks great-

ly developed, as in the common Silver Pheasant (GALLOPHASIS NYCTHE-

MERUS), rising on either side into a distinct lappet over the forehead, but

not uniting medially to form a comb; also continued downward into well

marked incipient wattles, and backward into a peak above the ears. From

the crown of the head a most elegant Peafowl-like crest, composed of

feathers 3 in. long, the slender black stems of which are quite bare for

2 in., and then each divides and subdivides in a remarkable manner, toge-

ther forming an acute triangular barbed tip, truncate at the extremity,

and of a steel-blue colour. Crown black, passing downward into minutely

vermiculated feathers on the neck, fore-part of the back, and breast ; the

vermiculation less distinct upon the last, which appears of a somewhat

dark blended ash-colour: belly, flanks, and tibial plumes, black, the fea-

thers of the flanks tipped with steel-blue: scapularies and wings like the

back, but more coarsely vermiculated, each feather terminating in a trans-

verse black band, with narrow whitish margin above, broadest on the

scapularies: the great alars, tertiaries, and largest range of wing-coverts,

are not thus tipped, but are vermiculated like the inter-scapularies : across

the back, above the rump, a shining coppery-golden band; and the rump

and upper tail-coverts black, tipped with shining steel-blue, and finally

with very rich shining maronne-red: legs bright vermillion, the shank

well spurred; and the bill dull waxy-greenish. Irides reddish-hazel.

Length of tarse 34 in.; of bill to gape 1¢ in., and anterior to nostril 2 in.:

closed wing 9 in., or somewhat less. Female unknown. The figure of

the living bird is particularly gracile and game-looking ; and the bright

carmine legs are a conspicuous feature, also the handsome crest, and

great development of the papillose naked skin of the cheeks, continued

downward into wattles, which are more distinct than in the NycTHE-

MERUS.

patch dusky-purple: blue of the forehead and cheeks less developed than in the

other.

These various Lorikeets are not uncommonly brought alive to Calcutta; but

much less numerously than TR. ornatus, the range of which extends eastward

to Celebes,—certainly, however, not to Sumatra, as stated by Raffles.

* Since writing the above, 1 have seen another in the possession of a gen-

tleman, who has reason to believe that it is from Borneo.—All are now dead.

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. 281

4. A small collection from Major Berdmore, sent by him from the

Sitang valley, Pegu. It consists chiefly of species previously forwarded

by that officer ; though several of them are still highly acceptable. Of

mammalia, RHINOLOPHUS AFFINIs, Horsfield,—SoreEx FULIGINOSUS, nobis

(J. A. S. XXIV, 362), and Scruroprera saGitta apud nos (J. A. S.

XXIII, 731). Of birds, a fine pair of Buczros cavatus. Of reptiles

and fishes, a few known species, including a small MastacemMBALus 4 in.

in length, which seems to be M. untcotor, K. and V. H., but with

37 dorsal spines (instead of 34), and a row of black spots along the soft

dorsal and more cbscurely along the anal.* Also a few crustacea and

some good insects.f

We have another MasTaceMBALUs from Maulmein, which seems to be

undescribed, and may therefore be designated—

M. zesrinus, nobis. Tail detached from the dorsal and anal fins, as

in the common M. pancatvs of Bengal. Series of 28 or 29 dorsal spines.

Colour pale brown, deeper along the back; and marked throughout

(more distinctly in the young) with dusky transverse stripes, alternating

with fainter stripes more or less regular, which latter are often double or

more or less divided, and are set off by the narrow pale interspaces,—much

as in the ‘ Dauw’ or original Zebra (Equus BurcuHetiit). In the larger

specimens the stripes are more or less obsolete, except towards the tail.

Dorsal and caudal fins minutely striated ; the anal with broad stripes, as

on the sides. Our largest specimen, apparently full grown from its bulk,

is 84 in. in length.

We have also a small Siluroid fish from the same locality, which

appears to be new both as regards genus and species.

AmBuyceps, nobis, 2. g. Aflined to OtyRa,t McClelland, but the head

much broader and flatter, with minute eyes, placed near the hind aperture

of the nostrils: two pairs of cirri above and below, the inner above

situate between the fore and hind apertures of the nostrils: pectoral and

dorsal spines short and concealed, but comparatively robust: the second

or adipose dorsal short and low ; and the ventrals and anal also short:

tail large and moderately furcate: a band of card-like teeth above and

* The Emys formerly sent by Major Berdmore, and referred to FE, ocenuara,

Dumeril and Bibron (J. A. S. XXII, 645), proves to be totally distinct from the

latter, of which I have lately obtained two living specimens in the Calcutta bazar.

The Burmese Terrapin may therefore now bear the name E. BrRDMOREI, nobis.

+ Another, 93 in. long, since received, has 36 dorsal spines, including the

comparatively large one immediately anterior to the soft-rayed dorsal.

{~ This name is pre-occupied in Botany.

2 P

282 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 3.

below, but no palatal band discernible in the specimen: body subcylin-

drical, compressed, becoming more so to the tail.

AMB. CECUTIENS, nobis, n. s. Head broader than the body, flat, obtuse

at the muzzle; the mouth moderate, its cleft scarcely continued back

laterally: cirri large; the upper labial cirrus reaching to tip of pec-

toral fin, and the exterior lower one nearly as long. Body long and

Cositis-like. The number of fin-rays is difficult to determine, but seems

to be

D. 1-6.—P. 1-2 or 3.—V. 6.—A. 6.

Colour dark brown above, paler beneath. Length of specimen 3 in.

To describe this little mud-fish properly, a series of specimens are

required, or the sacrifice.of our only individual. It will, however, be

readily identifiable from the above notice. The individual described was

procured by Mr. W. Theobald, Junr., at Maulmein; and others, but

in much injured condition, have since been received from Pegu, from

Major Berdmore.

Although I have attended pretty regularly the Calcutta fish-bazars

during the last year, and have procured many good specimens, and added

largely to our collection of fish-skeletons, the only species new to the

museum which have been obtained are SERRANUS LANCEOLATUS, C. and

V. (small), Genres ports, C. and V., and Oro.,irHus Macu.Latus, C.

and V. (four individuals).* Ihave procured, however, a fine series of a

somewhat rare fish which is perhaps the CHRYsOPHRYS LONGISPINIS, C.

and V., apud Bleeker, from Calcutta; but the dentition of which differs

altogether from that of Curysopurys, there being no palatal teeth, but

only a band of “ card-like” teeth in each jaw, with reverted tips, especially

those in the upper jaw in front, which are much curved backwards. Now

the teeth of CHR. LONGISPINIS are described in the Hist. des Poissons

to be “small, and disposed in three ranges.” Our species otherwise

approximates the Cur. caLaMaRa (Russell, pl. 92), but is less deep in the

body, the eye is larger and is situate higher in the head, which last is

throughout covered with small indistinct scales. Pre-operculum minutely

toothed ; mouth slightly protrusile. The dorsal spines are alternately

stouter and more slender, as in Riippell’s figure of CHRYSOPHRYS SARBA,

and also in Datnia and Datyiorpss, Bleeker (founded on the Coius

polota of Buchanan Hamilton).+

* Add Musoprion RANnaus, C. and V.; July 2nd: and since GERRES FILA-

MENTOSUS.

+ Is not this, however, an ANopLusS of Temminck and Schlegel? Vide Fauna

Japonica, which I have not seen.

1858.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 283

D, 12-14,—A. 3-8.—P. 18.—V. 1-5.—C. 1-16.

The first dorsal spine is short, about half the length of the second,

which is two-fifths that of the third, which nearly equals the fourth and

longest: thence the spinous portion of the fin slopes gradually backward ;

and the soft portion is as high as the seventh spine and nearly even. The

first anal spine is short, the second long and robust and much flattened,

and the third one-sixth shorter than the second and much less robust.

Ventral spine longer and more slender than the third anal. Pectorals

pointed, their tips reaching to the vent. Ventrals also pointed, termi-

nating in a slight filament. Tail scarcely furcate. Scales of the body

somewhat large, especially below the lateral line ; numbering about 20 in

oblique series descending from the first dorsal spine: those composing

the lateral line are about 50 in number.

Colour bright silvery, with a pink iridescence along the back and above

the eyes; the membrane of the dorsal fin spotted with dusky, becoming

nearly or quite obsolete in large individuals. Rest of the fins white, the

tail slightly suffused with dusky towards its tip. Irides white with

brilliant nacreous lustre. Our largest specimen measures 174 in. in

length, with longest dorsal spine 2$ in. In small specimens (3 in. long),

about 9 or 10 transverse bands are faintly discernible on the body, traces

of which appear in larger individuals, broken up into spots more or less

obscure. As seen on a fish-stall, the brilliancy of the silvery hue of this

species attracts attention even from a distance, considerably surpassing

that of the common Datnia ARGENTEA, and equalling that of the rarer

Gernes porT#. Should both genus and species prove new, as I suspect,

this fish may be named PoLorus niTIDUs, nobis.

The Silurotd fishes have engaged my particular attention; but the

following species only have been procured in the bazar.

Wattaco Russet, Bleeker: Silurus boalis, B. H.; S. wallagoo, Val.,

&c. Extremely common: attaining to an immense size.

W. paspa; Silurus pabda, B. H.: S. microcephalus, Val. Pébda of

Bengalis, and certainly the true pabda of Buchanan Hamilton. Common:

attaining to 9 or 10 in. long, at most.*

ScHILBE GaRuA; Silurus garua, B. H. Common: attaining to 14 in,

in length.

Arua coina; Malapterurus coila, Be B.. Malapterus (Ailia) benga-

lensis, Gray ; Ailia bengalensis, Val., &c. Common.

BaGRvs aor; Pimelodus aor, B. H. Tolerably common.

B. sorewtuvs, nobis, x. s. Hitherto confounded with the preceding, but a

* W. anastomus, (Val.), is also enumerated from Calcutta by Dr. Bleeker.

2P 2

284. Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 3.

much thicker fish in proportion to its length; the dorsal spine smaller,

and uniformly granulose anteriorly,—instead of shewing a narrow white

ridge, set off laterally with black, as in the aor; the adipose dorsal

fin less elongated, but higher, with the same black spot posteriorly ;

occipital bony process more developed, and posterior to this a small bony

plate, not exceeding the occipital process in breadth (whereas the corre-

sponding oval plate in B. aor is fully twice as broad); at base of the first

short dorsal spine, a bone formed of two lateral triangles well united in

the middle,—whereas in B. aor the union of the two lateral triangular

bones is generally imperfect, and they are mostly quite distinct ; occasion-

ally, even in small specimens of B. aoreLuus, these bones are anchylosed

to the oval bone in front of them,—but never in B. aor. The palatal

teeth in B. aor are arranged in a subeven crescentic band; whereas in

B. aogeLuus they are in two lateral sub-triangular masses united in the

middle. Ten distinct soft rays to the pectorals and fourteen rays to the

ventrals. Colouring much the same; but in B. AorELuus there is a consi.

derable admixture of black on the pectorals, ventrals, and membrane

of the dorsal fin, which does not occur in the other. The two species are

about equally common in the Calcutta bazar.*

B. cavasius; P. cavasius, B. H. Common: rarely exceeding 7 in.

long.f

B. TENGARA; P. tengara, B. H. Common.

B. curio; P. gulio, B. H.: B. albilabris, Val.t The Nuna Tengara

of the Bengalis, corrupted into Nonatora in the Histoire des Poissons.

Extremely common: attaining to about 10 in. long.

* Another, closely akin, exists in the B. stnauata (Platystoma singhala,

Sykes); and a fourth in the B. aorinus of Jacquemont. The latter is not

represented to have the conspicuous black spot on the adipose dorsal seen in the

others; but neither is it represented in Jacquemont’s figure of B. aor!

Buchanan Hamilton’s figure of B. aog represents a young specimen, but still the

dorsal spine is not represented of sufficient magnitude. There is also a B.

aorides, Jerdon, Madr. Journ. XV, 336, with maxillary cirri reaching to the

tail. In B. aorenLus they reach to the middle of second dorsal. B. aor, B.

AORELLUS, and OsT£oGENIosus CanTort, are frequently attacked by an Alda,

which buries its head in the adipose flesh anterior to the second dorsal and the

caudal fins.

+ The nearly affined B. keletius, Val., is enumerated from Calcutta by Dr.

Bleeker.

{ Dr. Bleeker adds, as synonymes, B. abbreviatus and P. fuscus of the Histoire

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 285

B. MENODA; P. menoda, B. H.: B. carsio, Cuv. R. A. (nec P. carcio,

B. H.); B. corsula, Val.; by mistake marked Mugil corsula in pl. 1 of

Buchanan Hamilton’s ‘ Fishes of the Ganges’; but the original drawing

(or a copy of it) marked P. menoda in B. Hamilton’s hand-writing.

Tolerably common: attaining to 14 in. long. A very mucous fish; and

those brought to the bazar are commonly much clotted over with an

adhesive clayey mud, as if they had burrowed into it; and they are

mostly brought many together, appearing as if dug out from the mud of

ponds or jhi/s more or less dried up.

B. uzvua; P. urua, B. H.: B. exodon, Val. Identified from a drawing

by Buchanan Hamilton. Common; but not often brought to the bazar.

Arius Gacora apud Bleeker; P. gagora, B. H. (in part). Excessively

common ; but I have not been able to obtain it over 17 in. long, whereas

B. Hamilton’s gagora is described to attain to about 3 ft.: he having

evidently confounded this and the next species. The present is indeed

the commonest of the whole tribe in the Calcutta fish-bazars, and Bagrus

gulio is the next in abundance: both of these may daily be obtained of

all sizes; but I have rarely met with any but adults of A. GAGoRIDES

and A. ARIOIDES, and only adults of Bacrus menopa, which when brought

are generally in quantity. The spines of A. GacorA are less strongly

pectinated in front than in B. Hamilton’s figure of the species; and

there is the usual prolongation of the dorsal beyond its spine. Dorsal

and pectoral spines moderate, comparatively slender, and granulated in

front only, the sides,being striated. The upper labial cirri reach back

to base of pectoral spines. Mouth comparatively small, its cleft scarcely

reaching back one-third to below the eye. Palatal teeth mammilliform,

and totally unlike the maatllary teeth ; whereas in the next two species,

the palatal and maxillary teeth are similar. No blackish tinge on the

ventral and anal fins; nor trace of aureous wash on the upper-parts. A

specimen 10 in. long has the dorsal spine 13 in.; and one of 16 in. has

the dorsal spine 2 in.

A. GAGoRIDES ; Bagrus gagorides and B. trachypomus, Val.: P. gagora,

B. H. (in part). Nearly affined to A. aRio1pEs; but the interparietal

plate differs in shape, and the upper cirri reach only to base of pectorals,

as in A. GAGoRA. Upper lip, as seen from beneath, protruding in

the middle, so as to be there twice as broad as at the sides. Dorsal and

pectoral spines much stouter than in A. Gacora, and granulated half-way

on the sides towards the front. General hue dull lurid purple with a

des Poissons,—and B, gulioides, B. melas, B. Schlegelii, and B. rhodopteryguus,

Bleeker.

286 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 3.

golden shine; the head browner: fins purple; no dark spot on the adipose

dorsal; and the lower-parts subdued white, studded over with minute

dusky specks (which also occur in A. ARtIoIDES, but to a less extent).

This species is rarely procurable of small size, and it commonly occurs

23 ft. or more. Ina specimen 5; in. long, the dorsal spine measures 143

in.; in one of 10 in., 1% in.; of 15 in., 23 in.; of 2 ft., 4 in-; of 2 ft.,

42in.; and of 22 ft., 5in.: the membrane of the dorsal is scarcely pro-

longed beyond its spine, to a much less extent than in the two other

species. Occasionally, though rarely, one or more of the cirri are

divided in this fish, as usual in several of the Nilotic S1turipa. It is

not uncommon,

A. ARIoIDES ; Bagrus arioides, Val.; Pimelodus auratus, B. H. (MS.

on coloured drawing, nee B. auratus, Val.). Tolerably common, or

rather now and then brought in quantity: attaining to about 12 or 13 in.

long. Upper cirri reaching back to base of dorsal spine. The dorsal

and pectoral spines proportionally larger than in A. GAGoripEs, also more

strongly pectinated behind, and more extensively granulated on the sides ;

the membrane of first dorsal prolonged beyond the spine, as usual as in

the present group. All the fins are suffused with black, more or less. A

distinct aureous wash on the upper parts, which begins to make its appear-

ance when the fish is about 6 in. long; prior to which the general hue is

plain plumbeous or livid, with the fins conspicuously almost wholly purple-

black. Eyes proportionally large. Mouth (asin A. GacoripEs) broader

than in A. Gacora; its cleft reaching half-way to below the eye, as seen

in profile. A specimen 12 in. long has the dorsal spine 2% in., and one

exceeding 13 in. has it 2? in.

Rita BucHanant, Bleeker: Pimelodus rita, B. H.; Arius rita et A.

ritoides, Val. Common, chiefly in the hot season.

OstEoGENEIOsuS Cantor, Bleeker: Arius militaris of Gangetic rivers,

auctorum. Somewhat rarely brought.

Paneasius Bucuanani, Val.: Pimelodus pangasius, B. H. Very

common.

SILUNDIA GANGETICA, Val.: Pimelodus silundia, B.H. Very common.

Bacarivus Bucuananl, Bleeker: Pimelodus bagarius, B. H. Not rare.

Attains an enormous size, but large specimens are seldom brought to

the bazar.

PimreLopus GAGata, B. H. Not rare during the rains.

CxiaRias MAGAR ; Macropteronotus magur, B. H. Very common.

SACCOBRANCHUS FossILIs; Stlurus fossilis, Bloch: S. singio, B. H.

Extremely common.

Puiotosius canius, B. H. Very common.

1858. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 287

Of Esocip, Buchanan Hamilton notices only three species, all of

which are assigned by him to the old genus Esox. These are—BrLone

canciLa, (B. H.), Hemiruamepnus EctuntTio, (B. H.—aneutatus, cbid.,

on unpublished drawing), and PancHax Bucuananl, Val. Two species of

Bertone and three of HemirHampuus, however, are about equally com-

mon in the Calcutta provision-bazars ; and another species of each genus

occurs at the Sandheads, at the mouth of the Hughli. <A second Pan-

cHax also is sometimes brought in great numbers to the fish-bazars.

BELONE TENUIROSTERIS, nobis, m. s. As compared with B. cAUDIMA+

cuta, Cuv., the general form is more slender, elongated, and compressed ;

with jaws of equal length (minus the cartilaginous tip of the lower),

narrow and considerably more tapering in width to the extremity. Head

a third of the entire length. Eyes moderately large, occupying about

three-fifths of the vertical diameter of the head. Series of longer teeth

slender and uniform in both jaws, becoming gradually smaller towards

their tips; the minute intermediate teeth being so small as to be barely

perceptible. Cheeks distinctly scaled. Low hind portion of the dorsal

and anal fins much developed: the other fins of the usual proportions.

D. 19.—A. 24.—P. 11.—V. 6.—C. 15 (exclusive of the short exterior

rays).

Colour greenish above, silvery below, with a very brilliant silvery stripe

along each side, broadening posteriorly ; the lower portion of the oper-

culum also brilliant silvery, and likewise the sides of the lower jaw. Fins

yellow more or less, with some black at the tips of the pectorals, and

middle of the fork of the caudal—no spot at base of caudal, as in B.

CAUDIMACULA.—From the Sandheads.

Our other species are—

B. caupimacuta, Cuv.; Russell, pl. 176. Found also in the China seas.

B. cancina; Hsox cancila, B. Hamilton.

The B. annuzata, C. V., keeps further out to sea, but is common on

the coast of Orissa.

Of Hremiruamrnuts, the next three species are brought commonly to

the Calcutta bazars.

H. ectuntio; Hsox ectuntio, B. H. With upper jaw about a third as

long as the lower, flat, and tapering from about the middle to an obtuse

point. Eyes but half the vertical diameter of the head. ‘Tail rounded,

Ventral fins small, placed near the anal, and reaching close to the anus.

In a specimen 6$ in. long, the lower jaw exceeds the upper by 1 in., and

the upper from cleft of mouth measures 4 in. According to Buchanan

Hamilton, this fish “does not exceed a foot in length.” I have not

obtained it so large as 7 in. He states, also, that “each side has a broad

288 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 3.

longitudinal stripe, shining like silver.’ The sides are indeed silvery,

but ill-defined, except where forming a narrow streak towards the tail.

D. 13.—A. 11.—P. 7.—V. 5.—C. 14.

This species seems to be affined to H. Reynatpr of Valenciennes.

H. BracHYNotToprTeRus, Bleeker: Hsox angulatus, B. H. (MS. on draw-

ing). Upper jaw very short, triangular, broader than long, almost flat

but with distinct angulate ridge. Eyes three-fifths of the vertical diame-

ter of the head. Tail furcate. Ventrals placed midway on the body, far

anterior totheanus. In a specimen 7 in. long, the lower jaw exceeds the

upper by 1} in., and the upper jaw from cleft of mouth measures 3, in. I

have not seen it larger. A narrowish well defined silvery stripe extends

from the base of the pectorals tothe middle of the caudal. The dorsal fin

contains 11 to 13 rays in perfect specimens.

D. 11 to 13.—A. 15.—P. 7.—V. 6.—C. 14.

H. striaa, nobis, x. s. With upper jaw subtriangular, rounded in

front, a little ionger than broad, flat, with very indistinct trace of angulate

ridge; the lower jaw much longer than in the two preceding species.

Eyes three-fifths of the vertical diameter of the head. ‘Tail rounded.

Ventrals small, placed near but not reaching to the anus. In a specimen

3 in. long, the lower jaw exceeds the upper by 23 in., and the upper jaw

from cleft of mouth measures 4 in. Lateral silvery stripe narrow and

little perceptible, excepting towards the tail, where broader and distinct.

A medial dusky line along both mandibles and middle of the fore-part

of the back. Operculum brilliant silvery.

D. 12 or 13.—A. 8 or 9.—P. 9 or 10.—V. 6.—C. 14.

H. ptumatus, nobis, ». s. General aspect of preceding species, but

the eye less than half of the diameter of the head: the lateral scales of

the body also much larger; and the upper jaw tapering to an obtuse

point, and distinctly angulated. Hach nostril covered by a remarkable

plume of filaments. Tail furcate. Ventrals placed near the anus, but

not reaching to it. Ina specimen 11 in. long, the lower jaw exceeds the

upper by 23 in., and the upper from cleft of mouth measures } in. A well

defined silvery stripe from base of pectorals, becoming rather broad

towards the tail.

D. 15.—A. 13.—P. 9.—V. 6.—C. 15.

From the Sandheads, and also the coast of Ceylon.

Our species of PancHax are—

P. Bucnwanant, Valenciennes; Hsoxr panchax, B. H. To the numerous

synonymes of this species collated by Dr. Bleeker, add Aplocheilus ru-

brostigma, Jerdon, Madr. Journ. XV., 331.

P, CYANOPTHALMA, nobis, 7, s. Smaller than P, Bucuanant, not

1858. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 289

exceeding 12 in. long, with fins less elevated and tail much less pointed ;

the eyes also less distantly apart, and of a brilliant pale nacreous azure

(those of the other being yellow). Colour whitish, diaphanous, studded

with dark specks which are less numerous below the lateral line: scales

large, barely discernible.

D. 7.—A. 22 or 23.—V. 3.—P. 5 P—C, 14.

This minute fish is sometimes brought to the bazar in considerable

quantities, many pounds’ weight of them together. Occasionally, a few

of the P. BucHaNnanti may be picked out of the mass, and some fry of

other fishes, especially Mucit corsuLa; but the present species, remark-

able for its conspicuous light blue irides, predominates in the rate of 50

or more to 1 of any other. Wherever it occurs, therefore, it would

seem to abound excessively.

The following Cyprinip# may likewise be here described.

SysToMUS MICROLEPIS, nobis, ». s. Much resembling 8. Ocitsit

(Rohtee Ogilbii, Sykes) ;* but with still smaller scales, and the dorsal spine

is more finely pectinated behind. Scales larger on the anterior two-fifths of

the body; and a series of 44 of them, counting obliquely downward, and

of 73 along the lateral line.

D. 3-7.—A. 1-18.—P. 13.—V. 7.—C. 19.

Spinous ray of anal fin minute: the pectorals not reaching to base of

ventrals: tail furcate. Colour (blanched in spirit) silvery throughout.

Length of specimen, to end of tail-lobes, 63 in.; and depth at base of

dorsal fin. 22 in. Form very Bream-like.

Hab. ————?

LervciscUs SALMOIDES, nobis, ». s. Affined to L. goha (Cyprinus—

Barilius goha, B. H., v. Opsarius gracilis, McClelland); but larger and

deeper in the body, with the spots smaller, much more numerous, and

more regularly disposed, many of them occurring below the lateral

line, and others on the opercula and pre-opercula: upper lip studded

with pores.

D.10.—A. 13.—P. 14.—V. 9.—C. 18.

Lateral line composed of 88 to 90 scales; and oblique series of 26

scales descending from anterior base of dorsal. Length of specimen

llin. Colour blanched in spirit. Procured at Allahabad by the late

Major Wroughton.

L. LINEOLATUS, nobis, x. s. A Prritampus of McClelland, affined in

* Dr. Jerdon refers the species of Rohtee, Sykes, to ABRAMIs ; but they clearly

appertain to Systomus, as assigned by Dr. Bleeker: vide dorsal spines, &c.

2 Q

290 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 3.

form to L. pantconius (Cyprinus daniconius, B. H.), but the lateral line

placed very low, as in Danerza; and readily distinguished by its peculiar

markings. A dusky spot behind the gill-covers, placed in a whitish space ;

beyond which a broad darkish band extends to the middle of the tail,

bordered by a narrow pale line above and below, the lower not reaching

so far forward as the upper: below this again another dark band, and

then white; and above a second and trace of a third pale line.

D. 12.—A. 14.—-P. 11.—V. 8.—C. 18?

Series of 10 oblique scales, the lateral line on the 9th of them, and

numbering about 32 scales. Length of specimen 34 in. Procured at

Darjiling by Major Sherwill.

L. BrnoTatus, nobis, 2. s. Affined to L. casvaris, (B. H., v. Systomus

malacopterus, McCl.), but less deep in the body, and the dorsal fin much

smaller; with a conspicuous black spot on the middle of base of tail,

and another at hind base of dorsal: the rest green, with silvery lateral

streak and below, and traces of a dark band along the lateral line; which

last is medial and is composed of about 25 scales: oblique series of scales

7; the line passing along the fourth of them from above. Eyes rather

large, and silvery.

D. 9.—A. 6.—

Length of specimen 13 in. From Ceylon. Dr. E. F. Kelaart.*

* The Sysromus TRIPUNCTATUS, Jerdon, is perhaps a Leuciscus akin to

the above.

From Messrs. T. H. Hamilton & Co. The nest of a common Crow (Corvus

SPLENDENS), constructed in great part of the wires used in fastening down the

corks of soda-water bottles. Two Crows’ nests thus composed are noticed in the

‘Calcutta Review, Vol. XXVIII. p. 187; where it is observed that—“ As it

may well be wondered where such an accumulation of these could be procured,

we may remark that Bengali servants are in the habit of treasuring them up till

they amount to a saleable quantity; and that enormous heaps of them may

accordingly be seen in the shops of those not very respectable small dealers,

whose proper avocation is, with similar shops in England, indirectly purported

by the announcement.—‘ Dealer in Marine Stores.’ The supply of materials,

therefore is comprehensible, however curious its application.—E. B.

Note on THE Hogs oF THE Nicopar Iszanps (vide p. 268.)

In some “‘ Sketches at the Nicobars,” published in the Journal of the Indian

Archipelago, Vol. III, we read (p. 265) of preparations made for a feast,

“ Tnormous Pigs strung by their legs to long poles, were carried, some by four

others by six athletic men. These Pigs were truly most gigantic animals.” This

was in the island of Car Nicobar; and the Pigs in question were doubtless

originally derived from the shipping. We have met with another notice referring

to the large size of the Pigs in the Nicobar Islands.—E. B.

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. 291

For Jury, 1858.

The Monthly General Meeting for July was held on the 6th

instant.

Sir James Colvile, Knt., President, in the Chair,

The proceedings of the May meeting were read and confirmed.

No meeting was held in June on account of the repairs.

Presentations were received—

1. From the Royal Prussian Academy of Sciences at Berlin, the

latest publications of the Academy.

2. From the Ceylon Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society, the

latest journals of the Society.

Mr. B. H. Hodgson and Dr. Falconer, duly proposed in March

last were ballotted for and elected Honorary Members of the

Society.

Mr. Sutherland duly proposed and seconded in May last, was

balloted for and declared elected.

Communications were received—

1. From Baboo Radanauth Sikdar, an abstract of the Meteorolo-

gical Observations taken at the Surveyor General’s Office during

the month of February last.

2. From the Venerable Archdeacon Pratt, M. A., a paper on the

great Indian Arc of Meridian and the Figure of the Earth.

Mr. W.T. Blanford gave an account of the observations which had

been made in Orissa by a party of the Geological Survey during the

past season’s field work, and exhibited to the Society the map of that

province coloured geologically. The results of the examination were,

that Orissa is mainly formed by the combined Delta of the rivers

Mahanuddee and Brahmini, the deposits formed by which at their

mouth have caused the land to gain upon the sea, and thus pro-

duced a considerable projection from the general run of the coast.

A similar effect is seen at the mouth of the Godavery. While the

Eastern portion of the province is formed of an extensive level plain,

the western partis dotted over with detached hills, and near Bala-

sore bounded by the fine range known as the Nilgiri hills. All of

these peaks and ranges are composed of gneiss, except in the case of

2Q 2

> Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 3.

a cluster of low ranges South and West of the town of Cuttack.

These are composed of sandstone which has been referred to the

same age as the rocks of the Mahadewa hills in Central India, but

the connexion is not clearly established.

Laterite occurs largely in Orissa forming terraces like plains

around all the hills up to a certain level, which level diminishes in

height towards the East until at length the laterite is covered up

by the alluvium of the low country. From various considerations

it appears probable that there are, in Orissa, two kinds of laterite,

one formed by detrital action and containing sand, rounded pebbles

and boulders, the other resulting from the alteration in situ of

gneiss or sandstone. The former appears to be invariably present

where any laterite occurs. The quantity of iron contained appears

difficult to account for.

Besides the flat Delta alluvium of Southern and Central Orissa,

a considerable area in Northern Orissa is covered by an alluvium of

older date which generally contains a gravelly form of laterite.

Wherever the coast faces to the South-East sand hills occur,

generally in several successive ranges one behind the other, each

marking an old coast line.

In conclusion the uses to which many of the rocks of Orissa are

put for building and other purposes were pointed out and the

availability of some of them remarked on.

In a discussion which ensued Captain Sherwill explained the

mode of occurrence of laterite in the Rajmahal Hills.

Captain Young gave some details relating to the same rock near

Rangoon.

Professor Oldham described some curious phenomena connected

with the occurrence of laterite in Ceylon and elsewhere, at the same

time shewing that the name laterite had been applied without good

reason to a number of different rocks distinct from that for which it

was originally proposed.

Professor Oldham also mentioned that he had just been informed

by a member, that a belief existed to the effect that formerly the

bay between the mouths of the Brahmini and Soobunreeka was cul-

tivated land, the sea being kept out by a bund which has since been

destroyed. This rumour seems opposed by the present Geological

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 293

configuration of the coast, but it would be interesting to ascertain

what foundation it has.

The Librarian submitted his usual monthly reports for May and

June, 1858.

LIBRARY.

The following additions were made to the library during May and

June, 1888.

Presented.

Abhandlungen der kon. Akademie der Wissenschaften, zu Berlin, for

1856, Royal 4to.—By tHE Prusstan Roya ACADEMY OF SCIENCEs.

Archeologia: or, Miscellaneous Tracts relating to Antiquity, London,

Vols. 36 and 37, 4to.—By tHe Socrery or ANTIQUARIES: LONDON.

Biblioteca Arabo-Sicula ossia Raccolta di Testi Arabici che Toccano La

Geografia, la Storia, le Biografie, e la Bibliografia della Sicilia, Fase. I. to

III. Lipsia, 1855 and 1856.—By tHE GERMAN ORIENTAL SOCIETY OF

LIEPzIG.

Calcutta Christian Observer for May and June, 1858.—By THE Epiror.

Correspondence relating to the establishment of an Oriental College in

London, pamphlet, 1858.—By THE WRITER.

Half yearly Paper of the Chamber of Commerce.—By THE CHAMBER.

Journal Asiatique, Nos. 41 and 42.—By tue Astatic Socirry or Parts.

of the Agricultural and Horticultural Society of India, Vol.

X. Part. I., Calcutta, 1858, 8vo.—By THE Society.

of the Ceylon Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society, Vol. II.

Nos. 1 to 3, and Part I. of 1856-58.—By THE SocteErty.

(Madras) of Literature and Science, Vol. III. No. 5, for Octo-

ber and December, 1857.—By tHe Mapras AsrIAtTic Society.

Memoire della Reale Accademia della Scienze di Torino, Serie seconde,

Tome XVI. Torino, 1857, 4to.—By THE ACADEMY.

Monatsbericht der kon. Preuss. Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin,

from January to December, 1857.—By THE ACADEMY.

Macgowan’s (Dr.) Remarks on Chinese Foreign Relations, pamphlet,

1857.—By THE AUTHOR.

Meteorological Observations made at Dodabetta, 1851-55, 4to. Madras.

—THROUGH THE Govt. oF Inp1a (Home DEPT.)

Oriental Baptist for May and June, 1858.—By THE EpiTor.

Christian Spectator from March to May, 1858.—By THe

Epitors.

294 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 3.

Proceedings of the Royal Society, Vol. VIII. No. 27 and Vol. IX.

Nos. 28, 29 and 30.—By THE SociEry.

—— of the Royal Society of Edinburgh, Vol. IlI. No. 47.—By

THE Society.

of the Society of Antiquaries of London, Vols. III. and

IV. Nos. 43 to 46.—By tux Soctrzry.

Title-page of Vol. III. and List of Members of the Boole, —By THE

Same.

Quarterly Journal of the Geological wank of London, Nos. 53 and

54.—By THE Society.

Recueil des Actes De l’Académie Imperiale des Sciences, Belles lettres,

et Arts de Bourdeaux, 1 et 2 Trimestres, 19th Annee, 1857.—By tHE

ACADEMY.

Report of the Calcutta Mechanics’ Institution and a few other pamphlets.

—By Basu RasenpRALAL MirTTrRa,

Transactions of the Philological Society, London, for 1854, 1855 and

1856, 8vo.—By THE SociIETy.

—_—————— of the Royal Society of Edinburgh, Vol. X XI. Part IV.

4to.—By THE SocIETY.

Tattwabodhini Patrica, Nos. 177 and 178.—By tur Epttor.

Weber’s (Dr. A.) Indische Studien, Band IV. Heft. I. and I1.—By Tax

AUTHOR.

Weber’s White Yajurveda, Part 111. No. 12.—By tus AurHor.

Werken van het Koninklijk Instituut voor Taal,—Land—en Volken-

kunde van Nederlandsch,—Indie, Riezen en onderzoekingen in den Indis-

chen Archipel door, D. 8. Miller, Deel 1. and II. 8vo.—By THE Roya.

InsTITUTION oF NETHERLANDS.

Ditto, ditto Het Boek Adji-Saka, Amsterdam.—By THE Same.

Vividhartha Sangraha, Nos. 47 and 48.—By Basu RaJENDRALAL

MiTTRaA.

Zietschrift der deutschen morgenlandischen Gesellschaft, Band XII.

Heft 1, Liepzig.—By THE GERMAN ORIENTAL SOCIETY.

Exchanged.

Atheneum for February, March and April, 1858.

Annalen der Chemie und Pharmacia from December to March, 1858.

Calcutta Review (The) No. 59, March, 1858.

The London, Edinburgh and Dublin Philosophical Magazine and Journal

of Science, Nos. 99 to 101, March to May, 1858,

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 295

Purchased.

Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Nos. 3 to 5, 1858.

American J ournal of Science and Arts, No. 74.

Annales des Sciences Naturelles, Nos. 5 and 6, Tome VII.

Comptes Rendus, Nos. 6 to 18, February 8th to 3rd May, 1858.

Edinburgh Review, No. 218 for April, 1858.

Journal des Savants for February and March, 1858.

Literary Gazette, Nos. 2140 to 2156, and extra Nos. 17 to 19 of 1856.

Natural History Review, No. 2. Vol. V. April, 1858.

Quarterly Review, No. 206, April, 1858, Vols. 92, 93, 94, 95 and 96.

Revue des Deux Mondes, 15th March to 1st May, 1858.

de Zoologie, Nos. 1 to 3, 1858.

Books.

Andersson’s (C. John Mr.) Lake Ngami; or Explorations and Dis-

coveries during four years’ Wanderings in the Wilds in South Western

Africa. London, 1856, Svo. |

Atkinson, T. Witlam, Oriental and Western Siberia, and Chinese Tartary.

Buffon’s Histoire des Insects Lépidoptéres, Tome X. 8vo.

Barth’s (Henry) Travels and Discoveries in North and Central Africa:

being a Journal of an Expedition undertaken under the auspices of

H. B.S. Government in the years 1849 and 1855 in5 Vols. Recd. Vols.

3, 8vo. London.

Barges’ Epistola.

Benfey’s Indica.

Bopp’s (Franz) Uber den Einfluss der Pronomina auf die Wortbildung im

Sanscrit und den mit ihm, verwandten Sprachen, Berlin, 1832, pamphlet.

Burnouf et Lassen’s Observations Grammaticales sur quelques Pas-

sages de L’Hssai sur le Pali, Paris, 1827, pamphlet.

Bellot’s Sanscrit Derivations.

Boehtlingk’s (Otto) Die Unadi Affixe, pamphlet, Ato.

Bochinger’s (J. J.) La Vie Contemplative, Ascetique et Monastique chez

les Indous et chez les Peuples Bouddhistes. Strasbourg, 1831, 8vo.

Brougham’s (Lord Henry) Political Philosophy, Vol. I. 8vo.

Crawfurd’s (John) Dictionary of the Indian Islands and adjacent coun-

tries, London, 1856, 8vo.

Candolle’s (M. Alph. de) Géographie Botanique Raisonnée, Tomes I.

and II. Paris, 8vo. 1855.

Deslongchamps’ (A. L.) Amarkocha ou vocabulaire D’Amarasinha publié

en Sanskrit avec une Traduction Francaise, Parts I. and II. Paris, 8vo.

1845.

296 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 3.

Fournel’s (Henri). Etude sur La Conquéte de |’Afrique par les Arabes

Part I. Paris, 1857, 4to.

Hardwicke’s (C.) Christ and other Masters: an Historical enquiry into

some of the chief parallelolisms and contrasts between Christianity and

the religious systems of the Ancient World. Part IL. Religions of India,

Cambridge, 1857, 8vo.

Julien’s (St.) Histoire de La vie de Hiouen-thsang et de ses voyages

dans L’Inde, Paris, 1853, 8vo.

Koeppen (C. F.) Die Religion des Buddha und ihre Entstehung, Berlin,

1857, 8vo.

Leguest’s (M. L’Abbe) Etudes sur la formation des Races Sémitiques

suives de considerations générales sur Vorigine et la developpement du

Language, pamphlet, Paris, 1858.

Malkuma’s Poems.

Néne (F.) Essai sur le Mythe des Ribhavas premier vestige de L’Apo-

theose dans le Véda. Paris, 8vo. 1857.

Notices et Extracts des Manuscrits de la Bibliothéque du Roi et autres

Bibliothéques, Tome X. to XIV. (Vol. 14 has 2 parts) and Tome XVII.

Parte 2nd, Ato.

Pavie (Théodore) Tarikh i Asham Récit de l’expedition de Mir Djumlah

au pays D’Assam, Paris, 8vo. 1845.

Rubuer II] Die Riese Seiner Koniglichen Hoheit des Prinzen Waldemar

von Preussen noch Indien in den Dohren, 1844 bis 1846, Berlin, 1857.

Spier’s (Mrs.) Life in Ancient India, London, 8vo.

Spiegel’s (Dr. F.) Anecdota Palica, pamphlet, Liepzig, 1845.

Thuillier’s (H. L.) and Capt. R. Smyth’s Manual of Surveying for

India, 8vo. 1855.

Vuller’s (Joannis Augusti) Lexicon Persico-Latinum, Fas. V. Parts I.

and II. 4to. Bonera, 1856-57.

Weber’s Indische Studien, Band IV. P. 2.

Westminster Review, No. 26, April, 1858.

Wilson’s Leighton (Rev. J.) Western Africa; its History, Condition

and Prospects, London, 8vo. 1856.

Woodward (S. P.) A Treatise of Recent and Fossil Shells, 3 Nos.

—— Ditto (new copy) 12mo.

Gourpass Bysa’ck,

Librarian and Asstt. Sery.

The Asiatic Society’s Rooms,

8th July, 1858.

1858. | Proceedings of ihe Asictic Society. 254

For Aveust, 1858.

The Monthly General Meeting for August was held on the 4th

instant.

Hon’ste Str James Conviie, Kt., President, in the chair.

The proceedings of the July Meeting were read and confirmed.

Presentations were received—

1. From Capt. Bivar at Debrooghur through Dr. Mouat, some

fragments of Hindu sculpture consisting of an image of the Hindu

Deity Durga or Dossovooja and a portion of a cornice frieze. Capt.

Bivar has promised a communication on the subject, but it has not yet

been received.

2. From the Acting Principal of the Government Grant Medical

College Bombay, a copy of the Report for the session 1857-58.

3. From the Raja Pertap Chundra Singh Bahadur, a copy of the

Ratnavali Natika in Bengali, with an English translation by M. M.

8. Dutt, Esq.

A note from Lieut.-Col. Jenkins expressing his wish to withdraw

from the Society was recorded.

The Council submitted a report announcing that they had appoint-

ed Dr. Crozier, a member of their body, in place of Dr. Boycott,

who had left India ; and also that they had added Babu Ramgopaul

Ghose, to the Finance Committee, and Dr. Crozier to the Committee

of Natural History.

Communications received—

1. The following note, accompanied by a copper plate, from Mr.

Biss, Assistant, Revenue Accountant’s Office :—

Dear Srtr,—The accompanying copper plate was unearthed some

20 years ago in Lot No. 55 of the Soonderbunds in digging a tank.

In the vicinity of the spot where it was found there are ruins of the

abode apparently of some wealthy person.

Whether or not the inscription on the plate is of any interest I

cannot say, but as I have reason to suppose it to be of ancient date,

I would leave it with you to submit it for the inspection of the Socie-

ty, or not, as you may deem fit. I can at present only offer it for in-

Spection it being the property of another.

Yours faithfully,

(Sd.) T. W. Biss.

298 Proceedings of the Asiatic Soviety. [No. 3.

Babu Rajendralal Mittra supplied the following information re-

garding the plate :—

The plate is an oblong of 114 inches by 6 inches with an arched

projection at one end with two perforations. It has a Sanskrit in-

scription of 15 lines on one side and 14 on the other; the charac-

ters being the Gour of the same date as the Backergunge plate

noticed in the 8th volume of the Asiatic Society’s Journal. The

plate has been very much injured by exposure to the atmosphere

and the inscription is almost illegible. From afew lines in the

centre of the obverse it appears that the plate was inscribed (as ge-

nerally such plates are) to record the grant of a piece of land in the

Soonderbuns, bounded on the east by-the bank of the Matanga

River, on the south by the sea and on the west by Kukuta patiana.

The date is illegible, but from the occurrence of the name Vaidyaka

Sena, and the style of the writing, the gift is supposed to be of the

period of the Sena Rajas of Bengal.

2. From Babu Radhanauth Sickdar, being an Abstract of the

Meteorological Register kept at the office of the Surveyor General,

Calcutta, for March and September last.

Lieut.-Col. Strachey explained to the meeting the application of

certain sliding scales to arithmetical computation.

The Librarian submitted his usual monthly report for July last.

LIBRARY.

The following additions were made to the Library during July 1858.

Presentations.

Annals of Indian Administration. The Indian Official Thesaurus, being

Introduction. Compiled by M. Townsend.—By tue Home GoveErn-

MENT,

Ditto, Parts III. to VI.—By THE saME.

Calcutta Christian Observer for July, 1858.—By THE Eprtors.

Oriental Baptist, No. 140, for July, 1858.—By THe Epiror.

Oriental Christian Spectator for June, 1858.—By THE saME.

Report on the Revenue Administration of the Lower Provinces for

1856-57.—By tHe BenGaL GOVENRMENT.

Ditto on Public Instruction in the Madras Presidency for 1856-57.—

By THE Home GoveRNMENT.

1858. | Proceedings of the Astatie Society. 299

Selections from the Records of the Bombay Government with four Maps,

No. XLV. Report o1 the upper portion of the Eastern Naraca, and the

feasibility of restoring it as a permanent stream, accompanied by Maps

and Plans.—By tHe GomBay GovERNMENT.

Report of the Konnugor Seminary, Sessions 1857-58.—By Banu SEers-

CHUNDER DEB.

Calcutta Review, No. 60, for June, 1858.—By tus Epiror.

PPL DR OPINPL POP LOLOL LLL ALA INIA L LAD

Erratum, p. 17, first line, For “C. 1—-16,” read C. 16.

Sah

Haha

es "i peer

nce (gO gains A SRO

pee Hwee: |) i od he ub

dete ty! uve eee Angie

si my hich ie, ee Fan hulk:

. sen heal iba ei ae

‘* y Bhat vane Shit ath be ott Be) ane

a on setts Oka ca yt aye

but ol i) Ht me

age

® a

= Ay

hia

ea ; ; eh

a | mars Views, ° \ y ae Ase is

<—,

; a fl re ? bs

r mf | P| 4 ‘ny la oe | 7 4

®,) e

x) LA

:| .

Par i «

i .

4 a

aR nies AU Pa debs i ‘hs

ko “€ A > i

= i Tay.) iy, *

* . ‘

ts wary 3 Peay t ? r yf

‘, } - i2 a! be

— , i tod

si »

La } area en te i ii

i "?

u ey ee a i

Q wy. ; nf ] ae

"4 | }

‘ fy NTH, id "| ‘ - A 4

14 ‘

~ i uk ii} , he =

a Ser) he da

; ; \ ia a | is

A % y er J M

bite @ Wh Ay, Be Tee's

ith, yh toy yet

ep wy

eit we

at Til ae ame Deh

eh aay conte Be

iy ine Sore oe

A aa

re Ot «

5 oa

JOURNAL

OF THE

mer ATIC SOCIETY.

PPL LDP LPLL LLL LD LLL LLL LL ALLL LS

No. IV. 1858.

DOOD PLLOLVIPPLPPOPPLPVPPPPPPLPPQDVPFPLIPIPPIIIIw—w="

A few remarks on the first fasciculus of Professor Wiuson’s Sanskrit

Dictionary, as “extended and improved” by Dr. GoLDSTUCKER, —

by Firz-Epwarp Hatt, M. A.

The first eighty pages of the work in question—all of it that we

have yet seen—correspond to a little more than twenty-nine pages

of Professor Wilson’s dictionary in its second impression. No

small portion, indeed, of this increase of matter is only apparent,

and due to a more sumptuous style of typography ; and yet Dr.

Goldstiicker’s own additions are by no means inconsiderable. The

literature of the Veda, and of Sanskrit law, medicine, philosophy, and

rhetoric will doubtless be rendered much easier of acquisition than

formerly, if the editor carries his design to the end on the same

plan with that of its commencement. The subject of etymology

has, also, at last received the attention of a scholar familiar with

the terminology of the native grammarians; and, if only as a

necessary consequence, the arrangement of the significations of

homonymes is now noticeably less bewildering than it was of old.

In general, there is scarcely a page of the new revision that does

not testify to extensive research and to great and conscientious

labour.

On the other hand, Dr. Goldstiicker’s scheme appears to.us to

be, in some respects, susceptible of amendment. Why, for instance,

the constantly recurring compounds, which even the merest tyro

can resolve for himself, when he meets them? The vocabulary of

the Sanskrit has, for artificial copiousness, a very imperfect analogue,

No. XCV.—New Senrizs, Vou, XXVII. 2k

302 A. few remarks on the third edition of [No. 4.

in that of the Greek. In the first place, as to the verbal elements

of the latter language, the line has been clearly defined which

demareates what is classical, or legitimately developed, from what

is inadmissible; chronology being, for the most part, the criterion.

Experience, moreover, has shown it to be practicable to embrace,

within a reasonable compass, all the complex terms that occur in

extant Greek authors: and the accession of such terms, from works

likely still to be discovered, is contemplated without apprehension.

But the case is found to be very different indeed, when we turn to

the Sanskrit. For who, here, is not classical, or, at least, is not of

weight for his words? The next century may solve the problem ;

but our own—for which Dr. Goldsticker is working—will not. We

propose this consideration with a definite object. Let it be pre-

sumed that, by and bye, accidental critics will concur in distinguish-

ing certain compositions, say to the number of two hundred, as

possessed of the characteristic of classicality. Yet, even in these

circumstances, we should scarcely expect a lexicographer, after well

weighing his functions, to go about to accumulate all the words

occurring in them, of the sort to which we refer. Still more

unfeasible, and equally supererogatory, would it be, if the entire

body of Sanskrit literature were ever thought deserving of lexical

treatment, to attempt a complete collection, from it, of vocables of

this description. No twenty folios might avail to exhaust them.

The assertion is not to be questioned, that the ancient Hindus

invented compounds at will; and such, to this day, is the practice

of the pandits. No such terms, to our thinking, should ever have

place in a dictionary, unless they are technicalities, or unless their

acceptation is not at once to be gathered from their factors; the

knowledge of one or two facts of Hinduism, and a moderate acquaint-

ance with the grammar, always being postulated in the inspector.*

* Dr. Trench has spoken boldly, but wisely, on the subject of bettering our

English Dictionaries ; and one most important respect in which they are capable

of melioration is, as he urges, in the way of retrenchment. On the point of the

claim of compounds to be inserted in our dictionaries, he holds the following

language: ‘‘ When words have been brought into close connexion with one

another, not in the choice or caprice of one writer, and on a single occasion or

1858. | Professor Wilson’s Sanskrit Dict. 303

We will illustrate our meaning by a single example, and one which

we have not gone far to seek. In common Sanskrit there are some

thirty current words for ‘earth,’ ten for ‘man,’ four for ‘ master’ or

‘lord,’ and six verbal suffixes for ‘holder,’ ‘protector,’ or ‘en-

joyer.* Now, in our own limited reading we have, with only a

few exceptions, met with a majority of the words for ‘master’

and suffixes for ‘ holder’ or ‘ enjoyer’ annexed to each of the words

for ‘earth ;’ and so of the synonymes for ‘man,’ followed by the

synonymes for ‘lord:’ the result being always the same, the equi-

valent of ‘king.’ And, if any one of those three hundred and

forty allowable regal composites may claim to be represented in a

lexicon, why may not all? On the principle with which Dr. Gold-

stiicker has set out, we are to have all, in process of time; on the

condition, possibly, that, in the course of his studies, he obtains

proof of their having actually been used. ‘The same remark applies

to the words for ‘ sun;’ ‘ moon,’ ‘ Brahman,’ &c. &c. Three lines of

explanation in the preface would economize many times three pages

of quite gratuitous symbols. Our fear of seeing the new edition of

Professor Wilson’s dictionary overloaded with superfluities has only

too good ground, if we may augur from the sample before us. Out

of the twenty articles which make up the first page—and it is not

a full page—there are six which, in our judgment, have no right

there: YAU, BUCACW, BUNS, WSC, Auta, Woe ;

and so onward everywhere. ‘The particular specimens just given

were, we are aware, in Dr. Goldstiicker’s original: but, even though

he may not have been permitted to strike them out, yet we suppose

he was under no compulsion to add, indefinitely, new ones of the

Same stamp. Hundreds of words beginning with the negative

two or three occasions, but by the consenting use of many, appear in constant

alliance, being in this their recognised juxta-position to all intents and purposes

a single word, they may then claim their admission of right.’ On some Defi-

ciencies in our English Dictionaries, p. 50. Why not exclude, as a rule, all that

we do not naturally write without a hyphen?

* We might have gone very much further. There are, in post-vaidika Sanskrit,

upwards of sixty words for ‘earth.’ Sce Professor Williams’s English and Sane

skrit Dictionary.

2 RBZ

304 A few remarks on the third edition of (No. 4.

prefix ¥ or We, and with the intensive particle wfa, could, without

the slightest loss, also be dispensed with. If sfasteataa have a

title to presentment, why should any combination whatever of a

particle, an adjective, and a substantive, into an epithet, be extruded,

when it shews itself ?

Nor have we yet done. The proper names of heroic and mythical

personages mentioned up and down the Mahdbharata, the Ramayana,

the Puranas, &c., can hardly be less than a hundred thousand. Yet

none of them is to be neglected by Dr. Goldsticker, if he adheres

to the method, on which he has begun, of pouring a biographical

index into a dictionary proper. Half a quarto page and more is

assigned to Angiras, two-thirds of a page to Atri, ne-third of a

page to Agasti, and as much to Agni. Descending to the limits of

sober history, the kings of Cashmere, their wives, their daughters,

their chamberlains, and their generals, have, each,a niche. Even

Adwaitaénanda is remembered: “ one of the founders of the Vaish-

nava sect in Bengal. He lived about the end of the fifteenth

century.’ Nor are the shadowy actors in avowed fictions reckoned

unworthy of commemoration; such as Anangasena, “the proper —

name of a courtesan in a drama.’ That the cloak of indefiniteness

is thus thrown about this frai] beauty may, by possibility, not be a

squandering of generous delicacy: but, at the same time, it is perti-

nent to enquire why shé should here be obtruded on us, even for —

half-acquaintance. The Vdsavadattd of Subandhu introduces us,

in one place, to a whole novenary of nymphs, and, in another, to a

drawing-room of as many as two and thirty; all of them, on cha-

ritable presumption, quite as it was expected they should be, in

spite of the somewhat warm tone of their conversation. Though

the alphabetical leader of them, Anangalekha, has, we perceive,

eluded Dr. Goldstiicker’s attentions, he should thank us for intimat-

ing to him that just two score still await the courtesy which he

cannot now, with any more grace than consistency, deny them.

Again, in the Harsha-charita we read of thirty-eight lads and lasses

—their names all spelled out at length—who used to assist Bana

when he played at royalty. And why, by parity of reason, should

Charanakaranka, Kalékalada, Haranika, and the rest be forgotten?

The S'ankara-dig-vyaya likewise contains some hundreds of proper

1858. | Professor Wilson’s Sanskrit Dict. 305

names; and it is no sufficient reason to reject them, that they

belonged mainly to misbelievers. To say nothing so special of the

other divinities, the spots held sacred to S‘iva alone are all but

innumerable; and so are the phalli which bear separate desig-

nations. Once more, the eighty or ninety Sahkasra-ndmas of them-

selves furnish as many thousand accredited epithets of gods and

goddesses. Why should a single one of them be slighted ?

Looking still more narrowly into Dr. Goldstiicker’s undertaking,

it appears, in fact, to wear the pretensions of a veritable encyclo-

pedia; bibliography and geography, no less than biography, consti-

tuting a component part of his comprehensive enterprise.* Upa-

nishads, sections of the Veda, apocryphal hymns, the Atri-sanhitd,

the Adbhuta-rdmdyana, and the Anarghya-rdghava of Murari, all

have articles. As the number of distinct Sanskrit works in exist-

ence is, probably, not less than ten thousand, a mere list of them,

be it ever so meagre of details, would alone take up a volume.

It must be obvious, by this time, that the system on which the

dictionary of Professor Wilson is undergoing reconstruction involves,

in copious proportion, many specialties that are altogether mis-

placed. The new edition, which aiming at much more than is

attempted in any rationally digested lexicon of Latin or Greek, yet

falls short of their standard in, at all events, one most essential

particular. We mean, in its citing no authorities. On countless

* Our industrious Teuton appears, in truth, to have copied, however uncon-

sciously, the method of our English dictionaries, as they were loosely styled,

which preceded that of Johnson. These disorderly repertories, Dr, Trench

describes as being “ not dictionaries of words only, but of persons, places, things :

they are gazetteers, mythologies, scientific encyclopedias, and a hundred things

more ; all, of course, most imperfectly, even according to the standard of know-

ledge of their own time, and with a selection utterly capricious of what they put

in, and what they leave out.’’ On some Deficiencies, &c., p. 45.

+ The learned and judicious critic already twice cited speaks for all the world,

equally as for himself,—the sciolists who cling to the shade of Dr. Webster

excepted,—when he says: “To me there is no difference between a word absent

from a dictionary, and a word there, but unsustained by an authority. Even if

Webster’s Dictionary were in other respects a better book, the almost total

absence of illustrative quotations would deprive it of ali value in my eyes.” On

some Deficiencies, &e., p. 7, foot-note.

306 A few remarks on the third edition of [No. 4.

occasions have we gone back from Professor Wilson’s second edition,

which likewise gives none, to the first, where they are often noted,

and have thus obtained a clue by which to satisfy our misgivings.

And what student of the Sanskrit does not do so constantly ? Who,

above all in the infancy of our knowledge of the Sanskrit, will not

insist upon some better warrant for what he accepts, than a simple

implied dixit magister? In the present instance, a want of space

can scarcely be received as an apology for the defect here indicated ;

for space in all abundance might have been secured by sacrificing

but a small fraction of what we have designated as intrusive. The

present observations are written without an opportunity of inspect-

ing the thesaurus of Messrs. Bohtlingk and Roth. It is to be

hoped that the procedure adopted in it, as concerns the adducing

of authorities, is more scholastic than that of Dr. Goldstiicker. As

for the English of the sheets before us, considering that they were

printed in Germany, its correctness is highly commendable. Nor

are such errors as meet the eye of a kind to occasion perplexity.

The principal that we have noticed are “a pumpkin born out of

season,’ a woman who “has born him children,” “ hypothenuse,”’

“‘neutre,”’ “filtre,” “shrewed,”’ “ennuque,’ and “different than.”’

The system of romanization is not uniform throughout: for example,

99 66

“ dwandwa’”’ and “ dvandva, ahankdra’ and “ ahamkdra,”’ “ man-

vantara,” and “ sarwakarman.” “Qaqra”’ isa mistake* for Baqlqre,’

It is high time, on other grounds, that the superficial but pretentious work

here glanced at, should receive a thorough exposure at the hands of some such

man as Dr. Trench. Before learning English himself, Dr. Webster undertook to

teach it to others. Here isasample. ‘‘ Feel this piece of silk, or feel of it.”

We could easily bring forward a hundred other proofs of ignorance as gross as

this. A Yankeeism, however, was, to Dr. Webster, even when he knew it for

such, no solecism. Are Englishman who confide in his awards generally aware of

this fact ?

* THAT FAL WA ARTS SIIAST: |

garaitarta: Vara WAGaTiMA: |

FOATKLAITMAA: GA Cla F |

qucey stata Iatafaa asia Il

Reva-mahdtmya, 25th chapter.

This seems to mean that Ajapala, king of Ayodhya, being afflicted with one

hundred and eight bodily ailments, relieved himself by turning them into she-

1858. ] Professor Wilson’s Sanskrit Dict. 307

and “ spyraTga’” for “wpqretgu.” We should, farther, write ‘ Bri-

haspati’ for “Vrihaspati,’ ‘wxeatw for “wqatw’ ‘yate for

“sata,” ‘sfqatw for “afyara,”’ ‘aizas’ for “ afqats” and

“sfqais’ for “afyais,’? The neuter “ Brahma’ occurs written

“ Brahman”’ also.

How far Dr. Goldstiicker has consulted the native vocabularies is

left pretty much to conjecture. Many compilations of this kind,

unknown to Professor Wilson, could be procured, in this country,

without difficulty; and probably not one of them, however insigni-

ficant or unoriginal, would be without value. Such as have fallen,

as it were spontaneously, in the way of the writer of these lines,

are here enumerated.

1.—The Amara-kos' a-vivriti, by Lingaya Vangala, commonly called

Lingam Bhatta. The author is said to have lived in the south.

A commentary on Amara.

2.—The Budha-manohara, by Mahadeva, surnamed the Vedantin.

Another commentary on the Amara-kos’a. Imperfect, so far as seen.

3.—The Nama-ratnikara, by Koi Deva.

4.—The Wima-sangraha-mdld, by Appayya Dikshita—not Arya

Dikshita.

5.—The S'abda-prakd’sa, digested at the instance of some Muham-

madan of note, whom theauthor styles “ Khana Nripati.” It isa

dictionary of homonymes. The only MS. which we know of ig

defective. It was copied in the Samvat year 1575.

6.—The S’abda-prabheda, by Mahes’wara. This is a work of small

extent, on words variously written, and is in verse. It is not to be

confounded with a section of like character in the Vis‘wa-prakas’a,

which likewise has a Mahes’wara for its author.

7.—The Ndndrtha-kos’a, by S’as’wata,

8.—The Ndndrtha-ratna-tilaka, perhaps by Mahipa. It was com-

posed in the year 1430, of an unspecified era.

9.—The Lakshmi-nivdsdbhidhana, by S’ivarama Tripathin, the scho-

goats, which he nourished. Whatever the absurdity of the story, it has its

worth, to the maker of a mythological dictionary, in determining the correctness

of a long syllable as against a short one, That the text is not depraved is

presumed,

308 Public Inscriptions at Lahore. [No. 4.

liast on the Vdsavadattd. This is a collection of the Unddi deriv-

atives, with definitions. It is said to have elicited a volume of

annotations.

10.—The Gana-nighantu, by Chandrachandana.

11.—The Madana-vinoda-nighantu, by Madana Pala. It was

written before the middle of the fifteenth century. Like the last,

if is concerned with the materia medica.

12.—The S’iva-prakds'a, by S’ivadatta, son of Karpuriya Chatur-

bhuja. The author annotates his own work, which bears date in

the year 1599 of S’alivahana. In subject, it is like the last.

13.—The Dravya-ratnakara-nighantu, possibly by an anony-

mous author. It cites the S’iva-prakds’a. This, too, is medical. The

sole MS. which has been consulted is incomplete.

14,.—The Rdja-vallabha, by Naréyanaddsa. It treats of officinal

substances. It has been printed at least twice, with a Bengali

translation.

Public Inscriptions at Lahore—By Hrvxny Corn, Esq.

Hureeke vid Umritsur, 22nd March, 1858.

The Secretary of the Asiatic Society, Calcutta.

S1r,— Looking over some of my papers, I found copies of all the

inscriptions in existence on the public buildings of Lahore, which

had been carefully taken under my directions during my residence

there, and as I believe they have not been published, and it is

desirable to preserve all available records of the kind, I do myself

the honor to forward them for publication in the Journal of your

Society, if you think them worthy of the honor.

I have added a brief memoir of the several buildings from which

they are taken.

I have the honor to be, Sir,

Your Obedient Servant,

Henry Corr.

1858. ] Public Inscriptions at Lahore. 309

No. 1.—Morrr Mounovvr.

(Persian Inscription.)

TRANSLATION.—Completed in the twelfth year of the reign of

the emperor, (the shadow of God, a Solomon in equity) Noor-ood-

deen, Jehingeer Pddshah, son of Jelal-ood-deen Akbar Padshah

Ghazee, A. H. 1020, under the superintendence of the least of his

lowest slaves, Soondur Khan.

The palace, or fort of Lahore, was commenced by the magnificent

Akbar, and many elegant fragments of the style, peculiar to his age,

were to be seen before the barbarous improvements of an executive

engineer demolished or defaced what the Sikhs had left when they

became masters of Lahore. The design of Akbar was carried out

by his son, and we may reasonably consider the date of the comple-

tion of the Motee Mundur, formerly Motee Musjeed, as the date

of the completion of the palace. \ It corresponds with the year of

our Lord 1614. Jehangeer made Lehore his capital for many years.

He died in the Beembur hills; his remains were conveyed by Noor

Jehan to Lahore, opposite to which at Shadera on the right bank of

the Ravee, she raised the splendid mausoleum that still attracts

numerous admiring visitors. (1 have not given the inscription on

Jehangeer’s tomb, as it is recorded in the Asiatic Register by an

English officer, name not given, who visited Lahore in 1808, and

wrote a most interesting account of the town and of the Court of

Runjeet Singh. He travelled from Hurdwar in the train of one of

the Maharaja’s wives).

The Motee Mundur was the “ private chapel”’ of the palace, and

used as such, till Runjeet Singh began to grow rich, when he selected

it as a suitable place for the storing of his wealth in gold, silver

and jewels. It is believed at one time to have contained treasure

to the amount of two millions sterling. It is small, has been, since

it was converted into a Treasury, surrounded by a strong wall, and

has continued to do the duty imposed on it by the Sikh sovereign,

ever since annexation. It boasts of the most beautifully chaste

marble dome on any Muhammedan building I have ever seen,

deeply scored with the marks of balls fired during the Sikh troubles,

after the Maharajah’s death, from the Minars of the impenal

mosque.

28s

310 Publie Inscriptions at Lahore. [No. 4.

No. 2.—Hatrpaur Gate oF tun PaLace.

(Persian Inscription.)

TRANSLATION.—The king, a Jumsheed in dignity, a Solomon in

reputation, whose court is in the seventh heaven, whose noble

standard waves above the region of the sun, a second Sahib Kiran,

“Shah Jehan,’’ who in justice and liberality surpasses Nousheerwan

and Fureedoon,

Ordered a (Royal?) tower to be erected, which in height should

be beyond measurement and conception, like unto the highest heaven.

In brightness, loftiness, and excellence such a tower never has

been, and never will be seen under the sky. After its completion

his sincére slave and pious disciple Abdool-Kareem, comprised the

year of its erection in the following couplet :—

Like the empire of this all-powerful monarch who has an army

equal to that of Jumsheed,

May this propitious and lofty tower ever remain free from injury.

(The date thus illuminated is the 1041st year of the Hijra, cor-

responding with A. D. 1631).

It would appear, from the above, that Shah Jehan added a tower

at the north-west angle of the palace, which, unless the “ sincere

slave’? wrote in an unusually hyperbolic style even for a servant

of the “king of kings’ has entirely disappeared. The inscription,

may, however, allude to the Sheesh Muhul with which the gate

communicated by a tramp constructed for the use of the elephants

who conveyed the ladies of the Harem to and from their apartments.

The Sheesh Muhul is in the Sumun Bourj (Jasmine tower) cer-

tainly the most conspicuous part of the palace, and its decorations

partake more of the style prevalent in the time of Shah Jehén than |

those introduced by Akbar or Jehangeer.

No. 3.—TuHE Imprrtan on BapsuanEeEt Mosque.

(Persian Inscription.)

TRANSLATION.—This mosque of Ab-ool-zuffur Mohee-ood-deen |

Mahomed Alumgeer Pddshah, was finished in the year of the Hijra |

1084, under the superintendence of the humblest of his slaves

Fidéee Khan, Kokah. |

Tradition ascribes a much older date to this edifice, built by the |

emperor Auruvgzeb in A. D. 1673, during one of the few visits {

1858. ] Public Inseriptions at Lahore. 311

he paid the Punjab. It differs from edifices of the kind by having

four minars of lofty proportions at each corner of the spacious

quadrangle, at the western extremity of which it stands, instead of

two on the northern and southern walls, as in the Jumma Musjid

of Delhi which it otherwise resembles. The gateway on the eastern

side of the quadrangle now stands out isolated in handsome relief

at the top of a noble flight of steps, facing the western entrance of

the fort ; prudential motives having removed the cloistering on either

side so as to leave the terrace open to sight from the fort walls.

The mosque served, for upwards of forty and odd years, as a maga-

zine both to Runjeet Singh and the British Government, but the

ordnance stores have, within the last three years, been removed

into the fort, and the mosque restored to the Musalmans of Lahore.

Their gratitude might have assumed a painfully practical shape in

1857, had less vigorous councils prevailed than those which, on the

13th May in that year, saved the Punjab from an insurrection and

a mutiny.

No. 4.—Tue Mosque or Wuzzrr Kuan.

(Persian Inscription.)

Transtation.—Completed during the reign of Uboo’l-Moozuffur

the second, Sahibi Kiran Shah Jehan Badshéh Ghazee.

This sacred temple was founded by his devoted follower and

esteemed disciple and old servant Wuzeer Khan, 1044, Hijra,

A. D. 1634.

This is one of the most elegant buildings of Lahore, ornamented

throughout in that beautiful tesselated style which the architects

of those days borrowed from the Chinese (workmen were brought

across the Himalaya to give it the true “ Porcelain” character) and

which the men of the present day cannot even imitate, much less

equal, It has suffered very little at the hands of the followers of

Nanuk, whose intolerance should have taught patience at least to

the Mahomedan, though they desecrated its courts, and its pools

by killing swine and sprinkling the walls with their blood.

No. 5.—A sMacu Tessetatep Mosqun nuar tur Moocune Gare.

(Persian Inscription.)

Transtattioy.—Zuhoor Bukhsh laid the foundation of this mosque,

Mahomed Salih completed it, A. H. 1072, (A. D. 1661).

28 2

312 Public Inscriptions at Lahore. [No. 4.

Neither the names of Zuhoor Bukhsh or Mahomed Salih are

known to fame, nor recorded in history. The mosque is known as

the “ Cheeneean-walee Musjeed.”’

No. 6.—Tur GoLpEN og TinAEE MosQuve.

(Persian Inscription.)

TRANSLATION.—Founder of this mosque Nujwaree Khan. (Wo

date).

This building has been made much more of by travellers than it

deserves. It is small, advantageously situated on a high terrace

at the bifurcation of two streets, but so surrounded by high houses

that it can only be seen from a distance. Attached to it is a

curious baolee of great depth, whence the best water in the town is

procurable.

Henry Cope.

Hureeke vié Umritsur, 22nd March, 1858.

No. 1.—Morre Munopwvr.

PY Bsl5 S25/q rio (3500 B51gy9 93 a

was sla whoa lb sliiolio, parvo ae Lnslepta) 198 Sus

ot HS csile Blast aS} wysoJ] Sila Gs] stds Sle wily sly

dL elo] wyye WLAjobes rarhes ule wrtyheS plakals Coyps® | ope Sine

No. 2.—INscRIPTION ON Fees GATE OF THE PALACE.

I EP Blyoy gy

Jin wll 8d» yy) 76? segs 8l¥)b Ores jsSolshuo hence sls

Jus W943, OPReele: Lg phos, Udon SpagJocyS wl asls wi iuale ib

Sed ratsil eel deserters rend gle by 55 Lia! 25 pS sey? al

Ji mowb Saws] PAY eee) erqles}! # dhe ity Sb! 3PM) 9 lao ys

re | ne 36 wel wsdl cr yas eles} ORS pySloae SRL Oy yO SoS Dee)

Sip ees 5 ob Jee 5 Wale cyl “he paslrols wel edgy > Leste

he iil ley? Kas

No. 8.—Inscriprion on THE ImpERIAL MosQue.

psrldol x= B31yy0 9 24)

4M) gue) doe? AU) yO Y

9 SUBD y15gSy Kine csjle slab rid Soe? ood! gor ove sane

wash eles} A555 wler}os WIst) dls wr yhee ei-sols uss” poate ylem

No. 4.—Wouozrerer Kwan’s MosQue.

WE hy on” pl

* The metre of this line is defective,—a word is wanting before (.> sty! —Eps.

1858. | Public Inscriptions at Lahore. 313

wsly elas! e csile slits wk> sib wl y3 crale thet! 54| OF yd

WE 359 co | pos l=} Gel o,0 QedKb (590? isl a} uw

cap® Ma cai dino

No. 5.—A smMatt Mosque NEAR Moocurr DuRWAZA.

B319)9 ist? Leto itl LENT Seve 4)

iss [ovr Sine edly Lei} ET ea cite das? ust r= 2 xb emi sl

No. 6.—SONEREE irene:

piilb oe

CSS? [1h aie WIS Caylget OE (il

”

Notes on the distribution of some of the land and freshwater shells of

India: Part II.—By W. THeosatp, June.

BIRMAH AND THE TENASSERIM PROVINCES.

,. (Continued from page 254).

FRESHWATER SHELLS.

Order. PROSOBRANCHIATA.

Family. MEnanrap”.

Melania. Lam.

1. M. variabilis, Bens.—Birmah and Tenasserim provinces, passim.

A very large and fine variety occurs in the ‘lenasserim river and is

eaten by the Karens. A decollated specimen of four whirls mea-

sures 2.40 by 1.05.

A sharp pointed smooth variety is met with at Noung-ben-ziek, on

the IJrawadi near Prome which measures 2.50 by 0.86, number of

whirls 10.

2. M. lirata, B.—Birmah and Tenasserim provinces, passim. This

shell usually occurs of a small size in the Tenasserim valley. A

very large variety is found in Pegu prominently studded with

tubercles, length about 2.25, but I have no specimen to refer to

Usual size of the common variety 0.90 by 0.45.

3. M. tuberculata, Mull.—Small and poor. A specimen from

Thaiet-mio measures 0.90 0.26. A Bombay specimen 1.40 0.41.

314 Notes on some Indian freshwater Shells. [ No. 4.

4. M. spinulosa, B.—Tenasserim river. Very small and rare.

5. M. Jugicostis,* B.—Tenasserim river, rare. A doubtful species.

Paludomus.

6. P. Regulata,* B.—Common in marshy places and streams near

Prome and Thaiet-mio. This is a sharp pointed shell, having little

resemblance to the typical species of the genus.

7. P. labiosa,* B.—A small species tolerably abundant in the

Tenasserim valley in running streams and the head waters of Tavoy

Province.

8. P. ornata,* B.-—Prome andthe neighbourhood. Not a plenti-

ful species.

Family, Lrrorinip2.

Stenothyra. B.

9. S. Monilifera, B—Mergui. In wet ditches.

Assiminea. Leach.

10. A. Francesie, Gray.— Maulmein, common.

Family. PanupINnipz.

Paludina.

11. P. Bengalensis, Lam. Prome. Rangoon. Very common, and

fine. A dark ferruginous stained variety is not rare at Rangoon.

The Birmese shells, however, do not equal some Bengal specimens.

A large specimen measuring 1.44 by 1.05, whilst a specimen from

Benares measures 2.05 by 1.40.

12. P. Crassa, Hutton.—Thaiet-mio, rare and small.

13. P. Melanostoma.—Henzada. Rangoon. Common.

Bithinia. Gray.

14. B. Cerameopoma, B,.—Ava, (procured by Mr. Oldham).

Maulmein.

15. B. pulchella (?)—Maulmein.

Amphellaria. Lam.

16. A. Globosa, Swain.—Prome, very common. Maulmein. Tavoy.

Family. Nrriripa.

Neritina. Lam.

17. N. Humeralis,* B.—Salween river, within the tideway—of

the type of N. reticularis.

Notrzt.—New species described by Benson marked thus. *

1858. | Notes on some Indian freshwater Shells. 315

18. N. Cryptospira,* B. Tenasserim river. This little species

occurs abundantly on stones in rapids just above the tideway.

19. N. Fuliginosa,* n. s. mihi.—Testa neritineeformi, subglobosa,

spira minima; colore luteo-flavescente rubro reticulata ; intus flaves-

cente-pallida ; aliquando czxrulescente ; non raro fasciis duobus cincta

in apertura facilins visis. Epidermide plerumquenigro colore, extraneo

fucato; semipolita, operculo pallide aurantiaco, margine anteriore

rubro. Longitudinis 0.40. Habitat in regno Burmanorum proper

urbem Amrapoora sive Ava dictam. Teste, T. Oldham.

Order. PULMONIFERA.

Family. Limyxz1p2.

Limnea. Lam.

20. L. Succineus, Desh.—Prome, common.

Planorbis. Diill.

21. P. Coromandelicus, Fab.—Prome and Kangoon, &c. Common

but not large.

Class. CoNCHIFERA.

Family. ARcaDz.

Scaphula. B.

22. S. Pinna,* B.—Tenasserim river within the tideway but in

freshwater. This species appears to have been previously noticed

and recorded as a Dreinnia in Mason’s work on the Birmese Fauna,

till I forwarded specimens to Mr. Benson, who described the species

in the annals of Natural History for 1856. It adheres firmly by

means of a short byssus to porous rocks (Laterite) in the cavities

of which it nestles.

Family. Uwion1p 2.

Unio. Letr.

23. U. exruleus, Len.—Thaiet-mio in small streams and feeders

of the Irawadi, not large or common.

24. U. crispisulcatus,* B.—Very common in small streams near

Thaiet-mio, where it is eaten by the Birmese, 1.96—1.23.

25. U. Pugio,* B. Irawadi river near Ava, Procured by Mr.

Oldham.

26. U. marginalis, Lam. ?—An allied species, if not a variety of

this shell occurs near Prome, 4.80—2.00.

316 Notes on some Indian freshwater Shells. [No. 4.

27. U. Parma,* B.—Common in the Irawadi and Tenasserim

rivers, 2.56—1.90. .

28. U. scutum,* B.—Common in the Tenasserim river, 3.90—2.05.

Family. CyonaDip2.

Corbicula. Muhlf.

29. C, Arata,* B.—Common in the Tenasserim river.

Family. SoLenips.

Novaculina. Benson.

30. N. Gangetica, B.—Tenasserim river. This shell occurs in

great quantities in mud banks within the tideway, but in freshwater,

and is collected for food. My largest specimen measures 2.03

—0.88.

The above is very far from being a complete list of the fluviatile

shells of the Provinces, but is given in default of a better. Many

species of shells are probably yet to be found, and I have a single

valve of a large species trom the Bangong Nulla near Thaiet-mio,

which stream deserves attention.

Mhow, June 9th, 1857.

DARJILING AND THE KwHasta HILLs.

In endeavouring to contribute (from personal observation as far

as practicable) to our knowledge of the distribution of land shells

in India, I think it will prove convenient, not to say necessary, to

divide India proper into three distinct regions, viz. the Himalayan,

the Central and the Southern region—neither do I think these

divisions will be found to be mere arbitrary ones, for though a few

species may be common to all and a still larger percentage to any

two, yet each is distinguished by a sufficient number of character-

istic forms, to render such an arrangement not one of mere conve-

nience, but essentially a natural one. In like manner Ceylon and

the Tenasserim Provinces form two very natural divisions, and

though I could wish that this subject had been taken up by one

having greater experience than myself, yet, as a beginning, I venture

to offer in the present paper, the results of my observations within

the area which has fallen beneath my examination.

1858. | Notes on some Indian Freshwater Shells. 317

The Himalayan region has only been partly examiued by me, and

I shall therefore confine myself to its eastern portion, availing

myself to some extent of the observations of my colleague Mr. W.

Blanford, who obtained, when at Darjiling, several shells which had

escaped my notice.

The central region commencing in the plains below the lower

slopes of the hills, embraces the entire area outside the hills,

drained by the Ganges and Mahanadi to the east, the Nurbudda and

Taptee to the west, and the Indus and its tributaries to the north.

west, a large and important area, but of a richness by no means

commensurate with its extent.

Of the southern region, I know nothing personally, but the known

shells of that quarter sufficiently support its claim to rank as an

independent division.

Kuasta Hurts.

The shells which are here given have mostly been named and

described by Mr. Benson, save in one or two instances, though many

names are still merely manuscript ones, but for practical purposes

I think a mere description unaccompanied by a figure of the shell

is of little use in discriminating between nearly allied forms, though

required by custom to establish the curreney of the name applied

to a new species.

| CYCLOSTOMIDE.

| Pterocyclos, BENSON.

No.1. P. Hispidus, Pearson.—Teria ghat at the foot of the hills

on the road to Cherra. ‘This handsome species is very abundant on

rocks at the limestone quarries a little above Teria ghat, where a

Ditto in dwarf, 0.70.

2. P. Albersi, Pf.—Teria ghat. A dwarf variety.

| dwarf variety also occurs sparingly. Diameter over peristome, 1.20.

| Cyclophorus, Monrrort.

3. CO. Siamensis, Sow.—Teria ghat (the quarries). This very

| handsome species occurs abundantly. The apex is generally imper-

feet, probably from falling among rocks ; as it is a heavy shell.

4. O. Pearsoni, B.—LLacat. Very common. Varies in size

1.90 1.20

1.50 0.90

from

318 Notes on some Indian Freshwater Shells. [ No. 4.

5. C. Zebrinus, B.—Nanclai Poonji on the northern water-shed of

the Khasia hills, 92° 30’ east; 25° 15’ north. It is by no means

an abundant species.

6.* C. Tomotrema, B. Teria ghat, rare. This shell is of the same

type as the Birmese C. scissimargo.

7.8 CO, Pinnulifer, B.—Teria chat. Not rare, varies from 0.60 to

0.30.

Leptopoma, PEr.

8.* L. Cybeus, B.—Teria ghat, rare. Nanclai, rare. A thin

shell of arboreal habits.

Alyceus, GRAY.

9.* A. Prosectus, B.—Teria ghat; very common on rocks.

10.* A. Hebes, B.—Teria ghat, not rare.

Diplommatina, Benson.

11.* D. Polypleuris, B.—Nanclai. Not rare on rocks.

12.* D. Diplocheilus, B—Teria ghat. A short species common

on rocks.

Pupina, VIGNARD.

13. P. Imbricifera. B.—Teria ghat, rare. Found on rocks an

decayed trees, but mostly on the latter. The operculum exhibits

the spiral structure observable in Cataulus.

Hydrocena, PARRYESS.

14. H. Sarrita, B—Teria ghat. Cherra, Nanclai, common on

rocks and amongst moss on trees.

HELICIDA.

Helix, i.

15. H. Plectostoma, B.—Teria ghat, very common, a large variety

is found on limestone rocks, a smaller one on trees, juvenile shells

of this species are remarkably hirsute.

16. H. Serrula, B.—Teria ghat. Common. A beautiful diaphan-

ous species with sharply chisselled striz causing a toothed periphery.

Reeve’s figure conveys a poor idea of thie shell.

17. H. Delibrata, B.—Teria gbat. Very rare. This shell extends

to Birmah and when fine has a hirsute epidermis.

18. H. Lapeina, B.—Teria ghat and along the foot of the hills.

This shell chiefly affects Areca palm trees. It is very closely allied

to the Birmese H. rotatoria.

1858. | Notes on some Indian Freshwater Shells. 319

19. H. Climacterica, B.—Teria ghit. Not rare. A dwarf varie-

ty occurs at Cherra.

20. H. Cestus, B.—~Beneath Cherra. Not very common.

21. A. Decussata, Bi—Teria ghat, rare.

22.* H. Bascunda, B.—Teria ghat, rare.

23.* H. Galea, B.—Teria chat, rare.

| 24.* H. Diplodon, B.—Teria ghat, rare.

25.* H. Oastra, B.—Teria chat, rare. A Darjiling species.

26. H. Planiuscula, Hutton.—Cherra, rare.

27.* H. Puellula, B.—Teria ghat, rare.

28. H. Oxytes, B.—Nanelai poonji,* rather common among lime-

stone rocks.

29.* H. Castor, n.s. mihi.—Testa lenticulari, subdepressa, vix um-

bilicata, acute carinata, confertim striata ferrugine—fuscea anfractibus

51—6, magnitudinis 1.40—0.60. Habitat apud Nanelai, in montibus

“ Khasia’’ dictis.

This shell is not common, and I have only a barely adult specimen

in good condition. It closely resembles H. oxytes which it accom-

panies, and from which it differs in its nearly closed umbilicus, and

less ornate sculpture. The keel too is a trifle more acute and

divides the body whorl in asymmetrical manner, from the shell not

being so flattened down as H. oxytes. The shell is rather stout

and the peristome probably thickened more or less.

30.* H. Pollux, n. s.—Testa lenticulari, subdepressa vix umbi-

licata, acute carinata, tenue striata, translucente, colore stramineo,

polita, peristomate acuto anpactibus 55;—6, magnitudini 1.40—0.55.

Habitat prope Teria ghat, ad pedem montium Khasia dictarum.

This shell is a very distinct species of the same form as the above,

from which it differs in sculpture, want of solidity and colour. As

far too as I can judge, its habits are arboreal, whilst the last species

affects rocks in company with H. oxytes.

A few more helices occurred, of the naninoid type, but not in a

satisfactory state for determination, but the hills below the Cherra

plateau offer a tempting ground for future exploration as the rich-

ness of the few spots examined near Teria ghat proves.

* Poonji = village.

27 2

320 Notes on some Indian Freshwater Shells. [No. 4.

Streptaxis, GRAY.

31.* S. Theobald, B.—Nanclai. Rare; amongst limestone rocks.

Vitrina, DRAPARNAUD.

32. V. Gigas, B.—Near Teria ghat, but at some elevation, and

also at Cherrapunji, length of a large shell 1.45.

33." V. Scutella, B.—Teria ghat, rare.

34.* V. Salus, B.—Teria ghit, rare. The animal is a livid

plumbeous colour, addicted to limestone rock in the sinous cavities

of which it is chiefly to be found. It is very active and when

touched, leaps several inches by rapidly twisting and whirling its

tail in a very vermiform manner, indeed till this habit is known, it

is not easy to secure in the rough places it mostly frequents.

Bulimus, Scorott.

35.* B. Polypleuris, B.—A pretty little scalariform species, of

which a single specimen only was found at Teria ghat.

36. B. Sylheticus, B.—Not met with by me but included in

Mr. Benson’s list of Sylhet shells. It is found in the orange tree

plantations at Lacat.

Achatina, LAMARCK.

37.* A. Pyramis, B.—Teria ghat. Abundant under leaves and

rubbish.

388. A. Crassilabris, B.—Teria ghat, rare.

39. A. Cassiaca, B.—Not found by me but included in Mr.

Benson’s list.

40. A.—————- sp. In too poor a state for description.

41. A.—sp. Ditto ditto.

Pupa, LAMARCK.

42.* P. Vara, B.—Nanclai. Very rare.

43. 2. Plicidens, B.—Cherra.—Very common on limestone rocks

This is a Western Himalayan species.

Clausilia, DRAPARNAUD.

44, C. Loxostoma, B.—Teria ghat. Very common, attached to

rocks or stones. ‘This shell differs much in appearance, being somes

times found entire and with clean epidermis, in others covered with

green matter and decollated. This difference is the result of situ-

ation, those specimens taken from rotten trees and beneath the

loose bark being perfect, whilst those attached in exposed situations

1858. ] Notes on some Indian Freshwater Shells. B21

to rocks and boughs, being constantly moist for months together

and generally with a drop of water pendent from the apex become

decollated and covered with a green confervoid coat.

45.* C. Ignota, n. s.—Teria ghat. Rare, my two specimens at

present in Mr. Benson’s hands for description, so that the name

here given is merely provisional. It is allied to C. cylindrica.

46. C. Bacillun, B—Nanclai. Very rare. A new species but

unfit for description, of the type of C. Insignis.

The freshwater shells may be dismissed in a few words, the most

remarkable of them not being found by me. I allude to Scapula

celox, which inhabits some of the streams in Sylhet.

Paludomus Stephanus, B. and P. Conica, Gray, occur at Teria

ghat, the former in immense abundance.

Ampullaria also reaches a large size at Sylhet, one specimen of

A. Globosa, measuring 3.45 by 3.18, the mouth being 2.41 by 1.40.

A very heavy Calcutta specimen being only 2.43 by 2.28, and the

mouth 1.65 by 1.08.

A. dwarf var. not rare about Calcutta, measures only 1.20 by 1.07.

DARJILING.

My present list of Darjiling shells, will, I regret to say, be found

very meagre, owing to more than one cause over which I have no

control. Since my visit to Darjiling, a large addition to previously

known species, was made by Mr. W. Blanford, who hag sent his

unique specimens to England. Of the others, he has liberally fur-

nished me with specimens, some of the most interesting of which

I had described for insertion in the present paper, but at the last

hour failed to obtain the donor’s permission for so doing, the present

list therefore embraces only published species, though it is to be

hoped Mr. Blanford will himself soon remedy this, and adopt the

course which his prohibition has debarred me from.

CYCLOSTOMID ®.

Cyclophorus.

C. Himalayanus, P.—Not common.

C. Tryblium, B.—Rare.

©. Aurora, B.—Common. This shell varies very greatly in size

322 Notes on some Indian Freshwater Shells. [No. 4.

as the following measurements shew, 1.95—1.30 to 1.20—0.80, and

smaller specimens than this last are not rare.

O. Phenotopicus, B.—A small species of the pterocycloid group

of Cyclophorus.

Megalomastoma.

M. Funiculatum, B.—Tolerably abundant at Darjiling on mossy

banks. |

M. (?) n. s.—A small pointed scalariform species with strong

costulate striation.

Alyceus.

. Urnula, B.

. Constrictus, B.

. Otiphorus, B.

. Stylifer B.

n. 8.

RRARABR AAR

Sa ee

Zana Ge R

Streptaulus. B.

S. Blanfordi, B.

Diplommatina.

D. Pachycheilus, B.

D. sp.

HELICIDa.

Bulimus.

B. Sikkimmensis, Reeve. are.

B. (small sp.)

Achatina.

A. Tenuispira, B.

A. Crassula, B.

Clausilia.

C. Ios, B.

Pupa.

P. (3p.)

Vitrina.

V. (sp.)

1858. | Account of a Cyclone in the Andaman Sea. 323

fleliz.

H. Cyclophlax, B.

HI. Tugurium, B.—Rare.

H. Castra, B.—Rare.

H. Orobia, B.—Rare.

H. Lubrica, B.

H. Huttoni, B.

H, Rorida, B.—Common on shrubs in Darjiling during early

morning.

H. Climacterica, B.

HI. Plectostoma, B.

To this a dozen may safely be added to complete the list, of shells

which are undescribed and of which I have not seen specimens.

Caleutta, 30th August, 1858.

Account of a Cyclone in the Andaman Sea, on the 9th and 10th

April, 1858.—By G. von Lirzie, M. D.

The Friend of India of the 13th May publishes the following

notice: “ The Maulmain Advertiser records a severe gale in the

Bay of Bengal on the 9th and 10th of April and two preceding

days. The shipping suffered considerable damage and the Brig

Dido bound from Rangoon to Penang foundered at Sea; one man

was saved, &c. &c.”’

Having been in the Andaman Sea about that time, doing duty on

board the Honorable East India Company’s Steam Frigate Semira-

mis, Capt. Campbell, which had left Calcutta on the 4th of March

for the Andaman Islands and Maulmain, I had an opportunity of

collecting some information with regard to this gale, a well defined

Cyclone, the publication of which I think will be of importance for

the navigation of the Andaman Sea. I consider the publication of

this account the more in the light of a duty, as we have had only

lately to regret the loss of Mr. Piddington, who has for a number of

years conferred so much benefit on the navigation of the Indian

seas by collecting facts illustrative of the laws of circular storms

324 Account of a Cyclone in the Andaman Sea. [No. 4.

and by popularising knowledge by which to avoid their dangers. I

have no doubt that he would, with his large experience, have done

better justice to the subject than I can hope to do, and I am happy

to avail myself of this opportunity to pay tribute to his memory.

The Cyclone of the 9th and 10th April deserves particular atten-

tion as it followed a direction differing from the common course of

Cyclones in the Bay of Bengal, or in the tropical latitudes generally

on the northern hemisphere. ‘This course is usually from the south

of east to the north of west, but the Cyclone of the 9th and 10th

travelled from the south of west to the north of east—(a direction

which we are accustomed to see the Cyclones assume only after

they have passed the northern tropic)—passing from the north end

of the Andamans to the main land and touching the coast a little

south-east of Cape Necrais.

In drawing up this account, I am in a great measure indebted to

the kind assistance of Capt. Campbell, I. N., whose experience has

guided me where I was deficient in nautical knowledge.

The Semiramis left Port Blair (11° 41’ north latitude, 92° 45’ east

longitude) on the 7th of April for Maulmain. The wind had been

blowing from HE. N. E., H.,and . 8. E. for the whole fortnight previous

to our departure, conveying large summer clouds across the Island.

On the 6th, the clouds thickened with much liyhtning, and occasion-

al showers fell, and on the morning of the 7th, the sky was overcast

and rainy. Soonafter we had left Port Blair onthe 7th, the wind

turned to south-east with rain and squalls and lightning to south-

ward, but on the morning of the 8th had changed to the north-east,

the weather clearing a little. During the day it went to the north

and west of north and inthe night returned to north-east, from

which quarter it continued until we approached Amherst, where we

anchored at 1 Pp. M. on the 9th. Here the wind changed through

H.to 8S. HE. during the afternoon of the 9th, the squally weather

continuing. During the night with much lightning to the south-

east and south the wind increased considerably in force (from 4 to

8 and 9) turning to 8. and blowing a gale on the forenoon of the

10th with occasional squalls of rain, but no increase of clouds or

unusual electric phenomena during the day, blue patches of the sky

being occasionally visible.

1858. | Account of a Cyclone in the Andaman Sea. 325

The Semiramis weighed anchor at noon and proceeded up the

river to Maulmain, where she arrived at 2 p. m. The wind after mid-

day gradually changed to 8. W. diminishing in force. The readings

of the barometers, having followed a most regular course since the

day we had left Calcutta, showed on the morning of the 10th a re-

markable irregularity. The barometrical curve of the 9th had still

been regular, rising from 6 o’clock to 9 and 10, then falling till 4 and

5 Pp. M. and rising again in the evening. On the 10th the Mer-

cury rose only till 8 o’clock, when it commenced to fall, being at

10 o’clock much lower than it might have been expected, and nearly

0.200 inches lower than the day before at the same hour. (Yor the

observations on board the Semtramis as well as abstracts from the

logs of the ships mentioned hereafter, vide Appendix.)

The mean barometrical pressure on the 10th (mean of hours

8 a. M. and 4p. m.) was 0.15 inches lower than the mean of the 9th.

On the 11th, the barometer rose again, nearly to its former height

aud returned to its regular course. ‘The mean temperatures of both

days (9th and 10th) were about the same, but with a greater varia-

tion on the 10th.

The concurrence of the low and irregular barometric pressure

and the increasing force of the wind made it very probable that a

Cyclone was passing near, of which we felt the extreme edge, the

changes of the wind being slow and the general disturbance in the

atinosphere not great. The change in the direction of the wind

having taken place from S. E. by 8. to S. W. would indicate a posi-

tion in the right semicircle of the Cyclone, its centre having been

nearest on the forenoon of the 10th. <A few days after our arrival

at Maulmain, we obtained the confirmation of this conjecture.

On the 12th, the survey brig Mutlah, Lt. Sweney, I. N. came

in, having been obliged to quit her station opposite the middle Anda-

man in consequence of bad weather, on the 8th April. The Mutlah

had the first indication of bad weather on the 7th when at anchor

in Diligent Straits (vide Appendix). The wind which had before

been blowing E. N. KE. and E.S. E. the same as at Port Blair,

changed on the 7th to 8S. E. with squalls and rain in the evening.

It will be remembered that the Semiramis experienced the same

change on the same day and in about the same longitude or rather

2uU

326 Account of a Cyclone in the Andaman Sea. [ No. 4.

more to the eastward but further south. On the 8th the gale in-

creased, the wind veering to S. 8. E. The Brig now left her anchor-

age and ran before the gale, standing N. H., the force of the wind

still increasing and blowing furiously on the forenoon of the 9th

from 8. On the 10th the force of the gale moderated, the wind

veering to 8. S. W. and 8S. W., the Brig running for the Maulmain

river. The barometer ecoutinued to fall from the 7th, and was low-

est on the 9th.

On the 10th it rose again. Aceording to the veering of the wind

the Mutlak was also in the right semicircle of the Cyclone and by

the barometer nearest to its centre on the 9th, the centre bearing

west. Judging from the violence of tle weather she experienced,

she must have approached it much nearer than the Semiramis. She

met the gale two days earlier than the Semiramis, and further west.

Although the observations of the two Ships coineided so far, it

was a strange circumstance that in these latitudes (15° to 17° N.}

a Cyclone should travel in the direction indicated, namely, from

west to east, the common course of Cyclones in these latitudes being

from east to west, and confirmation was still required of the nature

of the storm having been that of a Cyclone.

This was given by the Mail Steamer, Cape of Good Hope, which

experienced bad weather on the 9th, passing along the Arracan

Coast from Akyab to Rangoon. With her, the Cyclone set in from

the east about noon near Cheduba, the wind increasing and veering

round to N. E. and the sympiesometer falling. The violence of

the storm was greatest and the sympiesometer lowest about and

after midnight, wind N. when she was about forty miles N. W. of

Cape Negrais. After this the wind changed to N. W. the storm

moderated and ceased at noon onthe 10th. The Ship arrived at

Rangoon on the evening of the 11th with fine weather.

The wind having commenced with H. veering by N. to W., the

Cape of Good Hope was evidently in the left semicircle of the

Cyclone, and nearest its centre about midnight, on the 9th the cen-

tre bearing H.

On the morning of the 9th, when approaching Amherst we had

sighted the ship Alma on her way from Amherst to Port Blair. She

passed us with N. E. wind which she kept till late in the afternoon.

1858. ] Account of a Cyclone in the Andaman Sea. 327

At 9 P. M. a squall from 8. E. blew away her main top sail ; at mid-

night the wind came from S. with terrific squalls, thunder and light«

ning, the gale blowing till noon on the 10th, when it moderated

with 8. W. On the 11th the weather was fair with light airg from

the westward. The Alma in the right semicircle of the Cyclone

had been driven N. Westward into the gulf of Martaban, where she

had the worst of the storm at midnight from the 9th to the 10th,

the centre bearing west, at a time when Amherst partook only of

the changes of the wind without experiencing the violence of the

gale. From the observations of the Alma and the Cape of Good

fTope it is possible to fix the centre of the Cyclone at midnight on

the 9th. Judging from the great violence of the gale at Port Dal-

housie where the storm is said to have been worst, it was about

forty or sixty miles EK. N. E. off Cape Negrais on the main land

(vide Charts).

The Honorable East India Company’s Steamer Coromandel bound

for Madras, left Rangoon on the 8th with N. and N. E. wind and

rain. She kept the usual course and in 15 latitude, a. uw. on the

9th she steamed westward. The Cyclone commenced at 11 a. M.

on the 9th, the wind changing from N.toS. EH. barometer 29.96.

She soon changed her course to W. by N. and W. N. W., the wind

veering to H. 8S. E. at 1 Pp. M. increasing fast and barometer falling.

At 4 Pp. Mm. the Ship was a little north of Preparis Island, the wind

had suddenly changed to N. N. E. increasing to a heavy Cyclone

with thunder and lightning and heavy rain. The barometer falling

rapidly, but the urgency of the occasion not leaving time to record

the observations.

The Ship now hove to with her head to E.; much damage was

received (vide Appendix). ‘I'he gale continued heavy, the wind

veering to N. W. until 7 p.m. when an observation of the barome-

ter could again be recorded, which was very low 2920. After that

hour the weather moderated, the wind drawing to the westward and

the barometer continued rising. It was at 10 p. m., 29.49. From

the great violence of the storm experienced about 4 P. mu. the sud-

den change of the wind to the northward, and the rapid as well as

great fall of the barometer, the Coromandel must have been close te

the centre of the Cyclone about that time.

2u 2

328 Account of a Cyclone in the Andaman Sea. [No. 4,

The Cyclone had struck the Ship first with 8. E. the same as was

the case with the Mutlah and Alma, but at a later date and to the

east of the former, and earlier and to the west of the latter, the

Coromandel being in a position between these two Ships. This con-

firms the view already taken of the Cyclone passing from 8. W. to

N. HE. The Coromandel instead of passing through the right semi-

circle of the Cyclone, as the other ships, must have steered right

across its tract into the left semicircle, narrowly escaping the centre

itself. That she was closer to the centre than any of the other

ships is proved, as already mentioned, by the rapid changes of the

wind between 1 Pp. M. and 7 P.M. from E.S. HE. to N. W. The ob-

servations of the Coromandel allow us to fix the centre to about 20

or 40 miles north of Preparis Island at 4 P. M. on the 9th, and its

passage to the main land between that hour and midnight is shown

by its position at midnight which we have fixed from the observa-

tions of the Cape of Good Hope and the Alma.

We are now also enabled to trace the position of Wes centre at

noon on the 9th. The Coromandel had at that time the wind from

S. E., the centre bearing 8. W. At the same hour the Mutlah had

the wind from 8. the centre bearing west. Proceeding from the

positions of the two ships at noon on the 9th these bearings unite

in fixing the centre to about ten miles north of the little Cocos

Island (vide charts.) This agrees well with the observations of the

Cape, the wind about noon near Chiduba being east.

It now remains to trace the positions of the centre at noon on

the 10th. At that hour, the Alma in the Gulf of Martaban, very

near the coast had S. W. when the Cape of Good Hope about 40

miles S. west of Cape Negrais had N. W. The bearings of the

centre from these directions of the wind point to a position about

40 or 60 miles to the North of Rangoon, on the main land. This

is further confirmed by the change of the wind about noon at

Amherst from 8S. to S. W., I have delineated the tracks of the

ships and that of the storm on the 9th and 10th on the two accom-

panying charts.

By information received, the storm was not felt at Akyab, but its

widest circle about noon on the 9th touched Chiduba Island and

shortly after that hour Amherst, where I take the change of the |

1858. | Account of a Cyclone in the Andaman Sea. 329

wind to S. E. and its subsequent veering by 8. to S. W. as sufficient

evidence. Starting from the position fixed for the centre at noon

on the 9th near the Cocos Islands, this would give it a radius of

about 300 miles. On the 8th when it commenced, prebably a little

W. of the Andamans, it was felt at Port Blair.

Having fixed the centre for noon of the 9th for the midnight fol-

lowing and for noon of the 10th, we are enabled to form a conclu-

sion as to its rate of travelling and the difference of its speed on

the surface of the Sea and on the land. In the period from noon

to midnight on the 9th, the centre accomplished a distance of about

160—170 miles and in the 12 hours following about 90—100 miles.

Accordingly it travelled at the rate of about 14 miles an hour on

the water and of about 8 miles an hour on the land.

The track of the Cyclone does not keep a straight line but is

slightly curved, the concavity of the curve pointing to the south-

east.

For determining the position of the centre, I have only used such

positions of the ships as could be defined with sufficient approach to

their real place, as otherwise the uncertainty of some parts of the

ship’s tracks and also of the observation of the wind’s changes when

further removed from the centre, would often lead to error.

To complete the information, | mention that bya letter which

Capt. Dicey, Master Attendant at Calcutta, had the kindness to

communicate to me, the Cyclone caused considerable damage at

Henzadah latitude 17° 40’ N. and longitude 95° 15’ E. on the fore-

noon of the 10th, when its centre passed between that place and

Rangoon. The destruction caused at Rangoon was also great, as

I conclude from verbal accounts, but it is to be assumed that

the violence of the Cyclone must have been considerably lessened

by the time it had progressed so far inland. ‘This would also

appear from the small disturbance of the atmosphere experienced

at Amherst and Maulmnaia on the 10th.

It will be interesting to mark the limits of the region in which

the Cyclone raged, and the winds that prevailed in these limits

before and after it.

The region in which the effects of the storm were felt may be

included between the 11th and 19th degrees N. latitude and between

330 Account of a Cyclone in the Andaman Sea. [No. 4.

the 92° and 98° E. longitude. There is no doubt it must have

extended to the west of 92° H. longitude on the 8th and 9th, but,

no observations being available, I will not go beyond that limit.

In this region the polar current prevailed before the commencement

of the gale, as shown by the observations of the Semiramis, Port

Blair and Mutlah before the 7th and of the Alma and Ooromandel

on the 8th (Amherst and Rangoon, vide Appendix.) On the 7th

and 8th a south-eastern current from the equator first entered the

south-western quarter of the region between 93° and 95° latitude.

(Semiramis and Mutlah on the 7th) at a time, when in the eastern

half the polar current still prevailed (Semiramis, Coromandel and

Alma on 8th.) The entrance of the southern current seems to

have introduced the atmospheric disturbance, but the rotatory motion

was not observed before the 9th and 10th, when the Cyclone had

been formed, travelling now from 8. W. to N. E. The lutlah’s log

makes it probable that the Cyclone took its origin west of the

middle Andaman on the 8th.

After the Cyclone had passed, the prevailing winds in the region

were westerly, with calms, and later the polar current prevailed

again.

To the south-west of the region (latitude 6° 10’ longitude

88°—90° ship Hdwards) on the 8th and 9th S. westerly winds pre-

vailed, giving way on the 10th to the polar current.

‘To the north of the region (Dalhousie, Calcutta and Sea and Cape

of Good Hope, forenoon of 9th.) The 8. W. sea breeze common to

the coast of Bengal and Arracan, prevailed before as well as after

the gale (Dalhousie, Calcutta to 16° 51’ N. latitude and 92° 16’ E.

longitude from 7th to 11th.) The log of the Hdward shows that

the south-eastern current, which ushered in the Cyclone, was con-

fined between very narrow limits, not reaching west of the Anda-

mans. It was on the 7th probably confined between longitude 92°

and 95° or 96° east longitude.

1858. | Account of a Cyclone in the Andaman Sea. dol

APPENDIX.

Memo. from the Log of H. East India Company's Steam Frigate or

Semiramis, Cart. CAMPBELL, and also private Journal.

6th April.

2a. M. Bar. 29.965

10 30.030

12 30.015

2 P.M. 29.975

4 29.945

6 29.925

8 29.940

7th April. :

6-30 A. M. 29.910

8 29.935

10 29.970

4 P.M. 29.850

6-25 29.850

8 29.910

8th April

6-30 4.m. 29.3850

10 30.005

2 P.M. 29.940

4 29.940

6 29.940

8 29.960

Latitude, at noon on 8th

84.00

85.00

85.75

86.25

86,25

86.25

85.75

85.0

83.5

83.0

82.0

83.75

80.75

81.25

82.00

81.75

Longitude, .........

At Port Blair, sky overcast,

wind E. S. E., cali in evening.

Left Port Blair at 6 a.m., much

rain during the meht with thun-

der and lightning, wind was

H. N. E. in the morning, changed

in the middle of the day to S. E.

and remained so till evening,

when it was HK. S. E., strength of

the wind 4—5; much rain with

squalls all day. Ports closed siuce

9 a. M., ship rolling.

At midnight the wind lulled

and then set in from N. BE. In

the middle of the day it changed

from N. H. to the west of N. and

returned to N. E. in the evening,

strength 2—4, raining and over-

cast all day with some lightning.

14° 30’ N. by account.

96° 10" EE:

oo2 Account of a Cyclone in the Andaman Sea. [ No. 4.

9th April.

6-30 a.M. 29.975 80.5 During the night wind conti-

9 30.040 80.75 nued N. EH. until about 7 a. m.,

10 30.040 81.0 after that hour it turned easterly

12 29.980 81.0 and about noon became S. H,

A PAM, 29.940 81.5 strength 3—4. At noon we took

4 29.925 81.5 the pilot on board in sight of

6 29.920 81.0 Amherst and anchored at 2 P. m.,

8 29.950 80.5 raining with interruptions all day ;

during the night following the

9th, lightning was observed all

round, but principally toS. HE.

and S.

Latitude at noon on 9th 16° 4’ N. by account.

Loneitudey. se. eee. BL oy

10th April.

7 A.M. 29.860 78.00 The wind after midnight of the

8 29.900 78.50 9th changed from S. E. to 8S. and

10 29.870 80.50 remained so, increasing in strength —

11 29.875 81.75 (8—9) till about noon, when it

12 . 29.850 81.00 diminished, the wind gradually

2 P.M. 29.830 84.50 changing in the afternoon to

4, 29.805 78.50 S. W., left Amherst at noon and

6 29.815 79.00 anchored Maulmain about 2 P.

8 29.800 79.00 M., raining with interruptions all

day.

11th April At Maulmain, wind S. W. and

calm, clouds from N. W.

Memo. from the log of the Brig Mutlah, Lt. Swunny, L. NV.

7th April.

Aneroid Temp. At anchor off North Button,

Bar. Diligent Straits (middle Anda- —

4 A. M. 3V.00 84.5 man.) Overcast, slight showers, —

10 30.02 83.5 wind from H, N. E. in the morn- :

i ing turned after 10 a. M. towards |

4, P. M. 29.93 82.5 S. E. strength increasing as ib |

10 29.98 81.5 changed from 2—7 and 9, squally

in the evening.

Oe ee ee ee a ma

1858. ] Account of a Cyclone in the Andaman Sea. 333

8th April.

4A. M.

4 P.M.

9th April.

4. A. M. no obs

10 no obs.

4 P.M.

10 no obs.

10th April.

4 a. M. no obs.

10 a. M.

4 P.M.

29.90 83.25

29.94

29.87 83.75

29.90 84.00

: 29

29.79 81.75

)

29.93 82

29.89 82.5

29.74 83

Gale increasing,incessant rain,

84.00 left the Anchorage to gain the

open sea, run before the gale,

standing to N. E. wind S. S. E.

the whole day strength 5—8.

About midnight of 8th, heavy

squalls, torrents of rain, course

N. E., wind changed to §S., at

daylight of 9th stood E. by N.

to steer clear of the Cocos and

Preparis, and steer out of gale,

wind S,

8 A.M. gale increasing, blow-

ing furiously, torrents of rain and

high sea, vessel labouring and

straining. Noon slightly moder-

ating, wind S. stood E. N. E.

At midnight of 9th, heavy sea

gale, heavy squalls, moderating

after daylight, wind turning to

S. S. W. and in afternoon to

S. W., moderating ; strength of

wind during the morning 7—8

and 9, at 4 p. w. 8.

Running for Maulmain river,

3 past 1, struck soundings 16 fa-

thoms, sand.

10—380 p. m. anchored in 15

fathoms with Island a head (Cale-

gouk.)

Latitude at noon on 10° 15’ N.

Longitude,

re O°, Oa Bh

334 Account of a Cyclone in the Andaman Sea. [No. 4.

11th April.

4A. M. 29.88 80.5 Under weigh to Caligouk Is-

10 30.00 81 land 3—4 miles E., wind N. west-

4 P.M. 29.94 82.75 erly, clearing up at noon, sighted

10 30.02 84 Amherst Pagoda.

Remark.

The tempest was worst on the morning of the 9th.

Memo. from Log of the Mail Steamer Cape of Good Hope, Capt.

ROBERTSON.

9th April.—Proceeding down the coast from Akyab to Rangoon,

wind S. W. on the morning of the 9th.

Noon.—Wind HE. or HE. 8. E. threatening appearance, Sympie-

someter, 29.95.

2 p. m.—Off Chiduba Island, wind E., barometer 29.90.

8 p. M.i— Wind N. E. gale, sympiesometer falling 29.70.

Midnight.—About 40 miles N. W. of Cape Negrais, wind N. —

sympiesometer 29.49, heavy gale, thunder and lightning, squalls and

rain, deck furniture carried away.

10th April.About 50 miles west of Cape Negrais, wind has gra-

dually changed to N. W. sympiesometer commenced to rise.

Noon.—Passed Negrais channel, wind N. W. moderating.

Remarks.—The gale was most severe shortly after midnight. It |

ceased in the afternoon of the 10th. The wind veering to W. N. W. |

and remaining westerly and N. westerly afterwards. Fine weather

on the 11th, arrived at Rangoon on the llth at night. At Port |

Dalhousie, the cyclone had been worst, two ships were lost on the

9th. At Bassein, also great destruction was caused by the cyclone.

I am indebted for this account to the verbal communication by

Capt. Robertson.

Memo. from Log of ship Alma, Capt. D. Rivcuts from Amherst to |

Port Blair.

8th April.—At Amherst, a strong breeze from N. W. until about |

midnight, when it veered to N. EH.

9th April.—Left Amherst at 9 a. M., wind N. E., remained so

until night.

13858. | Account of a Cyclone in the Andaman Sea. 339

9 p. M.—A sudden squall from 8S. E., blew away the main top sail,

it moderated again.

Midnight.—Verrific squall from S., with thunder and lightning,

gale lasted until noon.

10th April.iNoon when it moderated with S. W. course from

midnight until noon undecided N. W. or W. The ship drifted

until she had only 8 fathoms of water muddy.

11th April.—Gale ceased, wind coming round to the westward,

light airs at noon.

Latitude 11th at noon 15° 5’ N.

Poriettude, .cecie/ eset (OOF oad.

12th April.—Light airs from the westward, fine weather continu-

ed until arrived at Port Blair on 19th.

I am indebted for this account to the verbal communication of

Capt. Ritchie.

The track of the Alma, as in the chart, was kindly laid down for

me by Capt. Campbell, with special regard to drift and local tide

currents.

_ Memo. from the Log of Honorable Hast India Company’s Steamer

Coromandel, Lt. Strapuine, I. LN.

- Sth April.—Left Rangoon, wind North, rain.

_ 4~.u.—Left Rangoon Bar. Gloomy, and rain N. E. 3.

| Midnight —Wind North, rain.

9th April, 9 A. Ma—Heavy squalls, confused sea, wind N. E. to

N. barometer 29.94.

Thermometer 81.

11 a. m.—-Cyclone first struck ship steaming to westward, wind

'S. E. 6, heavy sea, confused barometer 29.96, rain and gloomy.

| Noon.—Uatitude 14° 59’ 30” N., longitude 94° 15’ E. by account.

, uae m.—High sea from south rolling heads, washed away boat,

| wind increasing, EH. 8. E. barometer 29.59, thermometer 82.5, steam-

| ing W. by N. and W. N. W.

| 4p. M.— Wind N. N. E. increasing fast, heavy cyclone, squalls,

with heavy rain, thunder and lightning, barometer falling rapidly.

Hove to with head to eastward, sails blown away.

oe 2

336 Account of a Cyclone in the Andaman Sea. [ No. 4.

7 ~.M.—Wind N. N. W. blowing furiously, cross sea, squally

and rain, barometer 29.20 lost jib boom and 24 pr. gun.

10 p, M.-Wind drawing to westward, vessel shipping seas fore

and aft, barometer 29.49.

Midnight.—Lost sails, blown away, furled. Barometer rising,

slightly moderating.

10th April, 4 4. mM.—Stood S. W. ward, shipped heavy sea from

S. E., ship rolling heavily, wind N. W. to W., passed ship standing

to eastward.

Variable winds to westward all the 10th.

Remarks.

Gale was strongest at 4 P. mM. on 9th, with wind suddenly increas-

ing to north, barometer falling rapidly till 4, then rising, moderated

at 2 a. M. on 10th, confused sea all forenoon. Capt. Campbell had

the kindness to procure this memo. for me, and also to Oday down the

track of the Coromandel.

Memo. from Log of Honorable £. India Company’s Steamer Dal-

housie, Lt. Hutuary, L. N. from Calcutta to Port Blair.

7th April.—River Hooghly at Calcutta, weather fine, winds vari-

able, barometer at 9 a. M. 29.90 Temp. 88.

8th April.—River Hooghly at Calcutta, wind westerly and north-

westerly, weather fine, barometer at 9 a. m. 29.96 Temp. 82.

9th April.—Proceeding down the river, wind westerly 2—4 baro-

meter 30.00 Temp. 83.

10th April.—At 1—30 Pp. m., the Pilot left the ship, winds between

W.and 8.4. Barometer at 9 a. m., 29.97 Temp. 85.

At noon of 10¢th.—Latitude 18° 51’ N. longitude 89° 59’ E.

11th April.— Wind S. 8S. W. 38—4 fine, barometer at 9 a. M.

29.96 Temp. 88.

At noon.—ULatitude 16° 52’ N. longitude 92° 16’ E.

12th April.Calm, latitude 14° 36’ N. longitude 93° 41’ E.

Memo. from Log of Ship Edward, from Kurrachee to

Port Blair.

7th April.—At noon latitude 7° 13’ N. longitude 88° 31’ E., wind |

northerly and variable with calm.

1858.] On Hypsometrical Measurements. 337

8th April_—At noon latitude 7° 34’ N. longitude 89¢ 1’ HE. winds

S. W., steady breeze and fine.

9th April.—At noon latitude 8° 28’ N. longitude 90° 52’ HE. winds

S. W. and W.S. W., fresh breeze and cloudy.

10th April—At noon latitude 10° 23’ N. longitude 92° 40’ E.

sighted little Andaman at 8 a.m., wind N. W. all day, fine and

steady.

Memo. of observations at Chatham Island, Port Blair,

Barometer. By Dr. GAMUMER.

7th April. Sth April. | 9th April. |10th April.

Bar. Wind. | Bar. Wind.|/Bar. Wind. | Bar. Wind.

Sunrise.—29.82, Hasterly./29.77, South. |29.73, 8. W. | 29.86, W.

10 a. w.—29.82, N. BE.” |29.79, S. 29.83, 8. W. | 29.88, W.

4 Pp. M.—29.82, N. EB. |29.77, 8. 29.83, W. 29 92, W.

Sunset.—29.80, E. N. E.|29.77, S. W. |29.85, N. W. | 29.92, N.W.

Remarks.—1t commenced to blow head at midnight, following

the 7th. The position of Chatham Island being confined within the

harbour, the indications will not follow the smaller changes in the

open sea, but for the greater alterations in the directions of the

wind, they are sufficiently close.

On Hypsometrical Measurements by means of the Barometer, and

the Botling-point Thermometer.— By Jamus Buraeuss, Esq.

The whole subject of the barometrical measurement of heights

has been investigated by so many eminent physicists since the

time of Pascal and Descartes, that it is not to be expected that

much that is new can now be added to the theory. The object

of this paper is—(1) by correcting the constants used in the latest

development of the usual formula, according to the most recent

and trustworthy experiments, to render the results obtained in

practice as accurate as possible; and,—(2) to deduce formule and

tables for facilitating the computation of heights by means of the

temperature of boiling water, which shall give results more in

accordance with the truth than the tables hitherto employed.

338 On Hypsometrical Measurements. [No. 4.

I.—Barometrical Measurements.

1. The most recent and complete investigation of the theory of the

measurement of heights by aid of observations with the barometer,

is that of Bessel in the Astronomische Nachrichten.* This formula

may be written in a general form, thus :—

P (9)(h'—h) , (1—d) p )

os — == ——_——_.

Po a CL ae)

wP Pond

where—

P is the weight or pressure of the atmosphere at the lower sta-

tion, and P’ that at the upper, the unit of pressure being that

exerted by a column of mercury of 336.905 Paris lines or 29.9218

English inches at the sea-level in latitude 45°.

h is the approximate height of the lower station, and h’ of the

upper, above the level of the sea; so that if H, and H’ respectively

represent the true altitudes of the stations and r the radius of the

earth, then—

y WH’ ry HW’

hh, and h’ = :

r+H yr + H’

(7) is the ratio of the force of gravity at the sea-level in the latitude

X, of the two stations to that at the sea-level in latitude 45°.

a, denotes the fraction of mean saturation of the stratum of air

between H and H’, and taking the fractions of mean saturation at

the two stations, we may use for that of the stratum 3} (a + a’.)

ais the co-efficient of dilatation of the air for an increase of 1°

of temperature, ¢ denotes the mean temperature of the stratum

reckoned from freezing point.

d is the density of vapour in terms of that of air ;

P, the tension of vapour of the temperature ¢ And

L, a constant dependant on the relative density of the air and of

mercury.

2. But, in order to obtain accurate results by means of this formula,

it is of importance that the constants should be determined as accu-

rately as possible.

* See Schumacher’s Ast. Nach. No, 356, Taylor's Mem, Vol. II.

1858. | On Hypsometrical Measurements. 339

Now (g), which depends on the variation of gravity between the

equator and the poles, has the form—

(g) =1— cos. 2X.

where z is & times the ratio of the centrifugal force to gravity at

the equator, diminished by the ellipticity of the earth. Slghtly

different values have been deduced by different philosophers for the

value of 2,* but with Bessel we may adopt—

: 3 2 = 0.0026257 ;

and consequently we have

(g) = 1 — 0.0026257 cos. 2 A.

3. The constant L is the most important, and depends on the den-

sity of the air in terms of that of mercury; thus, B being the

standard height of the barometer at the level of the sea in lati-

tude 45°; D, the density of air under the pressure B of mercury in

terms of the density of mercury, and M the modulus of the common

logarithms—

L=—.

Bessel, in determining the value of L, has derived it from the

experiments of Arago and Biot on the weight of air, whence he finds

D = ————..

10466.8

Ritter, however, has shewn that according to Regnault’s experi-

ments, the weight of a litre of air containing the average amount

of 0.0004 of its volume of carbonic acid and under a pressure of

760 mm. of mercury is 1.2934963 gramme.t Now the latitude of

the college in Paris is 48° 50’ 14”, and the height above the sea is

* If for the ratio of the centrifugal force to gravity we adopt the value

1 5 1 il

we haven = —°? — —_—- =

2 289.4 299.15

0.0052964, or + == 0.0026482 ; Laplace, Gauss and Littrow used for 4 ” the

value 0.002845 ; Poisson (Traité de Mécanique 2nd ed.) gives } » = 0.002588 ;

Sabine from his pendulum experiments infers that $ » = 0.0025914; and Baily

(Mem. Ast. Soc. vol. vii. p. 94) gives .0025659.

+ Memoires de la Société de Physique de Gendve, tom. iii. p. 361.

and Bessel’s value of the ellipticity

340 On Hypsometrical Measurements. [No. 4.

60 metres. And Poisson has shewn* that the force of gravity at

the height z above the mean level of the sea is—

8 ,

si (2-— =} x foe of gravity at the sea level;

( 2p ear

where p’ is the density of that part of the earth above the mean—

level of the sea, and p the mean density of the earth. Hence the

weight of a litre of dry air-at the level of the sea, in latitude

45° under a pressure of 29.9218 inches is—

1.2934963 + re 1,32 —) € 0026257 cos 97° 40’ 28”)

1.2934963

1.00033847

Now, if we take the standard height of the English barome-

ter as 30 inches, we have for the weight under that pressure at

32° Faht. ;—

— 19930586.

—-

in. in. Yr. gr.

As 29.9218: 80:: 12980586: 1.296488.

gr.

But the weight of a litre of mercury is 13596, and hence,—

1296438 1

D= =

oe it

13596 10487.2

and since 80 = 2.5 feet and M =0.48429448, we have,—

B 2.5 x 10487.2

L= — = ——_—-———- = 60869.15 feet.

DM 0:4:34294.48

4. a, or the co-efficient of the dilatation of the air has usually been

taken from the experiments of Gay Lussac, who found the expansion

between the freezing and boiling point of water to be 0.375 of its

volume at 32° Faht.; Rudberg found 0.3648 ; Magnus 0.365508 ;

* Poisson, Traite de Mecanique, tom. ii. p. 629.

1.2930586 1 1

+ Under a pressure of 29.9218 in,, D = - = ————-, or part of

13596 10516.46 472

2.49304:

= 60369,15 feet as above.

itself less than Bessel’s value; and L =

1858. | On Hypsometrical Measurements. B41

and Regnault 0.386706. Adopting 0.867 as the total expansion be-

tween 32° and 212° Faht. we have for 1° Faht.—

a = 0.0020389.

5. The value of d, or the density of aqueous vapour in terms of that

of the air, used by Bessel was 0.62 as found by Berzelius; Reg-

nault’s experiments give 0.621 as a more accurate determination,

and hence 1 — d= 0.379.

6. Again p, the pressure of aqueous vapour in terms of that of the

atmosphere at the temperature ¢° reckoned from freezing point,

may be determined by Regnault’s formula, or from any table

calculated by means of that formula.

In the usual tables of tensions computed from Regnault’s formula,

the tensions are expressed in inches of mercury,* and if we put p’

for these values we have—

p' = 29.9218 p.

7. Lastly, the geometrical mean of the two semidiameters of the

earth, according to Airy is

7 = 20,888,783 feet.

8. Now if B and B’ be the heights of the barometer at the lower

and upper stations reduced to 32° Faht.—

B r - B’ r

P=—x (y)(——) , and P= —x((—_)

30 r+H 30 r+ H’

and since / is nearly equal to H,—

ie B 2M (h’—h)

Log — = log — + —--————__ ;

' Ce

and with sufficient accuracy for our purpose—

VBB

vp P

* See a Table of this kind in Dixon’s Treatise on Heat, p. 257—260.

+ See Herschel’s Outlines of Astronomy, sec. 206.

342 On LHypsometrical Measurements. [No. 4.

Substituting these values in the formula, we have

P, @). ose 0.379 p’

Se eee

og —

"Pp Liga

B (9) hk’ —h) ( 2M.L(1+at) 20.379 p’

Tg ms Fe ere

Be Li(1+ at) ( (9) 7 /B B’

ata

Replacing a, by , and introducing the values of 2M, L,

and 7, in the factor within the parenthesis, this equation becomes

Be Qe = &)

og —_— =

&B L (1 7 at,)

(g) 20888733 — 52436 (1 + at) 0.1895 p’. a + i

a ee

20888733 (9) / Bp

and without any sensible error,—

B (9) (h’— hk) i —at (a+a’). 0.1895 “|

— —

0g — =

Bo opt) 808 ay /B Be

(7) (h’ — h) (397.37 — at) { (a + a’). 75.49 p’

Aes eve wea erent

398.37 (1+ at) L (397.387 — at) / B B

Hence, we have for the approximate height,

: 398.37 (1 + at) 1 1

ee Lyx—x —

397.37 — at, (9) cate +a’ 75.49 p’

—

h’—h= (log B—log B’) x

VBB’ 397.37—at

and for the true height—

hh’? h?

HW’ — H>=h'’ —h + — — —.

r—h' r—h

It remains to adapt these formula for tabular computation; and

for the sake of brevity let us write

3898.37

= —— .L (1 + aé), |

397.387 — at |

75.49 |

and C’ = ——-—-—~. p’,

397.387 — at

1858. | On Hypsometrical Measurements. 343

both which depend on ¢, the half sum of the temperatures at the

two stations, so that we may write t= (t+ t’) — 82°, t and

t’ being the temperatures of the air at the lower and upper stations

respectively in degrees Faht. The values of log A and log OC’ are

tabulated in the first table at the end of this with the argument

2 (t + t’)

The whole factor dependant on the humidity of the air may be

written—

C= ——-—____

a+ a’

/(BB’)

and its logarithm is given in Table Il with the argument—

C’ (a+ a’)

Log

fo)

iD Ee

For the term giving the correction for latitude we may write—

| 1 1

| C= SS 5

| (g) 1— 0.0026257 cos. 22

and tabulate log G for the different values of A, as in Table III.

| Then :—

)

Log (h’ — h) = log (log B — log B’) + log A + log C + log G.

And lastly from Table IV a small correction due to the decrease

there

_ of gravity above the sea-level is found, and the quantity

| —h’

| r

| given, is to be added to h’ — h, and the value of is to be sub-

r—h

| tracted, giving

h”? i

H’—H=h’—h+t+ ;

| y—h r—h

for the true difference of altitude of the two stations in feet.

| In using the tables, it must be observed that 7 and 7’ being the

| temperatures of the mercury at the two stations and 8, b’ the

observed heights of the barometer,

| Log B — log B’ = log b — log b’ — 0,0000435 (+ — 7’)

| a Se

344 On Hypsometrical Measurements. | No. 4.

when the expansion of the mercury alone has to be taken into

account; but when the scale of the barometer is brass and extends

from the cistern—

Log B — log B’ = log 6 — log b’ — 0.00008905 (7 — 7’).

Example.

M M Bravais and Martins made the following observations :—On

M. St. Bernard 8114 feet above the level of the sea B = 568.08,

t = 7.6 Cent. or 45.7 FE. and o == 0.59; and on M. Blane Bi ==

494,29, t = — 9.1 C. or 15.3 F. and. a ==70.57,

Here

B = 22.364... log 1.34955 A (e+ ¢) = 30.6 F.

b’= 16.705. . log 1.22284 a +a’ = 1.16

Diff. 0.12671. 5 log 9.102811 A/B Be 4 log 8.7188 he

Table I,...... Log A. 4.780555 Tab. I. log C’8.5078

Table II, .... Log C. 0.000842 a-+a’..log 0.0645

Table III,.... Log G.—0.000033 a ba’

C, i sel

r/ B B’

h' —h... 7659 ft. .. log 3.884175

Then by Table IV. 7659 + 22.9 — 3.2 + 8114 = 15782.7 feet

the height.

II.—Measurement of Heights by the Boiling Point of Water.

1. It has long been known that the temperature of ebullition is

lowered, as the pressure under which a fluid boils is decreased. This

was first used by Archdeacon Wollaston, about 1817, as a means of

measuring altitudes. Wollaston, however, in drawing up his table of

heights corresponding to different temperatures of boiling water,

made use of the empirical formula of Dr. Ure, for the elasticities of

steam of different temperatures, and which was not calculated to

give accurate results.

In the Journal of the Asiatic Society for 1833, the late Mr. James

Prinsep discussed the subject, using Tredgold’s formula for the

tension of steam, but modifying the results to make them agree

1858. | On Hypsometrical Measurements. 345

as nearly as possible with the experiments of Ure, Southern and

Dalton.* From these results, he calculated a table of heights cor-

responding to the boiling point for each degree of temperature from

176e to 214°. From observations made simultaneously with the

barometer and boiling point thermometer, Colonel Sykes inferred

that Prinsep’s table gave altitudes generally less than those indi-

cated by his barometer. Sykes made no observations at greater

altitudes than 4500 feet, but at that height, the average error in

Prinsep’s table, seems to be over 100 feet.

This subject has since been discussed in a paper by Professor

J. D. Forbes, published in the transactions of the Royal Society of

Hdinburgh for 1842-3, founded on observations made among the

Alps. By projecting the elevations as derived from barometrical

observations, but uncorrected for temperature, in terms of the observ-

ed boiling points, he found that a straight line passed almost quite

through the whole of the projected points. Hence he inferred

“that the temperature of the boiling point varies ina simple arith-

metical ratio with the height.”

2. This hypothesis seems to require examination. The general

form of the formula for heights as measured by barometrical observ-

ations is,—

h=UL x log —;

PR’

where B’ and B are the heights of the barometer at the upper and

lower stations respectively, 2 the difference of elevation, and L the

constant determined in the preceding section. But were Professor

FPorbes’s hypothesis true, we should have—

AD se NOS erally Rican «2 sy CL)

T and I’ being the boiling temperatures at the two stations or

under the pressures B and B’ respectively. And combining these

formula, we obtain—

Po ee er ok acct nas tea op som, 5) 2)

as the expression for the approximate height.

* Jour. Asiat. Soc. of Bengal, April 1833, pp. 194 200.

346 On Hypsometrical Measurements. [ No. 4.

Now, in order to determine whether the hypothesis is correct or

not, it is only necessary to discover whether or not the quantity 2,

as derived from observations made at different altitudes is constant.

In the following table I have collected a few observations made by

Professor Forbes,* Dr. Hooker, M. Marié,t and others, tabulating

in column (5) the value of 2 derived from each, and in column (6)

the boiling point corresponding to the observed pressures given in

column (8) calculated on the supposition that 2 = 112. Column

(7) shews the differences between these and the observed values.

(1) - ) (3) (4) |. @) : i) ; (7)

alculat-

Na bey cae: Calculat- jed boiling

Station Observer | "8 led value! point | Diff.

ches andj point of oor

lat 832° F./corrected|>* ™ ys as

Gt. Rungeet River.|Dr. Hooker. | 29.211 | 210.°8 | 103.91 | 2169.70 |—C°.10

Martigny. Dr. Forbes. 28.489 | 209.5 117.29 | 209.61 | + 0.11

Mont Pila. M. Marié. 28.207 | 209.05 | 115.19 | 209.13 | + 0.08

do. 3% do. 26.258 | 205.48 | 114.88 | 205.65 | + 0.17

do. i, do. 25.819 | 204.71 | 113.82 | 204.83 | 4- 0.12

Churra,KhasiaMts.|Dr. Hooker. | 25.596 | 204.3 111.68 | 204.28 |— 0.02

Mont Pila. M. Marié. 25.483 | 203.88 | 115.01 | 204.09 | -- 0.21

Gressonay. — Dr. Forbes. | 25.143 | 203.58 | 111.4 203.54 |— 0.04

Choongtam. Dr. Hooker, | 24.697 | 202.5 112,46 | 202.54 | -- 0.04

Myrung, Khasia. do. 24.453 | 201.9 | 113.75 | 202.06 | + 0.16

Prarayon. Dr. Forbes. 23.893 | 200.96 | 113.0 201.06 | + 0.10

Darjiling. Dr. Hooker, | 23.358 | 199.6 114.09 | 199.83 | +4 0.23

Tacul, Dr. Forbes. 23.353 | 199.98 | 111.7 199.94 | — 0.04

do. do. 23.154 | 199.48 | 112.48 | 199.53 | -- 0.05

St. Bernard. do. 22.674 | 198.46 | 112.4 198.51 | -+- 0.05

Zemu Samdong. |Dr. Hooker. | 21.605 | 195.9 112.93 | 196 03 | + 0.13

Col Collon. Dr. Forbes. 20.77 194.53 |.110.16 | 194.24 |— 0.29

Mainom, Sikkim. |Dr. Hooker. 20.43 193.4 11219 | 193.43 | + 0.03

Yeumtong, do. do. 19.49 19d 111.58 | 191.02 | — 0.08

Tungu, do. do. 18.869 | 189.5 111.73 | 189.45 | —0.05

Mont Blane. Saussure. 17.183 | 187.238 109.97 | 186.89 | —0.34

Pichincha. M. Wisse. 17.208 | 185.27 | 111.26 | 185.09 | — 0.18

Yeumtso, Sikkim. |Dr. Hooker. 16.885 | 183.2 109.64 | 182.58 | — 0.62

Sebolah Pass, do. do. 16.928 |} 181.9 109.48 | 181.21 |—0.69

* Edin. Phil. Trans. vol. xv.

+ Given in a second paper by Prof. Forbes, Edin. Phil. Trans. vol. xxi. part 2.

£ Quoted by Regnault, Ann. de Chim. et de Phys. July 1844.

§ Saussure’s boiling-point, 80° R., corresponded to a pressure of 27 French

inches.

1858. ] On Hypsometrical Measurements. 347

The numbers in columns (5) and (7) of this table at once shew

that whilst the hypothesis of Professor Forbes is not rigorously

true, 2 decreasing with the temperature, it is still a very good proxi-

- mation when the heights are under 10,000 feet, or the boiling-point

above 193° Faht.; and as 112 is about the mean value of m, we have

by substitution in equation (2), and using 60369 feet as the value

of L,—

Bia San OW CU Mote ues antennas cans Ca)

as the expression for the height uncorrected for the temperature of

the air. Professor Forbes, in the paper above referred to, gives

549.5 as the value of the co-efficient, and in a later paper on the

same subject he proposes 543.2 feet as best representing observa-

tions when the boiling-point is above 190° Faht. or when the

heights are under 12,000 feet; but when the boiling.point is above

192° F., he states in a note that the co-efficient should be only 535

feet,in order to express the heights as derived from Regnault’s

table of tensions.

3. After making due allowance for errors of observation, it is evi-

dent that the values of 2 in column (5) of the preceding table, decrease

with the temperature. Hence, in order to derive a formula which

shall accurately represent heights in terms of the boiling-point of

water, it is only necessary to determine the value of 2 at the stand-

ard boiling-point, and the mean rate of its variation for tempera-

tures near that point. For this purpose Regnault’s tension series,

from the method by which he obtained his experimental values,

may be taken as representing the pressures under which water

boils at different temperatures.* For temperatures near 100° Cent.

however, Moritz has shewn that the values in Regnault’s table are

slightly in error on account of the constants not having been calcu-

lated with sufficient accuracy. Moritz has corrected and published

_ the values of the tensions where they diifer from Regnault’s.¢ In

what follows, I have used these corrected values.

Now, from equation (1) we at once derive,—

* Ann. de Chim. et de Phys. July 1844. Forbes, Edin. Phil, Trans. vol. xxi

part IT. p. 238,

T Bullet. de la classe Physico-math. de I’ Acad. de St. Petersbourg, xii, 41.

348 On ITypsometrical Measurements. [No. 4.

T — T’

eh ie BF er eer er

and hence when B = B’, and T = 100° cent. using Moritz’s values,

(4)

we have

aT B. dT

r= —__—— = ~~ = 64307626 .. (5)

d. log B M.dB

and when T’ = 80° C., we have, by equation (4)—

= 60.412836

log By o, — log B’,,

and as the value of 2 is found to vary pretty regularly with the

temperature between these two points, we may write—

—

Ngo Par

0 — Ns

ys e/Baa07es.— HRD) ts IE

= 64.30763 — 0.1947445 (100 — T) ...... (6)

Substituting this value in equation (4) we find—

100° — T

Log B —log By = ———- —_—__—

10:8 64.8076 — 0.19474 (100 — T)

5.18493 (100 — T)

= —____—_—_————...........__ (7)

~~ 380, 215 — (100 — it |

We obtain a result almost identical with this by applying the

method of least squares to the logarithms of Mboritz’s tensions

at 80°, 85°, 90° and 95°, viz.—

5.108555 (100 — T)

Log B,,, — log Bp = ————-——"_ -——_.. (8)

828.62566 — (100 — 'T)

either of the equations (7) and (8) will give the logarithms of the

pressures in millimetres of mercury for temperatures between 80°

and 100° C. generally correct to the 5th or 6th decimal place, by

using the following values.

For log Bigg =eloe 760 0. os. os... s. (oR

For log 5.108555 ease eS SN? Eee

If now we combine aeiois (2) nia (8) and introduce the value

of L for astandard atmosphere at 0° Cent, the approximate height is

1858. | On Hypsometrical Measurements. 349

100 — T

hm == 94082 x

228.626 +T - (9)

and log hm = 4.973506 + log (100 — T) — log (228.626 + T),

when expressed in metres above the point where water boils at

100° cent.

4. Now if the boiling-point on Fahrenheit’s scale coincided exactly

with taat on the centigrade, that is if 212° F. represented the tem-

perature of boiling water under a pressure of 29.9218 inches of

mercury,* this formula, and the logarithms of the pressures in the

table of Moritz might at once be modified to suit the English scales.

But if the thermometer be so constructed that the boiling-point is

at 212e F. under 30 inches of pressure, the centigrade ought, in the

same circumstances, to shew 100°.0729; and as the freezing point

may be considered invariable, 176° F. will coincide with 80°.0583

C. To make the necessary correction for this difference, which is

often overlooked, I have, after interpolation among Moritz’s pressures,

derived the following formula of essentially the same form as that

first used by Biot,f and which accurately pope the results

derived from Moritz’s table,—

Log Br = log 30 — 0.008641566 (212° — T)

—0.0000143365 (212° — T)? — 0.00000003161 (212° — T)*.

This formula, which is adapted to Fahrenheit’s scale, will give the same

results as the more complicated one of Regnault when T lies be.

tween 172° and 216° Faht. The values of the logarithms of the

pressures in the table of Moritz may, in like manner, be represented

between 78° and 102° C. by the formula,—

* “J adopterai les températures, au thermométre 4 mercure, divisé en cent

degrés, depuis la température de la glace fondante, jusqu’s celle de leau bouil-

lante sous uné pression équivalente au poids d’une colonne de mercure, de soix-

ante et seize centimétres de hauteur.” Laplace, Exposition du Systéme du Monde

—avertissement.

T Biot, Traité de Physique (1816) tom, I. p, 278; also Ency. Metropol, (1845)

vol. iv. p. 249,

350 On Hypsometrical Measurements. [ No. 4.

Log B, = log 760 ——0.01555026 (100° — T)

— 0.0000464227 (100° — 'T)? — 0.00000018515 (100° — 'T)?

By means of equation (10), Table V. has been constructed, giving the

logarithms of the pressures in inches of mercury for every fifth

part of a degree from 176° to 215° F.; and from the same equation

we derive for Fahrenheit’s scale—

B.d T

nm == —--— = 115.71976,

M.dB

and from the table, by least squares,—

rid 212° — T

tag los Boe

115,71976 — 0.1957 13 — 1)

5.108273 (212 — Hi

Se a, EY

379.319 + T

where log 5.108273 = 0.7082741.

And, as before, the elevation in feet above the point where water

boils at 212° Faht. will be found by multiplying the right hand side

of this equation by L = 60369 feet, viz. :

308382 (212 — T)

“"B79.810-+ TE (12)

or log k = 5.488089 + log (212 — T) — log (379.319 + T).

5. If the boiling-point be observed at two stations, whose difference |

of level is required,—writing D =212°—-T, and D’ for 212°—T’, ©

we have,—

808382 (T — T’) .

| ey Mipeepree cere 0: isch ae Re ee ok OL

167.319 + (T + 1’) + 0.00169 DD” |

1 DD [

, we may use ——

go” $ (18)

or, since 0.00169 is very nearly

*, Log (h’ — h) = 5.488089 + log (T — T’) i

D ,

— log (167.319 + T + T’ + —)

600

1858. ] On Hypsometrical Measurements. 851

6. The same value of # as found from equation (12) may also be

derived, in a different form, from equation (10), by multiplying

log 30 — log B by L, thus :—

h = 521.684 (212 — T) + 0.8655 (212 — T)?

++ 0.0019 (212 —— T)’ ..0.40..%055 ° G4)

or, a8 a good approximation in two terms,—

h = 520.476 (212 — T) + 0.967 (212 — T)*.. (15)

7. For the height in metres in terms of T on the Centigrade scale,

we may, instead of equation (9), use,—

Im==286.2 (100 —T) +.8546(100 —T)* + 0.00341 (100—T)?,

16)*

or approximately, hm == 285.54 (100 — T) + 0.955 (100 — T)*.

8. The equations now deduced for expressing the height in terms

of the boiling-point of water require to be corrected in the same

manner for the temperature of the air, &c. as those derived from

barometrical observations. Hence substituting equation (11) in the

formula already given for the barometer, and omitting the terms

depending upon the hygrometrical state of the atmosphere, and the

diminution of gravity with the height, we have for the correct height—

5.10827 (Tf — T’)

H—H= pee ld ai te

167.319 + T+ T + —— DD’

600

398.37 (L+at) 1 |

oe | ey pene eh) (NL)

397.87 — at (y)

_ or, adopting the notation already employed—

_ ™ Professor Forbes has arrived at almost exactly the same results. For

| equation (15), he gives—

| 517 (212° —'T) + (212° — T)?;

_ and for equation (16)—

| hm = 284 (100 — T) + (100 — T)?;

| the equation—

h=519.66 (212° — T)-+ (212° — T)?

_ will give almost exactly the same results as equation (15),

2 yD

302 On THypsometrical Measurements. [No. 4.

Log (1 — H) = 0.708274 + log (T — T’) )

DD’ + (18)

— log (167.319 + T + TY + ——) + log A+ log G. )

600

9. To facilitate computations of this kind, Tables V and VI have

been formed. Table VI gives the height in feet above the level

where water boils at 212° Faht. for every fifth part of a degree be-

tween 176° and 215° F. This Table and the column containing the

Multiplier for the mean temperature of the air in Table I will enable

us to obtain the heights, uncorrected for latitude, without the use of

logarithms. ‘Table V containing the logarithmic pressures will be

of use when one of the observations is taken with a barometer.

10. When the observations are taken at the upper station only, it

becomes necessary to estimate ¢, the mean temperature of the stra-

tum of air between the sea level and that station approximately. —

Laplace estimated the diminution of temperature with the elevation

at 16° or 17° cent. for 8000 metres of ascent,* but taking the mean

of observations made on mountain sides by Saussure, Kaemtz,

Bravais, Martins, Schouw, Humboldt, Boussingault, and the recent

French Commission to the North, the diminution is 1° Faht. for

every 303 feet of ascent. Hence we may reckon that for every

degree which the boiling-point falls, the temperature of the air

decreases 1°.8 F., so that the mean temperature may be esti-

mated at,—

ath-b tb). == t+ 0.9 212° = 1);

or when the observation is made with the barometer,

190 B’

(t+ t’) =915 +t — .

30 + B’

or, roughly—

i (t + t’) = 60 + t’ — — BY.

* Laplace, Systeme du Monde, tom. i. p, 172 (Ed. 1836.)

+ On this subject, see a paper by Professor Challis, in the Transactions of the |

Cambridge Philosophical Society, vol. vi. ; and Daniell’s Meteorology, vol.i. pp. 40, |

41.

——__—

1858. ] On Hypsometrical Measurements. 353

11. With respect to the method of making observations with the

boiling-point thermometer, it is only necessary to observe that the

instrument described by Professor Forbes in the paper already re-

ferred to* seems the most convenient and trustworthy of any that

has been proposed, and very superior to that described by Colonel

Sykes,¢ and still more so to that manufactured by Casella and sold

in India along with Prinsep’s Table—an instrument which never

could be expected to give accurate results. Professor Forbes’s

boiling apparatus consisted of a thin copper pan heated by a “ Rus-

sian Furnace,” having a powerful jet of inflamed alcoholic vapour,

which might be removed to one side until the escape of steam be-

came uniform and moderate, and could be used ina gale of wind.

The thermometer had its bulb immersed in the water, of which a

moderately large quantity is requisite to a good result.

The following examples will shew the use of the tables and for-

mule.

Example I. The following data are given in “ Smith and Thuil-

hier’s Manual of Surveying” (p. 486)—Boiling-point at the lower

station 208°.7 and temperature of the air 88°; at the upper station

B. P. 204°.2, and air 75° Faht., to find the difference of elevation,

By the formula (18)—

D = 212 — 208.7 = 3.3. D' = 212 — 204.2

moe Di = 257. Bp VY = 4429...T — 7

And 4 (t + t’) = 79°.

Now 167.32 + 412.9 = 580.22

25.7

+—__.= 0.04

600

LS.

4.5.

580.26. ar. co. log 7.23638 — 10.

Oe a oa ie winch ee Ooms O/6a82

Seis WS. 797 |e wenn lop A, .4. 82175.

Const. log 0.70827.

Height 2628 feet .......... log 3.41961.

* Edin. Trans. vol. xv.

¥ See Journal of the Royal Geographical Society, vol. viii. p. 436.

B04 On Hypsometrical Measurements. [ No. 4.

Otherwise, by Table VI.

Height corresponding to 204°.2 ...... 4123 feet

99 99 39 208.7 eeee ve 1731 oy)

Difference, or Approximate height, .... 2892 ,,

79° Multiplier from Table I, .......... 1.099

Corrected height, as before, .......... 2628 feet.

Col. Sykes by barometrical observations finds the height 2649

feet, the difference being within the limits of error of observation,

Heample II. The following data are partly taken from Prof.

Forbes’s paper.—Saussure’s boiling-point, 80° R. was adjusted at

27 French inches, or 28.777 English. At that pressure the standard

thermometer shewed 209°.96. De Saussure’s stood therefore 2°.04

F. higher. Now on the top of Mont Blane, the boiling-point was

187°.23 F. or reduced to the standard thermometer 185°.19 F. and

at Geneva, 1345 feet above the sea-level, the barometer indicated

27.267 French, or 29.063 English inches, the mean temperature of —

the air being about 55° F.

Here, 29.063 .......... log 1.468304

1’ = 185°.19 (Table V.) ,, 1.284528

Diff. of logs 0.228781 .. log 9.35942,

z (t + t’) = 55°...... log A 4.80186.

Height above Geneva 14497 -ft. ..........log 4.16128.

Geneva above thesea 1345

Height of M. Blane 15842 feet,

being almost exactly the height found barometrically by Saussure,

and only 55 feet more than MM. Bravais and Martins’s determina-

tion, and 59 feet higher than Corabeut’s trigonometrical measure-

ment. The same result may also be found otherwise, thus :—

1858. ] On Hypsometrical Measurements. 355

By Table VI. height corresponding to 185°.19...... 14645 feet.

By Barometrical Tables the diff. of heights 834,

corresponding to 80™ and 29.063 ...... § “°°

Difference, or approximate heicht,................ 13811

4 (t+ t') = 55°, Multiplier from Table I. ........ 1.0497

Corrected height, as before, above Geneva, ........ 14497 ft.

Example III. (Boileau’s Tables, Int. p. xix.) At the Parang

Pass in lat. 32°} N. the observed temperature of the boiling-point

was 179°.3, the temperature of the air being 27° F. to find the

altitude of the pass above the level of the sea.

Here, by the formula, $ (t + t’) = 27° + 0.9 (212 — 179.3) = 56¢.

Approximate height by Table VI....... 18052 feet

Z(t + t’) = 56° .. Multiplier by Table I. 1.0517

Corrected height above sea-level, ...... 18985 feet

differing from Boileau’s result principally from the higher value

assigned to ¢, and partly from the standard pressure in Boileau’s

table being 29'".921 instead of 30, which gives a difference of

about 60 feet in the elevation.

12. A small correction ought to be applied on account of the

variation of the pressure at the level of the sea in different

latitudes from a standard of 380 inches. Tables V ahd VI are

calculated on the hypothesis that the pressure of the atmosphere

at the level of the sea is 30 inches. Observations prove that the

mean pressure varies in different latitudes, and according to the

experimental and theoretical observations of Munke and others, the

following short table has been constructed shewing, in column (2),

the height of the barometer in different latitudes equal to a height

of 30 inches in lat. 45°, in columns (8) and (5) the mean heights of

the barometer as derived, with some modifications, from Munke and

Dr. Golding Bird* respectively, and in columns (4) and (6) the

* Dr, Golding Bird’s Natural Philosophy, p. 208.

356 On Hypsometrical Measurements. [No. 4.

corresponding* corrections in feet, to be added to, or subtracted |

from, the altitudes derived from observations at the upper station

only, by means of the tables and formule.

(1) (2) (3) (4) (aya, (6)

Correc-

Height of ba-) Mean Correc- |Mean height] tion ac-

Lat, rometer, equal|height of the tion ac- jof barometer| cording

45°, from Munke|Munke. | Bird. Bird.

in, feet in. feet.

0 30.079 29.930 | —129.8 29.930 | —129.8

10 30.074 29950 — 121.3 29 975 — 86.5

20 30.060 29.950 96.8 30.064 + 3.2 }

| 80 30.039 29.972 |— 59.2 30.108 + 59.8

4.0 30.014 29.999 |— 132 30.019 |+ 4.4

45 30.000 30.013 | + 11.4 30.000 0.0

510) 29.986 30.027 | + 35.9 29.968 — 15.7

55 29.973 30.041 | + 60.2 29.919 ;— 47.4

60 29.961 30.054 |-+ 81.9 29.803 — 138.3

65 29.949 30.066 | + 101.8 29.609 | -—— 299.8

| 70 29 940 30.076 | + 119.5 29.740 | —175.4

| 80 229.526 30.091 | + 143.9

* These corrections are in some cases very different, but those in column (6)

are probably in general the most trustworthy,-as best agreeing with the observa-

tions of Schouw, Sir J. Herschel, Sir James Ross, &c. See Daniell’s Meteorology,

(Hd. 1845) vol. I. pp. 182, 133.

1858. ] On Hypsometrical Measurements.

TABLE I.

t+t

Argument : Faht.

pe Dif

oe Multiplier. Log. A. for

2 0.1

GP 0.95744: 4.761926 92,9

11 95949 762855 92,6

12 96154 763781 92,4

13 96359 764706 92,2

14 96564 765628 920

15 96768 766549 91,8

16 96973 767467 OS?

if 97178 768384 91,5

P18 97383 769299 91,8

| 19 97588 770212 91,1

| 20 0.97793 4.771122 90,9

21 97998 772081 90,7

22 98203 772988 90,5

23 98407 773843 90,3

24 98612 774746 90,2

25 98817 175648 90,0

26 99022 776548 89.8

27 99227 777445 89,6

28 99432 778341 89,4

29 99637 779235 89,2

30 0.99842 4.780127 BOM tn. Ss

31 1.00046 781018 88,9

32 00252 781907 88,7

3d 00456 782793 88,5

34 00662 783678 88,3

30 00866 784562 88,1

36 01071 785443 88,0

3 01276 786328 87,8

38 01481 787200 87,6

39 01686 788077 87,4:

4.0 1.01891 4.788951 87,3

41 02096 789824 87,1

4:2, 02301 79V695 86,9

43 02506 791564 86,7

44 02711 79243 1 86,6

45 02916 793297 86,4

AG 03121 794161 86,2

47 03326 795023 86,1

48 02531 795883 86,9

49 03736 796742 85,7

Log. C’.

1378

1572

1763

1956

2152

2344

2532

2725

2915

8.3105

3298

34387

3679

3866

4058

4238

7399

7563

7726

7889

S051

8212

357

8.115sn0.

On Hypsometrical Afeasurements.

Multiplier.

1.08940

04145

04350

04555

04760

04965

05170

05575

05580

05785

1.05990

06195

06400

06605

06810

07015

07220

07425

07630

07835

1.08040

08245

08450

08655

OS860

09065

09270

09475

09680

09885

1.10090

10295

10500

10705

10910

11115

11320

11525

11730

11935

——a ee | cee eed

~— | ee

Table I. continued.

Log. A.

4.797599

798455

799309

800161

SOLOLL

801860

802707

803553

804397

805239

4.806080

806919

807757

808593

809427

810259

811090

811920

812748

813574

4.814399

815222

816044

816864

817683

818500

819315

820129

820942

8217538

4.822563

823371

824177

824982

825786

826588

82738%

828187

628985

829781

1858. | On Hypsometrical Measurements. 359

Table I. continued.

—_—__

| Dit.

—— ! Multiplier. Log. A. for Log. C’.

2 02.1

90° 1.12140 4.830576 79,8 9.4292

91 12345 831369 79,2 44.28

92 12550 832161 79,0 4563

93 12755 832952 78,9 4.698

94 12960 833741 78,8 4833

95 13165 §34528 78,6 4968

96 13370 835314 78,5 5090 |

97 13575 836099 78,3 5233) |

98 13781 836883 78.9 5365. |

99 13986 837665 78,1 5497 |

100 1.14191 4.838446 77,9 9.5628 |

101 14396 839224 778 5760

102 14601 840002 77,6 5889

103 14806 840779 Ties 6019

104 15011 841554 774: 6149

105 15216 842327 GT 6278

106 15421 843100 TiC 6106

107 15626 843871 77,0 6532 |

108 15831 844.640 76,8 6661

| 109 16086 | 845408 76,7 6787

110 1.16241 4.846175 76,5 9.6913

111 16446 846941 76,4 7039

112 16651 847705 76,8 7165

113 16856 848468 T6415 | 7288

114 17062 84.9229 76,0 7413

115 17267 84.9989 75,9 7537

116 17472 850748 2°") 75.8 7660

117 17677 851506 75,6 7783

118 17882 852262 75,5 7905

119 18087 853017 75,4 8026

On LHypsometrical Measurements. [No. 4.

Cu OR Or

Sot Stat Sr eto

So Or Ci cr

CO OWS Hb Wb

~“

for)

TABLE IT.

a+ a’

Argument—Log. C’.

/ BB’

Log. C Arg. Log. C Arg. Log. C

0.000043 7.62 0.001814 || 8.02 0.004572

.000055 7.63 .001856 8.03 .004679

.000069 7.64 .001900 8.04 004788

.000087 7.65 001944 || 8.05 .004900

O00 LOD 7.66 .001990 8.06 .005015

000137 7 67 .002036 8.07 .0051383

000173 7.68 002084 8.08 005253

000218 7.69 .002132 8.09 005876

000274 7.70 002182 8.10 005502

000345 hob .0022383 8.11 .00563 1

7.0 0.000435 7.72 0.002286 8.12 0.005763

7.05 .000488 Via .0028389 8.138 .005898

7.10 000547 7.74 .002393 8.14 .006037

vas: 000614: 7.75 002449 8.15 .006178

7.20 000689 7.76 .002506 8.16 .006323

7.20 .000773 Trg .002565 8.17 .006472

.000868 7.78 .002625 8.18 006624

.000973 7.79 .002686 8.19 .006779

001092 7.80 .002749 8.20 .006938

.001118 7.81 0028138 8.21 007101

2. ee

—_—-§

0.001144 7.82 0.002880 8.22 0.007268

OO1LL7L 7.83 002946 8.23 007439

CO1198. || 7 84 003015 8.24 .007569

001226 7.85 .003086 8.25 .007793

.001253 7.86 003158 8.26 .007976

001284 7.87 .093232 8.27 .008163

0013 14 7.88 0033808 8.28 008355

OLB 44 7.89 0038384 8.29 008552

001376 7.90 03464 8.30 008753

001408 (eeu 003545 8.531 .008959

0.001441 7.92 0.003627 8.32 0.009170

00 14:74: 7.93 0037 12 8.33 009386

.00 i509 7.94 003799 8.54 009607

001543 7.95 008888 8.35 009833

001580 7.96 .003979 § 56 .010065

001617 iT 004072 8.37 .010302

001654 7.98 004167 8.38 010545

.OUL693 (ms)s) 004265 8.39 010794

001732 8.00 .004365 8.40 011048

001773 5.01 004.467

mn A

1858. ] On Hypsometrical Measurements. 361

TABLE III. TABLE IV.

ARGUMENT :—

ARGUMENT :—Latvitvpe, X.. Heteuts, h, h’.

Lat.) Log. G. Lat.| Log. G. eo thee hee |

es Mag ee am te aaa ee

Po Et Bt 3) (ies:

0°| 0.001142} 90 |} 23°) 0.000795} 67 500 | 0.0}| 11500] 6.8

] 001141] 89 || 24 000764] 66 1000 | 0.0)| 12000} 6.9

2 001139] 88 || 25 000734) 65 1500 | O1)|| 12500! 7.5

3 001136] 87 || 26 000704) 64 2000 | 0.2|| 13000} 8.1

4 001181) 86 || 27 000671} 63 2500 | 0.3 || 18500} 8.7

5) 001125) 85 || 28 0006388} 62 39000 | 0.4}! 14000] 9 4

6 001117) 84 || 29 000605] 6L 3500 | 0.6!) 14500 |10.1

7 | 001108] 83 | 30 | 000571] 60 ||-goo0 | 0.8 15000 110.8

a Or gv aE ——|} 4500 | 1.0)| 15500 /11.5

4 0.001100) 82 |; 81 | 0.000536] 59 5000 | 1.2] 16000 |12.3

001086} 81 || 82 | 000500; 58 || 5500 | 1.4/1 16500 {13.0

“ 001073] SO || 33 000464) 57 6000 | 1.7 || 17000 113.8

i 001059] 79 | 34 0004.27| 56 6500 | 2.011 17500 |14.7

12 001043) 78 || 35 000890} 55 7000 | 2.311 18000 115.5

13 001026] 77 || 36 000353] 54 7500 | 2.711 18500 |16.4

14 001008| 76 || 37 000315] 53 iT Simul ee Ma

2 °2 11-8000 | 3.1 || 19000 117.3

ee 88) 78.) 88 | O00R7S| 52 1 sx00 | 2.5\|19500|18.2

16 | 0.000968| 74 || 39 | 0. 00287] 51 || 2200 | 3.91 20000 |19.2

9500 | 4.3 || 20500 |20.1

ae 000946) 73 | 40 000198; 50

: 10000 | 4.8 |] 21000 |21.1

18 000924) 72 || 41 000159] 49 ‘3 ell aaa ce tenes 1G

10500 | 5.8 }| 21500 |22.2

‘9 OOO899} 71 || 42 000117; 48 11000 | 5.8! 99000 123.2

20 | 000875] 70 || 43 | 000080) 47 Ne naliiaeneeae sia

BL 000848} 69 |, 44 000040) 46

22 000821; 68°]| 45 OOQO00} 45°

ae » a r

| Log.G. | Lat Log. G. | Lat.

362 On Hypsometrical Measurements. | No. 4.

TABLE V.

Logarithms of the Barometrical Pressures in inches of Mercury cor-

responding to Boiling points between 176° and 215° Faht.

q. 0 "2 “4 6 8 Re

176} 1.145960 1.147929 1.149877 1.151833 | 1.153787 | 978

177 155740 157692 159642 161591 163539 | 974

178 165485 167429 169373 171314 173255 | 971

179 175194 177131 179068 181003 182936 | 967

180 184.868 1386799 188728 190656 192582 | 964,

181 194508 196431 198354. 200275 202194 | 960

182 204112 206029 207945 269859 211772 | 957

183 213683 215593 217502 219409 221315 | 993

184, 223219 225122 227024 228925 230824 | 950

185 232721 234618 236513 238407 240299 | 947

186 1.242190 1.244080 1.245968 1.247855 | 1.249740 | 943

187 251625 253308 255389 257270 259148 | 940

188 261026 262902 264777 266651 268523 | 937) -

189 270894, 2'72264 274132 275999 277865 | 933

190 279729 281592 283454 285314 287174 | 930

191 289081 290888 292743 291597 296450 | 927

192 298301 300151 302000 303847 305693 | 923

193 307538 309381 311224 313064 314904 ; 920

194, 316742 318580 320415 322250 324083 | 917

195 325915 327746 329573 831403 3098230 | 914

196 1.335056 1.336880 1.338703 1.840525 | 1.842345 | 911

197 344165 345983 347799 349615 851429 | 908

198 353242 355054 356864 358673 360481 | 905

199 362288 364094 365898 367701 369503 | 901

200 371303 373102 374900 376697 378493 | 898

201 380287 382080 383872 389663 387452 | 895

202 389240 391027 392813 394597 396381 | 892

203 398163 399944. 401723 403502 405279 | 889

204; 407055 408830 410603 412376 414147 | 886

205 415917 417686 419453 4.21220 422985 | 883

206 1.424749 1.426512 1.428273 1 430034 | 1.481793 | 880

207 433551 435208 437064 438518 440571 | 877

208 44.2324 44.4075 4.45824 447573 449320 | 874

209 451067 452812 454556 456298 458040 | 871

210 459781 461520 4.63258 4.64995 466731 | 865

| 211 4.68465 470199 471931 473662 475392 | 866

212 477121 475849 480576 482301 484025 | 863

| 213 485749 487471 489191 490911 492630 | 860

| 214 4.94347 496004 497779 499493 501206 857

On Hypsometrical Aeasurements.

TABLE VI.

Heights corresponding to different boiling points from 176° to 21é5¢

Faht. in feet.

Ft.

19992

19401

18813

18227

17643

17061

16481

15904

15328

mayeatio4

14183

13613

13045

124380

11916

11355

10795

10238

9682

9128

8576

8026

7478

69382

6388

5846

53805

4767

4230

3695

3162

2630

2101

1573

1047

523

521

— 1040

ee.

Ft.

19874

19284

18696

18110

17527

16945

16366

15788

15213

14640

14069

13499

12932

12367

11804

11243

10684:

10126

9571

9e18

7917

7369

6823

6280

5738

5197

4659

4123

3088

2524

1995

1468

942

418

104

— 625

— 1144

8466

3005

Ft.

19756

19166

18579

17993

17410

16829 |

16250

15673

15098

14525

13955

13386

12819

12254

11692

11131

10572

10015

9460

8907

8356

7807

7260

6714:

6171

5629

5090

4582

4016

3481

2949

2418

1889

13862

837

313

208

729

— 1247

Pea. melanin ae Matha a ad Seal i POL yy

8 se4 &

Ft. Bt.

19519 | 59.0

18931 | 58.9

18344 | 58.6

17760 | 58.4

17177 | 58.2

16597 | 58.0

16019 | 57.8

15443 | 57.6

14869 | 57.4

14297 | 57.2

13727 | 57.0

13159 | 56.8

12593 | 56.6

12029 | 56.4:

11467 | 56.2

10907 | 56.0

10349 | 55.8

9793 | 55.6

9239 | 55.4

8687 | 55.2

8136 , 55.0

7588 | 54.8

7041 | 54.6

6497 | 54.4

5954 | 54.2

5413 |! 54.0

4874 | 53.8

4337 | 53.7

3802 | 53.5

3268 | 53.3

2736 | 53.1

2206 | 52.9

1678 | 52.8

1152 | 52.6

627 | 52.4

104 | 52.3

— 417 | 52.1

— 986 | 51.9 |

— 1454 | 5).7 4

364 On Hypsometrical Measurements. [No. 4.

Postscript.

It may be here remarked,—1. That the formule (10) and (11)

give very approximate results only when the pressure is above balf an

atmosphere, but taking Regnault’s value of the tension of vapour

at 32° Faht., we have

7.426875 (T — 82)

log p’ == 1.25793 +

MG Ke

422.5743 + (T — 32)

which gives a maximum error of 0.025 in. at 122° Faht.

2. That the quantity a, or the fraction of saturation may be easily

determined with very considerable accuracy from the formula—

log a = 1 — 0,0170571 (¢ — r) + 0.0000289866 (¢* — 7°),

where ¢ is the temperature of the air reckoned in degrees Fahren-

heit from freezing-point, and + the dew point reckoned in the same

manner.

3. That to the constants L and a in the general formula for the

determination of heights by the barometer, and to which I have

assigned the values 60369.15 feet, and U.002039, respectively,

different investigators have assigned various other values. The

principal of these are as follows :—

L, in. feet. a, for 1°. ¥,

Deluc, he 2 .. 95958.2 0.002242.

Schuckburgh, Lae ... 60109.2 0.002425.

General Roy, des ... 60082.4 0.002454.

Trembley, ’:.:. 2 W BULTS.6 0.002462.

Ramond, and Littréw, ... 60345.6 0.002222,

Lindenau, Si Hae dna OUR eek 0.002222.*

Poisson, «+. Poi ... 6OL61.8 0.002222.

Baily, se ser ... 60158.5 0.002083.

0.002222, or

0.002027.

* Lindenau followed Euler and Oriani in supposing the temperature of the

air to diminish in harmonical progression through a series of heights increasing

in arithmetical proportion. His form of the term depending upon the tempera-

ture was—

Bessel, pals ye ... 60094.7

t4-t'—64 (t—t’)?

900 810,000

¢ and t’ being in degrees Fahrenheit. Lindenau’s Tables (Gotha 1809) were in

some respects the best published in the early part of this century.

Calcutta, \9th August, 1858.

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

For SzpremBer, 1858.

PLL IPI IYI We

The Monthly General Meeting for September was held on the

1st instant.

Lieut.-Col. R. Strachey, Vice-President, in the chair.

The proceedings of the August Meeting were read and confirmed.

Presentations were received—

1. From the Rajah Radha Kant Deb, Bahadoor, an Appendix to

his Sanscrit Encyclopzedic Lexicon called the Sabda-Kulpa-Druma.

2. From Major H. UL. Thuillier through Mr. Smith, a Hindu

Sculpture being the image of Vishnu.

3. From Herr. H. Schlagintweit through Dr. Eatwell an explana-

tory table of the Relief des Monte-Rosa und Seiner Umgebungen.

Lieut.-Col. Strachey on behalf of Dr. Mouat presented to the

Society a Photographic likeness of an Andaman Islander* and some

Photographic pictures of the Volcano of Barren Island and of the

vicinity of Port Blair.

Communications received.—

1. From E. Thomas, Esq., B. C. 8., a Catalogue of the collection

of coins and gems belonging to the late Col. Stacy for the purchase

| of which the Society is in treaty.

2. From Dr. C. A. Gordon of H. M.10th Foot through the late

Mr. Piddington an analysis of the Meteorological Observations taken

on board the ship Palmyra during a voyage from London to Calcutta,

1857.

| 3. From Dr. G. Von Liebig.—

_ First. An account of a Cyclone in the Andaman Sea on the

9th and 10th April, 1858.

* The same man who was in Calcutta.

©>

366 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 4.

Second. An account of a visit to Barren Island. This paper

was read to the Meeting by the Chairman.

4. From Capt. G. H. Saxton, 38th M. N. I., Cuttack, the follow-

ing note on the last shock of an earthquake.

“I beg to bring to your notice, that this place was yesterday

visited by a slight earthquake. As it may be thought desirable that

such an event should be placed on the records of the Society, I am

induced to write. The shock took place at 25 minutes past 3 o’clock

in the afternoon, and was of considerable violence, sufficient to give

a feeling of giddiness; it was not accompanied by any thing unusual

atmospherically or otherwise. There was a slight breeze at the time,

and light clouds. In the bed of the river close by, the sand rose

and drifted as though the breeze was stronger there, as at this

season (during the rains) it does not so readily rise. The peculiar

position of the earth with reference to the sun and moon,

is remarkable, the occurrence taking place about a couple of hours

before a lunar eclipse. The shock lasted for a very few seconds.

The vibration ofa set of ricketty shelves with glasses close by where

I was sitting, continued after the shock and was a very palpable”

evidence of the amount of violence.”

The Chairman communicated to the Meeting the following in-

formation regarding a flood of the Indus.

**At 5 a. M. on the 10th August, the Indus at Attock was very

low. At 7 it had risen 10 feet. By half past twelve in the after-

noon it had risen 50 feet, and it continued to rise till it stood 90

feet higher than it did in the morning. The exact hour of greatest

flood is not mentioned.

The Cabul river continued to flow upwards for 10 hours!

At Nowshera the whole station was entirely destroyed, excepting

the public buildings which are all uninjured. But the water was

several feet deep in the barracks.

The above facts are derived from a letter from the Deputy Com-

missioner of Peshawur.

A similar flood occurred in 1841.

There is no doubt that the present flood, like that of 1841, was

caused by landslips among the mountains blocking up the river in

the upper part of its course. The obstruction suddenly giving way

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 367

after a great accumulation of water had taken place produced the

results mentioned.

The obstruction in 1841, was formed somewhere below Hasora.

The spot was visited by the late Messrs. Winterbottom and Agnew,

a year or two after the flood.

The water on that occasion is believed to have risen 800 or 900

feet above its usual level at the landslip, and the stream is said to

have been stopped as far back as to Gilgit, or nearly as far.

In 1841 a Brigade or Division of the Sikh Army was encamped

near Attock when the flood took place, and was swept entirely away.

On the present occasion it is understood that the loss of life has not

been great.”

The Librarian submitted his usual monthly report for August,

1858.

Liprary.

The following books have been added to the Library during the month

of August, 1858.

Presented.

Journal of the Indian Archipelago and Eastern Asia, Vol. II. Nos. 2. and

3, 2 copies.—By tHe Epitor J. R. Loaan, Esq.

Madras Journal of Literature and Science, January to March, 1858,

Vol. III. No. 6.—By tar Manpras Lirerary Sociery.

Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, Janu-

ary, 1858.—By True ACADEMY.

Report (20th) of the Proceedings of the Calcutta School-Book Society,

1857.—By Basu RasenDRALAL MITTRA.

Ditto (Half-yearly) of the Chamber of Commerce, 3lst May, 1858, 8vo.

—By THE CHAMBER OF COMMERCE.

Ditto (12th Annual) of the Grant Medical College, Bombay, Session

| 1857-58.— By tHe Govt. or Bompay.

Selections from the Records of the Government N. W. Provinces,

Mr. Thomason’s Despatches, Vol. II. Calcutta, 8vo.—By THE Govt.

| OF INDIA.

_ Ditto ditto ditto Part XXXI. 2 copies.—By THE Same.

Ditto ditto of the Government of Bengal, No. XX VIII.—By tur Gov7,

or BENGAL.

Vividhartha Sangraha, No. 49.—By Basu Rasenpratat Mirra.

The Oriental Christian Spectator for July.—By tar Eprror.

3B 2

368 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No 4.

The Calcutta Christian Observer for August, 1858.—By Tue Epitor.

The Oriental Baptist for August, 1858.—By tue Epiror.

Erlauterungsblatt zum Relief des Monte-Rosa und Seiner Umge-

bungen.—By Herr. H. ScHLAGINTWEIT.

Bijdragen tot de Taal-Land-En-Volkenkunde van Nederlandsch Indie,

Deel I. Nos. 3 and 4.--By tHe AcaDEMy.

Correspondence between the British Indian Association and Government,

pamphlet.—By Tue Secretary B. I. AssoctaTion.

Journal of the Statistical Society of London, June, 1858, Vol. X XI.

Part II.—By tue Soctery.

Moore, (F.) Description of some new species of Lepidopterous Insects

from Northern India, pamphlet.—By THE AuTHoR.

A Monograph of the Asiatic Species of Neptis and Athyma,

pamphlet.—By THE AUTHOR.

Ratnavali an Indian Drama in Bengali, by Ramnarain Pundit, pamphlet.

— By tHe Rasa P. C. Sina.

———— An English Translation of the same, by M. M. S. Dutt.—By

THE SAME.

Werken van het ke Institut voor Taal en Volkenkunde, van Nedarlandsch

Indie, 2 Affeeling, Amsterdam, 1858, 8vo.—By THE RoyAL INSTITUTION

or NETHERLANDS.

Exchanged.

Atheneum for May, 1858.

Annalen der Chemie und Pharmacie, April, 1858.

London, Edinburgh and Dublin Philosophical Magazine, No. 102, for

June, 1858.

Purchased.

Annals and Magazine of Natural History for June, 1858, No. 6.

American Journal of Science and Art for May, 1858, No. 75.

Annales des Sciences Naturelles, Tome VIII. No. 1.

Belanger’s Voyage Indes Orientelles, Parts I. to VIII.

Comptes Rendus, Nos. 19 to 22.

Dumeril’s Histoire des Reptiles, Vols. 6 and 7, Parts I. II. VIII. and IX.

Plates for Vols. 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10.

Deutsches Worterbuch, Vol. II. Part 6.

Journal des Savants for April and May, 1858.

Literary Gazette, Nos. 2157 to 2160.

Prinsep’s Spays, Vols. I and II, 8vo.

Revue des Deux Mondes, 15th May and Ist June, 1858.

de Zoologie, No. 4, 1858.

1858. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 369

Voigt’s (J. O.) Hortus Suburbans Calcuttensis, 8vo. Calcutta, 1845.

Wyld’s Map of India.

Wustenfield die Chroniken der Stadt Mekka, Band III. Liepzig, 8vo.

Tconographie Zoophytologique Description par localites et terrains des

Polypiers fossiles de France et Pays environnauts par H. Michelin, Paris,

Plates.

For Ocrozsrr, 1858.

The Monthly General Meeting for October, was held on the 1st

instant.

The Hon’ble Sir James Colvile, Kt., President, in the chair.

The proceedings of the September Meeting were read and con-

firmed.

Presentations were received—

1. From the Government of India through Mr. Secretary

Edmonstone, copy of a Persian work published by Dr. Polock the

physician of the Shah of Persia, relating to the diseases prevalent in

that country and their treatment.

2. From the Hon’ble the Court of Directors through the Govern-

ment of Bengal, photographic drawings of the Gol Goomuz at Beeja-

pore.

3. From Baboo Rungolal Banerjee, a copy of his Bengalee Poem

Pudmini.

4. From Mr. Theobald, Junior, through Baboo Rajendra Lal

Mittra, certain coins as described by the Baboo in the following

note.

“ My pear Govur,—Sometime ago Mr. Theobald, Junior, left

with me 7 silver coins for presentation to the Asiatic Society, if

I thought them worthy of its acceptance. I find the first 3 to

belong to the Shah Kings of Saurashtra, No. 1 being of Vira Dama

son of Dama Shah, No. 2 of Atri Dama son of Rudra Shah, and No.

3 of Bisva Shah, son of Bhathri Dama. The Society possesses no

specimens of these coins and they will therefore be useful additious

to its cabinet. They have been figured in the Journal and in Mr.

Thomas’s Indian Antiquities, Vol. II. p. 85.

370 Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. [ No. 4.

Nos. 4 & 5, the last in triplicate, are very like the silver dabs

found by Major Kittoe, Mr. Thomas and others in Gangetic India,

and are supposed to have belonged to Hindu Kings of the 2d and

3d centuries before Christ. They bear no inscription, and their

legends are indistinct. They were I understand found in Guzerat.

Yours truly,

(Sd.) Rasenpra Lat Mrirrra.

The Council reported—

1. That the name of Baboo Roma Nauth Banerjee has been

removed from the list of Members, under rule 13 of the Society’s

Code of Bye laws, for non-payment of arrears.

2. That they have granted the Asst. Secretary and Librarian

Baboo Gourdoss Bysack leave of absence for 6 months upon urgent

private affairs, and appointed Baboo Bhobany Persaud Dutt to act

for him during his absence.

Confirmed.

Communications received —

1. From Baboo Radha Nauth Sikdar, an Abstract of the Meteoro-

logical Observations taken at the Surveyor Generai’s Office in the

month of May last.

2. From Mr. James Burgess, a paper on Hypsometrical Measure-

ments by means of the Barometer and Boiling Point Thermometer.

This paper gave rise to considerable discussion chiefly maintained

by Colonel Strachey, Dr. Thomson and the author.

3. From Baboo Hori Sunker Dutt, Deputy Inspector of Schools,

Bancoorah, through Mr. Hand, the Inspector of Schools, South

Bengal, the following letter accompanied by a brick bearing a Ben-

gal Inscription.

“ T have the honor to submit for your consideration a brick

which I have found in the ruins of the old temple of the Devee

Basoolee at Chhatna in Zilla Bancoorah. This Devee is alluded to

in the Poems of Chundee Doss, one of the well known bards of Ben-

gal, and this excited my curiosity to pay a visit, on one occasion of

my going to Chhatua on duty, to the scene of events now so popular

with numbers of our countrymen. Here the villagers pointed out

the place where Chundee Doss’s dwelling stood, the stone upon

which he used to sit aud compose his songs, and the old site of the

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 371

temple of the Goddess to whose worship he was devoted. These

no doubt had some peculiar charms, and I was still more delighted

when I observed that almost all the bricks of the temple bore

inscriptions which I at first could not read. I therefore looked for

an entire brick, and at last found the one I now submit for your

consideration.

My main object in thus intruding upon your time isto have the

inscription deciphered.

I must inform you that I tried if possible to decipher it. I think

I have partially made out some thing, but am very diffident as to

whether my conjectures are correct.

The characters at first appear much hike Deva Nagor, but I think

they are old Bengalv.

What I have been able to make out is this :—

Als QIM Atcat MTSAaTA Ws 389¢@

The temple seems from this to have been built by the Rajah of

Chhatna.

I have much doubt about

If these are old Bengali characters, I would be happy to have the

other letters of the alphabet, in order that the great change which

those characters have undergone during the last three hundred

years, may be noticed.

I have, &c.,

(Sd.) Hori Suunxer Dorr.

Baboo Gourdoss Bysack stated that the characters of the inscrip-

tion were Bengalee of the period of Chaitanya Deva, and very like

those of Lassen’s fac simile edition of the Yajnadattabadha.

They differ from the modern Bengali in the letter ¢ being written

like { without the dot at the bottom, and the latter being represent-

ed with a dot in the centre. This practice still obtains in Coch

Behar and is not unknown in Rungpur. The letter 4 is very pecu-

liarly formed and its duplication is indicated by the addition of the

figure 2, and not as usual at present by the repetition of the letter

itself. This mode of duplicating the Sri was not, however, uncom-

mon at the time when the brick was inscribed. In some of the

Nepalese coins of the 16th and 17th centuries figured by Mars-

den in his Numismata Orientalia, it occurs very frequently, and in a

372 Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. [ No. 4.

coin of Rajrajesswari Devi the letter Sri has the figure 3 after it to

indicate its triplication. The date of the inscription 1475 Saka—

1553, A. C. has been correctly read by Babu Hurrishanker Dutt,

but the name of the party who dedicated the temple is not Sri

Yutara. Raya as read by him, but Sri Sri Utava Raya. The read-

ing of the Inscription is

22 Zisal AacaTA Ar Toaata AG 382

or in English.

The doubly prosperous Utava Raya the owner of the doubly pros-

perous city Chhatana, Saka, 1475

4. Lieut.-Col. Strachey read a memo. by Capt. H. Strachey on

what is known of the proceedings and fate of Herr. Adolphe

Schlagintweit.

For November, 1858.

The monthly general meeting of the Society was held on the

ord instant.

Col. R. Strachey, Vice-President, in the chair.

The proceedings of the last meeting were read and confirmed.

Presentations were received.

1. From the Secretary of the Royal Geographical Society, the

27th vol. of the Society’s Journal.

2. From the Secretary of the Ceylon Asiatic mba part 2 of

that Society’s Journal.

3. From the Secretary American Academy of Arts and Sciences,

Memoirs of the American Academy, New series vol. V. p. II., and

vol. VI. p. I.

Letters were read.

1. From Dr. Row intimating his desire to withdraw from the

Society.

Communications were received.

1. From the Government of India through Mr. Secretary Chap-

man forwarding for such use as the Society may think fit, a paper on

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 373

Edueation in China prepared by Mr. Alabaster from information

communicated by Commissioner Yeh.

2. From Mr. Hall a paper on Professor Wilson’s 3d edition

of the Sanscrit Dictionary.

3. From Captain Tenant, Engineers. A reply to Archdeacon

Pratt’s recent paper on the Indian meridional are.

4, From Major H. L. Thuillier the following extract som a

letter from Captain Tenant relating to the Comet.

«As the comet now rapidly leaving us has been generally iden-

tified with the one Mr. Hind expected, (which it is not,) and has in

consequence caused an unusual interest to be taken in it, perhaps the

elements of its orbit will be interesting to some of your Calcutta

friends.

Perihelion passage, Sept. 28th, 16h. 16m. 5.

Longitude of perihelion, 16° 36’ 4.”

Do. Ascending node, 168° 25’ 11.”

Inclination, 66° 20’ 35.”

Perihelion distance, 0.5 752,358.

Motion retrograde.

These differ totally from those of Mr. Hind’s expected Comet,

that of 1556.

I was unable to get any observations till the 5th October, and

have only just got enough to get this orbit, but I believe this orbit

will be very fairly close. I have seen no English orbit and I doubt

if any has yet reached India.”

The Secretary read the following extract from a note addressed

to him by Archdeacon Pratt on the same subject.

“This comet is the same as that seen by Dr. Donati at Florence

in June last. Mr. Hind has published one or two letters in the

Times giving the results of his observations upon it. It is not, as

was at first hoped, the 1556 or Charles Vth comet, which may yet

come. From 1858 to 1861 is the range which Mr. Hind has

given it.

Regarding this, or Donati’s comet, Mr. Hind shews, in his letter

dated September 13th, that on the 5th and 6th of October it would

be near Arcturus—which you may remember we observed—and

that it would pass its descending node near Venus—which also we

3 C

374 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 4.

saw here plainly enough on the 17th or 18th of October. The

motion of the comet is retrograde ; for Venus is come to this side

of the sun from the opposite side by the left, whereas the comet is

come round by the right. The motion round the sun is conse-

quently opposite to that of Venus and the other planets. This is

fatal to its being Charles V.’s comet, if, as I believe is the case,

that comet’s motion was direct. No perturbations from the

Planets could account for such a change.”

5. From the Government of India through Mr. Secretary

Beadon, transmitting 3 copies of a letter from the Government of

the N. W. Provinces to the Secretary with the Governor General

with enclosures relative to Mons. Adolphe Schlagintweit.

From Major WH. Ramsay, Commissioner of Kumaon Division, to W.

Muir, Esquire, Secretary to Government, North Western Pro-

vinces, No. 335, dated Nynee Tal, the 6th September, 1858.

Sir,—When the Messrs. Schlagintweit left this province to

prosecute their scientific inquiries in more northern countries,

several Kumaon men accompanied them. Most of these men re-

turned long ago, but Hurkishen came last of all, and after making

inquiries about Adolphe Schlagintweit, he requested me to settle his

accounts and receive his instruments.

2, As Captain Strachey had some knowledge of the country

from which Hurkishen had returned, as also of those parts where

he was to carry out further observations, I requested that officer to

prepare a statement showing all that could be gathered from

Hurkishen—the instruments he had received from A. Schlagiut-

weit, and how disposed of, also the expenditure of the money he

had received. Captain Strachey, at considerable trouble, has kindly

prepared the enclosed memorandum with map to explain the known

and probable route of the missing traveller, and I solicit the favor

of your submitting it for the orders of the Right Hon’ble the

Governor General.

I solicit orders regarding the pay of Hurkishen recommended

by Captain Strachey, as also in reference to the collections and

instruments left at different places.

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 3795

MEMORANDUM.

1. Adolphe Schlagintweit crossed the Para Lasa (Pass) from

Garzha (vid Lahaul) of Kalla into Rapslin of Ladak, ¢. e. from

India to Tibet, on the 31st of May, 1857, taking with him

1. Mahomud Amin, native of Yarkund, guide, &e.

2. Yahudi ditto, Assistant to No. 1.

3. Mahomud Hasan, of Peshawar, Moonshee, &ec.

4, Abdul of Kashmir, domestic servant, &c.

5. Ghos Mahomud, of Moradabad, ditto.

6. Murli, of Bhagsu, Chuprassy, &.

7. Moula Baksh, of Moradabad ditto, and others.

2. The first of these, Mahomud Amin, was a person of ques-

tionable antecedents, nominally a merchant trading between Yarkund

and Le, but said also to have acted in the capacity of a gang-robber

on the road between those places. Being at Le in 1856, he was

arrested by the Dogra Thannadar Basti Ram, for debt, on the suit

of sundry merchants or for other reasons, and released on the appli-

eation of Herman and Robert Schlagintweit, who engaged him to

act as guide for their journey towards Khotin in the summer of that

year (their account of which is on record), On their return to

India in the autumn, he was discharged and remained at Le, when

he soon got into trouble again with the Dogra Government.

3. Some say that Agents of the Chinese Government in

Yarkund having heard of his bringing Huropean travellers across

their frontier (which is high treason in their Code), offered a re-

ward of 1,000 Rupees for his apprehension, and perhaps coerced

some of the Kashmir residents at Yarkund to work upon their

friends in Ladak and Kashmir for the same object, which Gulab

Singh and Basti Ram possibly also turned to a mercantile transac-

tion. However this may be, Gulab Singh having ordered his arrest

and threatened to hang him soon after the Schlagintweits’ depar-

ture, he fled from Ladak into Kulla, where Adolphe Schlagintweit

found him at Sultanpore in April 1857. There had possibly been

Some previous arrangement between them. Any way Adolphe

Schlagintweit again entertained him as Interpreter, Guide, and

Baggage Master for another journey into Turkistan. As a speci-

men of his veracity, it may be mentioned that he informed deponeut

3.6 2

376 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. | No. 4.

(Hurkishen) that he was to havea monthly salary of 2,000 Rupees

whilst travelling with A. Schlagintweit, and a monthly pension of

1,000 Rupees after he had brought him back safe to India. Major

Hay, A. C. of Kulla, probably knows more of Mahomud Amin’s

history.

4. No. 2,name not known to deponent (Hurkishen), being com-

monly called “ Yahudi,” 7. e. “The Jew,” wasa native of Yarkund

and dependent of Mahomud Amin: they had some baggage poneys

with them and four Turkish grooms or baggage men, all of which

were engaged by A. Schlagintweit for the journey. No. 8,

Mahomud Hasan, of Peshawar, was engaged by A. Schlagintweit

when he was at that place in December, 1856, as a Moonshee, assist-

ing also in scientific observations and accounts.

5. The last documentary evidence of A. Schlagintweit’s move-

ments forthcoming here, consists of a letter to Hurkishen from

Changehenmo of Ladak, 14th June, a postscript to the same stating

that it was not sent till the 24th idem, aud one or two notes for

sundry payments of money of the latter date. The letter consists

chiefly of instructions to Hurkishen, and of Adolphe Schlagintweit

himself, only says, “ I ain quite well, and at present all things seem

to go on pretty right,” but as it also mentions two ‘ Dak parcels,”

one for Lieutenant Charles Hall (A. C. of Bhagsa?) sent by the

same despatch for transmission to Kangra. Other persons have no

doubt received letters from him with particulars of his history up

to that time.

6. ‘These documents were brought from Ladak by the chupras-

sies Murli and Maula Baksh (Nos. 6 and 7 of the above list) who

joined Hurkishen at Kharding of Garzlia on the 20th of July,

1857. It appeared from the statements of these men (made to

Hurkishen) that before they left A. Schlagintweit, the Moonshee

Mahomud Hasan had deserted, taking with him one of his Master’s

(or Mahomud Amin’s) poneys, some little money, and other articles

belonging to A. Schlagintweit. The chuprassies were directed to

overtake him if they could, recover the property, and make it over

to Hurkishen in Kullu, which they succeeded in doing, but leaving

the Moonshee himself in Ladak, whence he probably made his way

to Kashmir and Peshawar. He gave them a letter for his Master,

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 307

which they brought to Hurkishen and is still extant among his papers,

written in pencil in broken English, excusing his sudden departure

on the score of inability to endure the hardships of such a journey

any longer, and admitting a balance of 72 Rupees, of which he gave

the chuprassies his account, but did not pay the money. It must

be observed that A. Schlagintweit makes no allusion to all this in

his letters to Hurkishen; from which it may perhaps be inferred

that he did not attach much importance to the Moonshee’s de-

sertion.

7. Hurkishen, when at Deyra in November, 1857, gathered from

Captain Montgomery of the Trigonometrical survey and his native

doctor, that they had been in Ladak during the past summer, and

that A. Schlagintweit had left Le before their arrival there, and they

knew nothing more of him.

8. From the locality of his last despatch, Changchenmo, (which

may be seen in my map, at the N. EH. end of Ladak) I infer that

he crossed the Turkish water shed to the east of the Karakorum

Pass, perhaps to Sugat, on the head of the Karakash River,

and thence following the route taken by his brothers the year before,

towards Kilian and Khoten.* It appears that he had laid ina

stock of merchandize in India, with the view of facilitating his

journey by trade or the appearance of it.

9. I hear of lim after this through the Bhotiyas of Iwar, who

got their information from Kashmiris of Ladak at the Gar fair in

the autumn of 1857. It was to the effect that A. Schlagintweit had

succeeded in reaching the margin of the inhabited country at the

foot of the mountains; there he went out from his camp some way

to reconnoitre, and in his absence the Guide, Mahomud Amin,

absconded with most of the baggage and cattle towards Yarkund.

A. Schlagintweit being left helpless, sent back some of the Ladak

baggage-men he had brought with him with a letter or message to

the Thannadar of Le, requesting him to send assistance in men,

cattle, provisions, and money; whether for the purpose of continu-

ing his attempt to penetrate into Turkistan, or merely to return to

Ladak with less hardships, does not appear. When his messengers

* There is also a way through Kokrang and Dong Ailak, by which he might

get into the ordinary route on this side of the Karakorum.

378 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4.

arrived at Le, they found Basti Ram’s son in authority there, the

Thannadar himself being away in Kashmir. The son is said to

have refused the required assistance: more likely, in fact, he was too

silly and timid to act upon his own responsibility, and referred for

instructions to his father or Gulab Sigh, in Kashmir, at the ex-

pense of great delay and danger to A. Schlagintweit. The informa-

tion gathered by the Iwaris at Gar goes no further, and is not very

reliable even so far: indeed it 1s a question whether this story may

not be an exaggerted mis-statement of the desertion of Mahomud

Hasan in Ladak. .

10. The next accounts are derived from two or three letters

which have been published during the last few months in the Delhi

Gazette, from a correspondent of that paper, apparently at Simla,

and deriving his information from merchant travellers from Ladak.

From these it may be gathered that Adolphe Schlagintweit passed

the winter of 1857-58 at the foot of the mountains on the border of

Khoten, on this side of the Chinese out-post, among the same tribe

of shepherds perhaps who gave his brothers a friendly reception the

year before. On his arrival there, the Provinces of Kashgar and

Yarkund were in a very disturbed state from one of those invasions

of the Turks from Khokund which have been recurring periodically

every 10 or 20 years, during the past century.

11. On these occasions the forage invaders being joined by the

Turks of the country, usually succeed in driving the Chinese Gar-

risons into their forts, and subverting the Celestial Government

for a time, till re-inforeements come from the Chinese Provinces

further east, when the rabble of Turks soon become disorganized,

the Khokandis retire to their own country, and the people of

Yarkund and Kashgar are left to settle their own accounts with the

Chinese, which is sometimes done by wholesale massacres of the

Turks of those cities. The invaders are commonly headed by one

of the Khojahs of Andejan, of the family which ruled at Kashghar,

before the Chinese conquest (about 100 years ago), and who still

aspire to the recovery of their former dominions. An unsuccessful

invasion aud rebellion of the Turks, as here described, occurred

when I was in Ladak in 1847-48 ; on the present occasion the result

ig said to have been the same.

1858. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 379

12. So long as the Chinese were in the ascendant, Adolphe

Schlagintweit would have little chance of penetrating the inhabited

country to any distance: they have out-posts on all the roads across

their frontier ; from the rarity of population and traflic, individuals

are easily marked; and Adolphe Schlagintweit would hardly be able

to barbarize himself enough to bear scrutiny. An European tra-

veller attempting to pass any of these out-posts would probably be

stopped and turned back, and extra precautions taken against him

all along the frontier, but if detected after penetrating the inha-

bited country to any distance, he would more probably be murdered.

It is not likely that Adolphe Schlagintweit would stay more than

one winter in the demi-deserts this side of Kchoten, nor that if still

there he would not have opened communications with Ladak

and India; it is probable therefore that he took the opportunity

offered by the temporary subversion of the Chinese authority to enter

Khoten or Yarkund. But to go far or stay long there he could

hardly avoid the notice of the insurgent Turks: the natural im-

pulse of these people would be to rob and murder an European,

but in the actual conjuncture, they might perhaps welcome him as

a common enemy of the Chinese, and the mania of travel or ad-

venture might prompt Adolphe Schlagintweit to offer himself in

that capacity. In either case when the Chinese got the upper-

hand again (as they are now said to have done), they would first

regain possession of their southern frontier towards Ladak, and

Adolphe Schlagintweit would probably retire with the invading

Turks through Kashghar into Khokund.

18. The relations of the English with Khokund have been very

slight, but so far as they go, wholly amicable, and on the strength

of them, or of his own antecedents in Yarkaud, Adolphe Schlagin-

tweit might possibly meet a friendly reception there: on the other

hand the Khokandies are (as usual with the Turks) on bad terms

with all their neighbours, including the Russians, who are steadily

encroaching on their North-West frontier; and tais would add to

his difficulties in leaving their country again.

14. The ways out of Khokund are eastward to Ili and South-

Eastward to Kashghar, both completely stopped by the Chinese ;

Southward to Sirkol Badakshan and Cabul, but physically and

380 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 4.

politically this would be most difficult ; South-West to Samarkund

and Bukhara, and Westward to Khiva, both countries probably

hostile to Khokund, and certainly so to the British; an European,

and especially an English traveller, would find safety there only

from ussian protection; lastly to the Mussian out-posts on the

North-West and North, Fort Aralsk near the Aral and Ak-Musjed

on the Sir (Jaxartes): once there, he would be in the civilized

world again, under a friendly Government, and if he ever re-appears,

I think it is most likely to be this way, which would lead him to

Europe and not back to India. It would be futile to discuss

the chances of his ultimate escape: they hang merely on the caprices

of the vilest barbarians of Central Asia.

15. To returu to India: some time in May 1857, before

Adolphe Schlagintweit left Garzha, he detached a party consisting of

1. Ramchunder, of Lahore, Collector and Observer.

2. Gulab Sing, of Mandi, Draftsman and Assistant to No. 1.

3. », Compassy.

4. i > Witto.

5. ‘ », Gardener and Botanical Collector.

6. » of the Sultanpore Thannah, Chuprassy.

These under No. 1 were sent from Khardong down the Chaundra

Bhogah by Kishtwar into Kashmir, with orders to turn up at

Jhelum and there wait for Adolphe Schlagintweit himself or lis

further orders; as before mentioned they met the surveyors under

Captain Montgomery in Kashmir, and this is the last, deponent

has heard of them.

16. On his departure from Garzha, Adolphe Schlagintweit also

left 7 Nagina, of the Sultanpore Thannah, chuprassy, in charge of

collections and manuscripts deposited in the Assistant Commission-

er’s house at Khurdong.

This man was afterwards joined by 8 Moula Baksh, No. 7 of

the first list, one of the two chuprassies who returned from Ladak

in the end of July, and after taking on letters to Sultanpore (as

already mentioned) brought back money (200 Rupees) for expenses

at Khardong. Nos. 7 & 8 were ordered to remain at Khardong till

receipt of further orders from Adolphe Schlagintweit and to take

1858. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 381

eare of his collections there till they could be sent down to Kangra

after the rains. Deponent knows nothing more of them.

17. The 8rd party consisted of

9. Hurkissen Tewari, of Almorah, Native Doctor, Observer,

and Collector.

10. Krishna fi ditto, Assistant to No. 9.

Me Panchum — ,, Paori, Compassy.

12. Magna Kullu, ditto.

18. Sirtaj Hi ditto, ditto.

The first of whom No. 9 is tle person from wham most of this

information is derived. They parted from Adolphe Schlagintweit

when he crossed the Para Lassa into Tibet, on the 31st May, 1857.

During the month of June, they were employed in travelling, mak-

ing observations and collections down the Bhagga valley by Shigri

and Kaksan back to Khardong, where they remained till the

return of the two Chuprassies from Ladak, 20th July. In pursu-

ance of the instructions then received, they proceeded by Koksar

and Shigri again, across the Kulzun-La into S. Pite, where they

were joined in August by 14 Murh, No. 6, of the first list, who after

leaving the despatches from Ladak at Sultanpore, brought back a

supply of money (500 Rupees). The party then continued their

journey through Haugrang and Kundur, up the Baspa valley across

the Rupin Pass into Rawain, and thence to Deyra, arriving 11th

October. Hurkishen hearing a bad account of the road across the

Rupin, sent the Chuprassy Umrli, with the poney recovered from

the run-away Moonshee Mahomud Husan, round by lower Bischr,

in spite of which the animal died on the road at Rampore, as

certified by a letter from the Raja of that ilk.

18. Hurkishen’s instructions were to go on to Futtehgurh, and

expect Adolphe Schlagintweit there by the end of October, but the

disturbed state of the country in that direction rendering this

impossible, he remained at Deyrah, making observations, repairing

instruments, and expecting letters from Adolphe Schlagintweit till

the 12th of December. Getting no news of his master, he then

deposited his collections in the Surveyor General’s Office, discharg-

ed some of his Establishment (Nos. 12, 18, and 14), and proceeded

382 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4.

to Paoree, 25th December, 1857, and Almora, 1st January, 1858, in

hopes of there getting some information or instructions.

He remained in Kumaon, making many fruitless inquiries, tall

the 18th February, and then returned to Paoree 2nd, and Deyra

17th March, 1858.

Finding no news of Adolphe Schlagintweit, he then left the rest

of his collections and some broken instruments in the Surveyor’s

Office, dismissed the rest of his Establishment (Nos. 10 and 11):

brought his observations and collections to an end, and returued to

his home at Almorah, in April 1858.

In he wrote for information, about Adolphe Schlagintweit

to the Chief Commissioner’s Office in the Punjab, and the answer of

the Secretary, dated Lahore, the 1858, states that they can

give him none.

19. 1st.—Hurkishen left in Gorgha in July, 1857,

2 cases of collections, containing

with the Reverend A. W. Heyde, a German Missionary settled at

Kyelang (near Khardong.)

2nd.—In the Surveyor General’s Office at Deyra, in Decem-

ber, 1857,

7 cases of Geological Specimens, viz., 8 Rocks and Fossils.

2 Earth and Sand.

2 Water.

1 Ditto Botanical ditto 4 Piants.

1 i ee Zoological ,, Birds.

in all, 9 cases and about a cart load.

3rd.—Instruments ...... 1 Barometer, broken.

1 Thermometer ditto.

Ath: iit} iy iy Leds ver 1 Tent.

1 Boring-tool.

1 Hammer.

5th.—He has got with him at Almorah

Instruments ...... 1 Barometer, damaged.

2 Prismatic compasses.

1 Pocket ditto. |

1 Strike and dip compass, German, |

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 383

1 Thermometer.

1 Ditto broken.

1 Ditto ground.

2 Ditto dry and wet buib.

1 Measuring glass.

1 Ditto rod.

3 Ditto tapes.

1 Sundial.

1 Watch.

1 Magnifying glass.

Papers ............ 2 Sheets of map.

5 Books of observations and refer-

ences of collections.

Ditto accounts.

Ditto ditto, Persian, of Mahom-

ed Hussein.

rt be

Peshawri, and other papers.

6¢h.—One case of Surgical instruments (received from the

Almorah Dispensary).

2 Compasses Tripods.

1 Hammer.

1 Gun and bullet Mould.

Dili uu i Bags.

1 Inkstand, &c.

1 -@huprass.

20. The observations appear to have been regularly kept, accord-

ing to Schlagintweit’s instructions, from Para-Lassa 31st May, to

Paoree 25th December, 1857, and again in a fragmentary way

between Paoree and Deyra from 2nd to 17th March, 1858.

21. Ihave examined Hurkishen’s accounts and find them regu-

larly kept. He received an advance of 400 Rupees from A. Schla-

gintweit on the 31st May, and 500 Rupees by order on Sultanpore,

cashed in August 1857, together 900 Rupees, the whole of which

seems to have been fairly expended and duly accounted for. This

eovers Hurkishen’s own pay at 30 Rupees per month, up to the

end of December, 1857. Hurkishen himself states that A. Schla-

gintweit promised him a further payment of 25 Rupees per month,

oD 2

384 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 4.

making his salary up to 55 Rupees, if, on the winding up of his

affairs, his work should be found satisfactory; but there is no

allusion to such a promise in any of the documents produced by

Hurkishen, and one of them distinctly states his pay to have been

raised to 30 Rupees, from the 1st of May, 1857, Hurkishen himself

admitting that it was only 25 before that. I should myself consider

30 Rupees as adequate to the style of his work. Since the begin-

niug of January, 1858, Hurkishen has done next to nothing in the

way of observation or collection, and has been for a large part of the

time at his own home ; on the other hand, he has been put to some

inconvenience and kept out of other employment. For this I think

that a sum of one hundred Rupees (100) would be a fair remune-

ration. There also remains due ten Rupees (10) to the Assistant

Krishna, No. 10 of the 2nd list, for wages from 1st December 1857,

to 5th January, 1858, at nine Rupees per month, and ten Rupees

(10) to Compassy Punchum, No. 11 of the same, for wages for

March and April, 1858, at five Rupees per month.

22. ITamof opinion that if Adolphe Schlagintweit does not

return to India, or at least to Ladak, within the next three months,

his return this way should be no longer expected; that any of his

establishments still extant should be finally discharged, and their

accounts closed, and that all collections, manuscripts, and graduated

instruments should be got together, sealed, packed, and sent to

England, to be kept at the London Custom House unopened till

called for by his brothers Herman and Robert (from

* Behrew. Berlin*), who should be at the same time advised to

Strasse No. Nt \

make arrangements for receiving them. ‘This is

the best way of recovering some value from what has cost the

Government much money, of furthering the interests of science,

and doing justice to the Schlagintweits themselves. I think that all

graduated instruments whatever should be sent home, because the

final reductions of many observations depend upon the correction of

instrumental errors which are sometimes ascertainable only by a

subsequent reference to the instruments themselves, some useless

things may be included thus, but in the absence of the Schlagin-

tweits, itis safer to make the rule absolute and send all.

23. It would be very desirable to have all the collections repack-

1858. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 385

ed for transmission to England, as the original packing may in many

eases be insufficient, but as this would involve much nsk of dis-

placing labels, &c., (which might impair the scientific value of

specimens) it should be done only by the individuals who collected

them, if forthcoming; by any other hands, the packing should be

confined as much as possible to the cases themselves, and avoid any

turning over of the contents. Every thing should be completely

closed in soldered tin-plates.

24, With this view, I recommend that the instruments and

papers specified in list No. 5, be taken from Hurkishen, sealed,

packed, and deposited in the Commissioner’s Office at Almorah,

against further orders, and himself and two men then dismissed

after payment of the 120 Rupees due to them (as shown above), the

things mentioned in list No. 6 (of very little value) being disposed

of as the Commissioners may direct. It is a question whether after

this Hurkishen should not be sent to Deyrah, to repack the collec- »

tions which he left in the Surveyor’s Office there, being remuner-

ated for the job by a further payment of 50 Rupees or so. Colonel

Waugh might be consulted on this point.

25. Jam further of opinion, that Government should call upon

some of their officers in the Punjaub, to report any information they

may be able to get about Adolphe Schlagintweit, and to tuke mea-

sures, such as suggested above, for the preservation of any collec-

tions, manuscripts, and instruments that may come within their

reach, the whole of which things should be sent after the rains to

the Secretary to Government at Allahabad, who could make further

arrangements for their transmission to England in one batch. The

parties best to be consulted are—

The Deputy Commissioner at Kangra.

His Assistant in Kullu.

Lhe Deputy Commissioner at Simla.

Any Government Agent in Kashmir or Ladak.

The Surveyor General at Deyrah.

His Assistants in Cashmir and Ladak.

The Reverend A. W. Heyde, German Missionary at Kye-

lang, in Lahaul of Kullu.

Maharaja Ranbir Sing of Kashmir, and Billah Sah, his

Collector of customs in Ladak.

386 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4.

26. If Nasir Khan, native of Bajour, domiciled at Guzerat, and

trader between Turkistan and India, be forthcoming in Ladak, he

would be about the best man to entrust with any further inquiries

in Turkistan itself; but if any such commission were given to him,

it should be quite privately. I gather from the Delha Gazette, that

this person passed from India into Ladak a month or two ago, with

the intention, no doubt, of going on to Yarkund.

(Signed) Hunry Srracuey, Captain,

66th Goorkah Regiment.

AtmoraH, 20th August, 1858.

P. S.—Since writing the above, I have met with the following in

the Bombay Standard of the 17th July, 1858: ‘By letters from

Simla of the 3rd instant, we learn that an expedition was about to

be organized under Lord William Hay, to ascertain, if possible, the

fate of Herr Adolphe Von Schlagintweit.”’

(Signed) Henry Srracuny, Captain,

66th Goorkah Regiment.

Dethi Gazette, June, 1858.

No. 1.—News has been received of Mr. Schlagintweit, who is

said to have passed his winter at a place called Askilung, about five

marches on this side of Yarkund, and near Aktak. It is possible

that the Government is wide awake, and that Mr. Schlagintweit

was deputed to that part of the world by competent authority, and

that he is duly protected ; if this be not the case, the news of his

safety should be regarded with great caution, and the persons who

have brought the news should be very closely questioned. The

news has come from Leh vid Zautkar, and the secrecy of Govern-

ment may be so great that the same parties may have conveyed

ietters from Mr. Schlagintweit himself.

Delhi Gazette, July 10, 1858.

No. 2.—News from Yarkund has been received by us from a

friend, upon whose information we can entirely rely, he says—“ The

passes from Ladak are open, and news has been received that the

army of Kathai (China) engaged the force sent from Indijan

(Kohkan) and defeated them, causing them to return to their own

country.

1858. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 387

From the present meagre account, the encounter does not seem

to have been very bloody, in fact 1t seemed to be more an arrange-

ment between themselves.

Messengers of distinction have been passing from the Shassan

Court to Yarkund, holding secret conferences with the Thannadar at

Leh, the meaning of which did not transpire. I am sorry to tell

you that no news whatever has been received of Mr. Schlagintweit

or the man Mahomed Amin who conducted him to that country.

The news formerly being, that Mr. Schlagintweit had identified

himself with the Indijan party, which party has been conquered by

the Chinese, would place him in an awkward position, and as he would

have been unable to pass the Chinese posts to return to Leh, he

would have, of necessity, been obliged to retire with the beaten

army towards Kohkan.”’

Delhi Gazette, July 17, 1858.

No. 3.—A merchant named Nasir Khan, came to Hindoostan

about two years ayo nominally on a pilgrimage to Mecca, where he

proceeded. He returned at the beginning of the hot weather to

Sultanpore in Kulu, where he took up his residence, some of his

people joining him from Bombay, and others vid Caleutta. He has

remained several months in Kulu, and was narrowly watched by

Major Hay, who was of opinion that he had other motives than

those of trade.

Being anxious apparently to return to Yarkund, and wishing to

know the exact state of that country, he paid a man 15 Rupees to

proceed to Ladak before the passes were considered fairly opened.

About a fortnight ago, this messenger brought him a letter inform-

ing him that the Chinese force had driven back the troops of Indijan,

which attacked Yarkund last year when they were ill prepared for

resistance ; nor are the Chinese of Yarkund allowed to assemble

troops without orders from Pekin. However, the important portion

of my story as regards Runbeer Singh is to come. This letter stat-

ed that 200 of the rebel sepoys fully armed had been allowed to pass

through the Kashmir territory, and had actually arrived in Yar-

kund!! Nasir Khan is a Patthan, and communicated this to the

Native Officer of the guard of the detachment of the Police corps

now stationed at Sultanpore.

388 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4.

Who can tell what is going on up there P I meta few days ago

two Mahomedans who had arrived from Leh in 19 days, just to

cross the Sutledge to Rampoor. One a Kashmiri told me, that Mr.

Schlagintweit was alive, and that he had gone on to Kashgar, with

Mahomud Amin, the native who accompanied him from Kulu. If

true, this is a curious move for him to make, and the Chinese would

certainly never allow him to return the way he went to Yarkund.

(‘True copies)

(Signed) W. H. Lows,

Offy. Assistt. Secy. to Govt., North-Western Provinces.

Mr. H. Blanford read a paper on the Cretaceous rocks of South-

ern India.

The Officiating Librarian submitted a report of the additions made

to the Library during the months of September and Oetober last.

Liprary.

The Library has received the following accessions during the months

of September and October, 1858.

Presented.

Catalogue of the Government Central Museum, Madras, 4 Parts.—By

THE Mapras GovERNMENT.

Appendix to the Report on the Government Central Museum, Madras,

8vo., Madras, 1855.—By THE Same.

The White Yajur Veda, Part 3, Nos. 4and5.—By ALBrecuT Wesmr,

Berlin.

The Oriental Christian Spectator, Nos. 8 and 9, for August and Sep-

tember 1858.—By tue Epiror.

Indische Alterthumskunde for 1857-58.—By CHartes Lassen.

Abhandlungen far die Kunde des Morgenlandes, Band 1, No. 3, 2

copies. —By THE Royat AcaDEMY oF ScrENcEs, BERLIN.

The Oriental Baptist for September.—By tar Eprror.

The Calcutta Christian Observer for September.—By rue Epitors.

Reports on the Harbour of Beitkul in Sedishaghur Bay, by Col. Cotton

and Lieut. Taylor.—By tHe Mapras GovERNMENT.

Reports on the direct and indirect effects of the Godavery Annicut in

Rajahmundry, and the Coleroon Annicut in Tanjore.—By rue Samz.

Selections No. 2, from the Public Correspondence, &c. of the British

Indian Association.— By rue Sociery.

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 389

The Annals of Indian Administration, edited by Meredith Townsend.—

By THE HomE GoveRNMENT.

Selections from the Records of the Madras Govt., No.2 of 1854, No.

39, and No. 45 of 1856, 2 copies and No. 49 of 1858.—By tur Manpras

GOVERNMENT.

The Oriental Baptist for October.—By THE Eprror.

The Quarterly Review, Vols. 50-51-52.—By Basu Gourposs Bysacx.

Memoirs of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences, Vol. V.

Part 2, and Vol. VI. Part 1.—By roe AMERIcAN ACADEMY.

General Report on the Administration of British India. and

Maps on the Administration Report.—By tHe Home GovERNMENT.

Proceedings of the Royal Geographical Society of London, Vol. II.

No. 3.—By THE Society.

Journal of the Royal Geographical Society, Vol. XXVII.—By Tue

Socrery.

Photographic Drawings of the Gol Goomuz at Beejapore—From THE

How’sueE THE Court oF DirEecTors THROUGH THE GovT. oF BENGAL.

Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia.— By

THE ACADEMY.

The Calcutta Christian Observer for October, 1858.—By tHe Epirors.

Catalogues of the Government Central Museum in Madras, British

Shells, 1. Iron Ores, 1. Palaeontology, 1. Descriptive Geology, 1.

Mineralogy, 1. Five Pamphlets —By tore Mapras GovERNMENT.

Catalogue of Books in the Library of the Government Central Museum,

Madras.—By THE SAME.

Reports on the Government Central Museum, Madras, and on the

Government Museums at Bellary, &c. Iron Ores, Manufacture of Iron

and Steel and the Coals, 1. Report for 1853.—By THE Same.

Report on the Woods of Madras, 1.—By THE SAME.

Thirty-fiitth Annual Report of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Bri-

tain and Ireland for 1858.—By THe Socipry.

Notice of Mr. Hugh Miller, Philadelphia, 1857.—By THE AMERICAN.

PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY.

Le Tresor des Belles Paroles, Choix de Sentences.—Traputes Par.

P. EK. Foncavx.

Bibidhartha Sangraha for Joysto.—By Basu RasEnDRaLAL MITTRA.

Bijdragen Tot de Taal land-en Volkenkunde van Nedarlandsh Indie,

No. 2, New Series, 8vo.—By THe Royau SociEry oF SciEencEs, NE-

THERLANDS.

The Precepts of Jesus, &c. compiled by the late Rajah Rammokun Roy

3. =:

390 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4,

by the Unitarian Society for the Propagation of the Gospel in India.—By

Basu RasJENDRALAL MirrRa.

Twentieth Report of the Proceedings of the Calcutta School-Book

Society for 1857.—By tue Socrery.

Kitab Jozabi, or Persian Work on the Diseases of Persia, by Dr.

Pollock.—By THE Govt. oF Inp14, ForzigN DEPARTMENT.

Catalogue of Birds in the Museum of the East India Company, Vol. II.

—By tHe Hon’BLe THE Court oF Drrecrors.

Pudmini Vopakhayan A Tale of Rajasthan in Bengalii—By RuncotaL

BANERJEE,

Voyages d’Ibn Batoutah, Par. M. M. Defremery et Sanguinetti, Tome

4.—By THE AsIATIC Society oF Paris. |

Reports on the Districts of Midnapore and Cuttack, by H. Ricketts.—

By THE BENGAL GOVERNMENT.

Calcutta Review for September, 1858.—By THE Epirors.

Journal Asiatique, Tome XI. No. 43, April and May, 1858.—By THE

Astatic Society oF Paris.

Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgen: Gesellschaft, Band XII. Heft 2,

Liepzig, 1858.—By tae German ORIENTAL SOCIETY.

Purchased.

Comptes Rendus, Nos. 23 and 24 of Tome 46, and Nos. 2, 3, 4 and 5 .

of Tome 47, 1858.

Literary Gazette, Nos. 2161 and 2162, Old Series, and Nos. 1, 2, 3 and

4 of 1858, New Series.

Vendidad Sade, Part 4.

Sanskrit and English Dictionary, Improved from Professor Wilson, by

Theodore Goldstiicker, Vol. I. Parts 1 and 2.

Revue et Magasin de Zoologie, by Mr. F. E. Guerin-Meneville, Nos.

5 and 6 of 1858.

The London, Edinburgh and Dublin Philosophical Magazine and Jour-

nal of Science, Supplement of No. 103, and Nos. 104 and 108 for 1858.

Notices et Extracts des Manuscrits de la Bibliotheque du Roi, Tome

16, P. 2.

Analectes sur l’Histoire et la Litterature des Arabes D’Espagne, par.

Al-Makarri. Published By M. Retnuart Dozy.

Mutanubbi Carmina cum Commentario Wahidii, Edited by Fr. Die-

terice, Part 1.

L Algebre D’Omar Alkhayyami.—By F, Worpcks.

Kitab-i-Yamini, translated by the Rev. James Reynolds.

Chronique de Matthieu D’Edesse, Par. EK. Dulaurier.

Ibn Abd el Hakem’s History of the Conquest of Spain.—By J. H. Jones.

pe ——

1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 391

Bibliotheca Egyptiaca.—By Dr. H. Jotowiez.

Map of Mont Rosa, shewing the Heights of its Peaks.

American Journal of Arts and Sciences for July, 1858.

Athenzum for June, 1858.

Annals and Magazine of Natural History for July, 1858, No. 7.

Annales des Sciences Naturelles, Vol. VIII. No. 2, Botanique and Nos. 4

and 5, Zoologie.

Deutsches Worterbuch von. Jacobb Griciem und. Wilhelm Griciem,

Vol. II. Part 7.

Journal des Savants for June, 1858.

Natural History Review for July, 1858, No. 3.

Revieu des Deux Mondes, for 15th June and 1st July, 1858.

Westminster Review, No. 27 for July, 1858.

“BHOBANYPROSAD Dorr.

iit, ition ise

Fees eth eee bate

he: Su (atest Liinbe) a eis

FPR ny teal * Soa: (

Aaa Oe cd ic Mt oe Ames

verte are

pa Pho cls: won PN ns gi Saute Si

’ ;

% y

«% ‘ 3

=) 1

i Vk) AeA oe

j Ww ol \

< i”

P=. i a

= Tare

E ae Fs at 4

4 4

A ee

i ee ¥ Lb

~ ) Lae alt ‘

“y 9 tne Bes ay

“ ( Wf

j iv ack ie Me

} He “ ‘al ya . htt “A we

Reise ae eek QE oe Te casei we kg

i Shes et, Va gash a Vie we Fis ye a4 JN a a

4 ites we A aaa what, ome vty e.

re ras ;

nites as tite wile RRA TORY bigot

‘ ’

rl »

\ " ont

3 bi ry

; . at i

Sg ees _ ike SS i! A es tai i vas

4 ey :

;, =

y 9 Na wt ' < ia ,

a pues edi +.

shih as

tly 2

> re

. - M '

a , J) a

)

b +

' h

+ i

aT Ty

Tat

: i

i ay

TAPS iv

Mt 2

‘

—)

= 1

JOURNAL

OF THE

AOlATICGC SOCLE TY,

No. .V. 1858.

Comparative Vocabulary of the Languages of the broken Tribes of

Nepal.— By B. H. Honaeson, Esq., B. C. 8.

(Continued from vol. xxvi. p. 522.)

DECLENSION oF BAHING Pronouns AND OF Nouns.

I.— Of Pronouns.

lst Personal Pronoun.

1, Nom. I, Go.

Conjunct. Disjunct.

2, Gen. Of me {We = my. } Wake = mine,

3. ae ‘sig Go. No sign.

In me Apprendi

4. Loc. 4 Wisin me. \Wake gware (interior).

Int ‘ : sae

5. Loc. Tn 0 mes) Wake di (entering, resting in).

6. Abl. From me, Wake ding (removal).

7. All. Towards me, Wake la (nearing).

8. —— From towards me, Wake lang (departing).

9. Towards me, Wake taure (behaving).

: Wakenu :

10. Soc. With ue) Ginna t (society).

: : Wake manthi a nee

11. Priv. Without me, 4 Go vanthi { (privation).

12. Inst. By me, Go mi.

13. Loc. At, by me, Wa pumdi* (proximity. H. pas).

Dual.

1. Gési, incl. Gédsika, excl.

Conjunct. Disjunct,

2. 1 incl, foe incl.

Wasi, excl. {| Wasike, excl.

3. Gosi, incl. Gdésiki, excl.

* See remark in sequel. ‘Taure, gware and pum, as substantives or quasi such,

naturally take the genitival pronoun ; and perhaps also la and lang = taraf and

tarafse : but not so mi, di and ding which seem to be sheer case signs.

No. XCV.—New Serius, Vou. XXVIII. 35

394 Béhing Vocabulary. [No. 5.

tt et

HOODNAMAL bo

: | Ike, incl.

. Tsikegware, incl. Wasikegware, excl.

. Tsike di, incl. Wasike di, excl.

. Tsike ding, incl. Wasike ding, excl.

. Tsike la, incl. Wasike la, excl.

. Tsike lang, incl. Wasike lang, excl.

. Gosi taure, incl. Gosuku taure, excl.

. Gosi nung, incl. Gosuku nung, excl.

- Gosi manthi, incl. Gosuku manthi, excl.

Gosi mi, incl. Gosuku mi, excl.

Tsi- sara incl.

* 2 Wasi- § ? Lexcl.

Plural.

Go-i, incl. Gdku, excl.

Conjunct. Disjunct.

jks incl.

Wake, excl. (| Wakke, excl.

. Go-i, incl, Goku, excl.

. [kegware, incl. Wakegware, excl.

. [ke di, incl. Wake di, excl.

Tke ding, incl. Wake ding, excl.

. [ke 1a, incl. Wake 14, excl.

. Ike lang, incl. Wake lang, excl.

. [ke taure, incl, Wake taure, excl.

. Goi nung, incl. Goku nung, excl.

. Goi manthi, incl. Goku manthi, excl.

. Goi mi, incl. Goku mi, excl.

13.

Ike- di incl,

Wake. PUM’ excl.

2nd Pronoun. 12, Gasi mi.

1. Ga. 13. Ysi pumdi.

9 { Conjunct. eae Plural.

ae) es Ike. 1. Gani,

3. Ga. No sign. 9 Conjunct. f Disjunct.

4, Ike gware. “Aint. Ynike.

5. Ike di. 3. Gani. No sign.

6. Ike ding, 4, Yni Gware.

7. Ike la. 5. Tnike di.

8. Ike lang. 6. [nike ding.

9. Ike taure. 7. Ynike la,

10. Ga nung. 8. Ynike lang,

11. Ga manthi. 9. Yni taure.

12. Ga mi. 10. Gani nung.

13. I pumdi. 11. Gani manthi.

Dual. 12. Gani mi.

1. Gasi. 13. Yni pumdi.

9 Jf Conjunct, bee 3rd Personal.

* | Tsi. Isike, . Harem (all genders),

3. Gasi. No sign.

~——

RODS On gos

. Isike di.

. Vsike ding.

. Vsike lang.

. Ysi taure or Isike taure.

. Gasi nung.

Ake.

Haremke, common.

. Harem. No sign.

Agware or Akegware.

je caenies gware,

. Akedi. Haremdi.

Akeding.

* | Haremke ding.

Conjunct. Disjunct.

Ysi gware or Isike gware. A.

Tsike la,

om wo DH

See Ee

Gasi manthi.

1858.

; Ake la.

Z \ Haremke la,

Ake lang.

* | Haremke lang.

Hee taure,

Haremke taure.

Harem nung.

Harem manthi.

Harem mi.

Apumdi.

10.

on,

12.

pp Haremke pumdi.

Dual.

1. Harem dausi.

Conjunct, Disjunct.

{ash Asike.

Harem dausike, common.

Harem dausi. No sign.

Asi gware or Asike gware.

Harem dausike gware.

Asike di. Harem dausike di.

. Asike la.

. Asike lang.

. Asi taure. Harem dausike taure,

. Harem dausi nung.

. Harem dausi manthi,

. Harem dausi mi,

13 Asi pumdi.

* (Harem dausike pumdi.

Plural.

1, Harem dau.

| Conjunct,

Harem. dausike la.

—_

wo =—

Disjunct.

Anike,

Harem dauke, common,

- Harem dau. No sign.

Ani gware. Anike gware,

Harem dauke gware.

Ani.

Harem dauke di.

Harem dauke ding.

Harem dauke la.

Harem dauke lang,

5, Anike di.

6. Anike ding.

7. Anike la,

8. Anike lang.

9. Anike taure.

10. Harem dau nung.

11. Harem dau manthi.

12. Harem dau mi.

13 Ani pumdi,

* | Harem dauke pumdi.

Near demonstrative.

~ 1. Yam* (all genders).

2 JS Conjunct Disjunct.

* LYamke. Yamke meke.

3. Yam. No sign.

This

. Asike ding. Harem dausike ding,

Harem dausike lang.

Harem dauke taure.

Béhing Vocabulary.

4, Yamke gware or Yam gware,

5. Yam di.

6. Yam ding.

7. Yamke la, Yam la.

8. Yamke lang. Yam lang.

9. Yamke taure. Yam taure.

10.°Yam nung.

11. Yam manthi.

12. Yam mi.

13. Yamke pumdi.

Dual.

1. Yam dausi.

Yam dausike.

; { Conj. and Disj.

3. Yam dausi. No sign.

4. Yam dausike gware.

5. Yam dausi di.

6. Yam dausi ding.

7. Yam dausike la.

8. Yam dausike lang.

9. Yam dausike taure,

10. Yam dausi nung.

11. Yam dausi manthi.

12. Yam dausi mi.

13. Yam dausike pumdi.

Plural.

1. Yam dau.

Yam dauke.

* (Conj. and disj.

3. Yam dau. No sign.

Yam dau gware.

4. ‘V-Yam dauke gware.

5. Yam dau di.

6. Yam dau ding.

7. Yam dau (ke) la.

8, Yam dau (ke) lang.

9. Yam dauke taure.

10. Yam dau nung.

11. Yam dau manthi,

12. Yam dau mi.

13. Yam dauke pumdi.

Remote Demonstrative.

. Myamf (all genders).

Myamke, con].

Myamk meke, dis}.

Myam. No sign.

Myamke gware.

Myam di.

Myam ding.

Myamke la.

. Myamke lang.

ON OTR op

* Yam or yem and so Myam or myem. All vowel sounds are extremely vague.

G-yem, the relative, is evidently a derivative of yem.

_ + Myam or Myem.

38F 2

396

9. Myamke taure.

10. Myam nung.

11. Myam manthi,

12. Myam mi.

13, Myamke pumdi.

Dual.

]. Myam dausi.

Myam dausike.

* \Conj. and disj. &c. like singular.

Plural.

1. Myam dau.

9 Myam dauke.

* | Conj. and disj. &c. ut supra.

Interrogative and Distributive.

Who? What person? Any one: m.

and f. Substantival-and adjectival.*

1, Sa.

Suke.

2. | ons and disj. or

Sukemeke, disj.

3. Su. No sign.

4. Su gware.

5. Su di.

6. Su ding.

7. Sula. Sukela.

8. Sulang. Suke lang.

9. Sutaure. Suke taure.

. Su nung.

. Su manthi.

. Su mi.

Su a pumdi.

aS | Suke pumdi.

Dual.

1. Su dausi.

2. Su dausike, &c.

Plural.

1. Su dau.

2. Su dauke, &c.

Interrogative and Distributive Neuter.

What? What thing? Any thing :f

Substantival and adjectival.

1. Mara.

2, Marake, &c.

Dual,

1. Mara dausi.

2. Mara dausike, &c.

Plural,

1. Mara dau.

2. Mara dauke, &c.

@ Equal kon and koi.

Bahing Vocabulary.

Hindi and Urdu.

[No. 5.

Relative of all genders.

He, she, who; that, which: substan-

tival and adjectival.{

1. Gyem.

2. Gyemke.

Dual.

Gyem dausi.

2. Gyem dausike, &c.

Plural,

1, Gyem dau.

2. Gyem dauke.

Refiective.

. Daubo or Dwabo.

. Dwabo ke.

. Dwabo. No sign.

. Dwabo gware.

Dwabo di.

. Dwabo ding.

- Dwabo la.

. Dwabo lang.

. Dwabo taure,

. Dwabo nung.

. Dwabo manthi,

. Dwabo mi.

. Dwabo pumdi.

Dual and plural as before.

So also are declined Hwappe or Haup-

pe —all and every ; Gisko = how many ;

and as many; Metti—so many; Dhé

kono = many and much; Dékho=a

few, a little; Gisko = whoever and

whatever; Kwangname = other, another;

Myem = the same (see that); Nimpho

= both; and in a word, all primitive or

personal pronouns. Possessive pronouns

are formed from the genitives, except in

the case of the 3 leading pronouns.

I, thou, he or she or it, each of these

has two distinct forms quite separate

from the personals—thus go has wa=

mei and meus, in English, of me and

my; and wake = English mine, So

also ga, the 2nd pronoun has i and ike,

and harem the 3rd has 4and ake. The

first of these two possessive or genitival

forms are pronominal adjectives or ra-

ther adjuncts of nouns and verbs (and

adverbs also) by prefix and suffix respec-

tively. The second are pronouns pro-

Self.

Co CTS Or OO Nw

+ Equal kya and kuech.

+ Equal jén and jé. The correlative is Myam =Tén and T6. It is rarely

used because of the relative character of the participles.

1858.]

per, like mine. thine, in English.* The

former are indeclinable; the latter, are

declinable, like all other proper posses-

sives, though with some confusion ori-

ginating in the imperfect development

of the inflective element, its frequent

coincidence with the genitive sign, and

the variableness of that sign.

However, the case signs generally and

their mode of annexation being uniform,

out of this essentially one declension order

is obtained, despite the disturbing causes

adverted to. I give here as a sample of

the possessives.

Dauboke = own.

1. Dauboke.

Caret P

Dwabokeke.f

3. Dauboke.

4. Dauboke gware,

5. Dauboke di.

6. Dauboke ding.

7. Dauboke la.

8. Dauboke lang,

9. Dauboke taure.

Dauboke nung.

Dauboke manthi.

Dauboke mi.

13. fDauboke pumdi or Daubo 4

lL pumdi.

Daubo = ap; dauboke = apna. Ap-

naka can only be separately expressed

by the cacophonous iteration of the

guttural. Nor is this defect remedied

by the use of the conjunct pronouns,

wa, i, 4; for wadwabo myself gives

wadwaboke, of myself and my own;

and idw4bo, thyself gives idwaboke of

thyself or thy own, See more on the

genitive in the sequel.

Béhing Vocabulary.

397

IIl.— Declension of Nouns.

1st.—Substantives proper.

Wainsa, a man, m.

1. Wainsa.

9 Wainsake, disjunct, or

; le A, conjunct.

3. Wainsa. No sign.

Wainsa gware or

* Wainsa 4 gware.

5. Wainsa di.

. Wainsa ding.

Wainsa la.

Wainsa lang.

. Wainsa a taure.

Wainsa nung.

Wainsa manthi,

Wainsa mi.

Wainsa a pumdi.

. Dual.

1. Wainsa dausi.

Wainsa dausike, disjunct.

{ Wainsa asi, conjunct.

3. Wainsa dausi.

i f Wainsa dausike gware.

* 2 Wainsa daufi asi gware.

5. Wainsa dausi di.

6. Wainsa dausi ding.

7. Wainsa dausi la.

8. Wainsa dausi lang.

Wainsa dausike taure,

Wainsa dausi asi taure.

Wainsa dausi nung,

Wainsa dausi manthi.

Wainsa dausi mi.

Wainsa dausi asi pumdi.

Plural,

1. Wainsa dau.

9. { Wainsa dauke, disjunct.

Wainsa dau ani,{ conjunct.

3. Wainsa dau. No sign.

* The formation of these from the my, thy, series by the addition of ‘‘ki’’ or

y ke” is quite Turkic. Wa= my, wa-ke = mine. So Turki Benim = my,

benim-ki = mine. Only Bahing uses the conjunct form merely (quasi im, imki)

of the pronoun which in that tongue moreover is a prefix, in Turki an affix,

of nouns,

+ Compare uskaka in Hindi and Urdu.

, Pie. pee ° e . . :

} A, asi and ani are the conjunct forms attaching to nominative which follows

genitive, thus Wainsa dau ani ming, or wainsa dauke ani ming =the wife of

several men, literally men (of) their wife or woman, The use of the same form in

the next case proves gware to be a substantive used as a preposition, like biitar in

Hindi: ani gware = their interior.

398

Wainsa dauke gware.

* UWainsa dau ani gware.

5. Wainsa dau di,

6. Wainsa dau ding.

7. Wainsa dau la.

8. Wainsa dau lang.

J Wainsa dau ke taure or

* UWainsa dau dni taure.

10. Wainsa dau nung.

11. Wainsa dau manthi.

12. Wainsa dau mi.

43. Wainsa dau ani pumdi,

So also is declined Mincha, a woman,

and ming a wife, and all feminine nouns,

Declension of a Neuter.

Substantive.

Grokso, a thing,

1. Grokso,

Groksoke, disjunct.

Grokso-a, conjunct.

- Grokso.

. Grokso 4 gware.

Grokso di.

Grokso ding.

Grokso la.

. Grokso lang.

Grokso a taure.

. Grokso nung.

Grokso manthi.

12. Grokso mi.

13. Grokso a pumdi.

Duai.

1. Grokso dausi.

Grokso dausike, disjunct.

* \Grokso dausi asi, conjunct.

3. Grokso dausi, &c.

Plural,

1. Grokso dau.

9 eee dauke or

* UGrokso dau ani, &e.

It results from the above that there is

but one declension; that gender has no

grammatical expression ; that number,

like case, is expressed by separate post-

positions, number going first; that all

nouns and pronouns take the signs of

number, neuters as well as others; that

some of the signs of case are still signi-

ficant (gware the interior; taure, the

top; pum, the side); that ke is the

general genitive sign, but rarely used

save when the noun stands alone, as in

Biéhing Vocabulary.

[No. 5.

reply to a question, thus, whose ?—the

man’s, is suke, wainsake ; that when two

substantives come together, the former

is the genitive and has properly no sign

(no qualitive ever has), though the “ ke”

be sometimes superadded to the special

denotator which is 4, the 3rd pronoun

(his, her, its), or dim whose sense is, in

of. Dim expresses a relation of locality

or inness (what is contained) ; 4, almost

all other sorts of relation. Dim is used

conjunctively and disjunctively, as, of

where the tooth? gyelame khleu: of

the mouth, sheddim. Both precede the

second substantive or nominative—thus

wainsa 4 ning = the man’s name; grok-

so 4 syanda = the thing’s sound; ra

dim khan = vegetables of the garden;

bazar dim shéri = bazar rice or rice of

the bazar; pu dim pwaku, water of the

cup, so that this latter may be called

the general way of expressing the rela-

tion of two substantives which are both

named—the former the general way of

expressing relation when the qualitive

noun only is named, for genitives are all

qualitives, e. g. singke = wooden; ram-

ke = bodily; lastly, that pronouns and

nouns are declined throughout and in

all respects in the same way; there

being no difference whatever between

them. As to the genitive relation it

should be further noted that the first of

two substantives is by position alone a

genitive; that very close connexion and

dependance is expressed by 4, e. g, the

calf of the cow, gai 4 tami; that “ke”

can be used with a, as wainsake 4 ning,

the man’s his name; that where ke is

formative, as singke, = wooden, from

sing, wood, its conjunctive use is indis-

pensable like that of the ba and na, the

participial formatives; thus syelke bé-

tho, the iron blade ;* neuba muryu, the

or a good man (properly, the man who

is good) from syel= iron (subs.) and

neu, to be good. Observe further that

the topical sign di, both asks and ans

swers, as, ru dim khan, garden vege-

tables; and, of where? the garden’s

gyélam (or gyélame), radim.

In this latter instance we may observe

* Observe that the iron of the blade is bétho a syel or betho ke syel.

But the

point or haft of the blade is necessarily bétho 4 juju and betho a rising.

1858.]

that, gyéla being where, the final m or

me of gyélam, gyélame, has, in respect

of adverbs, a genitival force and so in

di-m, of in; and in qualitives we con-

stantly find a similar termination (bu-

bum = white; lalam = red ; Kwagname

= other &c.), so that the m final is

shown to be generally possessive; and

more especially as its iteration (bubu-

mme = the white one; lala-mme — the

red one; kwag-namme = the other one)

expresses the disjunct form of the same

relation. Thus, which one will you have ?

the red one or the green, Agyeme blavi,

Jalamme ki gigimme, a sample wherein

the possessive a is welded to the relative

pronoun, gyem. By turning to the

participles it will be seen that all those

which have not a sign of their own (ba or

Bahing Vocabulary.

399

na)are made participles by the annexation

of the m or me particle. This is in fact

the general attributive affix, and its

suffixture transforms all qualitives (in-

cluding adverbs) into substantives or

words used substantivally, like the hma

gu affix of Newari and like also the

Dravirian van, val, which seem to me to

be the unquestionable prototypes of the

Prakritic, wan, wal, war, (Gaon-war,

Sheto-wala, Gari wan. Marne wala, &c.)

I subjoin a few comparative samples

drawn from Bahing and Newari, which

will also show that nearly any word in

these tongues can be used substantivally,

and that all qualitives, in particular, can

by the appropriate affix be made sub-

stantival, e. g. singke, wooden; sing-

keme, the wooden one.

[No. 5.

Béhing Vocabulary.

400

“a ‘n$-efoyg i } *y ‘oursmim eyoayiaig auo (Zu1aq) pueyq ry sy, “CT

"7 “17em ququrg \

F 5 ‘u “UL ce PI

"aT ‘J ua ‘euty-eAo4 ‘J ‘ouvumiu eqoaydayq Suleq) pue[Moy oq, *

“ul ‘wl ‘eye yeqirg J ‘u ‘n8-eh1qoy 1 isa Pan Dae ipaade euo (Su1eq) pur|

*y ‘IRM SOqpe yy ‘PI *y ‘on feuy-ehiqoy f *y SQuUIBUUIU aesUle UO JUI[NVSBU OT, “ET

‘Ul ° WU ‘ey eM Soupe iq Ul doe nee CL = ‘wl ‘UI-OWRSUTE AA :

es Sue peny \ él “yun Sewuy-eASueliyy °J SOUBUIIU OYYRSule A QUO oHI[ULU OUT, °SL

‘ul ‘ele BUBPle py . ab ar a ‘ZI ZA “UW ‘QUI-OUBSUIE AY : %

J “TTR esprle fy ‘sl yu ‘guy-nssuelipy i Conia eqtg \ ‘ eS 7

“ou ‘eyeM BSpleyy a 3B oaN TI ‘u ‘on ‘aml-eqrg fSuimos ay} ‘iem09 ayy,

"y ‘Tea OU ‘II “7 ‘un Se UY-O.M -y guemu Buy guo s.devp-0} ayy, ‘OT

°u “UU mie a *u ‘n3-eAtn a ‘OL ‘Uu °C ‘ou-Buy

Fee OV | oe "yw Semy-ehinm eyy, * ‘QuIVUNIU aya | Quo a19q} SUT, °6

"U “Ul “BTR fy ° nee 6 ‘uu ‘Qut-aaI J

"J ‘ie ued) 6 +5 ut ‘emmy -vheuy +) ‘QuIvUMU aX 9uo d10q OUT, “8

‘ua ‘eye UeU “u dara 9 “uur “au-ayq

*y Sum et 9g *y wl ‘euy-eheueyy, *y ‘omewiIU BYJON amo 1ojeysod oy, *Z

‘u "tw ‘ejem UBT ul es 7) ‘uw ‘QUL-BJON

i emit eyo y) *y on Semy-eAediry "7 ‘QuIBULLU eT[eUL) QUO IOLIgjUe OUT, “9

"UH “Ul “eye ead Ul ng-ehedeyn | 9 “Ul UU ‘oum-ejeun)

ap ey } “e *y wa ‘evi -eAedeyn J *y ‘QUIBUMIG 9YSUIG ou0 Uspoom ayy, °¢

Hm ‘elem a5Y “u eee "g ‘UO “tw *aul-aySuIg

AS WEL ao “yun ‘ecay-eAurg ‘u ‘am-oyodnay, SOHLIS VY PU IO U0

‘UW REM [VY u ees *y ‘oumemu eqdnay, suiyuys OUT, AeYWS oyy, “Pp

“SOMES EUS es # yun ‘au-eqdnag, J OUP

v *y Ul ‘omy-eq f 4 ‘QuIBUNLU ehyeky yorlq on, “S

‘a *ol ‘ere oUINYy 1t ee ‘ ‘um ‘our-esyekyy .

See eM | ‘yur ‘eumy-nyehy *j ‘QUIVULID OB AA guo Aut 10 OUI ‘Z

UO UN ‘BBM BLY ‘u ane % *u ‘Ul ‘QUI-O4" AA

“7 URAL LO PA] \ Z “J ur ‘euY-I¢ +; “gueuiu SuOM yy ono ONT, ‘TL

*U “WW ‘RBM Blo] ul ‘nS-eyqg | T : J “wl ‘gu-Sa0m yf Se

‘jaing } aL “yun ‘vuq-eyyy f

mee

SS a

Foe

ees oe

huryog "y si Ou

*pUreT “E49MONT '

‘a ‘ns-eXeyoomnyog

. ‘J ‘wl ‘euy-efeyoomnyog

Le ‘a ‘ns-eAeyorp

“J cur ‘eury-eAvyorp

‘u ‘ns-eAeumysuolediy7

‘J Wea ome

“tm “e[Ba OUIsg

‘J ‘Te peuegq

"mr “elem pee

‘J “eye ynueyg

401

*g ‘omayiun fokcy S,MBI-Ul-1dyySnep oy,

‘ta ‘am-ayeyo jog §,MB[-UI-UOS OUT, “LZ

oa,

‘J ‘OWOyewiu eyorry

"ul ‘eyeyea eae ‘96 “J UO Pe eee: ‘98 "or “aut-ayeyory 9, OR og 24d, “98

“J ‘oe wINngng

‘J ‘yea nays C , ‘u ‘ns-ndog, J , ‘u ‘um ‘a-uiNngng oo

UO ‘eTeM O39 a6 ‘Tw “eug-nso a6 IO *} ‘aur-emSuol nan 9U0 YM OUT, Cs

I 24S J l iL J at Sirs

"md ‘out-edyof nqng

"7 ‘IPB (99 ‘u ‘ns-Sul ‘J fouvulu-eand

"u ante aot TG yu qameaats VE i "uw ae eua pods ong “¥2

: ‘J Tem jesurp) , ‘a ‘nd-vdting ] , *y ‘omMeUU eee :

= uu Seem ere &@ ‘J ta ‘emy-ehting &@ “tl ‘ud “aua-vyoRteqeg Su) PIA eu “82

Ss Fem 1eyg oe ‘ul ‘ns-eftiayyg 127 "J ‘owvunu eqoutyqy 9U0 O1SeMOp oF,

mS UU SereMAeyD “J ‘ud ‘emy-ekaoyyg ‘ta ‘aur-eyowmidyy 9u0 ployasnoy ey J, “Zz

S ee eyOUT TZ ‘u ‘ng-ehueg "1g u out-mippedp Byoney (su1q}) au0 URjaqIy, *1z

‘J jem you *y ‘oWeUIIU BYyona

IS 7 ean ee \ 0% ‘Jou “euy-ekurg "og J va See (Suteq) 9u0 ueyoqiy, syy, ‘oz

is oy 6 o7 € = N oy 6 es

S J Wea iypng ¢ , J Buy igh |, J ‘Oul-1UBUy) :

S “eyeA eupng ] 61 ul eaetpalc 61 ‘or ‘auemBNy suo plo OUT, “GT

c "J “Tem uvdig | , aN 2g ieee ‘J SOU-1MOTeMS F

a "wm ‘erem uviig 81 ‘ml Semy-voyote (ry 8t "Ut ‘9Ul-eYOOTePMg i Sue AIAPe SAL “ST

‘y yes yWoy9) , ns vyoeyooyy ) , ‘J ‘ouRMIU BuORgeg :

"U “UU “eTeM BOND i aT *eUY-eyoRyooyy At "ud ‘ata-eyoRgag ono Auk ang.“ 2f

‘J ‘oW-vUsuOsmMIy

°F TBM Japung *u ‘né-v[sueg ( “ua ‘aut-edyosmiy

"ta *ejem dapung ‘OT 4 "Ur ‘emy-e[sueg ‘OT * 30 'y ‘oumemu vqury suo sWOSpuLY aT, “OT

*u “om ‘ou-equaIy

pe) "ypurey "upMa Ay “buypg "ysy bug

3 Gg

4.02 Bihing Vocabulary. [ No. 5.

Remark.—The above list affords, it will be seen, collateral information as to the

formation of gender in qualitives used substantivally. It also shows that the

formative suffix cha is apt to be equivalent for the suffix, me, m; and as cha still

leaves a substantival word (e. g. Khyim-cha = householder ; Li-cha = bowman)

the genitival sign ke is often introduced before final me, to express possessiveness, as,

whose bow is that? the bowman’s, suke li, lichakeme. But Licha being bowman,

lichame may be used for bowman’s. Newari avoids all vagueness by its hma and

gu signs, repeated to ties quoties with the genitive sign ya, e. g. Ji-hma, mine,

m. and f, Ji-gu, mine, n. Ji hma ya hma, Ji hma ya gu, Ji hma ya hma ya, Ji hma

ya gu ya, Ji guya hma ya, Ji gu ya gu ya, &c. express any number of variations

in the possession of beings and things: and so also in all qualitives used substan-

tivally, thus, toyu hma ya hma, the white man’s animal, toyu hma ya gu, the white

man’s thing, toyu hma ya gu ya, of the white man’s thing, &c. Compare Bahing

khyim-cha-me with Newari Chhen-ya-hma and it will be seen that cha = ya has

a quasi adjectival force though khyimcha mean house-holder. Such vagueness

is normal.

CLASSIFICATION OF BanING VERBS.

I.—Transitives in “wo.” Infinitive Bla-cho, to take. Imperative blawo, take it.

Indicative active, Sing. number. Indicative passive, Sing.number, Causal im-

Present. Preterite. Present. Preterite. perative.

1. Bla-gna. 1. Blaptong. 1. Blayi (i). 1. Blati. Bla-pato, tr.

2. Blayi (i). 2. Blapteu. 2. Blaye “e). 2. Blate. Bla paso, r.

3. Blawa. 3. Blapta. 3. Blawa. 3. Blata. Bla-payi, p.*

Thus are conjugated Méwo, to vomit. Cheuwo, to grill. Giwo, to give. Séwo,

to saw. Chwewo, to burn corpse Brawo, to scatter. Tawo, to get or find,

Jawo and Bawo, to eat. Khi-wo, to quarrel with. Ku-wo, to steal. Kiwo, to

cook. Pa-wo,todo. lLeu-wo, to kiss (coitus). Si-wo, to seize. Té-wo, to spit

on. M6-wo, to fight. W0dipa-wo, to assay and all compounds of like kind, i, e.

of a noun and the verb to do or make.

Intransitives in “wo.” Infinitive Picho, to come. Imperative Pi-wo, come.

1. Pi-gna. ' Pi-ti. 5 : Pi-pato, tr.

2, Pi-yé (e). Pi-té. 55 € Pi-paso, ref.

3. Pi. Pi-ta. _ <p Pi-payi, pas.

Thus are conjugated Ra-wo, to come. Glewo, to be hot. Hdé-wo, to be lighted.

K4-wo, to be bitter. La-wo and Di-wo, to go. Ki-wo, to come up (slope).

Yi-wo, to come down (slope). Khi-wo, to tremble. Neu-wo, to be good.

Deu-wo, to be reconciled. Shéo-wo, to decrease or decay. Syé neuwo, to be fat.

Bhlti-wo, to slip or slide down. Shi-wo, toitch. Ji-wo, to be ripe, &c.

II.—Transitives in ‘‘ gno.” Infinitive Kw6-cho, to see. Imperative Kwogno, see if,

1. Kwoé-gni. Kwo-tong. 1. Kwo-yi (i). Kw6-ti. Kwo-pa-to, tr.

2. Kwo-gni. Kwé-t-eu. 2. Kwoé-gné (é). Kwé-té. | Kwo-pa-so refl. or

middle.

3. Kw. Kwé-ta. 3. Kw6. Kw6-ta. Kwo-pa-yi, pas.

* The causal forms are the same throughout; pato, following the mutable tran-

sitives in “to;” paso, all intransitives whatever in ‘so; ’’? and payi (pa-i) all

possessives in i. yi for euphony.

This classification rests on the Indicative singular. The infinitive and imper-

ative and causal are given chiefly as clues to the root and to the euphonic changes.

The form of the classification is throughout the same, 1, 2, 3 refer to the three

persons.

1858. | Bahing Vocabulary. 403

Thus are conjugated sé-gno, to tell. Lé-gno, to sell. Tii-gno, to drink (water).

Chéd-gno, to cultivate and to pay debt. Phli-gno, to send, &c. :

- Infinitive, Glwau-cho, to win. Imperative, Glwau-

Intransitives in ‘“‘ gno.”’

gno, win.

Indicative active, sing.number. Indicative passive, sing. number, Causal.

Present. Preterite. Present. Preterite, Imperative.

1. Glwau-gna. Glwau-ti. - ot Glwau-pa-to, tr.

2. Glwau-gne. Glwau-te. sa a Glwau-pa-so, refl ,

3. Glwau. Glwau-ta. A ms Glwau-pa-yi, pas.

Thus are conjugated Ri-gno, to be filled (belly) or satisfied. Lé-gno, to return,

Wo-gno, to enter. Glu-gno, to issue. Ming-gno, to be ripe. Bro-gno, to be

flavoursome.

T1I.—Transitives in ko.” Infinitive, Pok-cho, to make get up, or raise (not

lift). Imperative, Pokko, raise him.

1. Pé-giu. Pok-téng. 1. Péng-yi?(i). Pok-ti. Pong-pato.

2. Pod-gi. P6k-teu. 2, Pong-ye. Poék-te. Pong-paso. | utsu-

Po6-nyé. pra.

3. Po-ga. Pok-ta. 3. Pd-ga. P6k-ta. Pong-payi.

Thus are conjugated Tuk-ko, to lick. Chuk-ko, to bind. Rik-ko, to reap,

Kik-ko, to beget. Hik-ko, tocount. Ku-ko, to crooken. Yok-ko, to share out.

Prwak-ko, to unknot. Nok-ko, to rub. Tok-kon, to make fall. Hok-ko, to open.

Jik-ko, to break. Pwak-ko vel Pukko, to burst. Ryak-ko, to write or colour.

Jak-ko, to know. Khryak-ko, to enrage and to revile. Rik-ko, to reap, Kok-ko,

to dig. Ruk-ko, to eradicate. Tyak-ko, to hinder. Wok-ko, to flay. Khlyak-ko,

to plaster. Phwak-ko, to separate. Chyak-ko, to divide. Pik-ko, to pour or put

in. Dwak-ko, to swallow.

N. B.—The double k is doubtful.

Intransitives in “ko.’’ Infinitive, Bok-cho, to get up. Imperative, Bok-ko,

get up.

1. Bong-gna. Bok-ti. oy ra Bong-pa-to ie

2. Bong-gne, nye. Bok-te. ee “ Bong-pa-so

3. Bong. Boék-ta. + a Bong-pa-yi sla

Thus are conjugated Gruk-ko, to be quick. Jwak-ko, to arrive. Jik-ko, to be

broken, (n and a). Buk-ko, to be burst, Bwak-ko, to remain and to speak.

Gii-ko, to be crooked. Phok-ko, to be sour. Gwak-ko, to walk. Duk-ko, to

move or shake. Prok-ko, to jump, or leap. Byak-ko, to die. Gik-ko, to be

born. Gnwak-ko, to weep. Dwak-ko, to desire, Dok-ko, to fall from aloft (being

only). Here again the double k is doubtful, e. g. Déko or Dokko: et sic deccet.

IV.—Transitives in ‘‘ro.” Infinitive, Phyér-cho, to sew. Imperative, Phér-ro,

sew it.

1. Phyér-a, Phyér-tong. 1. Phyér-yi (i). Phyér-ti. Phyér-pato t

2. Phyér-i, Phyér-t-eu. 2. Phyér-e. Phyér-te, Phyér-paso ba

8. Phyér. Phyér-ta. 3. Phyér. Phyér-ta.. | Phyer-payi J SUPT

Thus are conjugated Chwarro, to cut. Kurro, to carry, Tyarro, to suffer,

endure. Khwarro, to shave or scrape or scratch (violently). N. B.—TIterate final

“r’’ is doubtful.

Intransitives in “ ro.’’

Infinitive, Byar-cho, to fly. Imperative, Byarro, fly.

| 1 Byar-gna. Byar-t-i. A a Byar-pato t

2. Byar-é. Byar-t-e. hs - Byar-paso

3. Byar. Byar-t-a. es % Byar-payi aa Aah

Thus are conjugated Barro, to increase. Chydrro, to shine, as sun, &c.

oG2

404 Bahing Vocabulary. [No. 5.

V.—Transitives in “lo.” Infinitive, Jyul-cho, to place. Imperative, Jyullo,

place it.

Indicative active, sing. number. Indicative passive, sing. number. Causal.

Present. Preterite. Present. Preterite. Imperative.

1. Jyul-u. Jyul-tong, 1, Jyul-yi. Jyul-ti. Jyul-pato a

2. Jyul-i. Jyul-teu. 2. Jyul-e. Jyul-te. Tyr f eS 5

3. Jyul. J yul-ta. 3. Jyul. Jyul-ta. Jyul-payi ee

Thus are conjugated Syallo, to snatch away. Theullo, to cherish. Yallo, to

rub. Limo challo, to tell lies. N. 5.—The iterate final consonant again doubtful.

Intransitives in “lo.’ Infinitive, Bal-cho, to be tired. Imperative, Ballo,

be tired.

1. Bal-gna. Bal-ti. “4 My Bal-pato He

2. Bal-e. Bal-te. 5 tn Bal-paso aren

3. Bal. Bal-ta. - 3 Bal-payi is

Thus are conjugated Hyallo, to be heavy, &c.

ViI.—Transitives in ‘‘ po.’’? Infinitive, Teup-cho, to beat. Imperative, Teuppo,

beat him.

1. Teub-u. Teup-tong. 1. Teum-yi (i). Teup-ti. Teum-pato sit

2. Teub-i, Teup-teu. 2. Teum-é. Teup-te. Teum-paso Ae

3. Teub-a. Teup-ta, 3. Teub-a. Teup-ta. Teum-payi Jing

Thus are conjugated Gup-po, to lift (a light thing). Bippo, to suck. Syappo,

to wash and sharpen. Khuppo, to collect. Jyappo, to buy. Thappo, to

weigh. Chappo, to can it, to be able for any work. Nippo, to express. Appo,

to shoot. N. B.—The iterate consonant doubtful.

Intransitives in ‘‘ po.” Infinitive Rap-cho, to stand. Imperative, Rappo,

stand up.

1. Ram-gna. = Rap-ti. . “s Ram-pato oe

2. Ram-é. . Rap-te. x ue Ram-paso

3. Ram. Rap-ta. nis iF Ram | a:

Thus are conjugated Ippo, to sleep. Ryippo, to be ended or to end, n. Dhap-

po, to shine as sun. Deuppo, to be combust. Jippo, to be rotten, &e.

VII.—Transitives in ‘‘ mo.” Infinitive, Lam-cho, to search. Imperative, Lam-

mo, search for it.

1. Lam-u, Lam-tong. 1. Lam-yi (i). Lam-ti. Lam-pato} |,

2. Lam-i. Lam-teu, 2. Lam-e. Lam-te. Lam-paso | _

3. Lam. Lam-ta. 3. Lam. Lam-ta. _Lam-payi | SUPT

Thus are conjugated Nam-mo, to smell. Theum-mo, to finish or cause to be-

come. Khleummo, to transplant. Phemmo, to take in one’s arms. Sheummo,

to cover. Thimmo, to bury. ammo, to spread. Here again the iterate conso-

nant is doubtful. This conjugation agrees with IV. and V. See remark at VIII.

Intransitives in “mo.” Infinitive, Dyum-cho, to become. Imperative, Dyum-

mo, become.

1. Dyum-gna. Dyum-ti. ” 5 Dyum-pato sf

2. Dyum-é. Dyum-te. 9 29 Dyum-paso ¢ ota

3. Dyum. Dyumta. ” a Dyum-payi a

Thus are conjugated Rimmo, to be handsome. Dyammo, to be full. Hammo,

to be light (levis), Khummo, to stoop. Ryammo, to be emaciated, or thin.

N. B.—Donbie consonant doubtful.

VIII.—Transitives in “no.” Infinitive, Pun-cho, to beg. Imperative, Pun-no,

beg it.

1. Pun-u. Pun-tong. 1. Pun-yi. Pun-ti. Pun-pato sie

2, Pun-i. Pon-teu. 2. Eun-€. Pun-te. Pun-paso ae

3. Pun. Pun-ta. 3. Pun. Pun-ta. Pun-payi ms

1858. | Baéhing Vocabulary. 405

Thus are conjugated Ninno, to hear. Plenno, to release or set at liberty. Sale-

panno, to spin, &c.

N. B.—This agrees with the last. Hence LV. V. VII. VIII. are one, and it

seems likely that the common imperative sign should be ‘‘ 0,” however near that

be to “wo” or the sign of the very different first conjugation. The four specified

agree moreover in not being subject to any euphonic changes in conjugation. They

might be unitized as transitives in a liquid or nasal.

Intransitives in ‘‘no’’ Infinitive, Wan-cho, to run. Imperative, Wan-no, run.

Indicative active, sing. number. Indicative passive, sing. number. Causal.

Present. Preterite, Present. Preterite. Imperative,

1. Wan-gna, Wan-ti. 9 ‘5 Wan-pato ae

2. Wan-é, Wan-te. 3 5 Wan-paso > ora

3. Wan. Wan-ta. oF 95 Wan-payi ain

Thus are conjugated Blenno, to live, &c. IN. B.—Here as before, the doubling

of the consonant is doubtful.

IX.—Transitives in “to.” Infinitive Brécho, to summon. Imperative, Bré-to,

summon him.

1. Brét-u. Bréttong. 1. Brét-i. Brétti. Bré-pato ae

2. Brét-i. Brétteu. 2. Brét-e. Brétte. Bré-paso ee

3. Brét-a, Brétta. 3. Brét-a. Brétta. Bre-payi nS

So are conjugated Rito, to laugh at. Dato, to catch. Nito, to set down.

Khleuto, to conceal, Neuto, to make good. Mla-to, to blow (breath). Khtto,

to touch. Gruak-to, to quicken. Bi-to, to obey. Rok-to, to lift. Dwak-to, to

approve. Khryapto, to kindle. Rik-to, to contain. Gap-to, to add to. Duk-to,

to shake it or cause to shake. Grepto, to throw. Dapto, to taste. Nyapto, to

shove. Mimto, toremember. Blato, to dry at fire. Jito, to wet. Chamto, to

amuse. Teuto, to know. Yokto, to remove. Le-to, to teke back. Syanto, to

recognise. Hanto, to cheat. Jato, to stop, detain. Jhlamto, to spoil. Lwakto,

to put upon, Bapto, to scratch for ease. Plepto, to fold. Timto, to squeeze.

Lipto, to turn over. N.B,—Those which have a consonant before the sign, as

Rok-to, Dap-to, Dwak-to, Cham-to, Han-to and Khlam-to, &c. do not double the

“+” in the preterite of either voice ; and consequently, in the passive, there is no

mark of the distinction of time, e. g. Dapti, is I am tasted and I was tasted ;*

and, again, Daptu is I taste, Daptong, I tasted, but Dapta, is he tastes or he

tasted—the last, however, is a general trait.

X.—Transitives in ‘‘ to” which change the ‘‘t” into “d,.” Infinitive, Sa-cho, to

kill. Imperative, S4-to, kill him.

1. Sad-u. Satong. 1. Sayi. Sati. Sa-pato we

2. Sad-i, Sateu. 2. Sane. Sate. _ Sa-paso vee

3. Sdd-a. Sata. 3. Sada. Sata. Sa-payi ee

Thus are conjugated W4-to, abandon or leave. Ta-to, to kick. ‘Yéto, to split,

Uto, to fell. La-to, to take away. Pato, to do for another. Kra-to, to bite.

K1é6-to, to undress. M6to, to tell. Chito, to tear. Pito, to bring. Kd-to, to

bring up. Limléto, to feel. Yu-to, to bring down. Ja-to, to make steady or

firm. Phi-to, to sow. Nato and Préto, to gather. Pha-to, to exchange. Kuhri-to,

to grind. H6-to, to pierce. Hé-to, to distil.

* In such cases the sense is determined by the use of the separate prefixed

pronouns in the instrumental and objective respectively. Difference of time by

an adverb.

4.06 Béhing Vocabulary. [No. 5.

Intransitives in “to.” Infinitive, Gni-cho, to be afraid. Imperative, Gni-to,

be afraid.

Indicative active, sing. number. Indicative passive, sing. number. Causal.

Present. Preterite. Present. Preterite. Imperative.

1, Gni-gna. Gni-ti. a5 Pe Gni-pato ae

2. Gni-ne. Gni-te. PY A Gni-paso & ira #

3. Gni. Gni-ta. is Gni-payi si

So are conjugated Ji-to, to be torn. Kha-to, to be in pain. U-to, to fall (on

ground). Shed-to, to lose. Lé-to, to return. Jyukokato, to flee. Héto, to be

sharp. Bré-to, to vociferate.

XI.—Neuters in “to.’’ Infinitive, Bo-cho, to flower. Imperative, Bo-to,

flower.

1. Bot-u. Botti. “ ss Bé-pato sit

2. Bot-i. Botte. - es B6-paso cents

3. Bot-a, Botta. as . Bé-payi Pee

Thus are conjugated Khito, to blow as wind. Sito, to fruit. Wamto, to sink

or set as sun. But the last gives, owing to the consonant before the sign. Wamtu,

Wamti, Wamta: Wamti, Wamte, Wamta. Infinitive, wam-cho. (See Kwado

and Sdédo). Si-to is often conjugated Sidu, Sidi, Sida; Siti, Site, Sita.

XI1I.—Transitives in ‘‘ to.’’ Infinitive, Gram-cho, to hate. Imperative, Gram-

do, hate him.

1. Gramdu. Gramtong. 1. Gramdi. Gramti. Gram-pato t

2. Gramdi. Gramteu. 2. Gramde. Gramte. | Gram-paso so

3. Gramda. Gramta, 3. Gramda. Gramta, Gram-payi i

Thus are conjugated Chyurdo, to wring. Rimdo, to expect. Chayindo or Chy-

éndo, to teach. Kwado, to put on the fire. Wando, to put or pour in. Wardo,

to throw away. Plendo, to forget. Chamdo, to divert, amuse. Glundo, to extract

or take out. Jyuldo, to place for another. Tundo, to cause to drink. Sdédo, to

tell for another. Gremdo, to roast. Heldo, to mix. But Kwado and Sddo, having

no consonant before the sign; double the t, as in IX. thus

1. Sé-du. | Sottong. 1, S6-di. Sétti. Sé-pato.

2. S6-di. Sétteu. 2. Sd-de. Sotte. S0-paso.

3. Sd-da Soétta. 3. Sd-da. Sotta. S6-payi.

N. B.—This, like Sdgno of conjugation II. makes infinitive Sdé-cho and causal

S6-pato, &c. and in fact the various modifications of the verbs by voice and in the

peculiar manner here in question (so-gno, tell; so-do, tell for another) are sadly

deficient in correspondent forms of the infinitive and participles. See on.

Intransitives in “do.” Infinitive, Myel-cho, to be sleepy. Imperative, Myel-do,

be sleepy.

1. Myeldu, Myelti. WA a Myel-pato on

2. Myeldi. Myelte. z As Myel-paso

3. Myelda. Myelta. a5 x Myel-payi J °"P"

N. B.—This nearly agrees with XI. only that the root having a final conso-

nant, the preterite ‘‘ t’” is not doubled. So are conjugated (I have found no other

verbs of this conjugation).

* Uto and Shedto, like Jikko elsewhere, are both neuter and transitive. See

them under the respective heads. Khiwo, to tremble is neuter; to quarrel is tran-

sitive. Bré-to, to cry out is neuter; Gré-to, to summon is active.

1858. | Bahing Vocabulary. 407

XIII.—Intransitives in ‘“so.’? Infinitive, Nis-cho, to sit. Imperative, Niso,

sit down.

Indicative active, sing. number. Indicative passive, sing. number. Causal

Present. Preterite. Present. Preterite. Imperative.

1. Nisi-gna. Ni-s-ti. Pes ae Nisi-pato t

2. Ni-se. Ni-s-te. a " Nisi-paso aah

3. Ni-se. Ni-s-ta. be a Nisi-payi nie

This conjugation interposes its reflex sign or ‘‘s8,” between the root and the

ordinary intransitive conjugational forms. Nearly all transitives can be conjugated

in this form as a middle voice. But it has also many primitives as will be seen by

the instances given. So also are conjugated Wa4so cacare. Charso mingere. Piso

crepitum facere. Naso, to take rest. Chyénso or Chayinso, to learn. Khleuso,

to lie hid. Syinso or Shayinso, to wake. Saso, to kill one’s seif. Teumso, to beat

one’s self. Bamso, to scratch one’s self. Riso, to laugh. Gléso, to lie down.

Chiso, to bathe. Phiso, to dress. Chamso, to play. Prénso, to begin.

CoNJUGATION OF BAHING VERBS.

I.—Paradigm of verbs transitive in “‘ wo.”

Root Ja, to eat. Imperative ja-wo.

ACTIVE VOICE.

Imperative Mood.

1, Singular of Agent. 1. Dual of Agent. 1. Plural of Agent.

Ja-wo, eat it. Ja-se, ye two eat it. Ja-ne, ye all eat it.

2. Dual of Object. 2. Dual of Object. 2. Dual of Object.

Ja-wosi, eat them two. Ja-sesi, ye two eat Ja-nési, ye all eat them two.

them two.

3. Plural of Object. 3. Plural of Object. 3. Plural of Object,

Ja-womi, eat them all. Jasemi, yetwoeatthem all. Janémi, ye all eat them all.

Negative Form.

By ma prefixed Ma ja wo, &c. and so in all the subsequent moods.

Inpicative Moop.

Present and Future Tenses.

Singular of Agent. Dual of Agent. Plural of Agent.

First Person.

Ja-sa, inclusive. Ja-ya, inclusive.

1, 4 Ja-suku, exclusive. 1. 4 Ja-ka, exclusive.

We two eat it, We all eat it.

1. ae I eat or will

eat it,

408

Dual of Object.

Ja-gna-si,

I eat them two.

Plural of Object.

3 Ja-gna-mi,

. I eat them all.

1, Ja-(y) i.

2. Ja-(y)-i-si.

3. Ja (y)-i-mi.

1. Ja-wa.

2. Ja-wa-si.

ae Ja-wa-mi.

1, Ja-tong.

2. Ja-t-6ng-si.

3. Ja-t-dng-mi.

N. B.—The intercalated n and k are devious.

1. Jap-t-eu.

2. Jap-t-eu-si.

3. Jap-t-eu-mi.

Bahing Vocabulary.

Dual of Object.

Ja-sa-si, inclusive,

9 Ja-sukusi, exclusive,

; We two eat them

two,

Plural of Object.

Ja-sa-mi, inclusive,

3 Ja-suku- mi, excl.

* We two eat them

all.

Second Person.

1. Ja-si.

2. Ja-si-si,

oe Jaesi-mi.

Third Person,

De Ja-se.

2. Ja-se-si.

3. da-se-mi,

Preterite Tense.

First Person.

1 J4-ta-sa, incl.

* | Ja.ta-siku, excl.f

Ja-ta-sa-si, incl.

° ( Ja-ta-sika-si, excl.

3 Ja-ta-sa-mi, incl.

* | Ja-ta-si-ki-mi, excl.

Second Person.

1, J4-t4-si.

2, Ja-ta-si-si.

3. J4-ta-si-mi.

N. B.—The intercalated p and n are devious.

* The form of the conjugation in the remaining persons of the indicative mood

being the same as in the first person (and also in the imperative) it is needless to

load the paper with repetitions of the names of the numbers, agentive and objec-

Third Person.

1. Ja-ta-se.

2. Ja-ta-se-si.

8. Ja-ta-se-mi.

tive, or with the English equivalents.

+ Observe that the separation of the syllables is merely to facilitate the student’s

comprehension, and that I shall do so no further, for the genius of the language is

averse to any such treatment of its finely blended elements.

wre Se

Oo tS =

See on.

[No. 5.

Dual of Object.

f Ja-ya-si, inclusive.

Ja-ka-si, exclusive.

We all eat them

two.

Plural of Object.

Ja-yami, incl.

Ja-ka-mi, excl.

We all eat them

~ all.*

. Ja-ni.

. JA-ni-si,

. J4-ni-mi,

. Ja-me.

. JA-me-si.

. Ja-me-mi,

Jan-ta-yo, incl.

Jak-ta-ko, excl,

Jan-ta-yo-si, incl.

Jak-ta-k6-si, excl.

Jan-ta-y6-mi, incl.

Jak-ta-k6-mi, excl.

We Jan-ta-ni.

3. Jan-ta-ni-mi.

Jan-ta-ni-si.

. Jam-ta-me.

. Jam-ta-me-si.

. JAm-ta-me-mi.

409

1858. | Béhing Vocabulary.

Infinitive Mood.

Ja-cho, to eat or to have eaten, aoristic.

Participles.

(Take notice that all the participles are essentially relative and tha* they corre-

spond as to sense with nouns, substantival or adjectival ad libitum.)

lst. PARTICIPLE OF THE AGENT.

Impersonal Form.

Ja-ba, the eater, who eats, or ate, or will eat; aoristic.

N. B.—This participle has no impersonated equivalent.

PATICIPLE OF THE OBJECT AND OF THE INSTRUMENT ALSO |

EXPRESSIVE OF Hapir anpD OF FIrngss.

Present and future time.

Impersonal form.

2ND.

Jacho-me, eatable, what is usually eaten or is fit to eat (to be eaten) what or

whom any one eats or will eat (food), and what he eats or will eat with (teeth),

Sep. PaRTICIPLE OF THE OBJECT AND OF THE INSTRUMENT,

Past time.

Impersonal form.

Ja-na, eaten, what or wherewith any one ate (also what has been eaten).

4rH. PERSONATED EQUIVALENT OF 2ND PARTICIPLE, SUPRA.

Singular of Agent.

1, Ja-gname, the one

that I eat.

Dual of Object.

Z. Jagnasime, the two

that I eat, |

Plural of Object.

8. Jagnamime, the all

that I eat.

1, Jayime.

2. Jayisime.

3. Jayimime.

1. Jawame.

2. Jawasime.

3. Jawamime.

First person.

Dual of Agent.

Jasame,

Jasukume,

the one that we

two eat.

Dual of Object.

Jasasime,

Jasukusime,

the two that we

two eat.

Plural of Object.

Jasamime,

Jasukumime,

the all that we

two eat.

Second person.

1. Jasime.

2. Jasisime.

3. Jasimime.

Third person,

1. Jaseme.

2. Jasesime.

3. Jasemime.

Plural of Agent.

Jayame,

1 Jakame,

‘ the one that we

all eat.

Dual of Object.

Jayasime,

9 Jakasime,

; the two that we

all eat,

Plural of Object.

Jayamime,

3 Jakamime,

5 the all that we

all eat.

1. Janime.

2. Janisime.

3, Janimime.

1. Jameme.

2. Jamesime.

3. Jamemime.

410 Bahing Vocabulary. [No. 5.

These (2nd and 3rd person) of course mean respectively what or wherewith

thou and he (or she) eats or will eat, &c. see note to Ist person of indicative mood.

5TH. IMPERSONATED EQUIVALENT OF 83RD PARTICIPLE, SUPRA.

First Person.

1. Ja tongme, (the one 1 Jatasame. 1 Jantayome.

that I ate.) * | Jatasukume, * | Jaktakome.

, : Jatasasime, Jantayosime.

ss IE * |Jatasukusime. 2: sieprient tg

, ‘ Jatasamime. Jantayomime.

os { ‘Ce ° mf va . ° ua .

a. 4 \ Jatasukumime. : 1 Sabaconting

Second Person.

1. Japteume. 1. Jatasime. 1, Jantanime.

2. Japteusime. 2. Jatasisime. 2. JAntanisime.

3. Japteumime. 3. Jatasimime, 3. Jantanimine:

Third Person.

1. Japtame. 1. Jataseme. 1. Jamtameme,

2. Japtasime. 2. Jatasesime. 2. Jamtamesime.

3. Japtamime. 3. Jatasemime. 3. Jantanimime.*

GERUNDS.

Gerund of the present and future time, umpersonal.

There is none.

Gerund of present and future time personated.

lst.— WITH MAIN VERB IN PRESENT OR FUTURE TIME.

First person.

Singular of Agené. Dual of Agent. Plural of Agent.

1. Jagnana, I eating it, Jasana, exclusive. i f Jayana, incl,

shall do so and so. * (Jasukuna, incl. * \Jakana, excl.

Dual of Object. Dual of Object. Dual of Object.

: Jasasina, incl. Jayasina, inel.

2. Jagnasina. 2. einen. excl. a. Dalenaine excl,

Plural of Odbjecé. Piurai of Object. Plural of Object.

Tens f Jasamina, incl. Sf Fayamina, incl.

pos senaeine. a LJasukumina, excl. * \Jakamina, excl.

Second person.

1. Jayina. 1. Jasins. 1. Janina,

2. Jayisina. 2, Jasisina. 2. Janisina,

3. Jayimina. 3. Jasimina. 3. Janimina,

Third person.

1. Jawana. 1. Jasena. 1. Jamena.

2. Jawasina. 2. Jasesina. 2. Jamesina,

3. Jawamina. 3. Jasemina. 3. Jamemina.

* The above forms of the participle and gerund add merely the respective form-

ative particles to the several tense forms; being “‘ me” for the participle and ‘na’

for the gerund.

1858.

Bihing Vocabuiary.

ALi

2nD.—SAME GERUND, PERSONATED WITH MAIN VERB IN

i. Jatongna, ({ eating

it, did so and so).

2. Jatongsina.

3. Jatongmina.

1, Japteuna.

2. Japteusina.

3. Japteumina,

1. Japtana.

2. Japtasina.

3. Japtamina,

PRBETERITE.

First person.

Jatasana, inclusive,

* \Jatasukuna, excl.

J atasasina, incl.

* |Jatasukusina, excl.

3 Sime incl.

atasukumina, excl.

Second person.

1. Jatasina.

2. Jatasisina,

3. Jatasimina.

Third person.

1, Jatasena.

2. Jatasesina.

3, Jatasemina.

, Jf Jantayéna, incl.

* | Saktakéna, excl.

9 S Jantaydsina, incl.

* \Jaktakosina, excl.

9 J Jantaydémina, incl.

* \Jaktakémina, excl.

1. Jantanina.

2. Jantanisina.

3. Jantanimina,

1. Jamtamena.

2. Jamtamesina.

3. damtamemina.*

Gerund of past time, impersonal Jéso, and Jasomami.t

Same Gerund, personated.

ist.— WITH MAIN VREB IN PRESENT OR FUTURE.

Singular of Agent.

1. Jagnako, (I having ate ,

it, will do so and so).

Dual of Object.

2. Jagnasiko.

Plural of Object.

3. Jagnamiko.

1. Jayiko.

2. Jayisiko,

3. Jayimiko.

1. Jawako.

. Jawasiko.

. Jawamiko.

Go 0

First person.

Dual of Agent.

Jasako, incl.

* |. Jasukuko, excl.

Dual of Object.

Jasasiko, incl.

* | Jasukusiko, excl.

Plural of Object.

3 Jasamiko, incl.

* ¢ Jasukumiko, excel,

Second person.

1. Jasiko.

9. Jasisiko,

3. Jasimiko.

Third person.

1. Jaseko.

2. Jasesiko.

3. Jasemiko.

Plural of Agent.

1 eee incl.

* \dakako, excl.

Dual of Object.

2 J ayasiko, incl.

* ( Jakasiko, excl.

Plural of Object.

3 Jayamiko, inel.

* | Jakamiko, excl.

. daniko.

. Janisiko.

. Janimiko.

CON =

1, Jameko.

2. Jamesiko,

3. Jamemiko,

* The above forms of the participle and gerund add merely the respective form-

ative particles to the several tense forms; being “ me” for the participle and ‘‘na”

for the gerund,

+ See remark in the sequel on Jaségno with the auxiliary.

o H 2

412 Biéhing Vocabulary. [No. 5.

2np.—THE SAME GERUND WITH THE MAIN VEBR IN THE

PRETERITR.

First person.

toed)

; Jatangko, (I having Jatasako, incl. 1 Jantayoko, incl.

ate it didsoandso. ~* ( Jatasukuko, excl. * ( Jaktakoko, excl.

9. ( Jatasasiko, incl. 9 eee aa incl.

2. Jatongsiko.

ue i Jatasukusiko, excl. Jaktakosiko, excl.

J Jatasamiko, inel. 3 § Jantayomiko, incl.

" | Jatasukumiko, excl. * ( Jaktakomiko, excl.

JX)

. Jatongmiko.

Second person.

1. Japteuko. 1, Jatasiko, 1. Jantaniko.

2. Japteusiko. 2. Jatasisiko. 2. Jantanisiko,

3. Japteumiko. 3. Jatasimiko. 3. Jantanimiko.

Third person.

1. Japtako. 1. Jataseko. 1. Jamtameko.

2. Japtasiko. 2. Jatasisiko. 2. Jamtamesiko.

3. Japtamiko. 3. Jatasemiko, 3. Jamtamemiko.*

Reflex transitive, or middle voice} of the transitive verb to eat.

IMPERATIVE Moon.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

Fico. Sap BOE Jas-che, ye two eat Jasine,t ye all eat your-

: ai yourselves. selves.

* Here’‘as before, the gerundial impersonated forms are constructed by merely

adding the past gerund sign or “ko” to the several forms of the tenses ; and as

in the indicative mood, there are 33 personal forms proper to either time (present

or future and preterite) so there are 66 forms of the gerund of past time and im

like manner are there 66 of the gerund of present time; and so also of the parti-

ciples, not to add the three impersonate forms of the latter, making with them 69 !

This is a more than Manchuric luxuriance of participial and gerundial growth. I

have vow gone through the most essential and characteristic forms of the verb, and

shall reserve the less essential or the several other so called moods &c. for the

sequel, proceeding first to the reflex or middle voice and then to the passive upon

the present model. The gerunds are purely verbal with no touch of the nouny

and they are essentially continuative, serving in lieu of the conjunction ‘‘and.”

+ There are a great many primitives or neuters in “so,” besides the derivatives

or reflex forms of the transitives which I call their middle voice. All transitives:

make their middle voice by changing their appropriate sign into “so.”’ This form

is perfectly uniform for all primitives and derivatives. The French amuser and,

s’amuser, == cham-cho and cham-s-cho give a good idea of it.

t There are of course no objective forms of an intransitive verb, and all verbs

in “so,” whether primitively neuter or derived, as here from tiansitives, are sO

regarded. See and compare the transitive forms in the active voice aforegone.

1858. | Béhing Vocabulary. 418

InDICcATIVE Moop.

Present and Future Tense.

First person.

Singular. Dual, Plural.

gud Jas-cha, incl. Jasiya, incl

J ‘ i b) CAS a ¥

ae Jas-chuku, excl. Jasika, excl.

Second person.

Jase. Jas-chi. Jasini.

! Third person.

Jase. Jas-che. Jasime.

PrRETERITE TENSE.

First person.

s Jastasa. incl. Jastayo, incl.

Jasti. Oi

Jastasuku, excl. Jastako, excl.

Second person.

Juste. Jastasi. Jastani.

Third person,

Jasta. Jastasa, Jastame.

INFINITIVE Moon.

Jascho, to eat, or to have eaten one’s self, aoristic.

Participles.

1sT.—PARTICIPLE OF THE AGENT, IMPERSONAL.

Jasiba, the self-eater, one who eats, or will eat or ate himself, aoristic,

2nD.—PARTICIPLE OF THE OBJECT AND INSTRUMENT.

Present and Future Time.

Impersonal Form.

Jaschome, his own that any one eats or will eat, self eatable, what is self eaten

or wherewith to eat self.

SRD.—SAME PARTICIPLE OF TIME PAST, IMPERSONAL.

Jasina, his own (flesh) that.any one ate, or what has been self eaten by any one;

and wherewith it has been self eaten* or his own (teeth) wherewith any one ate.

4TH.—IMPERSONATED EQUIVALENT OF PAaRTICIPLE 2ND IN CHOME.

First person.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

Jasigname, my own that Jaschame, incl. Jasiyame, incl.

I eat or eat with. Jaschukume, excl. Jasikame, excl.

* The participles in cho-me and in na are scarcely useable in derivative verbs

in “so” like Jaso, but more freely in primitives of the same formation such as

waso = caco, e.g., was-chome khli voidable ordure, and wdsina khli = voided

ordure, that is, the ordure which will be and has been, voided. This shows the

passive bent of these participles and the affinity of neuter verbs to passives. See

Classification of Verbs,

414 Bihing Vocabulary. ' [No. 5.

Second person. ‘

J aseme. Jaschime. Jasinime.

Third person.

Jaseme, J ascheme. Jasimeme.

5TH.—IMPERSONATED EQUIVALENT OF PARDICIPLE 38RD IN “Na.”

Singular. Dual. Plural.

First person.

Jastime, my own that Jastasame, incl. Jastayome, incl.

I ate. Jastasukume, excl. Jastakome, excl.

Second person.

Jasteme. Jastasime. Jastanime.

Third person.

Jastame, Jastaseme. Jastameme,

GERUNDS.

Gerund of present and future time, impersonal.

There is none.

Gerund of present and future tume, personated.

Ist.— WITH MAIN VERB IN SAME TIME.

Simyular. Dual. Plural,

First person.

own flesh shall do so)

Jasignana, (I eating my

and so).

Jaschana, incl. Jasiyana, incl.

Jaschukuna, excl. Jasikana, excl,

Second person.

Jasena. Jaschina. J asinina.

Third person.

Jasena. Jaschena. Jasimena.

IND.—SAME GERUND PERSONATED WITH MAIN VERB IN

PAST TENSE.

First person.

Jastina, (1 eating my Jastasana, incl, Jastayona, incl.

own flesh did so and so.) | Jastasukuna, excl. Jastakona, excl.

Second person.

Jastena. Jd astasina. Jastanina.

Third person.

Jastana, Jastasena. Jastamena.

Gerund of past time, impersonal.

There is none.

Same gerund personated.

1lst.— WITH MAIN VERB IN PRESENT OR FUTURE.

First person.

Jasignako, (I having aaaet inek. Nite incl.

eaten my own flesh é aan .

shall do so and so.) aan Oy cals rE ae

| =

1858. | Béhing Vocabulary. 415

Second person.

Jaseko. Jaschiko. Jasiniko.

Third person.

Jaseko. Jascheko, Jasimeko.

2nND.—SAME GERUND WITH MAIN VERB IN THE PRETERITE.

Singular. Dual, Plural.

First person.

my own did so and

Jastiko, (I having eaten

80).

Jastasako, incl. Jastayoko, incl.

Jastasukuko, excl. Jastakoko, excl.

Second person.

Jasteko. Jastasiko. Jastaniko.

Third person.

Jastako. Jastaseko,. Jastameko.

Passive voice of the same verb.

(Basis, Jayi = eat me).

Imperative Moon.

Singular of Object. Dual of Object. Plural of Object.

1. Jayi, eat me thou. 1. Jasiki, eatustwothou. 1, Jaki, eat us all thou,

Dual of Agent. Dual of Agent. Dual of Agent.

2. Jayisi, eat me ye 9 Jasikisi, eat us two 9 | Jakisi, eat us all ye

two. : ye two. i two.

Plural of Agent. Plural of Agent. Plural of Agent.

ehchs Jasikini, eat us two Jakini, eat us all ye

3. Jayini, eat me yeall. 3. “ ak 3. all.

InpicaTIvE Moop.

Present and Future Tense.

First person.

Singular of Object. Dual of Object. Plural of Object.

Jaso, incl. Jaso, incl.

1, Jayi, eats me he, = Jasiki, excl. 1 Jaki, excl.

Iam eaten by him. ~ Wetwoareeaten ~ We all are eaten by

by him. him.

* Observe that of the active voice of the transitive the object is him or her or

it; of the middle voice the object is self; and of the passive the object is me,

but that the order of arrangement of agent and object is reversed in the passive

as compared with the active voice and so also in the indicative mood. This is

done in conformity to the genius of this language which requires the attention to

be primarily fixed on the agent in one voice, on the object in the other. It will

be seen in the sequel that there are further special forms of the verb to denote the

action which passes from me to thee and from thee to me, These are necessary

complements of the passive voice in a language which makes the mention of agents

and patients inseparable from that of the action.

416 Béhing Vocabulary. [Noss

Dual of Agent. Dual of Agent. Dual of Agent.

Jasosi, incl. Jasosi,

2. Jayisi, I am eaten by 9 Jasikisi, excl. Jakisi,

them two. 4 We two are eaten : We all are eaten by

by them two. them two.

Plural of Agent. Plural of Agent. Plural of Agent.

Jasomi, incl. Jasomi, incl.

3. Jayimi, I am eaten 3 Jasikimi, excl. Jakimi, excl.

by them all. We two are eaten i We all are eaten by

by them all. them all.

N. B.—The agent is always of the 3rd person, he, she, or it; if it be 2nd person

the conjugation is another.

Second person.

1. Jaye. 1. Jasi. 1. Jani.

2. Jayesi. 2. Jasisi. 2. Janisi.

3. Jayemi. 3. Jasini. 3. Janimi.,

Third person.

1. Jawa. 1. Jawasi, 1, Jawami.

2. Jase, 2. Jasesi. 2. Jasemi.

3. Jame. 3. Jamesi. 3. Jamemi,

Preterite Tense.

First person.

y Jataso, incl. Jataso, incl,

1. Jati. ae Jatasiki, excl. * |Jaktaki, excl.

2. Jatisi. 2. Jatasosi, incl. 9 J atasosi.

* | Jaktakisi.

3 J Jatasomi, incl. 3 J Jatasomi.

* | Jatasikimi, excl. * | Saktakimi.,

Jatasikisi, excl.

3. Jatimi. -

Second person. :

1. Jate. 1. Jatasi. 1. Jantani.

2. Jatesi. 2. Jatasisi. 2. Jantanisi.

3. Jatemi. 3. Jatasimi. 3. Jantanimi.

Third person.

1. Japta. 1. Japtasi. 1. Japtami.

2. Jatase. 2. Jatasesi. 2. Jatasemi.

3. Jamtame. 3. Jamtamesi. 3. Jamtamemi.

INFINITIVE Moop.

There is none properly so called.

The sense is conveyed by placing the separate pronoun in the objective case

before the verb in the active voice. G06 jacho, = to eat me, = to be eaten.

PARTICIPLES.

1st.—Participle of the agent in “ ba” is of course wanting.

2nd.—Participle of the object in “ echome” is rather passive than active though

used in both voices, as we say in English what (or whom) any one eats or is wont

to eat or what is wont to be eaten by any one.

1858. | Bihing Vocabulary. 417

3rd.—Participle in ‘‘ na,” is yet more purely passive, Ja-na, what has been eaten.

But it is used with more than English license as though it belonged to the active

voice, what any one hath eaten.

4th.—Personated equivalent of the 2nd of the above. It is formed by adding

the formative suffix ‘‘ me” to the sevéral tense forms of the indicative present and

future of this voice, e. g.

Singular of Agent. ° Dual of Agent. Plural of Agent.

: Jasome, incl. Jasome, incl.

1, Jayime. 1. Jasikime, excl. i Oraume excl.

and so on through the whole of the thirty-three forms above given in the indicative.

5th.—Personated equivalent of the 3rd of the above participles or that in ‘ na.”’

It is formed as above by adding the formative “ me’’ to the several forms of the

preterite indicative of this voice, e. g.

Patines l Jatasome, incl. 1 Jatasome, incl.

; j * | Jatasikime, excl. * | Jatakime, excl.

and so on through all the 33 forms of the three persons of the preterite passive.

Javime means J who am the eaten of him, and Jatime, I who was the eaten of him,

and so of all the rest.

N. B.—The impersonal forms in this, and of the active and middle voices are

declinable like nouns. ,The personated in ‘‘ me” which take so much of the verb

character are indeclinable. Both are thoroughly and intrinsically relative in sense.

Gerunds.

Gerund of future and present time, impersonal.

There is none.

The same gerund personated.

Ist.—With the main verb in same time.

It is formed by the addition of the appropriate formative or “‘na’’ to the several

forms of the present and future indicative of this voice, e. g.

Singular. Dual. Plural,

Bee cina Jasona, incl, 1 Jasona, incl.

ial * | Jasikina, excl. * | Jakina, excl.

and so on through all the 33 forms of the three persons of the indicative.

2nd.—The same gerund personated with the main verb in the preterite,

It is formed by suffixing the “ na” to the preterite indicative forms, e. g.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

Bir... Jatasona, incl. Jatasona, incl.

1. Jatina, I. echoes excl. 1. Jatakina, excl.

Samples of the sense. Being eaten I shall cry out, Jayina brégna: being eaten

I cried out, Jatina bréti.*

* Observe that the root bré, to cry out, is here conjugated as an intransitive.

Elsewhere I have given the same root conjugated as a transitive in the sense of to

summon. The infinitive and imperative (bre-cho, bre-to) are identical. This

double indicative conjugation from the same root of words having nearly identical

senses is very common, as tito, to fall and to fell, Jikko to be broken, and to break,

&c. Bréto, the intransitive, is conjugated like gnito, to be afraid, the type of

regular intransitives in “to.”

3 1

418 Béhing Vocabulury. [No. 5.

Gerund of past time, impersonal.

There is none.

Same gerund personated,

ist.—With main verb in present or future.

It is formed by adding the formative ‘‘ko” to the several forms (33) of the

indicative present and future, e. g.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

s Jasoko, incl. Jasoko, incl.

1. Jayiko. * | Jasikiko, excl. It 1 Tavike excl.

2nd.—Same gerund with the main verb in the preterite.

It is formed as above by adding “ko” to the several forms of the indicative

preterite, e. g.

J. Jatiko. i: see: incl. 1. see incl.

Jatasikiko, excl. Jatakiko, excl.

and so on through all the 33 forms of the indicative preterite of this voice. The

senses respectively of Jayiko and Jatiko are, having been eaten I shall be, and,

having been eaten, I was or have been, (forgotten) ; and so of the rest.

Paradigm of certain special forms of conjugation supplementary of the passive

and denoting

Ist, the action that passes between me as the agent and thee as the patient.

2nd, that in which thou art the agent and I the patient. The first of these forms

is very distinct, but is confined to the indicative (and subjunctive) mood.

It has no imperative or infinitive. The second runs much into the ordinary

passive and has an imperative. See on. ,

Ist form, I—thee.

(Verb Ja, to eat, as before).

InpicaTIvE Moop.

Present and Future Tense.

Singular of Agent.* Dual of Agent. Piurai of Agent.

1. Jana, I eat thee or thou

art eaten. by me. } Jayesi. We two eat thee. Jayemi. We all eat thee.

Dual of Object. Dual of Object. Dual of Object.

MOEA Jasisi. We two eat you f Jasimi. We all eat you

2. Janasi, I eat you two. pu y oe y

Plural of Object. Plural of Object. Plural of Object.

iauan edeened nee We two eat you Meets We all eat you

* This form is rather allied to the passive than active, and may be called the

supplement of the former, which is very :ncomplete and alien to the genius of the

tongue, being cramped at the threshold by taking the Ist person objective for its

starting point, thus, jayi = eat me. There is no Be thou eaten. And here jana,

and its participial janame look to the object chiefly, thou art eaten by me and thou

who art the eaten of me.

—-

1858. | Bahing Vocabulary. 419

Preterite Tense.

1. Jantana, I ate thee, or,

thou wast eaten by -datesi. We two ate thee. Jatemi. We all ate thee.

me.

' 2. Jantanasi, Tate you Jatasisi, We two ate you f Jatasimi.’ We all ate you

two. Uv two. two.

3. Jantanani, I ate you Jantanisi. We two ate you { Jantanimi. We all ate you

all. all. all.

Participles.

There are none of the impersonal form.

Participle of the future personated.

It is formed, as in the ordinary conjugation, by adding the appropriate particle

or “ me” to the forms of the indicative, e. g.

Singular. Dual, Piural.

Janame. Jayesime. Jayemime.*

and so on through all the 9 forms above given in the indicative present.

Participle of the past personated. It is formed from the preterite by adding

the “me,” e. g.

Jantaname. J atesime. Jatemime.

and so on through the above 9 forms of the preterite.

The sense of Janame is, thou who art the eaten of me; of jantaname, thou who

wert the eaten of me, and so of all the rest.

Gerunds.

There are none whatever impersonated,

The personated forms are, as in the ordinary conjugation, four, two of the pre-

sent and two of the past, and they are constructed, as before, by adding, respec-

tively “‘ na” and “ko” to the tense forms above, e. g.

Gerund of the future and present with the main verb in same time.

Singular. ; Dual. Plural.

Janana, Jayesina. Jayemina,

and so on through all the 9 forms of the tense.

Same gerund with the main verb in the preterite.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

Jantanana, Jatesina. Jatemina,

and so on through all the 9 forms above.

Gerund of the preterite with main verb in the past time.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

Jantanako.f Jatesiko. Jatemiko,

and so on through the 9 tense forms,

* The “y” is merely to keep the vowels apart.

+ Samples of the above gerunds. Eating thee I shall fill my belly, janana ragna:

Eating thee I filled my belly, jantana rati: Having eaten thee I will go, janako

lagna: Having eaten thee I slept, jantanako ipti: We all having eaten thee, were

pleased, jatemiko gyérstako: We two, having eaten thee, will flee, jayesiko juksu-

kasuku: We all, eating thee, fled, jatemina jukkatako,

3912

420 Bihing Vocabulary. [No. 5.

2nd.—Special form, Thou—me.

ImperAtIveE Moop.

Singular of Agent. Dual of Agent. Plural of Agent.

1. Jayi,* Hat me thou or

let me be eaten by ¢ 1. Jayisi. 1. Jayini.

thee.

Dual of Object. Dual of Object. Dual of Object.

2. Jasiki. 2. Jasikisi. 2. Jasikini.

Plural of Object. - Plural of Object. Plural of Object.

3. Jaki. 3. Jakisi. _ 3. Jakini.

N. B.—This tallies with the ordinary passive as will be seen by reading the

vertical columns of the one with the horizontal of the other.

InpIcaTIveE Moop.

Present and Future Tense.

1. Jayi, (Thou eatest me,

or I am eaten by +1. Jayisi. 1, Jayini.

thee.)

9. Jasiki. 2. Jasikisi. 2. Jasikini,

3. Jaki. 3. Jakisi. 3. Jakini.

Preterite.

L. Sati. 1. Jatasi. 1, Jatini.

2. Jatasiki, 2. Jatasikisi. 2. Jatasikini.

3. Jaktaki. 3. Jaktakisi. 3. Jaktakini.

N. B.—These agree respectively with the present and preterite of the passive

save Ist, that there are here no inclusive forms, and 2nd, that the personal sign ni

stands here in place of the passive mi.

Inrinitive Moop.

Wanting: the ordinary infinitive is used with the separate pronouns in the

instrumental and objective cases, gami go jacho.

PAaRTICIPLES.

There are none of the impersonated kind.

The personated are formed, as usual, by the “me” suffix added to the tense

forms, e.g.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

Jayime. Jayisime. Jayinime,

and so on through the 9 tense forms.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

Jatime. Jatisime. Jatinime,

and so on through the 9 tense forms above.

* This is the formula of the passive, because the passive only requires that the

first person be the patient, allowing the 2nd or 3rd to be the agent, and hence the

indicative of this form so nearly tallies with that of the passive, jayi, eat me he

or thou, &c,

1858. | Bahing Vocabulary. 421

The senses of Jayime and Jatime are, I who am the eaten of thee, and I who was

the eaten of thee. The sense would be equally expressed by thou who art my

eater, but eater jaba is purely active, and cannot be admitted into an agento-objec-

tive verb.

GERUNDS.

Unpersonated, there are none.

The personated of the present are formed as before by ‘‘na’’ suffixed to the

several tense forms; and those of the past by “ ko” similarly affixed; e. g. jayina,

jatina, and jayiko, jatiko, equivalent to thou eating me wilt do so and so, and did

so and so; and thou having ate me wilt do, and did, so and so.

Paradigm of transitives in “ to,” not changing the “t” into “d.’’*

Root, bré, to summon.

AcTIvE VOICE.

Imperative Mood.

Sengular, Dual, Plural.

1, Bréto. 1. Brétise. 1, Brétine.

Dual of Object. Dual of Object. Dual of Object.

2. Brétosi. 2. Brétisesi. 2. Brétinesi.

Plural of Object. Plural of Object. Plural of Object.

3. Brétomi. 3. Brétisemi. 3. Brétinemi.

Inpicative Moop.

Present and Future Tense.

First person.

By Brétisa, incl Brétiya, incl

e Br t e ° Lapel 3 i ° fs iy Z y

1 ae Brétisuku, excl, ] Bretika, excl.

ne Brétisasi Brétiyasi

2 Br A . Pal rey 3 Rak

etust Brétisukusi. 2 Brétikasi,

er Brétisami f Brétiyami

3. Brétami. 5 § ree abs ; ees

( Brétisukumi. | Brétikami.

Second person.

1. Bréti. 1. Brétisi, 1. Brétini.

2. Brétisi. 2. Brétisisi. 2. Brétinisi.

3. Brétimi, 3. Brétisimi. 3. Brétinimi.

Third person.

1. Bréta. 1. Brétise, 1. Brétime.

2. Brétasi. 2. Bretisesi. 2. Brétimesi.

) 3. Brétami. 3. Bretisemi. 3. Brétimémi.

errr a ee

* Those that change the “t’’ of the imperative into ‘‘d’’ in the indicative, do

not take the lucrementive “ti” of the dual and plural present, nor the double t of

the preterite, and they have j, not ti, in the passive. These peculiarities are in

| fact confined to the transitives in unchanging “to,” but are partially shared by the

changing transitives and by the neuters.—See classification of verbs.

422

1. Bréttong.

2. Bréttongsi.

3. Bréttongmi.

. Brétteu.

. Bretteusi.

. Bretteumi.

Oo hD =

1. Brétta.

2. Bréttasi.

3. Bréttami.

Bihing Vocabulary. [No. 5.

Preterite.

First person.

1 Bréttasa, incl. 1 Bréttayo, incl.

* | Bréttasuku, excl. * | Brettako, excl.

9 ( Bréttasasi, incl. Bréttayosi, incl.

* U Bréttasukusi, excl. * | Bréttakosi, excl.

3 Bréttasami, incl. Bréttayomi, incl.

* 2 Bréttasukumi, excl. * ( Bréttakomi, excl.

Second person.

1. Bréttasi. 1. Brettani.

2. Bréttasisi. 2. Bréttanisi.

3. Bréttasimi. 3. Brettanimi.

Third person.

1. Bréttase. . 1. Bréttame.

2. Bréttasesi. 2. Bréttamesi.

3. Bréttasemi. 3. Bréttamemi.

INFINITIVE Moon.

Bré-cho, to call or to have called, &c.

PARTICIPLES.

ist, in ba, Bré-ba, who calls or called.

whom any one calls or will call.

2nd, in chome, Bréchome,{ "1° will be called.

whom any one has called.

3rd, in na, Bré-na,{ “po has been called.

whom { call, or shall call.

4th, in me, Brétume, &c. ae will be called by me.

{whom I called.

Sth, in me, Bréttongme, ihe has been called by me.

Gerund of the past, impersonal, Bréso or Bresomami.

(None of the present).

Gerunds personated.

Ist, in na, Brétuna, &c. I calling (will do so and so.)

2nd, in na, Bréttongna, &c, I calling (did so and so.)

3rd, in ko, Brétuko, &c. I having called (will do so and so.)

4th, in ko, Bréttongko, &c. I having called (did so and so.)

1. Bréti.

2. Brétisi.

3. Brétini.

Mi1pp1LE Voice.

Breso, call thyself. Precisely like Jaso.

Passive VOICE.

Imperative Mood.

1. Brétisiki. 1. Brétiki.

2. Brétisikisi. 2. Bretikisi.

3. Bretisikini. 3. Brétikini.

1858.]

1. Bréti.

2. Brétisi.

3. Brétimi.

1. Bréte.

2. Brétesi.

3. Brétemi.

1. Bréta.

2. Brétise.

3. Brétime.

1. Brétti.

2. Bréttisi.

3. Bréttimi.

1. Brette.

2. Bréttesi.

3. Bréttemi.

1. Brétta,

2. Bréttase.

3. Bréttame.

1st, in ba.

Biéhing Vocabulary.

Indicative Present.

First person.

Brétiso, incl.

* \ Brétisiki, excl.

Brétisosi, incl.

* | Brétisikisi, excl.

Brétisomi, incl.

* | Brétisikimi, excl.

Second person.

1. Brétisi.

2. Brétisisi.

3. Brétisimi.

Third person.

1. Brétasi.

2. Brétisesi.

3. Brétimesi.

Preterite.

First person.

1. ees incl.

Bréttasiki, excl.

3. ie ee incl.

Bréttasikisi. excl.

Bréttasomi, incl.

* Bréttasikimi, excl.

Second person.

1. Bréttasi.

2. Bréttasisi.

3. Bréttasimi.

Third person.

1. Brettasi.

2. Brettasesi.

3. Brettamesi.

Brétiso, incl.

* .Brétiki, excl.

Brétisosi, incl.

* UBrétikisi, excl.7

3 Brétisomi, incl.

* \Brétikimi, excl.

1. Brétini.

2. Brétinisi.

3. Brétinimi.

1. Brétami.

2. Brétisemi.

3. Brétimemi,

l 7 Bréttaso, incl.

* | Bréttaki, excl.

9 Bréttasosi, incl.

* | Bréttakisi, excl.

3 peta incl.

* Brettakimi, excl.

. Bréttani.

. Bréttanisi.

. Bréttanimi.

OS DS t=

1. Brettami,

2. Brettasemi.

3. Brettamemi,

Infinitive Moop.

Brécho, precisely as in the last verb.

PARTICIPLES.

Wanting, as in the last.

2nd, in chome.

3rd, in na.

4th, in me.

5th, in me.

Ist, in na.

2nd, in na.

3rd, in ko.

4th, in ko.

Bréna, ditto, ditto.

Brétime &c. as before.

Bréttime, &c. as before.

GERUNDS.

Brétina,

Bréttina,

Brétiko,

Bréttiko,

&c. as before.

Bréchome, precisely as in the last.

424 Bahing Vocabulary. [No. 5.

SprctaLt Form I.

Indicatwe present.

1. Brétina. 1. Brétesi. 1. Brétemi.

2. Brétinasi. 2. Brétisisi. 2. Brétisimi.

3. Brétinani. 3. Brétinisi. 3. Brétinimi.

Preterite.

J. Bréttana. 1. Bréttesi. 1. Bréttemi.

2. Bréttanasi. 2. Bréttasisi. 2. Bréttasimi.

3. Bréttanani. 3. Bréttanisi. 3. Bréttanimi.

Infinitive Moon.

None. Gomi ga brécho, expresses the sense.

PARTICIPLES.

Impersonal none.

Ist personated. Brétiname, &c.

2nd <3 Bréttaname, &c.

GERUNDS.

Impersonal none.

Ist personated. Brétinana, &c.

2nd ss Bréttanana, &c.

ord - Brétinako, &c.

4th - Bréttanako, &c.

SprectaL Form II.

Imperative.

J. Bréti. 1. Bretisi. 1. Brétini.

2. Brétisiki. 2. Brétisikisi. 2. Brétisikint.

3. Brétiki. 3. Brétikisi. 3, Brétikini.

Indicative present.

1. Bréti. 1. Brétisi. 1. Brétini,

2. Brétisiki, 2. Brétisikisi. 2. Bretisikini.

3. Brétiki. 3. Brétikisi, 3. Brétikini.

Preterite.

1. Brétti. 1. Bréttisi. 1. Bréttini.

2. Bréttasiki, 2. Bréttasikisi. 2. Brettasikini.

3. Bréttaki. 3. Bréttakisi. 3. Bréttakini.

Infinitive Moop.

There is none. Gami go brécho expresses the sense.

PaRTICIPLES.

Impersonal none.

Ist personated, Brétime, &c.

“cc 20) 4 :

Sa i Bréttime, &c. bas before, by “me” added to the tense forms.

1858. ]

Ist personated,

2nd

3rd

4th

Singular.

Piwo.

Singular.

Pigna.

Piye.

Pi.

Singular

Bihing Vocabulary.

GERUNDS.

Impersonal of the past (none of present).

Bréso or Brésomami.

Bretina, &c.

Ditto personated.

425

Bréttina, Ly As before by ‘‘na’’ added to the several forms

Brétiko, &c.

Bréttiko, &c.

of the tenses.

Paradigm of verbs intransitive or neuter.

Not having the silibant sign.

A neuter in “ wo,” Pi-wo, come thou.

IMPERATIVE Moop.

Pise.

InpDICcCATIVE Moop.

Dual.

Plural.

Pine.

Present and Future Tenses.

First person.

Dual.

Pisa, incl.

Pisuku, excl.

Pisi.

Pise.

Second person.

Third person.

Preterite Tense.

First person.

Dual.

Pitasa, incl.

Pitasuku, excl.

Second person.

Pitasi.

Third person.

Pitase.

INFINITIVE Moon.

Picho, to come or to have come, aoristic.

PARTICIPLES.

Ist of the Agent, impersonal, aoristic.

Piba, who or what comes, or will come or came.

Plural.

f Piya, incl.

Pika, excl,

Pini.

Pime.

Plural.

Pintayo, incl.

Piktako, excl.

Pintani.

Pimtame.

426 | Bihing Voeabutary. [No. 5.

2nd of the object and instrument.

Future, ¢mpersonal.

Pichome, fit to come by (road), and fit for coming with (feet), and what any one

will come by (road).

3rd the same, past time, impersonal.

Pina, what any one came by (road) and what he came with (feet).

Impersonated form of 2nd and 3rd.

Tt is formed by “me” added to the several forms of the tenses, pigname,

pitime, &c.*

GERUNDS.

That of present time.

Pignana,t &c. with main verb in same time.

Pitina, &c. with main verb in preterite.

That of past time.

Pignako, &c. with main verb in future.

Pitiko, &c. with main verb in past.

All intransitives not having ‘‘so”’ in the imperative are conjugated as above,

except certain ones in “to,” which I shall distinguish as neuters and which are

conjugated as follows.

Paradigm of neuters in “ to.”

Root Bo, to flower. Imperative, Bd-to.

IMPERATIVE Moop.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

Boto. Bétise. Bétine.

INDICATIVE Moop.

Present and Future.

Singular. Dual. Plurat.

First person.

Bott Botisa, incl. Botiya, incl.

Botisuku, excl. Bétika, excl.

Second person.

Boti. Bétisi. Botini.

Third person.

Bota. Botise. Bétime.

Preterite.

First person.

B6tti. Bottasa, incl. Bottayo, ine}.

Boéttasuku, excl. Béttako, excl.

‘

* e. g, Pigname kholi, the feet which I come with, Pigname lam, the road which

I come by- Pitime kholi, the feet which I came with; Pitime lam, the road which

I came by.

+ e. g. Pignana pagna = I will come and do it, literally I coming will do it.

1858.] Bahing Vocabulary. 427

Second person.

Botte. Bottasi. Bottani.

Third person.

Botta. Bottase. Béttame.

Invinttive Moop.

Bo6-cho.

Participle of the agent in “ba.”

Béba, what flowers, or will flower, or has flowered.

NY. B.—The 2nd and 3rd participles in “chome’”’ and “na” are wanting,* and

so also their derivatives in “‘ me.”

GERUNDS.

Ist. Botuna, Botina. Botana, &c,

2nd. Bottina. Bottena. Bottana, &e.

3rd. Rodétuko. Botiko. Botako, &c.

4th. Bottiko. Bétteko. Bottako, &c.

What, as opposed to the above, called neuters (see conjugation XI.) for distinc-

tion’s sake, I have elsewhere called intransitives in “to,” as Jito, Khato, &c. (con-

jugation X.) are all regular and conjugated like the verb to come above given.

In fact, all the so-called intransitives, whatever their sign, have one uniform conju-

gation, those in “‘so,”’ merely interpolating the reflex sibilant, as may be seen by

comparing the aforegone samples of both. But the neuters in “to,” here ensam-

pled by Béto, are quite unique, leaning to the model of unchanging transitives

with the same sign, for which see Bréto aforegone.

By comparing the above samples of complete conjugation with the summary

view of the same subject which precedes it,f it will be seen that there is at bottom

but one conjugation, because all transitives and intransitives follow the one general

model with the material exception, however, of the singular indicative. Of that

the various forms are therefore brought together in the classification of so-called

conjugations ; and it is only necessary to add that beyond the singular indicative

of transitive verbs, there are no deviations from the one model of conjugating in

the three voices. The whole force of conjugation is, it will be seen, thrown upon

the actors, who do and suffer. Of the action itself there is little comparative heed,

only two moods and two times being developed and the active and passive voices

being perplexed. There are not in fact any inflexional or inherent verbal forms to

express the various modifications of the action. Nevertheless these modifications,

of course, have periphrastic means of expression, 1 shall call them moods, and now

proceed to enumerate them.

* These participles can rarely be used with intransitive or neuter verbs, never

with such of the latter as relate to the action of things. They imply an agent

who produces that effect on a thing which these participles express relatively to

future and past time respectively. Out of the vast number of intransitives enu-

merated elsewhere hardly a dozen make use of these participles. Some of these

exceptions are bwakko, to speak, which gives bwangna 16,—spoken words. Bokko,

to get up, whence bongna blocho, = bed, whence any one has risen: Niso, to sit,

whence nisina-khosingba, the chair on which any one has sat, &c.

~ To wit, “ Classification of Verbs.”

2H 2

428 Bahing Vocabulary. [No.

SUBJUNCTIVE or ConpITIONAL Moon.

If, or should, I come.

Indicative Present.

First person.

Singular. Dual. Plural,

rota ee, |

Second person.

Piye khedda. Pisi khedda. Pini khedda.

Third person.

Pi khedda. Pise khedda. Pime khedda.

Preterite.

First person.

Pisawa khedda, incl. Piyawa khedda, incl.

Pignawa khedda. Pisukuwa khedda, excl. Pikawa khedda, excl.

Second person.

Piyéwa khedda. Pisiwa khedda. - Piniwa khedda.

Third person.

Piwa khedda. Pisewa khedda. Pimewa khedda.

The negative is formed, as usual, by ma prefixed.

Another negative, allied if not equivalent, is impersonal and substitutes the par-

ticle theum for khedda, adding the separate pronouns personal in liew of the

pronominal suffixes of verbs.

Should I not come, &c.

Present Tense.

First person.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

Ea mainte a ma pitheum, incl. Géyi ma pitheum.

ésuku ma pitheum, excl. Goku ma pitheum.

Second person.

Ga ma pitheum. Gasi ma pitheum. Gani ma pitheum.

Third person.

Harem ma pitheum. Harem dausi ma pitheum. Harem dau ma pitheum.

The preterite of this is formed by adding the “wa” above gone to the corre-

lative part of the sentence, as, had I not come, he would not have come, g6 ma

pitheum, harem ma piwa.

In the present or future it is, g6 ma pitheum, harem ma pi = should I come

not, he will not come. Jn both forms of the conditional, wa, added to the indi-

cative, takes the place of the regular preterite piti, pite, pita.

SSS Fe

1858. | Bihing Vocabulary. 4.29

Contingent Moop.

I may (perhaps) go.

It is expressed by the future in the alternative way, e. g. lagna ma lagna, ma

teutu =I shall go, shall not go, I don’t know =I may go, or perhaps I shall go,

perhaps not, (root, la, to go).

Potent1aL Moop.

It is formed by adding ne to the root of any main verb (e. g. 1a to go) and

then subjoining the several conjugational forms of the subsidiary verb to can,

which is a regular transitive in “po.” This, not having been given above, shall

be fully set down here, though it differ not much, save euphonically, from the

foregone samples of transitives, especially bréto.*

Root, chap, to can. Infinitive, chap-cho.

Imperative.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

1, Lane chappo. 1, Lane chapse. 1. Lane chamne.

2. Lane chapposi. 2. Lane chapsesi. 2. Lane chamnesi.

3. Lane chappomi. 3, Lane chapsemi. 3. Lane chamnemi.

Indicative present.

First person.

, Lane chapsa, incl. Lane chamya, incl.

f- Tane chabu. * | Lane chapsuku, excl. 1. 4 Lane chapka, excl.

p ase Lane chapasi, incl. J Lane chamyasi, incl.

Py vane chabust. * (Lane chapsukusi, excl. * | Lane chapkasi, excl.

. , Lane chapsami, incl. Lane chamyami, incl.

een eaapural, Lane chapsukumi, excl, _ oe chapkami, excl.

Second person.

1. Lane chabi.

2. Lane chabisi.

3. Lane chabimi.

. Lane chamni.

. Lane chamnisi.

. Lane chamnimi,

. Lane chapsi.

. Lane chapsisi.

. Lane chapsimi.

Qo be

Chm =

Third person.

1, Lane chaba. 1. Lane chapse. 1, Lane chamme.

2. Lane chabasi. 2. Lane chapsesi. 2. Lane chammesi.

3. Lane chabami. 3. Lane chapsemi. 3. Lane chammemi,

Preterite.

First person.

a Lane chaptasa, incl. J Lane chaptayo, incl.

1. Lane chaptong. Lane chaptasuku, excl. i Lane chaptako, excl.

P : Lane chaptasasi, incl. Lane chaptayosi, incl.

2. Lane chaptongsi. 2. Lane chaptasukusi, excl. ~ | Lane chaptakosi, excl.

i : Lane chaptasami, incl. Lane chaptayomi, incl.

eee chaptongmi. 3. eae chaptasukumi, excl. ** ane chaptakomi, excl.

* Compare chap-cho, chap-po, chab-u, chab-i, chab-a, chap-tong, cham-i with

bré-cho, bré-to, brét-u, brét-i, brét-a, brét-tong, bre-ti; and observe in regard

to the former that its radical p becomes b before a vowel and m before a nasal

(n. m), but remains p before a sibilant or hard dental. It is so in all transitives

in po, of all which chappo is a perfect sample.

430 Bahing Vocabulary. [ No.

Second person.

1, Lane chapteu. 1. Lane chaptasi. | 1. Lane chaptani.

2. Lane chapteusi. 2. Lane chaptasisi. 2. Lane chaptanisi.

3. Lane chapteumi. 3, Lane chaptasemi. 3. Lane chaptanimi.

Third person.

1, Lane chapta. 1. Lane chaptase. 1. Lane chaptame.

2. Lane chaptasi. 2. Lane chaptasesi. 2. Lane chaptamesi.

3. Lane chaptami. 8. Lane chaptasemi. 3. Lane chaptamemi.

INFINITIVE.

Lane chapcho.

Participles.

Ast in “ ba,” Lane chapba.

2nd in “chome,”’ Lane chapchome. 7 Impersonal as before.

3rd in ‘ na,” Lane chamna.

4th in “ me,” Lane chabume, &c. Personated and formed by adding “ me”

5th in “me,” Lane chaptongme, &c. i to the tense forms.

Gerunds.

Ist in *‘ na,” Lane chabuna, &c. Personated all and constructed as before

2nd in ‘‘ na,” Lane chaptongna, &c. by adding na, or ko, to the several

3rd in “ko,” Lane chabuko, &c. tense forms. The impersonate past

4th in ‘‘ ko,” Lane chaptongko, &c. gerund is Lane chapso or chapsomami.

Middie Voice.

Lana chamso, and so on, precisely as in the verbs to eat and to summon.

Passive VOICE.

Imperative Mood.

1. Lane chamyi. 1. Lane chapsiki. 4. Léne chapki.

2. Lane chamyisi. 2. Lane chapsikisi. 2. Lane chapkisi.

3. Lane chamyini. 3. Lane chapsikini. 3. Lane chapkini.

Indicative present.

First person.

5 : Lane chapso, incl. Lane chapso, incl.

a anc ichamiyi: a Lane chapsiki, excl. Hc Te chapki, excl.

, ie Lane chapsosi, incl. Lane chapsosi, incl.

2. Tene chamvial. * { Lane chapsikisi, excl. ¢ { Liane chapkisi, excl.

3. ewe chapsomi, incl. 3. re chapsomi, incl.

3. Lane chamyimi. Lane chapsikimi, excl. Lane chapkimi, excl.

Second person.

1. Lane chamye. 1. Lane chapsi. 1. Lane chamni.

2. Lane chamyesi. 2. Lane chapsisi. 2. Lane chamnisi,

3. Lane chamyemi. 3. Lane chapsimi. 3. Lane chamnimi.

Third person.

1. Lane chaba. 1. Lane chabasi, 1, Lane chabami.

2. Lane chapse. 2. Lane chapsesi. 2. Lane chapsemi.

3. Lane chamme. 3. Lane chammesi. 3. Lane chammemi.

1858. | Béhing Vocabulary. 431

Preterite.

First person.

2 j Lane chaptaso, incl. Lane chaptaso, incl.

Pe ehayr * | Lane chaptasiki, excl. * (Lane chaptaki, excl.

sit Lane chaptasosi. ¢ Lane chaptasosi.

oe ee Chants. ; { ane chaptasikisi. 2: ¢( Lane chaptakisi.

p aa J Lane chaptasomi. » J Lane chaptasomi.

Ps chap pa. ‘(Lane chaptasikimi. °* ‘Lane chaptakimi.

Second person.

1, Lane chapte. 1, Lane chaptasi. 1, Lane chaptani.

2. Lane chaptesi. 2, Lane chaptasisi. 2. Lane chaptanisi.

3. Lane chaptemi. 3. Lane chaptasimi, 3. Lane chaptanimi.

Third person.

1. Lane chapta. 1, Lane chaptasi. 1, Lane chaptami.

2. Lane chaptase. 2, Lane chaptasesi. 2. Lane chaptasemi.

3. Lane chaptame. 3. Lane chaptamesi. 3. Lane chaptamemi.

Infinitive.

It is wanting as in all the passives.

Participles.

Ist in “* ba,’’ wanting.

’ Ss

2nd in “ chome,”’ Lane chapchome.

%, P

3rd in “ na,’’ Lane chamna.

4th in “me,” Lane chamyime, &c.

5th in “me,” Lane chaptime, &c.

Gerunds.

Ist in “na,” Lane chamyina, &c.

2nd in “na,” Lane chaptina, &c.

3rd in “ ko,’’ Lane chamyiko, &c.

4th in “ko,” Lane chaptiko, &c.

Remark.—The precedent in given in full, Ist, because it affords a sample of

transitives, in “po: 2nd, because it demonstrates that these so-called moods are

merely compound verbs which (like the case signs) can be multiplied ad infinitum,

but have little to do with grammar,

Duty, necessity ; I must, or ought.

It is expressed by the impersonal use of the verb dyam to become, put after the

main verb in the regular infinitive with the separate objective pronoun preced-

ing both.

Imperative wanting.

InpicaTIvE Moop.

Singular. Dual. Plurai.

Goési lacho dyum, incl. Goyi lacho dyum.

, 2 *

G6 lacho dyum. Gésuku lacho dyum, excl. Goku lacho dyum,

* Quasi mihi ive fit, i. e. decet vel necesse est, in Khas, manlai janu parcha.

4.32

Ga lacho dyum.

Harem lacho dyum.

G6 lacho dyumta.

Ga lacho dyumta.

Harem lacho dyumta.

Singular.

1. Wa lala dwang.

2. V lala dwang.

3. AX léla dwang.

1. Wa lala dwakta.

2. Y lala dwakta.

3. X lala dwakta.

Bihing Vocabulary.

Second person.

Gasi lacho dyum.

Third person.

Haremdausi lacho dyum.

Preterite.

First person.

JS Gési lacho dyumta.

LGosuku lacho dyumta.

Second person.

Gasi lacho dyumta.

Third person.

Haremdausi Jacho dyumta.

OptaTivE Moop.

Wish, desire.

Indicative present.

First person.

Dual.

SXsi lala dwang, incl.

Wasi lala dwang, excl.

Second person.

Ysi lala dwang.

Third person.

Asi lala dwang,

Preterite.

Ysi lala dwakta, incl.

{ Wasi lala dwakta, excl.

Ysi lala dwakta.

Asi lala dwakta.

[No. 5.

Gani lacho dyum.

Haremdau lacho dyum,

JS Goyi lacho dyumta.

(Goku lacho dyumta.

Gani lacho dyumta.

Haremdau lacho dyumta,

Plural.

fVke lala dwang.

‘Wake lala dwang.

Yni lala dwang.

Ani lala dwang.

{ Ike lala dwakta, incl.

Wake lala dwakta, excl.

Yni lala dwakta.

Ani lala dwakta.

Formed of the conjunct possessives, of lala, a verbal noun from 1a, to go, and

of dwang, dwakta, the 3rd person of the intransitive dwakko, to be desirous,

present and preterite used impersonally.

Singular.

1, Lacho giyi.

2. Lacho piyisi.

3. Lacho giyini.

Precative Moon.

Oh! that I might go.

Let me go.

Imperative.

Dual.

1, Lacho gisiki.

2. Lacho gisikisi.

3. Lache gikisi.

Plural.

1. Lacho giki.

2. Lacho gikisi.

3, Lacho gikini.

1858. | Bahing Vocabulary. 433

Indicative present.

First person.

Lacho giso, Lacho giso.

H. Lachogtyi. = 1 | Lgcho gisiki. Ds Vi gone ett,

, Pte es Lacho gisoki. Lacho gisosi.

Pee ereheyety isi. 2. | Lacho gisikisi. 2, { Lacho gikisi,

* Pe Lacho gisomi. Lacho gisomi.

ee ene Seyi. See acho gisikimi. 3+ | Thécho gikimi.

And so on conjugating the transitive giwo, to give, in the passive voice, like the

passive of jawo, to eat aforegone. Lacho giyi = lect me go, give me to go. But

observe that in order to say let him go, you must use the active voice, as below.

Singular. ( Remark.—lIf to these forms we add those of

the middle voice. S. Lacho giso. D. Lacho

gische. P, Lacho gisine, we have a good clue

to the character of the three voices in this lan-

Let me go, lacho gtyi.

Let him go, lacho giwo.

Dual. guage which are based upon the idea of me,

; Be 5 the speaker, being the exponent of the passive ;

Let us two go, lacho gisiki, ; of self, the spoken to, being that of the middle;

Let them two go, lacho giwosi. and of him, or her, or it, the spoken of, being

that of the active voice, Gi-wo = give him:

Plural. py i 7 ae pe

Gi-so = give thyself: Gi-yi = give me, are

Let us all go, lacho giki. respectively the starting points of the active,

Let them all go, lacho giwomi. —(_middle and passive voices,

INTERROGATIVE Moon.

It resembles the indicative, lagna I shall go, or shall I go?

PROHIBITIVE AND NecGative Moop.

There is no separate form of the negative verb as in Dravidian tongues, nor even

any prohibitive particle distinct from the negative.

Ma prefixed expresses verbal negation and prohibition and also nominal _priva-

tion, e. g. Ma jawo, eat not, Ma jagna, I do not eat. Ma neuba, not good = bad,

InceptiveE Moon.

It is formed by subjoining to the ordinary infinitive form (cho) of the main

verb, the subsidiary intransitive verb prénso, to begin, or the transitive pawo, to

do, to make: e. g. tacho pawo, begin to drink ; tacho papta, he began to drink:

jacho prénso, begin to eat ; jacho, prensigna, I begin to eat,

| Fixttive Moop.

It is formed as above, but substituting for pawo or prénso the transitive theumo

(conficio), e. g. jacho theumo, finish eating, jacho theumtong, I bave done eating.

Sometimes “‘ne,’’* replaces the infinitival “cho” of the main verb,

| * The infinitival sign varies, not always intelligibly. Where purpose is meant

| “tha” is the sign, as jatha lati, I went to drink, i. e. for the purpose of drinking.

Where commencement and end are expressed, ‘‘ ne” is more frequent than “cho”

jane préusigna, jane theumu, I shall begin to eat, and I shall have done eating.

| So also where wish is expressed jane dwaktong, I wished to eat. But cho is the

common form and always used alone, as Jacho ma jacho agyem neu, which is better

to eat or not to eat. ©

434 Béhing Vocabulary. [No. 5.

N. B.—The neuters ryipo (desino) and dyumo (fio), to be ended or to end

cannot be used in this way and prénso, to be begun or to begin (self) is much

rarer in such use than pawo, Ryipcho pawa is, it nears its end, literally it makes:

to an end, or to be ended.

ContTINuATIVE Moop.

It is formed by adding ségno (sense doubtful) to the root of the main verb and

therewith conjugating the intransitive verb bwakko, to remain (see conj. III.),.e. g..

continue eating, jasogno bwakko. N. B.—The definite present and past are also

thus expressed.

Imperative.

Singular. Dual. Plurat.

Jaso-gno bwakko (eat con-

tinuously or keep eat- ¢ Jaso-gno bwakse incl. Jaso-gno bwangne.

ing.

Indicative present.

First person,

Jasogno bwaksa, incl. Jasogno bwangya.

Jaso-gno bwanggna. Jasogno bwaksuku, excl. Jasogno bwakka.

Second person.

Jasogno bwangye. Jasogno bwaksi. Jasogno bwangni.

Third person.

Jasogno bwang. Jasogno bwakse. Jdasogno bwamme,*

Preterite,

First person.

continuously or I was

eating,

Jasozno bwakti (E ate

Jasogno bwaktasuku, excl. { Jasogno bwaktako..

Jasogno bwaktasa, incl. en bwaktayo.

Second person.

Jasogno bwakte. Jasogno bwaktasi. Fasogno bwaktani..

Third person.

Jasogno bwakta. Jasogno bwaktase. Jasogno bwaktame.

Infinitive.

Jasogno bwakcho.

Participles.

|st in ba, Jasogno bwakpa (ba). (Surd requires surd),.

2nd in chome, Jasogno bwakehome.

3rd in na, Jasogno bwangna,.

4th in me, Jasogno bwanggname, &c. 11 forms, ut supra.

5th in me, Jasogno, bwaktime, &c. ditto ditto.

* Observe the change of the radical k intong and m, bwak-ko, bwang-gnay

bwam-me. It is constant in all verbs neuter in “ko.”

1858. ] Bihing Vocabulary. 435

Gerunds.

Ist in na, Jasogno bwanggnana, &c. 11 forms.

2nd in na, Jasogno bwaktina, &c. ditto.

3rd in ko, Jasogno bwanggnako, &c. ditto.

4th in ko, Jasogno bwaktiko, &c. ditto.

Remark.—The above is given in full as an exemplar of intransitives in “ ko,’’

The transitives of the same conjugation (III.), have the like ewphonic changes, and

for the rest their conjugation may be determined by analogy with the help of the

premises already supplied. The indicative present singular alone varies and that

is set down in the classification of verbs. The radical ‘‘ k” becomes “g”’ in the

active voice, and “‘ng’’ in the passive and causal, e. g. pok-ko, pog-u, pdng-yi,

pong-pato.

Irerative Moop.

Raise repeatedly, pokko, mokho, bwakko.

It is formed by adding to the imperative of the main verb, whether transitive or

intransitive, the word mékho (sense unknown) and to it subjoining the verb

bwakcho, to remain, as in the last mood to which this is very nearly allied in sense,

There however we have compound conjugation according to the sense of the pri-

mary and secondary verbs which are both conjugated with mékho, immutable,

between them. e. g.

{po mékho bwakko, sleep repeatedly. Pékko mékho bwakko, raise repeatedly.

Tmena mékho bwanggna, I sleep re- { Pédgu mdkho bwanggna, I raise repeat-

peatedly. edly.

Ypti mdkho bwakti, I slept repeat- ( Péktong médkho bwakti, I raised re-

edly. peatedly.

And so on through the whole of the intransitive conjugation in “po” (VI.) and

of the transitive in “ko” (III.) The definite sense of the present and preterite.

1 am sleeping, I was sleeping, I am raising, I was raising, is likewise thus expressed.

Conjugation with auxtliar substantive verb and participle.

Of the 4 substantive verbs, ka, khé, gnd, and bwa, the three first express essence

and entity ; the last, presence, being in a certain place, corresponding respectively

to the Khas ho and cha, and to the Newari kha and du, or chéna. Of the Bahing

4 the last or bwa is alone used as an auxiliar and it is compounded with the (appa-

rent) participle or gerund aforegone, or jasogno to procure, definite present (or

future) and past tenses of any and every verb in the manner there seen, e. g.

pisogno bwanggna, I am coming: pisogno bwakti, I was coming: teupsogne

bwanggna, I am beating : teupsogno bwakti, I was beating.

Remark.—Jaségno, which gives the continuative and the definite form of the

tenses above, seems to spring from the impersonal past gerund in “ so,”’ jaso vel

jasomami. But that is not clear, though it de so that, whatever else jasogno is, 1%

is a form of every verb useable with the auxiliar in conjugation.

Jasogno bwanygna = I am eating.

Jasogno bwakti = I was eating.

Pisogno bwanggna = I am coming.

Pisogno bwakti = I was coming.

Brésogno bwanggna = I am summoning.

Brésogno bwakti = I was summoning,

22 2

436 Béhing Vocabulary. | No.

Compound verbs with each element conjugated.

J wagdiwo, to arrive.*

IMPERATIVE Moop.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

J wagdiwo. J wagdise. J wagdine.

Indicative present.

First person.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

Pray Jwaksadisa, incl. Jwangyadfya, incl.

J wangenadigna. J waksudisuku, excl. J wakkadika, excl.

Second person.

J wangenediye. J waksidisi. J wangnidini.

Third person.

J wangnidi. J waksedise. J wangmedime.

Preterite.

First person.

Swati i oe eee

Second person.

J waktedite. J waktasiditasi. J waktanidintani.

Third person.

J waktadita. _ Jwaktaseditase. J waktamedimtame.

InFINITIVE Moop.

J wakchodicho.

Participles.

Ist in ba, Jwakpadiba.

2nd in chome, J wakchodichome, &c.

3rd in na, Jwangnadina, &c.

4th in me, Jwanggnamedigname, &c.

Sth in me, J waktimeditime, &c.

Gerunds.

Impersonal of the present. None.

Impersonal of the past.

J waksomamidisomani or J waksodiso.

* Jwakko, is an intransitive in ‘ko’? meaning to arrive, and it can be conjugated

separately ; but, with that love of specialization which is so characteristic of

Kiranti verbs, it is always used in conjunction with the verb to come (piwo) or to

go (diwo). Jwagdiwo as a single word can be also so conjugated. The remark-

able thing is that each verb of the compound can be conjugated.

1858. | Béhing Vocabulary. 437

Personated Gerunds.

Ist, Jwanggnadignana, }

2nd, Jwaktiditina, 5

rd, Jwanggnadignako,

4th, Jwaktaditako, past.

present,

Causal Verbs.*

All verbs whatever can be made causal by adding to their root the transitive verb

pato, from pat to do or make. But pa makes its regular transitive in “ wo,”

pawo. Péwo is do; pato, do for him, on his behalf; and this leads me to observe

that every transitive verb, save those in “ to,’ has the following six forms.

_ 1. Teupo, strike him, active transitive in “ po.”

2. Teum-so, strike thyself, reflex transitive, or middle in “ so,”

3. Teum-yi, strike me, paasive in ‘* i.”

4. Teup-to, strike it for him, active transitive in “‘ to.”

5. Teum-so, strike it for thyself, middle in ‘‘so.”’

6. Teupti, strike it for me, ‘ passive in “ ti.”

So also pa, to do, has pa-wo. paso, payi; pato, paso and pati: and kwd, to see,

has kw6guo, kwéso, kwéyi; kwoto, kwoso and kwoti: and pok, to raise has

pokko, pokso. pongyi; pokto, pokso, pokti; and in like manner every other tran-

sitive, except those in ‘‘ to’ as the primary form. It is the secondary form of

the transitive of the verb to make, or pato, which is used for constructing causals,

but yet it takes the passives in “i,” not “ti,”” when thus employed, though, when

used separatelv, it assumes its regular form in “ti”—an anomaly, like that of the

use of the reflex or middle woice in one form and two senses (2.5).

But besides the regular causal formed by pato added to the root of the main

verb (e. g. kwopato, cause to see), there are other means of constructing causals

which shall be first meutioned before proceeding to exhibit the conjugation of the

former.

These means are, Ist the hardening of the initial consonant of an intransitive, as—

Dokko, fall. Tokko, cause to fall.

Dytmmo, become. Thyammo, cause to become.

Gakko, be crooked. Kukko, crooken or make crooked.

* Besides its ordinary use, the causal form of the verb is jfrequently used, espe-

cially in its middle voice, as a passive. Thus, japdso is, be thou eaten, or suffer

thyself to be eaten, implying voluntariness on the part of the patient ; and so iémpaso

is let thyself be kissed, All three voices, however, can be used thus and frequently

are so, whenever the complex pronomenalization of the primary verb causes

embarrassment. The passive use of the causal is very common in Himalaya, and

is often, as in Newari, the only substitute for a passive. This is not wonderful in

so crude a tongue as New4ri: it is so, however, in the Kiranti language which

possesses the great secret of the most refined conjugation in its neat personal

suffixes and its power of euphonic compounding. Owing however to too much

attention to the agents, and too little to the action, the Kirdnti verb with all its

constructive richness on one side, shows equal poverty on another, and hence the

passive use of the causal form.

ie The root pa, pi in Vayu, an allied Himalayan tongue, is the same as the Dravi-

dian causative.

438 Bihing Vocabulary. [No. 5.

Gikko, be born. Kikko, beget or give birth to.

Jito, be born. Chito, tear.

Bokko, get up. Pokko, raise, or make get up.

Bukko, be burst. Pukko, burst.

2nd, by dropping the intransitive sign whatever it be, and substituting the

transitive sign in ‘to,’’ or ** ndo’’ (do).

Piwo, come. Pito, bring.

Rawo, come. Rato, bring.

Diwo, go. Dito, take awa;.

l.awo, go. Lato, take away.

Kuwo, come up. Kato, bring up.

Yuwo, come down. Yato, bring down.

Dwakko, be desirous or long. Dwakto, desire it, or long for it.

Tagno, drink. Tiindo, cause to drink.

Wogno, issue. Wondo, extract.

Gliagno, enter. Glindo, insert.

Chayinso, learn. Chayindo, teach, i. e. cause to learn.

Niso, sit. Nito, set down.

Khleuso, lie hid. Khleundo, hide it.

T need not point out what an important analogy with the Dravidian tongues the

first (nay, both) of these two processes presents, but I may add that this analogy

is in perfect keeping with the further habit of this Himalayan language of harden-

ing or doubling the indicative present sign by way of making a preterite, as

Myelda, he is sleepy. Myelta, he was sleepy.

Sada, he kllls. Sata, he killed.

K wada, he puts on the fire. Kwata, he put on the fire. |

Gramda, he hates. Gramta, he hated.

Teuba, he strikes. Teupta, he struck.

Bréta, he summons. Brétta, he summoned.

Khleuta, he conceals, Khleutta, he concealed.

Soda, he tells it. Sotta, he told it.

Add to these analogies the common habit of Bahing and Tamil of annexing the

conjugational sign to the imperative and that that sign is indifferently applied to

intransitives and transitives (leaving the style of the indicative to difference them) ;

and further that the conjunct pronomenalization of their verbs and nouns is by

prefixing in regard to the nouns and suffixing in regard to the verbs,* not to men-~

tion several other analogies cited in the sequel, and Messrs. Muller and Caldwell will

find it difficult to maintain their assertion that there is nothing Dravidian in the

structure of the Himalayan tongues !

{ Remark.—Wa, i, a, the pro-

* Teub-u, I strike Wa popo, My uncle. DRA BO cyan Cicicestn

Teub-i, Thou strikest I popo, Thy uncle. Py Are rine ra sane

Teub-a, He strikes A popo, His uncle. oe Mee Rete 3

Bogen, dinaise Meee enodd. 4 the Share of theses

Pog-i, Thou ee Tgu, cy ae 4 noun tally to identity. Here

Pog-a, He raises A gu, His hand. then, is the alleged dia noe

Bret-u, I summon Wa daubo, Myself, of Dita A

Bret i, Thou summon’st YT daubo, Thyself. develoded thAn (ana a

Bret-a, He summons A daubo, Hisself. ESOP oO ey ae

| dian tongue.

1858. | Bihing Vocabulary. 439

Many verbs, identical in form, in the imperative yet differ in sense as Khiwo, n.

tremble and khiwo, a. quarrel, tito, n. fall; ato, a. fell. Many, again, materially

change their sense in passing into the causal or transitive form from the intransi-

tive or neuter; and, lastly, the causa! form of seuters and of transitives, though

very generally of the normal construction 1 ps'o added to the root (ipo, sleep 5

impato, cause to sleep), yet in the case of i:any verbs of both sorts in “ po” and

in “gno,” is not so, the alteration being effected by changing their sign into the

transitive ‘‘ to” vel “do” sign, as ipo, sleep ; ipto, cause to sleep (a synonyme of

impato); t&gno, drink, tindo, (= tupato) cause to drink. When the sense is

much altered in such transition, the derivative causal of a neuter is constantly

regarded as an independant word and primitive verb, and the neuter takes the

normal causal form, thus lawo, n. = go, has lato for its causal: but, lato being

used to signify take away, lapato is made to express the precise sense of cause

to go.

All this shows, when taken in connexion with the general transformability of all

transitives not primitively in “to” into that form, the pre-eminent transitive and

preterite character of that widely diffused sign.

It also shows how apt causal is to be equivalent to transitive—another widely

prevailing Turanian trait, and one harmonising with the almost identity of neuter

and intransitive. And here we may remark another special characteristic common

to the Himalayan and Dravidian tongues, viz. double causation. Thus in Bahing

(and it is the same in many others of our tongues) ipo, sleep, impato, cause to

sleep ; impapato, cause to cause to sleep. Gikko, be born, Kikko or Gingpato,

cause to be born; Kingpato or Gingpapato, cause to cause to be born; to which we

may add, Kingpapato expressing causation in the third degree from the primitive

gikko: and the like holds good with regard to every neuter undergoing a similar

change with Gikko.

I proceed now to exhibit an exemplar of the normal causative form of verbs,

taking the instance of the verb to eat. Root, Ja. Causal transitive, Japato.

Causal reflex, Japaso. Causal passive, Japayi. ‘The prefixed root does not affect

the grammatical form of the auxiliars save as above stated. Pato therefore in this

combination will afford a sample of all transitives in ‘‘ to” which change the “ t”

into “d.” Of the unchanging transitives in “to” I have given a model in Bréto.

I shall here give Pato in full in its combination with Ja, as a sample of the chang-

ing conjugation in “t” (see conjugation X.) merely premising that pdso, as an

intransitive in “so” (see conjugation XIII.) and payi as a passive in “i” (yi to

keep the vowels apart merely)* have already been given in full, as also the passive

in “ti,” (vide Breto).

Paradigm of a causal verb.

Active VoIce.

Imperative Mood.

Singular of Agent. Dual of Agent. Plural of Agent.

1, Japato. 1. Japase. 1. Japane.

Dual of Object. Dual of Object. Dual of Object.

2. Japatosi. 2. Japasesi. 2. Japanesi.

Plural of Object. Plural of Object. Plural of Object.

3. Japatomi. 3. Japasemi. 3. Japanemi.

* M also requires the y, for example, teum-yi, strikes me he or thou, = I am

struck, see remarks aforegone. It is because the ayent¢ may be he or thou (any

One) in the passive, that the passive runs so near parallel with the 2nd special form

of the verb.

4.40

Sengular.

1. Japadu.

2. Japadusi.

3. Japadumi.

Singular.

. Japadi.

Japadisi.

. Japadimi.

aNe

Singular.

. JApada.

. dapadasi.

. Japadami.

One

Singular.

1. Japatong.

2. Japatongsi.

3. Japatongmi.

Singular.

. Japateu.

. Japateusi.

. dApateumi.

Singular.

. Japata.

. Japatasi.

. Japatami.

Ww =

Béhing Vocabulary.

InpricaTivE Moop.

[No. 5,

Present and Future Tense.

First person.

Dual,

} tee incl.

* | Japasaka, excl.

Japasasi. incl.

: Japasikiasi, excl,

3 ( Japasami, incl,

* ¢( Japastkami, excl.

Second person.

Dual.

1. Japasi.

2. Japasisi.

3. Japasimi.

Third person.

Dual.

. Japase.

. Japasesi.

. Japasemi.,

Preterite.

First person.

Dual.

i f JapAtasa, incl.

| Japatasuku, excl.

Japatasasi, incl.

Japatasukusi, excl.

¢ Japatasami, incl.

Second person.

Dual.

1. Japatasi.

2. Japatasisi.

3. Japatasimi.

Third person.

Dual.

1, Japatase,

2, Japatasesi.

3. Japatasemi.

* U Japatasukumi, excl.

Plural.

Japava, incl.

* | Japaka, excl.

Japayosi, incl.

" | Japakosi, excl.

Japayomi, incl.

* | Japakomi, excl, .

Plural,

1, Japani.

2. Japanisi.

3. Japanimi.

Plural,

1. Japame.

2. Japamesi.

3. Japamemi,

Plural,

Japatayo, incl.

* | Japatako, excl.

{ Japatayosi, incl.

* @ Japatakosi, excl.

Japatayomi, incl.

* | dapatakomi, excl.

Plural.

1. Japatani.

2. Japatanisi.

3. Japatanimi.

Plural.

1. Japatame.

2. Japatamesi.

3. Japatamemi.*

* Observe for a moment the singular neatness, euphony and precision of these

forms.

The single words Japatamesi and Japatamemi must be rendered into

English by they all fed them two and they all fed them all; into Newari, by

amisang,

aminihma yata nakala, and amisang amita nakala,

happy term to feed in English, the distinction would be greater still.

And, but for the

In Khas the

equivalents are, uni heru le @ uwi lai knuwaiyo and uni heru le & heru lai khuwaiyo

or six words for one!

1858. ] Specimen of the Kéirénti language. 441

INFINITIVE Moon.

Japacho, aoristic as usual.

Participles.

Ist in ba, Japaba, who feeds or will or did feed.

2nd in chome, Japachome, feedable, whom or with what any one feeds or will

feed.

3rd in na, Japana, fed, whom or with what any one has fed.

4th in me, Japadume, &c. 33 forms. Feedable by me; whom or with what I

feed or will feed, &c.

5th in me, Japatongme, &c. 33 forms. The fed of me; whom or with what

I fed, &c.

N. B.—1—3 are impersonal, as before: 4—5 are personated.

Gerunds.

Impersonated of the present and future. None.

Impersonated of the past, Japaso, or Japasomami.

Personated present.

Ist in na, Japaduna, &c. 33 forms.

2nd in na, Japatongna, &c, 33 forms,

Personated past.

Ist in ko, Japadiko, &c. 33 forms,

2nd in ko, Japaténgko, &c, 33 forms.

Specimen of the Kirdnti language (Bahing dialect),

Kwong muryeu hopo ke di brétha laté. Gyékhopdso brétha

dayéna. Wa khyim di kwong miryeu, résogno bwaktako, wa ming

nung dwangmdse, Go harem gydnaiyo ma tagna, syt, syt. Ike

nyau asra jajulso, myem sicho, lama, daso, binti* papta.

Mokoding hépomi harem kwoéng ri nytba gyawa dyampattame

sisi giptako chyanta, yem sisi i ming giptako, sytiyo ma giwo, daso,

lopaso, giwo. Harem miryeumi myem khégno papta. Hépomi yo

chiwacha dau brétamiko chyantami. Syuke di rinyuba gydwa rinam,

myem racho.

Mékeding ryamnipo béla* kwdsomami ming ke di dita. Myem

mingini wadi rinytba gyd4wa khlyakti giptéko mécho prénsta, mara

* N. B.—Nyau, asra, binti, and béla are Hindi terms having no precise equiva-

lents in the Kiranti tongue; though it would be easy to turn the phrases so as

to replace them by pure Kiranti terms I leave them as samples of a process every

where going onin the Central Himalaya whose still primitive languages will pro-

bably in time become first mixed and then obsoiete.

4.4.2 Specimen of the Kirdnti language. [ No. 5.

déyana, wa wancha mi syu (or su) ma giwo moétime bwa. Naka ga

wa ram khome bwagne, i kamdi mara khéda syu ke kam di ra data

(or méta). Mékeding ryamnipo khyim ding glutana chiwachadatmi

Ari tamtameko, myem simtameko, hopo ke di chétha dimtame.

Mékeding hépomi 4 wancha brétako, mdta, yem i ryamnipo,

dwakti khedda chydro, dwaktikhedda plyénti giwo (or plyenotako)

daso data.

Translation of the specimen of the Kirdnti language (Bahing dialect).

A certain person went to his prince to complain of a man who

was in the habit of coming constantly to his house to make love to

his wife, but whom he could never contrive to identify. To his

sovereign he said, ‘relying on your justice, I appeal to you to have

this man arrested.’ The Rajah thereon gave the petitioner a phial

filled with scented oil and said to him, ‘ give this phial to your wife

and caution her at the same time not to give it to any one.’ The —

man did as he was bade and the Rajah, when he was gone, instructed

his spies to look after the matter and to seize and bring to his

presence any person they might detect coming from the plaintiff's

house, whose clothes had the scent of atter.

By and by, the lover finding an opportunity went, as before, to

his mistress who rubbed the atter on his clothes and said to him.

‘My husband desired me to give this atter to no one, but you are

my life, my soul, how should I refuse it to you? If you like it;

take it. I can have no other use for it.’

As the lover, thus anointed with atter, thereafter left the house

of his mistress the spies of the Rajah who were on the look out

for him, seized him and carried him to the Rajah.

The Rajah thereon sent for the woman’s husband and said to

him, ‘this is your wife’s lover. If you please, kill him: if you

please, let him go.’

B. H. Hopeson.

October, 1857.

1858. ] On the Vayu tribe of the Central Himalaya. 443

On the Vayu tribe of the Central Himdlaya.—By B. H.

Hoveson, Esq.

The Vayus, vulgarly called Hayus, inhabit the central Himalaya,

and the central region of that part of the chain.* They are sub-

jects of Nepal, tenanting the basin of the river Kosi between the

confines of the great valley of Nepal proper and that point where

the Kési turns southwards to issue into the plains. The Vayus belong

to that interesting portion of the Himalayan population which, in

the essay adverted to, I have denominated the broken tribes —tribes

whose status and condition, relatively to those of the unbroken

tribes, sufficiently demonstrates that they are of much older stand-

ing in Himalaya than the latter. The Vayus are in an exceedingly

depressed condition, gradually passing to extinction probably. Their

nuinbers do not now exceed a few thousands, how many, I have no

means of ascertaining.

Their high antiquity and the complex character of their language,

give them, especially in connexion with other tribes of Himalaya

similarly characterised, very great interest as an element of Hima-

Jayan population. They consider themselves as a single people

distinct from all their neighbours. Their language, which has no

marked dialects, and is quite unintelligible to any but themselves,

supports this view. So also does their perfect community of habits

and customs, though they recognise certain distinctions among

themselves, of no practical importance, but marked by specific desig-

nations, of which the chief are Yakum, Dophdom, Konsino, Balung,

Phoncho, Kamaléchho, &e.

Balung, I know, means exorcist in the Vayu tongue; and the

other terms probably point to some perhaps now forgotten avoca-

tions. At all events they cannot explain the force of the terms.

_ They have a tradition of a very remote time when they were a

| numerous and powerful people, but never having had the use of

writing, their remote past is too vague for ascertainment, no foreign

and cultivated people having ever noticed and recorded their exist-

* See new edition of essay on physical geography of Himalaya now issuing from

the press under the auspices of Government.

| Dis te 2,

44-4 On the Vayu tribe of the Central Himalaya. [No. 5.

ence. The religious ideas of the Vayus are extremely vague, nor

does their language afford any term for the Deity or even for any

deity though they haye, as usual, an exorcist who is their only

priest and physician and to whom they look for relief from all those

evils which malignant influence, whatever it be, afflicts them with.

They are a very inoffensive industrious race employed in the culti-

vation of the earth. Their use of the plough is noticeable from its

rarity in these regions.

As it has been the chief object of this paper to illustrate the

highly interesting language* of the Vayus I shall not at present say

more of their status, manners and customs than by a reference to

their own account of these conveyed in the statement subjoined

to the language as a sample thereof and of which translation was

there furnished.

But the physical traits of the Vayu are of an importance second

only to that of his language, and the following description will

help to illustrate them.

Dimensions of a man named Pate, a Vayu of the Yakum caste,

aged twenty-eight years, in the service of Captain Gojraj Thapa of

Nepal.

Height, Ba ic bi 5. 0.0

Crown of head to hip, .. ve 1.11.4

Hip to heel, .. Bi 3. 0.4

Length of arm and Meta 1% 2.2.3

Girth of head, Ls 90

Girth of arm, 0. 9.0

Girth of forearm, oh au 0. 9.3

Girth of thigh, Se Ee sa BL. 60

Girth of calf, ne sie ce HWS

Girth of chest, ba Se «. 2.41.0

Pate is rather below than above the standard height of his fellows,

which may be taken at about five feet three inches. His colour is a

* I meant to have prefaced the details by a few general remarks under the usual

heads of article, noun, pronoun, &c. But time runs short and the philological

reader will readily apprehend these from the details already given whilst other

classes of readers are little likely to pay any attention to the matter.

1858. | On the Vayu tribe of the Central Himalaya. 445

pure isabelline brown without the least trace of ruddiness in the

skin or hair. The eye is dark hazel and the hair long, straight,

black, ample on the head, scant every where else.

Vertical view of the head oblate ovoid, rather wider behind than

before but not much, and flattish behind.

Bachycephalic. Facial angle very good, the mouth being only

moderately salient and the forehead of good height, forwardness

and breadth, but the chin defective. LEye-brows even, scantish.

No beard or whisker, and a very small moustache. Hyes small,

flush with the cheek, oblique, very wide apart, drooping upper lid

bent down at the inner angle. Nose rather short, straight, depressed

between the eyes, moderately salient elsewhere, broad at end and

having large round nostrils. Mouth moderately salient, the pecu-

liar thickening of the upper gum, which chiefly causes the saliency,

being not great, and the lips not tumid, only moderately full. Teeth

vertically set, strong, white. Chin retiring and small. Zygomee

and cheek bones very salient to the sides and profile flat. Front

view of the face squarish, owing to the large angular jaws which

are as salient laterally as the zygome.

Remark.—This young man’s physiognomy is distinguished by the

full Turanian breadth of head and face. ‘Two others of his race

whom I examined—a man of fifty-eight years and another of thirty

years—had not the same breadth nor the same perfectly Kalmac

eye. These men measured nearly 5.5.0 and were several shades

darker in colour than Pate; and upon the whole I incline to regard

them as more normal samples of the race than Pate. In a word,

I think that I have sufficient grounds for concluding that the Vayus

are in general somewhat darker and of a less decidedly Mongolic

east of countenance than the Lepchas (for example), from whose

perfectly ‘Turanian type, they lean towards the Turkic and Dravidian

subtypes, which again approach the Arian, and are seen in the

Kiranti tribe of Himalaya more clearly and more frequently than in

the Vayu tribe.

The elder of the two individuals above adverted to, I was enabled

to examine rapidly whilst Mr. Scott photographed him. He was

5.4.5 in height, moderately fleshy and dark brown. Vertical view

of the head oblate. Wider and flat behind, greatest breadth between

446 On the Kiranti tribe of the Central Himalaya. [No. 5.

the ears. Rising pyramidally from the zygomee to the crown of

the head. Facial angle not bad, the forehead retiring and narrow-

ing only slightly, the mouth not being porrect, nor the chin retiring

but pointed. Eyes remote, not small, but the upper lids flaccid

and somewhat down-curved at the inner canthus. Nose pyramidal,

not levelled between the eyes nor the extremity much thickened,

but the nares large and round. Mouth large but well fermed, with

neatly shaped lips and vertical fine teeth.

The younger man above alluded to was 5.5.0 and as dark as an

ordinary native of the plains whom he further resembled in his

unflatted, face though his eye wanted the fullness and shapeliness of

that of the lowlanders beside whom I placed him.

When placed beside some Dhangars of the Uraon tribe the impres-

sion made upon me by a comparison of the whole was, that the

physical type is one and the same in the highlanders and low-

landers ; that the type is flexible to a large extent; and that the

general effect of the northman’s residence for ages in the malarious

and jungly swamps of the plains is to cause the Turanian type to

incline towards the Negro type but with a wide interval from the

latter. The Uréon compared with the Vayu has less breadth of

head and face, more protuberance of mouth, and a better shaped,

larger eye, not down curved next the nose ; and it is thus, I conceive,

that the Negro type differs from the Turanian.

On the Kiranti tribe of the Central Himdlaya.—By B. H.

Hopeson, Esq.

It has been the main purpose of one of the preceding papers to

examine the grammatical structure of the Kiranti language asa

second sample of that class of Himalayan tongues (the Vayu tongue,

already examined, being the first) which I have elsewhere denomina-

ted the pronomenalized or complex.*

The opinion of such scholars as Miller and Caldwell that the

Himdlayan tongues have nothing Dravidian about them, can thus

* See essay on physical geography of Himalaya and other papers now issuing

from the Calcutta press under the auspices of Government.

1858.] On the Kiranti tribe of the Central Himalaya. 447

be tested, and I think shown to be a mistake; and it will be further

demonstrated, I trust, by these and other investigations which I

hope soon to complete, that the Himélayans are closely connected,

as well with the southern as with the northern members of the

family of Tuir—members by no means so disjoined and dissimilar as

it is the fashion to represent them.

As a supplement to the grammatical details, I will now give

such a sketch of the Kirdnti people, as at present existing in Nepal,

as will, I hope, add to the interest and value of the philological

portion of my essay. |

The Kirdntis, on account of their distinctly traceable antiquity

as a nation and the peculiar structure of their language, are perhaps

the most interesting of all the Himalayan races, not even excepting

the Newars of Nepal proper.

By means of the notices contained in the Classics of the east and

west* we are assured that the Kirdnti people was forthcoming in

their present abode from 2000 to 2500 years back, and that their

power was great and their dominion extensive, reaching possibly at

one time to the delta of the Ganges. Moreover, the general tenor

of these classical notices is confirmed by the Vansdvalis or chro-

nicles of Nepal proper which show a long line of Kiranti sovereigns

ruling there from the mythic age of the shepherd kings (Gdpal)

down to the 14th century of our wera. And lastly, these distinct

historical data harmonise with a well-known tradition which assigns

a very unusual (in these regions) amount of power and population

to the “ many-tongued’” Kiranti. We know not when the Kirdantis

were expelled from the plains of India; if indeed they ever held

permanent possession there. But it was the Mall dynasty of Nepal

proper which about the middle of the 14th century expelled them

from the great valley ; and the Sahs of the eastern or Vijayapur

branch of the Makwdnis by whom their independance in the moun-

tains, probably about the same period, was greatly trenched on,

whilst the Sahs of the house of Gorkha, now sovereigns of the

modern kingdom of Nepal, completed the subjection of the Kirautis

about a century ago.

* See Miiller apud Bunsen and Caldwell and lists of castes taken from Menu

and the Puranas apud Calcutta Quarterly.

448 On the Kiranti tribe of the Central Himalaya. [No. 5.

Adverting to the high recorded antiquity of the terms Kirat or

Kirant and Kirati or Kiranti (vague nasal) as applied respectively

to the country and people, even to this hour, it is remarkable that

the Kirantis themselves do not readily admit the genuineness or

propriety of those terms, but prefer the names Khwombo vel

Khombo and Kirawa as their general personal designations and seem

to have none at all for their country. But the Kirantis, always

ignorant of letters, have been now for a long time depressed and

subdued; and, huddled as they now are into comparatively narrow

limits, they are yet divided among themselves into numerous tribes

and septs speaking dialects so diverse as not to be mutually intel-

ligible; and hence they are wont to think only of their sectional

names and to forget their general or national one.

It is difficult, owing to the varying limits at diverse eras, to

ascertain the precise force of the territorial term Kirant in the

view of the people themselves. But the following statement of

boundaries, divisions and included septs may, I believe, be considered

sufficiently accurate for all present purposes.

Kirint.

1. Walio Kirént or 2. M4njh Kirdnt or 3. Pallo Kirant or

Hither Kirant. Middle Kirant. Further Kirant.

Respective tribes.

Yakha. Bontava. Chourasya.

Limbu. Rodoneg.

Lohorong. Dungmali.

Chhingtang. Khaling. ,

Dini.

Sangpang.

Balali.

Lambichhong.

Bahing.

Thilung.

Kiulung.

Waling.

Nachhereng.

This is Kirant in the larger sense, and including Khwombuan or

Kirant proper, and Limbuan or the country of the Limbus. ‘She

1858. ] On the Kiranti tribe of the Central Himalaya. 4.49

popular inclusion of the latter people is important and I believe

well founded, as also that of the Yakhas, though both are often

alleged to be not Kirantis. They are at all events closely allied

races, having essential community of customs and manners with

the Kirantis, and they all intermarry, nor probably do the dialects

of the Limbus and Yakhas differ much more from the Khwombu*

tongue, than that tongue now does from itself, as seen in the several

dialects of the septs set down above under “ Middle Kirant.’”’ The

comparative vocabulary already submitted to the Society will go far

to decide these questions when taken in connexion with that gram-

matical analysis of the Limbu tongue which I am now engaged on,

The boundaries of Kirant in its three subdivisions are—

1. Sdnkési to Likhu,

2. ikhu to Arun, ; EN BS a

3. enn to Méchi ane t Fiscnaict tt

ingilela ridge,

Such are the territorial limits of the extant Kiranti race, in the

larger sense. Their numbers probably do not now exceed a quarter

of a million; but the tradition which I referred to above, assigns

two and a quarter millions as the amount of their population at

some remote and not well ascertained period when their country

was customarily spoken of as the “no lakh kirant,” and the

phrase was interpreted to mean that a house tax at two annas per

family yielded nine hundred thousand annas, whence, if we allow five

souls to a family, we shall obtain two and a quarter millions of

people for the Kirantis inclusive of the Limbus and Yakhas, and

possibly the Vayus also. The Kirantis occupy the central or health-

ful region of the mountains, and never descend, to dwell there, into

the lowest and malarious valleys of that region. Consequently

they are not reckoned among the Awalias or tribes inured to malaria.

Nor can they be placed among the broken tribes, great as is

their antiquity and devoid as they long have been of political

independence, and moreover, allied as they are by the character

of their language to the above two sections of the population of

Himalaya or the Awalias and the broken tribes, (see Essay

referred to above). The Chiefs or kings of the Kirdntis were

* Potius Khombu. The intercalated “w’ is a dialectic peculiarity of Bahing,

450 On the Kiranti tribe of the Central Himdlaya. [No. 5.

called Hang or Hwang. There are of course none such now nor

have been for five centuries. Their village headman they still

denominate Pasung, equivalent to Rai in the Khas tongue of their

present masters the Gorkhalis. The pasung has still under the

Gorkhali dynasty, a good deal of authority over his people. He

collects their taxes and adjusts their disputes with but rare reference

or appeal to the Rajah’s Courts. |

Unlike most of the subjects of Nepal, the Kirdntis retain posses-

sion of the freeholds of their ancestors which they call walikha, and

the owner, thangpung hangpa. Hach holding is extensive, though

not generally available, owing to the high slope of the surface, for

the superior sort of culture. The boundaries of an estate are defined

by the run of the water. The tax paid to the Government by each

landholder or thangpung hangpa (literally, lord of the soil) is 5

rupees per annum, 4 being land tax, and 1, in commutation of the

corvee.

The general style of cultivation is that appropriate to the uplands,

not the more skilful and profitable sort practised in the level tracts,

and, though the villages of the Kirautis be fixed, yet their cultivation

is not so, each proprietor within his own ample limits, shifting his

cultivation perpetually, according as any one spot gets exhausted.

Arva in annos mutant and superest ager. The plough is sometimes

used, but very rarely, and the use of it at allis recent and borrowed,

nor has the language any term for a plough. The produce is

maize, buckwheat, millets, peas, dry rice and cotton. The general,

almost exclusive, status of this people is that of agriculturists.

They did not till lately take military or menial service.* They

have no craftsmen of their own tribe, but buy iron implements,

copper utensils, and ornaments for their women from other tribes,

and supply most of their simple wants themselves. The useful

arts they practise are all domestic: fine arts they have none, nor

ever had: no towns, and only smail villages of huts raised obliquely

on the outer side on wooden posts some three to six feet, so as to get

a level on the slope of the hill ; size small because the children separate

* Jang Babadur has lately raised some Kiranti regiments, He is wise and has

seen in time and provided against the risk of a too homogeneous army. The

Kirantis have of late freely taken menial service with us in Sikim.

1858. | On the Kirdnti tribe of the Central Himilaya. 451

on marriage; walls of thick reed, plastered, and the pent roof of

grass. Hach family builds for itself. The women spin and weave

the cotton of native growth, which constitutes their sole wear, and

the men and women dye the clothes with madder and with other

wild plants—whereof one, a climber, yields a fine black cclour. They

make fermented and distilled liquors for themselves, and use the

former in great quantities—the latter moderately.

The Kirantis have not, nor ever had, letters or literature.* Their

religious notions are very vague. ‘Shey have no name for the God

of gods, nor even for any special deity whatever, though the term

mang may be construed deity, and that of khyimmo or khyimmang,

household deity or penate. Noris there any hereditary priesthood,

or any class set apart and educated for that office. Whom the

mang inspires, he is a priest and his duty is to propitiate the Khyim-

mang or Penate of each family by an annual worship celebrated

after the harvest, and also to perform certain trivial ceremonies at

marriages and deaths, but not at births. The priest is named

Nakechhong, and he has, moreover, once a year, to make offerings to

the manes (samkha) of the ancestors of each householder, or rather,

to all the deceased members of each family.

The Kirantis believe heartily in the black art, and call its

professor Krakra, f&unyamayawo, &c. ‘The professional anta-

gonist of this formidable person, who undoes the mischief, bodily

or mental, which the other had done, who is at once exorcist and

physician, is named in the various dialects, Janicha, Mangpa, &e.

There are only two religious festivals per annum, oue to the

Khyimmo or Penate and the other to the samkha or souls of the

deceased.

As already said, birth ig not attended by any religious obser-

vances.

The Kirantis buy their wives, paying usually 25 to 80 rupees,

frequently in the shape of copper household utensils. If they have

iow

* The Limbus, like the Lepchas, have an alphabet seemingly original but neither

_ people has made much use of it, I submitted these alphabets to the native and

English scholars of Madras, Ava and Arrakan and was told they could not be

traced to any Indo-chinese or Dravidian source. I had priorly received a like

_ disclaimer from the Lamas of Tibet.

2h 2

452 Ou the Kiranti tribe of the Central Himalaya. . | No. 5.

no means, they go and earn their wife by labour in her father’s

family. They marry usually at maturity—nay, almost universally

so. Divorce can always be had at the pleasure of either party ; but

if the wife seek it, she or her family must give back the price paid

for her, and all the children will remain with the husband in every

event of divorce. 'The marriage ceremony is as follows. The priest

takes a cock in his left hand and strikes it on the back with the

blunt side of a sickle till blood flows from its mouth. According

as the blood marks the ground, the priest prophesies that the

offspring will be boys or girls; and if no blood flow, that the mar-

riage will be childless. ‘his is the essence of what passes and it

seals the contract.

The Kirantis bury their dead on a hill top, making a tomb of

stones loosely constructed. The burial takes place on the day of

decease. The priest must attend the funeral and as he moves

along with the corpse to the grave he from time to time strikes a

copper vessel with a stick, and invoking tke soul of the deceased,

desires it to go in peace and join the souls that went before it.

The law of inheritance gives equal shares to all the sons, and

nothing to the daughters, unmarried or married. Concubines are

unknown. Polygamy is allowed and not uncommon. Polyandry

unheard of and abhorred.

Tattooing is unknown. Boring of ears and nose common with

the women; rare with the men. ‘The hair is usually worn long and

so as to hide the Hindu-like top knot that is however always

forthcoming. The general character of the Kirdntis is rather bad

among the other tribes who consider them to be somewhat fierce |

and prompt at quarrelling and blows, especially in their cups,—a |

state very frequent with them. But at Darjiling they have now

for 15 years borne an excellent character as servants, being faithful, |

truthful and orderly, so that their alleged fierceness should, I think, —

be called manly independence; or be referred to their long past

days of political independence and martial habits.

I proceed now to the physical character of the tribe. Premising |

that I have long been habituated to these physical observations, by |

no means confined to the hills, I would repeat once* more that the

* See Preface to my Essay on Kocch Bodo and Dhimal.

1858. | On the Kirdnti tribe of the Central Himalaya. 453

Himalayan type, though upon the whole Mongolian, is not to be

judged, (any more than the African one by the negro) by the Kalmak

exaggeration of that type; aud moreover, that the type exhibits

here, as to the north and to the south of us, a large range of variation,

indicating, like the lingual type, that the Himalaya has been peopled

by successive immigrations of northmen belonging to many, pro-

bably to all, of the various subfamilies into which the restless progeny

of Tur has been (I think prematurely) divided by Huropean philo-

logists and ethnologists. J think, moreover, that I can discern this

sort of accord between the physical and lingual types, to wit, that

the tribes with simple languages have more, and the tribes with

complex languages have less, of the Mongolian physical attributes,

after careful elimination of the presumed effects of mixture of

breed (and such facts are always notorious on the spot) where such

mixture has taken place. Thus, a Lepcha or Gurung or Magar or

Murmi to a simple language unites a palpable Mongolian phy-

siognomy and frame, whilst a Kuswar, Dhimali or a Kiranti with

a language much allied to the higher Turkic, Ugrofinnic and Dravi-

dian type* possesses a face and form tending the same way.

I will now describe my samples, adding, lest I should be supposed

to have selected them unfairly, that they are men long in my own

service.

Dimensions in English feet and inches.

(1) Bontawa (2) Bahing (8) Thulung

MMPEMICTS NG. orc. s i.) sccceceoseeess. OA O oF Ore meget O)

Crown to Pewee Mitra ode 2veo 0 2REZEO 2° 3 0

we Neel te... ate O orien '@ 3 0 0

Fore and aft length of Heads Org a's 0 8 2 0 8 i

Side to side width of Ditto, ...... 0 6 O 0 6 } Oro" 0

MEE UIGUOL ..0 cy .cktecsiese es 2 Oe Borers er oO

Breamach OL face, ...5. 1. ees. OOF 2 0° 5° ¢ 0 5 4

Length of arm and hand, ...... are O Pili es made | O

Meer Or aris 2. tics dss. OO” O 09 2 GRig rs

mmo of fore arm, .......i.0.,.2.... O 9 FS 09 2 010 O

* The complex pronomenalization of the Kiranti verb, points to a special

connexion with Muller’s Munda subdivision.

454 On the Kirdnte tribe of the Central Himalaya. [No. 5.

Girth oftiehgnlgngan Meat. ah «Bid Li Gow delaGy ky

Dittovot cali Lee wow thee OAS 104 10 2

Girth tof. chest, 45). Ree 2 i, “23 2020 40 210 i

No. 1. A Bontawa, age 55. Head, long, narrow, vertical view

elliptic, equally wide fore and aft, widest between tle ears. Front

view of the head and face oval, with the cheek bones little protrud-

ed and the forehead not narrowing upwards. Profile or side view

good, nearly vertical, the mouth not being at all inclined to progna-

thism, and the forehead very little retiring, but chin somewhat

defective. Forehead of good height and breadth, nearly as wide as

the cheek bones. Eyes of good size, remote ; upper lid flaccid, but

hardly perceptibly bent down next the nose. Nose, long, straight,

pyramidal, well elevated though thick and with the nostrils elongat-

ed, not round. Mouth well formed, not -protuberant, of good size

and having shapely lips and vertical teeth not at all exposed, chin

not retiring but not advanced and rather defective. Jaws, neither

heavy, nor square. Colour, a clear light brown, deeper and less olive

than usual. No trace of ruddiness. Hair jet black, ample, straight,

glossy, strong but not coarse. Moustache, full and jet black. No

whisker. Eye-brows scanty and horizontal. No hair on chest.

Figure good but trunk and arms long, and legs short. Very moder-

ate development of bone or muscle for a highlander, and scarcely

more than in a plainsman.

2. A Bahing,30 years old. Head broader and shorter, vertical

view oblate ovoid, wider behind than before, but not flattened behind.

Front view of the face shows (like the head,) more breadth than

in No. 1, and is somewhat square owing to the projection of the

cheek bones and of the angles of the jaws. Profile, vertical as in

the last, with very little saliency of the mouth,a vertical but

somewhat narrow forehead, and a chin flush with the front of the

jaw. Forehead less fine than in the last, vertical to the front but

somewhat narrow or rather seeming so, owing to the lateral projec-

tion of the jaws and cheek bones. Eyes of good size remote,

showing faintly but distinctly the usual flaccidity and deflexion

towards the nose, of the upper lid. Nose, as in the last, long,

straight, pyramidal, broad but not depressed. Nostrils large and

round. Mouth of good size and shape, with moderately full lips

1858. | On the Kirdnti tribe of the Central Himdlaya. ABS

of which the upper has a tendency to advance more than the

lower, owing to the normal thickening of the gum. ‘Teeth fine and

vertical and not at all exposed. Chin devoid of the prominent

roundness of the part, flush with the jaw in front. Jaws heavy

and angular. Colour as in the last, pale ruddy brown, deeper and

Jess dull than the usual isabelline colour. Hair jet black, straight,

strong. No whisker. A scanty moustache. Eye-brows full. Chest

hairless. No more development of bone or muscle than in the last,

and figure, as before, good but noticeable for length of trunk and

arms.

No. 3. A Thulung, 22 years old, has the breadth of head and

face of the last, vertical view of the head showing great and remark-

ably uniform width in proportion to length. Profile line vertical, as

before, and all the details of the features wonderfully similar, as in

a strong family likeness, and figure also and colour.

Generalremark. All these three men have a depth of colour and

defect of bone and muscle assimilating them to the lowland Turanians

generally and differencing them from the highlanders generally

but especially from the Palusen, the Gurung, the Sunwar, the Murmi,

the Magar aud tne Lepcha; and the Bontawa has a head and face

carrying on the resemblance with the lowland Turanians and which

I believe to be so frequent among the Kirdantis as to deserve to be

called the rule, not the exception. In conclusion, I may perhaps

be permitted to say, asthe result of long years of practised observa-

tion that the effect, upon the Turanian northmen, of passing from the

cold high and dry plateau of “ Asie Centrale,” down the various steps

of the Himalayan ladder into the hot and moist plains of India is to

diminish the volume of bony and muscular development, to diminish

also the extreme breadth of head and face with the consequent wide

separation of all the double organs of sense and to modify the

defects of the eye, giving it a freer and straighter aperture and less

flaccid upper lid; moreover, that such tribes as, in the throng

of successive immigrations, have been broken, barbarized and driven

to seek refuge in malarious tracts, seem to manifest a tendency to

pass from the low Turanian to the low African or Negro type ;*

* Narrowness of head and face, and projec‘ion of mouth are the great marks

of the Negro type. Now I have an Urdon in my service in whom these marks

456 On the Kirdnti tribe of the Central Himalaya.

and lastly that, after these effects have been produced in the

course of numberless ages, it must always be unsafe to dogmatise

upon physiological or philological grounds only respecting the

special relations and characteristics of any given tribe without

abiding advertence to the general relations and characteristics of

such tribe, and to the proof of both that may be had by carefully

seeking out and weighing all the available evidence, whether

physiological or philological, moral or traditional.

The evidence of any reflux towards the north of the great tide

of Turanian population flowing wave after wave over India through

the numberless passes of the Himalaya, and also perhaps round the

Western and Eastern extremities of the chain, is faint, seeming to be

confined tothe Newar tribe of Nepal Proper, who have a tradition

of their return to Nepal after having reached so far south as Mala-

bar. Nor arethere wanting coincidences of arbitrary customs, of

the shape and use of agricultural and other implements and of words

and grammatical forms to countenance and uphold that tradition,

as I have already adverted to in my paper on the Nilgirians. ;

united to a very dark skin are conspicuous and his lips are very thick and his eye |

good, and his hair crisply curled, but not at all woolly.

i a rn ee fen 2 8 2G & FY we

5 PW wo 8 8 2°56 6 FT 8 OO bb 2 8 € & GU #B

a tt sé ltprh JE | i ape april =

Soeeec ec eemaeauRcEuE A

al =r aI

” |

LUST =+

= “>

a 7ig 4 PS

Ge ieee i

r Shy

ar in hs

7 | I

: = ze :

LUG. 6. | Curve ug 7.

| i

+ +

| [ee | -

oa fete 2 | Curve |\Fig, 2 _2e [se

BF ee f | ae ; ess Ss Liaive Lig. 2 |

et OS

CECH saneae secon ie

50 | | i | 29130 | |

2 _ |

: roe Saanme | :

ae == 2. =

(eh ae

| Cie

Py s.

oi y te

sil at ge Oa

4 beet etre if a i

ig a

ere

: Plate Il.

(8 STON RETR Dn 3 td Ces TO Ne OLED,

if ] 1 ale ]

Deoee een sees

Af.

Fig.10..@,...... 80} —}— -——}-—4

= i

29:05 Jt |

(| ac IL

Flg.10-0.... Se Soc i |

28-95 |. . J Ld _

= all {

Tig. 10... AGgusceeaa cose: SSeS = feral

“75|__| Ih | a { | 1 a

29-80).__| __| af fered ee eo ee i Jee]

BNE on

FGM. &....-0g

2 » nae rie

uy! Ae ‘oh

Ahab

oF hey ea

CYCLONE on 9th of AF APRIL, 1848,

SiS Seer

Tron Noeh to ilo Mudrught

| areas |

\ and

| ™ t ) i

| | | Tanivee \) SB. Current on 7th April.

1 / N44

|| LI i\ — \ + { ——

Ia Won otk ry =

| og { “SS \. The arrow-heads show the quarter

Oreuta Ny the win comes trom

| )

i (i

Ha YIN SS

| \Herzadah ‘

wh ia »)

| / ( Mt

| / }

| /

| : =

il / as Skee ANS 5

iH) y} J

} | ii UT Hig 5) yl

) II / } If SEE f \

| | . fi

| |] f ( \/

HW i fina Ith ] > Mauls

Ht | M igeapeeor) [cenceefh piling 22h SS aa

| | \ js en |e ¥ th

1; i * ay"

| | Caps, Wagrais | ‘ FO PA oth

5 \

| P =

i | \ * y PAE oth ¢

| \ Z alegeun

lant Ny

| | - }

= oy’ Ks

i oe ee es “ y

(Ss Se ae 7 eG 1,

Tf = AM, ak

Holt

| vp, Voon\o th

| soled \ Noon 8 th

| Les I \ ee

i / va

| mel \¥

| : Canter Ne 2 | {en oh *

\ 9 i | fal Y «if Tavey

\ \ Uideos [slandls i iu | =)

AM \9 1%

SS aa

Port Gerniwatlen

Nareonulam

~Malniaht 7th

LITTLE ANDAMAN

ee | ‘

cars

ar daa

ew ji

FNS

Cautre Moore 10

ze Ith,

ape Haprais

‘

8 AA 10 .

A N Rangoon

= LS

ANDAMAH) In Ds

vy) Share I

Port Mawatt Port Blau

Ohat>

ne me

——

— : 2

CYCLONE on 10th APRIL, 1858,

— . ———

trom Midnight of 9th to Noon of 1th.

The arrow-liads shew the quarter

| RA /,

| A A p

a Catre Q4 PM 9a ” P&

§ Sw -- - SS - = |__ Moon hs

\ i Hoon. 10th.

\ j

Sopa ie. )

\ Preparis

< P é

~ ax iv

: qu

Cotre Noon Ith ie Ih |

SGrcos T# M elas

"ort: Cormavallis OWaramdar:

13\

the wind comes fron.

i ee

eat ae «

“

PE Nepryis

Q Prepares 1.

GREAT

ANDAMAN

Mereui

a 2a) E

ee \ I NS a

LO a, he \

Z . Ty ; G

oe i *s ¥

Z Ee Nov

0 THE TWENTY FIFTH MEMOIR \ \ LITTLE Cyelene

on the. = ANDAMAN

r Bes Sf Sterne =>)

being:

G ee cB Asis Chelona = S

“forthe Gulf of Marlaban. =e

S May 1852 <

HoAee

NC Bien pling

Tith: By WM Smith Suave Genlé Office Calcutta Feb? 1868,

os rough, ct tea

ee Se A ee ee ee

so. | papapmag se lei thee cere pdust preva 10

wi ; ‘

i .

‘Meteorological Observations. xlix

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of July, 1857.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

feet.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

o iS y:

2 Ot S Range of the Barometer So Range of the Tempera.

aie during the day. Fa 3 ture during the day.

o> = ae)

mak as

A = Cae . Se ; ;

3 So 4 Max Min Diff i Max. | Min. | Diff.

a) = =

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches (a) 0 0 Oo

1 |29.422 | 29.464 | 29.373 0.091 Vr 81.8 77.8 4.0

2 413 .466 372 094 81.8 85.9 78.6 7.3

3 425 462 373 .089 81.6 85.2 79.2 6.0

4 409 449 ol 098 82.4: 86.0 79.5 6.5

5 | Sunday

6 381 A426 328 .098 81.3 84.8 79.3 5.5

7 .466 544 .396 148 81.7 85.3 78.8 6.5

8 0D43 595 501 094 83.1 87.2 79.4 7.8

9 563 .598 499 .099 83.7 87.2 80.4: 6.8

10 528 575 478 O97 84.1 90.0 81.2 8.8

11 -516 .060 444 116 82.0 84.2 80.2 4.0

12 | Sunday

13 015 559 465 .094 84.7 90.0 81.2 8.8

14 514 551 450 LOL 83.9 89.4 80.0 9.4:

15 .476 .530 412 118 84.3 88.9 81.0 7.9

16 476 521 423 .098 82.9 84.8 81.4 3.4

| .500 .556 A454 .102 82.5 85.9 79.6 6.3

18 031 .598 477 121 82.2 85.6 80.0 5.6

19 | Sunday

_ 20 584 .628 541 .087 82.3 85.3 80.6 4.7

me2l {| .575 .626 512 114 81.7 84.0 79.6 A.A

_ 22 594 645 543 102 80.6 86.6 77.2 9.4

23 642 684 .597 .087 79.5 81.6 77.4 4.2

24 -678 732 .636 .096 81.3 87.5 78.2 9.3

25 -663 -714 082 132 82.9 88.9 79.0 9.9

26 | Sunday

27 .674 742 .608 134 81.7 86.5 78.6 7.9

28 709 756 654 102 82.1 88.4: 78.7 o7

29 .692 .748 .605 143 81.8 85.9 78.8 7 atl

30 -643 691 .008 133 82.0 87.5 78.8 8.7

31 .635 .674 576 .098 81.5 85.5 | 79.0 6.5

__ The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb .

ee romoters are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made during

_ the day.

] Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of July, 1857.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

= ° = cB) east || comme Se

a 43 = 2 S416 xu qo

2 Ay Ss en = efi EI

3 2 E e cS) Se ls easlies

ae Se Bt Bao) Be eee ee

2 6Q 5 = a alse =

co Qu S) ? | s S & = S| as bo

§ 8 b> 5 al o> oo io os Sie

= a S) a =) = < =

o o ft) ry Inches. | T. gr.| T. gr.

1 78.1 1.6 7.3 94 ,, 0.919 9.94 0.78 | 0.93:

2 79.5 2.3 78.3 3.5 949 | 10.20 | 1.20 | .90

3 79.6 2.0 78.6 3.0 .958 32 02 |>.Ok

4 80.3 2.1 79.2 3.2 .976 .bO ell .90

5 Sunday

6 79.0 2.3 77.8 3.5 934 .05 19 | .89

7 78.8 2.9 77.3 4A 919 9.90 47 | 87:

8 80.0 3.1 78.4 4.7 .952 10.21 .65.| .86

9 80.7 3.0 79.2 4,5 .976 A5 .62 Beir |

10 80.5 3.6 78.7 5.4 961 ol .90 84

ll 79.8 2.2 78.7 one 961 .30 12 .90

12 | Sunday

13 81.7 3.0 80 2 4.5 1.008 i .65 87

14 81.1 2.8 79.7 4.2 0.992 .63 .50 .88

15 80.9 3.4 79.2 5.1 .976 45 83 .85

16 80.6 2.3 79.4 $.5 .983 Dd .25 .89

17 80.1 2.4 78.9 3.6 .967 39 | 225.| 489

18 80.1 Dek 79.0 3.2 .970 44: .1O 91

19 | Sunday

20 80.2 2.1 79.1 oan 973 47 1) 2EE 90

al: 79.3 2.4 781 3.6 943 14 23 89

22 Tine 3.3 75.6 5.0 871 | 9.39 .62 .85

25 Fie 2.3 76.0 3.) 882 | 52 -14.| .89

24 | 78.2 3.1 || 0766 4.7 899 ||: 2567 [2 iG.) 8a%

25 79.7 3.2 78.1 48 943 10.12 .67 .86

26 | Sunday.

27 78.8 2.9 Th 4.4 919 9.90 AZ.) 87

.28 78.8 3.3 vigil 5.0 913 .82 .69.| .85

29 78.7 ol GUL 4.7 913 82 |: «58.|— 84

30 78.9 SL 77.3 4.7 919 .88 09 .86

3oL 78.8 2. 774 A. .922 93 08 88

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants.

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of July, 1857.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

o8 . | Range of the Barometer for

Ses each hour during the

og month.

Hour. | 1 3 2,

624 | Max. | Min Diff

owe & : 5

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches.

. 29.561 |29.744 |29.372 | 0.372

uf 547 .129 “| 809 370

2 535 713 348 365

3 525 .708 336 372

4, .528 704 328 .376

5 2034 .703 .380 323

6 549 715 .300 362

7 .565 729 388 841

8 578 751 410 341

9 586 756 417 339

10 088 754 A421 333

11 .080 736 422 14

Noon.| .567 725 408 317

1 .990 705 384 21

2 527 691 370 321

3 -510 .682 349 Rist)

+ 498 .665 .339 .330

5 496 654: 41 313

6 -006 .655 .306 .299

7 527 664 373 291

8 546 694 401 .293

9 .566 720 419 .306

10 082 748 -426 322

11 081 741 A22 19

Mean Dry Bulb

Thermometer.

Range of the Tempera-

ture for each hour

Max.

during the

month.

Min.

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several hours

during the month,

lit Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of. the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

; in the month of July, 1857.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

5 3 2 ® = ogee: (eae “ee

= Pol 8) et 8 | ee eee lee

2 > > = Sy wa, |s ae

= 5 E ° ws e's | One S6

Ss = 2 a) Hi =. = = oO oo

Hour.| @ 2 3 A 3s as 80 gy at - em 2. oS

San) 2 | Srl2., | eee See.

RE a) 23 )af oe | eee eee ae

a: Pe a po | $6 | S82 (SPStSaa8

= Q s) Q = = <q Ss

or cen | EE AD RR ay RE A PBN BATT ST FO Se

0 1) ty) ) Inches, |, 'T. gr. | perer.

Mid- | eg | 201 77.6 | 3.0 | 0.928 | 10.01 .| 1.00 | 092

night. 5 A d oO. 4 * 4

1 78.6 1.8 977 2.7 | .981 04 0.90 92 |

2 78.5 1.8 77.6 97 .928 "| | or. age 4 1 ee

a 78.4 1.7 77.5 2.6 | .925 9.98 .86 92

A 78.3 1.7 774 2.6 | .922 95 .86 92

Bl) e7Sell 1.8 77.2 2.7 916 4° 88 89 92

6 78.1 1.7 77.2 2.6 | .916 .89 86 | 92

7 78.4 1.9 TTA 2.9 922 95 9600) ST

8 79.0 | 2.4 | 77.8 3.6 934 | 10.05 1.22 89

9 79.6 2.9 78.1 AA 3948 "") aa) ee 87

10 80.1 3.5 78.3 5.3 949 | 18 85 85

11 80.6 3.8 78.7 5.7 | .961 .29 2.02 84

Noon.| 80.7 3.6 78.9 5.4 .967 37 101 84

1 80.9 4.0 78.9 6.0 967 BA 2.15 83

2 80.9 |. 4.1 78.8 6.2 964 sal 22 82

3 80.9 3.8 79.0 5.7 .970 37 .05 84

4 80.8 3.6 79.0 5.4 .970 .40 1.91 85

5 80.4 | 3.3 18.7 5.0 961 31 76 85

6 80.2 3.0 78.7 4.5 961 31 58 87

vf 79.8 2.8 78.4 4.2 952 23 ADS .88

8 79.4 | 2.5 78.1 3.8 943 mien 30 .89

9 79.4'1 2.8 78.2 3.5 946 17 .20 89

10 79.2 2.3 78.0 3.5 | .940 ll .20 .89

11 79.0 2.1 "7.9 3.2 .937 10 07 90

— a

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants.

Meteorological Observations. hii

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of July, 1857.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

ad |e

So |bad ,

eek es |e 2 of the Wind.

oS ou os]

ae eo

) Inches

Be le Ses ae Cloudy : also drizzling occasionally.

A) ae 0.37 |S. W.&S. Cloudy ; also raining between 8 & 10

A. M.

Seis 4.1.22 | 8..W. & 8: Cloudy and constantly raining between

3 and 10 a. M. also between 8 and 11

P. M.

A) ae 2.20 |S. W.&S. Cloudy, also occasionally heavy shower.

5| Sunday.| 0.79

Bh) Se 0.23 | 8. Cloudy, with occasional drizzling.

a se 0,30 |S. Cloudy with little rain.

| ae eal [5% Cloudy. :

ee ian | Se Cloudy.

HO; we -2|8. 8, W. Cloudy. Also slightly drizzling between

5 and 9 P.M. [8 a. M. and 1 P.M.

aire SO USAW ACase Cloudy. Also slightly drizzling between

12| Sunday.| ..

| 3 ee O28 1 S.&8. Wo)” Cloudy. Also rain at 3 P. M.

Cl eee 0.92 |S. &8. W. & N. W./Cloudy and raining occasionally.

1) ae > Bese Cloudless till 7 a. M. cloudy afterwards.

a) ke 0.15 |S. W. &calm &S. |Cloudy and raining between 1 & 2 P. M.

| ee 0.79 |S. W. & 8. Cloudless till 2 a. M. cloudy till 3 P. m.

Scatd. i & “i till 8 Pp. M. cloudless

afterwards. Also raining between 6 &

94. M. [P. M.

ay). 0.70 |S Cloudy, & constantly raining betore 3

19| Sunday.| ..

mO) ws 0.66 |S. & S. W. Cloudless till 5 a.m. cloudy afterwards :

also constantly raining after 8 A. M.

ee) ve 0.40 |S. Cloudy. Also incessantly raining between

Midnight & 2 P. M. [4 &10 Pe, M.

re Lee |S. Cloudy. Also incessantly raining between

23] . oe 0.08 |S. &S. W. Cloudy. Also occasionally raining.

ee 0.26 |S. &N. EF. Cloudy. Also raining at 5 P.M. [5 P.M.

oo} Ole Seirus 60 Oe VV Cloudy. Also very slightly drizzling at

26| Sunday. | 1.53

27); ae 0.56 | HE. &S, HE. &S. Cloudy. Also raining between 2&3 P.M.

| | ee 0.16 | EH. &S8. E Cloudy. Also raining between 4&5 Pp. mM.

Zo} ws wal ae Se Cloudless till 4 a. M. Seatd. clouds till

7 p. M. cloudless afterwards.

“ae 0.27 |S. HE. & EH Cloudless till 4 a. M. Scatd. clouds after-

wards: also slightly raining from Noon

to 4 P. M.

31) ee way pilus Coens Cloudless till 5 Pp. m. cloudy afterwards :

also very slightly drizzling at 2 P. M.

\ i Cirro cumuli.

liv Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of July, 1857.

Montuty Resvrts.

| Inches.

Mean height of the Barometer for the month, ee oe 29.547

Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 9 4. M. on the 28th, ee 29.756

Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 4 A. M. on the 6th, ee 29.328

Extreme range of the Barometer during the month, oe es 0.428

)

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, oe ee 82.2

Max. Temperature occurred at Noon & 1 Pp. M. on the 10th & 13th,.. 90.0

Min. Temperature occurred at 10 & 11 P. M. on the 22nd, 53 77.2

Extreme range of the Temperature during the month, .. ee 12.8

fy)

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, we oe Ne

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 2.7

Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, .. die 78.1

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dae -point, 4. 4.1

Inches.

Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month, a ‘ 0.943

Troy grains.

Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, oe ee ue 10.14

Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, os 1.40

Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.88

Inches.

Rained 27 days, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, My; D2) ee 2,20

Total amount of rain during the month, a aA nm 12.98

Prevailing direction of the Wind, ee aA Broa S.

Meteorological Observations. lv

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of July, 1857.

Montuiy REsv.xts.

Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind

blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour when

any particular wind was blowing it rained.

Hour. : : 2 : : F .

S| .|6 5 5 S 1 (gual eS e}

A = s eILE |s ele lel da le

NJsz 2] E. las. E. ela ia|Wlels lel ié

No. of days.

Midnight. 1 3 2) 5 2

1 1 3 2) 5 A

2 2 Zk 3] 4 3

3 3 1 3 ab. ela 3

4 1 3 Bi an led 3

5 2 3 1 (joel Sycap-| ig! vt ff 1

ab 8 3 3 3] 6/2 Ba St

” 2 5} 1 dl eevee i

8 6 |1 1} 11 | 4 1

9 1 3 2 1] 9 | 4) 2 et

os 10 3 2 ra SN 1

11 1 2 D Sis 2h 2 y

Noon. 2 1 3 3114] 4) 1

1 1 2 2 4.11] 3] 2

9 ii 3 4, 4t 8 | 2) 2

3 1 3 3 7) \ ay faa ee Ue 1

4 2 1 1f 13 | 2 2

| 5 1 2 31 9 | 2 Bat

| 6 1 2 | die 31 6 1

7 1 1 3 31 5 1

8 1 1 3 2.5/1 1 1

| 9 1 2 2 B) oe

| 10 1 3 2 215

11 1 2 3 1

lyi Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of July, 1857.

On the 21st July, 1857, the Meteorological Observations after ten minutes

intervals being taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, they indicate the following

circumstances.

A. INES 3 20 &

Exact Time of Minimum Barometer, .. ;

PM. 4& 50

A.M. 10 40

Ditto Maximum Barometer,..

Pp. Ms 10 30

h. m. h. m.

A. M. Between 7 0 & 8 O during

the whole of which interval the ther-

Ditto Minimum Temperature, | agmener stood at the same reading

79.6 which was the lowest tempera-

ture during the day,

hem.

Ditto Maximum Temperature, P.M. 4 10

Meteorological Observations. Ivii

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of August, 1857.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

Feet.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11,

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

Se me) 6S)

ii S as Range of the Barometer oa s Range of the Tempera-

“So Es during the day. be & ture during the day.

Saeee Az

Date. iy Boe

sa2 | Max. | Min. | Diff. o& | Max. | Min. | Diff.

SI =

Inches. | Inches, | Inches. | Inches, Oo |: oO 0 oO

1 29.632 | 29.665 | 29.574 0.091 80.3 84.0 78.4 5.6

2 | Sunday.

3 .650 .701 579 122 81,0 85.0 77.6 7A

4 578 .671 493 178 | 81.0 83.6 79.4 4.2

5 -508 dT 446 111 80.3 81.8 79.0 2.8

6 462 .006 422 .084: 79.5 81.4 76.6 A.8

ei 454 492 .392 .100 81.0 84.0 78.7 5.3

8 AAT A87 389 .098 | 81.8 85.0 79.1 5.9

9 | Sunday.

10 469 .536 A24 112 80.9 83.4: 78.8 4.6

11 .005 .Do38 A457 .096 81.5 87.0 79.4 7.6

12 514 558 447 -Lil 81.0 84.2 79.4 4.8

13 483 .030 407 128 81.1 86.0 ViPatE 8.3

14 462 512 .386 .126 81.8 86.8 78.8 8.0

15 473 016 403 113 82.4: 87.4 78.8 8.6

16 Sunday.

17 438 .506 .309 147 82.2 88.8 79.8 9.0

18 406 456 1D AZ 82:8 87.7 80.2 75

19 .352 A463 -239 224, 81.9 85.4 79.6 5.8

20 493 .568 418 150 | 82.7 87.7 78.6 On

21 wel 576 463 2113 } 684.1 89.0 80.9 8.1

22 534 576 482 .094 | 83.5 85.3 81.8 3.5

23 | Sunday.

24 084: .629 Doo .096 | 81.4 86.2 77 A 8.8

25 587 .638 O11 127 83.7 89.4 80.6 8.8

26 561 .604 492 112 | 84.2 89.0 80.6 8.4

27 571 .635 513 122 | 83.6 89.4 80.6 8.8

28 .596 .650 .530 .120 82.8 86.4 80.2 6.2

29 5717 .619 518 101 82.7 87.4 80.3 7.1

30 | Sunday.

31 561 732 587 145 82.3 86.0 79.6 6.4

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived, from the twenty-four hourly observations made, during

the day.

lviil

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of August, 1857.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements |

dependent thereon. (Continued.) |

)

Date.

DI os cd Looe

fot fad pe

De Ot

Mean Wet Bulb Ther-

mometer.

Sunday.

78.6

G92,

78.5

77.5

78.4

79.2

Sunday.

78.9

78.5

78.4

79.0

Sunday.

79.6

80.0

79.0

79.8

80.5

80.6

Sunday.

78.3

79.8

80.1

80.0

79.3

79.6

Sunday.

79.8

Dry Bulb above Wet.

oo G2 9 BR oD G9

mt OUD Re 6 et

2.5

Computed Dew Point.

78.5

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.

E = Se ee

Qa a 5.° - 9 a5

oO oH ww 9 Ss

5 sa oe Lee lw oe: @

2 C6 (ergo o.9 ae

3 2 wn on 8 ee =)

3 Sie leas | ea @

2 2i| 33 Ee

cae ES = BS |[ae2u}| 2 23

ae 2. eee | ss ;

i) ais eS Soe o-| aor e

eae oF S28 sie.) sos

i) = = = = |

o'' | Inches. |’ Deri e) Bier |

32 | 0.913 | 9.86 | 1.05 | 0.90 @

3.6 922 .93 21 89

2.7 949 | 10.22 0.92 92 |

27 928 OL 90 92

3.0 896 9.69 .97 91

3.9 913 .84 1.30 88

3.9 937 | 10.08 .o2 88

3.0 937 10 00 91

3.6 .937 .08 23 89

3.0 .940 18 01 91

3.9 916 9.87 30 88 °

5.1 902 -70 70 85

5.1 919 88 73 85

3.9 .949 | 10.20 wo 88

4.2 .958 .30 45 88

A.A: .925 9.96 48 87

AA: .949 | 10.20 .o2 .87

5.4 961 ol .90 84

4.4 973 49 .dd 87

4.7 .902 9.70 oT .86

5.9 .934 | 10.01 2.06 83

6.2 .940 07 AZ .82

5.4 .946 15 1.88 84

5.0 .925 9.94: 81 .85

4.7 .940 | 10.09 .63 .86

3.8 955 27 31 .89

Meteorological Observations.

lix

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta

in the month of August, 1857.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

Hour,

Mean Height of

the Barometer

at 32° Faht.

Inches.

29 .545

531

O14

.508

502

507

524

539

052

508

-560

550

ONANEWNEH

fed

Hoo

534

O14

A491

AT2

461

462

494

521

544

.560

596

FOUOMANOOBAONEH

ba het

dependent thereon.

Range of the Barometer

for each hour during

the month.

Max. Min, Diff.

TInches.| Inches.| Inches.

29.671 |29.398 | 0.273

.664 | .391 273

660 | .354 .306

.650 ool .299

.629 342 .287

633 342 azo

-668 202 316

.695 307 398

-696 .369 327

.698 .376 322

705 375 .390

-691 364 327

.683 .000 .350

.660 301 309

.638 .261 377

.622 .239 383

.619 251 368

634 271 .003

649 14 .330

673 046 327

.698 -388 310

17 403 314

732 A29 .803

732 428 304

Mean Dry Bulb

Thermometer.

84.5

83.5

82.6

81.9

81.6

81.3

81.0

80.9

Range of the Temperature

for each hour during

the month

Max. Min. Diff.

oO oO oO

82.9 77.6 5.3

82.7 77 A 5.3

82.6 77.6 5.0

82.4 [7.5 A.9

82.2 77.6 4.6

81.8 77.8 4.0

82.6 76.6 6.0

83.8 77.8 6.0

85.4: 78.8 6.6

85.8 79.4, 6.4:

87.5 79.8 rier)

87.8 79.9 7.9

88.8 79.4: 9.4

89.4 80.8 8.6

89.2 80.6 8.6

89.4: 80.6 8.8

87.4 79.9 Tees

86.8 79.4 7 A:

84.0 725 4.5

83.8 79.6 4.2

83.8 79.7 A.1

83.2 79.4 3.8

83.2 79.4: 3.8

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulu

Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several honrs

during the month.

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of August, 1857.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—( Continued.)

eS} = = e ra) BO Sosa /138

go) Bele lee ie See

O) = o u WSLS Esp Dis Swe

331° > EB > de) 2 ag +9 |

Hour. | 2S S A 3 Ss, op el? | a Be

gq | 2 Ce ate ol ee eee ee | ogee

so 3 = 34 Uo ar Soars eo Se

ce 5 aa) 2, (ata te c = silk Boe Sea

= 5 s E pst Beall 38 cold Pees | fers 8

& a s) a = Pe Me adn. <<. on as

) i) o 0 Inches. |Troy grs.|Troy grs.

meld v3.7 | 18 | 77.8 | 27 | 0.934 | 10.07 | 0.91. | 0.92

1 78.6 Uy, FA Ay 2.6 931 OA 87 92

2 78.4 1.7 77.5 2.6 925 9.98 .86 92

3 78.4 1.6 77.6 2.4 .928 10.03 .78 93

A 78.1 1.6 rls 2.4 .919 9.94 78 .93

5 78.0 1.6 77.2 2.4: .916 91 .78 .93

G-| 7794 Lila 7eOey Berd.) Pie 83 .86 92

Ff 78.2 1.8 Mi ee 2.7 919 92 .89 92

8 78.7 2.3 77.5 3.5 .925 .96 1.18 .89

S 79.5 3.0 78.0 A.5 .940 10.09 5D 87

10 79.7 3.9 re ee) 5.9 Jol 9:98 2.05 83

11 80.1 4.1 78.0 6.2 .940 10.07 AF .82

Noon. 80.3 4.3 78.1 6.5 943 .08 B81 81

1 80.3 4.5 78.0 6.8 .940 .05 AL Sl

2 80.4: 4.2 78.3 6.3 .949 16 .23 82

3 80.2 4.4 78.0 6.6 .940 .05 .o4 81

4, 80.2 4.3 78.0 6.5 .940 .05 .00 con

5 79.9 3.6 78.1 5.4 943 12 1.88 84

6 79.5 5 77.9 4.7 937 .06 .62 .86

'h 79.2 2.7 77.8 4.1 934 .05 09 .88

8 79.2 2.4 78.0 3.6 .940 iki 23 89

9 79.1 2.2 78.0 3.38 .940 13 ll .90

10 79.0 2.0 78.0 3.0 .940 13 .O1 IL

11 79.0 1.9 78.0 2.9 .940 13 0.97 91

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants.

Meteorological Observations. Ixi

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of August, 1857.

Solar radiation, Weather, c.

| Date.

OO ST Od Or eS) ee

Bee ee

PRwWNH OO

Max. Solar

radiation.

Sunday.

124.0

131.0

Sunday.

5 feet above

Rain Gauge

Ground.

iS)

a>)

3.74

0.58

0.17

0.64

1.25

Prevailing direction

of the Wind.

e A

Ze ee L &

eA eR

ee &

S.& 8. W.

Ss. W.

S.W.&S. &S&, E.

0.23 |S. E. & E.

General Aspect of the Sky.

[&1 P.M.

Cloudy also raining between 10 4, M.

Cloudy, also raining between 4&8 A.M.

Cloudy, also raining between 8 4. M. &

3 P. M. [P. M.

Cloudy, also raining between 1 and 6

Cloudy with incessant rain.

Cloudy and occasionally drizzling.

Cloudy and drizzling occasionally.

Cloudy and raining between 2 & 3 P.M.

Cloudy with occasional rain. [P. M.

Cloudy & also raining between 1 and 2

Cloudy with slight drizzling now and

then.

Cloudy and slightly raining after 12.

[2 and 5 p. mM.

Cloudy and slightly drizzling between

Cloudless till 2 a. M. cloudy afterwards ;

with occasional drizzling.

Cloudy with occasional drizzling.

Cloudy also raining constantly.

Cloudy.

Scatd. -i till 9 a. m. cloudy afterwards,

also very slightly drizzling between

4&5 P. M.

Cloudy also constantly raining before

sun rise. [6 Po M.

Cloudy also very slightly drizzling at

Scatd. clouds also raining between 9 &

10p.mM. .[5 P.M. and midnight.

Cloudy also incessantly raining between

Cloudy also occasionally drizzling before

sun rise.

Cloudy also raining between 4&7 Pp. M.

Cloudy also raining between 3 & 4 P.M.

WW. cirro cumuli.

Mi Cirri, i cirro strati, %i cumuli, ~i cumulo strati, \~i nimbi, —i strati,

Ix Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of August, 1857.

Montruiy REsvuuts.

; Inches.

Mean height of the Barometer for the month, ee -- 29.520

Max. height of the Barometer, occurred at 10 & 11 P. M. on the 81st, ... 29.732

Min. height of the Barometer, occurred at 3 P.M. on the 19th, -- 29.239

Extreme Range of the Barometer during the month, He -. 0.493

)

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, ss oe 82.0

Max. Temperature, occurred at 2 Pp. M. on the 25th, and 4 Pp. M. on the 27th, 89.4

Min. Temperature, occurred at 7 A. M. on the 6th, n. fs 76.6

Extreme Range of the Temperature during the month, .. Sie 12.8

; ty)

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, ne is 79.2

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 2.8

Computed Mean Dew Point for the month, oe =e 77.8

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed Mean Dew Point, .. 4.2

Inches.

Mean Elastic force of vapour for the month, .. ain ais 0.934

Troy grains.

Mean weight of vapour for the month, ee a oe 10.05

Additional weight of vapour required for complete saturation, Sis 1.42

Mean degree of Humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.88

Inches.

Rained 28 days. Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, a os 3.74:

Total amount of rain during the month, a oe oe 18.70

Prevailing direction of the Wind, .. aa “ oe S.

Meteorological Observations. Ixili

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

om the month of August, 1857.

Monrutry Resutrts.

Table showing the number of days on which ata given hour any particular wind

blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour,

when any particular wind was blowing it rained.

M1 =<. a So

Hour. 5 S 5 5 Silas S| .|e] 6 (3

=) (ane EIS) EIB) s sels] el?

Nuc 17; [ce | EB. |od fos (08 bos |e des le IE lee le lets SiS

No. of days

Midnight. 1 6/115) 712] 2 GL aa

1 if 5 6] 2711) 1) 1 Red

2 if 5 6; 2110} 3] 1] 1 Pel 1

3 if 1 A, 6} 3710) 2} 1) 1 BL i

4 ip 1} 1f 3 | Uj 5) 1f10;) 3) 2 1 2

5 1 2 3 5| 1f 8) 2] 4) 1 it 2

6 Dh DSi be), Lies 8} 1! 4

7 Sate 7 | BZ 8) 31 3 1

8 1 Sith S| Jes 7| 316 1

9 A A, 4 8 4, 1 1

10 1 3) Uh. 5) L6G 4, Vi

11 3] 1f 7} 2) 3 3 8 2

Noon. 4| 2 6 | 3 4 A! 11 6 2

7 4, 4 | 2] 4 Sat 1

2 Al st 3) | Lb 6| 3] 8] 3

3 2) 1) 5 | 22 1} 2] 5} 27 1

4, 2) 1) 2/1) 4 O27) he Tl 2

5 2; 1) 2) 1) 6 8) 1] 7) 11

6 2 2 6 Ly 25-5) 1

re 2 3 | 1] 4 2| 41 5

8 1 3 6) J11) 215

| 9 1 4, 6| 710) 2t 4 |

| 10 b 4,116) f1l1] 4] 2 t 1

) 11 1 4 6; 12) 11 2 1

xiv | Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of August, 1857.

On the 20th August, 1857, the Meteorological Observations after

ten minutes intervals being taken at the Surveyor General’s Office,

they indicate the following circumstances :—

h.m. h.m.

A. M. Between 3-10 &3-20-during which

Exact Time of Minimum Barometer,... time the Barometer was stationary.

h, m.

A. M. 30-10. |h. m. h. m.

P. M. Between 10-30. & 10-50 during

Ditto Maximum Barometer, which time the Barometer was sta-

tionary.

h. m. h. m.

Ditto Minimum Temperature,...... A. M. 3-30 also 7-30,

i. mM. h.m.

. P. M. Between 2-30 and 2-40 during

Ditto Maximum Temperature,,..... i which time the Thermometer was sta-

tionary.

Meteorological Observations. Ixv

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of September, 1857.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

feet.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

a = hye Range of the Barometer 3 2 Range of the Tempera-

mo ES during the day. mo 5 ture during the day.

> = & Po io)

may QA=&

. ae) < ©

2 -o ee Max Min Diff. so Max. | Min. | Diff.

Gs) ow Ss =

=) = a

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches ty) 0 0 °

1 |99.7299 | 29.794 | 99.673 0.121 83.1 87.8 79.5 8.3

2 .680 ‘748 596 152 84.0 89.5 81.5 8.0

3 .608 677 553 124 83.2 88.2 | 76.6 | 11.6

4 .629 .686 548 138 82.6 88.3 79.0 9.3

5 624 697 543 154 82.1 87.8 78.6 92

6 | Sunday.

7 | (536 585 456 129 81.6 86.0 79.2 6.8

8 AT3 DDS 374 179 77.8 79.6 76.8 2.8

9 p66 |, .662 488 174 79.1 83.0 75.6 7A

10 .666 .720 621 .099 80.3 83.6 | 78.5) 5.1

11 .738 805 679 .126 82.7 88.4: 78.4 | 10.0

12 764 .840 .690 150 84.2 89.2 80.0 Se

13° | Sunday.

14 .690 £753 618 135 85.1 91.0 82.4 8.6

15 .746 814 .685 .129 84.0 90.2 | 80.4] 98

16 749 813 .669 144 85.5 91.3 81.4 3

17 .718 -790 637 153 84.7 89.4 81.6 7.8

18 aio 773 -669 104 81.2 86.8 76.4 | 10.4

19 772 .820 732 .088 80.5 84.6 78.6 6.0

20 | Sunday.

21 .800 848 759 .093 79.4 82.3 78.2 ALL

22 774 833 721 112 81.2 85.2 risa 6.1

23 £776 837 722 115 81.4 87.2 78.6 8.6

24: 748 .798 .685 113 81.7 85.8 78.0 7.8

25 | -763 823 697 .126 83.5 89.2 79.6 9.6

26 756 818 .696 122 82.0 85.4 79.6 5.8

27 | Sunday.

28 -749 .800 .689 Let 85.3 91.6 SOL PC ELS

29 “781 834 722 112 84.0 90.6 78.6 | 12.0

30 764 837 .683 154 83.6 91.6 77.4 | 14.2

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made during

the day.

Ixvi Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of September, 1857.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon. (Continu ed.)

: 2 s.l28 \e3

S ‘ QA @ Seo ia 8 |e

a 3 2 2 S Sbies | al ee

fH o =) o Oo a fo} s+

= 5 2 < =) mu. 3s

2 iam ° Sal s5 as Ss a =

a ) : 2 z RO) a See

2 2 A 2 a 2 care | Po

2 s I oH 05 |\aZos| tot =

Bs 2 2 S 4s ms ee |e Slots

2 3 = oa = = 2 So ¢, a TC & 3

so ma a. 3 a 5 e*% |S 380) 2 wo

6 8 > g be | vor | oS) ieee oo

= a S) fa a = < a

Oo re) ro) oO Inches. | T gr uy by gr

1 hs) 353 78.1 5.0 0.943 | 10.12 | 1.74 | 0.85

2 80.7 3.3 79.0 5.0 970 40 U7 \x.286

3 79.8 3.4 (oul 5.1 943 12 Ta | ae

4 79.4 3.2 77.8 4.8 934 03 65 | .86

5 79.5 2.6 78.2 3.9 946 17 234 | .88

6 | Sunday

7 78.3 3.3 76.6 5.0 899 9.67 67 | .85

8 76.0 1.8 75.1 2.7 857 28 +. 0.85 | .92

9 77.3 1.8 76.4: 21 893 .66 87 | .92

10 78.5 1.8 77.6 254 928 | 10.01 190) [92

ll oud 3.0 78.2 4.5 946 is 15 i pe eS ga = 7

12 80.2 4.0 78.2 6.0 946 Biss leg 83

13. | Sunday

14 81.0 4.1 78.9 6.2 967 34 23 82

15 80.5 3.9 78.7 5.3 961 ob a 1386 85

16 81.1 4,4 y hoy) 6.6 967 32 | 2.40 81

17 80.5 4.2 78.4 6.3 952 aS) 23 82

18 77.6 3.6 75.8 5.4: 876 9A4 | 1.77 84

19 78.1 2.4 76.9 3.6 908 78 20 89

20 Sunday

21 77 A 2.0 76.4 3.0 893 66 | 0.94 91

22 78.8 2.4 77.6 3.6 928 99 | 1.22 89

23 78.7 2.7 77.3 4.1 919 .90 37 88

24 79.0 rags 77.6 4.1 .928 .99 .38 88

25 79.5 4.0 77.5 6.0 .925 92 \. 2,08 83

26 79.3 2.7 (eS) 41 .937 | 10.08 | 1.39 88

27 «| Sunday.

28 ao 5A 77.2 8.1 916 9.79 | 285 | .78

29 77.2 6.8 73.8 10.2 822 8.80: |, -oo7 ||) gee

30 77.0 6.6 73.7 on 819 8 25 73

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants.

Meteorological Observations. Ixvil

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of September, 1857.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

Range of the Tempera-

41 $ aS Bone’ Lhe ise for E 5 ture for each hour

< 24 each hour during the E during the

ete month. mS ah.

Hour. | 7 3 2 5 As

inca fe : ;

Eau Max. Min. Diff. S oy Max. | Min. | Diff.

= =

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. ) Oo ty) ft)

au 29.719 |29.819 |29.524 | 0.295 | 80.7 | 842 | 77.2] 7.0

1 707 803 511 .292 80.4 83.6 76.8 6.8

2 .697 .798 507 291 80.2 83.2 76.8 | 6.4

3 1687". |" °.785 AOL 294, ry 83.0 76.6 6.4

4 .685 775 484 291 CET 82.6 76.0 6.6

5 .696 187 478 309 79.5 82.4 76.0 6.4

6 .710 802 ASL 321 79.5 82.6 75.6 7.0

v4 729 822 500 322 80.1 82.8 75.6 7.2

8 750 839 .509 330 81.9 84.8 77.3 7.5

2 £759 845 490 .355 83.1 86.4: 77.8 8.6

10 759 846 489 307 83.8 87.8 76.8 | 11.0

11 745 848 456 392 85.0 89.0 Me2a) LES

Noon.| .726 833 445 388 85.6 90.1 77.9 | 12.2

it .698 £798 408 .390 86.2 Oi.2, 78.0 | 13.2

2 671 BAS 7 74 A423 86.5 91.6 MEAL |p LGD

3 651 .788 377 ALL 86.0 91.6 77.2 | 14,4

4 644, .763 .388 375 85.5 90.8 77.8 | 13.0

5 .649 755 409 346 84.2 89.4: CUED We

6 663 £759 AAT 308 83.1 87.8 Gael 5 LOST

‘i 684 Wie 459 312 82.2 86.6 76.6 | 10.0

8 Tit .789 483 .306 81.7 85.2 76.6 8.6

9 727 803 524 219 81.5 84.5 78.1 6.4:

10 £734 813 528 .285 81.3 83.8 78.4 5.4

11 731 806 537 .269 81.0 83.6 78.4: 5.2

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived from the observation made at the several hours

during the month.

Ixvill Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of September, 1857.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

= + “3 e o Ln) biol 4 1

Belge | ae | ee ee ea aie

2 > E B e =e |s 8

si) 2| a |2,| 22 |P*S bse eliss

Re | 8 | Bo }ee | or OG oo Ieee se

Sg a g be | $6 | $a8 SPREE SESS

= a S) Qa = = < =

ao | pon | eicune wane Sees eeAPENtOML Ps) ohe ee

0 0 7) ty) Inches. T.-gro] > -Foge

Mid- 21 | 77.5 | 3.2 | 0.925 1.06

miebt 78.6 ; : 3 9.98 : 0.90

1 78.4 2.0 774 3.0 922 .95 0.99 91

2 78.3 1.9 77.3 2.9 919 92 .96 O91

3 78.0 7 VEL 2.6 913 .86 .86 92

4 77.9 1.8 77.0 2.7 910 83 .89 92

5 TT, 1.8 76.8 2.7 .905 Ys .89 92

6 77.8 7 76.9 2.6 .908 .80 .86 92

7 78.3 1.8 77.4 2.7 922 95 289 92

8 79.1 2.8 VERA 4.2 931 10.02 1.42 .88

9 79.3 3.8 77.4 5.7 .922 9.89 97 83

10 79.4 4.4, 77.2 6.6 .916 81 2.29 81

11 79:9 5.1 77.3 TA 919 .82 71 78

Noon. 80.3 5.3 77.6 8.0 .928 91 85 78

1 80.3 5.9 77.3 8.9 919 .80 3.19 £75

2 80.5 6.0 77.5 F6 .925 .86 24 715

3 80.3 5.7 77.4 8.6 922 83 .08 .76

A, 79.9 5.6 77.1 8.4 913 .76 2.96 Bh

5 79.3 4.9 76.8 7A .905 .69 5D 79

6 79.4 3.7 7725 5.6 .925 92 1.94 84

4 79.0 3.2 77.4 4.8 922 OL .63 .86

8 78.8 2.9 77.3 4A 919 -90 AT 87

9 78.8 2.7 77 A 4.1 .922 93 38 88

10 78.6 2.7 77.2 A.1 916 87 37, .88

11 78.7 2.3 77.5 3.5 .925 .96 18 .89

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants.

Meteorological Observations. Ixix

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

é| rd

3 &&

1 ee

2 ee

3) «114.0

4| 122.0

|| ae

6| Sunday

Bhresds

8 ee

| ar

TO) a's

11} 113.4

12) 135.0

13| Sunday

14) 188.0

2 ee

16} 133.0

a7) 119.9

18} 120.0

i ae

20| Sunday

mal fe

Z| we

24,

26 es

27| Sunday.

28; 132.8

29) 137:0

30} 138.0

5 feet above] —

Rain Gauge

Ground.

pels

5S)

s oD

0.18

0.08

0.16

4.10

2.21

1.14

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

an the month of September, 1857.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &e.

Prevailing direction

of the Wind.

in i eee ee

Variable.

Hh. & N. E.

B, (high.)

S.E. & BE. & N. EH.

[ (high)

E.&S8

General Aspect of the Sky.

Sertd. 1 & “ialso raining at 1 P. M.

Cloudy; also slightly drizzling between

11 a. mM. & Noon. [& 7 P.M.

Cloudy, also heavily raining between 6

Scatd. ‘i & 1 till 7 a. M. scatd. clouds

afterwards. [tween 9 & 11 a. M.

Scatd. clouds; also raining slightly be-

Cloudy and constantly raining.

Cloudy and raining incessantly.

Cloudy and raining incessantly before

sun rise and occasionally after it.

More or less cloudy till 7 p. m. cloudless

afterwards ; also heavy rain at 7 a. M.

and 6 P. M.

Cloudy till 8 p. m. cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless till 3 a. M. cloudy afterwards.

Cloudy, also raining heavily between 4,

and 5 P. M.

. |Cloudy till 8 p. M. cloudless afterwards,

also slightly raining at 3 P. M,.

Cloudless till 74. M. Scatd. “i afterwards.

Cloudy. [& 8 P.M.

Scatd. clouds. Also raining between 2

More or less cloudy the whole day, also

slightly raining between 11 a. M. and

2 P. M.

Cloudy also raining occasionally.

Cloudy and slightly drizzling four times.

Cloudy also raining between 3 & 4 P. M.

Cloudy.

Cloudless till 5 a. mM. Scatd. clouds after-

wards. Also very slight drizzling

between 5 and 6 P. M.

Cloudy also drizzling about Noon.

. |Cloudless till 8 a. M. scatd. 71 till3 P.M.

cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless.

Ni Cirri, -i Cirro strati, \i Cumuli, ~i Cumulo strati, \-i Nimbi, —i Strati,

\ i Cirro cumuli.

Ixx Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of September, 1857.

Monruty REsuLts.

Inches.

Mean height of the Barometer for the month, ae ae 29.705

Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 11 a. M. on the 21st, 15 29.848

Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 2 P. M. on the 8th, ae 29.374

Extreme range of the Barometer during the month, as Ete 0.474

Co)

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, AS <6 82.5

Max. Temperature occurred at 3 Pp. M. on the 28th & also 2 P.M. on the 30th, 91.6

Min. Temperature occurred at 6 4. M. and also at 7 A. M. on the 9th, .. 75.6

Extreme range of the Temperature during the month, .. ws 16.0

Co)

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, we 43 79.0

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 3.0

Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, .. aa ee 77.2

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point, .. 5.3

Inches.

Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month, 56 ae 0.916

Troy grains.

Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, ee ee A 9.85

Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, an 1.79

Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.85

Inches.

Rained 20 days, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, ae oe 4.10 *

Total amount of rain during the month, js ee ee 13.30

Prevailing direction of the Wind, aie ais .» H&S. Be

Meteorological Observations. Ixxi

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of September, 1857.

Montuyuy Resvrts.

Table showing the number of days on which ata given hour any particular wind

blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour when

any particular wind was blowing it rained.

Hour. & S a a] & S se) Ps ‘

(Sj 2 WHS) S OF ° . ° OF ro) Be}

elels £ £ s| = ls eye isi € [2

Njeiz @) E. le|S. Bee S. ef of lei Ww. le} jel S iS

No. of days.

| |

Midnight. | 1} | 3) 1[ 5 Blab 3 3 Lge (aul Bol Tt

1 2} | ila) 6 5} | 3 3 Bi ey ed 3

2 BAW 6) We eae 4 1 rola hee lp! 3

3 2702) 215 1 61 1b. 8 1 at: Vl my A

4 ZAM SEL wae AMINA ells Sn) op i Aa iat (aaa | Sd

5 Pee hee fo) 2be ei BPs 2 Aa ee 3

6 CARS 0 aio ae 7 3 2 pie ih tal 3

7 ZN 7/3) 5 4, 1 2 1 3

8 Al 13 (gal ty eas Sa faa 3 3

9 3} 14) 1) 6 A) Ube 3 4 i!

10 5| | 3i 1] 5 650 a 4 2

11 4, 11 3 Soe ame aan Hie 3

Noon. 5) 5} 1} 2/1) 5) 2 4 Bel Ry aiclrecte FB

i 5] 1] 4 At | esl ed aloes | Oh forbs 9

a 7 (es) ie le a a=) 2 goat Wem SA i aa

3 2A aE So: I 4 ees 4 | 1 DP 41

4 1) KS are WG) We Gide. 2 sa ie

5 9] 1) 3 Ga | Ob aN eee ae ae oy

6 2 18 6| 4) 4 6/2) 3 cali | laa

7 2) | 4 ae ae a 2 Ci Er

8 113 fa ea 7 3 1 1 1

9 Hi 2 5 2 me) a 1 1 1/2

10 3 aa bia 6 4, 1 1 Hea

1l 1) | 3 7a oa eres 1s a 3 1 bi

a ie

. és rere s

joy taht ave? sT too

wus ah r } tae ,

vrs

| me bios

i are

idl ni

ee ee ee BS

a ——

(

_— oo

2 =

, =

—y @

am laa

ee died

“ | i i

elem it

t hie ; ir 7 i

; eee A :

mei [us ee pats eu

es he) ae | a

i bs hg

ah 7 a y @

ah 7 ’ eae

B49 i€ ue hi rh "1

3. , by

LA F ,

py: t a.

et- oN

} ae, t > ~- @&

; ie! a eT

¢ = nit om s

Seen le h

J 1" iM

, z= i *

“

7 Gee HS.

Meteorological Observations. | Ixxili

Abstract of the Resuits of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of October, 1857.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, ia

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

eu au

¥ as Range of the Barometer 3 3 Range of the Tempera-

“So 5 = during the day. bs a ture during the day.

ep = \ 8

Date, | 72 ES E s

FA Ss | Max Min Diff ® H Max. | Min. | Diff.

Ss a

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. oO oO oO 6)

1 29.753 | 29.801 | 29.681 0.120 | 83.5 90.7 76.4 | 14.3

2 .760 817 694 123 | 84.9 91.2 V9.0} | 22.2

3 784: 838 725 113 | 84.5 90.7 79.9 | 10.8

4 | Sunday

5 839 895 778 117 | 84.8 91.8 81.2 | 10.6

6 832 897 176 LA al 82-1 87.9 79.0 8.9

7 819 .869 71 .098;| 81.7 88.0 78.2 9.8

8 861 916 813 103 | 82.8 88.2 G00) -| 10.5

9 912 2997 853 144: 81.2 87.8 77.8 | 10.0

_10 891 967 822 145 | 83.0 88.7 78.2 | 10.5

11 | Sunday.

12 882 955 814, 141 | 83.0 88.1 78.4 9.7

13 .922 | 30.000 856 144 | 82.9 89.2 (SL) | lat

14: 959| .040| 914) .126| 82.2 | 87.9 | 76.9 | 11.0

15 935 .020 847 ip aherol.9 88.7 75.8 | 12.9

16 870 | 29.946 793 153 | 82.9 89.0 76.8 | 12.2

17 856 .938 800 | .138 | 82.9 88.3 79.6 8.7

18 | Sunday. |

19 890 .969 833 136, 84.1 89.8 80.0 9.8

20 .906 .982 854 2B tke d 88.0 76:2) | LS

21 .933 |, 30.003 877 126 | 80.1 87.4 73.2 | 14.2

22 942 014 .886 128 | 80.4 87.7 73-8) | 13.9

23 914 | 29.973 842 GH di 80:9 87.2 75.0 | 12.2

24, 885 956 831 125 | 81.6 87.0 77.2 9.8

25 | Sunday.

26 934: .978 892 086 | 77.3 79.5 73.6 5.9

27 .890 961 819 142 | 77.9 82.0 73.7 8.3

28 .826 891 .761 130 | 77.9 83.0 73.6 9.4

29 .825 884 -768 .116 78.3 84.0 72.2 | 11.8

30 844 919 790 129.| 79.5 87.1 74.6 | 12.5

31 831 903 770 133 | 80.0 86.8 75.2 | 11.6

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

T ‘hermometers are derived, from the twenty-four hourly observations made, during

tl 1e day.

}xxiv

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

wn the month of October, 1857.

of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

Daily Means, &c.

dependent thereon.

; ss bee

a=} 3 a=} Q

aa) = Ss

a >

= o fo)

a 5 Slaves

Date. ; = Q

2 3 2 i =

ae Wy ee i dea)

=e) oa a 3

® A Pe E Po

a a Ss) A

oO oO tf) te)

1 77.1 6.4 73.9 9.6

2 79.0 5.9 76.0 8.9

3 78.7 5.8 75.8 8.7

4, | Sunday.

5 79.2 5.6 76.4: 8.4:

6 77.8 4.3 75.6 6.5

a 77.5 4.2 75.4 6.3

8 78.1 4.7 75. ek

oe 78.0 3.2 76.4 4.8

10 78.5 4.5 76.2 6.8

11 | Sunday.

12 78.2 4.8 75.8 7.2

13 77.0 5.9 74.0 8.9

14 75.3 6.9 71.8 | 10.4

15 75.3 6.6 72.0 9.9

16 76.6 6.3 73.4 9.5

17 78.0 4.9 75.5 7A

18 | Sunday.

19 ROSE 7.4 fOr ES

20 74.1 7.6 70.3 | 11.4

21 72.9 72 69.3 | 10.8

22 73.2 7.2 69.6 | 10.8

23 74.5 6.4 71.3 9.6

24, 75.8 5.8 72.9 8.7

25 | Sunday.

26 73.7 3.6 rls 5.4:

27 74.0 3.9 72.0 5.9

28 72.9 5.0 70.4 7.5

29 72.4 5.9 69.4 8.9

30 73.1 6.4 69.9 9.6

31 120 7.3 HEE ifn dit) 0,

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.

(Continued.)

3s | Es

as]

Oy m2

2 ae

eal S = Oo

alee aS

oF ee

= =

Inches.| T. gr.

0.824 8.838

882 9.43

.876 OT

.893 .56

871 85

.865 32

.873 38

893 62

.887 52

876 AL

.827 8.88

hEL .28

.776 oo

811 .69

868 9.33

801 8.57

.734 7.90

470 .66

elder) arf:

758 8.16

197 57

te 40

Aled 6) 40

£736 7.97

13 we

25 82

“704: -09

ro of |Additional Weight of Va-

pour required for com-

plete saturation.

Mean degree of Humi-

dity, complete satura-

tion being unity.

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of October, 1857.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

Hour,

Mean Height of

the Barometer

at 32° Faht.

Range of the Barometer

dependent thereon.

for each hour during

Mean Dry Bulb

Thermometer.

Range of the Temperature

for each hour during

the month.

Min.

eeereeercmeemeeeee | eeeeeneeeeneee | ee | me | et | ee | ee

Mid-

ft bet a

HODODNTONERWNHE

BS eww EnbOne

the month.

Max Min Diff.

Inches.| Inches.| Inches.

29.967 |29.773 | 0.194

.950 763 187

.948 .759 .189

.945 755 .190

.959 753 .206

.972 748 224

972 .766 -206

993 .782 211

30.024 801 223

.040 .800 -240

.0388 £795 243

.016 778 -238

29.990 £758 232

.963 729 234

.954 704, .250

.925 686 .239

921 698 223

914 685 229

.919 681 .238

.939 718 221

953 0745 -208

PS a te -200

973 .780 193

.976 776 -200

Diff.

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several hours

during the month.

Ixxvi Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of October, 1857.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—( Continued.)

= 3 3 E ro) 3 Oo os5a ss

E al ee eye ao, | eg

as > CS > Ro) ae mes | o 8s

Hour. = s S A S = be é g a o Fl 2

gs | 2 Soke o 5 | fe aa See a oes

ec 3 = su wo a Sse 8 Soars

=o be g ps cris ips S32. | Sete i Ss Ss

= A S A Si =| eC |) eee as

o Qo o Inches. |Troy grs.|Troy grs.

ak m9 | 3.4 \o7as b 47 | 0.888 4 9.08 |e a4ae 10.86

“di | 7o7iat s.cleraeell 40a. ssoet! eos AG 86

2 | 75.2 2.9 | 73.7 4.4 | .819 .89 33 87

3°| 75.0 2.8 | 73.6 4.2 | 817 .86 27 88

4 | 748 2.6 | 73.5 3.9 | .814 83 18 88

5 | 74.6 2.5 | 73.3 3.8 | .809 77 15 88

6 | 744 2.5 | 73.1 3.8 | .803 72 14 88

Hel YAR 3.0 | ue7s.3 4.5 | .809 75 38 .86

8 | 75.4 5.2 | 72.8 7.8 | .795 57 2.44 78

9 | 75.8 6.5 | 72.5 9.8 | .787 AG 3.12 73

10 | 763 Ze lomzoey al IIa. 490 AT 60 70

In 76.7 8.4 | 72.5 | 126 | .787 Al 4.16 67

Noon. } 76.9 93 | 72.2 | 140 | -.781 31 68 64

teil a 9.8 | 72.2 | 147 | .781 29 96 63

Beil | 767s) 10/30) 71. Ch U5.Boh.. 768 atl 5.18 61

Bo V6Tol OA, eZ Seely W568. .763 ih 22 GL

4 | %6.5 915 o71.7) 4h) 14.34. .768 19 4.72 63

5 | 763 8.6 | 72.0 | 12.9 | .776 .28 21 66

6 | 76.4 6/78 a7aton ms 10. Bele. :801 58 3.28 72

7 1 46.4 5.4 | 73.7 S.1peib. .8t9 82 2.58 77

8 | 76.5 4.6 | 74.2 6.9 | .832 .96 21 .80

9 | 762 4.2 | 74.1 6.3 | .830 .96 1.98 82

10. | 96. 3.8 | 74.2 5.7 | .832 .98 80 83

VW» | 95% 3.7 | 73.8 5.6 | .822 87 75 84

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants.

Meteorological Observations.

Ixxvu

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of October, 1857.

Solar Radiation, Weather, Xe.

131.7 e N.

He |&5

SS |S.ad

2)|..4 age of the Wind.

) Inches

ee a N. & Calm.

2} 140.0 | 0.20 | N. & N. W.

S| 128.45)". . N. & N. W.

4) Sunday.

5| 147.0 A Calm & N. W.

6} 110.0 | 0.07 | S.W.&N.W.&E.

7} 129.0] 0.14 | N. EB. & EB.

a ts2.0 )°0.15 | S& Ne

HO) 134.6) .. S. W. & Calm.

11) Sunday.| 0.89

12! 139.0 AA N. & Calm

13} 142.0 Ss N. H

14/ 140.0 a N. W. & Calm.

N. EH.

N. & Calm.

N. & Calm,

Calm & N. W.&N.

Calm & 8. EH. & W.

N. W.&N. & W.

General Aspect of the Sky.

Cloudless.

Cloudless till 9 a. M. Scatd. i till 3

p, M. cloudless till 9 p. M. cloudy and

raining from 10 P.M. to 11 P.M.

Cloudless till 7 a. M. Scatd. i till 7

p. M. cloudless afterwards.

Cloudy till 3 a.m. cloudless till 9 a. M.

various clouds afterwards.

Cloudy the whole day. Also slightly

drizzling between 2 and 5 P. M.

Scatd. clouds till 6 p. mM. cloudless

afterwards. Also little rain at 4 P. M.

Cloudless till 5 a. mM. Seatd. i till

6 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless till 2 a. m. Scatd. clouds

afterwards. Also drizzling between

7 and 10a. M.

Cloudless till 7 a. mM. Scatd. i till

6 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

Scattered -i till 8 a. m. cloudy till 6

Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless till 4 a. mM. Scatd. i till 7

P. M. cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless.

Cloudless till10 a. m. Scatd. 1 till

4p. M. cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless till 4 a. m. Scatd. “i fill

10 a. M. scattered clouds till 7 Pp. mM.

cloudless afterwards, also very slight-

ly drizzling at 7 Pp. M.

Scatd. clouds till 5 a. m. cloudless till

10 a. m. Scatd. 11 till 5 p. m. cloud-

less afterwards.

Cloudless till 10 a. mM. Scatd. %i till 2

Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless till 9 a. m. Scatd. 11 till 2

Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

N. & 8. E. & N. E. | Cloudless.

Ni Cirri, i cirro strati, %i cumuli, ~i cumulo strati, “~i nimbi, —i aera,

i cirro Falk

Ixxvili

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

Max. Solar

radiation.

Rain Gauge

5 feet above

Ground.

SIG

e lar

a>)

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of October, 1857.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky.

of the Wind.

wesc

N.E. & Calm &s. w., Cloudless till 6 a. m. Scatd. \i & “i

till 1 pep. m. Scatd. 11 till 6 P.M.

cloudless afferwards.

S.&S8. W. Cloudless till 8 a. m. Scatd. 11 till 6

Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

N. HE, &S. Cloudy. Also drizzling between 3 and

8 A. M.

N.& N.E. & E. Cloudy.

N. W.&N. E. &N.| Cloudless till 5 4. m. Seatd. “i till 3

Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

N. & Calm. Scatd. thin clouds till 5 a. m. Scatd.

i afterwards.

N. Cloudy.

N.& N. W. Scatd. clouds till 7 a. m. Scatd. \i &

\—i afterwards.

Meteorological Observations. Ixxix

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of October, 1857.

Montuty REsvrts.

Inches.

Mean height of the Barometer for the month, a aa 201870

Max. height of the Barometer, occurred at 9 a. M. on the 14th, -- 380.040

Min. height of the Barometer, occurred at 6 P. M. on the Ist, -- 29.681

Extreme Range of the Barometer during the month, we va, O.809

Mean of the Daily Max. Pressures, se ee -- 29,938

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, .. - ie .. 29.810

Mean Daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. ap WOLUZS

Cy)

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, ee oe 81.6

Max, Temperature, occurred at 3 Pp. M. on the 5th, ate ai 91.8

Min. Temperature, occurred at 6 A. M. on the 29th, ote af 72.2

Extreme Range of the Temperature during the month, .. ar 19.6

Mean of the Daily Max. Temperatures, AP ee ee 87.6

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, ws a“ te 76.7

Mean Daily range of the Temperature during the month, .. ee 10.9

)

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, oe ae 75.9

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 5.7

Computed Mean Dew Point for the month, oi ee 73.0

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed Mean Dew Point, .. 8.6

Inches.

Mean Elastic force of vapour for the month, .. se -- 0801

Troy grains.

Mean weight of vapour for the month, oe ws ee 8.60

Additional weight of vapour required for complete saturation, a0 2.74

Mean degree of Humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.76

Inches.

Rained 7 days. Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, ee ate 0.89

Total amount of rain during the month, be a me 1.60

Prevailing direction of the Wind, .. ee oe N. &N. W.

Ixxx Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of October, 1857.

Monruuy Rests.

Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind

blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour,

when any particular wind was blowing it rained.

Hour. So} .|5 Ss] .|6 | ./5 of: |S] (sie

else esis] (SE ls] |e Fletele(2

Nici lef E. lelsleiaielalalelelaleisisis

No. of days

Midnight. 10/ | 1 1 Le) ee 11

1 9) Jl i 1 12) ee 10) | 1

2 9} | 2 1 Ti? Wel ee 10

3 9} | 92 2 1) te ie 9) | 1

4 9} | 2 2 1] 14) 2) Jl 9} | 1

5 9} lk 2 1 we a ee |) 8|. | 2

6 11 1 1 1 3} 113 7

7 Aa 2) If 1 1] | 4) [4

8 16; 1) 3 1 Lid 2 2 1

9 I Wy, 1 iO Ree lia 3

10 10; | 6 3 2 6

11 8} 18 3 2) fl 5

Noon. 7 9 i 3 ”

1 Oe e7 1 2 1l {10

2 4l 1 6 2 1 3) 1471) [10

3 8| 13 3 2} | 2 3/1: 16

A g! Jo 1/174 [1 J2 7 1

5 LOL 2) 4) 1 6

6 9 13 1 4) | 3 6| Jl

4” 8 13 1 2) 1 3} | 2 6} | 2

8 8 13 1 2) 73) |2 5| 13

9 ff 3 1 2; 42 3 1 4 4

10 i 3 1 2 2 3 1 A, 4,

11 ee ae il 2) 2 Of Ald Dh see

Meteorological Observations. Ixxxi

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of November, 1857.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

feet.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon. °

é a Range of the Barometer = s Range of the Tempera-

oo ES during the day. FQ s ture during the day.

‘> = Pp 5

tag As

° gi a's? d rete

2 sa Max Min Diff Si Max Min. | Diff

a 1S =

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. oO o Oo 0

1 Sunday.

2 |29.882 | 29.940 | 29.828 0.112 79.5 87.5 72.8 | 14.7

8 .910 975 853 122 79.0 86.8 73.6 | 138.2

4 888 974 832 142 75.5 83.2 69.0 | 14.2

5 -858 932 £794: 138 76.1 85.0 69.4 | 15.6

6 848 930 791 139 75.2 84.7 67-4 |. 17.2

7 865 936 818 118 73.6 82.2 65.6 | 16.6

8 | Sunday.

9 .986 | 30.080 937 143 cay 81.4 62.8 | 18.6

10 .928 .003 .870 133 72.3 81.6 64.8 | 16.8

uk) 923 | 29.994 873 121 72.5 81.8 65.2 | 16.6

12 994 | 30.071 930 141 72.1 82.6 64.0 | 18.6

13 | 30.051 121 998 1238 72.1 82.1 63.6 | 18.5

14 045 126 962 164 72.5 82.4: 63.8 | 18.6

15 | Sunday.

16 .062 145 | 80.004 141 73.8 83.2 66.3 | 16.9

17 .048 120 | 29.980 140 74.2 82.8 OMe he 15:6

18 .015 .083 957 126 73.2 81.2 66.1 | 15.1

| 19 .031 107 979 128 70.5 19.4 63.2 | 16.5

| 20 -038 131 -964 167 69.6 79.6 61.0 | 18.6

lee 21 -003 079 998 121 70.4 79.4: 62.6 | 16.8

| 22 | Sunday.

| 23 | 29.961 .035 683 152 71.5 81.3 63-00) Lae

24 OTF .052 926 .126 71.2 80.8 64.0 | 16.8

25 -967 051 907 144: FLT 80.0 63.2 | 16.8

26 943 O14: 890 124 71.4 81.6 62.6 | 19.0

27 945 .019 895 124 72.4 79.2 67.4 | 11.8

28 .936 O11 873 138 29 79.5 66.8 | 12.7

29 | Sunday.

30 .976 .037 923 114 71.3 79.6 66.8 | 12.8

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bul?

Thermometers are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made during

the day. j

Ixxxil

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of November, 1857.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

ro)

Date.| @

& g

ty)

1 | Sunday.

2 73.2

3 72.2

4 67.8

4) 67.9

6 66.1

7 64.9

8 | Sunday.

9 64.7

10 65.1

11 65.1

12 64.1

13 64.4:

14 66.4

15 | Sunday.

16 67.3

17 67.5

13 65.3

19 63.2

20 62.4

21 63.9

22 | Sunday.

23 64.9

24 63.8

25 64.0

26 64.6

27 67.5

28 67.0

29 | Sunday.

30 65.0

dependent thereon.

3 =

e EM

> E

(Ss) o

Hs Q

2 3

a S

= 3

A Ss)

(0) (0)

6.3 70.0

6.8 68.8

77 63.9

8.2 63.8

9.1 61.5

8.7 60.5

7.0 61.2

2 61.5

7.4 61.4

8.0 60 1

77 60.5

6.1 63.3

6.5 640

6.7 64.1

7.9 61.3

7.3 59.5

2 58.8

6.5 60.6

6.6 61.6

7 A, 60 1

fa. 60.4

6.8 61.2

4.9 65.0

49 64.5

6.3 61.8

(Continued.)

E r)

a ®

3 =

Pca

es | "3

2 a 2

aloe o>

Q =

0 Inches.

9.5 0.727

10.2 .699

11.6 .595

223 .093

Bes -550

Bish 082

10.5 544

10.8 550

11.1 548

12.0 525

11.6 0382

9.2 084,

9.8 597

10.1 .599

11.9 .546

11.0 2515

10.8 503

9.8 034

9.9 1552

1titeab 525

10.7 .530

10.2 044

7 A: 1617

7A .607

9.5 .000

2 |e8

a4 oO

3 S oy

wa °

o jY~u.

ww, |S «=

o% |.00s a)

ey 2 o 2 e

"0.2 ane

sa isi¢

olen e

at Seo

Ss ie a

= <

Terai. et.

7.84 | 2.82

.56 94

6.47 99

45 | 3.18

5.99 08

81 12

97 | 2.46

6.02 -56

.0O .63

5.75 78

83 -70

6.39 24

52 46

04 55)

5.97 .85

.65 A8

153 37

.86 24

6.05 So

5.76 DA

82 46

.98 87

6.77 | 1.83

67 81

.09 | 2.24

complete saturation be-

Mean degree of Humidity,

ing unity.

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants.

{

Meteorological Observations. Ixxxtil

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

an the month of November, 1857.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

Se ty ‘ ‘ “as

2 3 ‘ Range of the Barometer for = 3 eae Sie ant

2 2.9 each hour during the oe) Gay aaerehe

= os month. be 8 A aa

Hour. a 2 as ae

So ed Max Min Diff. z 5 Max. | Min. | Diff.

oy & o o

= =

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. fo) fo) oO oO

Ee . 29.964 |30.078 |29.889 | 0.239 | 69.2 | 766 | 65.6] 11.0

af .957 .065 .840 .225 68.5 75.8 64.8 | 11.0

2 .948 .049 .835 214 68.0 76.0 Ga8 }} LA2

3 94.6 041 831 .210 67.3 75.3 62.8 | 12.5

A, .940 .049 .828 .221 66.8 74.6 62.0 | 12.6

5 .949 .059 841 .218 66.4 74.0 61.6 | 12.4

6 .970 O81 .856 225 65.8 73.6 61.0 | 12.6

7 .996 -108 S81 227 66.0 7A.3 61.6 |; 12.7

8 |30.022 126 .922 .204 69.7 77.9 64.2 | 13.7

9 .037 145 .930 215 ise | 80.6 69.6 | 11.0

10 .0382 141 .929 .212 75.8 81.9 CES. TOW

11 .010 126 .906 .220 78.3 83.2 74.2 9.0

Noon.) 29.979 .083 877 .206 80.2 85.6 76.6 9.0

1 944 .050 831 .219 81.3 86.6 78.4 8.2

2 .921 .023 .805 218 81.9 87.5 78.6 8.9

3 911 .018 791 227 81.7 87.3 78.8 8.5

4, .909 .005 791 214 79.7 85.4 76.8 8.6

5 917 012 £799 213 77.9 84.5 75.0 9.5

6 .926 .026 798 .228 (D.0 82.5 dao: | 100

rf 947 .049 .818 21 hud 80.8 70.4 | 10.4

8 .965 .065 .838 227 72.3 79.8 69.4 | 10.4

9 974 071 842 .229 71.4, 79.0 68.3 | 10.7

10 .980 .079 842 234 70.6 78.0 67.3)5| .10u7

Li 973 082 839 243 69.8 77.6 66.9 | 10.7

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several hours

during the month.

lxexxiv

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of November, 1857.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon. ( Continued.)

5 Gs = 5 S GS “ots Lt 2 te

a e 2 a 6 aan a Ze |z2 5

2 Se 6) ee ena Phe

3 ° o 2 Opts 45 (C3) fens Cees O56

Hoard) Sas 3 A S ra “ep a a

eSje | Boe) 2a) SAMs e eee

ay » x o = 5 =

Pee | ees le |e eee

@s b 8 ro] So | $82 (SPSE SEES

a a S) a = a < 2

| | a a a

) ) 0 ) Inches. | T. gr T. gr

Mid. 1 EB z

night 65.1 A. 63.0 6.2 | 0.578 6.37 1.44 0.82

1 64.7 3.8 62.8 5.7 574 33 .o2 83

2 64.3 3.7 62.1 5.9 561 ale, 34 82

3 64.0 3.3 62.0 5.3 559 19 Ailes: 84

4, 63.5 3.3 61.5 5.3 550 10 16 84:

5 63.0 3.4: 61.0 5.4: 541 .00 a / 84;

6 62.5 3.3 60.5 5.3 532 5.91 13 84

ef 62.7 3.3 60.7 5.3 596 94 14 84,

8 64.5 5.2 61.9 7.8 557 6.13 80 77

9 65.9 7.2 62.3 | 10.8 565 17 2.62 70

10 66.9 8.9 62.4 | 13.4 567 a7 3.37 65

11 67.4 | 10.9 61.9 | 16.4 007 03 4,25 59

Noon.| 67.8 | 12.4 61.6 | 18.6 552 5.94 94 5o

1 68.1 | 13.2 61.5 | 19.8 550 oo 5.33 53

Z 68.2 | 13.7 61.3 | 20.6 546 86 58 51

3 68.1 | 13.6 61.3 | 20.4 546 88 49 52

4, 67.5 | 12.2 61.4 | 18.3 548 92 4.80 55

5 68.1 9.8 63.2 | 14.7 582 6.30 3.86 62

6 68.2 7.3 64.5 | 11.0 607 61 2.85 .70

7 67.5 6.2 64.4 9.3 605 62 4 7A

8 66.8 5.0 64.0 8.3 597 54 04 76

9 66.3 5.1 63.7 oe ol 44 1.9L erie

10 65.9 4.7 63.5 7.1 588 46 69 79

11 65.3 4.5 63.0 6.8 578 36 59 80

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants.

Meteorological Observations. Ixxxv

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of November, 1857.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &e.

z o od

a ae

9 erotic!

$/ 423 |822| ofthe Wind

ers” med

re) Inches.

1| Sunday.

2} 140.0 -- | W.&S. W. &N. E.| Cloudless till Noon, Scatd. i till 4

P. M. Scatd. i afterwards.

3} 138.0 oe N. W. & W. Scatd. “i till 5 p. m. cloudless after-

wards.

4) 133.0 ie N. W. Cloudless till 11 a. m. Seatd. “i till 5

P. M. cloudless afterwards.

5| 134.2 A N. W.&N. Cloudless.

6} 137.0 Bs N. & W.& N. W. | Cloudless.

7| 132.5 sent NeW. é& W. Cloudless.

8) Sunday.

‘9 129.3 , N. W. & W. &calm. | Cloudless.

10; 139.0 ae S. W. & calm. Cloudless.

#1) . 132.0 a8 W. & calm. Cloudless.

12} 135.0 ate N. W.&S, W. Cloudless.

fet -131.5 Me N. W.&N. Cloudless.

PA) 133.5 ie N. W.&N Cloudless till 1 a. mM. Scatd. i till 3

Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

15} Sunday.

16) 133.5 ey N. W.&N. Cloudless.

17| 130.0 we N. W. Cloudless.

18) 134.0 ae N. W. &N. Cloudless.

19} 132.0 a N. W. &N. E. Cloudless till 8 a. mM. Scatd. “i after-

wards,

20) 134.0 me N. W.& N. Cloudless.

21; 129.0 nis N. & HE. Cloudless till 8 a. mM. Scatd. “1 after-

wards.

22) Sunday.

23} 132.0 ay N. E. &N. W. Cloudless.

24; 130.0 Se N. Cloudless.

25| 129.0 a N. & N. W. Cloudless.

26] 135.0 ah N. E.& EH. & N. W. | Cloudless.

27| 135.0 ‘ie E. &N. EH. Scatd. i till 11 a. m. cloudy after-

wards. Also very slightly drizzling

occasionally.

28} 130.0 ° N. Cloudy with very slight drizzling till 1

A. M. cloudless till 6 a. m. cloudy till

5 p. M. cloudless afterwards.

29| Sunday.

30! 125.0 /- W.&N. W. Scatd. i till 4 a. m. cloudless after.

wards.

Ni Cirri, i Cirro strati, \i Cumuli, ~i Cumulo strati, \-i Nimbi, —i Strati,

M i Cirro cumuli.

Ixxxvi Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of November, 1857.

Montuty RESULTS.

Mean height of the Barometer for the month, ws a

Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 9 A. mM. on the 16th,

Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 3&4 P.M. on the 6th, ..

Extreme range of the Barometer during the month, ee os

Mean of the Daily Max. Pressures, 50 aie ae

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, ae me oe

Mean Daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. a

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, ae ee

Max. Temperature occurred at 2 Pp. M. on the 2nd, ee ee

Min. Temperature occurred at 6 A. M. on the 20th, ee ee

Extreme range of the Temperature during the month, .. oe

Mean of the Daily Max. Temperature, ee a ee

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, ae de ae

Mean Daily range of the Temperature during the month, wa

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, oe ar

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, ..

Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, .. a a4

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point, ..

Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month, 3 ee

Inches.

29.963

30.145

29.791

0.354

30.039

29.905

0.134

65.9

62.3

10.7

Inches. —

0.565

Troy grains.

Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, ws we oe 6.17

Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, ee 2.59

Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.70

Inches.

Drizzled 2 days, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, ae oe Nil.

Total amount of rain during the month, .. Pr Nil.

Prevailing direction of the Wind, vis BA N. W. & N.

Meteorological Observations, Ixxxvil

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of November, 1857.

Montuty Resvtts.

Table showing the number of days on which ata given hour any particular wind

blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour when

any particular wind was blowing it rained.

Hour.

ay. 5 5 : g St ee) is

s/4 = fe iE fe eagle ele |</s)e]2

Njeiz ce] E. eis. Be] S. els lelw.lsiz |sisieie

No. of days.

Midnight. | 6, | 2 Aaa 2 y) 8 3

1 ih 2k pw 2 2 8 3

2 7 et 1 il 3 8 A

3 “| |1 i heal 1 3 7 4) Fl

4 8| | 2 1 i 3 7 3

5 5 2 1 1 3 8 3 2

6 8} J 1 ria aes 3 2 9 1

i. 8 2 1 2 i 10 1

8 9 2 3 11

9 7 2 1 4, 11

10 5) | 4 1 A 11

11 5 | 8 5 12

Noon. 5 4 3 13

1 A) | 5 1 1 2 12

2 6| | 2 1 1 2 13

3 3 2 2 3 15

4 5} Jl 1 3 3 12 |

5 5] Jl gat ae 1 5 id |

6 6 y, 1 1 4, 11

7 6| 1 3 1 4 10

8 5) Jl > nie | 1 4 10 :

9 Get t 3/11 1 1 5 8

10 6) Jl 3 1 1 4 7 2

11 6| | 1 3 if 1 5 8

Ixxxviil Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of November, 1857.

On the 17th November, 1857, the Meteorological Observations

after ten minutes intervals being taken at the Surveyor General’s

Office, they indicate the following circumstances :—

hsm. < (ise.

(A. M. Between 2-30 & 3-20 during the

| whole of which interval the Barome-

Exact Time of Minimum Barometer, < _ ter was stationary.

| hsm}

LP. M. 4-0.

h.}m.

A. M. 9-30. h. m. h. m,

: L P. M. Between 10-30. & 11-0 during

Ditto of Maximum Barometer,...... the whole of which interval the Baro-

meter was stationary.

hyn. Wins,

A. M. Between 6-30 & 7-0 during the

Ditto of Minimum Temperature,..,, whole of which interval the Thermo-

ter was stationary.

hi. m7. hy, ™m,

P. M. Between 2-20 and 2-30 during

Ditto of Maximum Temperature... the whole of which interval the Ther-

meter was stationary.

Meteorological Observations.

Ixxxix

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of December, 1857.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

Feet.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

aie,’

Date. im a

SSS

Inches.

1 30.022

2 041

3 053

zu) 084,

5 078

6 | Sunday.

ri 29.981

8 987

9 30.030

10 .052

11 .060

12 .056

13 | Sunday.

14 .002

15 .004:

16 29.992

17 30.028

18 .053

19 .035

20 |; Sunday.

21 017

22 .020

23 .000

24 .006

25 | .059

26 .070

27 | Sunday.

28 080

29 103

30 079

31 103

dependent thereon.

Range of the Barometer

during the day.

Max.

Inches.

30.096

125

137

.156

167

049

.065

102

127

138

-160

081

074

.068

.092

125

127

103

.105

.088

140

153

Min.

Inches.

29.975

.990

30.000

.033

.000

29.921

931

.969

30.002

001

29.988

941

.936

.965 |

990 |

972 |

.963

.961

943

952

30.011

008

Diff.

Inches.

0.121

-135

137

.123

167

128

134:

133

125

137

172

-140

138

151

127

135

155

140

144

145

136

129

145

Mean Dry Bulb

Thermometer.

Range of the Tempera-

ture during the day.

Min.

55.9

57.6

60.7

61.6

Diff.

SNe ee ee

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived, from the twenty-four hourly observations made, durmg

the day.

xe Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of December, 1857.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon. (Continued.)

rs E Se ee ne

e o = te

= 3 eee g Sweeter

= G @ 3 ag oo eee

2 o S we mS eae“ ole ees

: 5 B, biuee : oe |ees| joe

Date. Fatal: 2 Qa S So ede Sree

om 8 te) 2 ° yS S ai x g S

oo 2 <s = = 4 og Ds eS aes

Ps | 2 lee ies ee Soe oe

: fa ee Ulinimes: es a (ieee) ate

ao =a =) as S m6 Sp6

o & e 5 PA s> | $8 |saa| $53

= fa O a = = = =

tr) o o o Inches: | | Ter \ | eer:

1 65.3 5.2 62.7 7.8 0.572 6.29 1.84, 0.77

2 63.5 6.3 60.3 9.5 528 5.81 2,14 13

3 62.6 6.3 59.4 9.5 513 64: 10 73

4 61.5 6.9 57.4 | 11.0 480 29 33 .69

5 61.4 7A Sy ey ina Lo 485 4 37 69

6 | Sunday

7 61.2 6.3 57.4 | 10.1 480 .30 12 71

8 61.2 6.9 57.1 | 11.0 75 24: dl .69

Ss) 60.1 7.6 55.5 | 12.2 450 4.98 48 67

10 60.5 7.9 55.8 | 12.6 A455 5.02 60 .66

iH 60.0 7.3 55.6 | 11.7 452 00 37 -68

12 58.7 6.9 54.6 | 11.0 437 4.85 15: .69

13 | Sunday.

14 60.0 6.2 56.3 2.9 462 5.13 1.99 72

15 59.2 6.7 55.2 | 10.7 A445 4.94: 2.12 70

16 59.4 6.4 55.6 | 10.2 452 5.02 .02 sh

17 61.4: 5.7 58.0 sak 489 41 1.91 74

18 61.7 5.6 58.3 9.0 494, 46 91 74

19 61.6 5.5 58.3 8.8 494; 46 86 79

20 | Sunday.

21. 61.5 5.8 58.0 9.3 489 Al 96 73

22 60.9 6.2 57.2 9.9 476 26 2.06 72

23 60.6 6.1 56.9 9.8 A472 21 02 2

24, 60.8 6.1 57.1 9.8 ATS 20 .03 72

25 60.5 6.5 56.6 | 10.4 467 Bhi l 13 71

26 60.1 6.1 56.4 9.8 464: 14 1.98 72

27 | Sunday.

28 59.1 6.0 55.5 9.6 .450 .00 89 73

29 60.9 5.4: bY AY | 8.6 485 .36 79 75

30 62.2 6.9 58.6 9.6 499 ol 2.07 73

31 62.8 3.0 59.5 8.8 015 .68 1.92 75

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.

Meteorological Observations. X¢l

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of December, 1857.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

‘S 2 .| Range of the Barometer = 5 Range of the Temperature

oOo —— 4

34-4 for each hour during faa] 2 for each hour during

our, = a 2. a 5

ao Se 5 6 s = 5 A

eax Max. Min. Diff. Sey | Max. Min. Diff.

= =

Inches. | Inches.} Inches.| Inches. o Oo 0 o

night, [30044 80.118 29.975 | 0.138 | 638) 678) 602 7.6

1 .035 .105 .967 138 62.7 66.5 59.2 7.3

2 .025 .095 .962 133 62.1 66.2 58.7 7.5

3 014: .086 .950 1386 | 61.5 66.1 575 8.3

4 .013 .086 947 .139 | 60.7 65.8 57.1 8.7

5 .025 .098 .960 138% 60.3 65.5 56.4: 9.1

6 042 112 982 130 | 59.7 65.1 56.2 8.9

7 .066 .133 |30.007 .126 59.5 65.0 55.9 9.1

8 .097 .179 0384 145 62.2 67.8 57.8 10.0

9 119 189 .049 .140 66.0 70.0 62.4 7.6

10 17 191 .046 145 69.3 73.0 66.6 6.4:

11 .098 143 .028 145 | 72.6 75.0 69.9 5.1

Noon. .064 132 001 aol 75.2 76.9 72.8 4.1

i .029 .097 |29.963 184 | 76.6 78.6 74.6 4.0

2 .002 .068 .932 .136 “i2 79.6 75.4 4,2

3. | 29.986 .048 .922 126 76.9 78.6 75.0 3.6

A; 982 .039 917 122 75.1 77.0 73.0 4.0

5 .990 .053 925 .128 73.1 75.2 71.4 3.8

6 |30.000 .065 937 128 | 70.4 72.8 68.6 4,2

7 -020 .086 958 .128 68.6 71.2 66.4 4.8

8 .0388 -110 971 189 67.2 70.4 65.0 5A

me | 052 | .124) .985- |. 1391 66.2 | 696| 63.6 6.0

10 .061 127 .987 .140 65.1 68.8 62.4 6.4:

11 .056 123 -980 143 64.2 68.2 61.4: 6.8

Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several hours

aR UE Si LL ES CB, GS AO I A

| The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

| during the month.

X¢cli Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of December, 1857.

‘Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—( Continued.)

= 3 = B S oo eoag|ss

BY slo Bevel BL 2) vais oul Sauna’ al ae

i 2, a = Sai, oes. | (ore

peg! Es EB > = 2 ees | 2 oe

oO ° o ) 3s = oS E 2 2 = s

Hou. | = 3 3 A 3 BS, 80 aS ia

3 2 3 2 eS oer eee | irc Sa

=a) 3 = Bu VO Stewie E+ 0 a os

Sq 6 2 oe =o > wa | HBSe|] €Fe

ae g >) yee = 5< Seed EG?

ao Pm 5 PS. ind oOwm Jia e o = So

= a) tS) a = 2 le

Oo Cy) o oO Inches. |Troy grs.|Troy grs.

cee 59.4 | 3.9.1. 56%.) 66,| 0.469.) 622, 1) 129, | OM

F 1 59.0 37 56.4 6.3 464 18 2a 81

J 58.5 3.6 56.0 6.1 458 12 15 82

3 58.1 3.4 55.7 58 453 07 .09 .82

A. Gy pee 3.4 54.6 6.1 A437 4.90 .1O .82

5 57.1 3.2 54.5 5.8 435 88 .05 82

6 56.8 2.9 54.5 5.2 435 89 0.93 .84

| 56.7 2.8 54.5 5.0 435 89 .89 85

8 58.6 3.6 56.1 6.1 459 5.14 1.15 82

9 60.5 5.5 57.2 8.8 A476 25 81 74

10 62.2 Gl 58.6 10.7 499 .00 2.33 .70

a 63.6 9.0 59.1 13.5 .508 55 3.11 64:

Noon. 64.3 10.9 58.8 16.4 .5b03 7 .90 58

1 64.7 11.9 58.7 17.9 501 AA 4.33 .o6

2 64.9 12.6 58.6 18.9 499 Al .63 .o4

3 64.1 12.8 57.7 19.2 485 25 61 08

4, 63.5 11.6 aver 17.4 485 27 07 .06

5 63.8 9.3 59.1 14.0 .008 519) 3.24 .63

6 63.8 6.6 60.5 9.9 032 .85 2.25 72

7 63.0 5.6 60.2 8.4 027 82 1.85 76

8 62.2 5.0 59.2 8.0 509 ° .64, Ta A

9 61.5 4.6 58.7 7 A, 501 06 DA 78

10 61.0 4.1 58.5 6.6 498 52 OF .80

dl 60.3 3.9 57.6 6.6 483 .06 oo .80

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants.

Meteorological Observations. XClii

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of December, 1857.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

Hi |ab

as Os

sa |eed OY ihe

.| “8s |O & §| Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky.

2) HS 1822 of the Wind.

Al a janed

7) Inches.

1264 | « |N.WEh, Scatd. 11 till 5 a. mM. cloudless till 9

A. M. Scatd. “i till 4 P. Mm. cloudless

afterwards.

2) 127.0 | .. |N. W.&N. [Calm.| Cloudless.

3) 131.0 . |N. W. & N. E. & Cloudless.

a tebe! .. | N. WGN. Cloudless. Also foggy between Mid-

night and 3 A. M.

Be tee) |..: | NW. Cloudless,

6| Sunday

Ae 1310 - (NWS. Cloudless.

ain 2280 | .. | N. W.& Ne Cloudless.

a) 1280) .-. |N. W.&N. Cloudless.

10) 137.0 N. &N. W. Cloudless.

LL). 133.0 N. W. &N. Cloudless. [7 P.M. and 11 Pp. m.

12) 136.0 - |N.&N. W. Cloudless, also slightly foggy between

13) Sunday

14; 131.0) .. |S W.&W.&N. | Cloudless, also slightly fogey between

8 Pp. M. and 11 Pp. M.

15) 128.0) .. |W.&S.W.&S. | Cloudless, also foggy between Midnight

and 8 A. M. [P. M.

ie 133.5 | » S. EK. & S. W. & E. | Cloudless ; also foggy between 9 and 11

mr 130.2) .. |N. EB. & W. Cloudless, also foggy between 8 and 11

P. M.

18} 131.4) .. |N. Cloudless.

aa 128.0; .. |-N. W. &N. Cloudless.

20) Sunday.

21; 128.0] .. |N. W.&N. Cloudless.

22) 132.4) .. | N. W. Cloudless. Also foggy between 7 and

10 P. M. [7 and 10 Pp. M.

23; 1284] .. | N.E.& w. &N.W. | Cloudless. Also slightly fogey between

=) 6130.0; .. | W.&N. W. Cloudless. {and Midnight.

Zo) 132.0) .. |N. W. &N. Cloudless. Also foggy between 7 P. M.

26; 128.0) .. | N.& W. Cloudless. Also foggy between 8 P. M.

and Midnight.

27) Sunday

28} 129.0) .«. |N. W.&N. E. Cloudless. Also slightly foggy between

Midnight and 2 a. M.

29| 1260) .. | W.&N. Cloudless till 6 a. M. Scatd. i till 9

A. M. cloudless till 7 Pp. M. Scatd, ~1

afterwards. [ wards.

30| 127.0 W.&N.&N.W. | Cloudiess till 3 P. mu. Scatd. -i after-

31/ 128.0 « |N.WLSN. Cloudless till 1 p. M. cloudy till 6 P. mM.

Scatd. i afterwards.

Ni Cirri, -i cirro strati, %i cumuli, ~i cumulo strati, \~i nimbi, —i strati

“i cirro cumuli.

XClV Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of December, 1857.

Montury REsvutts.

Inches.

Mean height of the Barometer for the month, me -- 930.041

Max. height of the Barometer, occurred at 10 a. M. on the 31st, ne 20.192

Min. height of the Barometer, occurred at 4 P.M. on the 16th, se @ 20.917

Extreme Range of the Barometer during the month, se -< O.274

Mean of the Daily Max. Pressures, os ee -- 30.120

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, .. he Se ss 29.960

Mean Daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. -- 0.140

Ce)

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, 7 es 67.4:

Max, Temperature, occurred at 2 P. M. on the 10th, ae se 79.6

Min. Temperature, occurred at 7 A. M. on the 28th, ae ee 55.9

Extreme Range of the Temperature during the month, .. oe 23.7

Mean of the Daily Max. Temperatures, oe - an 717.5

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, Be a £3 59.4,

Mean Daily range of the Temperature during the month, .. te 18.1

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, se E 61.1

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 6.3

Computed Mean Dew Point for the month, ote ay Byer:

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed Mean Dew Point, ae 10.1

Inches.

Mean Elastic force of vapour for the month, .. ale -- 0.478

Troy grains.

Mean weight of vapour for the month, we a aS 5.28

Additional weight of vapour required for complete saturation, os 2.11

Mean degree of Humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.71

Inches,

Rained No days. Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, oe oe Nil.

Total amount of rain during the month, af se a Nil

Prevailing direction of the Wind, .. oe oe N. W. & i

Meteorological Observations. XcV

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of December, 1857.

Monrury Resvxts.

Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind

blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour,

when any particular wind was blowing it rained.

Hour.

Midnight.

pay

ke! bo Fe ©

FOODNONR WH

DANTNMDAMRHAOMNAAE

ABR RH OOHDD DH

ee ee bo bo

- DDH ee

RSD NNER NRE K eee

ED WWHWWWNWAD

—_

fa fed

ee I

Noon,

Re eee wwe et

alll seetll meelll meeelll noel ell Seal ool soll No le

INNO OO STO or BOLD

Dose S ouP O1}O LSS Bw

We)

MOOmMNTAHAkWHY

ell ceed eel rll ll ell

wWreosbbd

—"

erie

xCV1 Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of December, 1857:

On the 24th December, 1857, the Meteorological Observations

after ten minutes intervals being taken at the Surveyor General’s

Office, they indicate the following circumstances :—

ems

Exact Time of Minimum Barometer, = a sae

h. m. i, mn.

(A. M. Between 9-40. & 10-0 during

| which time the Barometer was sta-

Ditto of Maximum Barometer, ... 4 oe

>) Pp. M. Between 9-40 & 9-50 during

| Which time the Barometer was sta-

i tionary.

A. M. Between 7-10 & 17-20 during

Ditto of Minimum Donpertan.} which time the Thermometer was sta-

tionary.

P., M. Between 1-50 & 2-20 during

Ditto of Maximum Towperstirs,.. } which time the Thermometer was

stationary.

Meteorological Observations. 1

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of January, 1858.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

feet.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

So & Resa

Bos Range of the Barometer 3 9 Range of the Tempera-

= 3 during the day. al 3 ture during the day.

mS 2, As

, aa": = 3

2 eli Max Min Diff. sa Max Min. | Diff.

Q |e =

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches, Oo Oo oO oO

1 |30.090 | 30.181 | 380.018 0.163 68.5 77.6 60.6 | 17.0

2 .025 LO7 =| 29.940 167 68.1 77.4 60.8 | 16.6

3 | Sunday

4 O1L 1 948 163 67.0 76.6 59.6 | 17.0

5 |29.986 .062 932 130 67.7 78.5 60.4 | 18.1

6 .998 O71 .938 133 66.1 76.7 58.6 | 18.1

7 130.009 114 942 i WF 4 66.6 77.2 57.6 | 19.6

S. | 29.992 084: .936 148 66.6 77.7 58.4 | 19.3

] 971 .063 OLE 146 65.9 76.6 56.6 | 20.0

10 Sunday

11 .957 .031 881 150 69.2 80.6 60.8 | 19.8

12 .936 .019 878 141 67.6 78.1 bOLAL) 38:7

13 .966 .064 912 152 65.2 75.4 56.8 | 18.6

14 -966 O51 896 155 64.9 76.6 56.6 | 20.0

15 .983 .084 iOLt 173 66.2 78.4 56.2 | 22.2

16 .988 081 943 13838 66.7 79.2 B7.5)| Ze

17 | Sunday.

18 .922 .005 .865 140 72.2 84.0 63.8 | 20.2

19 910 | 29.984: .856 128 72.9 83.8 65.0 | 188

20 958 | 30.038 -886 ~L52 69.4 75.4 64.6 | 10.8

21 .873 | 29.955 .812 143 69.9 hee 64.2 | 15.0

22 879 .940 B41 .099 66.7 74.8 61.4 | 18.

23 .990 | 30.092 902 aloo 64.8 75.4 56.4 | 19.0

24 , Sunday.

25 | 30.040 1 .978 133 68.1 79.3 58.4 | 20.9

26 .062 188 .976 .162 69.9 80.2 GL.O:) 9.2

27 .075 164 |380.010 154 69.1 79.2 62.0 | 17.2

28 073 .140 .019 121 70.3 79.4 62.4 | 17.0

29 .064, 136 .009 127 713 79.6 65.2 | 14.4

30 112 .208 057 151 69.4: 77.6 63.0 | 14.6

3l | Sunday.

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made during

the day.

i Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

on the month of January, 1858.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon, (Continued.)

: 2. |e | #2

m , ; a Py Bae laa aS

ze 2 = <=, = Oo x g.o

a o - S = Pum |S 535

2 es o 5 on an = a sjmé

S 5) 2 SO peer S| =

Date.| = 5 E S 2 ei ip es| os

i. Q Q a nwo l= 25) 2 :

3 5 a = =e | Sa@ilag o) oe

care = 2 ao | "SF eis) f=

s & be 5 bay es sa lsgaleoe

2 A 3 a a ella Fe

° 0 5 0 Inches. | T. gr.| T. gr.

1 63.1 5.4 60.4 8.1 0.530 5.85 | 1.80 | 0.77

2 62.4 5.7 59.0 9.1 006 .09 .96 74,

3 | Sunday.

4 61.6 5.4 58.4 8.6 .496 A8 82 75

5 61.5 6.2 57.8 9.9 486 .o7 | 2.09 72

6 59.5 6.6 55.5 10.6 .450 4.99 ll 70

7 60.5 6.1 56.8 9.8 470 5,20 OL 72

8 60.2 6.4 56.4; 10.2 464, 14 07 OL

9 59.3 6.6 55.3 10.6 447 4.96 -LO 70

10 | Sunday.

Ll 63.8 5,4 61.1 8.1 543 5.98 | 1.83 ai

es 60.6 7.0 56 4 11.2 464 12 | 2.382 .69

13 56.9 8.3 51.9 13.3 398 4.43 AS 64:

44 57.1 7.8 52.4 12.5 405 50 39 | .66

15 58.5 Vier 53 9 12.3 426 13 09 .66

16 59.2 Teh 54.7 12.0 438 89 08 .67

17 Sunday.

13 66.1 6.1 63.0 Om .578 6.33 22 74

19 66.6 6.3 63.4 9.5 586 .40 63-0 0S

20 63.9 5.5 61.1 8.3 043 5.98 | 1.88 .76

21 62.8 rip 59.2 10.7 .009 .60 | 2.38 70

22 58.4 8.3 53.4 13.3 419 4.65 .08 64

23 56.8 8.0 52.0 12.8 400 44 .o9 .65

24 | Sunday.

25 61.7 6.4: 57.9 10.2 488 5.38 17 FE

26 63.0 6.9 59.5 | 10.4 O15 .66 32 ek

27 63.5 5.6 60.7 8.4 .036 20 | 1.88 76

28 63.9 6.4 60.7 9.6 .036 88 | 2.20 73

29 65.4 5.9 62.4 8.9 567 6.22 eal 75

30 61.2 8.2 57.1 12.3 A75 0.29 .63 .67

31 | Sunday.

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants.

Meteorological Observations. iil

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

on the month of January, 1858.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

kKkauge of the Tempera

Set *

if 3 op Range of the Barometer for = 5 Gare Fomeeehitoun

aac each hour during the oo .

26s g during the

= Ge month. mS Wane

Hour. | s 2, a= :

(oa) o

g a = Max Min Diff. a = Max. | Min. | Diff

= =

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. ft) ) ) 0

night, (29-994 |80.109 j29.861 | 0.248 | 641 | 69.0 | 598] 9.7

ul .989 102 859 .243 63.5 68.1 58.5 9.6

2 977 .095 845 .250 62.9 67.8 57.8 | 10.0

3 969 .089 841 .248 62.3 67.5 57.1 | 10.4

4 973 .080 .865 .215 61.5 67.0 56.6 | 10.4

5 .976 - 087 846 241 61.3 66.0 56.7 9.3

6 993 L107 .863 244 60.7 65.5 56.6 8.9

7 {30.015 125 872 253 60.4: 65.4 56.2 2

8 046 152 .908 244 62.3 68.2 58.5 7

9 071 195 .930 .265 66.3 69.8 63.2 6.6

10 077 .208 .940 .268 69.8 73.1 66.8 6.3

i1 .056 189 923 .266 73.2 76.8 | 70.2 6.6

Noon.| .023 170 903 267 75.4: ! 80.1 72.2 7.9

1 | 29.990 123 873 .250 Tit 82.2 73.8 8.4

2 963 .095 838 257 77.8 83.4 73.6 9.8

3 943 .072 824: .248 77.8 84.0 72.0 | 12.0

4 .935 062 .812 .250 76.2 82.2 | 72.4) 9.8

5 942 .062 822 .240 74.4 80.6 70.4 | 10.2

6 951 075 834 241 71.6 17.2 68.0 9.2

7 .968 095 825 .270 69.5 75.1 65.8 9.3

8 .988 .110 846 .264: 67.8 73.2 64.0 9.2

9 {30.001 s127 858 .269 66.5 72.6 62.4 | 10.2

10 .007 149 864 .285 65.5 72.0 61.2 | 10.8

11 .002 144, .865 279 64,8 71.6 60.4 | 11.2

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several hour

during the month.

Naas

iv Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of January, 1858.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the fygrometrical elements

dependent thereon. (Continued.)

o i) =] o oO CS sm ° 5s.

= e | s |A 5 wid & Steere eee

o o Ey = oO ao a 2

= e E E 3 ue ire ie

= 5 2» 3 a cnt a Gen (2 = Oe RS)

Hour. |) “eee S A 3 a= MS ea Pla ie Ss

83 zr) 3 2 So | Pra (SHE | Os

es | Bf B. | Bab ll Ri Btodis ee sagueis Bee

3 jaa) = FO .5 ae ema) rs he Bay sc cel aa

a g ene oS SO 6, ence & io seek

o & re Oo i Pai oo Oo Ras See tlodas

= a Oo a = = < =

oO 0 oO oO Inches. | T. gr T. gr

Mid: |) gos | ae | Brig | Gib%| O4Ase 4) 5.3080) Ramen | 6.80

night. j ; c

iI 60.0 3.9 57.9 6.0 481 36 19 82

2 59.6 3.3 57.3 5.6 478 33 10 83

3 59.2 3.1 57.0 5.3 473 29 02 84

4 58.9 3.0 56.4 5.1 464 19 0.97 84

5 58.4 2:9 56.1 5.2 459 15 97 84

6 57.8 2.9 55.9 5.2 450 05 99 84

a 57.5 2.9 55.2 5.2 445 00 95 84

8 58.9 3.4 56.5 5.8 465 .20 1.11 82

9 60.6 5.7 57.2 9.1 476 27 88 74:

10 61.8 8.0 57.8 12.0 486 35 2.60 67

11 62.8 | 10.4 57.6 15.6 483 27 3.09 -60

Noon.| 63.8 11.6 58.0 | 17.4 489 2 4.11 56

iL 64.4 12.7 58.0 19.1 489 .30 .62 03

2 64.8 13.0 58.3 19.5 A94 4 79 03

3 64.8 15.0 58.3 19.5 A494, 4 79 08

4 64.1 12.1 58.0 18.2 A89 ol 03D 09

5 64.0 | 10.4 58.8 | 15.6 003 47 3.68 .60

6 64.1 7.5 60.3 | 11.3 .028 80 2.60 .69

7 eg1 | 64-| 5997) 9.6 1) 521 73 15 73

8 62.2 5.6 58.8 9.0 003 55 1.93 74

9 61.7 4.8 58.8 7.7 503 06 63 17

10 61.1 4.4: 58.5 7.0 498 02 46 79

11 60.5 4.3 57.9 6.9 488 Al 42 By

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants,

Meteorological Observations. v

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of January, 1858.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

ag op

of |Sa0

.| 2s |O & &| Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky.

$| #2 |g28| ofthe Wind.

ail ae es ca

Oo Inches

1) 129.8 we) NOW: Cloudless: also slightly fogey between

Midnight and 6 a. M.

2; 129.0 wo, | Wert gNiok. Cloudless: also foggy between 9 P. M.

and Midnight.

3) Sunday

4) 131.0 as 1 W. Gia WW Cloudless: also foggy between Mid-

night and 7 a. M. also the same be-

tween 8 Pp. M. and Midnight,

5| 135.0 re S. W. &N. W. Cloudless.

6| 132.0 be Calm & N. W. & W.} Cloudless.

Z| 132.0 =i N.W. & N. E. & N.| Cloudless till 11 a. m. Scatd. “i and

i till 3 Pp. m. cloudless afterwards.

8| 134.0 a N.W.& N. Cloudless.

9} 180.0 sat ha dc. NE. Cloudless, also fogsy between 9 & 11

P.M.

10| Sunday

11} 136.2 a S. W. & Calm. Cloudless.

12} 135.0 a N. W. & Calm. Cloudless.

13] 135.0 es N. W. & W. Cloudless till 11 a. uw. Scatd. \i & “i

till 6 ep. m. cloudless afterwards.

14) 134.0 asa S. W. & Calm & W.! Cloudless till 6 a. um. Scatd. -i till 5

Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

15| 136.4 f W.&S.W.&N. W.| Cloudless till 5 a. m. Scatd. -i till 3

Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

16) 133.4 ae Calm & W. Cloudless till 4 a. mM. Scatd. “i till 5

P.M. cloudless afterwards ; also foggy

between 9 & 11 P. M.

17| Sunday

18} 139.0 ve 0... We. Cloudless: also fogey between 4 & 8

A. M.

19} 134.0 ee) ee NV Oars Cloudless till 8 Pp. m. cloudy afterwards ;

also slightly drizzling between 9 &

10 P. M.

20] ae -- | Variable. Cloudy ; likewise slightly raining be-

tween 4 &5 P.M. & also between 8

&9P. M.

mt) 6132.0 | 0.07 |S. W. Cloudy ; also slightly drizzling at 5 P.M.

22} 128.5 sean Wk Cloudless.

23) 134.0 -- | Calm & N. E.& E. | Cloudless; also slightly foggy between

7&11P.M.

24) Sunday.

25) 136.0 ay ieee Cloudless.

eee —

Ni Cirri, i Cirro strati, \i Cumuli, ~i Cumulo strati, \-i Nimbi, —i Strati

\ i Cirro cumuli.

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

31)

Max. Solar

radiation.

134.0

128.0

125.4

133.0

134.5

Sunday.

Rain Gauge

5 feet above

Ground.

- 0

o> ee

)

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of January, 1858.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

Prevailing direction

of the Wind.

General Aspect of the Sky.

Cloudless till 5 a. m. Seatd. i till 10

A. M. cloudless till 6 P, M. Scatd.

i afterwards.

Scatd. i.

.| Scatd. -i & 11.

.| Scatd. -i till 5 a. m. cloudy till 9 a. M.

Scatd. “i & “i till 6 Pp. mM. cloudless

afterwards.

Cloudless.

Meteorological Observations. Vil

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

an the month of January, 1858.

Monruuy Resuvts.

Inches.

Mean height of the Barometer for the month, se oe 29.994

Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 10 A. M. on the 30th, ... 30.208

Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 4 P. M. on the 21st, ee 29.812

Lxtreme range of the Barometer during the month, ae oe 0.396

Mean of the Daily Max. Pressures, as oe i 30.078

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, @ te oa 29.931

Mean Daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. oe 0.147

)

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, os ee 68.1

Max. Temperature occurred at 3 P. M. on the 18th, ee es 84.0

Min. Temperature occurred at 7 a. M. on the 15th, ee ee 56.2

Extreme range of the Temperature during the month, .. ee 27.8

Mean of the Daily Max. Temperature, ay os a 78.3

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, Ba ae ae 60.3

Mean Daily range of the Temperature during the month, a 18.0

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, a a 61.4

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 6.7

Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, .. He ate 57.4

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point, .. 10.7

; Inches.

Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month, ae as 0.480

Troy grains.

Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, ee es o- 5.29

Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, sie 2.26

Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.70

Inches.

Rained 3 days, Max, fall of rain during 24 hours, si - 0.07

Total amount of rain during the month, “ . = 0.07

Prevailing direction of the Wind, ee alain, Wis 65 SOW GoW

vill Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of January, 1858.

Montauuy Resvts.

Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind

blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour when

any particular wind was blowing it rained.

Sialic 5 2 =) pagent We 5 ie

El elke s = ete le} jeg = |shs)el2

N.[pe |Z cal E. |e |S. Buje ced os [et We lee 2% [coh icc ie

No. of days.

Midnight. | 1] | 3 a 3 3 2 4| | 9

1 real de 1 1 3 4 3 4| 97

2 i 1 3 4 4 4| F6l fe

3 1; | 2 1 3 4, 3 5| 17

4 1} | 2 1 2 3 3 ba 1%) es

5 oS 1 3 3 5 31 [6-12

6 ii] |2 1 3 3 5 6] 75

q 2| 13 2 3 3 2 8| 13

8 Ai Ie 3 1 3 2 1 s| [2

9 A] 8 2 1 1 4 1 9) f1

10 3| [5 2 ii i) A )

11 4! | 4 1 3 1 5 8

Noon. 2 3 i} 1 1 3 8 7

1 3} Jl 1 2 4 6 9

2 He) Par 2 Y| 5 0

3 1 1 1 5 a 1

4 2 1 1 1 Bl A 7 9| |

5 3 1 2 4 |} 5 Oo; fl

6 2 13 1 2 5| | 38 8 2

H| 11 43 2 1. 2 6| | 3 5| 13

8 3 2 1 3 iat as aa 5 | 15

9 3 2 3 6/1) 2 5 | 95

10 3 i (i) es Hs i a Bt 1 oe 5| 15

ll 3 2 1 3 5 2 ae is

Meteorological Observations. ix

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

on the month of February, 1858.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

feet.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

os :

2 os Range of the Barometer a 8 Range of the Tempera-

"eo & 3 during the day. As ture during the day.

(by ees > fo)

AS As -

: go? ! ao

a) ese Max Min Diff Sea Max. | Min. | Diff.

A | 2

Inches. | Inches. | Inches, | Inches. 0) oO Oo o

1 | 29.993 | 30.077 | 29.919 0.158 69.8 81.2 59.0 | 22.2

2 .959 .032 873 159 70.7 81.4: 62.1 | 19.3

3 | 30.028 124 979 145 68.9 78.6 61.7 | 16.9

4. | 29.988 .058 917 141 68.0 79.4: 56.8 | 22.6

5 955 .026 874: 152 71.3 82.6 61.0 | 21.6

6 970 061 924 137 73.1 81.8 64.6 | 17.2

y | Sunday

gs | 30.061 142 | 30.007 135 66.6 TAL 61.6 | 12.5

9 .046 140 | 29.981 159 65.1 75.9 55.0 } 20.5

10 .020 102 964 138 67.2 77.4 57.2 | 20.2

11 | 29.986 .056 932 124 67.3 77.6 61.0 | 16.6

12 943 .033 869 164 70.0 80.0 62.6 | 17.4

13 -950 035 -900 0135 rfc f 79.2 | 67.0 | 12.2

14, | Sunday |

15 .950 .029 886 143 68.4 79.4: 58.8 | 20.6

16 77 046 923 123 69.5 80.6 59.4 | 21.2

17. ‘| 30.023 .108 .969 139 71.2 83.5 62.0 | 21.5

18 .018 .097 959 138 71.5 83.4 | 60.4] 23.0

19 | 29.972 049 912 137 72.7 84.9 61.2 | 23.7

20 945 .018 874 144 75.2 85.5 66.2 | 19.3

21 | Sunday

22 | 30.000 084: 949 135 76.3 86.0 69.6 | 16.4

23 015 112 945 167 73.4 84.2 63.6 | 20.6

(24 | 29.969 .059 -886 173 72.8 85.6 60.8 | 24.8

25 921 | 29.999 842 157 74.8 86.9 65.0 | 21.9

26 898 982 826 156 73.6 82.8 66.7 | 16.1

nF -886 977 821 156 74,5 85.9 65.2 | 20.7

28 | Sunday

ee sere oese sees eeese

ee eenre eeese eeee eeee *esee eeee eeese @eeee

eee eece eee ee ece eeee eeere

The Mean height of tlie Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made during

the day.

x Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

on the month of February, 1858.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon. (Continued.)

° = - ~ ¢

| a ¥ e 3 S a 5 z=)

5 i ‘ = ) aca 14, 2 eS

a +3 = o eo 1S 5 ae

& oO =) o ro) a ee AS & s 2

2 a 6 nm we fi g/m 8

Date. | . 5 s 3 a é iS ga\28

=o 2 3 3 fa SHEE | hes

Pel & | 2 |-es | #8 | Be eee) Bee

o E) = aos 2 SP lon o| Cas

as ee 2 ‘S aS | «¢ * |S 33] 2 a

§ 9 b 8 falon o> $.4 |S avai § €.9

= a S) a = = |< =

oO 0 o ft) Inches. | T. gr.| T. gr

1 61.3 8.5 57.0 12.8 0.473 5.20 | 2.75 | 0.65

2 62.4 8.3 58.2 12.5 493 41 17 .66

3 60.2 8.7 55.8 13.1 455 02 72 65

4 59.0 9.0 53.6 14.4 422 | 4,67 86 62

5) 65.4 5.9 62.4 8.9 567 6.22 11 A)

6 67.8 5.3 65.1 8.0 619 78} OL <4

7 | Sunday

8 58.2 8.4 53.2 13.4 416 | 4,62 59 64

9 57.5 7.6 52.9 12.2 412 09 30 67

10 59.3 7.9 54.6 12.6 437 83 52 .66

il 62.7 4.6 59.9 7.4: 21 5.77 | 1.60 78

12 66.5 3.5 64.7 5.3 611 6.73 27 84

13 67.2 4.5 64.9 6.8 615 75 68 80

14 | Sunday

15 60.5 7.9 55.8 12.6 455 5.02 | 2.60 .66

16 59.4 10.1 54.3 15.2 432 4.76 | 3.12 .60

17 62.1 gal 57.5 13.7 481 5.28 02 64

18 62.2 9.3 57.5 14.0 481 28 10 .63

19 62.9 9.8 58.0 14.7 489 04 4 -62

20 67.9 7.3 64.2 11.0 601 | 6.54 | 2.83 70

21 | Sunday

22 67.6 8.7 63.2 13.1 582 22 | Bot .65

23 62.1 11.3 56.4 17.0 464 5.06 81 57

24 62.2 10.6 56.9 15.9 472 15 06 09

25 65.3 9.5 60.5 14.3 2032 .80 46 63

26 64.9 8.7 60.5 13.1 0902 81 12 65

27 66.3 8.2 62.2 12.3 063 6.14 04, 67

28 | Sunday

ee e@eee eeee eeee esene eevee eecee eeece ee ae

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants.

Meteorological Observations. xi

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

on the month of February, 1858.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

Range of the Tempera-

Sty °

2 he Range of the Barometer for = 3 tine for orelchoas

ES month. >e zag te

Hour. | = 3 2 ae month.

e9 5

s-a2 {| Max. | Min. | Diff = | Max. | Min. | Diff

= =

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches fc) oO 0 0

E 29.984 |30.051 | 29.886 0.165 66.4 72.4 61.2 | 11.2

1 976 045 .876 .169 65.5 71.6 58.8 | 12.8

2 .965 .028 870 158 64.8 71.4 58.0 | 13.4

3 955 .029 .863 .166 64.3 aio 56.6 | 14.5

A 952 .036 .868 168 63.8 70.4 58.8 | 11.6

5 .962 .040 879 161 63.1 70.2 55.6 | 14.6

6 .978 .069 901 .168 62.4 70.0 55.2 | 14.8

7 |80.005 -086 .935 151 62.1 69.6 55.0 | 14.6

8 .033 111 957 154 65.2 71.6 58.0 | 13.6

9 .053 128 STs 151 69.6 75.0 64.0 | 11.0

10 .060 142 977 165 73.0 77.6 66.6 | 11.0

11 044: 128 963 165 75.7 80.8 69.2 | 11.6

Noon.| .013 101 933 168 78.3 83.2 71.2 | 12.0

1 |29.978 .073 892 181 80.0 85.2 GD) TAG

2 .950 043 .856 187 80.9 86.6 73.0 | 13.6

3 .929 .024 .838 186 81.3 86.9 72.0 | 14.9

4A 921 .007 .821 186 80.4 85.5 69.6 | 15.9

5 922 .013 821 192 79.1 84.4 67.4 | 17.0

6 928 024 824 .200 75.7 81.4 67.4 | 14.0

7 945 .036 839 197 hou 79.0 66.8 | 12.2

8 .967 061 .865 .196 71.3 78.2 64.6 | 13.6

2 979 .063 874 .189 70.0 77.1 64.6 | 12.5

10 .985 074 .880 194 68.6 74.2 63.0 | 11.2

11 .985 .060 .876 184 67.7 72.0 61.8 | 10.2

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Buib

Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several hours

during the month.

xii Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

an the month of February, 1858.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon. ( Continued.)

o o = ) oO CS se ° =e)

a |e | eel eal he oe

Se hog | | Biel ots Sale ie

o8 2 is 2 So | SFR [eu gd .| wo

eo Ra = pa. Pi? sbo |S Subs eS sa

§ 3 b> 8 po | SS | $82 |SPStis sas

= 2 rs) Q = = < =

pote f 8 | puis PRR am ane eh Sagas oe! Ye

) o oO ty) Inches. | T. gr. | T. gr.

Mid- A |. 8 7.2 | 0.5 5

nine 61.9 9.2 : 509 5.65 1.52 0.79

1 61.3 4.2 58.8 6.7 508 57 Al .80

2 61.0 3.8 58.7 6.1 501 57 26 82

3 60.6 3.7 58.0 6.3 489 44 28 81

A 60.1 3.7 57.5 6.3 481 .36 25 81

5 59.6 3.5 57.1 6.0 ATS 30 17 82

6 59.0 3.4 56.6 5.8 .467 22, 11 83

q 58.9 3.2 56.7 5.4 469 24 .03 84

8 60.6 4.6 57.8 7.4, 486 40 51 78

9 62.4 7.2 58.8 | 10.8 503 53 2.37 .70

10 63.4 9.6 58.6 | 14.4 499 AG 3.30 62

ral 63.9 | 11.8 58.0 | 17.7 489 31 4.20 56

Noon.| 64.6 | 13.7 57.7 | 20.6 .485 23 5.05 51

M4 BEB Uh Dae 57.9 | 22.1 A88 25 56 49

2 | 65.8 | 15.1 58.2 | 22.7 493 29 ‘Si 48

3 66.0 | 15.3 58.3 | 23.0 ADA 30 94 47

A 65.6 | 148 58.2 | 22.2 493 Bt 63 49

5 65.5 | 13.6 58.7 | 20.4 501 AL 12 51

6 66.0 9.7 61.1 | 14.6 543 .90 3.61 62

7 65.2 7.9 61.2 | 11.9 544 95 2.84 68

8 64.5 6.8 Gard» Ose 543 .96 37 WZ

9 63.9 6.1 60.8 9.2 537 91 .09 TA

10 63.0 5.6 60.2 8.4 527 82 1.85 76

11 62.7 5.0 59.7 8.0 518 73 73 By fi /

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants.

Meteorological Observations. Xiil

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

an the month of February, 1858.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

Hq |Se

S S fc

eS Bord

mae |b'sq

° = ee

2 mS Jo

3S os So

a; a" jae

wi |

ra) Inches

Li. 133.7 ea

136.0 ee

135.2 ee

136.0 ee

140.0 ee

128.7

131.0 AE

134.2 os

7| Sunday.| 0.12

-8

133.5 | 0.08

12 ee 0.34

14) Sunday.

15} 130.0 ee

16; 135.0 es

fi} .137.0 ee

18} 143.0 ee

19} 138.6 ee

20) 138.0 os

21| Sunday.

22) 133.0 ee

23; 138.0 ee

24, 137.4 | ..

25) 135.0 ee

26| 182.0 de

27| 137.0 ae

28) Sunday.

Prevailing direction

of the Wind.

cea Seat

Se 35 4:

General Aspect of the Sky.

Scatd. “i and “i till 6 a. m. cloudless

till 10 a.m. Scatd. “i and “i till 6

P. M. cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless.

.| Cloudless.

Cloudless.

Cloudless,

Cloudless till 7 a. m. Scatd, 11 till 5

Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

Cloudy till 7 a. m. Scatd. -iand ‘i

till 4 Pp. Mm. cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless.

Cloudless till 4 a. mw. Scatd, \-i till 10

A. mM. cloudy afterwards. Also slight-

ly drizzling between 2 and 5 P. M.

Cloudy also raining between Midnight

and 1 a. M. [8 A. M.

Cloudless: also foggy between 6 and

Cloudless.

Cloudless till Noon, Scatd. “i till 4

Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless.

Cloudless till 7 a. mu. Scatd. “i till 8

P. M. cloudless afterwards.

.| Scatd. \-1.

Cloudless till 6 a. mM. Scatd. “i after-

wards.

Scatd. “i.

Scatd. “i till 1 a. m. cloudless till 6

A.M. Scatd, i till 3 p. m. cloudy

afterwards. Also very slightly driz-

zling between 8 and 11 P. M.

Seatd. clouds till 8 a. m. cloudless

afterwards.

Cloudless till 11 a. m. Scatd. i till 6

P. M. cloudless afterwards.

Mi Cirri, i Cirro strati, \i Cumuli, ~i Cumulo strati, i Nimbi, —i Strati,

\ i Cirro cumuli,

xiv Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Caleutta,

in the month of February, 1858.

Montuiy Resvts.

Inches.

Mean height of the Barometer for the month, oe ee 29.978

Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 10 A. u. on the 8th, ve 30.142

Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 4 & 5 Pp. M. on the 27th, .. 29.821

Extreme range of the Barometer during the month, oe oe 0.321

Mean of the Daily Max. Pressures, ar ee ee 30.060

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, Se es es 29.914

Mean Daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. ee 0.146

)

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, oe es 71.0

Max. Temperature occurred at 3 P. M. on the 25th, ee ee 86.9

Min. Temperature occurred at 7 A. M. on the 9th, ee a 55.0

Extreme range of the Temperature during the month, .. ee 31.9

Mean of the Daily Max. Temperature, ee ee ee 81.6

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, oe a ae 62.0

Mean Daily range of the Temperature during the month, ws 19.6

oy)

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, fe es 63.0

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 8.0

Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, .. se oe 59.0

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point, .. 12.0

Inches.

Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month, <e oe 0.506

Troy grains.

Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, oe oe oe 5.58

Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, a6 2.70

Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.67

Inches.

Rained 4 days, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, oe oe 0.34

Total amount of rain during the month, oe ee ee 0.54

Prevailing direction of the Wind, ee - N.W.&S, W. & W.

Meteorological Observations. XY

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of February, 1858.

Moyruty Resvrts.

Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind

blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour when

any particular wind was blowing it rained.

Hour. : : : : 4 : is .

| Sf .16 5 5 el ea et . er Sie

s/[A/s cE E cl E |e el |els|a]2

NJsiz cel E. le[S. Bley S. lel os leiw. leis leisicié

No. of days.

Midnight. | 4 1 a ieee: 5 2 6 3} fa

1 5 1) ip 2 5 2 6 3

2 5 2 1 5 2 6 3

3 5 2 l 5 2 5 31 Iq

4 4 2 1 5 4 A 21 fo

5 4 2 2 5 4, 5 1 |

6 4 2 1 2 3 5 6 1

7 7| 12 2 i 2 2 3 5

8 8| | 4 1 2 1 3 2 3

9 6| | 5 1 2 1 3 2 4

10 4) | 5 2 1 il 2 3 6

11 4} | 2 2 1 4 3 8

Noon. 1 2 2 A, 4, 11

1 4} Jl 2 4 4 9

2 ed 2 7 4 9/1

3 te ed 1 i 5 5 10

4 A a ie 1 1 2 6 12

5 i i 1 2 4 5 10

6 i it 1 5 4 4 7

7 2) Jl 1 5 4, 5 6

8 Pe ia 1 5 A) dh 5 6

9 2} Jl 1 5 4} 5 6

10 2) Jl 1 5 AV It 4 6 1

11 2} J1 1 5 igh as 6

4 i. ‘i mer 8 F Ssh a

> aie uli

onelae

¥ ,

“ a We

Meteorological Observations.

XVil

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of March, 1858.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

Feet.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

Date.

meee ee ee | |

the Barometer

Mean Height of

at 32° Faht,

dependent thereon.

Range of the Barometer

during the day.

Inches.

29.909

.880

Inches.

29.721

TAL

822

812

.806

838

.809

816

819

£788

£764

757

492 |

844

878

767

£759

799

793

.800

vie

702

.686

.698

Inches.

0.188

.139

.140

.130

131

127

150

125

142

184

.156

135

163

.136

131

.136

138

144

148

146

183

153

194:

178

139

129

Mean Dry Bulb

Thermometer.

—_— $5

Range of the Tempera-

ture during the day,

89.6

89.3

88.5

90.7

91.2

93.7

95.6

97.0

93.8

92.6

94:4

93.4

94.7

94,2

92.6

92.0

87.4:

92.0

91.6

Min.

68.8

67.8

71.6

70.0

67.0

TAG

73.8

72.3

75.3

74.4:

71.6

72.6

74.7

74.3

73.8

75.4

74.1

73.5

74.8

77.4:

74.2

75.6

76.9

75.0

76.2

77.2

Diff.

21.0

18.0

13.8

17.4

20.7

17.0

15.8

17.0

13.2

16.3

19.6

21.1

20.9

21.3

21.8

21.6

19.7

Hite

19.6

16.0

20.5

18.6

15.7

17.0

11.2

15.8

14.4

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers, are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made, during

the day.

XViil Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of March, 1858.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon. (Continued.)

| 8 ach) it po leg ctab sO ao 1 ee tial wl 2

= Cae Se iy ag

= ah eg 5 ee Wes | Sige

= ) 5 ive 6 a 8 | Se Oe

= > E 2 s oC eee |< se

eye 3 2 8 i cis = ae | =]

= 8 fe D = rae o's [oof] £25

=I a = as |e eet = mee

ae Pe 3 04 o> o |eae| Soe

= a O a A a = =

oO 0 o oO Tuches.|| @. ges | ira

1 71.0 6.4: 67.85) 9:6 0.677 7.33 2.68 | 0.73

2 69.2 6.8 65.8 | 10.2 634 6.90 10 72

3 71.6 5.6 68.8 8.4 .699 7.59 36 76

4, 68.4 9.2 63.8 | 13.8 593 6.42 3.65 64:

5 67.6 SE 62.7 | 14.6 572 .20 78 62

6 69.8 6.2 65.7 | 12.3 .632 89 34 67

7 | Sunday.

8 , 10.0 10.3 64.8 | 15.5 613 61 4.30 61

9 72.0 8.0 68.0 | 12.0 681 7.35 | 3.46 .68

10 74.2 6.4: 71.0 9.6 751 8.09 2,92 74)

4 72.0 S20 67.5 | 13.4 670 7.23 3.87 65

12 69.8 10.6 64.5 | 15.9 .607 6.54: 4.4.0 -60

13 70.7 11.2 65.1 | 16.8 .619 66 78 58

14 | Sunday.

15 12.4 11.0 66.9 | 16.5 657 7.03 93 59

16 74.8 hh TO2 | 13.7 732 82 1 | .65

17 74.7 9.4 70.0 | 14.1 727 78 43 64

18 74.0 $):3) 69.0 | 14.9 704 53 .60 62

19 72.8 10.6 67.5 | 15.9 670 8 78 60

20 70.8 11.9 64.8 | 17.9 613 6.58 5.14 06

21 | Sunday.

22 741.4: 9.0 69.9 1° 13.5 725 7.76 4.20 .65

23 74.9 8.7 70.5 | 13.1 .739 92 11 .66

24 74.6 9.5 69.8 | 14.3 722 73 48 63

25 73.7 9.7 68.8 | 14.6 699 48 48 63

26 75.0 8.3 70.8 | 12.5 746 99 3.94 67

27 75.0 6.4 72.3 26 783 8.41 03 74

28 | Sunday.

29 75.8 5.4: 73.1 8.1 803 65 2.56 she

3 76.4 6.4: 73.2 9.6 .806 64 3.11 74

31 77.0 6.2 73.9 9.3 824 89 04 74

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.

Meteorological Observations. X1x

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken até the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of March, 1858.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

S ~ uz | Range of the Barometer = 3 Range of the Temperature

ie = for each hour during pa for each hour during

H oe the month. PO the month.

our. | «0 -| &&

aN =

aio : aie |

@ 3 | Max. Min. Diff |) 3 ey) Max. Min. Diff.

s tig

Inches. | Inches.| Inches.' Inches.| 0 ft) 0 ft)

Mid- b

night. 29.857 |29.969 |29.729 | 0.240 76.6 80.0 68.0 12.0

1 .846 955 | .722 233 | 76.0] 79.2 68.2 11.0

2 .833 935 | .718 217 | 75.5 | 78.6 68.5 10.1

3 821 Oia 709 .218 | 75.4 | 78.0 69.4 8.6

4, 821 935; .702 238 | 74.5 177.9 | 68.2 37

5 832 942 | .710 .232 | 74.5 | 77.6 68.0 9.6

6 .853 965 £753 BB? Nr oS) Se iy 67.0 10.8

7 878 989) 775 214 | 74.1 78.6 67.0 11.6

8° 909 |30.007 | .80l -206 | 76.9 | 79.6 71.6 8.0

9 927 016 | .824 192} 79.9 | 84.2 74.8 9.4,

10 928 009 ; .822 SHAN) (82. 0s 87.8 76.2 11.6

AL 912 | .014 .807 207 i) 80.8 14 90.8) hy 79.8 11.5

| | |

| | | |

Re ee Es ale anh

Noon. 887 (29.990 | .785 -205 | 88.2 | 92.4 81.4 12.0

1 855 | .964] .751 BIS ih) 90:05 95.7 §3.2 12.5

2 .822 926 | 725 201 |. 90.9.4, 96.4 84.6 11.8

3 .800 | 897 | .698 199 | 914] 97.0 85.4 11.6

4 787 | 885] 694 | 191 | 908; 95.6) 85.0 | 106

5 784: 878 .686 fl 92:1) 88.8: 15 94.8 83.0 11.8

6 795 | .885 | .687 198 she 85.614: 89.7 80.6 | 9.1

7 807 | .882 695107) yeh SF up” 82.9) | ).87.2 78.0 9.2

8 833 | .905; .716 | .189 | 80.9 | 85.4 75.8 | 9.6

9 .857 942 740 | .202 | 79.2 | 84.0 69.6 14.4

10 .866 | 962: | . 7554 4 207 | 78.4 | 84.0 69.3 | 14.7

11 .866 | 957 757 -200 | 77.6 | 82.0 68.8 | 13.2

} |

| |

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers, are derived from the observations made at the several hours

during the month.

XX Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of March, 1858.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—( Continued.)

2 < 3 E S Tee Ss5e/23

a eS =) ike 2 2 lee ee ah Seas

|) pikes 3 E é = os See] S28

Hou. | EE | * ne 3. pe > ea) Sere

g se: D 2 sof L oe 2 Can

gO Ee 4 Seil( eS .ivs 2 2k Sees eae

& a) es AE = = cra | See os

=e me g po} Se So. |Saoq | ass

= a 2) a = = emai ie he as

0) ) ) ) Inches. |Troy grs.|Troy grs.

nieee 72.4 | 42 | 703 | 63 | 0.734 ! 7.98 | 1.79 | 0.82

eis 72.3 37 | 70.4 5.60" 736 8.00 .60 83

2 G20 3:5) 70-2 5.3) |. 3732 7.97 AQ 84

3° |) 722 32° 70:6 4.8 | 741 8.07 .36 .86

4 | 71.4 3.1 | 69.8 AT | 722 7.87 on 86

a eral 3.1 | 69.8 4.7 | .722 .87 31 .86

ale ee CO 2.9 | 69.5 4A | 715 82 19 87

Hi 7u1 3.0 | 69.6 Am Gg 82 .25 .86

Be. 725 44°) 70.3 6.6 | .734 97 89 81

Sl 7a.8 6.4 | 70.3 9.6 | .734 .92 2.86 74

10''| 73.8 9.1 \° 69.2) 13.7 '-- 708 59 4.20 64

1D) FO ID CEG.) 18.2.°| 1672 aly) 5.66 56

Noon.}| 73.5 | 14.7 | 66.1 | 22.1 | .640 6.79 6.97 49

FR) 16.3) Go. 7) 24.57 )|- 628 64 7.86 AG

2 73.5 | V7. 4ae 64.80" | 260 618 48 8.41 Ads

B21 78.1) ie sul 63.ON or Shi) (505 27 83 A2

AN To tS G4 2674. 599 82 52 43

Bee 727 CG Aa Garon | 24.22 | 5609 A5 7.55 AG

6) 954Ar 8) 1223673 4.18.8" 1666 7.10 5.66 56

Pi) (38 95 | 68.5 |143 | .692 AA 4.31 63

6) \ 373.0 7.8 °\" 69.271 11.7") 2708 62 3.48 .69

Oo 728 6.4 | 69.6 | Ree 71s 74 2.82 7s

310 | 72.9 Fon Od Sar 729 .90 Al Wi:

Ik 117258 4.8 | 70.4 | 7.2 | 1736 .99 .08 79

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.

Meteorological Observations. XXL

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

| es

S| rc

+ Rs

Bue

)

1} 141.0

2| 134.5

3} 133.0

4; 140.0

5} 138.0

6; 1386.0

7| Sunday.

8} 140.8

9} 141.5

10} 1388.0

zr $37.0

12} 138.0

13} 145.0

14) Sunday.

15; 141.0

16; 142.0

17; 148.0

18) 145.0

19} 186.5

20} 137.0

21, Sunday.

22) 137.0

23} 136.5

5 feet above

Rain Gauge

Ground.

Inches.

0.22

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of March, 1858.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky.

of the Wind.

S. Cloudless till 6 p. m. cloudy afterwards

with little rain and thunder and

lightning at 8 P.M. Also foggy be-

tween Midnight and 7 a. M.

S. W. & S. Seatd. “i and W i till 3 a. m. cloudless

till 4 Pp. m. Scatd. clouds afterwards

with little drizzling at 11 P.M.

W.&N.W. Cloudless till 7 a.m. Scatd. i till 2

Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

W. &W.& N. W.| Cloudless.

&s.w. &W w.| Cloudless.

nN. Ww. &s. W. | Cloudless till 11 4. mM. cloudy till 8 p. m.

cloudless afterwards. Also foggy be-

tween 4 and 8 A. M.

N. E.

Ss. &

S.W.&N. &N. W.|Scatd. i till 6 a. m. cloudless after-

wards.

W.&S.&S. W. Cloudless till 3 a. M. Scatd. “i and i

till 3 Pp. mM cloudless afterwards.

S. W. & W. Cloudless till 3 a. m. Seatd. clouds till

8 p. Mm. cloudless afterwards.

S. W. & W. Cloudless.

S. &S. W. & W. Cloudless till 6 a. mM. Scatd. i till 6

Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

S.W.&S8. & W. Cloudless till 2 a. mM. Scatd. i till 9

A. M. cloudless afterwards.

W.&S.&N. Cloudless.

Ss. & S. W. Cloudless.

8. &8S. W. Cloudless.

Ss. &S. W Cloudless till 5 a. m. Scatd, i till 3

P. M. cloudless afterwards.

N. W.& W. Cloudless till 4 Pp. Mm. Scatd. i till 7

P. M. Scatd. clouds afterwards.

N. W.& S. W. Cloudless till 7 a. m. Sdatd. -i after-

wards.

Ss. &S. W. Cloudless till 8 a. mM. Scatd. \-1 and

cloudless after short intervals till 9

p. M. cloudy with thunder and light-

ning afterwards.

S. & W. Cloudy with thunder and lightning and

drizzling at Midnight, cloudless till

Ni Cirri, “i cirro strati, %i cumuli, ~i cumulo strati, \-1 nimbi, —i strata,

Wi cirro cumuli.

XXil Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of March, 1858.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

Ha | BE

alae) SO ng

Sly eS. Neen oS of the Wind.

a ¢ ae &

A = ify ea te) Oo |

re) Inches.

5 A. M. cloudy till 1 p. m. cloudless

afterwards.

24) 1388.0 mR: S. W. & W. Cloudless till 1 Pp. m. Scatd. 11 till 6

Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

25) 140.0 de H.&S. & W. Cloudless.

26) 187.8 ah S. Cloudless till 2 a. wu. Scatd. clouds till

9 a. M. cloudless afterwards.

27) TB4.0 1 ieee) Ss Cloudless till 9 a. m. Scatd. i till 4

Pp. M. cloudy with thunder and light-

ning and raining till 8 P. M. cloudless

afterwards,

28) Sunday.

29; 111.0 sie S. Cloudless till 4 a. um. Seatd. clouds till

8 P. M. cloudless afterwards.

380} 129.6 5 S. Cloudless.

31| 132.4 | .. |S. &S. W. Cloudless till 5 a. M. cloudy till 5 P. mM.

cloudless afterwards.

Meteorological Observations. XX1il

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

on the month of March, 1858.

Montruty ReEsvtts.

Inches.

Mean height of the Barometer for the month, ne we) 20.049

Max. height of the Barometer, occurred at 9 a. M. on the 20th, e«")) 80,016

Min. height of the Barometer, occurred at 5 P.M. on the 30th, -- 29.686

Extreme Range of the Barometer durig the month, as -- 0.330

Mean of the Daily Max. Pressures, as ee »» 29.930

Ditto ditto Min. i. ditto, ... ee ee ah, eeu

Mean Daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. Sal pleas

)

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, “5 ais 81.3

Max. Temperature, occurred at 3 Pp. M. on the 18th, ae ie 97.0

Min. Temperature, occurred at 6 & 7 4.M.onthe 5th, .. as 67.0

Hatreme Range of the Temperature during the month, .. oe 30.0

Mean of the Daily Max. Temperature, ae oe ae 91.5

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, Bs ag Be 73.6

Mean Daily range of the Temperature during the month, .. us ie)

Oy)

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, BA as 72.4

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 8.6

Computed Mean Dew Point for the month, on a 68.4:

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed Mean Dew Point, ae 12.9

Inches.

Mean Elastic force of vapour for the month, .. aie Ne 0.690

Troy grains.

Mean weight of vapour for the month, we oe oe 7.42

Additional weight of vapour required for complete saturation, ‘a 3.82

Mean degree of Humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.66

Inches.

Rained 4 days. Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, aa ae 0.22

Total amount of rain during the month, =): ak de 0.22

Prevailing direction of the Wind,.. - oe oe Ss. & S. W.

XXIV Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of March, 1858.

Monruzy ReEsvtts.

Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind

blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour,

when any particular wind was blowing it rained.

Hour. S é S| |S S 5 of} -|Se |S \-d

2(S|s eile] .siBls| |sFletélel2

NIEIZ ELE. lelslelalelileiz lela leis isis

No. of days

Midnight. 1 2 1) 7) 12! [sl aa

il 1 1 2| f16) | 2) | 3 1 1

2 1 1 2) 415} Jal t3 Til aa

3 1 il 16) |.) Fal | tieeh ae

4 1 it Monies ally 1} 12) sel Bey

5 1 IL Alb (es | tt 2h ie

6 1 17 6 2 1

7 1| 1} 2 1 9) 19) 73) 12

8 Zine 1 1 5| fol | 4) Ja

9 3) 12) 2 5| Mol P4l oy ale

10 2| | ai 1 P| SMS ee ips: 1

11 2 2 4, 9 3 5

Noon, 3 2 2 5 8 4A 3

i 2 1 5} [112i | 41 13

2 1 1 ie! (74a) lS Bl |e

3 1 See irc We Adie a

A 6 8 8 5

5 7 9 6 5

6 1 ul 4) | 4

7 1 9} 149 5 3

8 1 1 11} 117 2) 14 1

9 il 13 vi 2) 13) a8

10 ul | fla) 46 2) | 3) | 1

11 1 1 15] 115 2 3)

Meteorological Observations. XXV

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of April, 1858.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East,

feet.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon,

S a = Range of the Barometer = 8 Range of the Tempera-

a, = 5 during the day. | 3 ture during the day.

‘Oe Poe

mad Ag

ao? s 5

s soy Max Min Diff. ye Max. | Min. | Diff.

qa |e =

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. oO o o oO

1 |29.804 | 29.887 | 29.732 0.155 84.6 95.1 76.8 | 18.3

2 775 852 707 145 85.7 96.8 | 77.0 | 19.8

3 750 833 649 184 87.1 99.8 T7A | 22.4

4 | Sunday

5 813 895 737 158 87.0 96.4 79.8 | 16.6

6 .806 912 709 203 86.4 97.0 | 77.0 | 20.0

vf 742 821 662 159 85.9 97.4 76.6 | 20.8

8 780 870 715 155 86.4 97.4: 74.8 | 39.6

9 “792 899 699 200 85.8 96.4: 76.8 19.6

10 705 801 .609 192 86.7 97.8 77.6 | 20.2

11 | Sunday

12 .698 773 621 152 85 93.0 T9-9e NST

13 725 790 .639 151 86.4 93.6 | 81.0 | 12.6

14 -762 .836 .710 126 86.2 93.0 81.6 11.4

15 -787 855 «724 131 86.1 91.2 80.6 | 13.6

16 813 .882 .758 124 85.2 93.4 TOL | 14.3

17 805 875 -746 lag 85.9 94,1 79.4 14.7

18 Sunday

19 768 854 .685 169 88.7 101.6 78.8 | 22.8

20 rt 834, .690 144 88.0 99.0 80.0 | 19.0

21 .789 .859 nha .130 87.3 97.0 81.0 | 16.0

22 .830 .920 .766 154 87.0 96.4 80.8 | 15.6

| 93 | -762 | isco | .660 | .200 | 886 | 99.7 | 798] 199

24 .681 “756 .566 .190 87.4 98.0 79.8 | 18.2

25 | Sunday

i» 26 735 881 577 304 84.5 93.0 72.6 | 20.4

| oF 790 867 -700 67 82.6 91.6 24 |. 18.9

-98 .809 .880 729 151 84.4 92.2 80.0 | 12.2

i 299 | «829 909 760 | 149° | 95.7 |) 93.6 | 79.0 | 146

| 30 76 869 656 213 85.6 92.6 | 79.7 | 12.9

os re ee 08 oe ee, eevee aee ae re ee ne eee

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made duri ing

3 the day.

XXV1 Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of April, 1858.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon. (Continued.)

} = 3g Bo

; , hits 2 | en eee

i E S p < 2 Vie aa is

Date.| 5 fe ie 3 se = ES o &

oi let ioe be. bes |e ote ee

Oo =} 3s (aa) = ° o Ooy,o|/ Fag

i) on ey e a 5 a 2 ee oi te ees

6 & ee 5 Pes o> | €8 |S Bal 38.8

= la Oo fa = = < =

oO 0) o oO Inches. | T. gr.| T. gr.

1 77.1 To 73.3 11.3 0.809 8.65 | 3.74 | 0.70

2 77.6 8.1 73.5 12.2 814 69 | 4.11 .68

3 76.9 10.2 71.8 15.3 771 20 | 5.13 62

4 | Sunday.

5 75.2 11.8 69.3 17.7 SE 7 5S 74: 57

6 The sed) 14.3 64.9 O15 615 6.55 | 6.51 .50

7 74.7 11.2 69.1 16.8 .706 [52 | Boo 08

8 74.1 12.3 67.9 18.5 .679 22 84 .0D

9 76.7 9.1 72.1 1307 -778 8.29 | 4.54 65

10 74.7 12.0 68.7 18.0 .697 T Al |) aang, 06

11 Sunday.

12 78.9 6.8 75.5 10 2 -868 9,97 | Biba 72

13 79.4, 7.0 75.9 10.5 .879 .36 -70 72

14 79.3 6.9 75.8 10.4 876 .o0 64 72

15 78.9 7.2, WD.o 10.8 862 19 -76 yf

16 79,2 6.0 76.2 9.0 .887 AQ 12 75

17 79.5 6.4 76.3 9.6 .890 .50 OC 74

18 Sunday.

19 78.1 10.6 72.8 15.9 795 8.43 | 5.58 60

20 80.1 7.9 76.1 11.9 .885 9.40 | 4.28 .69

21 79.6 G7 Gd.7 11.6 873 28 “lis 69

22 80.0 7.0 76.5 10.5 .896 04) B75 72

23 80.0 8.6 Did 12.9 873 .26 | 4.66 .67

24 78.6 8.8 74.2 13.2 .832 8.85 .60 .66

95 Sunday.

26 77.4 TA 73.8 10.7 822 .78 | 3:57 ays

27 76.0 6.6 G27 9.9 792 51 Li 73

28 78.8 5.6 76.0 8.4: .882 9.45 | 2.86 VE

29 78.8 6.9 75.3 10.4 .862 21. 1} eae 72

IY, 79.4 6.2 76.3 9.3 890 52 24 | te

°* se ee ee ee eone ee ee ees

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants.

Meteorological Observations. XXVil

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of April, 1858.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

Range of the Tempera-

- 3 . | Range of the Barometer for = s f

2253 each hour during the mo Aa oe elem neds

ee wos month. — Pe ehen

our. ae 4 ee fay E mon é

oo o

e2+ | Max. | Min. | Diff Si | Max. | Min. | Diff.

= =

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. ray fe) oO o

Mid- |,

nies 29.781 |29.845 |29.696 0.149 81.5 83.6 76.3 es

1 771 822 675 147 81.1 83.0 76.0 7.0

2 £755 .802 667 .135 80.8 83.4 74.8 8.6

3 748 812 .666 146 80.2 82.8 74.2 8.6

4 708 818 681 37 79.8 81.8 Heat 8.1

5 TAA .840 .688 oz 79.3 81.8 730 8.8

6 193 .860 701 .159 79.0 81.6 M2 8.9

7 814 876 “726 .150 79.8 82.7 74,2 85

8 837 .908 -749 .159 83.1 86.0 79.0 7.0

9 848 .920 -732 168 86.3 88.8 82.6 6.2

10 .848 912 “747 .165 89.1 92.3 56.0 6.3

11 .835 .889 2d 162 O17 95.6 87.6 8.0

Noon. 810 .867 .698 169 93.4 98.3 90.0 8.3

1 Wks: 838 .662 .176 94.8 100.0 89.0 | 11.0

2 747 816 .632 .184 95.2 101.3 84.6 | 16.7

3 718 782 597 .185 95.3 101.6 87.7 13.9

4 .698 .766 biz 194: 94.5 101.1 88.7 12.4

5 .692 .766 .566 .200 92.5 100.0 87.6 | 12.4

6 702 174 .998 176 89.6 94.3 85.8 8.5

| 127 .808 .622 .186 87.1 91.4, 84.2 72,

8 755 .847 .646 201 84.7 88.3 72.6) ikon’

9 782 881 .665 .216 83.5 86.0 74.0 12.0

10 787 .887 .678 .209 82.6 84.8 73.4 11.4

11 784: 874 .669 .205 82.0 83.7 73.67) TO:1

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several hours

during the month.

XXVIli Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of April, 1858.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Elygrometrical elements

dependent thereon. (Continued.)

3 E ee 8 8 2 (S33 |s2e

eo EL | OP Suckers | oe aur

EI 2 = 8 eM a ee

Hor 12ec! |e A z 25) i ae eee oe

22 = 3 So ae be Sole eee

eg b> E Po | $6 | Sae2 (Sr Ssisags

= S Ss) ia = = < =

—————— ar KS cea ie as a aA aa CC COO e:)._—— ooxwvOwOoe SS

) ) ty) 0) Inches.| Ts gr. | ‘T.2e8:

Mid | 71 | 44] 749 | 66 | 0851 | 915 | 216 | o8t

pe reg | 42 | 748 | 63 | .849 a 02 82

2 Wow | 141 | Fue waee | | 848 09 1.98 82

3 Mes k Bl | Vem tea | eh 25 63 85

4 peo | -3.6 | Taide 4 838 06 69 84

= 760 |, 5a8 | Jee oO |) 635 03 BG 85

6 75.8 | 32 | ¥42 || 48° 1 ° 832 00 50 86

7 Fea | ta.4r | gauge eel 1°) Legg 14 ei 85

8 bee | BA 95.0 || 81 | | .984 16 2.70 77

9 yea | 79 1 ‘Faa \l 110) | | gag hose 4.09 69

10 792 ! 99 | 742 | 149 | .932 82 5.30 63

1 79.3 12.4 73.1 18.6 .803 46 6.77 .56

Noon. 70.7 ees 72.8 20.6 .795 04 7.65 52

1 796 | 15.2 | 72.0 | 22.8 | .776 a 8.54 49

y “95 | 15.7 | 71.6 | 23.6 | ..766 00 84 48

3 Foe | ie | it 4) e402) |) yaa | {eee 9.01 AT

4 Va6 | Wel, Woe 280 7 all 16 8.75 AT

5 Woe | do Wl yaa 21.3" |) veg 95 7.64 bl

6 tra tty ayooon ine |) 776 | he is 6.14 Ey

7 w79 | 9.2 | 43.3 | 13.8 | .809 59 4.74, 64

8 ee | mes! Fea. ie |) Stl 67 3.75 70

9 mo | 63 | 74.0 | 9.5 | .827 86 ld 74

10 mg | 53 1 746 1 8.0 | .848 | 9.05 2.63 78

11 Be 4.9 | Faull GA. | 02843 07 40 79

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants.

Meteorological Observations. XXIX

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of April, 1858.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

Hd (S05

o8 |8 80

| 28 |O&§ &| Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky.

| 2% |328| ofthe Wind.

aie” jae?

oO Inches.

1} 134.2 ew s. Cloudless.

2| 135.0 oP Ss. Cloudless.

3} 147.0 a S. Cloudless.

4| Sunday.

5| 189.0 se S.&N. W. & EH. Cloudy till 7 4. M. cloudless till 3 p.m.

Scatd. i & i afterwards.

6| 137.0 ie S.&S. W. Scatd. i till noon cloudless afterwards.

7\ 134.0 seep ols Ge. WV. Cloudless.

8} 141.2 ae S.& N. W. Cloudless.

9} 148.0 ae S. Cloudless.

10} 135.2 eet Se Cloudless.

11| Sunday.

12) 132.0 - |S. &8. HE, (high.) | Scatd. clouds till 4 a. mu. cloudless till

5 p. M. Scatd. i afterwards.

13) 135.0 | .. |S. (high.) Cloudless till 4 a. mM. Scatd. clouds

. afterwards.

aA ae S.&S8. E. Cloudless till 8 A. M. cloudy afterwards.

15) 128.0 es S. Cloudy till 4a. mM. Scatd. -i& “i till

4p. M. cloudy afterwards.

16} 130.0 os 8. &S. HB. Various clouds till 8 Pp. mM. cloudless

afterwards.

17| 130.5 wats yl Se Cloudless till 4 Pp. mM. cloudy till 9 Pp. mu.

cloudless afterwards.

18) Sunday.

19} 148.6 Ae Calm & S. Cloudless.

20} 138.0 ae Ss, Cloudless.

21} 130.0 same ite Scatd, i & i till 3 P. ut. cloudy after-

wards.

Zo 6132.5 ae = Scatd. clouds.

23} 150.0 ais S. Cloudless.

24) 143.0 ie - 8. &8. W. Cloudless.

25, Sunday.

26| 125.0 | 0.60 |S. Scatd. -i till 6 P. M. cloudy afterwards,

also raining, thundering and light-

ning between 8 and 10 P.M.

27| 128.0 we N. FE. &8. & 8. E. | Scatd. clouds.

28] 125.0 | 0.37 |S. &S8. EH. Various clouds also raining between 1

and 2 P. M.

29) 13800 ee S. Scatd. i & “i till 1 P. m. cloudless

afterwards.

30} 130.0 «« |S. (high.) Scatd. i.

Mi Cirri, i Cirro strati, \i Cumuli, ~i Cumulo strati, i Nimbi, —i Strati,

\ i Cirro cumuli.

XXX Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of April, 1858.

Monruuy REsutts.

Inches.

Mean height of the Barometer for the month, Se ae 29.772

Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 9 A. M. on the 22nd, a 29.920

Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 5 P. M. on the 24th, oe 29.566

Extreme range of the Barometer during the month, os Pn er |

Mean of the Daily Max. Pressures, sie oe ee 29.857

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, a a5 ae 29.690

Mean Daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. ee 0.167

)

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, ue Be 86.2

Max. Temperature occurred at 3 P. M. on the 19th, ee ee 101.6

Min. Temperature occurred at 8 Pp. M. on the 26th, BC “6 72.6

Extreme range of the Temperature during the mouth, .. ee 29.0

Mean of the Daily Max. Temperature, ee oe ee 95.8

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, axe ee Bs 78.6

Mean Daily range of the Temperature during the month, ole 17.2

)

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, ae aie 77.8

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 8.4:

Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, .. oe oe 73.6

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point, .. 12.6

Inches.

Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month, és a 0.817

Troy grains.

Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, Ae 55 es 8.70

Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, as 4,29

Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.67

Inches.

Rained 4 days, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, oe oe 0.60

Total amount of rain during the month, .. oS a 0.97

Prevailing direction of the Wind, és aS = S

Meteorological Observations. REEL

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of April, 1858.

Monyruty Resvtts.

Table showing the number of days on which ata given hour any particular wind

blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour when

any particular wind was blowing it rained.

Hour. E a < ef a 3 ct a. 4 ;

Cy aa) =) on. ° ° ° ob,.: ok oF irs}

£19 5 £ =| lsie fs Ve letaiete

E | x x xB xs 5 ce ae net

NS tz pa] E. je |S. E./c | elo lat W. lel wm [casio fa

No. of days. }

Midnight, 1 2| &§ 1 al

1 1 2 il) aa Bl

2 I OS fen lee al 2

3 ] 1 2 Ho 1

4 ] 1 Poy 1 Ths

5 1 2) 1 al al

6 1 oe ae k 2 i

7 i! A, al 2 1

8 s He hal! Sol 2 il

9 1 1 2 3 1

10 1 2b 3 1 |

11 ey Lhe my | 4 2 |

Noon. 2} Jl 1 ti | 4: i

1 2 2 ai Db | Ee 1

2 1 1 3} 1 f 3 2

3 1; | 1 2 ins 1 1

4 3 1 3 1 2

2 1 it H 1 2 2 a

6 1 3 - 2 1 1 1

7 2 ; 2 i 1

8 roe Vee! lj 1 1 1

9 DA Ras 1 1

10 1 3 1 ill

ll 2 2 1 1

=, Ail Pi

crea)

~ a a i "

Swany ;

- | VORA wi

hae ae

Meteorological Observations. XXXL

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of May, 1858.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

feet.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

So ieee

is 3 s Range of the Barometer Bo Range of the Tempera-

oF 3 during the day. ae ture during the day.

‘De Po

Tak As

_ ao 2 0

& Sos Max Min Diff. So Max Min Diff

QO = =

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. Oo fy) o Oo

1 |29.707 | 29.781 | 29.606 0.175 86.9 94.3 81.3 | 13.0

9 | Sunday

3 713 810 .620 .190 83.6 92.2 75.8 | 16.4

4 684 £753 613 140 86.0 94.2 79.0 | 15.2

5 646 Od 052 155 86.7 92.6 81.6 | 11.0

6 .660 .738 083 155 87.4 94.3 82.2 | 12.1

q 644 -702 578 124 86.5 94.0 79.6 | 14.4

8 .652 .730 568 162 87.3 94.4: 81.6 | 12.8

9 | Sunday

10 £727 815 657 158 84.6 91.4 80.7 | 10.7

id .670 et .596 141 86.0 92.6 80.4 | 12.2

12 64.2 tke .064 153 87.3 93.0 81:2) | phss

13 .619 .679 033 146 87.3 95.0 81.0 | 14.0

14 .622 .683 009 124 88.1 96.0 82.1 | 13.9

15 .623 672 61 pin 86.3 95.8 79.8 | 16.0

16 Sunday

17 .565 635 484. 151 82.9 91.6 7316 130

18 510 YW | 435 142 82.0 87.6 79.4 8.2

9 1385 455 312 143 84.2 90.8 {28 01.0

20 276 847 201 146 80.7 86.2 78.2 8.0

21 2382 426 21 105 86.1 94.0 78.0 | 16.0

22 440 498 008 140 Sind 95.2 83.4 | 11.8

23 | Sunday

24, OL) 587 459 128 87.4 94.8 79.0 | 15.8

25 .549 .607 498 109 83.9 89.8 15:0 bbls

26 .608 691 .592 139 85.0 90.4: 81.8 8.6

27 601 .675 oll 164 86.6 95.2 79A: leatd.S

28 574 .640 .o14 .126 88.0 96.6 2.3 | 14.3

29 -600 .653 .036 117 89.8 99.6 83.8 | 15.8

30 | Sunday.

31 .626 .674: .570 104 88.2 100.6 82.2 | 18.4

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made during

the day.

XXXIV

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the [Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

an the month of Alay, 1858.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon,

Dry Bulb above Wet.

Computed Dew Point.

ean Weight of Vapour

in a cubic foot of Air.

Additional Weight of Va-

pour required for com-

plete saturation.

| SS ——e—E—eEeEeEeEy —— See SSS re eee

fe)

Date.|

= ©

® 4

H 499

2 Sunday.

3 77.4

4 78.9

5 80.6

6 $0.6

7 78.3

8 80.8

9 | Sunday.

10 79.2

1g 79.5

12 80.3

13 80.1

14 80.6

15 80.0

16 | Sunday.

| 79.4:

13 79.0

19 79.38

20 77 5

21 81.5

22 83.3

23 | Sunday

24 82.6

29 78.7

26 80.3

27 (heer

28 80.2

29 80.9

3 Sunday.

31 81.5

> 0 Oy TS

or by GH bo

> NINE NT & OK

wCOono oe

Bara Cus

co BAT

6.7

ONS NIT

m= CO & Or Od

(Continued.)

_ oO

AQ ®

i>)

2 é

(o)

3 2

2 este

=. fs

[aalyse °

3 f a

aot te

‘sa =

O Inches

10.5 0.893

9.3 .835

10.7 862

9.2 925

10.2 916

12.3 832

9.8 92

8.1 896

5.8 .887

10.5 905

10.8 896

11.3 905

9.5 905

Ro 928

A .925

7 A .9U5

4.8 879

7.2 967

6.6 1:087

7.2 .008

7.8 | 0.885

rel .937

16 .868

AG 74 -890

13.4, 893

10.1 943

T: ert

8.96

9.19

8.87

9.84

97 |

.69

10.32

LEOF

10.73

9.48

10.02

9.25

10.02

complete saturation be-

Mean degree of Humidity,

ing unity.

——

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants.

Meteorological Observations. bOO.45)

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of May, 1858.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

6 5 Ranye of the Barometer for| = nhs a alate Siibes

Bey Dies ; pes] ture for each hour

Sis each hour during the Fw Aurine tl

moe month, > 6 ie ae

mn 2 : ——- As

e aoc? ! es ds

eon Max. Min. Diff. Ss oy Max Min. | Diff.

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. Co) fe) oO 0

Raa 29.601 |29.747 |29.306 | 0.441 | 82.9 | 86.2 | 73.8] 10.4

1 588 £736 .283 453 82.6 86.0 76.6 9.4

2 572 es .272 446 82.4 85.8 78.8 | 7.0

3 .070 712 .262 450 81.8 85.4: fee 9.0

4 089 £725 .200 470 81.5 84.6 76.4 8.2

5 o8l 729 .266 4.63 81.1 84.8 76.8 8.0

6 .603 755 284: ATL 81.1 85.0 76.6 8.4

7 .618 -770 .296 ATA 82.2 86.2 78.0 8.2

8 .635 798 .002 496 84.5 89.0 78.6 | 10.4

9 .646 815 .298 517 86-6 90.8 796°)" 28.2

10 640 .808 .297 511 88.6 93.4: 80.2 | 413.2

11 .625 787 .288 499 90.1 96.8 80.L | 16.7

Noon,| .606 | .763 | .272 491 91.1 98.9 | 79.4] 19.5

1 .086 NViBI5) 248 487 91.7 100.6 80.6 | 20.0

2 061 .697 212 485 92.4, 100.3 CFO 2S

a .539 .680 .201 479 91.9 99.6 78.6 | 21.0

4 521 .657 .208 449 91.2 99.3 48:0 20:6

5 522 .657 Fk 4.26 89.7 97.8 79.5 18.3

Bis saa<| 690. | gear. | | lager!’ vezi9 ||. cago | 79.3 | 16.7

7 .55e .710 278 432 86.0 89.8 FO) UD.

8 O71 al 279 452 84.9 88.0 79.6 8.4:

9 595 748 338 .410 84.1 86.8 79.0 7.8

10 .608 .736 .340 091 83.6 85.8 78.2 7.6

11 .606 -763 ool 432 83.2 85.6 79.2 6.4

ee eee = aw Set

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Eulb

Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several hours

during the month.

XXXVI

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

an the month of May, 1858.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

Hour.

MOC MTA OU 0 b>

Noon.

MOCOMNTSR OA toh

Mean Wet Bulb Ther-

mometer.

79.8

81.6

79.3

dependent thereon. (Continued.)

s e = g ee ee oe

F) gic ( 2) | Sawn ene

2 ey | ae ce o. . |e ise”

° o 2 Sra wow Be [OP °

= a = S50) 6. Ser Peg Soe

8 aS =) iq | eee.) 6S

2] F /25| a2 |2%s (es2 2/253 .

Bf BS eae a Be te eee

b 8 ba | 8S | SES eee 5 ee

a S a = = < a

0) ty) fy) Inches.) ¥. gr.°°)" Ege

36. |) Wena 5.4 | 0.925 | 9.94 1.85 0.84

3:4) C7 Bill | -:925 94 74 85

3:4.| T7783 BL | 989 .88 Te 85

3.2 | 770ee 48.| .910 79 61 .86

338.1 765 | 50. | ”.896 65 .66 .85

31) Mea | 27) See 62 55 .86

2.9) YO | 44.) .902 72 AB .87

S32 | 7k | Als)! 9B 91 63 .86

AT | Nia) al |. OB .87 2.48 .80

6.0 a) V7G), |, 9:0: | ".928 .89 3.25 75

76 a F720 Wid, TONG is 4.19 -70

B74. 400 - I8.7 |. |.910 .63 91 .66

95 | 76.8 | 14.3 | .905 55 5.42 64

TO 4} 76%") 152. ..886 46 WT 62

107 |. es | 16. | 890 .38 6.16 .6O

103 4 76M) 15.5. | 888 AL 5.91 G1

100 4. UG." 150.) | 887 ey 65 62

O22) P75 18:8) ||. 829 .30 .07 .65

7.8 7G) || 17 .887 A8 4.21 69

6.1] 768 | 9.2 | .905 | 65 3.26 75

5.4 76.8 8.1 905 67 2.82 77

Ain 77-8 G6.8. 1) 19 84 Ey) 81

AO | 177.6. \) 1610" |. 928 95 .08 .83

2.Oyl Ete | (be 1,919 .86 .03 83

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants.

Meteorological Observations. XXXVIi

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of May, 1858.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

Hd | Se

o& |sad

| 28 |OS | Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky.

2| #3 |2882]| ofthe Wind.

os] a 3 oo)

Al a pe

fc) Inches

1} 131.2 dhe Se Scatd. -i till 4p. M. cloudy afterwards.

2) Sunday. | 1.84

3} 137.6 ey SS Cloudy till 5 a. m. cloudless till 10

A.M, Scatd. 71 till 6 P.M. cloudy

afterwards.

4) 134.0 SOS racers na Os Cloudy till 7 a. Mm. Seatd. “i till 4

P.M. cloudy afterwards, also driz-

zling at 8 P. M.

5} 134.0 bit Se Cloudiess till 5 a. M. Scatd. i after-

wards, also thunder and lghtning

and drizzling at 7 P. M.

6; 127.0 POW Se i. eS. Scatd. clouds.

7| 180.4 ee yee Ss Hh, Seatd. clouds till 5 Pp. mM. cloudless

afterwards.

8} 129.0 so VS Cloudless till 3 a. Mm. Scatd. “i and 11

till 5 p. m. cloudless afterwards.

9) Sunday.

10} 129.4 | 0.13 |S. &8. E Scatd. clouds nearly the whole day, also

raining between Noon and 1 P. M.

11| 124.0 ee | Scatd. clouds till 7 P. m. cloudless

afterwards.

12} 134.0 Sao | ee Oy, Es Cloudless till 6 a. mM. Scatd. i after-

wards.

a3) - 129.0 Faun |e Cloudless till 7 a. m. Scatd. “i and “i

till 5 p. M. cloudless afterwards.

14| 136.0 Be it he Scatd. clouds till 6 Pp. mM. cloudless

afterwards.

15} 131.0 UE ea is eras Fs Cloudless till 7 a.m. Scatd. -i and

i till3 Pp. M. cloudy afterwards, also

drizzling at 6 P. M.

16) Sunday.

oe. 0.79 ,;S.&S.E. Cloudy, also drizzling between Noon

to5 Pp. M.

EB) oe 0.14 | H Cloudy nearly the whole day, and also

raining between 11 a. M. tol P. M.

5 ee) ere PNG eo IN Scatd. -i till 5 a. mM. cloudy after-

wards.

20} oe 0:23 | Ns & N. W. Cloudy and drizzling nearly the whole

day.

21; 126.4 - |S.&8. W.&N. E. | Cloudy till 2 a.m. Scatd. “i after-

wards.

Ni Cirri, \-i Cirro strati, \i Cumuli, ~1 Cumulo strati, W-i Nimbi, —i Strati,

Wi Cirro cumuli.

XXXVIiL

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the Month of May, 1858.

Solar Radiation, Weather, Xe.

radiation.

)

22) 130.5

23} Sunday.

Bay et.

PAS MN

ZOl i). Re

27) 134.8

28) 1295.9

29) 148.6

30) Sunday.

ol} yh27.9

5 feet above

Rain Gauge

Ground.

Inches.

Prevailing direction

of the Wind.

Ss.

S. &8. HE,

Ss. B. &S.

S.W.&S.

8. & W.&S. W.

S.& W. &S8. EH.

General Aspect of the Sky.

Cloudy the whole day.

Cloudy, also very slightly drizzling at

6 A. M.

Cloudy, also drizzling from 2 to 7 a. M.

Cloudy nearly the whole day.

Seatd. -iand i till 6 Pe. Mm. cloudless

afterwards.

Scatd. \i and \-i till 7 Pp. mM. cloudless

alterwards.

Cloudy till 7 a.m. Scatd. 71 afterwards.

Scatd. i till 7 a. m. cloudy afterwards,

also very slightly drizzling at 2 P. M.

Meteorological Observations.

XXXI1X

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of May, 1858.

Montuiy RESULTS.

Mean height of the Barometer for the month, “

Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 9 A. M. on the 10th, a

Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 3 P. M. on the 20th, ay

Extreme range of the Barometer during the month, Me 36

Mean of the Daily Max. Pressures, Ai oa

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, ee oy

Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month, .

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, o- ee

Max. Temperature occurred at 1 P. M. on the 31st, ee ue

Min. Temperature occurred at Midnight on the 3rd, oe we

Extreme range of the Temperature during the month, .. Bee

Mean of the daily Max. Temperature, ae ee at,

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, A om a

Mean daily range of the Temperature during the month, a

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, AY oe

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, ..

Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, .. ae poh

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point,

Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month, oe os

Inches.

29.586

29.815

29.201

0.614

29.653

29.513

0.140

80.0

6.0

77.0

9.0

Inches.

0.910

Troy grains.

Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, ic oe oe

Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation,

Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity,

Rained 10 days, Max, fall of rain during 24 hours, we oe

Total amount of rain during the month, oe oe oe

9.71

3.20

0.75

Inches.

1.84

3.28

Prevailing direction of the Wind, oe oe S&S. E.

xl Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of May, 1858.

Monrtuty Resvtts.

Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind

blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour when

any particular wind was blowing it rained.

Hour.

Rain on.

Rain on

Ss. W.

Rain on

—i__.

No. of days.

Midnight. rd

Se id bo

me — bo we

bf we

WNNMWHERKEWNNWNNW-WY

D—D NH ALBRATSFAHM

FOO MNS OF & bt

Re OO me

—

Jr! Pe)

—

led ell oe edad OOOO

mem bpnwocore

NNNRFRKFWNWWWwWaA

BEND ENHENDHH

NNOTNOADWOIODW Be

—_

—K-OvOANOur WO

—

amas oe SE SS SE SE RP Ne

fol

Meteorological Observations. xli

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of June, 1858.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, ae

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

65 35

& D 3 Range of the Barometer 3 o® |Range of the Tempera-

“Ep 5 S during the day. bo 5 ture during the day.

= es \ 5

Date. | == EY fi ®

Bee |) Mex. | Min. Dig, |. 3 | Mex. | Min, | Dif,

Ss =

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. ) Oo o 0

i 29.602 | 29.654 | 29.537 0.117 | 87.4 101.2 81.6 | 19.6

2 047 601 A76 125 | 89.8 99.8 82.6 | al'7.2

3 018 573 454 £119") 294.8 102.0 84.4 | 17.6

4 .009 078 444 134 | 93.6 105.5 84.8 | 20.7

5 .002 075 435 140 | 93.9 105.8 85.2 | 20.6

6 | Sunday.

74 465 512 382 130 | 92.4 101.5 85.7 | 15.8

8 .005 DAT 444 2103 92.2 100.8 85.9 | 14.9

9 a4 592 481 SE ICR ON SE 101.0 85.8 | 15.2

10 .028 O74 446 128 | 90.3 96.9 85.6 | 11.3

#1 .005 .548 441 LOSS 1 97.0 81.6 | 15.4

12 492 2044, 406 133 | 89.9 98.0 84.8 | 13.2

13 | Sunday.

14 OAL .618 488 130 | 89.6 96.5 84.2 | 12.3

15 95 647 aL 116 | 86.6 90.6 83.2 7.4

16 590 633 54 | .092 85.1 96.0 80.0 | 16.0

17 047 .600 477 | 23 86,4 94.3 79.9 | 14.4

18 027 .086 .462 124 83.8 93.9 79.3 | 14.6

19 O15 07/6 442 134 | 83.4 90.4 78.5 | 11.9

20 Sunday. |

21 450 514 379 «ie 9)\~ 82.0 85.8 79.4 6.4

22 449 2512 403 OMe Bek 86.6 79.0 7.6

23 027 597 484: 1S)". 82.0 85.7 79.0 6.7

24 1987 .638 .539 .099 | 82.3 86.8 Tt:8 9.0

25 592 .639 1537 102 | 85.3 92.0 | 81.0 | 11.0

26 .086 .639 OL7 -L22 84.4 91.6 80.2 | 11.4

aT Sunday.

23 soll 544 467 .077 | 82.6 87.2 80.3 6.9

29 524 598 486 072 ; 80.6 89.6 76.7 | 12.9

30 045 083 502 O81 | 83.5 89.6 78.6 | 11.0

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made during

the day.

xlil Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of June, 1858.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dey

;

Fa Xe

‘i E

= ©

5 6

Date. oie =

a 3

a6 a

o & sy

= a

oO 0)

i 80.6 6.8

2 834.8 6.0

8 83.4 7A

4 80.9 12.7

5 83.1 10.8

6 | Sunday.

i 83.7 8.7

8 84°53 7.9

9 83.8 7.3

10 83.6 6.7

Jl 82.3 5.8

12 84.0 5.9

13 | Sunday.

14, 82.1 7.5

15 80.7 5.9

16 199 5.2

17 81.3 5.1

18 80.3 3.5

9) aon 4.3

20 Sunday.

2). hove 2.9

22 | 78.8 33

23 73.7 3.3

24 79.0 3.3

25 80.1 5.2

26 80.5 3.9

27 Sunday.

28 79.5 3.1

29 78.2 2.4

30 79.5 4.0

All the Hygrometrical el

vendent thereon. (Continued.)

: E S a

e a ® as

= Ses

py - & a re

E ie ° 8

o os 2 ows

A = ro

S 2 pies 58

Bnei ec ee

7 S as S

5 py oF oe

Oo a = =

o o Inches.| T. gr.

77.2 |. 10.2 0.916 9.75

80.8 9.0 1.027 | 10.87

Foca ELL 0.992 AS

74.5 | 19.1 .840 8.83

TAY 16:2 931 9.78

79:3") 13.1. .979 | 10.31

80.3 | 11.9 1.011 .65

80.1 | 11.0 .005 .60

80.2 | 10.1 .008 .66

79.4 8.7 0.9838 3

81.0 8.9 1.034 94

78.3 | 11.8 0.949 .05

TaF 8.9 Ook 9.92

[7.3 7.8 Age .82

78.7 ed. .961 | 10.24

78:5 See 955 25

76.9 6.5 9038 9.72

77.6 4.4, .928 .99

TZ 5.0 913 82

77.0 5.0 .910 .79

hips 5.0 919 88

17.9 7.8 .925 88

78.5 5.9 955 | 10.28

77.9 4.7 .937 .06

77.0 3.6 910 9.81

Vice 6.0 925 92

pour required for com-

Additional Weight of Va-

plete saturation.

io)

Pa ee

AAS

7.25

6.44

0.23

4.80

.o7

3.97

.29

.o2

4.28

3.22

2.75

1.85

2.24

1.48

.69

.68

2.76

-08

1.62

.20

2.08

dity, complete satura-

Mean degree of Humi-

tion being unity.

oe eer

Qowsa sy

O Oe or 99

ais

AAWHOD

saN

co 0 I

= Oo

@ ~1 0% MH &

Re OES

ements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.

Meteorological Observations. xliii

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of June, 1858.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

S s ae Range of the Barometer = 5 Range of the Temperature

asc for each hour during me for each hour during

H ee the month. ms the month,

em | Ee Bs Ti Ge

so f , ae | :

ie Max. Min. Diff, se, | Max. Min. Diff.

= =

Inches. | Inches.| Inches.' Inches. o oO 0 o

Mid- |

night. 29.547 (29.633 |29.464 0.169 83.4 87.7 78.8 8.9

1 ahts) .619 451 .168 §3.2 87.2 78.6 8.6

2 .525 .616 433 .183 83.1 87.2 77.0 10.2

a cay .606 415 191 82.8 86.7 76.8 9.9

4 013 597 .403 194 82.8 86.4 76.7 9.7

5 527 .609 .405 .204, 82.5 85.9 77.8 8.1

6 538 619 A24 .195 82.5 86.4 78.0 8.4

7 DOD .629 AAS 184 83.5 $7.5 78.6 8.9

8 567 .639 A63 176 85.5 90.4 79.5 10.9

9 O74 654 | .465 189 87.8 94.0 80.4 13.6

10 ‘Die 647 .466 181 89.9 97.2 81.4 15.8

11 064 .645 464 181 91.8 99.6 83.0 16.6

Noon. | .549 | .643 | .452 191 | 92.4 | 101.8 81.0 20.8

1 527 | 602 | .438 164 | 92.9 | 104.4 80.0 24.4

2 504 | .574 405 169 93.3 | 105.6 79.4 26.2

3 .486 567 384 183 92.9 | 105.8 80.8 25.0

4 475 p49 376 173 91.3 , 105.8 80.4 24.9

5 - 477 79 19 -204 89.8 | 103.6 78.4 25.2

6 A88 aie 1384 -189 87.9 | 100.1 78.3 21.8

7 -506 .084, 407 Pa AP 86.4: 95.6 78.8 16.8

8 528 .602 0434, 168 | 85.5 92.9 79.3 13.6

9 545 .609 453 -156 84.8 90.9 80.2 10.7

10 .D52 618 .480 138 84.6 90.0 79.7 10.3

11 004 .631 481 .150 84.0 88.6 79.3 9.3

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers, are derived from the observations made at the several hours

during the month.

xliv Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of June, 1858,

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—( Continued.)

2 +3 a = oS oS a es re

o a eo) = Bae eS Sos

2) 16 > BE > BS 2 _— eg ord

oO te fo) o io) & » 3 Bd 3 = oe =)

Hour. | 2 2 S A rc coi ao Seal me ae

2 3 EM Te Sree es

iS) 3 = 3 oo SS 2 | Bee eS

@ 5 a ar |e | oe ol pee | Blo ealve be

a3 Pe 2 me | Se | seq) | ieee eae

hens = eee = tay Bocas ORR

0) ft) oO o Inches. |Troy grs./Troy grs.

meee soz | 32 | 736 | 48 10.958 ! 1028 | 168 | 0.86

1 80.2 3.0 | 78.7 4.5 | 961 3 58 87

Zs 80.2 29 | 72.7 4.4 | .961 .33 58 87

3 79.9 29 TSA 4.4 | .952 23 52 87

Ae | F994 |) 2.90.) 784 4.4 | .952 23 52 87

5 79.7 2 Bynes 4.2 | .949 .20 Ad .88

6 79.8 2.7 | 784 4¥ | .952 1238 Al .88

7 80.4 8.1>| 788 4.7 | .964 34 .66 .86

8 81.8 A.2) |) 72 6.3 | .976 AB 2.29 81

9 82.0 5.8 | 79.1 ga 973 34 3.26 76

10 | 82.5 74 | 788 | 114 | .964 21 A,,25 a!

11 83.1 8.7 78.7 13.1 961 14 5.13 .66

Noon. |] 82.9 9.5 78.1 143 943 9.93 61 64

1 SPS Mh IO.1 SOT eee en, O80 .80 97 62

2 82.48 Si DOs7 oT 7 2e 1G. et O16 63 6.32 .60

3 SPiGhs I TO Bebe 4g IIS Sin. 922 .69 .08 61

A's) Bier 9.6 | 76.9 | 14.4 | .908 58 4.58 64

5 81.3 S.5 TOL We 12.8.ni . 910 .63 79 67

6 | 81.0 6.977 Be Se1O.4 «ly .925 84 3.80 72

" 80.8 5.6 | 78.0 | 84 | .940 | 10.03 08 7%

8 | 80.7 4.8 | 78.3 7.2 | .949 14 2.58 .80

9 80.7 At 8i6 6.2 | .958 .26 20 22

20 | 80.9 3.7) |. 2790 5.6 | .970 rf .02 84

i1 80.6 3.4 78.9 5.1 967 oO 1.80 85

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.

Meteorological Observations. xlv

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

wn the month of June, 1858.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

Z oo

Eee ya 5

oo |8ac

.| 223 |O & §| Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky.

= ree 8. 2 of the Wind.

3S ox =e

ee eo

ro) Inches.

1} 140.0 | 0.26|S.&S.E. & EH. Cloudless till 3 a. mu. Scatd. i till 3 p.

M. cloudy afterwards, also raining at

4and 6 Pp. M.

2) 140:0') .. |S. &S. E. Seatd. ‘i and “i.

3} 140.0 at S. Cloudless till 10 a. m. Scatd. clouds till

6 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

a) 7 149:0'| S.E. & 8. W. Cloudy till 6 a. m. cloudless afterwards.

a, 5144.07... 8. Cloudless tilll Pp. Mm. Scatd. i till 7 Pe

M. cloudless afterwards,

6) Sunday.

te TARR) 5. 6) S.&.N. 3B, Cloudless till 8 a. m. Scatd \i and “i

; till 3 Pp. M., cloudy till 8 Pp. M. cloud-

less afterwards.

oly (40. a ae Cloudless,

Be2.0yo.. | S.& S. E, Cloudless till 5 a. m cloudy till 11 a.

M. cloudless till 5 Pp. mM. Scatd. -i

afterwards.

eee |. |S, Scatd ‘i till 5 a. M. Scatd. clouds after.

wards.

11; 125.0 | 0.382 |S. &S.E. Cloudless till 3 A. M. cloudy afterwards

also drizzling between 5 and 6 P. M.

EAyeeioo.0 | .. S&S. E. Cloudy the whole day.

13) Sunday.

14)" 1420)... |S.H&S.&E, Cloudy till 5 a. m. Scatd, -i till 11

A. M. cloudy afterwards.

1 an Ss. & 5, H. Cloudy the whole day and also slightly

drizzling at 4, 6, and 9 A. M.

8S. &S. W. Scatd. i till 11 a. M. cloudy afterwards

is also raining at Noon and 6 P. M.

16; 126.0 | 0.18

| ee Cloudy till 10 a. m. Seatd. i and “i

till 3 p. M. cloudy afterwards.

ree 1.89 |S.& 8, Cloudless till 3 a. M. cloudy afterwards

also raining between | to 6 P. M.

BO tae pare Ou Gar NG Cloudy also slightly raining between 7

and 8 P. M.

20) Sunday.| 1.18

ee a 0.24 |N. EL&N.& E. Cloudy nearly the whole day and also

drizzling between 8 A. M.to 1 P. M.

22) oe N. E.& 8. E. & E.| Cloudy nearly the whole day, also

slighty drizzling between 114. M. to

1 P.M.

ae 0.46 |S. E.& EH. Cloudy till 6 Pp. mM. Scatd. “i and Vi

afterwards, and also raining at Noon.

ae 0.12 |S. &S8. E. Cloudy, and also raining at 2 and 9 a.m.

Ni Cirri, “i cirro strati, ~1 cumuli, %i cumulo strati, \-i nimbi, —i strati,

Mi cirro cumuli.

xlvi

Meteomcienacad Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Boal, Meteorological Observations |

taken ut the Surver eyor General's Office, Calcutta,

an the month of June, 1858.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

D> oO

ale QO &

ee sf) ©)

et © o

O-rm SOQ

Ns oma]

Aa S)

wis qos

coarcs ‘Sa 4

= Rin ©

oO Inches.

120.0] .

Be 0.82

Sunday.| 1.24

ade, O24

ae 1.49

°° 0.08

Prevailing direction

of the Wind.

General Aspect of the Sky.

Seatd. clouds.

Cloudy, and also raining at 4 and 5 a.

M. and between 3 and 6 P. M.

Cloudy, and also drizzling occasionally

between Noon and 9 P. M.

Cloudy also raining nearly the whole

day.

Scatd. clouds, also raining at 4 a, M.

Meteorological Observations. xlyit

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Mfeteorological Observations

taken ut the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of June, 1858.

Montrniy ReEsvrts.

Inches.

Mean height of the Barometer for the month, a -- 29.530

Max. height of the Barometer, occurred at 9 a. M. on the Ist, o- 29.654

Min. height of the Barometer, occurred at 5 P.M. on the 21st, cates ea

Extreme Range of the Barometer during the month, un wien Oar

Mean of the Daily Max. Pressures, ae as ~- 29,584

Ditto ditto Vane aattoy 168 aie se «» 29.469

Mean Daily range of the Barometer during the month, —.. sie te Oelelia

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, are ie 86.9

Max, Temperature, occurred at 3 Pp. M. on the 5th, ee -» 105.8

Min. Temperature, occurred at 4 A. M. on the 29th, at aie 76.7

Extreme Range of the Temperature during the month, .. oe 29.1

Mean of the Daily Max. Temperatures, ee ee ee 94.9

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, os oa we 81.7

Mean Daily range of the Temperatures during the month,.. os 13.2

)

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, Sie ae 81.2

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 5.7

Computed Mean Dew Point for the month, we ad 78.3

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed Mean Dew Point, ate 8.6

Inches.

Mean Elastic force of vapour for the month, .. a ie 0.949

Troy grains.

Mean weight of vapour for the month, os ee a 10.09

Additional weight of vapour required for complete saturation, = 3.16

Mean degree of Humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.76

Inches.

Rained 16 days. Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, Bid 1 1.89

Total amount of rain during the month, wy a vie 8,22

Prevailing direction of the Wind, .. on ae S.&S. E.

xlvili Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, :

in the month of June, 1858.

Monruuy Resvtts.

Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind

blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour,

when any particular wind was blowing, it rained.

Rain on.

r. o| 16 el Vet (el-| cl’ cme Els

i elas ePlel (si le].|clstele|2

No z [| Ee oe be |e fod [ee fon (ce ek bey |e |S |

No. of days

Midnight. t 1 2 8} 4l3 1

1 11 |l 2 5) LS 144

2 Lli1jil 2 6} 1f14) 1 2

3 1 2/ [6 [i441 11 \3

4 il iL 2 5 14) 4 3

5 Unda 1 8} 13) 1 1) eg

6 1 3 af 5| pl4) 2] 2

7 1| | 2) 1 2 5} f12i 13 1

8 i | 1} lj 4 18} lj 2

4) i 1, 17 3 2) 1f17| 1} 2

10 iL 7m ae A 17 4

als Bhat cain aa ae LZ. 3

Noon. 2 1 3; 216) Lf 4) 1

1 2 Se Ze Ae 5

2 2 2\)1,6 13] 1} 2 1

3 1 2 4| 15) 2} 2 i 1

A, 1 5) 1gl4] af 4] 2) 2) 1

5 Z| x 6, 114 3| lf 1

6 1 3 | 1} 6) 2912) 1] 3) 371

| u 1 3 6 12 3} 2

8 1 if 1 5} §i3) 1) 3) 1 2

9 uy 1 1 4! JpL5 3| 1 1

10 uf 1 2 3 i6 2| 1 | 1

11 if 1 2 3, {16 3

Meteorological Observations. xlix

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

mm the month of July, 1858.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

feet.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

He te

3 re Range of the Barometer Zo Range of the Tempera-

Bo = during the day. Aas ture during the day.

ee Eo

mma As —

‘ =e ; s 2

2 Bas Max Min Diff ae Max Min, | Diff

a = =

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. ) ft) oO )

1 | 29.573 | 29.628 | 29.519 0.104 85.1 90.3 78.4 | 11.9

2 586 624: 528 .096 85.3 93.1 78.2 | 14.9

3 .089 646 534 112 85.8 91.8 81.8 | 10.0

4 | Sunday

5 546 592 488 104 84.3 91.4 81.2 | 10.2

6 546 .618 AGT 151 85.2 93.7 SL001".12.7

"7 581 624: 2092 .092 84.7 92.0 80.4 | 11.6

8 611 .655 .569 036 84.2 88.6 81.6 7.0

9 .649 .693 .600 .093 84.3 89.6 81.2 8.4

10 .628 677 .038 139 85.3 91.8 80.9 | 10.9

11 Sunday

12 .o19 571 433 138 84.0 90.0 80.6 9.4

13 496 .540 435 105 83.4 88.2 80.2 8.0

14 .026 .558 478 .080 81.4 84.8 79.2 5.6

15 524 .069 462 107 83.3 88.0 79.2 8.8

16 .596 657 545 112 81.3 85.9 12.2 6.7

| 641 .690 579 eEbL 83.6 88.8 (EY 9.8

18 Sunday

19 013 591 A22 169 84.6 91.2 79.8 | 1A

20 .026 599 470 .129 83.7 89.8 80.8 9.0

21 075 613 534 084 83.9 90.8 81.0 9.8

22 .563 .608 .008 .100 82.1 87.8 79.8 8.0

23 507 .589 4:16 .169 79:9 $1.8 78.0 3.8

24, .3806 54 263 bo 81.2 83.4 80.0 3.4

25 | Sunday

26 485 570 430 140 82.5 85.4: 80.0 5.4

27 591 .635 547 .088 84.0 87.6 81.9 5.7

28 627 .668 578 .030 84.7 90.5 80.6 9.9

29 634 673 567 106 85.7 91.2 81.4 9.8

30 633 .687 O77 110 86.0 92.0 80.2 | 11.8

31 674: 724: 617 107 82.6 85.5 81.4 AL

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers, are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made during

the day.

j Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of July, 1858.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon, (Continued.)

E So ees

~ 5 Q o PSS eS = =}

ze 3 = = Bao Veo Spyies

ia ie 5) o iS) a se » < a 5 S

2 es rai S a os = a| =

= o iS ° oa = et is »

Date. CQ 3 E oo = 25 jes a ane

ay = a a (a6 0) UR Gives o> > eit

o z Ss = a oS 2 2) ie Se) pes

aren es ce au | PS | eS ieee cae

& S S = 2, oy 2 ad

=o) a S, a ais aS) eee | g 89

= A 5 a = = ple =

ty) Cy) oO fC) Inches. | T. gr.| T. gr

1 80.9 A.2 43.8 6.3 0.964 |10.381 | 2.26 | 0.82

2 81.2 AL 79.1 6.2 9738 40 24 82

3 81.5 4.3 79.3 6.5 979 44, 39 81

4 | Sunday.

5) 80.9 , 8,4 79.2 bal .976 45. |. 1.88 85

6 81.2 4.0 79.2 6.0 976 43 | 2.18 83

y | 81.0 air 79.1 5.6 973 40 .02 84

P 8 81.0 3.2 79.4 48 .983 RSM Gand Gas he 7/633 &6

9 80.5 3.8 78.6 ayer .958 26 | 2.02 84,

10 81.0 4.3 78.8 6.5 964 29 5) SL

11 | Sunday.

12 80.9 3.5 Sf 5.3 961 31 | 1.86 .85

13 79.8 3.6 78.0 5A .940 .O9 87 .84

14 79.0 2.4 77.8 3.6 934 .05 22 89

15 79.4 3.9 77 A 5.9 922 | 9.89] 2.04] .83

16 79.0 2.3 77.8 3.5 984 |10.05! 1.19 | .89

17 80.2 3.4: 78.5 Bal .955 .20 78 85

18 Sunday.

19 80.9 3.7 79.0 5.6 .970 BY \o2o2 84

20 80.9 2.7 79.6 4.1 .989 60 | 1.47 88

21 80.7 S44 79.1 A..8 973 A2 Hei .86

22 79.8 2.3 78.6 3.5 .958 .30 21 ‘90

Zo [8.5 1.4 77.8 2.1 934 ‘09 | 0.69 94

24 79.4 1.8 78.5 2.7 .955 29 92 92

25 Sunday

26 79.4) 3.1 77.8 4.7 .934 03 | 1.61 .86

27 81.0 3.0 79.5 4.5 .986 .DD .62 87

28 Siz 3.6 79.3 5.4 .979 48 94 84

29 $1.5 4.2, 79.4 6.3 .983 49 | 2.31 82

3 81.7 4.3 79.5 6.5 .986 ool .40 81

3 80.2 2.4 79.0 3.6 970 42 | 1.26 .89

——

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants,

- Meteorological Observations. h

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of July, 1858.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

Oi 45 : 2 ture for each hour

a 6.5 each hour during the Aw aii

"0 6S a ames ae: uring the

Hour.|.2 3" ug month.

ei eae a ane ROE ea

es a . Max Min Diff. 5 a Max, | Min. | Diff

oO io] o

a =

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches, ) oO ) o

Mid- -

night, 29.585 | 29.677 | 29.454 0.223 81.7 83.8 78.2 5.6

1 573 669 442 227 81.6 83.8 78.3 5.5

2 559 .655 coon 258 81.4 84.6 78.6 6.0

3 551 649 393 .256 81.2 84.0 78.4 5.6

4: 546 654 .390 264 81lel 83.8 78.5 5.3

5 057 .668 404: 264 81.0 83.2 78.4: 4.8

6 574 681 405 276 81.0 83.2 78.0 5.2

a 586 697 407 .290 81.8 84.0 78.4 5.6

8 599 703 A402 301 83.6 86.0 79.2 6.8

9 .605 Bey 419 .298 85.2 87.8 79.8 8.0

10 .606 «724 408 316 86.5 89.9 79.6 | 10.3

11 597 718 394 324 87.3 90.8 80.2 | 10.6

Noon.| .583 696 374 322 87.9 91.9 80.0 | 11.9

1 562 695 342 308 87.6 92.6 79.4} 18.2

2 040 .658 .009 349 87.1 93.7 80.9 | 12.8

3 024 .639 295 344 86.5 92.4 $0.8") “LEE

zi! 511 617 .263 354 85.8 90.8 80.2 | 10.6

5 517 .633 273 .360 85.2 88.9 79.8 9.1

6 O24 641 273 .368 84.2 87.5 80.2 7.3

P| 043 645 .283 .362 83.1 86.0 80.4: 5.6

8 565 -670 291 379 82.9 85.8 79.8 6.0

9 586 673 303 370 82.4: 84.8 80.2 4.6

10 998 .698 313 385 82.1 84.0 80.2 3.8

11 598 704 2310 294 81.9 83.7 78.4 5.3

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Pulb

Thermometers, are derived from the observations made at the several hours

during the month,

Nu Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

an the month of July, 1858.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon. (Continued.)

a £3 ey = Se

D 2 S oD 3 os So Shee eS 0

ue = a) Ss = >a pm + — =

= S a =) Sy 14 i Ss oY oS

& D> Q ao) <5 tet — = ae CY ws

Hour s 3s x ns BD ook pkg

C5 es 3 aS oar es sagt lems — °

iz 2 s me} ras As SO | Be eae oy as

: 2 e |e | 2s eee ee

so —Q SS ah < = =o 43 te ac 2

S ce 2a aE =

$8 a 8 po | $3 | 8 a2 Srerias sis

= a O a = = 4 =

ft) 0 fy) ) Inches; 1° @. gr T. gr

Mid- | vos | 91 | 485 | 3.2 | 0.955

10.29 1.08 0.91

1 79.6 2.0 78.6 3.0 .958 .o2 02 91

2 79.4 2.0 78.4 3.0 .952 25 .02 91

~3 79:3 1.9 78.3 2.9 949 aie 0.99 91

4, 79.3 1.8 78.4 2.7 952 25 92 92

5 79.2 1.8 73.3 2.7 9419 22 92 92

6 79.3 17, 78.4 2.6 .952 25 89 .92

7 79.8 2.0 73.8 3.0 964 28 1.02 91

8 80.7 2.9 79.2 4A: .976 48 DD 87

9 81.2 4.0 79.2 6.0 .976 43 2.18 .83

10 81.8 A] 79.4 Fol .983 AT .63 .80

11 82.1 5.2 79.5 7.8 -986 A9 .92 18

Noon 82.3 5.6 79.5 8.4 .986 49 8.15 Bi i

1 81.9 5.7 79.0 8.6 .970 eh: 21 76

Z 81.9 5.2 79.3 7.8 979 042, 2.91 78

3 81.7 4.8 79.3 7.2 979 44 .66 .80

4, 81.4 4.4, 79.2 6.6 .976 41 A2 81

5 80.9 4.3 78.7 6.5 961 .26 fo 81

6 80.5 3.7 78.6 5.6 .958 .26 1.98 84

v4 80.0 3.1 78.4 4.7 952 aL .65 .86

8 79.8 3.1 78.2 4.7 .946 15 64 .86

9 79.8 26 78.5 3.9 955 BPA oO 89

10 79.6 2.5 78.3 3.8 .949 -20 ol 89

11 79.6 2.3 78.4 3.5 952 29 21 89

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants.

Meteorological Observations. litt

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

‘taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of July, 1858.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky.

of the Wind.

Max. Solar

radiation.

Rain Gauge

5 feetabove

Ground.

fe) Inches

ee 0.26 |8. Cloudy, also raining between 10 and

11 P.M.

ai Ss. Seatd. clouds.

bie Ss. Scatd. clouds.

2.388 |S. & EH. Cloudy, also raining between 1 and 3

oO asepond. -

—~

P. M.

Scatd. clouds till 8 a. m. Scatd 11 tall

3 P. M. cloudy afterwards also driz-

zling between 8 and 9 P. M.

Cloudless till 5 a. M. Scatd. i after-

wards, also raining between 3 and

4 P.M.

Cloudless till 4 a. m. Scatd. clouds

afterwards also raining at 10 a. M.

Noon and 5 Pp. M.

Cloudy, till 5 p. m. cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless till 7 a. mM. Scatd 1 till 3

pe. M. cloudy till 7 P.M. cloudless

afterwards.

Cloudless till 4 a. mM. Scatd “i till 9

A. M. cloudy till 4 P.M. Scatd. -i

and i afterwards also raining at 11

A.M. 1, 4, 7, and 8 P. M.

Cloudy also raining between Noon and

3 P. M.

Cloudy, also drizzling occasionally.

ron) fe

nS)

mR n

& =)

ee &

mR Rm

S. E. Cloudy nearly the whole day.

E. Cloudy also raining occasionally.

K. Scatd. clouds till 7 Pp. mM. Scatd. “i

afterwards also slightly raining at

2 P.M.

18) Sunday.

19) 116.0 E.&S.E. &calm } Scatd. \i till 7 a.m. Scatd. ni till 3

p. M. cloudy afterwards, also raining

between 6 and 10 P. M.

N. E. &S. E. Cloudy till 5 p. M. Scatd. -i afterwards.

H. & 8. Cloudy till5 a. Mm. Scatd. %i till 2 P. M.

cloudy afterwards also rain at 2 P.M.

20). ye

21) 108.0 | 0.36

ee “- Ss

10/ 1240 | .. |8

11) Sunday. | 0.38

_, aie 0.53 | N. EB. & E.

Ni Cirri, i Cirro strati, \i Cumuli, ~i Cumulo strati, vei Nimbi, —i Strait

Wi Cirro cumuli,

liv

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the Month of July, 1858.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &e.

Solar

radiation.

Max.

5 feet above

Rain Gauge

Ground.

Inches.

2.35

3.04

1.61

1.22

0.10

1.40

Prevailing direction

of the Wind.

8. & 8. W.

S. & calm.

N.E.&§&.

General Aspect of the Sky.

Cloudy also raining constantly.

Cloudy also raining between Midnight

and Noon, and at 5P. M.

Cloudy also raining between 2 and 6

P.M

Cloudy also raining at Noon.

Cloudy also very slightly drizzling at

7 P.M.

Scatd. “i and 11 til 4 P. m. cloudy

afterwards.

Cloudy till 8 a. M. Scatd. 1 till 4 P.M.

cloudy afterwards also slightly driz-

zling from 7 to 10 P. M.

Cloudy also raining at 9a. M. andl

P.M.

Meteorological Observations. lv

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of July, 1858.

Montuiy Resvutts.

Inches.

Mean height of the Barometer for the month, oe aie 29.566

Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 10 a. M. on the 31st, = 29.724

Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 4 4. M. on the 24th, Ae 29.263

Extreme range of the Barometer during the month, ee ee 0.461

Mean of the Daily Max. Pressures, = oa oe 29.620

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, S ie 29.505

Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month, x) 0.115

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, oe ee 83.8

Max. Temperature occurred at 2 P. M. on the 6th, A. Phi 93.7

Min. Temperature occurred at 6 a. M. on the 28rd, mi Bo 78.0

Lixtreme range of the Temperature during the month, .. oe 15.7

Mean of the daily Max. Temperature, ar oe sic 89.1

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, : oe ae 80.3

Mean daily range of the Temperature shone the month, ak 8.8

fo)

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, ee sie 80.4,

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 3.4

Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, .. a oe 78.7

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point, .. 5.1

| Inches.

Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month, acs ee 0.961

Troy grains.

Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, ae ; ws 10.31

Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, ee 1.79

Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.85

; Inches.

Rained 25 days, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, <o + 3.04

Total amount of rain during the month, oF is ee 17.96

Prevailing direction of the Wind, oe sis S.&E.&S. EH.

lvi Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of July, 1858.

Monruty Resvtts.

Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind

blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour when

any particular wind was blowing it rained.

Hour. : ts 4 P i .

SL g ernie eT - |S) ./S}3

slSle ie el eqs ele |c[s)sl2

Njcd iz eal E. 25S. E. ald lal W. lel z else

No. of days

Midnight. 2,11 5 | 2) 5 5 Olle Ga A 1

9 5/1 6 TSE py A

2 2 5 6 a i SP 4

3 2 4 6 ah (R72 Wee Vv oa 2 3

4 2 4 4 To] bo be 3 2

5 A 8 2 pA maner iae | 2

6 D4 6 4 TA Lied

7 2| 1) 4 5 4, Popa i

8 3 5 6 D hod £

9 IN peel eee 5 a RE 1

10 2\ 11 3/ 11 4 | of 8 rebar

11 3) 2) 4 5 2 1) SR

Noon 1 3 5 | 14 2 Te AQ 2st 2

1 1) | 4) 3] 5 | af 2 ly 3 1 2

2 1 Aes Bo) aie oo 2) 2 Ul} ab ae

3 1) B.S} ees iu 3 34.9

4 31 Os Tien | es 5 | 2

5 4, 4 | 2) 6 Tt 2 | 2 |

6 neem Ree Weert fae cater Nie 1 1 1

7 2\ 1141 11 7 | 2) 8 ol Dae?

8 2) 1) 3) 11 8 | at 2 1

9 1) 4a ob 7 0) aes il De Ved 1

10 1) 1] 4 7 U3 1 Dew

ll 4) 1) 7 3 1 2

MMeteorologicat Observations. ivit

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of August, 1858.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

feet.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

= 2 S Range of the Barometer ie 3 Range of the Tempera-

e E GS during the day. 8 5 ture during the day.

mad As

a ao" ; a ©

2 siz Max. Min. Diff, ee Max. | Min. | Diff.

Eh =

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. ' Cy) rc) Oo ft)

1 Sunday.

2 |29.663 | 29.712 | 29.608 0.109 84.0 88.6 80.2 8.4:

3 .616 666 | .540 126 85.6 92.0 80.6 | 11.4

4 .090 .650 523 127 86.1 92.6 81.8 | 10.8

5 5384 590 A51 139 86.1 92.6 81.8 | 10.8

6 467 537 392 | .145 86.2 91.7 82.0 9.7

7 430 495 402 093 85.4 90.8 82.2 8.6

8 | Sunday.

9 .425 468 257 ltt 84.2 89.4 81.7 77

10 54 001 _ 408 093 83.7 88.1 80.6 7.5

il .536 .605 A477 128 84.7 89.8 81.7 8.1

12 585 621 540 081 84.1 89.0 80.6 8.4

13 .629 689 587 102 | 83.5 87.0 81.2 5.8

14, 684 | .735 .618 117 84.0 88.6 80.6 8.0

15 | Sunday.

16 .585 641 530 111 83.5 87.8 77.6.| 10.2

17 614 .661 -566 095 B11 83.4 78.4 5.0

18 589 .633 .530 103 81.1 86.0 78.6 7.4

19 .579 624 522 102 82.7 88.6 78.8 9.8

20 583 657 513 144; 84.0 89.6 80.3 9.3

21 O21 .576 417 159 83.6 89.0 80.6 8.4

22 | Sunday.

23 528 576 464 112 84.7 89.2 81.6 7.6

24, 585 .613 496 AW 83.0 85.6 80.6 5.0

25 ».590 631 528 103 79.2 79.8 77.8 2.0

26 034 .588 463 125 82.9 89.3 78.8 | 10.5

27 535 .590 467 123 83.3 88.8 79.7 9.1

28 562 .629 012 117 81.4 84.8 78.4 6.4

29 | Sunday.

30 563 |. .614 496 118 81.7 85.3 79.6 5.7

51 567 640 O11 129 83.2 88.2 79.4 8.8

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers, are derived from the twenty-four hourly ebservations made during

the day.

Iviii Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of August, 1858.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon. (Continued.)

g © ones = s

= é cy] Pee ieee), Boe

2 A S 5 2 iiaoa Ss 3S

2 z "a ) 5 |s Bs/se

Date.| rs o = ‘s ov 4 eee hos

D s 2 & e 38 = os = 25

Es = 5 sell @ fe St eee eee

he 2 3 S a, a te ee aie

ao aa 2. 3 Es a = 2285/15 2 on

s a O aa a < =

0 0 0 Inches. | T. gr.| T. gr

1 | Sunday.

2 80.3 3.7 78.4 5.6 0.952 {10.19 | 1.98 | 0.84

3 81.0 4.6 78.7 6.9 961 .26 | 2.50 .80

4 81.9 4.2 79.8 6.3 995 .62 30 .82

3) 82.0 4,1 79.9 6.2 .998 65 .80 82

6 81.8 4A 19.6 6.6 989 54 45 81

7 81.2 4.2 79.1 6.3 973 40 28 82

8 | Sunday.

9 81.0 3.2 79.4 4.8 .983 -D1i| peaks 86

10 80.4 3.0 78.7 5.0 961 ol .76 85

1) 80.4 4.3 78.2 6.5 .946 Lh | Beak 81

12 80.5 3.6 78.7 5.4 961 ol | 1.90 84

13 80.8 2.7 79.4 | 4.1 983 04: 46 88

14 80.8 3.2 79.2 A.8 976 45 72 86

i) | Sunday.

16 | 80.7 2.8 79.3 4.2 979 51 49 88

17 78.7 2.4 77.5 3.6 925 9.96 21 .89

is 78.5 2.6 77.2 3.9 916 87 20 88

19 | 79.6 3.1 78.0 4.7 940 |10.09 63 .86

20 81.0 3.0 79.5 4.5 .986 55 62 BF

21 | 80.8 2.8 79.4 |. 42 .983 54] 49 | 88

22 | Sunday.

23 61.2 3.5 79.4 5.3 .983 51 91 85

24 60.7 2.3 79.5 3.5 .986 57 25%; 89

25 77.6 1.6 76.8 2.4: .905 9.79 | O77 93

26 79.2 3.7 77.3 5.6 919 86 | 1.93 "84

FA | 79.6 3.7 The 5.6 931 98 9D 84

28 79.3 2.1 78.2 3.2 .946 |10.19 .08 .90

29 | Sunday.

30 78.9 2.8 77.5 4.2 925 9.96 AL 88

31 790 4.2 76.9 6.3 .908 “74 | 2.15 82

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants,

re oo A

Sa ee ee ee Se ee ee

‘Meteorological Observations. lix

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

on the month of August, 1858.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

SS Range of the Barometer for S = Range of the. Cmpera:

ae Das : 2 ture for each hour

4389 each hour during the mo :

wo 8 2 ae: during the

Hour. | & ave 7 ae month.

Ta - As

P a0 f eve f | :

sas Max Min Diff. S oy Max. | Min. | Diff,

a =

| Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. ra) re) re) 0

Mid-

iene: 29.574 {29.706 | 29.459 0.247 81.6 84.2 78.2 6.0

1 562 .690 442, 248 81.4 84.2 77.8 64:

2 -D52 682 434 248 81.2 84.2 78.8 5A

3 AL .672 416 .256 81.2 83.8 78.8 5.0

A dd4 .672 417 25a 80.8 83.0 78.6 4,4:

5 p46 .680 420 260 80.7 83.0 78.6 Ai. A

6 2263 .698 A438 .255 80.6 82.8 78.4 4.4,

a 575 .705 443 .262 81.1 83.2 78.6 A.6

8 .592 127 A449 .278 82.9 85.4 79.8 5.6

9 .600 734 461 273 84.0 87.2 | 79.8 | 7A

10 .608 735 455 .280 85.4 88.6 79.6 9.0

11 595 | 730 447 283 86.1 89.1 | 79.6 | 9.5

| | Ks

Noon.| .580 | .715 A29 .286 86.8 90.4 | 79.6 | 10.8

1 059 704: A2Z1 283 87.6 91.6 796 | 12.0

2 533 .667 401 .266 87.5 92.0 79.8 | 12.2

3 514 .663 3716 .287 87.4: 92.6 79.6 13 0

4 .5b02 .639 od 282 86.5 91.6 82.0 9.6

5 OL .618 .004 204 85.5 91.2 79.8 | 11.4

6 O14 .635 374 .261 84.6 87.8 79.7 8.1

7 534 .652 894 .258 83.4 86.6 77.9 8.7

8 558 .661 420 .241 82.8 85.6 77.6 8.0

9 078 .688 440 .248 82.6 85.3 78.2 7A

10 588 .689 447 242 82°2 85.2 77.6 7.6

11 587 .693 .456 207 82.0 84.3 78.6 5.7

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several bours

during the month.

Ix Meteorotogical Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of August, 1858.

Hoarly Means, &c, of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon. (Continued.)

Ad 5 25 Ee Sey

G z E g e200 Ss es Se

a = oS (a) he > 2 PS eS ; o &

ae = S 3 s Ses [S35

iroee ° (=) S) <e5) OS! 58 ovo ys fo)

3 co) e ss

Mo} 2 Ve ey = pics| = pS, CS oy

Hour mo. rs) fA s as aD <x Qu o oS.

c Ap Ses s oS om = oa) ye

he xe) aS} = o | ois

os = ) cite fm = ‘Ss |S 2S See a

Ss 3 — 5 xs AY COO S/T &

oo a) a co. ae sto (SS ses be

= es rs e|s aoa &

Sg Pb 5 Pay aS Sac iPrPLElissas

= Q oO S = = < a

0 0 oO o Inches, |} T. gr Eiger

night, ;

1 79.2 2.2 78.1 3.3 943 16 11 90

a 79.2 2.0 78.2 3.0 946 19 02 91

3 79.2, 2.0 78.2 3.0 946 19 02 91

4 79.0 1.8 78.1 24 943 16 0.91 92

5 78.9 1.8 78.0 2.7 .940 13 91 92

6 78.8 1.8 77.9 2.7 .937 10 91 92

vi 79,2 1.9 78.2 2.9 946 19 98 91

8 80.0 2.9 78.5 4.4 955 27 1.52 87

9 80.5 3.9 78.7 5.3 961 31 86 85

10 ron Mah 4.3 78.9 6.5 .967 -o2 2.36 Sl

11 81.4 4.7 79.0 7.1 970 00 -60 .80

Noon.| 81.9 A.9 79.4: 7.4 983 AT 74 79

1 81.9 5.7 79.0 8.6 .970 .ol 3.21 76

2 82.0 5.5 79.2 8.3 976 09 10 7

3 $1.9 5.5 79.1 8.3 973 .060 .09 otk

4, 81.6 4.9 79.1 7 A, 973 38 2.72 79

5 81.0 4.9 GS 6.8 961 26 A6 81

6 80.8 3.8 78.9 5.7 -967 34 .05. 84,

vf 80.0 3.4 78.3 5.1 949 18 1.78 85

8 79.9 2.9 76.4 4.4, 952 ae 52 87

9 79.9 2.7 738.5 4.1 6955 27 AL 88

10 79.7 2.5 78.4 3.8 952 23 31 89

il 79.7 2.3 78.5. 3.5 955 27 20 90.

~All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants.

Meteorological Observations. Ixi

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

S| wo

3| ss

a; =a”

)

1 ‘Sunday

| ae

3) 135.2

4| 135.0

5| 132.0

6; 113.8

7| 124.3

8| Sunday

9 ee

10 ee

1) aes

1 an

13) 119.0

14, 114.8

15) Sunday

i ao

17 oe

18 ee

i aoe

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of August, 1858.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

Zod

£3 2 of the Wind.

Be 10 O

Inches.

0.13

Ae 8. Scatd. “i and i till 6 a. mM. Scatd.

clouds till 8 Pp. m. cloudless after-

wards.

se 8. &8. E. Cloudless till 7 a. m. Scatd. i and

0.22 | N. E. & E.

0.16 |S. & N. EH.

0.27 |S. E.&S.& EH.

0.30 | 8. EH. & E.

0.71 |S. &S. HE.

0.07 |S. &S8. E.

i till 8 p. M. cloudless afterwards.

0.16 |S.E.&S8S. & calm. | Cloudless till 3 a.m. Scatd. 71 till 8

Pp. M. cloudless afterwards, also

slightly drizzling at 8 P. M.

Cloudless till 3 a. M. Scatd. -i and 11

till 5 p. mM. cloudy afterwards, also

slightly drizzling at Noon and 6

P.M

ee S.& 8. E.

.. |S. E. & calm. E: till 6 a. m. cloudy till 8 P.

M. Seatd. i and “i afterwards.

Se N. HE. & calm & E. Cloudless till 7 «a. m. Scatd. i and

ni afterwards, also drizzled at 4 P, M.

Scatd. \-i till 7 a. m. cloudy after-

wards, also rained at Noon, 1 and 5

P. M.

Cloudless till 3 a. mM. cloudy afterwards

also drizzling between 10 and 11

A. M.

Cloudy till 5 p.m. Scatd. \i and “i

afterwards, also drizzled at 11 a. M.

and 4 P. M.

Cloudy, also raining between 9 and 10

. |H&S. &S. E.

A. M,

Cloudy, also drizzling occasionally.

Scatd. clouds also rained at 4 P. M.

Cloudy, also thundering and lightning

and raining after sunset.

2.47 |S. W.&S. & W. Cloudy, also incessantly drizzling the -

whole day.

1.36 |S. W. & W. Cloudy, also raining between 4& 9 P. M.

S. W. & W. Cloudy the whole day also very slight-

ly drizzled at 1 A. M.

Ni Cirri, +i Cirro strati, \i Cumuli, ~i Cumulo strati, \-i Nimbi, —i Strait,

wi Cirro cumuli,

)xii

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the Month of August, 1858.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

Max. Solar

radiation.

Rain Gauge

5 feet above

Ground.

Inches.

0.36

0.16

Prevailing direction

of the Wind.

General Aspect of the Sky.

W.&S. W.&N.W.) Cloudy, also drizzling between 7 and 9

A. M.

S.W. & 8. & N. W.| Cloudy and also drizzling occasionally.

S. & 8. E.

S.W.&S.& W.

W.&S. W.

S.&8. W.

W.&S8.

S. H. & W.

S.&5.&8. B.

S. EH. &8. W. &S§,

Scatd. clouds and also very slightly

drizzling at 10 P. M.

Cloudy and also drizzling constantly.

Cloudy and also raining and drizzling

the whole day.

Cloudy and also drizzling between

Midnight and 1 a. M. and at 11 P. M.

Cloudy and also raining at 7 P. M.

Cloudy and also drizzling occasionally.

Scatd. “-i and “i till 7 e. M. cloudless

afterwards.

Meteorological Observations. lxiii

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of August, 1858.

Monruty Resvutts.

Inches.

Mean height of the Barometer for the month, an Ae 29.558

Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 10 A.M. onthe 14th, .. 29.735

Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 4 Pp. m. on the 9th, a 29.357

Extreme range of the Barometer during the month, ce ee 0.378

Mean of the daily Max. Pressures, oF oe i 29.613

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, : Ae ae 29.497

Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. e 0.116

ny)

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, op: ae 83.6

Max. Temperature occurred at 3 Pp. M. on the 4th and 5th, ee 92.6

Min. Temperature occurred at 8 and 10 P. M. on the 16th, ar 77.6

Extreme range of the Temperature during the month, .. oe 15.0

Mean of the daily Max. Temperatures, ee oe oe 88.3

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, 4. oe ale 80.2

Mean daily range of the Temperatures during the month, ae 8.1

Co)

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, : e 80.3

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb rfobmshabtek!. 4 3.3

Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, .. i 4S 78.6

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point, .. 5.0

; Inches.

Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month, oe ps 0.958

Troy grains.

Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, os 10.28

Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete eB oe 1.75

Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.86

Inches,

Rained 24 days, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, se ee 3.16

Total amount of rain during the month, ee oe ee 14.65

Prevailing direction of the Wind, oe oe wv. S&S. EH,

Ixiv Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of August, 1858.

Monraiy Resvts.

Table showing the number of days on whica ata given hour any particular wind

blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour when

any particular wind was blowing it rained.

Hour. : |

S < 3 = I s af cf jal.

ro) ° ° oF S) ° ° : Of .| OfO

s[Alse} |x ela |e 3 eLF |slelel2

No. of days. |

Midnight. 1 2 Eee Se Ab is 3. eee ri

1 i| yA 22 VS i, ae: es) 4) %

9 1 2 Av) 10 bbe Sol: [24 a 3

3 if 2 4) 1:9 Sa Gor cag A

4 ] 2/0 St) 8 oS 4~ 4d 241 3

5 2 2 5128 EMTS Fie fe pa 1

6 2 2 Sh pes (8) Sb AY eed 1

” 1 5 6 | 2! 5 Sh See or

8 1 6 Buf he 6/1) 3 2/1

9 1) 11 A 4 | 1h 6 Ala Bol ah el

10 i! ] 2/11 4/1)8 | 2] 4/18 4] 1f 2

11 Q' 1} 2 1 6 | 2) 6 Lo on '3 1

Noon. 1 2} 1] 1 6 | 1] 4 1h 8 | 2 2 2

1 3} 1} 1 Wise ic: ee ee

2 4, 1 a. AW 6 2b 2 ly aed

3 3 2 A 6 7) 46 Doe SS

4 2) ly 2 (| 06 A Sep Bh. 24 Wed

5 2} 11 38 6 Z at) 2) Ap

6 2 3 5 | 118 | 3 Bi lees ata

7 VAY ane 4, 9 | 2 4 S| op mnt

8 2 3 4 19-10 | 1.3.4 2b 84-1] 1

9 ] 3/111 5 rOer 2b ek ae Soe 2

10 1 S| Tee ap LO Bie 3 | 1 2

ll 1 2 ‘f 10 | 3) 2 3 | ]j

Meteorological Observations.

lxv

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of September, 1858.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” Kast.

Feet.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

oo 0

Date. bia 2

SoS

« | Inches.

1 | 29.668

2 704

3 695

4, 644

5 | Sunday.

6 609

z .670

8 687

9 691

10 729

LE Py AB |

12 | Sunday.

13 558

14 527

15 .089

16 137

17 755

18 691 |

19 | Sunday.

20 084

21 597

22 .656

23 734

24 755

25 758

26 | Sunday.

27 174A

28 794

29 829

30 .786

dependent thereon.

Range of the Barometer

during the day.

Max.

Inches.

29.718

-763

172

708

670

722

743

754

482

(95

.616

588

.676

797

“817

-760

643

651

741

.808

825

518

846

2892

847

Min.

29.625

647

628

004

Diff.

Inches. | Inches.

0.093

116

144

154

122

123

130

127

126

152

150

148

143

.160

2143

151

139

112

148

.126

129

127

138

112

124

152

Thermometer.

Mean Dry Bulb

C0 G0 G0

OUR SS

bo 0 OO

85.1

x CO

O 00 OO &

re NNR eu hc Haare

COMNwoOhO

Range of the Tempera-

ture during the day.

Ce Ne

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made during

the day.

ixvi Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of September, 1858. _

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.— ( Continued.)

ra B Ss i ee

o ° nS 2 = he

hosel. Bote ae :| ae yaaa

2 - a 5 2 23 (Be el oe

3 > E a a os | WEE) Ses

2 a e 2.) woe |B SS) Be 8

ae 2 : = SoS) 2 8 poaeeeiag oe

=o = 2 aoe AS = O° SS ea oo

2 af) = ae a 3 oss a

go a oS Sa = SoD soo

® 4 Ps 2 am o> S.2 |3a5.| S65

= A O A a = = =

oO o o oO Inches.| T. gr. | T. gr .

1 80.2 3.6 78.4 | 54 | 0.952 | 10.21 1.89 | 0.84

2 80.8 4.1 78.7 6.2 961 29 2.20 82

3 80.8 4,4 78.6 | 6.6 .958 23 38 81

4 81.5 3.6 79.7 | 5.4 992 61 1,96 84

5 | Sunday. |

6 81.1 3.2 79.5 | 48 986 59 73 86

7 81.8 4.2 Toe 6.3 992 09 2.32 82

8 81.6 4.1 49:0 1) °G:2 986 53 27 82

9 80.9 4.5 78.6 6.8 958 23 45 . Sk

10 81.1 4.4 78.91 6.6 967 32 40 81

ll 81.4 3.8 79.5 5.7 .986 0d 08 84

12 | Sunday

13 83.2 4.9 80.7 | 7.4 | 1.024 89 83 79

14 83.8 5.3 81.1 8.0 .037 99 3.13 78

15 78.7 3.4 77.0 5.1 0.910 9.79 1,72 85

16 80.0 3.3 78.3 5.0 949 | 10.18 75 .85

17 80.2 3.0 794 |. 4.5 961 31 58 87

18 80.6 2.9 (ioe i ee | 973 45 50 87

19 | Sunday.

20 80.9 2.9 79.4 4,4) .983 54 56 87

2) 80.1 2.3 78.9 3.5 .967 39 22 .90

22 80.3 2.5 79.0 3.8 .970 42 oo 89

23 80.7 3.5 78.9 | 5.3 967 37 87 85

24; 79.1 2.7 aha 4.1 .931 02 38 .88

25 rie ed 2.0 76.5 3.0 896 9.67 14 .90

26 | Sunday.

27 77.9 Lo 76.9 2.9 908 80 0.95 91

28 78.5 2.5 77.2 3.8 .916 87 1.27 89

29 79.7 3.0 78.2 4.5 .946 | 10.15 57 87

30 79.4 3.3 Tied 5.0 931 .00 42 .85

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.

Meteorological Observations. Ixvii

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of September, 1858.

Hourly Means, &c, of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

S S |; | Range of the Barometer | = 5 | Range of the Temperature

aga for each hour during FQ 3 for each hour during

Haw = = Fy the month. p> ° the month.

“* | Tm & qs

eo : . as ; j

322 | Max Min. Diff. se | Max. Min. Diff.

= = :

Inches. | Inches.| Inches.| Inches. Oo rt) 0 0

Mid-

night. 29.702 (29.834 |29.540 | 0.294; 82.0] 85.8 78.6 7.2

1 .689 821 543 278 | 81.7 | 85.6 78.3 7.3

2 681 62 | .537 .275 | 81.41 85.0 78.0 7.0

3 .668 809 | 5381 278 | 81.4} 84.8 78.0 6.8

4 .663 798 | .532 .266 | 81.0] 84.7 78.1 6.6

5 679 .810 5387 273 81.2 84.6 78.2 6.4:

6 -698 823 47 .276 80.9 84.8 78.0 6.8

Vs -716 845] .561 .284]} 81.2 | 85.4 78.8 6.6

8 sfa0 881 O81 .300 83.3 88.2 79.2 9.0

9 742 .892 .588 304 84.3 89.0 170 12.0

10 -745 .890 581 .309 85.5 91.0 79.0 12.0

11 734 al | ee 294} 86.7 | 91.5 79.4 12.1

Noon 714 855 | .555 300 | 87.7 | 92.8 80.2 12.6

1 .686 833 524 .809 88.1 93.4 81.4 12.0

2 .658 789 487 .302 88.1 94.2 81.0 13.2

3 .636 775 456 319 87.7 95.0 81.4 13.6

4, .626 .768 452 016 86.7 95.0 79.8 15.2

5 .629 .769 440 329 85.6 93.6 79.2 14.4

6 640 779 452 3827 84.4 92.0 79.0 13.0

7 .662 811 468 843 83.5 91.0 79.8 11.2

8 .686 843 .5)05 308 83.35 90.0 79.6 10.4

9 .709 861 24 Py 82.8 89.2 79.4 98

10 721 861 559 302 82.5 87.0 79.2 7.8

il 720 £852 551 201 | 82.3 | 86.4 79.0 7.4

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several hours

during the month.

Ixvili Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of September, 1858.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—( Continued.)

a = = E S sO e5ea/s8

ie ie Seas 2 P20 Poe eS

= - > = oXS De = oo

g Oo a Ss 5 ‘S) = 5 B = s = a g

Hou. | 22 S = = ane so"7, BRS og a

g ie) oO Q ce co) eel MOE a

£0 3 = B45 tar) = ys nee (ase =

oo fai) a. sei Snes seta Bo = oa

= 3 S 2 ee | Se 18 5. | See ee

= fa Oo Q S i te eats

oO ) oO oO Inches. |Troy grs./Troy grs.

a roa | bei yes 1138 | 0.955. | 1097 | beo 1 oso

1 79.6 2.1 78.5 3.2 .955 29 .08 91

2 79.5 1.9 78.5 2.9 .955 29 0.98 91

3 79.5 1.9 78.5 2.9 955 29 98 91

4, 79.3 Ly 78.4 2.6 952 25 09 92

5 79.4, 1.8 78.5 2.7 .955 .29 .92 92

6 79.2 17 78.3 2.6 949 22 88 92

7 79.5 ire 78.6 2.6 958 .o2 .89 92

8 80.5 2.8 79.1 4.2 .973 45 1.48 88

9 80.8 8.5 79.0 5.3 .970 40 88 .83

10 81.1 A..4, 78.9 6.6 967 32 2.40 81

11 81.5 5.2 78.9 7.8 967 200 88 78

Noon. 81.7 60 78.7 9.0 961 22 3.304 75

1 81.9 6.2 78.8 9.3 .964 .25 AT 75

2 81.9 6.2 78.8 9.3 .964 25 AT aris

3 81.9 5.8 79.0 8.7 .970 ol .25 76

4, 81.4 5s 78.7 8.0 961 24 2.94 78

5 81.1 4.5 78.8 6.8 .964 .29 AZ 81

6 80.6 3.8 Veh? aye 961 .29 .02 84:

7 80.4: Bye 78.8 4,7 .964 04 1.66 .86

8 80.3 3.0 78.8 4.5 .964 204 .09 87

9 80.2 2.6 78.9 3.9 .967 09 13 .88

10 80.1 2.4: 78.9 3.6 .967 09 .25 .89

11 79.9 2.4 risW 3.6 .961 oo .25 89

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.

Meteorological Observations. lxix

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of September, 1858.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

ee | aoe

o-3 [28d

.| 28 | & &| Prevailing direction

£| 4 3 a 2s of the Wind.

Al S~ |a2d

oO Inches.

| rn 0.21 | H.& S. E.

y | a E S. & E.

3| 130.5 Se 8s. & 8S. W.

BLD oe 0.12 | 8.

5| Sunday :

oe Mae 0.65 |S. W. &S. & HE.

7) 134.4 we S.&N. E.

8} 130.8 oie N. H. & 8. E.

9| 180.8 ee

N. H. & Calm

10] 134.21 0.52 |N.B.& E.

11 ee ee

13} 136.0] ..

14). 123.7] ..

8. H. &S.

N.W.&S.E.&S.

N. BE. &S.

General Aspect of the Sky.

Sactd clouds and also raining at 7 A. M.

and 6 P. M.

Cloudless till 4 a. m. Scatd clouds

afterwards.

Seatd- clouds and also very: slightly

drizzling at 8 A. M.

Cloudless till 6 a. M. cloudy till 6 P. m.

cloudless afterwards, also raining

between 2 and 3 P. M.

Scatd “i and \i till 5 a. m. cloudy

- afterwards also raining at 6 P. M.

Scatd clouds nearly the whole day.

Cloudless till 3 a. mu. Sceatd clouds till

7 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards also

very slightly drizzled at 5 P. M.

Cloudless till 7 a. m. Scatd ‘i and =

afterwards. :

Cloudless till 6 a. M. Scatd clouds till

6 p. M. cloudless afterwards, also

raining between 3 and 4 P. M.

Cloudless till 2 a. mM. Scatd clouds till

6 pv. mM. cloudless afterwards also

very slightly drizzled at 3 Pp. M

Cloudless till 5 a. m. Scatd clouds

afterwards, also slightly drizzling at

7 P.M.

Cloudless till 6 a. m. Scatd clouds

afterwards also slightly drizzled be-

tween 7 and 8 P. M.

Cloudy, also drizzling between 3 & 8

Bz Mid

Scatd clouds.

Cloudless till 5 a. m. Scatd clouds

afterwards also raining between 3

and 4 P. M.

Cloudy nearly the whole day also

drizzling between 1 and 2 P. M.

Scatd clouds also drizzling occasionally,

Cloudy nearly the whole day also rain-

ing at 7 P. M,

Cloudy till 7 p. m. Scatd Ni and -i

Ni Cirri, \-i cirro strati, \i cumuli, ~i cumulo strati, Wi nimbi, —1 strati,

“i cirro cumuli,

lxx Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

on the month of September, 1858.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

x a)

aa |e

"O.3 ERS =

| 28 |O 2 g| Prevailing direction

$| 43 |g38) of the Wind.

Al So" lsd

re) Inches

BS) co ginal evele iS. Meetoubh Rul,

CA ds meee | Mediieo IN: Se,

25) ee 0.52 | HE. &S. E.

26| Sunday.| 0.18

a7| 4. | 0.26|H.&S.&8. E,

28} .. | 0.36|S.&8.E.&E,

8S. &8. E.

30 se ‘eo 8.

29 ee ee

General Aspect of the Sky.

afterwards also drizzling at 7 A. M.

and 7 P. M.

Scatd i & i till 5 P.M. cloudless

afterwards.

Cloudy also slightly drizzling between

2 and 3 Pp. M.

Scatd clouds also raining at 8 and 10

A. M.and 1 P. M.

Cloudy, also drizzling between 7 & 11

A. Me

Scatd clouds also raining between 8

and 9 A. M.

Scatd clouds also very slightly drizz-

ling at 10 a. M.

Scatd clouds,

Meteorological Observations. Ixxi

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of September, 1858.

Montuty REsvtts.

Inches.

Mean height of the Barometer for the month, o: ze) 29:689

Max. height of the Barometer, occurred at 9 a. M. on the 29th, ae ooo

Min. height of the Barometer, occurred at 5 P.M. on the 14th, -- 29.440

Extreme Range of the Barometer during the month, sid -- 0.452

Mean of the Daily Max. Pressures, a ee 2. 29.754

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, .. oe ae ~- 29.620

Mean Daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. -- 0.134

)

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, : ne 83.9

Max, Temperature, occurred at 3 and 4 P. M. on the 13th ba 14th, .. 95.0

Min. Temperature, occurred at 2, 3 and 6 A. M.on the 27th and 28th,.. 78.0

Extreme Range of the Temperature during the month, .. oe 17.0

Mean of the Daily Max. Temperature, os oe oe 88.9

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, ee ee 80.5

Mean Daily range of the Temperature during the month,,. Sr 8.4

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, oie we 80.5

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 3.4

Computed Mean Dew Point for the month, Be ae 78.8

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed Mean Dew Point, .. 5.1

Inches.

Mean Elastic force of vapour for the month, .. ee es 0.964

Troy grains.

Meaty weight of vapour for the month, bee BA hie 10.34

Additional weight of vapour required for complete estimation, se Lyi)

Mean degree of Humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.85

Inches.

Rained 22 days. Max. fall of rain during 24 hous, $e ee 0.65

Total amount of rain during the month, Sie BY fe 4.7 4,

Prevailing direction of the Wind, .. ee - S&S. E.&N. E.

Ixxii. Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of September, 1858.

Montuty REsvts.

Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind

blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour,

when any particular wind was blowing, it rained.

: St 15] Bh. 1 Sixt Stebel | Steememeat ss tes

ie etSl|e elas] Slee! |e ls|sls|2

NISIZIELE. leis lets Glalelelele leis leis

No. of days a

Midnight. 5 6| | 6) 361 7 i

1 5 Ges) P 8| 1 2

2 15 6 4) | 9 2

g L 4 6.| 13).18 2 3

4 | 4 8; 72) F7 2; | 3

5 | 4 7 | 5) 77 2) i

6 Allg 7] | de® Aaa eS as 2

Ff 5| 2) 8 4) | 5) 1 1 il 2

8 seb gh) UE 4laa a ab phe “g

9 1} | 6 8 6 uu Paltta 1

10 2| 5 4 5) | 5| 2, 2 3

i 1] 14 7 5) Ip ol fk) Ply p 2

Noon, ll | 4 "i 1 5| § 5 1 3

if 1 3) Ie 6 7] 1p 6) Up uy | 2

2 2113) | 5 Jie lee! ee 2

3 21) 5/1) 3 | | 8 26) U1 | 1 |

4 SM Sand eiGiy Mesh Er Lita 2) 1

5 Lt PA oo 4

6 111} 5) 2] 4/1b4) FO | (2) ae

7 141} 2) § 7 | 1f 4) wo} yy y 1 i

8 i3}1f Sia Fo) | 1, ie

9 lime, (ag 5) 7 of i 1 i

10 San” 5| #8 PT | Lhe ag

11 3 7 5) A Sied bid 1) oa

a Rt

Meteorological Observations. Ixxilt

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of October, 1858.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

feet.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

Se)

oo He) ia

wor Range of the Barometer 3 2 Range of the Tempera-

“io & 2 during the day. a ture during the day.

(ee aS)

Me: As

° gs a = ® .

2 slg Max Min Diff. Se Max Min Diff

Q a =

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. oO 0 oO o

1 | 29.746 | 29.804 | 29.679 0.125 81.1 84.8 78.6 6.2

2 785 848 728 .120 ‘iw 87.2 fs, 22.0

4 835 895 .786 109 83.2 89.6 | 79.8 9.8

5 841 914 .766 148 83.7 88.8 | 79.9 8.9

6 .806 887 739 148 84.0 89.6 | 79.8 | 9.8

7 774 850 .706 144 84.5 90.2 | 80.3 9.9

8 801 $868" hrn.738 .130 85.3 90.6 80.6 | 10.0

9 832 910 TT 133 85.3 90.6 ; 80.6 | 10.0

11 .839 .898 «781 107 84.8 90.6 80.4 | 10.2

12 856 .919 809 .110 83.5 89.8 G8 | 12.0

13 .867 941 815 126 83.3 89.8 17.6 | 2.2

14 .867 947 802 145 83.9 90.4 77.6 | 12.8

15 .833 .906 £750 .156 83.6 89.0 79.0 | 10.0

16 .793 869 aol 138 81.7 88.7 78.8 9.9

17 | Sunday.

18 .850 .913 .800 118 80.1 88.4. 74.3 | 14.1

19 857 .933 .800 ‘S38 77.8 87.4 69.2 | 18.2

20 .855 941 OF 144 789 87.6 71.2 | 16.4

21 .858 .930 794° 136 80.6 89.0 73.8 | 15.2

22 .867 .937 800 137 81.1 89.6 74.0 | 15.6

23 817 891 748 145 ropird y 89,2 74.0 | 15.2

24 | Sunday.

25 .605 721 459 .262 76.4 79.8 74,2 5.6

26 .646 874 291 583 74,2 iA. Wy Bice 5.8

27 904 977 1845 132 C73 858 | 69.8 | 16.0

28 917 .990 .870 120 79.8 85.9 TOO |) ehOLSs

29 909 .970 .868 102 78.5 84.7 73.0) \ label

30 974 | 30.049 913 136 76.7 83.6 71.0 |, dere

31 | Sunday.

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers, are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made during

the day,

Ixxiv

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of October, 1858.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

Date.

WONVOMR wre

Mean Wet Bulb Thermo-

meter.

78.5

76.5

77.2

77.6

78.0

77.4:

Sunday.

71.8

68.4

71.4

73.5

73.8

TAL

Sunday.

74.3

71.6

74.1

75.4

73.3

70.7

| Sunday.

dependent thereon.

Dry Bulb above Wet.

OW ube

Computed Dew Point.

77.6

77.8

77.0

77.7

77.3

78.4

77.5

75.3

73.0

74.1

74.4

75.2

67.6

63.7

67.6

69.9

70.1

70.6

73.2

70.3

72.3

73.2

70.7

67.7

(Continued.)

5 " Zg.i52 |£38

i) 3g Oo wy g.°

o 5 ee Sal 43 ds) stv

. ip ws |S elimé

2 So |.2s 9 S

: Z S2 |pis| Sa

= Cyan Mesias S A 25

Bil. As SS ee ee Se

ris 2 Leo teeel et Se

5 Es a* |S Bo) 2 = an

pe | S> | 82 |S 8a] 888

a = =a | =

o Inches. | T, gr.| T. gr.

3.9 0.928 9.99 | 1.18 | 0.89

4.1 934 | 10.05 39 88

6.2 .910 9.77 °\ oe 82

6.0 931 .98 .09 83

6.3 931 98 ao 82

72 919 84 ol 80

6.9 952 | 10.17 AT 81

7.8 925 9.88 .76 78

9.5 862 21 | 3.25 74

10.5 801 8.57 43 71

9.2 -830 91 02 75

9.5 838 SN) 16 74:

8.4 860 9.22 | 2.81 77

6.5 -860 24 13 81

12.5 672 7.25 | 3.5 67

14.1 591 6.41 12 .63

11.3 .672 7.28 he) 70

10.7 725 .80 21 A |

11.0 729 85 32 10

10.5 | TAL of 20 Arig!

3.2 806 8.77 | 0.95 .90

3.9 734 02 | 1.07 ‘88

5.4 £783 49 61 84:

6.6 .806 70 | 2.05 81

7.8 “744 05 20 78

9.0 674: 7.33 AT 75

Ail the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants.

Meteorological Chservations. Ixxv

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of October, 1858.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

S g Range of the Barometer for = 5 See eee

2 O43 8 2 ture for each hour

a9 each hour during the Qo ‘

SS g during the

H pia Ones ES month

our. | 3 oo Et As :

, oO o

a2 | Max. | Min. | Diff Si | Max. | Min. | Diff.

= =

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. oO Oo oO oO

Mid-

night. 29.824 | 29.937 | 29.349 0.588 78.5 82.2 71.6 | 10.6

1 810 .926 329 597 78.1 82.0 71.3 | 10.7

2 801 924 310 614 77.8 81.7 71.0 | 10.7

3 796 913 291 .622 CWS 81.6 71.0 | 10.6

d 798 934: 41 .593 76.9 81.3 69.8 | 11.5

5 .810 946 093 593 76.8 80.8 69.8 | 11.0

6 837 974, O21 453 76.5 80.6 69.2 | 11.4

| 859 | 30.003 597 406 V7.1 81.8 70.6 | 11.2

8 .896 .029 696 .333 80.8 85.6 76.2 9.4

9 .898 043 .682 3861 81.9 86.0 73.6 | 12.4

10 .896 .049 .689 .360 83.0 87.0 74.2} 12.8

il 881 023 .678 040 84.5 89.2 74.4 | 14.8

Noon.| .857 .001 654 347 85.7 90.2 | 73.6 | 16.6

1 831 | 29.982 .636 346 86.3 89.8 750 | 148

2 .803 950 73 377 86.9 90.6 75.4 | 15.2

3 787 948 539 .409 87.0 90.6 75.6 | 15.0

4 .780 941 528 413 86.2 90.6 75.0 | 15.6

5 £783 943 507 436 84.8 89.2 75.0 | 14.2

6 789 £955 005 450 83.0 87.0 74.4 | 12.6

7 .809 .966 513 453 81.7 86.0 73.2 | 12.8

8 827 084."4 | 518 .466 80.8 85.5 72.8 | 12.7

9 838 .996 496 .000 80.0 84.6 72.6 | 12.0

10 .843 | 30.002 462 .040 79.4: 83.7 72.0} 43.7

11 841 005 459 | 546 79.0 83.4 71.6 | 11.8

a ee, NS ek

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several hours

during the month.

Ixxvi Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of October, 1858.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon. (Continued.) —

: iG RS E

= = iS a = PS leis (= ee

> —

le) iS E ° (S) w 8 oo 2 Sf 6

4 2 s a Seis = se |e ee ES)

5 2 2 Ss 2 eS ‘O:-- mua a as

os = 2 ae fy = = 6S (826 sho ea.

Be ete a oe [ee SS eee

a9 = eS eo Ec ese S[sten

= A Sonic vl = = 4 =

SEES | —|_— | Se ey | |

0) 0 7) fy) Inches, 150) gr.) as ge

Mi 7Bde <b BA | 938 | 47°) ogee | 'e69 | tage) Lone

night,

1 75.3 2.8 73.9 4.2 824 94 28 88

2 74.9 2.9 73.4 4,4, 811 .80 30 87

3 74.6 207 73.2 4,1 806 75 23 88

4, 74.2 2.7 72.8 4,1 “795 64 22 88

5 74,2 2.6 72.9 3.9 797 .66 Le 88

6 73.9 2.6 72.6 39 790 .o9 16 88

7 74.5 2.6 73.2 3.9 .806 75 17 88

8 76.0 4.8 736 7.2 817 .80 2.27 .80

9 76.2 5.7 73.3 8.6 .809 .68 6.7 16

10 76.2 6.8 72.8 10 2 795 4 3.28 72

11 76.8 7.7 72.9 2) 116 on 02 83 69

Noon.| 177.0 8.7 72.6 | 13.1 790 43 4.37 .66

ul 77.2 9:1 72.6 13.7 -790 42 1 . 60 65

2 (e 9.3 72.9 14.0 797 49 .76 64

3 42 9.8 72.3 14.7 783 02 97 63

4, 77.0 9.2 72.4 13.8 785 36 .63 64

5 77.0 7.8 73.1 qh rs .803 08 3.88 .69

6 77.2 5.8 74.3 8.7 835 .96 2.86 .76

7 76.8 4.9 74.3 7.4 835 .99 08 79

8 76.2 4.6 73.9 6.9 824 .88 19 .80

9 76.0 4.0 74.0 6.0 .827 .93 1.88 033

10 75.7 3.7 73.8 5.6 822 87 75 84

11 75.4 3.6 73.6 5.4: 817 84 .66 84

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants.

Meteorological Observations. Ixxvil

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of October, 1858.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

Hd | Spb

2 |88c

.| 2 |O 8 &| Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky.

Ss; wS Lg 2&2 of the Wind.

QA = - eg XO O

oO Inches.

ey 8S. E. & S. Cloudy, also slightly drizzling at 5 and

11 a. M.

2} 135.0 | 0.10 |S. &S. E. Scatd. clouds till 7 vp. m. cloudless after-

wards, also drizzling at 3 4. M. and

2P.M.

3| Sunday

4) 188.4 sik N.W.&S. EH. &calm.| Scatd. clouds.

5 ae EIN g VW GS. cle Cloudless till 5 a. m. Scatd. i and

i afterwards.

6} 135.0 be S.& H.& N. W. Cloudless till 7 a. Mm. Scatd. “iand “i

till 6 p. mw. cloudless afterwards, also

slightly drizzling at 1 P. M.

7| 147.0 ae be &'8: Cloudless till 7 a. Mm. Scatd. “i and 1i

till 8 p. m. cloudless afterwards.

8} 148.0 ifs 8. &8S. W. Cloudless till 9 a. mM. Scatd. 1i till 4 Pp,

mM. cloudless afterwards.

9} 145.0 ne Ss. Cloudless till9 a. m. Scatd. “i and i

till 6 pe. m. cloudless afterwards.

10} Sunday

li; 145.0 an 8S. &N. Cloudless till 9 a. m. Scatd. “i till 8

P. M. cloudless afterwards.

12} 146.0 tee N. & W. Cloudless.

13) 142.0 a W.&N. Cloudless till 9 a. Mm. Seatd i till 3 Pp.

mM. cloudless afterwards.

14, 142.6 ae Ne Go Wi. IN, E Cloudless till Noon. Scatd. i till 4 P.

mM. cloudless afterwards.

15} 148.0 Be S.&N. W. Cloudless till 5 a. m. Scatd. clouds till

7 p. M. cloudless afterwards.

16; 136.0 | 0.08 |N.&S.&S8. W. Cloudless till 4 a. Mw. cloudy afterwards.

18; 139.0 ae W.&N.W.&N.E.| Cloudless.

-W.&W.&N. | Cloudless.

&N.W.&W. |Scatd. Ni till 5 a. m. cloudless till

Noon. Scatd. “i till 6 Pp. M. cloudless

| afterwards.

21] 142.6 * W.&N. W. Cloudless.

22; 135.0 aie N.W. & W. Cloudless.

Ni Cirri, i Cirro strati, \i Cumuli, ~i Cumulo strati, “i Nimbi, —i Strait,

‘ni Cirro cumuli.

Ixxviii

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the Month of October, 1858.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

ees

DM +

3 es

2/1. 8S

Slane

23} 139.0

24; Sunday.

25 He

27| 144.2

28) 140.0

29| 132.0

30] 138.0

31} Sunday.

5 feet above

Rain Gauge

Ground.

Inches.

Prevailing direction

of the Wind.

N. W. &N.

WwW

S. W. & W.

S. W. &N. W.

Ss. W.& W.

S.W. &W.&N.

General Aspect of the Sky.

Cloudless till 4 a. Mm. Scatd. “i and “i

afterwards.

Cloudy, also raining the whole day.

Cloudy also raining between Midnight

to 7 A. M.

Cloudless till 9 a. mM. Scatd. “1 and 13

afterwards.

Scatd. clouds till 5 p. M. cloudless after.

wards.

Cloudless.

Meteorological Observations. Ixxix

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

an the month of October, 1858.

Monruty Resvuyts.

Inches.

Mean height of the Barometer for the month, ee ee 29.829

Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 10 A.M. on the 30th, .. 30.049

Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 3 a. M. on the 26th, ae 29.291

Extreme range of the Barometer during the month, Se se 0.758

Mean of the daily Max. Pressures, aie me ele 29.907

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, ae Se Se 29.754:

Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month .. oe 0.153

)

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, oe ee 81.3

Max. Temperature occurred at 2.3 and 4 P. M. on the 8th, 9th, and 11th, 90.6

Min. Temperature occurred at 6 a. M. on the 19th, ee 69.2

Extreme range of the Temperature during the month, .. ee 21.4

Mean of the daily Max. Temperature, ee ee ee 87.6

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, we 55 we 76.2

Mean daily range of the Temperatures during the month, oe 11.4

Cy)

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, Se Se 75.9

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 5.4

Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, .. ate “e 73.2

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point, .. 8.1

Inches.

Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month, “A ee 0.806

Troy grains.

Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, ee se ee 8.68

Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, ee 2.56

Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.77

Inches.

Rained 6 days, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, as pe 0.10

Total amount of rain during the month, ad ee sia 8.03

Prevailing direction of the Wind, is a N.W.& W. & N.

Ixxx Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of October, 1858.

Monruty RESULTs.

Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind

blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour when

any particular wind was blowing it rained.

S s S S = | si ial.

cq .|° ° ° o) io) of .| Ojo

sials e a ele le elelele

ale iia sIS.Elet S. [et of le) W. le) a leiSiais

No. of days

Midnight, | 3) 1 2 7 2 4, 6 ; 1 1

1 val 4 | Ze 7 2 5 7 1

2 2 2 7 2 5 Ce al

3 2 2/115 8 5 Vine | al

4 2 1 2 5 2 5 7 | ee

5 2 1 21 115 2 6 aie |

6 3 1 ft 5 3 A 9/1

yi 5 3 1 4 3 4, 6} ij

8 “| | 4 2 1 3 1 2 5 | 1

9 8] | 3 2 1 2 2 3 5 | 1f

10 6| 13a) 4 ih 2 1 A Boa

11 5 | 4 2 2/112 3 2 6

Noon. 6 ik 3 2 2 4 2 6] yj

1 Gl 1 2 2 2 3 A 7 | 1%

9 Ai 12 1 ] 2 A 5 6/1]

3 5 2 i ] 2 5 3 te

4 ie ee 1 2 3 0G 5] 1

5 5| ti I 2 2 3 3 7 3

6 ad 2 2 A 2 6 7

7 Sid 2 2 3 3 7 6

8 3| 1 2 2 3 4 8 3 | od

9 ql 1 9 2 A 3 8 Bi |i!

10 3| 1 2 2 4 3 8 3 ew

ll 3 1 2 2 5 2 8 3 | te

Meteorological Observations. Ixxxi

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Caleutta,

in the month of November, 1858.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

Feet.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

See gy 2 7s

i a Range of the Barometer 9 3 Range of the Tempera-

“Se & 3 during the day. bE ture during the day.

So : As

Date. me: <

a a = Max. Min. Diff, & Max. | Min. | Diff.

Ss ai

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. 0) oO o ry)

51 29.960 | 30.083 | 29.914 0.119 76.2 83.4 70.2 | 13.2

2 .968 .053 .909 144, 76.7 83.8 70.8 | 18.0

3 959 .028 912 .116 78.0 85.2 72,2 13.0

4, 977 037 934 103 rir iee| 84.6 72.2 12.4

5 80.002 .068 953 115 76.6 83.4 WAZ) | Loe

6 ave | . 077 | 950 | 27/749 |) S24. |-69.1.| 133

7 | Sunday.

8 29.955 .029 913 116 3 7 80.2 68.6 | 11.6

9 O71 033 «920 118 73.9 81.1 68.2 | 12.9

10 .998 .073 941 132 74.2 81.6 68.0 | 13.6

Fe) 30.008 .082 953 | .129 75.0 80.4: 70.6 9.8

12 29.991 .068 932 | .136 TO 81.2 671 | 14.1

13 .99d .062 945 sLET 72.8 80.8 66.2 | 14.6

14 | Sunday. | | |

15 30.058 .133 | 380.004 0129 72.5 81.2 64.4 | 16.8

16 072 «145 .007 | 138 73.8 81.6 67.2 | 14.4

17 O81 .158 -026 132 74.9 83.2 67.0. | 16.2

18 .093 170 .037 1338 75.0 83.9 67.6 | 16.3

19 .069 140 | 29.989 151 View| 82.8 66.2 | 16.6

20 .065 147 30.009 .138 73.0 82.0 66.5 | Tab

21 | Sunday. | |

22 .035 127 | 29.954 Shiver 72.2 81.2 64.8 | 16.4

23 29.957 .037 6893 L144 71.6 80.0 64. 15

24, 969 042 918 2G alo Al 4 790! eh OSE |) ES

25 | 30.021 093 954 139 | 70.2 78.6 | 63.2 | 15.4

26 066 | 146] 80.016| 130] 70.9 | 79.0 | 65.0 | 14.0

27 .066 A41 29.999 142 6L.0! Aiee80l6 62.5 18.1

28 | Sunday. |

29 053 | .119 | 30.002| .117| 71.7 | 80.0 | 640 | 16.0

30 058 .120 .007 113 72.9 79.0 67.4 11.6

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made during

the day.

Ixxxil Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of November, 1858.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—( Continued.)

A B ee 7

Z ak se i=l MQM AMEN A zg aE

= "5 = SS ol Shae MS ate

> om ) 5 > one a >

5 2 B 2 @ i eae 25

2s 5 a |-mse |B) ees

= = a S = ==! oS =~oS| POG

iS o es £ aie mS — eS Ue i ile)

ce ae Poe he ae ot ees

fo) 5 ESS) =)

® & bp 2 aaae oF SA |e sos

= fa os) A = = S =

oO o eo) Pe Inches.) oT. er. i ae

1 69.5 6.7 66.1 | 10.1 | 0.640] 6.96 | 2.70 | 0.72

2 70.9 5.8 68.0} 87 .681 | 7.39 Al 75

3 72.6 54 69.9} 81 725 185 B34 77

4 72.8 5.4 69.6} 8.1 717 ig 33 JET

5 70.7 5.9 67.7 | 8.9 674. 33 AA 75

6 67.8 7) 64.2 | 10.7 601 | 6.54 74 71

7 | Sunday.

8 68.1 5.6 65.3 | 8.4 623 82 14 76

9 67.8 6.1 64.7 | 9.2 611 68 033 74

10 68.8 5.4 66.11 8.1 640 .99 10 Mi

1 68.9 6.1 65.8 | 9.2 634. 91 40 74

12 67.6 6.1 | 64.5 | 9.2 607 64 B32 74

13 6.4 6.4 63.2] 9.6 582 36 135 73

14 | Sunday. | |

15 66.6 5.9 63.6 | 8.9 590 45 | 18 15

16 | 68.3 5.5 65.5 | 83 .628 87 “id Bic

7 | 69.3 5.6 665) 84 | .648 | 7.07 21 76

18 69.0 6.0 66.0 | 9.0 638 | 6.95 .36 75

19 67.4 6.3 64.2 | 9.5 601 56 40 73

20 66.9 6.1 63.8 | 9.2 598 49 ai 74

21 =| Sunday.

22 a7 1) 5.8 | 6e9l'a3 Wi lsee | so |.) ee ae

23 65.8 5.8 62.9 | 8.7 576 31 | 08 75

24, 65.3 6.0 62.3 | 9.0 565 .20 13 TA

25 633 | 64 | 606] 96 | 534) 5.86 | .19 | 48

26 64.5 6.4 | 613] 9.6 546 | 6.00 | .28 Ay

27 | 64.8 67 (P60 Vato. 539 | 5.92 133 42

28 | Sunday. | |

29 | 65.5 62 | 624] 923 567 | 6.22 21 74,

30 | 67.6 | 53 | 64.91 "8.0 | “Sis_| 174 | 199) | ae

| |

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.

Meteorological Observations. Ixxxiii

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of November, 1858.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

6 8 |; | Range of the Barometer | = 8 | Range of the Temperature

age for each hour during pg for each hour during

Hour = z Fa the month. ae) the month.

-| maa As

222 |\wex. | Min -| De | fe | M

S44 : se, | Max. Min Diff.

S = |

Inches. | Inches.| Inches. Inches. | 0 ry) | fy) | 0

| |

Mid- ‘30,014 |3 30 | |

night, |30- 0.105 |29.980 | 0.175 ; 70.4 | 75.0} 65.5 9.5

1 007 | .091 | .928 | .163| 698 | 7461 65.0 9.6

2 |29.996 | .074 | .920 | .154| 69.2] 740! 647 9.3

3 991 | 066! .920 | 1146] 685] 73.8] 64.2 9.6

4 989 | .061{ .919 | .142/ 68.0] 73.2] 63.4 9.8

5 |80.002 | .076| .919 | .157! 67.5 | 72.4: 62.9 9.5

6 028 | .100| .959 | .141| 67.5 | 72.4| 62.5 9.9

Y] 050 | .125!| .981 | .144| 67.881 73.6| 62:8 | 108

s | .079 | .155 |30.004 | .151| -71.9| 77.6| 66.4 | 11.2

9 090 | .164| .028 | 136] 74.1} 788| 696 | 92

10 .086 170 | .023 147 | 76.4 | 80.2 72.9 | 7.3

11 | .065 | .139 29.995 | .144| 78.6 Tne | 6.4

| | | |

Noon, | .086 | .115 | .965 | .150] 80.0 | $2.6| 75.4 7.2

1 004 | .087| .931 | .156| 80.7 | 83.7 | 77.6 6.1

2 129.979 | .056| .908 | .148| 81.2] 844] 78.0 6.4

3 967 | .040| .893 | .147| 810] 85.2! 77.5 7.7

4 965 |) 087 | 896. | (1415) 793 !, 88.21. 764.4 €8

5 972 | .047) .908 | 1144] 77.9] 81.4| 746 6.8

6 982 | .060/ .911 | .149| 75.9| 79.8] 72.8 7.0

7 |80.003 | .0761 .932 | .144| 74.5 | 79.74 716 8.2

8 021 |..096! .943 | .153| 73.4) 78.0! 70.0 8.0

9 030 | .105| .958 | .147| 72.6] 77.4] 69.0 8.4,

10 082 | 113 | .960 153 | 718! 766] 68.2 8.4

11 28 |: 134) -.962 |) 1152) 71.1) 75.8| 67.4 | 8.4

| |

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several hours

during the month.

ixxxiv Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of November, 1858.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—(Continued.)

= ~ = 5 a) sO ‘ood | a3

: <1 3 S18) [| gee 6 ee

Se peso || Boat ee | aap es: eee

Hour. | £3 S @ S Eng er a 3 @ og 2

=| epee Si Oe) le eae ie Poet | 3 8

o 8 ea ou FQ. ates cite”d Bes ors

ae b> & pe | SS S54 |/S85 |a58

= a S) A a == geliail (REclnis9 as

) Co) Oo 0 Inches. |Troy grs.|Troy grs.

a 668-)| 3.67) 650.8) Ba | 0.6174! 680, | ae Woes

1 66.3 3.5 64.5 5.3 607 .69 26 84

2 65.9 3.3 64.2 5.0 601 62 19 85

3 65.5 3.0 64.0 4.5 597 .08 07 86

A 65.2 2.8 63.5 4.5 588 48 .05 86

5 64.7 2.8 63.0 4.5 578 39 03 86

6 64.7 2.8 63.0 4.5 578 39 03 86

7 64.9 29 63.2 4.6 582 A3 .05 86

8 66.8 5.1 64.2 Coe 601 58 90 78

9 67.8 6.3 64.6 905 .609 64 2.43 13

10 68.7 Cia, 64.8 11.6 613 67 3.05 .69

11 69.3 9.3 64.6 14.0 .609 59 79 64

Noon 69.4: 10.6 64,1 15.9 .599 46 4.35 .60

1 69.8 10.9 64.3 16.4 .603 50 54 59

2 70.0 11.2 64.4 16.8 .605 51 .70 58

3 70.0 11.0 64.5 16.5 .607 53 61 59

4, 69.1 10.2 64.0 15.3 597 45 14 61

5) 69.4 8.5 65 1 12.8 .619 bil 3.40 66

6 69.8 61 66.7 9.2 6538 7.10 2.47 7A

7 69.4: 5.1 66.8 Wek 655 14 04 78

8 69.0 4.4, 66.8 6.6 .655 16 Lk 81

3) 68.4 4.2 66.3 6.3 644, 06 .6O 82

10 67.8 4.0 65.8 6.0 .634 6.96 49 82

31 67.3 3.8 65,4 5.7 626 87 Al 83

| |

| {

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.

Meteorological Observations. Ixxxv

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of November, 1858.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &e.

o-3 [sad dais:

.| 28 | & 8] Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky.

eee) |-4.0 2 of the Wind.

mM as}

as \a3d

oO Inches

1) 140.0 ee W. Cloudless.

Zl LEO Be W.&N. Cloudless till 4 a. m. Seatd. i and

‘i till 6 ep. M. cloudless afterwards.

3| 138.8 Be W.&N Scatd. “i till 5 Pp. um. cloudless after-

‘ wards.

4) 119.0 i W.&N.W.&N. | Cloudless till 10 a. mM. Seatd. -i and

i till 6 Pp. mM. cloudless afterwards.

aot40.0 ) .. |N. & B. Cloudless till 6 a. m. Scatd. “i and 7i

till 1 ep. m. cloudless afterwards.

6| 144.2 ES H.& N. Cloudless.

7| Sunday.

8| 137.0 me W.&.S. W. Scatd. “i and i till 7 p. m. cloudless

afterwards.

9; 138.0 ik. W.&N. W. Cloudless till 4 a. mM. Scatd. i and

71 till 5 p. M. cloudless afterwards.

10! 134.6 ue W. Cloudless till 7 a, m. Scatd. “i and

i afterwards.

11 ati es W.&N. W. Scatd. i till 3 «a.m. cloudless till 9

A.M. Scatd. clouds till 6 Pp. m. clouds

less afterwards.

12} 1384.0 a N. W. & W. Scatd. “i and 1i till 4 Pp. m. cloudless

| afterwards.

13] 137.0 Sr N. W. & W. Cloudless till 11 a. mM. Scatd. -i and

ji till 5 ep. m. cloudless afterwards.

14) Sunday.

15; 140.0] .. W. Cloudless till 10 a. M. Seatd. i till 6

A. M. cloudless afterwards.

16} 138.0 oes W.&N Cloudless till 9 a. mM. Scatd. “i and

| i till 6 Pp. mM. cloudless afterwards.

2 ao) 6. | NN. EB GN, Cloudless.

18) -143.0;} .. | N. &N. W. Cloudless.

19) 1430| |. |N.&N. W. Cloudless.

20| 141.5 me N.& N. W. Cloudless.

21) Sunday.

22; 137.0 Sie! (tae es Cloudless till 11 a. mu. Scatd. i till 7

Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

23, 139.0 .. IN. & N. W.& W. Cloudless till 10 a. mM. Scatd. %i till 4

P.M. cloudless till 8 Pp. M. Scatd, ~i

afterwards

24) 1383.0 ne N. W. & W. Scatd. “i till 10 a. Mm. Scatd. “i till 4,

Pp. M. cloudless till 9 Pp. M. Scatd. -i

afterwards.

25| 135.6] .. |N.& N. W. Cloudless till Noon cloudy till 6 P. m.

cloudless alter war ds.

Ni Cirri, “i cirro eee Mi cumuli, ~i cumulo strati, \~i nimbi, —i strati,

Mi cirro cumuli.

]xxxvil Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of November, 1858.

Solar Radiatior., Weather, &c.

=: |ap

Soe. eee

ee a lets: ae ati ae

| 273 | § | Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky,

S| 4S |83986] of the Wind.

a ss SS

Al te Gio

oO Inches.

26} 135.0 ea N. W. &S. E. & N,| Cloudless till 2 a. mw. Scatd. i and

‘i till 3 p. Mm. cloudless afterwards.

27| 189.7 we N. BE. & N. W. Cloudless till Noon Scatd. clouds till 6

P. M. cloudless afterwards.

28) Sunday

29) 1S 9s4e | ey Nae Nok: Cloudless.

30) ate oe =| Not H. Cloudy also drizzled from 10 till 1) P.

Meteorological Observations. Ixxxvit

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

wn the month of November, 1858.

Montrrpuy RESULTS.

Inches.

Mean height of the Barometer for the month, ar «- 380.017

Max. height of the Barometer, occurred at 10 a. M. on the 18th, -- 380.170

Min. height of the Barometer, occurred at 3 P.M. on the 28rd, ee 29.893

Extreme Range of the Barometer during the month, uP se) O27

Mean of the Daily Max. Pressures, ae oe ee 30,091

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, .. AG ae ee SOO

Mean Daily range of the Barometer during the month, ~.. can HOSO

)

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, a5 ee 73.8

Max. Temperature, occurred at 3 P. M. on the 3rd, 50 ee 85.2

Min. Temperature, occurred at 6 4. M.on the 27th, ale ee 62.5

Extreme Range of the Temperature during the month, .. oe 22.7

Mean of the Daily Max. Temperature, os oe oe 81.5

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, ae ee ee 67.3

Mean Daily range of the Temperature during the month,.. oe 14.2

)

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, is 67.8

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Bi scometak ee 6.0

Computed Mean Dew Point for the month, ne 64.8

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed Mean Dee Paine: 3c 9.0

Inches.

Mean Elastic force of vapour for the month, .. ae ee 0.613

Troy grains.

Mean weight of vapour for the month, ae Ae are 6.71

Additional weight of vapour required for complete saturation, as 2.27

Mean degree of Humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.75

Inches,

Drizzled 1 day. Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, 2s Nil.

Total amount of rain during the month, a ae He Nil.

Prevailing direction of the Wind, .. ae of Ws NG, WY. id IN,

Ixxxvill Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor Generals Office, Calcutta,

in the month of Nevember, 1858.

Monruty REsvtts.

Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind

blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour,

when any particular wind was blowing, it rained.

| ere ey at ctet a) ene =

oN a ljlef leisilel [ei lel jee lelslel2

NJSiz led EB. [elie foi oto le iE lela leis isle

; ; No. of days. ¢ h

Midnight. =| 7| | 2 1 Le Pst Poe Pa es

1 8} 12 1 1} | Ss} | 5) J

2 10) | 2 1 1; | 6 5} pl

3 LO}7 te 1 Ll) PS) eS) Ra aes

4 10) | 1 1 16] (6 z

5 T) oh 2 1 2) 16 6 2

6 10} Jol fol Pla Waste Ii

7h 9) 1 4 1 2) | 4 6

8 10, 13 1 il 5) Ae 1

9 rite |e! l | 2 i 5| 410

10 8 2 1 pl 7 i

ala 9 43 3 f 4} fe) | 4

Noon. Tot 1 2) 6 5 6

1 6) 45 ] Jer dlinan| Wiels) vd

2 6 15 ] 1) | ile) (alata hat:

3 gs 72 1 ie | 1) fp 6) | 4

A Dame ee 3 1| 17| j11

5 2) Jl zr 1) J fs; | 9 i

6 5} [1 3 1) }s| | 8

7 4. 2 iy) | al 1 9 &)

8 4, 2 ee he 9 | 9

9 4 2 1 1 Ho; | 8

10 5 3.) Theat Ho) | 7

11 5 Zaire HO) 1% 1

{

Meteorological Observations. Ixxxix

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of December, 1858.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

feet.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

a3 = Range of the Barometer . 2 Range of the Tempera-

Ep & = during the day. a ture during the day.

‘oO = Po

TAA Ag | Learn

“ ao g © 4

2 aos Max Min Diff Sas Max Min. | Diff.

A |e =

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. oO o ft) Cr)

1 |30.053 | 30.119 | 29.989 0.130 70.2 73.4 68.6 4.8

2 .010 084, .956 128 VOL 73.0 68.4 4.6

3 .012 O71 964 107 68.6 70.2 67.8 2 4

ar 1 29:979 .053 .906 147 69.3 76.0 65.4 | 10.6

5 | Sunday

6 | 30.021 .098 972 126 67.4 75.9 60.6 | 15.3

7 031 124 “79 145 66.7 75.6 | 60.8 | 148

8 | 29.985 072 921 151 65.5 75.2 57.8 | 17.4

9 | 30,005 077 935 142 66.3 76.8 58.0 | 18.8

10 037 122 .988 134 65.6 75.8 57.8 | 18.0

11 037 104 984 120 64.7 74.2 56.6 | 17.6

12 Sunday.

13 | 29.959 034 .902 132 65.2 74.6 Bi2:| Gy A

14, 994 .063 949 114 66.2 75.6 57.6 | 18.0

15 | 30.026 110 977 133 66.9 75.3 59.4 | 15.9

16 .009 .086 .965 121 67.4 76.4 60.0 | 16.4

17 .034 132 983 149 67.8 76.8 61.1 | 15.7

18 .037 110 .992 .118 68.2 77.8 60.2 | 17.6

19 | Sunday. |

20 .040 .099 997 102 66.6 74,1 62.5 | 11.6

21 .087 .163 | 30.035 128 65.5 74,2 59.0 | 15.2

22 .085 172 .037 135 63.9 72.2 57.4 | 14.8

23 .053 14 129.982 | 159 64.5 73.8 56.4 | 17.4

24 049 109 | 30.000 | .109 65.6 75.9 55.25] 9 W277

25 047 .120 .003 mi Wy 66.5 76.7 57.8 | 18.9

26 | Sunday.

27 O31 104 | 29.972 132 64.6 73.0 57.6 | 15.4

28 045 114 =| 30.002 112 65.0 74.2 57.6 | 16.6

29 081 .156 .029 127 66.4 77.4 57.6 | 19.8

30 .L05 206 057 149 68.1 78.6 58.8 | 19.8

31 .065 147 005 142 69.8 78.8 64.6 | 14.2

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers, are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made during

the day.

xe Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of December, 1858.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—( Continued.)

a a Pe oo nn 6

q 5 4 B.1S 8 | 23

4 y AQ o Sits leu 2 = 3

3 3 _ 2 2 3) ese ee 8

ce = 2 > < ~° \a™ ales

a= a = oS |.s 8 =

ate. —Q ° oO s i! = — 8/5 @

: : oy Peace 2. |3s 22s) ase

a = ® SiGe As |BB |gkal Pas

aaa 3 =| aq 2 OS? gh eames Sh rs

aS ma a, 5 eS |e * |B 36] 2 2 wo

3 8 E A aa o> | $8 (88a! 88.8

= Qa os) Q A = < =

o oO o 0 Inches. | T, gr.| T. gr

1 67.9 2.3 66.7 3.5 | 0.653 | 7.17 | 0.88 | 0.89

2 67.9 2.2 66.8 3.3 655 .22-| 81 |. 90.

3 67.0 1.6 66.2 2.4 642 09 | 58] .92

4 65.7 3.6 63.9 5A 595 | 6.56 | 1.27] ‘84

5 | Sunday.

6 62.6 | 48 59.7 Te 518 | 5.73 + 66 | .78

7 60.8 5.9 57.3 9.4 .478 29 941 73

8 59.6 5.9 56.1 9.4 459 o11).| OUBVRT Ws

9 60.4: 5.9 56.9 9.4 A72 22, | \8ge a" ae

10 59.1 6.5 55.2 10.4 445 | 4.95 | 2.05 | .Z2

11 59.2 5.5 55.9 8.8 456 507; 4 eae 40

12 | Sunday.

13 59.7 5.5 56.4 8.8 | 464 15 76 15

14 60.9 5.3 57.7 8.5 485 86 | ).761>. 95

15 62.0 4.9 59.1 7.8 508 62 1 (N66) 1 RR

16 62.8 4.6 60.0 a4 Wee. 628 79)| 2600) is

17 62.9 4.9 60.0 7.8 523 78 | VaPOn| ao oe

18 63.1 5.1 | 60.0 8.2 523 78 | 80 | .76

19 | Sunday. |

20 62.5 4.1 60.0 6.6 523 79 | 42") Bo

21 60.0 5.5 56.7 8.8 469 19 | 70. |e ae

22 58.5 5A 54.7 9.2 438 488 | .75) 74

23 | 58.9 5.6 55.5 9.0 | 450 | 5.01| 75 | 74

24 60.1 5.5 56.8 8.8 ATZ0 21. | 279) | aa

25 61.6 4.9 58.7 7.8 501 ba |. 64 19 vee

26 | Sunday.

27 59.4 5.2 56.3 8.3 AG2 15 | 168 |) We

28 59.8 5.2 56.7 8.3 .469 23 | 466 | eae

29 60.9 5.5 57.6 8.8 A83 34] 83) .75

30 63.0 5.1 59.9 8.2 521 )| .76 | .79) 76

31 | 64.7 | 5.1 62.1 Gi 561 6.17 78) sae

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants,

Meteorological Chservations, XCl

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of December, 1858.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

oS Range of the Barometer for = 53 Baas of the roe

SERS . 2 ture for each hour

Sia each hour during the PQ I

mo Ss g during the

a 3 oe month. aoa) month

our. am 4 2, Q A c

ao . : eis Ff ;

sie Max Min Diff. S oy Max. | Min. | Diff.

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. o oO oO o

Mid-

night. 30.029 {30.095 | 29.960 0.135 63.4 71.2 60.2 | 11.0

1 -020 .085 945 140 62.7 70.8 59.6 | 11.2

2 .010 .065 .936 129 62.2 69.8 58.4 | 11.4

3 .002 .064. .930 134 61.9 69.7 59.0 | 10.7

A .002 .084: 934, .150 61.3 69.5 57.8 | 11.7

5 .016 .097 94:3 154: 60.9 69.2 57.2 | 12.0

6 .033 112 .962 .150 60.5 69.2 56.6 | 12.6

7 .056 147 981 .166 60.4: 69.2 56.4 | 12.8

8 .090 18l | 30.007 174 63.5 69.6 59.6 | 10.0

9 108 205 .032 173 66.1 70.8 63.2 7.6

10 110 .206 034 172 68.3 72.0 65.4 6.6

11 .091 184: .018 .166 71.0 73.6 67.6 6.0

Noon -060 138 | 29.984 154 73.2 | 76.1 70.2 5.9

1 .028 111 .950 161 74.5 rigs 70.2 Ties

2 003 082 921 | 161 75.1 78.6 | 698] 88

3 | 29.990 O73"| 906+} | 167 74.6 78.8 69.2 9.6

4 984, .062 .902 | 160 72.9 76.4 68.6 48

5 .991 .063 .907 156 W123 75.2 68.2 7.0

6 |30.003 .063 ‘922 | 141 69.1 72.4 66.2 6.2

7 .019 082 937 145 67.7 (ater 65.0 6.7

8 .033 .097 945 | 152 66.6 70.0 | 640] 6.0

9 043 .101 -956 145 65.6 69.4 62.8 6.6

10 049 L113 964 | 149 64.8 69.8 61.4. 8.4

11 042 143 64.0 70.0 61.2 8.8

| |

}

096 | .953

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Pulb

Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several hours

during the month.

Xcel

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

Meteorological Observations.

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of December, 1858.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

Hour.

RPOOMNOOLANEH

Woon.

RFPOOCONOOK WN =

ft ted

Mean Wet Bulb Ther-

mometer.

58.6

58.3

58.2

60.3

61.7

62.6

63.7

64.7

65.1

65.2

64.8

63.9

64.0

63.4

62.8

62.3

61.7

61.1

Dry Bulb above Wet.

dependent thereon —( Continued.)

° | Computed Dew Point.

Dry Bulb above Dew

Point.

Mean Elastic Force

of Vapour.

.030

527

O21

513

028

048

537

032

028

.020

.008

in a cubic

foot of Air.

Mean Weight of Va-

pour

.60

6.04:

5.94:

.90

~All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants.

obs [222

@ o.20 hoe

BCS |8°%s

se 2 .; WO aS

Sssgrsees

Sp Pelee es 3

< a

T. gr.

0.97 0.85

87 86

84, .87

79 87

77 87

75 87

1.08 84

AT 79

.97 74,

2.01 70

3.02 .66

40 63

61 61

53 62

13 64:

2.53 70

1.74 78

52 .80

31 82

is 84

.06 .85

.00 85

Meteorological Observations. XClil

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of December, 1858.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

27| 1381.0 we W.&N. Cloudless.

Hd | ob

O-8 Bod

.| 28s |OS | Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky.

Q =| = es 10

o Inches

a es 0.10 |N.E.&E.&N. Cloudy and also drizzling occasionally.

Z| as 0.28 IN. E.&N. &E. Cloudy and occasionally drizzling.

3} oe 0.70 | N. HE. &N. Cloudy and constantly drizzling.

4; 1382.0 as N.W.&N. EH. &N.| Scatd. clouds till 4 p. m. cloudless

afterwards.

5| Sunday

6| 136.2 - IN & W.&N. W. | Cloudless.

7} 183.4 x N. W Cloudless.

8} 136.4 s« | W.&E Cloudless and foggy between 7 till 11

11 P.M.

9} 1384.0 ee N. & W. Cloudless.

10} 136.6 N. Cloudless.

11} 133.0 ae N.&8S Cloudless.

12) Sunday.

13} 130.8 » IN.&N.W. Cloudless, also foggy hetween 7 and

11 P.M.

14) 135.0 aie N. Cloudless till 11 «a. mw. Scatd. i and

‘i till 6 Pp. mM. cloudless afterwards.

15} 128.0 es N. W.&N. & W. | Cloudless till 5 a.m. Scatd. “i and “i

é till 3 Pp. mM. cloudless afterwards.

16} 187.4 Z N.&N.W.& W. ! Cloudless till 11 4. Mm. Scatd. 1i till 4

Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

17; 1385.0 os N. W. &N. EH. Cloudless.

18} 138.9 ws N.&N.W.& E. | Cloudless till 1 vp. m. Scatd. \i and

i till 6 Pp. M. clondless afterwards.

19) Sunday.

20) 127.4 .. |N.W.&N. & W. | Scatd. clouds till 7 a. m. cloudless till

11 a.m. Scatd. 11 till 4 Pp. mM. cloud-

less afterwards.

21| 183.6 uA N. & N. W. Cloudless till 11 a. Mm. Scatd. i till 4

P. M. cloudless afterwards.

22| 131.5 - N. W:.&N. Cloudless.

23) 131.0 Ne N.& N. W. Cloudless.

24) 135.5 ae N. &N. W. Cloudless.

25| 135.2 * N. & S. W. Clouldless.

26) Sunday

Ni Cirri, \-i Cirro strati, %i Cumuli, ~i Cumulo strati, “i Nimbi, —i Strati,

‘ai Cirro cumuli.

xciv - Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the Month of December, 1858.

Solar Radiation, Weather, Xe.

a 2 oe &

3S |.20

.| “73 |O 8 5 | Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky.

S| eS (828 of the Wind.

Al SF [ged

oO Inches

28] 137.5 N. W. & W. Cloudless.

29; 140.0 | o. | W.&N. W. Cloudless till 2 p. mu. Scatd. +i till 6

Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

30] 138.6 “ W.&N. W Cloudless till 5 a. Mm. Scatd. “i and ~

till 6 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

81| 135.0 N. & W. Cloudless till 7 a. mM. Seatd. “i till 3

Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

Meteorological Observations. xcev

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of December, 1858.

Monruty ReEsvutts.

Mean height of the Barometer for the month, oe ee 30.034

Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 10 A. M. on the 30th, .. 30.206

Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 4 Pp. M. on the 13th, ee 29.902

Extreme range of the Barometer during the month, .. 36 0.304

Mean of the daily Max. Pressures, a ee bre 30.111

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, oa = 5c 29.981

Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. oe 0.130

fy)

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, ae Ae 66.7

Max. Temperature occurredat 3 4. P.M. on the 31st, oe 78.8

Min. Temperature occurred at 7 A. M. on the 28rd, ee 56.4

Extreme range of the Temperature during the month, .. ee 22.4:

Mean of the daily Max. Temperature, oe os a 75.2

Ditto ditto Mun. ditto, oe ee ee 60.2

Mean daily range of the Temperatures during the month, wa 15.0

)

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, Be a 61.9

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer,.. 4.8

Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, .. a as 59.0

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point, .. 7.7

Inches.

Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month, es ee 0.506

Troy grains.

Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, ae oe 5.60

Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete sahcteoe: oe 1.63

Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.78

Inches,

Rained 3 days, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, ad = 0.70

Total amount of rain during the month, ie ad ae 1.08

Prevailing direction of the Wind, ee rs N.& N. W. & W.

XCVi Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of December, 1858.

Moytuty Resvtts.

Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind

blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour when

any particular wind was blowing, it rained. ,

Hour.

e) eh El IBolelo. tele . | Sl meee tes

ei ee ie E c|E ls ef lsfs|s12

Njeiz cl E. leis. By S. let os lel Ww. leas leisicis

No. of days.

Midnight. | 9} .| 2) 17 2 i 1 3 9 1

a Oy Pe are a i 3 9

2 (|i) | 2) 1p 2/1 1 3 8

3 |10/ | 2| 1] 2 4| 1) 8 [

4 |1l) | 2) 1) 2 4 8

5 ito nipaen 1 4 9

6 s| | 2i 1 2 8 7

7 Bl leslica 1 8 7

8 9} 1] 2 1 iL 3 10 ik

9 (13; | 2 2 1 2 7

10 id 4 1 1 4 5

ul g| | 2 2 a 1 1 4 7

Noon 5] 1) 1 2 1 1 3 14

1 6 1 l 1 7 11

“| 1) 1 3 8 8

3 Saas ge Ha 3 9 8

a> (oleate al 3 a 5 i

5 1 (EO! a2 7 2 6 6

6 9 14) 1) 1) > 1 1 5 6

7 ~(10, | 4 1 1 1 5 5

$s jb P44 a 1 5 5

9 i} Jalal i 1 5 5

10 12 3 a 1 5 5

Mm li Ss 1 | 1 5 5 1

| t

ERRATA IN THE JOURNAL FOR 1858.

VOL. XXVILI.

Page 230, notes, last line for adjective read adjection.

235, notes l. 3 ab infra read aaa.

», 240, notes, 1. 15 for and read are.

», 248, notes, 1. 6 for aq read alc.

5, 249, notes, 1. 2 for Gautama read Gotama.

» » notes, 1. 4 for Ras read Rao.

,, 302, 1. 14 for occidental read accidental.

» 303, 1. 28 read Gafwe_and Bsa.

», 9305, 1. 20 for which read while.

» 318, 1.1 for wal eles| cgily read isl wash atest

The conclusion of Mr. Hodgson’s paper, given in this Vol. having been sent

to England for his revision, we are enabled to publish his corrections.

The Editors are glad to find that in this part (the MS. having been legible

throughout) there are hardly any errors of importance.

We give the following extract from Mr. Hodgson’s letter,

“The errata amount to little more than a perseverance in that titular misnomer

whereby comparative vocabularies of the empirical kind were confounded with gram-

matical treatises. Papers one and two, on the languages of the broken tribes and on

the dialectic differences of the language of the Kiranti tribe, were of the former sort.

Papers three and four on the Vayu and Bahing, were of the latter sort, and should

therefore have been kept apart, as well from each other as from the preceding

papers, even though you had determined to throw the descriptive part of Vayu

and Bahing to the end of the papers on them. Whereas you have run the whole

of the four papers into one, under the style and title of “Comparative Voca-

bulary of the languages of the broken tribes of Nepal,” a designation which is

true only in regard to the First of these four papers; for the Kirantis are not

one of the broken tribes; nor is there the least affinity between the empirical

treatment of the vocabularies of both one and the other and the grammatical

analyses which follow, though of the samples of language chosen for this analysis,

one belonged to a tribe classed with the broken, and the other to a tribe classed

among the septs or clans of the Kirantis.

Therefore I have erased the heading of the part now returned to you (Com-

parative Vocabulary, &c.) and substituted “ grammatical analysis of the Bahing

2 Errata.

dialect of the Kiranti language ;” and, for the top of each successive page,

* Bahing grammar” in lieu of Bahing Vocabulary.”

Page 393, Declension, case 7, dele All.

3 396, dele comma between that and which, voce Relative of all genders:

and in the note for it read The relative.

Page 399, for kwag-namme read kwagnamme.

= 409 for Transitives in to read Transitives in do.

5, 421, to the note add Fora paradigm of transitives in “to” which change

the t into d, see on to pages 439-441.

Page 438 for Tito be born read Jito be torn.

Bottom of same page in note for Dravidianum read Dravidianism.

To note at page 443 add It is published as No. XXVII. of Extracts from the

Records of the Government of Bengal.

Page 446, 1. 7 for fermed read formed.

5, 400, 1. 4 for pasung read Pasung.

a 1. 22 for and superest ager, read et superest ager.

‘i 454, 5 lines from bottom after of good size add a comma.

CORRIGENDA AND ADDENDA

Yo the papers on the languages of the broken tribes of Nepal, Sc.

—By B. H. Hoveson, Hsg. B.C. SN.

[See Journal, Nos. V. and VI. for 1857. ]

[We have received from Mr. Hodgson the following list of the

corrections and additions which he has found it necessary to make

in his papers published in Vol. XX VI. We have already stated in

a former number that much of the MS. was left with us in a very

rough and illegible state, and in spite of every care, many errors

could not but creep in. In fact it was only at Mr. Hodgson’s

own earnest wish, that we consented to have it printed at all, as

we did not consider the MS. in a fit state for publication. We

therefore gladly publish the list in full, by way of an appendix to

the whole series of communications; for the additions, of course,

we are not responsible, as they were not in the original MS,

We may also add that the latter half of the series of papers was

fairly legible; and we are gratified to notice that throughout that

portion the errors are very trifling. Had all the MS. been in the

same condition, we could, with infinitely less trouble to ourselves,

have given the whole with equal correctness.—Eps. |

Page 318, line 2 from bottom for 5-5 read 5-12.

» 319, , 6 from top for Baking read Bahing.

», 922, col. Hayu line 13 add note, Ang, Ung, A = my, thy, his, &e. Ang-

mu, Ungmu, Amu = mine, thine, &c. and so in plural. See on to complete

view of this tongue in sequel.

Page, 322 col. Hayu between lines 13 and 14 add A or Amu.

line 15 dele A-mu.

16 for Ang-ku read Ang-ki.

SY go 59 gy) gp 28 for Un-ni-ma read. Un-ni-mu.

», 323 ,, Pahri,, 4 add note, Gu is the minor sign; hma, the major.

They are affixed to all qualitives, numeral, pronominal and other: see on.

Page 324 col. Pahri line 16 read Guhma and add note. See note at the word ten.

pt eraO: > 55 » _ »,. 13 add note, Dha is sometimes substituted for, and

sometimes superadded to, the major sign or hma, asin Newari, to which tongue

the Pahri bears a close resemblance.

Page 333 and onwards, as the heading of the pages for ‘‘ languages of the broken

tribes of Nepal” read “ dialects of the Kirdnti language.”

29 39 39 39

39 39 39 39 39

4 Hrrata.

Page 333 col. Rodung line 18 add note. In this and the following columns 84

prefixed means flesh. It is the segregative and is dropt as usual in compo-

sition, thus in column two, pi being cow, pi yuba or pi yuva is cow’s horn and

not pi sayuba, see on to the word skin. —

Page 334 col. Rodung line 6 add note. Literally cow its male its calf. This is

the general way of expressing a possessive or genitive: See father and mother

and the 3rd possessive pronoun. It will be seen that the latter in its conjunct

form is a general prefix to the radical word wherever relationship can be predi-

cated even when a noun stands alone, thus, umpa = father, literally lis iather,

pater illius vel istius. But the prefix is olten used when no relationship exists

or can be imagined, thus, i kholen = day in column 2nd, In fact it is nearly

an inseparable particle.

Page 334 col. Ringchhénbing, line 32 dele Pa.

55 335 4, Chowrasya, line 30 add as note ondpé.—For change in the root,

4 to po see Bahing in sequel, aud observe, the root can never be used alone.

Page 335, col. Kiilung’ya, line 33 dele pa.

5 386 ,, Rodong ,, 9 for Chong gara read Chhonggarachha.

5, 2 dele ma.

» ” ” Ringchhénbiing between lines 23 and 24 for womau read

33 39 39

woman. :

99 99 9 gon ry) 32 for ma read euma,

» ». » Chhintangya 1, 20 for Pa read Upa.

sy a ai! 27 dele ma.

>» » » Nachheréng ,, 30 dele ma.

,, end of the note for Thul read Thulung.

337 col. Yakha line 32 dele ma.

» 9» 9» AKuling’ya 1. 31 dele ma,

> »9 9» Lhulunge’ya l. 38 add note, gna-u = gna-wa, and gnawa, gnami

like tawa tami, boy and girl, in Vayu.

Page 337 col. Thulungg’ya 1. 4 from bottom for Résépma grain read Résép-

ma Ma is grain.

Page 337 col. Thulungg’ya 1. 2 from bottom for Upap Bheda read Upap-

bhéda.

Page 338 col, English 1. 30 add note, Dual omitted accidentally. It exists

generally. The note below gives it for Rungchhen.

Page 338 dele note* and read as follows.—See note at bone and at calf. U’-hok’wa

= its cover: Sahokwa flesh cover. So Singhokwa is tree cover or bark,

Page 338 col. Nachheréng |. 22 dele notey.

» o» o ungchhénbing lL. 32 add § at the word Ungkang.

sae he ee a 1. 36 read O Ko &c. as in singular,

- 5 1, 39 dele§ at the word Ungkung.

|. 2 from bottom vead sign of number.

AvaleRE 55 read vel Oko-chi, vel Kuyakochi.

339 col. Thulungg’ya 1. 16 read Nepsung, sunshine. Nem sun.

340 ,, English 1. 5 add note. ‘Lhe two forms of these possessives were

not obtained in the plurai. Perhaps from insutlicient questioning whereby the

dual was missed.

Page 340 col. English 1. 7 dele * ana also the note.

at Eee Af 1, 28 for Conj. read Acc. and dele § and also the note.

» » Jor notes ¢ and { read Kukta is the separate form; and so also heusa

sumya, &c. chha is for beings, and pop for things, thus eukcha mana is one of

human kind, eukchha duwachha one man, eukchha menchhachha, one woman ;

euk pop topti, one hat. Bangpang for the major and pop for the minor is

Mikir. Other segregatives were named to me but contusedly, and if they be

proper to Kiranti they are fast becoming obsolete.

Page 340 col. Rodung dele Chi, D. Nin, &e.

» 099 g:~=C Un gchhénbuing |. 4 for Hukuha read Kukchha,

Rat 2th, es 1. 6 dele unchanged.

» 9341 col. Thulungeg’ya 1, 7 for Ni read humans,

3) 29

Errata. 5

ak ae ¥ 1. 8 read animals and things. Ni, root.

i. ae 3 1. 10 add and things.

ee as 34 1. 12 for Gnolo read Gnole.

ise a sg 1. 23 for Kwongus-ang Ko-dyum” read Kwongu-

sangkodyum.

», 342 col. English dele No genders D. and Pr. &e.

A ee 33 I, 13 delemnote *. y :

rT ths ‘. 1. 16 add note. There is no relative when, and then is_not

properly a correlative. The native equivalents ab, jub, &c. and cho, yu, khu,

infra, are from Urdu and Newari and were used only to prevent misappre-

hension when questioning.

Page 342 col. English 1. 26 for (ché) read above.

peers, 3 1, 27 dele above.

Senter 5, Pe 1. 28 dele Below (yu).

a OVEN - 453 cm 1, 29 for (Khu) read Below.

» » » Rodung 1. 5 dele Hic hec hoc, &e.

ae es 1. 7 for ditto read Hya ko.

ie rs 1. 8. for D686 read Tyako, for Tyaho read Tya and add

note, Hya and Tya, are of all genders. Their dual and plural are formed as

in the next dialect.

Page 342 col. Riingchhénbiing 1. 8 dele Oko*

SOS) ao 1. 9 dele Okochi &c.

39 99 39 99 iI 10 dele Sin. Pi.

ae a 5 1, 11 for Hynoko &c. read Mo.

ay mm dele’note*,

a bs, EGele notey.

» »5_ add in the 2nd line in the bottom Chi is the dual and nin the plural

sign for all.

5» 9). last line at bottom dele subs.

Page 344 col. English 1. 2 dele Up &c.

BF SS “0 Pe 1, 27 dele Dual, Plural.

» 9 »» Bungchhénbung |. 2 dele Dhutnang &e.

BS 4 ty, oa ], 29 read Im’sa, Singular.

EAN Figs oy 55 1. 34 for (so shitése, read (so shit = esei—and for

Piss chesa read Piss = chesa).

Page 344 add at bottom as note, Chi and nin, passim, are the dual and plurai signs.

» 346 col. English 1. 5 dele sign * and note.

Be bay: vss a 1. 6 dele sign * and note.

‘2 eee 9 1. 16 dele sign { and note.

ys 5 Rodung |. 17 dele note.t

» » 9» Rungchhénbung 1, 10 add note That is, puang, give to me, makes

puang chang in dual and puang nang in plural; but pu, give to any, makes

pu-chi dual and pu-nin, plural. So Né = take from me has chi and nin for

i“ ‘mi plural: but battu = take generally has chu for dual and num for

plural.

Page 346 col. Rungchhénbung |. 27 for yen mettu read yeng mettu and dele

khangmiusa ?

Page 346 col. Ringchhénbtng |. 29 add as a note,—Mettu is causal and yeng

mettu is cause to see, khang mettu, cause to hear, both used for tell.

| ea 3 1, 3 from bottom for Khan read Khang.

Page 346 at the end for note note § read—Generic signs stick to numerals but

can’t attach to the adjective, e. g. nuwa mana, euk chha nuwa mana nuwa chupi,

euk pop nuwa chupi. In Newari these segregatives attach to both numeral

and adjective, thus chhahma bhinghma mana = eukchha nuwa mana and

chhagu bhing-gu chupi = eukpop nuwa chupi.

Page 348 col. English 1. 1 dele sign * and note.

BT eAas fi se oe ], 14 dele Circular.

Se acer i 1. 18 dele Unlevel, uneven.f

» 99 9 Rungchhénbung ], 1 and 2, dele notes.f

6 Errata.

» 9 atthe end for former read = great. Pang vel bang vel wang is the

same as the numeral suffix.

» 950 col. Balalf 1, 14 addf.

», 3890 ,, Lohdréng 1. 238 delle fresh, and add §.

Page 351 col. English 1. 11 dele|}.

yt) sooty Babine, 1, 20.adalls

» 9 9 Lohdéréng 1. 8 for Pepasa read Pipasd.

1. 5 from the bottom for Dangmaling read Dingmali, ng.

» 1. 3 from bottom for Buicha Lami read Biicha and Lami.

1. 2 from bottom for Séthe read Sé.

i seas 8 : sara, wie

at the end for any one’s filius istius. ead any one’s child, filius istius or

99 39

illius.

» 9352 col, English 1. 3 dele Wa tami my girl.

» 9 9 Ldtdrdng 1. 5 add sign || and note “ There is no proper name for son

and daughter, the words are the same as those for boy and girl, nor to these can

the Ist or 2nd pronoun prefix be added, as the 8rd is, nor would that serve

the turn, umpasa being filius cujusvis and hence um being the almost insepar-

able adjunct of nouns. See the words father and mother and the pronouns

possessive. In Bahing there is an anomalous change of the radical word

however which must be remembered.”

Page 352 col. Bahingya 1. 19 dele Mo po dad and Mam po.

]. 22 dele ipo thy, apo his.

Léhéroéng 1. 2 add = my.

Sa alate te 54 1, 24 dele Pa. Ung pa, &e.

Lambichhong |. 17 dele Pa

Sangpang 1. 1 for Ar’ read Aa.

Diingmalt 1. 19 dele Pa, and add note “‘ Throughout this column the

prefixing of the possessive pronoun sign is indispensable. The root pa cannot

be used alone. , The further change of pa into po is peculiar to Bahing.”

Page 353 col. Lohéréng 1. 2 dele gen. sign.

1, 5 dele Lang leg.

1.6 add note Thr oughout this column kholi and lan,

lang, ‘lak are = leg; and blem tem, phek phak are segregatives or rather one

segregative used for flat things. See arm and leg and compare hand and foot.

Page 353 col. Lohéréng 1. 9 add note Sing = tree in this and next column is

segregative. Sing i-sa is literally tree its fruit.

Page 358 col. Lambichhong 1. 9 dele (ma foem, passim.)

5 1. 10 read mendima,

ae Ata Baléli 1. 11 for Mithu read Mithi.

5, 304 ,, Bahing. |. 6 for arms read arm.

Lohorong |. 6 add all and only.

i 1. 8 for arms read arm.

Lambichhéng |. 7 add flat arm.

‘ ], 12 dele “sa gen. sign.

Balali 1. 8 add sign * and arm flat.

Sangptng 1. 8 add arm flat.

Dimi l. 6 for head read Do = head.

; Khaling 1. 6 add flat arm,

» 9050 \,, Bahing ly 18idele Mor

Léhéroéng |. 23 dele Ma. Ma.

Lambichhéng |. 16 dele Ma.

Balali 1. 19 dele Ma.

Séngpung 1. 17 dele Ma.

Dingmali 1. 16 dele Ma.

- 355 1. 11 from bottom for as ad doubled and read always added but,—and

add See arm and hand, leg and foot.

Page 356 col. Bahing. 1. 7 dele from so to signs and add note—Gna-wa gna-mi

agree with ta-wa, ta-mi, &c. but pa-sang ma-sang of column 6th makes the

sex signs prefixual. Dumi and Khaling, W. compare Dihong of Assam,

39 99 39 23

Errata, 7

Page 356 col. Bahing. 1. 20 dele = Kho-la Dihong of Asam.

2» 9 »» Lodhdrdng 1. 11 for no read not and add sign*.

ah sth ay as 1, 20 dele Sing hok’ tree skin — bark,

ye ee 5 1, 22 dele flesh cover.

» 2» »» Lambichhdng 1. 6 for root sex repeated read root : sex sign repeated.

2 #99 «99 Py) 1. 8 add ditto.

eee us 1, 19 add cover,

» 857 ,, Sangpang 1. 22 add U-yu.

2» 23 9 Dtingmalil. 10 dele sky bird and sion *,

2» > 1. 1 notes, dele from see flesh to sa and for see other paper read

So also sing in sing hok = tree cover or bark. Hok or hokwa if alone takes the

inseparable pronoun -prefix, hence umhowka — its cover, but if sa be used the

compound sahokwa needs no such pronoun adjunct.

Page 357 at bottom add See on to note at His, Her’s Its.

» 98098 col. English 1. 9 dele Thee.

SI san. 55 a 1, 11 dele Himself,

2» » » Bahing. 1. 5 for Sevalacha read Swalacha, and add note Swala-

cha, m. Swalami, f. Here the suffix cha takes the place of win gna wa

gna mi, &c. aforegone.

Page 358 col. Bahing. 1. 9 dele Na.

Se dash! a0 sg 1. 12 dele O-u.

» 9» » Ldhordng 1. 9 dele Hana.

oe ee Ee 1.11 dele Mo. Mose.

2» »» >» Lambichhdng dele 1. 8 and 9,

a Er 1. 11 for Toma read Tona.

Seath aml nay a dele 1. 12 and add note,—The 3rd pronoun is always

minutely specific, not merely as the person referred to is near or far off the

speaker but as he is on a level, or above or below him. Yona Mona Tona

mark these latter distinctions,

Page 358 col. Balali 1. 10 dele Mo 6.

» 909 ,, Bahing. dele 1. 3.

» » 1.2 from bottom add See p. 171.

2» 9 last line for Akoi sing read Akoim sing,—and add—See back to note at

Plant. .

Page 360 col. English dele 1. 3, 4, 5, 6.

Ne ee a 1. 9 dele generic signs S. D. P.

2» 9 » Bahing. dele 1. 6, 7, 8, 9.

2» _ »%» » Lambichhdng |. 4 add note—In Lambichhong Balali, &. the dual

and plural are not throughout discernible.

Page 360 col. Lambichhéng dele 1s. 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 and 20, —

these being merely author’s notes of comparison with the Dravida tongues,

Page 360 col. Balali 1. 9 add Hippang.

ae » 1. 10 add Sumbung.

a ae! yo » 1.11 add Libang.

» 9» 9» NSang-pang 1. 5 add Buli.

is) ‘5, $5 1, 6 add Hissali.

. ae Bs 1. 8 add Sumkali.

ee 5 1], 10 add Lakkali.

» >» Dtingmalil. 7 for m, po read m: Po.

» 961 col. English dele ls. 8, 9, 10.

» 9» » Dahing. 1.14 add note,—Genitive sign rarely used, never when

two words united as horse’s foot, silver jug, &c. 1st of two nouns by position

alone is genitive.

te 's3 3 am. dele is, 1-5;

2» 9) last line dele 1 cow, 2 cows and Sor &c. read two men &. The separate

form is Itta = Ikku of Balali.

Page 362 col. English and Bahing. lines 14—17, read thus :

A juju di (its head in),

Above, on top. {ae Apiye di.

Errata.

Below, on bottom. { Hayu. Apum di.

(its bottom or base in).

1. 18 dele on middle.

363 col. English 1, 19 for primitive read privitive.

Ist line from bottom for Hona read Khona.

2nd line from bottom for wa read wo—in the same line for wa read wo.

5th line from bottom read up, &c. Kugna for up, Kugna.

6th line from bottom add 1 before Pi-gna—add 3 betas Pi-Ra add 1

before Pi-te.

Page 363 add in the bottom,—See prepositions, adverbs and verbs in sequel.

The expression of position is thrown as much as possible on the verbs, there

being very few proper adverbs, thus go up is either ascend, or, its top to go.

Page 364 col. English 1, 2 dele Dual Pl.

5, Bahing. 1. 5 for Syu, set, &c. read Caret.

ae 3 1, 15 dele tung-o.

1. 23 dele syo.

col. Loéhorong 1. 9 dele causal mette.

x 8 ]. 12 and 17 add D.

4 1. 13 add Pl. chai mette and add note,—Mette is every

where the causal, thus chaye makes chayemette and Dunge Dungmette, Ime

Immette and Poge Pogmette.

Page 364 col. Lohéréng 1. 14 dele Dung mette Cha cho mette.

He Ss 1, 18 add Pl.

1. 19 dele Immette.

oF s 1. 20 for Ipseche read Imache.

1, 24 add C.

1. 27 read Icheche, D. Ichane, Pl.

Page 365 col. Lohorong 1. 2, 16, 19, 22, 25, 28, 31 add D.

2).

. 1» ~—Ssds 3, 8, 11, 14, 17, 20, 23, 26, 29, 32 add Pl.

1. 5 add or and dele mete.

an ss 1. 6 add or.

- a 1. 7 for —che read —gache and add D.

1. 10 for —che read -—ache and add D.

, 1. 13 for —che read —ache and add D.

- Lambichhong 1. 27 dele Pita.

Jp i, 1, 28 for chu read Piruchu and after P add note—Pirang

give to me makes dual in ching and plural in ning: but pira give to any, has

chu and nu respectively.

Page 365 col. Khaling after 1. 10 add Biye.

366 col, Bahing. 1. 5 for Tyu-po read Lommette causal.

33 3 39

mettane, Pl.

col, Lohorong 1. 2 dele Lom-mette.

1. 5, 10, 22 add D.

1. 6, 23, 28 add P.

1. 8 dele Its causal Sed mette.

1.11 add P. causal Sed mette. Sed metta che D. Sed

99 23

f a 1. 16 for —che read Ladappache D.

3 A 1.17 for Ladapam read Ladapamne P.

1. 18 dele —ne.

MS, as ], 20, 25 add vel.

So », after]. 24 add Yuksache D. Yuksamne P.

; 1, 27 for —che read Thepogache D.

: Dingmiéli 1.13 for Kha-ye read Kha-de.

Page 367 col, Lohorong 1. 15 for —che read Isache.

. 18 add D.

. 19 dele not good.

. 20 for meha read miha P,

. 21 add chia-miha.

ea) td J

Errata. 9

Page 367 col. Lohdréng 1. 23 for ne-ma read ne-ohia-mia.

OO ee Pe after 1, 26 add —mia.

Lambichhong 1. 1 to 4 dele Numda, &c. down to suffix.

ii tay 95 1, 12 dele yuk = yak.

368 col. Léhérdng 1. 2 & 8 add D.

eo de ee 55 1.3 & 9 add P.

aah i aoe sn 54 from lines 12 to 15 dele Tum te &c. and add The verbal

forms are Tumte, imperative. 1. Tumtigna. 2. Tumtane. 3. Tumta, indicative.

Page 368_,, as 1. 17 dele limte.

Pn Be a 1. 19 to 21 dele Lim ku gna, &c. and add zo also Limte.

Be sweet whence Indicative Limtigna vel Limukgna, 1 am sweet, &. And

Khiktigna vel Khikgna. I am bitter, &e.

Page 368 ,, oa 1, 23 for not read sweet not.

dele lines 26 to 29.

39 33 +P)

+e 99 99 9

33 93 99 99 1. 30 & 34 add D.

py) 99 9 1. 31 & 35 add leg

.* Lambi. | 11 dele Bon ost,

Page 369 col. Léhdéréng 1. 3 add --chia D.—mia P.

). 5 add mia.

> 99 33 99

39 9 99 ry) 1. i add—chia-mia.

‘Some ee ss 1, 11 for Bi ha read vel.

aa 4 1, 12 add to Biye—chia—mia.

ees aa 1, 15 add to Phiye—chia-mia.

5a nee an 1. 16 add chia-mia.

ets a ein dele foot note.

», 970 col. Bahingya 1. 2, 3, 5, 7, 11, 12, & 138 add—daasi and—daa.

Page 371 col. English 1. 2 for of read or.

» >» transfer lines 9 and 10 above lines 6 to 8.

Page 371 col. Bahingya 1. 2 & 4 add daasi-daa.

mew Ay 2 1, 9 add foot note Sé = flesh: neuba = good: gnolo =

great.

», 3/3 col. English after line 34 add Evening Nomothipsing.

Vayu 1. 38 for swam read swom.

» 9 9 o 1 5 for got read Got and add note to line 6 Wo for the

males, mi for the females. Angki namsang = our own smell, Gyeti namsang

= other smell. Therefore the suffixes wo and mi here form derivative substan-

tives. In Ta-wo, Ta-mi they are merely sex signs. See on to adjectives for

other uses.

» 9» 9» »» 4.1 to 3 from bottom add note Chhyang is the instrumental

and vi the agentive suffix, The verb is to p’ to strike.

Page 374 col. Vayu 1. 8 for Mechho-ttinvi read mechho-ttinvi.

» » » 9 L 14 for khochi read khocho.

» 9 1.18 add to Pok (abrupt accent).

col. English last line add Morning, Nomoloksing.

» Vayul. 9 from bottom for Mynung read Minung.

- | ai ae eo one » jor Chaju read Chhaju.

», 970 col, English 1. 12 for Oor read Oar.

» 99 9 Vayu 2nd col. 1. 17 add to Puchhi ri = head bone.

» 376 col. ,, 1.1 for Choli read Choti.

» 9 9 JL. 7 for pronoun conveys read pronoun or verb conveys.

77 1. 3 of foot note for gothpto’ read gothato,

379 Ast col. Crude 1. 44 to Luphta add (Lusta).

» 9» Col. Affixes 1. 8 for Participal read Participial,

Page 379 col. Affixes 1. 10, add to follow. +Observe that all the numerous

adjectives ending in vi, ta, or tang, are really participles, and also that none

oi them take a formative suffix such as belongs to the adjectives proper, as

noh’ka, good. But in truth such adjectives almost never affix these signs,

thus nohka tawo is a good boy and nohka tami is a good girl, and nohka sing-

phun is a good tree. If you add the sign toa proper adjective, you make it

»” 99 2?

29 99

9) 99

10 Errata.

substantival, as nohka wo the good one (male). Adjectives derived from

substantives (abstracts) indispensably require the suffixes, e. g. choti strength,

chotiwo, strong, and also the strong one. See further remarks under the head

of substantives.

» 9801.13 for Healthful read Asleep.

», 9% from bottom of note add and tuntang, what fit to be drunk.

» 981 Ist col. |. 23 for assert read apert.

» 9» ord ,, 1. 4 for partie read participial.

» » L. 16 for Participal read Participial.

» » 1. 20 add Participles.

Page 383 2nd col. 1. 15 dele ma.

» 3841st ,, 1. 8 add or.

» 9, 2nd ,, 1. 24 for Pinkumu xvead Penkumu.

» 9» 9 9 83 add Genitival. But the mu neuter sign not required with

nohka. With jingsa and with jekhom it is for they are substantives. See p. 379.

Page 385 2nd col. |. 13 for Chhingjimu vead Chhingji.

a ga! pg gy Le LB for Jishta:cead dista.

» 9 9 9 Lt. 80. for Kwonghhet read Kwongkhet.

» 9» ord ,, 1.1 for Participal read Participial.

Aaa ‘1.7 add — mu.

Page 386 Ist col. 1, 22 read fixed, firm or unshakeable.

» 9» 2nd ,, 1. 24 for Mélee ead Mélbe and add as note, Mé = fire: Mébé

khosta dressed in fire or with fire. Ti = water: Tibe khosta dressed in or

with water.

Page 387 add at bottom. N. B.—In reference to the suffixes, wo, mi, mu, See

notes at p. 57 and 59 and 63. One of the equivalents for wo is cho, and put is

another. But the latter is rarely used and the former can be used with the

ordinary signs of sex superadded as bing-cho = handsome and bang-cho =

adult, whence bing-cho-wo formosus, bing-cho-mi formosa.

Insert the Numeral Collectives at p: 393 after the Vayu Numerals in p. 388.

Page 389 at 1. 19, 27 & 44 add foot note. All these forms in hé, and (with the

root doubled) in hé are gerundial ; see on to p. 436 &e. As the Adjectives are

so often participles, so are the adverbs (and prepositions too, in less degree)

gerundial.

Page 390 2nd col. 1.19 for Mi &e. read Mi, or Wathi, lom khien.

» O91 4, 5, 1.2 for Kha khakha read khakkhakha.

» »» 9» » 1. 27 add after Vinvinha, (rounding, or rather, having rounded).

» 9» 99 » 4 SL for Cho’mi ithijila, read Chomi. Hatha ithijila.

», 392 1st col. 1. 36 for Modesty read Modestly.

Page 393 2nd line from bottom add foot note. Literally, in the top and in the

bottom forupon and under, super et infra. This form of prepositions, 1. e.

locative of the noun, is common owing to rarity of prepositions proper or case

signs.

Page 394 2nd col. 1.5 & 6 for he read é.

» 9» 9 x 1.19 add foot note. +Observe that bek is come in, and bekla

goin. So lok is come out and lokla is go out. The root la, to go, is thus

added to many verbs.

Page 395 ,, 4, 1.3 &4 put *

» » » » 1 5 for hutimrekré read hutimrekkimching.

» 99 oo g:Stsi for” wanhhé read or Chaju wanhé,

o> » » » - 2o for huthe ~ead or Chaju huthe.

5) 49 gs, SOL or yonela read youkla,

Page 396 ,, ,, 1.7 dele nungna and add Kamung nungna.

x 4 1.32 add foot note. Better Kehho chep’chepha sastum.

Literally, his body having perforated he pierced.

Page. 397 °.,, «,, | 1. 21 for mu read mii.

» 398 ,, 4 1.12, 34 and 43 add foot note. The s is essential, phasto,

as proved by the conjugation which see. But in the imperative it is as spoken

replaced by an abrupt accent, pha’to, In general, such an abrupt accent —

Errata. 1l

before the sign in verbs transitive indicates a euphonically dropt consonant

identical with that of the sign, so that the doubling of the sign of transitive

verbs may be looked upon as the normal form, as proved by the conjugations,

thus pho’ko = beget is phokko a derivative of bok’ = be born, and puw’ko

== awaken is pukko a derivative of the neuter buk’. Here are neuters made

transitive by redoubled sign, added to a hardening of the initial consonant

which is seen also in dum = become.

But besides this, the abrupt tone in transitives denotes a radical consonant

similar to that of the sign and necessarily to be restored, thus to’po = strike

must be toppo and chi’ko = break, chikko, &.

Page 401 1st col. 1. 27 add Ride.

mes, 5, l. 29 for Irideread Luride.

» 402 2nd ,, 1. 14 for pha’to read pha’sto.

lig sg | LL for paimread»ping:

» 404 ,, ,, 1.27 for tha read that’.

» 405 , 4, 1.49 for Po’ko or Pu’ko read Pwko pukko’.

» » » dele last foot note.

» 406 ,, ,, 1.2 from bottom add (Tokko).

% 407 59.) 127 add ‘(Poppo):

» 408 Qud col. 1. 36 add (after Theko)—Thésung, Thesche. Theto.

» 9 9» J 48 add, * Lun expresses run this way; Lun 1a run that

way, i.e. to and from the. speaker. So also Ri and RG la just ahead and all

other neuters to which 1a is added.

Gs ys os) 1 49. dele: * and:foot/note.

>» » ~» 9» 50 add (phasto). Lungpingko.

Page 409 Ist col. 1. 23 dele or.

ee Minas » i. 45 and 48 add or him.

]

ee ond . 4 add note * Ru expresses flee, or flee here. Rula, flee away,

free from.

1.16 add note t Hanto is causal as well as the next and

normally feauenl form. Hanto is one of the numerous class of verbs which

are at once transitive and causal in which the distinction of the two sorts of

verbs is lost.

» 9 9» 9 last line for Suksa met’pingko not’pingko read Suksa

met’ pingko or Suksa not’pingko.

Page 410 1st col. 1. 16 for cover read covert.

» » end, 1.18, 14,19 & 22 for phato read phasto.

» 99 099 op Le 24 for Jekhom ponchedum read Jekhom ponche, Jekhom dum.

Ss sat oy) | a) te OL add after dim, (become);

By) Moy) 29h)! 55 Le 4 add (phokko):

Page 411 ,, ,, 1,14 add. Tha totnachhe, D.

», 412 Ist col. 1. 10 for been read him.

» » 2nd,, 1.19 for Nek’pingto read Nek’pingko.

3» 3099S St: «Ce 26 add foot note to Thukto. {Duk neuter makes thuk

transitive by initial hardening, just as dim = become makes thtim causal or

transitive. Of thukto thukpingko is the normal causal; but the latter is one of

the numerous class of double causals, thukto being itself a causal. These double

causals regularly formed, constitute one of the many correspondencies with the

cultivated Dravidian tongues.

» » Ist col. |. 8 from bottom add (phasto).

» 413 2nd ,, 1,4 add Literally stay, verbally, by word.

Bh 5 iser sp) oe, ao add) tor wko.(ukko):

» 9 9 9 & 21 for Teshto read Testo and add Tessung. Tesche.

], 22 add Literally, in thee wealth be or become.

2 ss) 55 3s Le od add Mumipineko.

1. 2 add (phasto).

» 9 9 9» 18 for Lumthe read Lumche.

ih LA 1, 29 add foot note.f See note at p. 408. Dong = arrive here.

Dong la arrive there. S6-yti = come down and Yula = go down.

12 Errata.

Page 417 2nd col. 1. 17 from bottom add foot note.f In composition 14 only is

used, as Bekla, Lokla, Yula, &c.

4 418 Ist col. 1. 7 dele, tr.

SEE SO Ue Oo Increase in length, n. read Increase thyself in length

or be lengthened.

POG hele Ae acide,

» >» 2nd ,, 1.17 forvik ye ko read vik yekko, and add foot note. §Yekko, ruk-

ko, chokko, &c. are the true forms as proved by the reflex, causal &c. of each, and

it is important to give them correctly in the imperative because the conju-

gation depends thereon, though in speech these imperatives avoid the caco-

phonous iteration of consonants (yek- ko, ruk-ko) by merging the first or

radical one in an abrupt accent ye’ ko, ru’ ko.

Ay » 9» . dl & 38 same note.

35 419 » » 1. 2&10 for Peshto read Pesto.

jot os. SeiGadd Tu pingko;

obs 2) ye Sad Sé pingko:

$° agp U1 19vadd)Takko,

» » 9 9» L 21 for késsung read késung.

bs Ab gs: tle 220" Vothowead yelleo:

» 420 1st col. 1. 7 for weight read weigh.

» 99): 3 for Thengko read Phengko.

» 9 9 9 & 7 for Pwko, puksang, read Po’ko pukko, puksang.

» 1.10 add or Tha puk’.

ai)! “Gs Ody gg: 1 20 after Pikondd Pisung; Piiche, Pato.

» » 9 9 1. 25 (beat) for topsung read (beat) toppo topsung.

9» 9 oy CL 27 after chu’ko add chukko.

» 9 «0p: Le 29. for chyassung read chyasung.

», 1. 44 add Sasche, Sassung.

» 9 9» 9». b 48 for chité read chito, chisung, chiche.

1. 55 add to chi’po chippo.

a » » 2 from bottom for phato read phasto and to chho’po add

choppo.

421 1st col. 1.37 & 38 add See p. 424,

2nd ,, 1 9 for vekphato read vekphasto.

1, 16 add Rupingko.

1, 35 add Ji.

1, 36 add Jito. Jisung. Jinche.

> > 6 yy 88 for hhalang-no-dum, read chhalang-né-dum,*

5 422 4, 1.iSraddi yekko:

9» 3 ~p:S Le: LO for Nengle read Nengla.

1, 12 add Ningche.

], 13 add Ningsung.

1, 14 add Nengpingko.

1, 12 from bottom add to Blento foot note {1 is a constant ad

libitum i in fix after initial b.

Page 423 ,, ,, 1. 23 add foot notet Wash body = bathe is rip’che.

by » 1. 27 add (phasto).

Page 424 2nd col. 1. 4 after Tophto add Tosto.

5 9» 9 | 12 for Dawang Bocho, posung or posung read-Dawang or

Bochho, posung or pasung.

a 1.13 for Dawang, Bochho, pauche read Dawang or Bochho

yancne,

i » » 9» L 19 for Na’to, nassung, nasche read Nasto, nassung nasche.

» 9» 9 9» Le 85 after Hon. (khon) add Hontaduim.

» 9» 9» 9 + 388. for phato read phasto.

5 .. 2 from bottom add Khokta thumto.

Page 425 2nd col. 1. 3 add to Lok, foot note.* Bek and Lok alone express the

meanings, and the lack of empty words in this tongue causes it ag often as pos-

33 39

Errata. ta

sible to dispense with adverbial! forms of speech thus, for come in it uses enter

(bek) and for come out issue (lok) or appear.

Page 426 Ist col. 1. 38, for Behind the house read Behind, in back of the house.

» » 2nd col. 1. 20 for Haha panachhe pochhe, Duals read Haha pannachhe

vel ponchhe, Duals.

» 9» » 1. 27 for (no Dat. or ace. sign.) read Kem (no Dat or ace. sign).

Page 429 for Comparative Vocabulary of the Languages of the broken Tribes of

Nepal read Grammar of the Vayu Language.

» » 117 for nargung read nayung.

» 430 1. 5 for Gonargung read Gonayung.

» 435]. 8 for grammar read declension.

», 441 dele note.

» 442 1. 3 from bottom for in comparison read which in composition only, is.

» » add note to Pl. Im. Mood. The singular, dual and plural here refer as

usual, to the agents. Those which follow refer to the objects the combination

of which with the agents in the conjugation of verbs (transitive) constitutes

the peculiarity of this language, as of the following wherein it is more fully

carried out.

Now turn to the passive voice and you will see the positions of these personal

endings reversed, the starting point being the citation of the objects or patients

whence the verb becomes passive, so far as that voice can be said to exist. The

inversion, however, though usual is not quite indispensable. See remarks in se-

quel. Passivity is denoted by the object : but so also is transitiveness ; and hence

the many forms common to both voices. They are denoted by a crass + prefixed.

Page 445 after line 22 add of the object* and foot note. See note at page 442.

Page 449 after negative mood add of indicative singular.

Page 450 after lines 25 and 34 add of the object* and foot note. “See remark

at p. 126.

Page 451 1, 2 from bottom for Sista né-dum read Sista ee

» 452 1. 3 for dam read dum.

» 1. 18 dele kha.

Special forms at pp. 452 and 457 to be inserted at the end of the ordinary conju-

gation, or after “ Causals” of sequel.

Page 453 last line add top-po.

», 405 after line 29 add of the object.

», 457 at top add Indicative present.

» 9» 1. 2. for sheer neuters (see phi) read pages 451, 452.

9» »5 1. 3 from bottom for prior note at Sishto read prior verb, pp. 451, 452.

and add after Vayu active and passive.

Page 464 1. 3 add foot note. *Observe that these are singular, dual and plural

of the object, as noted elsewhere.

», 465 Special forms to be inserted after continuative Mood in p. 465.

» 467 add to line 4 from the bottom (potius Phok),

» 468 1. 5 add (phokko).

», 481 1. 11 for equal fusion in both cases read equal degree of fusion in regard

to both noun and verb.

» » 1. 27 for 3rd read 3.

e's 30—36 for compare &e. &. down to strike read

dunt

+ a-pa, my teub-t, I

A thy father. {text i, thou fst

a-po, his teub-a, he

Wherewith compare

Sontal and Kuswar.

apu-ing dal-eng, aing. Baba-im, Thatha-im-ik-an,

apa-m dal-me, am. Baba-ir. Thatha-ir-ik-an.

apa-t dal-e, ai. Baba-ik. Thatha-ik-an,

14 Errata.

Page 484 1. 23 add foot note. { Take notice that this sample of the language

is also meant to exhibit the status and condition of the people as viewed by

themselves.

» 95 J. 24 for Pate read Pachya.

Page 486 for Banina VOCABULARY read GRAMMATICAL ANALYSIS OF THE

BAWING DIALECT OF THE KiRantrI LANGUAGE.

» » 2nd col. 1. 16 add foot note. + So from Koja = belly is formed kojacha

= glutton ; and from Khojim = house, Khojimcha = householder.

Page 488 1st col. 1. 7 and 35 add foot note. Formed respectively from kholi =

leg and gi=arm. ‘The suffix blem is a segregative indicative of the clsss of

flat things.

» 93 2nd col. 1. 29 for Ripaché read Ruipacho grokso.

» 3099 9: 80 for Grokso read Ruipachéme.

9» 95. Last line read U the first person — wa of the noun.

»,5 489 Ist col. 1. 11 add Lowland = Dhipté.

»» 9) 2nd col. 1. 23 add apobing.

43) SOS) W S4edele:Gaa:

ay sg was. cay. odo delesGaiatamu:

» » 9 9» 1.29 add note {See note at urine.

», 490 last line add literally, cane its juice.

95 491 Ist col. 1. 5 for Muryuacharniku read Muryeuacharniku.

» »» 16 add note § Muryeu 4 charnika, mankind, its urine. Songara a

charnika, goat kind, its urine, the common form of the genitive. See “ ordure.’

Page 492 1st col. 1. 17 for bokab read bokba.

» 99 99 9 J 2 from bottom for both are senses read both senses.

» 495 ,, ,, 1.3 from bottom add after wala, of Urdu.

» 99 99 99 L 2 from bottom for Gigimmo read Gigimmé,

Page 497 2nd col. 1. 24 for Kwong asim one score = Kwong and one read Kwong

asim Kwong = one score and one.

Page 500 2nd col. 1. 4 add excl.

bat abs af 1. 5 add incl,

5 95 Lst col. 1. 27 add foot note. Observe the gf, to be born, becomes by

hardening ki, to beget. But ki also means, cause to be born and so faris a

causal though the ordinary causal is formed by pato. Hence if we add pato

to the transitive ki we have a double causal. This is common to all the verbs

of the sort and is a Dravidian trait.

» » 1. 5 from the bottom for woncho read wonche.

», OOL Ist col. 1. 3 for Thiyato read Thipato.

3, 512 Ist col. 1. 2, 3 and 4 for Thyangso read &c. &c. Phyangso.

> 515 1st col. 1, 42 add foot note after Khyima gware. Khyim a-gwaré, liter-

ally, house, its interior in. This use of the conjunct pronominal sign in lieu of a

genitive (house its inside) and of a noun in the locative case, in lieu of an

adverb or preposition, are both normal and common to this and the foregone

language.

Page 518 2nd col. 1. 37 for riskso read Namrikcho.

», 519 2nd cel. 1. 20 for Newar dau khwag no, vead Newar dau khwog no.

Game tery

* Hp Pa drtet 9 eo)

Oe aes s yl

‘

RT Lt te tae ee tee ed te

eae eit

eon Ns 2 wf ad

oon & ee «

aes prea yet ted Pe oa

ake 4

Me 97m

eat: be e- oo ~ —=-

bk wet - is nd

as i a hots beer howe

saihge ‘anure P ry $b bean tohet

~t>0~6~ e:

<2: @

ee ky t= 4-year

the ee

otal

Yistece

out

faxes

order h ee.

bd Ch adaachaadt doe

- ane

mare

eer ecee

ER HSIE!

te tr

Rint

bbe

he ~~

Hae = . (" iw mt =r

+ Ps three ~

SLB pusel

ee ta ‘ 0 = fe :

sGeus . seebats . vs

SA pees Bre ath totale tot ureee

Abate ae

-* poe es

=e o=

wel

2-2

7% = oe

Pedr wayne

+4 re:

Ciera

ci, Bees wae w-a~e~

hats 5 nrectincetey

sefreptjotngeitmorv: y mstcrraseses overtse ts

Bio cbcieiip smceceticitererte Bits

waited),

rvs wl a tf

ahd

Z 2

Pid ry eal ee

oe te hem Rie Ce

is eth Peet

Pet tty et re

* as Se a Save

=e bath p ad fat

ie « Be by iy

©: pha dye * 1

9. 9-0 soit

Ltt 2 i= 8 . tof

L Payer Pi a-5.¢

o5* ry 5 ee wt

Se on

pth tb 8 we

i= Bem @e wre.

‘Sim 5?

&.b-68 bre thee.

see 4 ” e

Ce = = +— RH oe ow Seti ere AAR

- =@~ Me : : :

7 = ‘e- Pace tr eee

Sore eb aa ee

oe? Loh te rey - bed

bad Ps ey

-4 4

M4 Pt

oh g ie + it ; - as

+4 ‘ «Pr bo tee erhn we bh he

stan) : ot ; v iM A 143 SR Tota evtece-

® +4 p p> ae Ge ele ee Ge

e.>-8 8 *

Pa ea

Pe. Sa ee oe

ee ae

Py)

Ati

sas

* e hs

"I ms

Sh FR 2

=7e= rv

yrs

Sea

p= b= A ;

ep teiatens

apart $3802, 2:35 .

’

* " 0 : 2 (ee

; J : o°UP 6 Oss

. £59

Imp 34, FREa 244